J
Sg 640” 6.

=
-t: 73!

.
,
’
‘
’
’
4
}

ise toeceor .

4
ve!

mm ee eee es eee

one

+ «1%

——_-

_——
.

~~

-

“—=— ~~ wwe eee eS ee

or
*
| 7
¢¢ >
Poe
#- 4
‘ew 6
4
6:
“
a
a
€- +
7,
*
ag
%
4

ea
:

ae
a

.
ahh tle 3”

"+

*
*
om

.
*,
“een i” @

~
*

ob
e

oe

BH

be be

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

—QG-—

WOE. ENE.
PART II. (NATURAL HisToRY, &c.)

(Nos. I. to V.—1887.)

EDITED BY

JHE NaTURAL ftisTORY PECRETARY.

~~. sense 00 eee eee sc 0—_ Oo ees

‘¢Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of science
in different parts of Asza will commit their observations to writing, and send them to
the Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish, if such communications shall be long
intermitted ; and it will die away, if they shall entirely cease.” SIR WM. JONES.

PDOs ess ee eee OOO eer

CALCUTTA: AO!

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

§
KX PRINTED BY G. H. ROUSE, AT THE BAPTIST MISSION PRESS, -

ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREBT. ut

1888, RS

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.

—@—

Atkinson, HE. T.;—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota: Heteroptera
MM oa thst id 2 dala bs chime cleaned disse nae cee hvsea tes nem es mans
——— ;—Notes on Indian Rhynchota : snibinhii
NNR 5 taceicarsantiin ss k cals saoimctule e's Sous namo ir mamak ba oa lee es Seas
Barctay, A.;—A apes pe of the Peadinns occurring in the
Becbhairhoad : Simla (Western Himalaya). (Plates XII.—
Buanvorn, ars BR ate He Dei of adios Bacaite on the
Faiegall.. (WV ith. a Wood-cnt),.- sos rancssvesnpsssccsesvsccesepneeses
Carpenter, AtrreD ;—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s tees
Marine Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED
Carpenter, BR. N., Commanding. No. 7. The Mean Tempera-
twre of the Deep Waters of the Bay of Bengal. (Plate X.),...
Exuson, Samuet R. ;—On the changes observed in the Density of the
Surface Sea-water, coincident with, and due to Aerial Distur-
bances, and consequent Alteration of Baric Pressure over adja-
cent Sea Areas: and onthe Usefulness of a more exact measure-
ment of the Specific Gravity of Sea-water: more specially with
Reference to the Waters near and about the Hooghly River
Pilot Station. (Diagram—Plate IX.), wicscerccccscescveccesse sas
Footr, R. Bruce ;—Notes on some recent Neolithic and Palcoli-
thic Finds in South India. (With a Map—Plate XI.), ......
Gitts, G. M. ;—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indian Marine
Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CARPENTER,
R. N., Commanding. No. 6. On Six new Amphipods from
the Bay of Bengal. (Plates ITT.—VIIL.),........cccecsccscsecces
Jones, E. J.;—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indian Marine
Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CARPENTER,
&. N., Commanding. No. 5. On some Nodular Stones obtained
by trawling off Colombo in 675 Fathoms of Water. (Plate II),
Kine, Grorce ;—A second series of New Species of Ficus from
New Guined,... 1 cee Pansantie ajar Sinaia Saleen
ON some 5 Mets ree of Pied Taain Sumatra, .
;—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perse

Page
22

145

300

230

15

259

212

209

61
65
89

iv List of Contributors.

Movxnorapnyay, AsutosH ;—On the Differential rea a of a
Trajectory. (With a Wo0d-cut), ....:..ccccresovavvcresceceravecan ses
—— —— ;—On ee Differ nite “aviation to

all Conics,.... a cree , et ot
——_——_—___— ae Maibiro on ; Plone Bait yi Gamma
(With three Wood-cuts), .........
Scutty, J.;—On the Mammals and Bide eee an ‘Capa
C. E. Yats, C.S.1., of the Afghan Boundary Commission,......
— ;—On the Effects produced by Small Quantities of Bts-
muth on the Ductility of Silver,. Piven psnWeeaeasete estes
;—On the Chiroptera of ees, A is\siusiniteliclestslehi-teslaleniae ats
Smon, H. ;—H’ tude sur les Arachnides de 1 Aste méridionale faisant
partie des collections de V Indian Musewm (Calcutta), .......s000
— ;—LH’ tude sur les Arachnides del Asie méridionale faisant
partie des collections deV Indian Musewm (Calcutta), .......00008
Woop-Mason, J. ;—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indian
Marine Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED
CarPENntTER, f., N. Commanding. No. 4. Description of a new
Species of Crustacea belonging to the pie aead Family
Hammiag.’ Chlnte Dy). .02. sistas cesssvere nes
;—Natural History Noise From H. Mw s tale
Marine Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED
Carpentrer, &. N., Commanding. No. 8. Description of a new
Species of the Brachyurous Genus Lyreidus from the Depths
of the Andaman Sed, sessreeceerere

Peeeeeesevese are ake eos ateateser one 188

eae eee eee

Page
116
134
288

68

121
233

101

282

206

376

Dates of issue of the different numbers of the Journal,
Part I7,-1887.

No. I.—Containing pp. 1—120, with Plate IX, was issued on July
23rd, 1887.

No. II.—Containing pp. 121—232, with Plates I, II, III, IV, V, VI,
VII, & VIII, was issued on November 2nd, 1887.

No. III.—Containing pp. 233—349, with Plates X & XI, was issued on
January 30th, 1888.

No. IV.—Containing pp. 349—376, with Plates XII, XIII, XIV, & XV,
was issued on March 18th, 1888.

No. V.—Containing Title-page, Index, &c., to the Volume.

LIST OF PLATES.

I. Lyreidus channert.
II. Barium nodules from 675 fathoms off Colombo.
III. Phronima bucephala and Phronimella hippocephala.
IV. Rhabdosoma investigatoris.
V. Amphipronoé longicornuta.
VI. Lestrigonus bengalensis.
VII. ” ”
VIII. LHurystheus hirsutus.
IX. Diagram for Corrections for Temperature of Fresh Water.
X. Chart shewing Mean Temperature of the Deep Waters of the
Bay of Bengal.
XI. Map of South India shewing the chief localities at which Neolli-
thic and Paleolithic Remains have been found.

RET.
XIII. { Uredines occurring in the Neighbourhood of Simla (Western
XIV. Himalaya).

i n

“f), "a iy ee
e e ’ a

California Academy of Sciences

Presented a eee

ae

April ra ; 1908.

’ ¥ 7 »
a ft
. tor «p< eiezus f
} 7 _ ik) I
* 2 en Oe ary afi
Pf ie He , ; iii
-
—_ — ee
{
if !
|
é
«

ry : iV te
.
+ ° his es | i
ds : ; f f Fg =~ - :
Seti A s* Tr. & ul LO) ppc) oth vi ERD am, hey ny
toe © . ‘% P ° 7 o e c ‘
Fe OL OUR ee, ab: Gy Deo een

din, Sts te . SP,
eT oh 4s. hh SAMOS. a) i «at ‘ veg ay ;

‘ 4s,
fat on i ii) oy [ Ot Geni th Rtee ye :

&

ERRATA.

Page 74, line 27, for m1 ead my

Po Nino 28, Ye ceed a

» line 29, for m8 ead ms:

as

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

—@—

Part II1.—NATURAL SCIENCE.

No. I.—1887.

T—On the Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall—By Henry
F. Buanrorp, F. R. S., Meteorological Reporter to the Government of
India.

[Received Jan. 20th ;—Read Feb. 2nd, 1887. ]
(With a Woodcut.)

The following paper is an extract from the yet unpublished manu-
script of the second part of a paper on the Rainfall of India; the first
part of which has already been issued as an official publication in the
Indian Meteorological Memoirs. In consideration of the great economic
importance of the subject treated of, and also with a view to encourage
and assist further enquiries, whenever favourable opportunities may
offer, it has seemed desirable to publish this discussion in an independent
form, and in anticipation of its appearance in the Indian Meteorological
Memoirs; where it will form but a small and subordinate part of a
memoir dealing with a subject of much wider range.

In an instructive paper originally communicated to Petermann’s
Mittesilungen, and subsequently published in translation in the Quarterly
Journal of the Royal Meteorological Society, M. Woeikoff appeals em-
phatically to the evidence afforded by the Indian rainfall registers, in
support of his contention that the action of forests is to increase the
rainfall of a country. His appeal is directed chiefly to the contrast
afforded by the Assam rainfall with that of the Gangetic valley plain,
in about the same latitude and the same distance from the sea; and he

] 5

2 H.F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

apparently attributes the great difference displayed by these two pro-
vinces, wholly or mainly, to the fact that, while the former is extensively
covered with forest, the latter, up to the Terai, is a broad sheet of field
cultivation.

In this view I am unable to coincide. Without denying or even
questioning the effect of forests as one element of the result, the con-
clusion thus formulated seems to me far too sweeping. M. Woeikoff
considers, and I think rightly, the action of forests in enhancing the
rainfall to be twofold. Firstly, they help to store water, by protecting
the soil, and to keep up a constant evaporation ; and secondly, by check-
ing and obstructing the movement of the wind, they prevent the evapo-
rated vapour being carried away, and tend to produce that calm state
of the atmosphere that is favourable to ascending currents and local
precipitation. But swamps, such as occupy large tracts of the Assam
valley, and the numerous broad river channels that intersect it, must
contribute a not unimportant quota to the vapour constituent of the
local atmosphere ; and the comparative stagnation of the air in the Assam
valleys and the exclusion of those dry westerly winds which play so im-
portant a part in the meteorology of the Gangetic plain are certainly
due, in far larger measure, to the fencing in of the Assam valley by the
Patkoi, Naga, Khasi, and Garo hills, and, as regards Upper Assam, to the
interception of westerly currents by the mid-valley obstruction of the
Mekhir hills, than to any retardation of wind movement that can be
effected by the forests. Furthermore, the action of the surrounding
hills in setting up a diurnal convection of the humid-atmosphere, and
its consequent dynamic cooling and precipitation, an action which also
takes place in the much less humid hill tracts of the peninsula, is a very
important item in the causes which contribute to produce the heavy
spring rainfall of Assam ; a precipitation not very greatly inferior to that
of the summer monsoon. The other or passive effect of hills in enhan-
cing rainfall, namely, the forced ascent of horizontal air currents, is less
important in Upper Assam (the tract more particularly referred to by
M. Woeikoff), although exhibited by the southern face of the Khasi
hills, overlooking Sylhet, in a degree without parallel elsewhere in the
world. But to the other causes above specified must certainly be attri-
buted by far the larger part of that prevailing high humidity and copious
rainfall which foster the exuberant vegetation of the province; render-
ing it, in the rich variety of its flora and its prolific insect life, compar-
able with the teeming productiveness of the Malay region.

The difficulty so conspicuously illustrated in the foregoing example,
namely, of disentangling the combined effects of a number of causes all
favourable to increased rainfall or the reverse, is one which renders it

1887.] H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. 3

almost hopeless to seek for decisive evidence of the influence of forests
by any comparison of the rainfall of different provinces, or of areas suffi-
ciently large to display the contrasted effects in a striking and convin-
cing manner. The best and perhaps only satisfactory kind of evidence,
were it obtainable, would be the comparison of the rainfall of one and
the same tract (one of at least some hundreds of square miles in ex-
tent) for many years, first while covered with forest, and again for
many years after clearing. It is, however, not until a tract of virgin
forest has been brought under the destructive operation of civilizing
agencies, that, as a general rule, any attempt is made to record its rain-
fall ; and when, therefore, the conditions necessary to obtain one term of
the comparison are rapidly disappearing. The reversal of this order of
things, the conversion of bare or at least partially wasted tracts into
protected forest, is one, however, of which India already furnishes some
examples, and with the progress of forest protection may yet furnish
more ; and if due advantage be taken of these as they present themselves,
it may yet be possible to obtain rainfall data which may afford valuable
and indeed practically onclusive evidence on the point in question,
even if not fulfilling in all respects the rigorous conditions of the logical
method of differences.

One instance of the kind, on a scale large enough for all reasonable
demand, has lately been brought to my notice by Mr. Ribbentrop, and
has been quoted in my Report on the Administration of the Meteorolo-
gical Department in 1885-86; and despite some shortcomings in the
due verification of the data it furnishes, shortcomings which it is now
impossible to make good, it will probably, in the course of some years,
as nearly fulfil the conditions of a test case as we are likely to attain to
in an experiment of such magnitude. In some respects, indeed, the
circumstances of this case are unusually favourable. The vicissitudes —
of the rainfall of the Central Provinces are smaller, proportionally, than
those of any other province of an equally moderate average, and of the
22 stations, the rainfall registers of which will be brought in evidence,
not less than 10 are regular meteorological observatories, working under
the Meteorological Department of the Government of India.

The region referred to in the Ist part of my Memoir on the Rainfall
of India as the Central Provinces south, has been described as a hilly
and jungle clad country, including some extensive fertile plains, especially
that which surrounds Raipur. The northern portion consists of the
range of broken tablelands and hills here spoken of as the Satpuras,
and these are largely clothed with forest. According to the most recent
report of the Officiating Inspector General of Forests, the area of forest
in the Central Provinces is estimated at 54,600 square miles, of which

4 H.F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

about nine-tenths are either in or to the south of the Satpura range.
The area of the Central Provinces south is about 61,000 square miles,
Hence about five-sixths of the whole are under forest. Now, prior
to the year 1875, these forests were systematically wasted by the
destructive method of cultivation practised by the hill tribes of Gond-
wana, as of other wild tracts in India and Burma. It is known under
various local names, such as Kumri, or in the Central Provinces déhya
cultivation, and is thus described by Dr. Brandis: ‘‘ A few acres of
forest are felled one year, the wood is burnt and acrop of grain raised
on the clearing; the next year this is abandoned, a fresh piece of forest
is felled elsewhere, a crop is raised, and it too is abandoned in its turn;
and so on, a fresh clearing being made every year.”’

It will be readily understood how under such a system, in the
course of some years, extensive forests may be devastated, even by a
_ sparse hill population of nomad habits. And accordingly, in the intro-
duction of the Central Provinces Gazetteer, published in 1870, Mr. C.
Grant speaks of the state of the forests in the following terms: “‘ The
tree forests of the Central Provinces have, however, been so much ex-
hausted, mainly owing to the destructive dahya system of cultivation
practised by the hill tribes, that, except in one or two localities, the
labours of the Forest Officers will, for many years, be limited to guard-
ing against further damage, and thus allowing the forests to recover
themselves by rest. By far the greater part of the uncultivated lands
belonging to Government are stony wastes, incapable of producing a
strong straight growth of timber.”

In 1875,* the suppression of déhya cultivation was taken systemati-
cally in hand, and in the course of a few years, with such success, that
Mr. Ribbentrop writes in 1886, “ My attention was directed during a
recent visit to the Central Provinces, to the extensive growth of young
forests in areas formerly under Aumri cultivation. Ten or fifteen years
ago, such temporary cultivation was practised throughout the country,
and thousands of square miles were thereby laid barren year after year.
Since then, this method of cultivation was stopped, and though a great
part of the area affected was subject to annual fires, a more or less dense
forest growth has sprung up. I concluded that this must have had an
influence on the rainfall, sufficiently appreciable to be gauged by meteo-

* I understand from Mr. CG: E. Elliott who worked as Settlement Officer in the
Central Provinces prior to 1875, that endeavours were then in progress to check
ddhya cultivation, so that the statement in the text which I make on the authority
of Mr. Ribbentrop must not be taken as rigorously exclusive. The interpretation
of the evidence here adduced will not, however be appreciably affected by this
correction,

1887.] H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. 5

rological records. The results gathered from such records are beyond
expectation and shew that, with the exception of stations situated in the
cultivated valley of the Nerbudda, a steady increase of rainfall has taken
place during the last ten years, and, as might be expected, especially
during the last period of five years.” .

In dealing with the evidence of the rainfall registers, I shall, in the
first place, compare the averages-of the 9 or in some cases 10 or 11 years
ending with 1875 (the year in which the suppression of the dahya
cultivation is stated to have been taken in hand) with those of the ten
subsequent years, 1876—1885; and this I shall do separately for the
stations within the area immediately affected by the forest preservation
and for those at a greater or less distance therefrom. These latter are
Saugor and Damoh, the forests near which have not been frequented by
dahya cultivators, or which are surrounded by native states in which no
change of system has been attempted, Jubbulpore, Narsinghpur, Ho-
shangabad, and Khandwa in the fertile and highly cultivated valley of
the Nerbudda, and where the tendency of late years has been towards
an extension of permanent cultivation, and Raipur in the centre of the
great wheat-growing district of Chattisgarh.

Comparison of the Average Rainfall of 9 to 11 years of Déhya Cultiva-
tion with that of 10 years of Protected Forests.

A, In affected areas.
Forests ; Forests I
unprotected. | protected. | “Crease.
STATIONS, !
Inches: Inches
Period. | Rain- ; Period. |} Rain- | Inches.
fall. } fall.
Badnur 5 os ... | 1867-75 | 39°83 | 1876-85 | 47°83 | + 8:00
Chhindwara : YS ... | 1865-75 | 41°43 | 1876-85 | 48°48 | + 7:05
Seoni mae ... | 1865-75 | 52°07 | 1876-85 | 54°76 | + 2°69
Mandla ; sah ... | 1867-75 | 53°58 | 1876-85 | 56°32 | + 2°74
Burha ; ie ... | 1867-75 | 64°51 | 1876-85 | 71°65 | + 7:14
Bilaspur : vee ... | 1865-75 | 41°85 | 1876-85 | 54°81 | +1296
Sambalpur wa ase ... | 1867-75 | 54°80 | 1876-85 | 67°93 | +1313
Dhamtari ; a ... | 1867-75 | 48°83 ' 1876-85 | 46°90 | — 1:93
Bhandara a ... | 1867-75) 49°90 | 1876-85 | 57°79 | + 7°89
Nagpur re, : ... | 1866-75 | 41°54 | 1876-85 | 51°85 | +10°31
Wardha os - ... | 1866-75 | 36°10 | 1876-85 ; 46°63 | +10°53
Brahmapuri es ... | 1867-75 | 53°95 | 1876-85 | 57°48 | + 3°53
Chanda “f “a ... | 1866-75 | 47:14 | 1876-85 | 54°29 | + 7:15
Sironcha os ; vw ) 1867-75 | 44°17 gene 48°38 | + 4°21
| Mean | +

6 H. F. Blanford—Injluence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

B. In unaffected areas.

Saugor Sa Soc ... | 1866-75 | 55°97 | 1876-85 | 40°62 { —15-35
Damoh vee eee ... | 1867-75 | 54°76 | 1876-85 | 46°82 | — 7:94
Jubbulpore eee vee ... | 1866-75 | 60°66 | 1876-85 | 56:28 | — 4:38
Narsinghpur a ... | 1866-75 | 55°46 | 1876-85 | 50:40 | — 5-06
Hoshangabad__... oe .-. | 1866-75 | 47-08 | 1876-85 | 57°73 | +10°65
Khandwa eee one .. | 1867-75 | 34°74 ) 1876-85 | 33°32 |! — 1:42
Raipur eee ees .. | 1866-75 | 51°59 | 1876-85 | 54°47 | + 2-92

| Mean | — 2°94

The contrast, thus shewn, is sufficiently striking; but taken as
they stand, it can hardly be said that the figures do more than afford a
certain presumption in favour of the view that the difference shewn by
the two series of stations is to be attributed to the preservation of the
forests. In the first place, as I shall shew elsewhere, the probable error
of a ten years’ rainfall average of a station in the Central Provinces is
about 5 per cent., and this may be either in excess or defect. In the
extreme case of the errors being in opposite directions in the two decen-
nial periods compared, the greater part of the apparent increase of list
A would vanish. And, in the second place, the majority of the stations
in the second list lie to the north of the Satpura range, those of the first
list either on the range itself or to the south of it; and, as this range
about coincides with the southern margin of the tract commonly followed
by the cyclonic storms of the summer monsoon, the distribution of the
rainfall might be much affected by the fact of a series of such storms
following a more southerly or more northerly path, or by the western
branch of the monsoon, which brings nearly the whole rainfall to the
region south of the Nerbudda valley, being in several years, relative-
ly to its normal average, stronger and more rainy than the eastern
branch, which contributes to the rainfall north of that river.

But there is another way of dealing with the facts which will not
be open to such objection. Any effect really due to forest protection
must necessarily have been progressive. Some few years were passed
in inducing the jungle tribes to take to settled cultivation; again, the
reproduction of the forest growth on the tracts formerly denuded is a
process requiring many years for its accomplishment; and, finally, the
protection of the forests from destruction by annual fires in the dry
season has been steadily extended year by year. If, then, it should
appear, on comparing the rainfall of the affected tract in successive
years, that the increase has been steadily progressive and on the whole
in a degree commensurate with the average difference of the two decen-
nial periods above compared, the probability of such increase having
been brought about by the protection of the forests will be enormously
enhanced.

1887.] H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. 7

The data for this comparison are afforded by the following table
which exhibits, in the second column, the mean rainfall of the 14 stations,
enumerated in the A list of the previous table, in each year from
1867 to 1885. The third column gives what may be termed progres-
Sive averages. Hach average is that of 5 years, obtained by the formula,

at46b+6c+4d+e
, A et ear eae

wherein a, b, c, d, e, represent the mean rainfall in any five conce-
cutive years and c, the progressive average for the third year of the series.
As a standard of comparison, I give, in the fourth column, the average
rainfall of the whole Indian area (with the omission of unrepresented
tracts). The average rainfall is taken at 42 inches. Lastly, the fifth
column shews the progressive averages of the rainfall of India computed
from column four.

Comparative Table of the Mean Annual Rainfall of the Forest Region in
the Central Provinces and of India from 1867 to 1885.

Central Provinces. India.
Year. Condition. Annual |Progressive} Annual Progressive
mean average. mean. average.
Inches. Inches. Inches. Inches.
1867 | 55:08 sipptilbe 44:8 40°2
68 if ENGL us Sealer Se 35°4 40°3
69 B 47°97 45°28 42:4, 41-0
"0 ‘a 50°42 47°71 43°5 42°6
val es 45°52 48°45 42°9 43°0
"3 & 53°31 47°47 44°3 41:7
r3 qi 39°18 47-02 37°5 42:2
4, sa 50°48 48°85 46'6 424
"5 56°60 50°15 44:4, 42°4,
"6 42°32 49°58 37°5 40'5
"7 % 52°50 50°40 37°7 41:1
"8 52°47 52°60 48°3 43°3
"9 55°67 53°85 43°7 43°5
80 3 51°83 54:50 40°4 424,
81 = 57°90 65°31 42:1 424,
82 a. 54°22 56°52 44:6 43-0
83 iS) 57°73 58°57 41‘9 43°1
84, Pa 64°63 Sh a Ein ase pig ‘
85 | 57°43 eee eee 43°1 eee ree

8 H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

The variations exhibited in this table are represented graphically
in the following figure.

Gueeccseegele
coisa Eta Buen al ae ES
: Pek ed

AN
EprLL Ae

| A AG A (5a Se SASSER

5° + le, [|

RV

aes ee ao do Progr. av.

Now the third column of this table shews, not only that the in-
creased rainfall of the protected forest region has been on the whole
progressive since 1876 (the year after protection was systematically
enforced), but that its progression has been commensurate with the
increase of the decennial average shewn in the previous table; a very
important point. As compared with the general average of the pe-
riod antecedent to 1875, a rainfall of 48 inches, in integral figures,
had risen to 58 inches in 1883, an increase of more than 20 per cent.
Whether this increase will be sustained at its full amount by the results
of future years is, however, very questionable. The rainfall of 1884 was
extraordinarily high, and whereas, as may be observed in the graphic
representation of these changes, the rainfall of the Central Provinces
rises and falls pari passu with that of the whole of Iudia in a somewhat
remarkable degree (having regard to the comparative smallness of
its area), the pregressive average rainfall of India as a whole for 1883
was nearly 3 per cent. above the general average between 1867 and 1875.
But after making all due allowances, in so far as any legitimate con-
clusion can be drawn from the experience of the last ten years, it would
seem that, owing to some local cause, the mean rainfall of the afforested
region of the Central Provinces here considered, an area of nearly

1887.] H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. 9

50,000 square miles, has been increased in a very remarkable degree,
and I am unable to assign any other probable cause for this than that of
the protection and consequent restoration of the formerly wasted forests.

The evidence thus afforded in favour of the influence of forests on
rainfall appears to me to be of considerable weight and importance, in
virtue both of the magnitude of the area yielding it and of the apparent
distinctness of the result. With one exception and one only, it fulfils
all the conditions of a rigorous test case. The area is one and the same ;
the history of the changes to which it has been subject are definitely
and accurately known; and, as will be shewn elsewhere, the rainfall
registers, if but few in proportion to the area, are sufficient to afford a
datum the probable error of which is small in comparison with the mag-
nitude of the effect shewn. The only remaining points to which excep-
tion may conceivably be taken are the trustworthiness of the records
used, and the sufficiency of the periods compared to yield valid averages.

On the first of these points, I can add but little to what has been
already written in the introduction of Vol. III, Part I, of the Indian
Meteorological Memoirs. Speaking from recollection (for I have been
unable to obtain the desired verification of the fact from official records),
I believe that new rain-gauges, of Glaisher’s pattern, from one of the
principal London makers, were furnished to all the stations the registers
of which are here dealt with, about the year 1867, at all events before
1870, that is to say, at or near the beginning of the period for which the
registers are complete, and there are therefore no grounds for suspecting
that the increase of the registered rainfall during the last ten years has
been influenced by a change in the instruments used. And this is the
most important consideration. With respect to the registering agency,
as far as I have information, it has been the same throughout. Dr. S.C.
Townshend, who was Sanitary Commissioner of the Central Provinces,
and who in 1868 established the observatories, which, in 1875, were
incorporated in the Imperial system, took much personal interest in
all the meteorological work of the province, and there is no doubt that
his action was attended with beneficial results. But this change, like
that of the instruments, dates from the beginning of the period now under
consideration ; at all events from 7 or 8 years anterior to 1875.

On the second point, namely, the sufficiency of the periods compared
to yield valid averages, I have ascertained that a ten years’ register of
the Central Provinces’ stations, Jubbulpore and Nagpur, has a probable
error of 5 per cent., namely, in the case of Jubbulpore of 2°7 inches, in
that of Nagpur of 2:2 inches, and these may be taken as fairly illustrative
examples of the whole province. These, however, are the probable errors
of individual stations, and, as will be further demonstrated elsewhere, the

2

10 H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

mean rainfall of a whole province is much less variable than that of a
single station. For, if we take the average of either the first ten years
or the last ten years of the figures in the third column of the table,
on page 7, we have an average of 1867—1876, 47°45 ins. probable
error + 1:56; average of 1876—1885, 54°67 ins. probable error + 1°22,
which is but little more than half the probable error of either Jubbul-
pore or Nagpur for an equal period. This is small in comparison with
the difference of the two averages, namely, 7°22 inches. Assuming the
extreme case, that the first average is 1°56 inches below the real mean
and the second 1°22 inches about it, these differences being both due to
fortuitous and not steadily progressive causes, there would still remain
444, inches of increase unaccounted for. This is perhaps not such as to
warrant conviction that the average rainfall of the Central Provinces
south of the Nerbudda has really increased by that amount; still less
~ does it warrant the positive assertion that such increase, assumed as
real, is due to the preservation of the forests; but at least, in so far as
any inference is admissible from such data, the evidence seems to afford
much support to that view.

Direct observations of a character similar to those of Prof. Ebermeyer
in Bavaria, namely, comparative measurements of the rainfall at pairs
of stations near the margin of forests, the one within, the other without
the forest, have been carried on in Dehra Din and Ajmere, during the
last year or two, by officers of the Forest Department. Some of the
results of these were given in the Administration Report of the Meteo-
rological Department for 1885—86, and I have since visited the Dehra
Dun stations and some of those in Ajmere. In the case of the former,
the conditions are satisfactory, in so far that the forest on the site of
the observatories is a vigorous growth of chiefly Sal coppice* with a well-
defined boundary, and the observatory stations are, in the one case, well
within the forest, in an opening only just large enough to prevent the
gauge being sheltered, or its contents unduly added to by the drip of
the trees; in the other, in an open maidan of coarse grass and scrub,
with only a rare tree here and there. But the interval between the two

* As testifying to the importance of this condition, I extract the following
from a letter lately received from Dr. D. Brandis, for many years Inspector-General
of Forests in India; “I would draw your attention to a point which I used to
urge in India, whenever I wrote on the subject; viz., that forests, in order to
exercise an effect (on the rainfall), must be dense, and must not consist of a few
bushes and trees, here and there. Fire protection alone has the effect of making
the forest grow up dense, and I am disposed to think that the large extent of fire

protected forest in the Central Provinces may, in course of time, affect the rain-
fall.’

1887.] H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. 11

stations of each pair is hardly enough to shew the full influence of forest
in the one case, or to exclude it in the other; and it can only be expected
that, under such circumstances, any difference depending on that influence
will be very small.

There are two such pairs within about 6 miles of Dehra Din, on the
skirts of the Sivalik forests, the one at the Ramgarh, the other at the
Rajah’s forest. In the case of the Ramgarh forest, at which the obser-
vatories have been longest in existence, the two observatories are 750
yards apart; the outer 400 yards from the forest boundary, the inner
350 yards from it. At each station, there are two rain-gauges, the one
on the ground, the other at a height of 60 feet, being perched on the
summit of a scaffold, which raises it above the tops of the neighbouring
trees. The rain-gauges are Symon’s pattern, 5 inches in diameter, and
the measurements are all made with the same measure glass. The
observer has been regularly trained in his duties (which include keeping
4 registers of temperature and humidity, under corresponding condi-
tions), and his work seems to have been regularly performed. The
results for the years 1884 and 1885 are given in the following table :—

Lower gauges. Upper gauges.

Months. : .
Outer. | Inner. ra Outer. | Inner. a

ee |

June 1884 ... 5 3°66 4:07 3°88 | +027
July Sf) aclu! Sauk] MEGS )) 26746 26°44, | +1°72
August ‘ ore aa 21°18 21°74 21°23 +1°35
September , .. ‘Pe 17°53 18°78 18°01 | +082
October Risky Gun BEE 0°28 0°39 0°37 | +011
November _,, ais sas 0 0 0 0
December ,,_... = 0 0 0 0
Total 68°29 71°44 69°63 | +4°27
January 1885 ... Py) 4°20 448 | +0°28 4°56 4°63 | +0°07
February ,, ane én 0°85 0-70 | —O15 0-77 0°67 | —0:10
March - tae ans 0°48 0°39 | —0°09 0°42 0°36 | — 0°06
April Bae iy. pain 1 Seah 9 OBER oh OeRt 0-45 | 050] 40:05
May ea cys aed. abe Ee |) ag GOA tO Get 606] 6791 +073
June eon EOS! toe | Ob 975 | 1061 | +0:86
July y ” aae sos 9°81 9°90 + 0°09 9°27 9°88 + O°6L
August a ee soe 44°64 44°91 + 0°27 43°56 44°45 +0°89
September ,, _... aan 6°24 551 | — 0°73 6:06 547 | —0°59
October ‘i ake ave 0) e) 8) 0 8) a)
November ,, ae Jen 0 0 0 0 0 0
December ,, Ain eat 3°45 3°49 | +0°04 3°48 3°52 | + 0°04:
Total ...| 85°77] 8688} +091 ] 8338] 85:88 | + 2°50

ee

12 H.F-. Blanford—Iufluence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

The observations at the Rajah’s forest extend over a shorter period.
The stations are less than a mile distant from the former, and the
arrangements are similar; the surrounding conditions of each of the
pair being being strongly contrasted. The outer observatory is 1,750
yards from the forest boundary, the inner 1,000 within the forest, which
is of the same character as the Ramgarh forest.

Lower Ganges. Upper Gauges.
Months. . ‘
Outer. | Inner. aie Outer. | Inner. Spe

March PESO sss waa P 0°27 P 0°21 0°23 | +0°02
April ay lei LA 0°06 0°42 | +0°36 0°32 0°36 | +0°04
May nel hos a 4°69 3:99 | —0°70 4°36 4:04 | — 0°32
June daphne ne 10°47 11:70 | +1:23 10°07 11°42 | +1°35
July eattee™, we ve 9°81 10°63 | +0°82 9°47 9°88 | +0°41
August ae Whine sie 47°50 45°87 | — 1°63 46°99 45°87 | —112
September ,, we nae 2°43 2°46 | +0°03 2°40 2°41 | +0°01
October pes S Yh 0 0 0 0 0 0
November ,, “ae 7 0 0 0 0 0 0)
December ,, «. ca 3°40 3°54 | +0°14 3°43 3°45 | +0°02

Total ie 78°36 78°88 | +0°25 77°25 77°66 | +0°41

Tn this case, while, in most months, the rainfall at the inner station
is appreciably higher than at the outer station, as shewn both by the
elevated and ground level gauges, this gross excess appears to have
been nearly neutralized by falls in May and August, which were in
excess at the outer station. The result of the evidence is therefore
doubtful. But in the case of the Ramgarh station there does appear to
be a decided balance of rainfall in favour of the inner station.

I do not give the results of the Ajmere observations, because the
difference of the conditions within and without the boundary of the
forest, as far as I have seen them, depend much more on the form
and slope of the ground than on the density of the forest growth, and
I do not think the comparative observations have much bearing on
the question at issue. :

There remains one case which, although dependant on purely arti-
ficial conditions, might yet afford evidence of some weight in connection
with the present subject, could we only be sure that the observations
had been taken with the care and precaution indispensible to any
valid comparison.* In the very heart of the plain between the Ravi

* For the following information I am indebted to Col. Home, R.E., late
‘Secretary to the Punjab Government in the Irrigation Department of the Public

1887.] H. F. Blanford—Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. 13

and the Jhelum (two of the five rivers of the Punjab), and about 50 miles
to the south of Lahore, a vigorous forest has been established, by
planting and irrigating the planted land from the Bari doab canal.
The forest area covers 315 square miles and has now been established
16 years.* Outside the forest and to the east and south-east are lands
which are cultivated, also with irrigation from the canal; and on the
margin of this tract, four miles from the forest, is the small civil station
of Chunian. Since 1864, a rainfall register has been kept regularly
at Vahn (within the forest, half a mile distant from the nearest forest
boundary), and also at Chunian; and since 1870, a third register has
been kept at Bhambeh, a station on the Bari doab canal, in a position
very similar to Chunian, but 13 miles to the north-east of the forest
boundary and 19 miles north-east from Ghanga Manga or Vahn.

The rainfall chart of the Punjab shews that, in this part of the
province, there is a steady increase of rainfall in a north-east direction
or from Chunian to Bhambeh; steady, that is to say, apart from the
influence of purely local conditions, and therefore, were the whole
surface of the tract such as it is immediately around Chunian and
Bhambeh, it might be anticipated that the mean rainfall of any inter-
mediate station should be intermediate between those of Chunian
and Bhambeh, in inverse proportion to their respective distances. The
mean rainfall of Bhambeh, deduced from 17 years’ registers, is 17°27
inches; that of Chunian, deduced from the same period, is 14°05
ins. If, then, Vahn, which is 19 miles from the former and 63
miles from the latter station, had a rainfall intermediate between the

Works and now Secretary to the Government of India. ‘“ Two gauges are placed
side by side, the receivers are 43 feet above the ground. One is an ordinary
tube gauge, measurements made with a graduated rod. The other a Watsen’s
continuous self-registering gauge, which is taken to pieces, cleaned and re-adjusted
on the 1st April yearly. The bearings of the gauge are silver plated copper tubes
and with very ordinary care in adjustment, they register very correctly. Instruc-
tions about registering rainfall are very distinct and I believe they are obeyed.”

| * Mr. H. C. Hill, Conservator of Forests in the Punjab, writes, “ Changa
Manga is a compact block of 20,242 acres, of which 8,399 are wooded with planted
Sissoo (Dalbugia Sissoo). The remainder is under ordinary scrub. The age of the
plantation dates back to 1866-67, but little was done for 3 years and the age of the
forest may be taken as 16 years. The trees (excepting those in the canal avenue
averaging 63 feet) of our best compartments average 50, 51 and 53 feet in height
and all compartments have an average of 40 or more.”

“The watering of the forest begins in April and goes on more or legs till
September. Very little of it ever gets a second watering in the year, but that
given is a good soaker of 3 or 4 feet depth of water. The ground to the east and
_ south except where 2 rahhs are touched, is all under cultivation and irrigated.
Irrigation mostly from June to April,

14 H. F. Blanford—Inflwence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall. [No. 1,

above amounts, in inverse proportion to the distances of the ‘two
stations, the average of the same 17 years would be 14°85 inches.
It is actually 15°76 ins., or nearly 1 inch above the computed pro-
portion.

I am far from considering this result as conclusive on the point
at issue. In some years, the deviation from the mean proportions is
very large, and the average of the last three years (which, in this part
of the Punjab, have been characterized by a remarkably low rainfall)
shows that the Vahn rainfall has been almost exactly in the inverse ratio
of the relative distances of the two outer stations. Still, the evidence,
so far as it goes, favours the idea that the forest increases the rainfall.

The general conclusion to be drawn from the facts set forth in
the foregoing pages is that, while no one of the instances cited fulfils
the requirements of scientific proof, the tendency of the evidence they
afford is uniformly favourable to the idea that the presence of forest
increases the rainfall.

The evidence is of three kinds. First, we have that of a large
province some five-sixths of which have always been a forest wilderness,
but in which, for the first ten years of the period of registration, the forest
growth was greatly devastated; partly by dahya cultivation, which
completely destroyed the forest for the time being, whenever it was
carried on, and partly by annual forest fires, which destroyed the
under-growth and injured the larger trees. For the next ten years,
these destructive operations were suppressed and the visible result is
a forest growth of such vigour and luxuriance as to attract the atten-
tion of the Inspector-General, when on his tour of inspection, to the
question of its probable effect on the rainfall. During these last ten
years the rainfall of the province has progessively increased until it
would appear to amount to 20 per cent. more than the average of the
first ten years.

The second instance is that of two pairs of comparative obser-
vatories, established on the Ebermeyer plan, in near proximity to each
other on the boundary of a protected forest; one of each pair being
within, the other without the forest, on open grouud. Notwithstanding
their proximity, in most months the outer observatories shew a slight
excess over the inner. At each observatory there are two gauges ; one
at 60 feet above the ground, the other on the ground; and both afford
consistent results. In the case of one pair of observatories, the total
of 18 months’ register shew an excess in the inner high level gauge of 4
per cent., in the lower of two per cent. In the case of the other pair, the
registers of 12 months only shew an inappreciable net difference of
the totals, although, in most months, the forest-gauges shew a slightly
enhanced fall.

S.R.ELSON, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 18877, Vol. LVI, Pt.IL

taf i.

es ee
ooo & 1-ths.|-.001 & r6-ths.| .oo2 & 16-ths| .oo3 & i6-ths.| .oo4 & i6ths|.oo5 &ie-ths.

100°

90

80. eS be ee | 80°

; ee
60° oe 60°

00 & i6-ths,

WWewman & C° Lt Li:

Caterttw.

ON Ha, Va
mt i a
ie boa wae
| ais r Rr i st
Pe wan! Sve Pa Je hes
cis? Ie hak

1887.] S. R. Elson—On the Density of Surface Sea-water, Se. 15

Lastly, we have the case of a forest artificially produced by irriga-
tion (during the two driest months of the year) in a region so dry
that cultivation is rendered possible only by irrigation. Seventeen
years’ registers at a station within the forest shew an excess of 6 per
cent. over the probable rainfall of that station, as computed from the
registers of two stations, one of which is 4 miles, the other 13 miles
distant from the forest, and both on the borders of the cultivation.

The evidence is, then, in kind, not rigorously conclusive, and it
must be admitted that in no case has it been guarded by those special
precautions which are demanded by strict scientific enquiry. But I
have no reason to believe that it is not as trustworthy as observations
made under the general supervision of intelligent and educated men
usually are; and such as it is, it tends to support and confirm the
conclusions drawn a priort from general physical considerations. It
justifies, I think, at least, the view I have already expressed elsewhere,
namely, that I can no longer regard the long suspected influence of
forests on rainfall as a question of equally balanced probabilities.

eer

II.—On the Changes observed in the Density of the Surface Sea-water, coin-
cident with, and due to Aerial Disturbances, and consequent Alteration
of Baric Pressure over adjacent Sea Areas: and on the Usefulness of a
more exact Measurement of the Specific Gravity of Sea-water : more
especially with Reference to the Waters near, and about, the Hooghly
River Pilot Station —By Samusrt R. Exson.

[Received March ;—Read February 2nd, 1887. ]
(With Pl. IX.)

In a work which I published some years since, entitled ‘ The
Hooghly Sandheads Sailing Directory,’ on the strength of observations
made with a small glass instrument, the stem of which was graduated
to two thousandths only, I asserted, that the sea water at the Hooghly
River Pilot Station contained more salt at low water than it did at high
water. But this seeming paradox requires some slight modification, for,
I have since then found, with a soda-water bottle hydrometer, which
readily weighs the sixteenth of a thousandth of salt in the water, that,
in every case, on the least tendency of the sea thereabouts to set to the
westward, in response, as I suppose, to aerial disturbances which lessen
the baric pressure over the sea area to the southward, the water shows
at once a decrease in salinity, consequently, the relative degree of saltness

16 S. R. Elson—On the Changes observed in the Density [No. 1,

between these westward flowing waters outside, and those situated
under the lee of Saugor and Edmonstone Islands, and their continua-
tions, as outlying, partially dry, sands, to the northwards, will be alter-
ed, as I shall presently endeavour to show.

As an instance out of many I have known of the suddenness of a
change of this sort :—At 1:30 p. m. of the 10th of August last, I found
the sea at the Pilot Station registered a specific gravity of 1:024: but
only four days afterwards, at the same hour with regard to the tide, and
almost in the same position, it was only 1:013.8, or was ‘010.8; less
salt. But gradually, during these four days, a westward set of the sea
hereabouts had got up, which steadily increased until it was running -
at the rate of two miles an hour or more, and, as is always the case, its
presence was unmistakably announced by a rather sudden change in the
colour and appearance of the sea (in fact, it was this marked change
that induced me to test the water again), the water changing from a
wholesome sea-green to a yellowish (but not muddy or turbid) hue, or
of the colour of stagnant ditch, or tank water.

But, generally speaking, after the westward set has run for some
time, this sickly looking water changes its appearance for the more
natural green. And, so far as my limited and solitary observations go
to show, the amount of salt increases as the westward set slackens.
Therefore, these intermittent incursions of greater or less supplies of
fresher water from, I suppose, the great easterly mouths of the Ganges,
must be taken into consideration, when making comparisons as to the
relative amounts of salt contained in the sea-water off, and in, the differ-
ent parts of the outlet channels of the Hooghly and its estuary.

As [have said before, in a paper read before your Society some time
back, entitled ‘ The Tides and Currents of the Hooghly &c., &c.,’ none, or
but very little, of the water from the river Hooghly can possibly reach
the Pilot Station, situated as it is about 36 miles 8. 8S. EH. from Saugor
Roads, seeing that, by the direction vessels ride when at anchor, in all the
lower part of the river, from Mud Point to Saugor, the ebb tide sets
S. W. and 8S. S. W. away towards Balasore Roads, or Bay, which is an
extensive circular and shallow basin some 40 miles broad. Therefore,
Saugor Island and its outlying, partially dry reef, called Saugor Sand,
running down as it does over 22 miles S. S. H. from the tail end of
Savgor Island, whilst the over-active sun’s rays are copiously extract-
ing vapour therefrom, must, and undoubtedly does, afford efficient shelter
to the muddier and semi-opaque, and therefore, warmer water on its
immediate westward side, from an early incursion of the above-men-
tioned drift of fresher waters, from the eastward, as, doubtless, the
following serial observations, carefully taken for the purpose, show.

EOP 7-

1887. | of the Surface Sea-water at the Sandheads. 17

Temperature. Specific gravity,
Air. Water.
June 18th, 1886 Saugor Roads (bound out) 84°5° 85°5° =—102334

» 20th ,, Hastern Channel Light. W.
by N., 4 miles 85'4° 86° 1:018
» 2lst ,, Eastern Channel Lig't.
North, 9 miles S55") (86°49), BOZE
» 22nd ,, Intermediate Light (bound
in) sé a icf 86:5°| « 1;020.%.

» 9» 9 Lower Gasper Light lis f 86°5°... 1021
» 9» 9, Upper Gasper Light us, vad 865?) 102322.
nus -3,° Sangor Roads bit ss 86°50: (j 210234

Note :—The Saugor Roads observation of the 18th was taken on the
last quarter flood, and that of the 22nd on the last quarter ebb.

By this we have an accumulation of salt in Saugor Roads of
"0054, over and above what was found in the water at the Eastern
Channel Light Station, thirty-six miles farther seawards, only a day
or two previous. There was a set to the westward of the yellowish
green water at the Sandheads, or Eastern Channel Light Station, on the
20th and 21st June, which would probably account for some of the above
great differences in the relative specific gravity, though not for all. We
also see by the above observations that at a distance of eight or nine
miles dead to seaward of the above station, and well out in the 20 fathom
line of soundings, there was an increase in the density of the sea water
of ‘003, this indicating that the induced lateral stream of fresher water
from the eastward was not of necessity a very broad one: the reason of
which I will attempt to explain further on, when I come to speak of
the influence which the Swatch of no Ground doubtless has upon this
westward set of the outside waters of the littoral. But even out there,
we see the density did not exceed that of the sheltered muddy waters
at the Lower Gasper Light Station, thirty-three miles farther north, and
that it fell far short of that of Saugor Roads.

With reference to this very interesting question of the increased
specific gravity of these inshore waters of the littoral during the dry
months of the year, it is worthy of note that our late senior pilot, Mr.
C. Smyth, used to say his long experience led him to believe that the

reason vessels so seldom ‘felt the ground,’ or ‘bumped,’ in the Gasper
- Channel,—when their known draft of water, depth given by the charts,

height of sea-surface above ‘ lowest low water,’ or zero, as given by the

tide table, and allowance for swell running, showed they had apparently

not much water to spare under their keels,—was, that some sort of

meeting of the tidal currents piled up the water, as it were, about
3

18 S. R. Elson—On the Changes observed in the Density [No. 1,

this spot, on the ebb tide. He was evidently not far wrong in his sur-
mises as to there being a something which assisted vessels to cross the
Gasper bar in safety.

Ever anxious to learn something more of the causes of these freaks,
as some would call them, of the currents at the Sandheads, and of the vary-
ing specific gravity of its waters, on the 13th of November last I gladly
availed myself of an unexpected opportunity for further investigation
by taking serial observations of the sea-surface temperature and density
on some one line, or compass bearing, right off from the turbid water
of the Pilot, or Eastern Channel Light Station, out into the deep blue
sea of the Bay of Bengal.. Nor, for my purpose, could it have occurred
at a better time, with regard to the relative state of the weather, when
going and returning, as will be seen. I went off S. EH. towards Ran-
goon as acting special pilot in the B. I. S. N. Company’s 6 S. S. Sirsa and,
commencing at the Lower Saugor Sand buoy, which is about 5 miles
farther inshore and towards the land than the Eastern Channel Light
Vessel, I took observations with the bottle hydrometer, and thermo-
meter, every two hours, with the following results :—

Temperature. Specific gravity.
Air. Sea.
November 13th, 1886 Noon, 2 miles S. W.
from Lower Saugor Sand buoy »» 86°. 83° 1:00938
At 2p. m. 20 miles 8. HE. of EH. C. Light
Station cd ae ous oe «835°: 10098.
At 3:30 p. um. Passed through a frothy
line of demarcation running EH. and
_W. between light and dark green co-
loured water.
At 4 p.m. 45 milesonsameline .,, 81° 83° 1:021,%

At 5°30 p.m. 60 miles on same line iia 24 bee 2 102212
November 14th 6 30 a. mu. 200 miles on same
line or in 19° 80’ N. 91° 2’ E. 3. pli tn Ba 1:022.6.

At Noon 265 miles miles on same line ... 81° 81°5° 1,022.5.
At 5°30 p. mu. 320 miles on same line Sai) ii vedios Bete 1:02322

On this outward trip the ordinary fine weather of the winter mon-
soon prevailed, following a rather heavy cyclonic disturbance down the
bay: but on the return journey on the 20th, 21st, and 22nd of the same
month there was a hard cyclone prevailing to the south, and then
southwest of the Hooghly Pilot Station; and a strong set of the
sea up along the eastern side and, I suppose, the centre of the Bay
of Bengal, carrying the vessel I was on board of, the B. I. S. N. Company’s

1887. ] of the Surface Sea-water at the Sandheads. 19

S. 8. “ Nowshera,” onwards to the N. W., some three or four miles an
hour faster over the ground than her dead reckoning showed her to be
going through the water, on her N. W. course towards the Pilot Station
and Hooghly River Sandheads, even all the way from the Alguada
Reef, and I found the following :—

Temperature. Specific gravity.
Air. Sea,

November 22nd, 1886 7 4. m. Sea indigo.

55 miles S. H. of Hastern Channel

Light Station 81° 83°—s« 102333
Note :—This temperature SRS with, wad

the specific gravity exceeds what we

had found at a distance of 200 miles,

when bound the other way, only eight

days before.
At 8°30 a. mw. 14 miles S. E. of E. C. Light

Vessel. Sea dark green eee ries) POO ab ae
At 10°104.m. 2miles N. N. BE. of E. C.
Light Vessel. 1st quarter ebb SP Se RN i eden 0) oot

Note :—This gives a difference of — 3°°5 in
temperature and of + 0063; in the
specific gravity from what prevailed
at, and near about the same _ spot,
on the 13th inst. or only eight days

before.
At 11°30 a. uw. at Intermediate Light Sta-

tion. Half ebb. ave ye~ pea OPO), ) EOI.
At 3 Pp. mM. 2 miles above Saugor Light

House 8. W. ... ae fest Ot. (PER 1:007

We will now take the observations which were made at a position
near the Hastern Channel Light Station, and compare them, to show
what changes of density and temperature of the sea are there due to
these fitful changes and disturbances of weather in the bay, during this
month of November last. |

Temperature. Specific gravity.
Air, Sea,
On the 3lst October 1886, 2 miles N. E. of
K. C. Light, and just previous to a
cyclonic whirl in the Bay, with its
usual precursory westward set of the
sea at the Sandheads.. {es0 cOAtDS cB6707 5.3, da.

20 S. R. Elson—On the Changes observed in the Density [No. 1,

Temperature. Specific gravity,
Air, Sea,
(After this I was absent from Sandheads
until the 13th.)
On 13th November 1886, in nearly same
position, just after the cessation of the
strong westward set caused by a cy-
clonic whirl down the Bay, and all
was again quieted oe ae, 66; — Se". TOES
On 22nd November, in same _ position,
during a severe and widespread cy-
clonic disturbance farther down the
Bay which had been some days in
existence: and when a strong north
westward set of the sea was pouring
in towards this position from, and
across, and most likely out of, the
depths of the peculiar sub-marine ra-
vine, or gut of deep, and (as Com-
mander Carpenter has told us) cold
water, called ‘The Swatch of No
Ground* _,.. Sir ee, Oe. VOD” gener

From the above, and what has been shown before, it seems the
fresher water setting from the eastward, off and on, ever since the 31st
of October (on the evening of which day the changed colour and appear-
ance of the sea alongside led me to test it, and I found a slight dimi-
nution in its density, even then), or for half a month, was completely
crowded out, as it were, by the last mentioned north-westward moving
current of the 20th, 21st, and 22nd of November: which the S. 8. Now-
shera’s log book furnishes ample proofs of; and, as a consequence, the
salinity of the water at the station increased too, and probably, for a
while, exceeded its normal: but, on this point, the few observations I have
had opportunity to make and record will not permit me to write with
that degree of assurance that I should like to do.

Maury says of the hydrometer :—‘ In the physical machinery of the
universe there is no compensation to be found that is more exquisite or
beautiful than that which, by means of this little instrument has been
discovered in the sea between its salts, the air, and the sun: but Maury
could hardly have meant the instrument commonly found on shipboard,

* For a description of which see paper by Commander Carpenter, R. N. (read
before your Society some time back).

1887.1] of the Surface Sea-water at the Sandheads. 21

which can only be guessed at, if read to less than the nearest ‘002,
but, if so, what an amount of really valuable information may be got out
of an instrument, which, although a rough and rude one, is so much more
exact: the one is as different from the other as was the old cross staff of
Christopher Columbus’ time from the double reflecting sextant of to-day.
Our forefathers were content to find their vessel’s position to the nearest
two or three miles, but modern navigators are not satisfied unless they
get it to the fraction of a mile.

Doubtless, the energy which brings the waters up from the ever-
frigid bed of the deep sea :—the energy of attraction and repulsion ;—of
contraction and expansion, or, of deadweight and buoyancy :—this energy
of motion, under different states and circumstances, of the chemi-
cally suspended salt atoms, contained in each ocean drop, will yet
be made to divulge its partially hidden and secret treasures to the prac-
tical scientist for the navigator’s benefit : as has been the case with the
latent energy of that other heat vehicle and prime motor of the hurricane
blast, as well as of the gentle zephyr—the invisible water-vapour glo-
bule in the air strata aloft. All that is required is the aid of willing work-
ers and their faithful records : for all the facts as set forth above, meagre
as have been the opportunities for observing them, go far to prove that
the hydrometer, when constructed to show minute aggregation, or segra-
tion of salt atoms in the water, must prove to be no mean aid to the
sailor, more especially to the coasting navigator, since it is near coasts
that the currents generally are more capricious, or disguised by others
which have never been properly explained. It will aid him either as a
monitor of his vessel’s proximity to land; of her being caught in the
toils of some abnormal current, which may be hurrying his vessel on to
her destruction (as was nearly the case during the cyclone in the Bay of
the 19th, 20th, 21st and 22nd of November last, with the ship “‘ Airlie :”
which vessel was found to have been driven by the storm-impelled cur-
rent 140 miles to the N. W., out of her dead reckoning, right through the
dangerous South Preparis Channel, and actually had an oyster shell
washed up on to her deck); or its indications may be made even to
warn the watchful shipmaster of the on-coming, though yet distant,
cyclone ; let alone its probable use to scientists, in more ways than one.

My instrument, a rather large soda-water bottle, when ballasted,
or weighted, so as just to float with its wire pedestal (or support and cup
or pan for weights) in water at a temperature of 95° (which is the
warmest of any sea water), happens to havea fluid displacement, or,
which is the same thing, weighs in air exactly 10,000 grains—a _ con-
venient figure for calculating the several counterbalancing weights by.
The weights are made by dividing and subdividing 320 grains weight

22 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

of copper wire: the whole 320 grains being, of course, equivalent to
1-032, or thirty-two thousandths—a figure far above any degree of salt-
ness of sea water, but chosen on account of its convenience of divisa-
bility :—thus, the 320 grains of wire doubled, straightened out and cut,
gives ‘016, or sixteen one-thousandths : of which make sixteen coils, or
loops to denote it, of one piece. The other piece doubled as before and
cut gives ‘008, and so on, until the one-sixteenth of a thousandth is
arrived at,—a fraction which will be found to readily sink the bottle, or
‘turn the scale’ of this frictionless balance.

Below is added a diagram (PI. IX) for corrections for temperature
of fresh water ; and a suitable table of corrections for temperature of sea
water will be found in ‘ Maury’s Physical Geography of the Sea,’ and in
many other books of a like character, for those who like to seek out for
themselves the “ exquisite and beautiful compensations”? which as a part
of its machinery the sea salts provide in the physical economy of the
Ocean.

I1I.— Notes on Indian Rhynchota: Hererorrera, No. 1.
By EH. T. Arxtyson, B. A., PRESIDENT.

[Received and Read December 1, 1886.]
Order Ruyncnota, Burmeister.
Hemiptera, Linn.: Rhyngota Fabr.: Proboscidea, Scop.: Dermaptera, Retz.

Insects with an incomplete metamorphosis, not exhibiting the mark-
ed changes from larva to pupa and imago observable in the Lepidoptera :
furnished with a mouth or rostrum which is fitted for piercing and
sucking. The rostrum is usually 3—4-jointed and contains four seta that
arise from the anterior portion of the lower surface of the head and
represent the maxille and mandibles of other orders of insects. An-
tenne with 3—5 joints, rarely more; the wings are usually four in
number, but are sometimes abbreviated or altogether wanting.

Suborder Hemiptera, Latreille.

The first pair of wings (hemelytra) are horizontal, with the veins
arranged differently from those of the second pair (wings), and usually
comprise a basal coriaceous portion (coriwm and clavus), and a mem-
branous portion (membrane) at the apex. This membrane is sometimes
entirely absent. The wings are entirely membranous and are sometimes
absent.

1887. ] K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 23

GymNnoceRATA, Fieber, Reuter.

Cimex, Linn.: Cimicides, Latr.: Geocorise, Latr.: Geocores, Burm., Dallas: Auro-
corisa, Westw.: Terrestria, Leach: Geocorise and Amphibicorise, L. Dufour, Spin.,
Sahlb. et auct.

Antenne exserted, at least as long as the head, joints without lateral
processes: rostrum 3—4-jointed, rising from the anterior and usually the
upper part of the head, at the base remote from the first pair of coxee :
feet not adapted for swimming: antenne with 4—5 joints rarely with
only three joints.

Fam. Prentatomip#, Kolenati.

Pentatoma, pt. Olivier, En. Méth. iv, p. 25 (1789) : Cimeza, pt. Fabr. Ent. Syst.
iv, p. 79 (1794) : Scutati, Burm. Handb. Ent. ii (i), p. 343 (1835): Longiscuti, Am.
and Serv. Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 19 (18438): Scutata, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 2
(1851) : Pentatomide, Kolenati, Mel. Ent. iv, (1846); Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 3 (1876):
Pentatomida, pt., Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 32 (1864).

Head very often clypeated, rostrum 4-jointed, inserted usually near
the labrum towards the apex of the head, seldom towards the base of
the head: antennw with 4—5 joints, inserted on the lower side of the
head below the lateral margins: scutellum very large, reaching at least
the base of the membrane.

Subfam. Prataspina, Stal.

Enum. Hem. vy, p. 3 (1876) :—Plataspide, Dallas, List Hem. B. M.i p. 61 (1851):
Plataspidina, Stal, Ofvers. K. V. A. Forh., p. 611 (1870): Arthropteride, Fieber, °
Eur. Hem. p. 27 (1861) ; Arthropterida, Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 1 (1864).

Head clypeated: rostrum 4-jointed, inserted towards the base of
the head, remote from the source of the labrum: scutellum very large,
covering the entire abdomen: hemelytra longer than the body, with the
apical half folded inwards: longitudinal veins of membrane simple :
tarsi 2-jointed, the first joint very short.

Genus Taricuna, Stal.

A. 8. E. F. (48.) v, p. 163 (1865) : Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 6 (1876) : Walker, Cat.
Het. i, p. 10 (1867).

Body very broadly ovate, above very much convex, beneath some-
what flat: head clypeate, very broadly rounded ‘before the eyes, juga
contiguous before the tylus: eyes slightly transverse : ocelli more dis-
tant from each other than from the eyes: lateral margins of thorax
roundly dilated : scutellum covering entire abdomen, abruptly amplified
at the base : feet somewhat short (Stal).

24 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. },

1. TaricHEa NITENS, Dallas.

Plataspis nitens, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 74 (1851).
Tarichea nitens, Stal, A. S. E. F. (4 8.) v, p. 163 (1865); En. Hem. v, p. 6
(1876) : Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 111 (1867).

9. Above brassy, very smooth and shining, rather thickly and finely
punctured: head, disc of abdomen, anus, sutures and stigmata, black :
pectus dull black: eyes reddish : abdomen bright red, shining: legs
bright orange-red: head beneath black with an orange spot in the mid-
dle of the base: rostrum pitchy red, with the basal joint orange-red :
antenne orange-red, with the two (?) apical joints black (Dallas). Body
long 93 mill.

Reported from N. India.

Genus Caracta, Stal.
A. 8. E. F. (48.) v, p. 163 (1866) : En. Hem. v, p. 6 (1876).

Body very broadly ovate or oval, rather convex, flat beneath : head
produced before the eyes, somewhat amplified forwards, truncated at
the apex; juga contiguous before the middle ; eyes transverse, oblique ;
ocelli almost twice as distant from each other as from the eyes: lateral
margins of thorax roundly amplified, anterior angles produced to the
apex of the head, rounded : scutellum covering the entire abdomen, not
abruptly amplified at the base: costal margin of hemelytra, broadly
lobate at the base : feet somewhat short (Stal).

2. CaALACTA RUFO-NoTATA, Stal.

Calacta rufo-notata, Stal, A. 8. EH. F. (48.) v, p. 164 (1865); En. Hem. v, p. 6
(1876).

3. Broadly oval, moderately convex, remotely and finely punctu-
late: disc of thorax and scutellum very finely punctulate: eyes rufous-
piceous: small spots, one marginal near the posterior angles of the
thorax, another on the basal lobe of the hemelytra, two marginal dorsal
before the middle of the abdomen, sanguineous: tarsi weakly testaceous

flavescent: anteocular part of the head re amplified forwards (Stal).
Long, 6; broad 2} mill.

Reported from Siam.

Genus Oncyrzaspis, Stal.
Hem. Afric. i, p, 2 (1864) ; En. Hem. v. p. 4, 6 (1876).
Body depressed, rather strongly convex: head broad, slightly or

moderately bending forwards; vertex about thrice broader than the
eyes which are transverse, oblique, narrowed inwards, deeply immersed.

1887. ] KE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 25

very slightly prominulous beyond the sides of the head: ocelli remote
from the eyes: antenne inserted in the middle or almost in the middle
between the eyes and the rostrum, the first joint somewhat equal in
length to the two following : pronotum about twice as broad as the head,
anterior margin gradually rather strongly sinuated behind the entire
head; anterior angles obtuse, distinct, not rounded: feet generally
short: sixth ventral segment in ¢ produced forwards in an acute angle
reaching the base of the fifth segment ; forming anteriorly (in ? ) a less
produced right or somewhat obtuse angle (Stal).
Type, P. ruficeps, Dallas.

3. ONCYLASPIS RUFICEPS, Dallas.

Plataspis ruficeps, Dallas, List Hem. i, 73, (1851) : Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 110
(1867).
Oncylaspis ruficeps, Stal, En. Hem. v. p. 6 (1876).
$, ¢. Above brassy black, shining, very finely punctured, with the
head and the anterior angles of the thorax reddish brown: coriaceous
portion of the hemelytra brown: membrane brownish, semitransparent,
with dark brown veins. Body beneath reddish brown, shining, finely
punctured ; the anal apparatus and the middle of the dise of the abdomen,
black: legs, antenne and rostrum reddish brown, the latter rostrum with
the tip pitchy (Dalias). Body long 9—10 mill.
Reported from Burma, Tenasserim.

Genus Posripon, Vollenhoven.

Tijdschr. Ent. Ned. viii, p. 63 (1865).

Body elliptical, rather broader, a little tumid above, shining : head
in the g, broad, anteriorly with three horns which are channeled, the
lateral pair curved inwards in the Q, the head is broad, semicircular, the -
juga unite at the tip of the tylus: antennz inserted below the head,
5-jointed ; the first very long, cylindrical, rather broad, the second very
small, only one-eighth of the length of the first, the third neither so
long nor so stout as the first, slightly clavate, the rest gradually decreas-
ing in length and thickness: eyes pyriform, very distant ; ocelli much
nearer to each other than to the eyes: rostrum extending beyond the
posterior coxee, the second and third joints of equal length: lateral mar-
gins of pronotum arched: scutellum scarcely emarginate posteriorly in
the 6: venter flat, with, in 2, a short longitudinal groove on the first
segment: feet rather short and stout (Voll.)

4

26 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. fNo.'t,

4, PosErpON MALAYANUS, Vollenhoven.
Poseidon malayanus, Voll., Tijds. Ent. Ned. viii, p. 64, t.1, f. 3-5 (1865).

3, @. Bronzed black above: eyes brownish-white : two spots and
two lines encircling the tylus, these lines in the ¢ are in the middle of
the median cephalic horn: two small spots near the anterior margin of
the pronotum, a thin line along its entire lateral margin and two round
spots on the scutellum near, and a fine line around, the anterior margin,
orange: scutellum rather strongly and pronotum more weakly punc-
tured, head smooth: hemelytra piceous-brown : antenn weakly pilose,
black, with the joints whitish: rostrum ferruginous: body beneath
shining black, except pectus which is dull cinereous: each segment of
the abdomen in the 9g has two small orange spots on each side on the
margin: feet black, tarsi brownish (Voll.). g, long, 15; 9, long, 18
mill.

Reported from Malacca, India ?

Genus Bracuyeiatrys, Boisduval.

Voy. Astrolabe, Ent. ii, p. 627 (1832) : Westwood in Charlesworth’s Mag. Nat.
Hist. ii, p. 26 (1838) ; White, id., iii, p. 539 (1839) : Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 61 (1851);
Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 98 (1867): Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 8 (1864) ; En. Hem. v, p. 4,
7 (1876) :—Includes Coptosoma, subg. Platycephala, Lap., Ess. Hém, p. 74 (1832).

Body very broadly ovate, generally slightly convex above, flat
beneath : head foliaceous, transverse, broad, broadly rounded at the
-apex; vertex 4-5 times broader than the eyes; antenne remote from the
eyes, the first joint not longer than the third, almost equal in length:
eyes slightly transverse, not oblique, slightly immersed, strongly pro-
minulous beyond the sides of the head, narrowed outwards: ocellia little
more distant from each other than from the eyes: pronotum about one
half broader than the head, sinuated at the apex behind the vertex,
truncated behind the eyes, anterior angles obtuse, rounded at the apex,
not produced. As pointed out by Westwood, the scutellum in the @, in,
both Brachyplatys and Coptosoma, is notched and in the ?, entire. In
the former the sixth ventral segment, in the o, is produced forwards in
an acute angle reaching the base of the fifth segment, and in the 2,
forms anteriorly a less produced right or somewhat obtuse angle: in
Coptosoma, the same segment forms an obtuse, or very obtuse angle, or
is merely obtusely rounded. In Brachyplatys, the first joint of the
last tarsi is nearly as long as the second, and in Ooptosoma is much
shorter.

1887. ] HK. T. Atkinson—Nofes on Indian Rhynchota, 27

5. BRACHYPLATYS VAHLIT, Fabricius.

Cimex vahlii, Fabr. Mant. Ins. ii, p. 283 (1787) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 89 (1794)
Coquebert, Ill. ii, p. 79, t. 18, f. 14 (1801) ; Wolff, Ic. Cim. p. 96, t. 9, f. 99 (1802) ?

Tetyra vahlii Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 142 (1803).

Thyreocoris vahlii, var. Germar, Zeitsch. i (i) p. 38 (1839) ; Herr. Schiff. Wanz
Ins. v. p. 31, 33 (1839).

Plataspis vahlii, Am. & Serv. Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém., p. 64 (1843).

Brachyplatys vahlii, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 70 (1851) excl. syn. pt.; Walker, Cat.
Het. i, p. 100 (1867) ; Stal. Ofvers K. V.-A. Férh. p. 611 (1870) ; En. Hem. vy, p. 7
(1876): Distant, A. M. N. H. (5s.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Head, thorax, scutellum and abdomen, black: two large marks on
the head, the margin of the thorax and a small oblique line before the
margin, also the margin of the scutellum, flavescent: thorax gibbous,
shining: two lines on each segment of the abdomen on both sides and
which unite at the apex, also the feet, yellow (C. vahlii, Fabr.).

3, @. Head with yellow transverse lines: pronotum With a sinuated
transverse line on the anterior margin, abruptly curved before the an-
terior angle, before reaching the posterior angle ; an arcuate line on the
border of each anterior angle and another similar -intramarginal line
around the scutellum, below which is another slender line; margins
of abdomen, transverse lines on each side of the venter, rostrum, feet
and antenne, yellow: some specimens have a small yellow dot on each
side of the disc cf the pronotum and another like it on each side at the
base of the scutellum (P. vahlit, Am. and Serv.) Long 5-6 mill.
Differs from B. radians, Voll., in its smaller size and having the intra-
marginal flavescent line on the scutellum punctured fuscous. Differs
from B. nigriventris, Westw. in having transverse yellow lines on the
head.

Reported from Philippines, Cochin-China, Assam: not uncommon
in Sikkim.

6. BRACHYPLATYS RADIANS, Vollenhoven.
Brachyplatys radians, Voll., Faune Ent. Arch. Ind. Néerl. i, p. 52 (1863) :
Walker, Cat. Het. iii, p. 527 (1868) : Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 8 (1876).

Var. Brachyplatys vahlii, Voll., 1. c. p. 52 (1863).

Brassy-black: head spotted yellow; anterior margin of thorax and
oblique submarginal line yellow: two marginal lines on scutellum of
which the interior line is the broader: venter yellow, with a large discal
radiating patch (Voll.). Long 7 mill. Vollenhoven suggests that this is
only a variety of his B. vahlw. Itis a little larger: over almost the
entire head extends a broad yellow patch in which winds a black streak
that has its outline twice interrupted: the marginand yellow spots on
the pronotum are broader and brighter: the venter black, with the

28 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. I,

yellow spots on the margin of a conical shape or it may be said that the
venter is yellow with a broad black discal patch emitting rays towards
the margin. Stal suggests that Vollenhoven’s figure (l. c.) t. 4, f. 8
should be referred to this species: the yellow rays from the venter vary
much in length and he has never seen specimens in which the small
discoidal spots on the pronotum and the basal spots on the scutellum are
wanting.

Reported from Philippines, Celebes, Sumatra, Amboina, Ternate,
India (?).

7. BRACHYPLATYS SILPHOIDES, Fabricius.

Cimex silphoides, Fabr., Ent. Syst. iv, p. 86 (1794).

Tetyra silphoides, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 141 (1803) : Schiédte in Kroyer’s Nat,
Tids. iv, p. 301 (1842), excl. syn. Burmeister.

Brachyplatys silphoides, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 71 (1851), excl. syn. pt : Walker,
Cat. Het. i, p. 100 (1867) : Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 5 (1868) ; En. Hem. v, p. 8, 1876).

Body entirely glabrous, brassy-black, immaculate: margin of ab-
domen broadly white with a row of black dots: wings lineated: feet

yellow (Fabr.)

3, 2. Aenescent-black, very distinctly and rather densely punc-
tured, head somewhat rugose, four small spots on head, lateral sub-
marginal line and line obliquely drawn from lateral angles towards the
interior part of the eyes and here confluent with the intramarginal line,
also two small spots placed before the middle and very distant from each
other, elevated margin of scutellum and intramarginal line, also four
basal spots, yellow-testaceous: ventral limbus emitting on each seg-
ment two somewhat short flavescent rays of which the anterior is marked
by a small black spot: feet flavescent (Stal). Long 6—8 ; broad, 5—6
mill.

Reported from India, Panjab, Ceylon, China. Westermann records
its occurrence on rice (Serampore P).

8. BRACHYPLATYS SUBZNEUS, Westwood.

Plataspis subenea, Westw., in Hope Cat. Hem. i. p. 17 (1837).

Thyreocoris septus, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 32 (1839).

Brachyplatys subenea, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 70 (1851): Vollenhoven, Faune
Ent. Arch. Ind. Néerl. i, p. 54 (1863), excl. t. 4, f.8: Walker. Cat. Het. i, p, 100
(1867) : Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 8 (1876).

Brassy: head with a broad submarginal line and four dots on the’
rhombus (between the eyes), anterior and lateral margins of thorax and
an angulated sublateral line and margin of scutellum, fulvous: feet pale-

1887.) K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 29

ly luteous : abdomen brassy, marked by very many transverse conical
spots on the sides (Westw.). Long 6} mill.

Reported from China, Philippines, Ceylon, Malacca, Burma, Assam,
India.

9. BRACHYPLATYS BURMEISTERI, Distant.
Thyreocoris silphoides, Burm., Handb. ii (i) p. 384 (1835) : Stal, En. Hem. vy, p.
8 (1876).
Brachyplatys burmeisteri, Distant, A. M. N. H. (5s.) iii, p. 46 (1879).
Brassy-black: entire margin, the feet and marginal spots on the
abdomen Iuteous (Burm.). Long 6-8 mill. Can be at once distin-
guished from B. vahlit, Fabr. and B. silphoides, Fabr. by its uniform co-
loration above and absence of luteous markings on the head and prono-
tum : the luteous abdominal radial streaks are as in B. radians, Voll.
Reported from Tranquebar, Noa-Dehing valley and Sadiya (Assam).

10. BracHypLatys niTipus, Westwood.

Plataspis nitidus, Westw., in Hope Cat. Hem. i, p. 17 (1837) ; Walker, Cat. Het.
i, p. 110 (1867).
Thyreocoris nitidus, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 35 (1839).
Brachyplatys nitidus, Stal, Hn. Hem. v. p. 9 (1876),
Altogether black, shining, finely punctured: head broad ; scutel-
‘lum posteriorly emarginate (Westw.). Long, 6% mill.
Reported from India.

11. Bracuyenatys Birstrica, Walker.

Brachyplatys bistriga, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 100 (1867).

| Aeneous, finely punctured: head about two-thirds of the breadth
of the thorax : antenna, legs, marginal line on pronotum on each side
which does not extend to the posterior angle, a very short line connect-
ing the marginal line with the posterior angle, border of scutellum, mar-
ginal transverse lanceolate streaks on venter, each containing a black
point, and the corium, pale luteous: costa of hemelytra black: wings
blackish cinereous (Walker). Long 5% mill.
Reported from Bangalore.

12. BracHypnatys coanata, Walker,

Seeehyplatys cognata, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 101 (1867).

Aeneous-black, minutely punctured: head about two-thirds of the ?
breadth of the thorax: an irregular interrupted line near the fore
border of the head, a twice interrupted line between the eyes and a dot

30 HK. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

with a small longitudinal line on each side in the middle, the legs, an-
tennse, a waved line on pronotum which diverges on each side from the
anterior margin to the posterior angle, a marginal line on each side end-
ing near the posterior angle, sides of scutellum and transverse streaks
on each side of the venter, luteous: scutellum slightly excavated at the
tip (Walker). Long 4—5 mill.

Reported from Burma.

13. BRACHYPLATYS ADJuNOTA, Walker.
Brachyplatys adjuncta, Walker, Cat. Het. i. p. 101 (1867).

Aeneous, minutely punctured: head about two-thirds of the breadth
of the thorax: a mark on the disc of the head between two transyerse
interrupted lines and the lines themselves, antenne, legs, a transverse
undulating line on the thorax which extends along the foreborder and
diverges on each side to the posterior angle and two marginal lines
which do not extend to the posterior angle, border of scutellum, border
of venter which emits short streaks to the disc, luteous: scutellum ex-
cavated at the tip (Walker). Body long, 4; mill.

Reported from Burma.

Genus Coptosoma, Laporte.

Coptosoma. subg. Coptosoma, Lap., Ess. Hém. p. 73 (1832) :—Coptosoma, Dallas,
List. Hem. i, p. 61 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 83 (1867) ; Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p.
1, 9 (1864) ; En, Hem. v, p. 4, 10 (1876). Includes Globocoris, Hahn, Wanz. Ins. ii.
p. 40 (1834). 7

Body very broadly ovate, above moderately convex, beneath some-
what flat or very slightly convex: head usually small and perpendi-
cularly, or somewhat so, deflexed, narrower than the pronotum; ty-
lus not reflexed anteriorly, lying entirely in the same plane: eyes
rather prominulous ; ocelli nearer to the eyes than to each other: an-
tenne inserted at the eyes : lateral margins of thorax posteriorly sinuate,
before the sinus, usually distinctly amplified and foliaceous: scutellum
somewhat amplified hindwards: feet somewhat short.

14. CopTosoMA DUODECIMPUNCTATA, Germar.

Thyreocoris duodecimpunctatus, Germar, Zeitsch. i (i) p. 30 (1839) ; Herr. Schiff.
Wanz. Ins. v, p. 14, t. 150, f. 474 (1839),

Coptosoma duodecimpunctatum, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 62 (1851).

Coptosoma duodecimpunctata, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 86 (1867): Stal, En. Hem.
v, p. 10 (1876) : Distant, A. M. N. H. (5 s.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Body brassy-black : border of thorax and venter; eight spots on
the thorax (four on anterior margin, one on each lateral margin, and one

1887. ] HK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 31

in each lateral one-third) and four spots on the scutellum, red (Germar).
The feet are cinnamon-colour, brown towards the base; the broad red
border of the abdomen is bidentate on each segment and has large black
spiracula: scutellum with a yellow line within the free black border.
Long, 6 mill.

Reported from Tranquebar, Assam: the Indian Museum has speci-
mens from Sikkim and Samaguting (Assam).

15.. CoprosoMA CORIBRARIA, Fabricius.

Cimesx cribrarius, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppt. p. 531 (1798).

Tetyra cribraria, Fabr. Syst. Rhyng. p. 143 (1803) : Schiéddte in Kréyer’s Nat.
Tidsskr. iv, p. 305 (1842).

Thyreocoris ‘cribraria. Burm. Handb. ii (i) p. 384 (1835) : Germar, Zeitschr i, (i)
p. 26 (1839) ; Herr. Schiff. Wanz. iv, p. 84, t. 134, f. 416 (1834) and v, p. 31 (1839).

Coptosoma cribrariwm, Am, & Sery. Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 66, t. 2, f. 4, (1843) ;
Dallas, List Hem. B. M.i, p. 67 (1851 ; Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. Arch. Indo-Néer.
i, p. 50 (1863) ; Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 6 (1868).

Coptosoma atomariwm, pt. Vollen. 1. c. i, p. 50 (1863) g.

Coptosoma cribraria, Walker, Cat. Het. B. M. i, p. 87 (1867) ; Stal, En. Hem.
v, p. 12 (1876) : Scott, A.M. N. H. (48.) xiv, p. 289 (1874) ; Distant, Trans. Ent.
Soc. p, 414 (1883).

Body small, somewhat round : thorax and scutellum flavescent, with
very numerous impressed fuscous spots : scutellum somewhat emarginate
at the tip: abdomen dull black in the middle; feet yellow (Fabr.).
Long 33—5 mill.

Vollenhoven’s C. atomarium (nec Germar) is the ¢ of C. cribraria
and is of a greyish or greenish-yellow, irregularly covered with deep
black punctures on the posterior portion of the pronotum and on the
scutellum: the head is small with an extremely fine edging of black on
the anterior margin, a crescent-shaped black line on the vertex extend-
ing from one eye to the other: antenne yellow, with the tip of the last
joint brownish: eyes red: pronotum divided into two unequal parts by
a row of excavated brown points, in front of this row there is sometimes
a waved brown line; the posterior is punctured black: basal elevation
on scutellum not tumid, excavated points larger but more distant than
those on the thorax; beneath, head and pronotum yellow: meso- and
meta-thorax slaty-grey ; abdomen shining black with a broad yellow
margin in which are the finely black-irised stigmata : feet yellow, last joint
of tarsi, brown. Vollenhoven makes C. cribraria differ from his (. ato-
mariwm in its usually greater size, colour egg-yellow or greenish-yellow :
punctuation blacker and smaller, the row of points on the pronotum is
not so straight; scutellum throughout with a submarginal black line
except on the basal clevation: abdomen yellow, with a large black patch

32 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [ Nowd,

in the middle from which proceed black rays running along the anterior
margins of the segments and between these rays are small transverse
black lines (Voll.). Long 3—4 mill. g ; 4—4 3 mill. ¢.

Reported from Japan, Cochin-China, Burma, India, Ceylon, Timor,
Sumatra; the Indian Museum has examples from Java, Calcutta, Sib-
sigar and Dikrang valley (Assam). The Sumatran specimens have the
yellow inclined to orange, those from Bengal are paler.

16. CoprosoMA PARDALINA, Stal.
En. Hem. y, p. 13 (1876).

Yellow: pronotum behind the middle and on the impressions, finely,
punctured, the scutellum rather more strongly punctured, the punctures
on the scutellum confluent in subreticulate and irregularly confluent
masses and small lines, posteriorly less numerous, finer on the basal
half: head semicircularly rounded before the eyes, margin narrow
tylus and two triangular spots black: pronotum with the two typical,
black transverse lines before the middle: pectus and venter black ;
ventral limbus and double row of lateral spots on each segment, flaves-
cent; the anterior spot large, subtransverse, posterior spot small, some-
times very minute. Lasily distinguished from QO. cribraria by the head
anteriorly more gradually rounded, dorsal punctuation stronger, marking
blacker and more extended and the absence of lateral spots produced in
long rays on the venter. Very like C. lyncew, Stal, from Australia, differs
in the punctuation and the black dorsal marking also in the sparingly
punctulate base of scutellum and the ventral marking (Stal) Long, 4 ;
breadth of pronotum, 35 mill,

Reported from India.

17. CoprosoMA NEPALENSIS, Westwood.

_ Coptosoma nepalensis, Westwood, Hope Cat. Hem. i, p. 17 (1837) : Stal. En.
Hem. v, p. 13 (1876). }

Thyreocoris nepalensis, Germar, Zeitschr, i, (i), p. 28 (1839).

Thyreocoris circumscriptus, Germar, l. c. p. 29 (1839).

Coptosoma nepalense, Dallas, List. Hem. i, p. 63 (1851).

Coptosoma circumseriptum, Dallas, 1. c. p. 63 (1851) : Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 86
(1867).

Coptosoma cinctum, Vollenhoyen, Faune Ent. l’Arch. Indo-Néer. i, p. 46 (1863).

Brassy black, very shining, punctured : head small, with two whit-
ish cuneate spots before the eyes: pronotum with a very slender lateral
and anterior border (interrupted in the middle), and a sublateral, an-
gulated line, whitish ; two small basal dots and a slender border on the
scutellum, whitish; antenne pale fuscous: feet whitish; femora fus-

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 33

cescent at the base; abdomen seneous; margin and sublateral spots,
whitish (Westw.). Body long, 4 mill.

Reported from Nepal. The Indian Museum has specimens from
Sikkim.

18. Coprosoma cinctTa, Esch.

Scutellera cincta, Esch. Dorpat Abh. i, p. 161 (1822) ; Entomographia, p. 105
1822).
cori seminulum, Burm. Nov. Ac. Ac. Leop. xvi, Sup. i, p. 290 (1834).
Thyreocoris variegatus, Herr. Schiff. Wanz. Ins. iv, p. 83, t. 134, f. 414 (1839).
Thyreocoris cinctus, Germar, Zeitschr. i, (i), p. 27 (1839).

Coptosoma cinctum, Dallas, List Hem.i, p. 64 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.
89 (1867) ; Stal, Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. p. 613 (1870).

Coptosoma cincta, Stal, Hn. Hem. vy, p. 13 (1876).

Head somewhat longer than broad, forming anteriorly a stout
angle, yellow; a median line, dark brown: eyes large, yellow : antennz
as long as the thorax, yellow, second joint shortest: thorax twice as broad
as long, strongly excised anteriorly and much narrower than behind,
sides weakly excised, surface convex, thickly punctured, black-brown :
entire side-border yellow (with a brown longitudinal line on the anterior
half), sides of fore-borders, a transverse line interrupted in the middle
on the anterior half, and another irregular line in the middle towards the
posterior margin: scutellum broad as long, posteriorly entirely obtuse,
anteriorly convex, sloped posteriorly, grossly punctured, black-brown ;
the broad fore-border and the narrow outer margin smooth, yellow; with
yellow dots in the middle: hemelytra yellow at the base: beneath and
pectus pale grey: abdomen black, shining, punctured, the margin of
each segment with a stout three-cornered yellow spot: feet yellow
(Esch.). Long, 23;—3; broad, 2—2% mill.

Reported from Philippines. Specimens most probably representing
this species come from Assam and Ceylon. Differs from C. nepalensis,
Westw. in its smaller size and proportionately larger and more numerous
yellow marks above.

19, CoprosoMA SPH@RULA, Germar.

Thyreocoris spherula, Germar, Zeitschr. ; (i) p. 25 (1839) ; Herr. Schaff. Wanz
v, p. 15 and 30, t. 150, f. 476 (1839).

Coptosoma spherulum, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 64 (1851).

Coptosoma spherula, Vollenhoven, Faune, Ent. l’Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 47 (1863) ;
Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 86 (1867) ; Stal, Hn. Hem. v, p. 14 (1873).

Bronzed black, shining, finely punctured: head without a spot;
antennz brownish-yellow : pronotum with a fine double border, yellow,

extending from the anterior almost up to the posterior angles: scutellum
5

34. KE. T. Atkinson—Nofes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

bordered with yellow, except at its base: hemelytra brown with a broad

yellow border. Beneath, head black, pectus dull black with a transparent

yellow border at the anterior angles: abdomen shining bronzed black,

with a slight edging and with small sub-costal lines, yellow: feet

yellowish-brown, deeper towards the coxee (Voll.). Long, 2—3 mills.
Reported from Java, China, Ceylon, N. Bengal.

20. CoprosoMA PARYULA, Dallas.
Coptosoma parvulum, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 65 (1851) : Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.
87 (1867).
Coptosoma parvula, Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 15 (1876).

3, %. Black, shining, convex, broader behind, very finely and dense-
ly punctured : head with a small reddish spot on each side before the
eyes; the tylus reaching the anterior margin: eyes reddish brown:
thorax with a faint transverse furrow across the middle; the anterior
portion of the lateral margins yellow: scutellum wider behind, with a
distinct transverse impressed line, near the base: hemelytra margined
with yellow at the base: body beneath black: abdomen with the outer
margin and a submarginal spot on each side of each segment, orange :
legs pale brownish orange, with the base of the femora brown: antennz
pale brownish orange, with the apical joint darker. (Dallas.) Long,

3—s mill.

Reported from India.

21. CoprosoMA CICATRICOSA, Dallas.
Coptosoma cicatricosum, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 66 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i,

p. 87 (1867).
Coptosoma cicatricosa, Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 15 (1876).

&. Body and abdomen black, shining, punctured: head rugose,
eyes red: the lateral margins of the thorax much dilated, distinctly
emarginate in front of the lateral angles; a strong transverse punctured
furrow across the disc before the middle: scutellum with a strong trans-
verse furrow at the base, the included space not elevated; the whole
surface covered with smooth reddish, elevated spots, with the interstices
thickly punctured: pectus grey, obscure: legs black: rostrum pitchy
red with the apex black: antennze black (Dallas). Long, 6; mill.

Reported from N. India.

22. CoprTosoMA XANTHOCHLORA, Walker.

Coptosoma wanthochlora, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 87 (1867).

Luteous, thinly and largely punctured, a little longer than broad :
head about one-third of the breadth of the pronotum, with an abbreviated

1887. | K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 35

transverse black line onthe hind border and with two short piceous
longitudinal lines in front: pronotum with a large green patch on each
side of the posterior margin: scutellum green, except the fore-part where
there is a distinct abbreviated transverse furrow : pectus with a black
disc : abdomen beneath, with black points on each side (Walker). Body
long, 45—53 mill.

Reported from India.

23. CoprosoMA INTEGRA, Walker.
Coptosoma integra, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 88 (1867).

A§neous-black, largely punctured: head a little more than one-
third of the breadth of the pronotum, luteous along each side in front:
pronotum with a luteous transverse line which extends along the anterior
border and is dilated on each side where it includes a slender black
streak: scutellum with the border luteous, not excavated at the tip, with
a transverse furrow in front: abdomen beneath, Iuteous on each side:
legs luteous (Walker). Body long, 23—3 mill.

Reported from India.

24. CoptTosoMA BREVIS, Walker.
Coptosoma brevis, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 89 (1867).

Black, very minutely punctured, not longer than broad: head one-
third of the breadth of the thorax with a broad curved yellow stripe on
each side in front: eyes red: antenne tawny: pronotum with two
yellow lateral stripes which are interlined with black; the forepart
with two narrow, yellow, slightly interrupted and undulating bands:
scutellum bordered with yellow, except in front, where there is a yellow
band: abdomen beneath, yellow on each side; legs yellow. Differs
from OC. spherula, Germ. in the continuous band at the base of the
scutellum and from C. hilaris, Walker, by the speckled scutellum
(Walker). Body long, 3—3%¢ mill.

Reported from Burma.

The following species of this sub-family may be noted as likely to
occur in India.

Tarichea chinensis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 74 (1851). China.

Calacta lugubris, Stal, A. S. E. F. (4:s.) v, p. 163 (1865). Hongkong.

Coptosoma tigrina, Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 18 (1876). Cochin-China.

Coptosoma punctiventris, Stal, l.c., p. 13. Malacca.

25. CoprosoMA ASSAMENSIS, Atkinson.

Proc. A. 8. B. p. 174 (1886).
Bronzed-black, shining, very closcly and finely punctured: juga

36 K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. No.4,

yellow, with a very fine blackish external limbus: eyes large, pro-
minulous, deep castaneous: lateral margins of pronotum (enclosing
anteriorly a black longitudinal streak) broadly forward, narrowly hind-
ward, also four oblong transverse spots (2 and 2) on anterior part, the
pair nearest anterior margin smaller, and a broadly oval spot at each
posterior basal angle, yellow: the third basal part of scutellum, black
arcuate hindward, with two yellow, oblong, transverse elongate spots
before the basal impression: sides very broadly and apical two-thirds
rather sordid yellow, thickly and coarsely punctured fuscous, with a
large rounded black spot in the middle of each posterior angle : abdomen
beneath shining black ; feet sordid flavescent. Long, 23—38,; broad, 25
mill.
Reported from N. E. Assam.

Subfam, Cypnina, Stal.
En. Hem. vy, p.17 (1876) :— Cydnida, Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p.18 (1864) : Cydnini,
Schiddte, Nat. Tidsskr. p. 454 (1849) : Cydnide, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 109 (1851) ;

Walker, Cat. Het, i, p. 147 (1867) : Cydnides, Signoret, A. 8. HE. F. (6 8.) i, p. 25
(1881).

Antennz remote from the lateral margins of the head, inserted near
the base of the head, or not more remote therefrom than the anterior
margin of the eyes, 4-5 jointed: rostrum 4-jointed, rising near the
labrum and apex of the head: scutellum variable, moderate or very
large: costal margin of corium prominulous beyond the lateral margins
of the body throughout its entire length, or at least for half its length :
first ventral segment, or at least the sides, covered by the metastethium,
the extreme posterior margin only visible: lateral margins of venter
completely entire, not incised between the segments, the angles of the
segments not prominulous: tibie spinose : propleura convex, posteriorly
depressed (Stal).

Sec. I CypnipEs, Signoret.

A. 8. E. F. (68.) i, p. 25 (1881) ; iii, p. 521 (1883) : Cydnida, Stal, Hem. Afric.
i, p. 11 (1864).

Having piliferous points on the vertex and the pronotum both in
front near the anterior margin and also on the disc near the transverse
impression and above. These piliferous points exist almost in the same
places in all species—four on the disc of the head, of which two are
situate above the eyes, one on each side, and two towards the tip of the
lateral lobes (juga) ; six on the pronotum of which four are situate on
the anterior margin, and two lateral on the disc near the transverse
impression. Where the pile or hairs are wanting, their existence is

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 37

indicated by points or dots which do not occur amongst the second
section comprising the Sehirides. The generic characters of the Cydnides
are chiefly drawn from the piliferous points or dots other than those men-
tioned which are especially found along the lateral margins of the
head, the pronotum or the hemelytra.

Genus CrpHaLocteus, Leon Dufour.

A. 8. E. F. (1 8.) iii, p. 342 (1834) ; Am. & Serv. Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém., p. 94
(1843) ; Fieber. Eur. Hem. p. 83, 362 (1861) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 163 (1867) ;
Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 21 (1876) ; Signoret, A. S. E. F. (6 8.) i, p. 38 (1881) :—Cephaloc-
tenus, Schiddte, Kroyer’s Tidsskr. iv, p. 330 (1843) ; (28s. ) ii, p. 449 (1849).

Eyes hardly visible, composed only of a small tubercle surmounted
by one or two others ; ocelli absent: head longer than broad, spinulose,
ciliated on the margin and the vertex ; the juga are longer than the tylus
which is, however, free in front: antennse 5-jointed, the first joint is the
longest, the two last shortest, globose: rostrum reaching the interme-
diate pair of feet: the second joint stoutest and longest: pronotum
twice as broad as long, very pilose on the sides and on part of the disc:
scutellum longer than broad, acuminate: hemelytra shorter than the
abdomen, membrane very short, veinless, also the corium which is bor-
dered with numerous hairs and has some on the disc: wings rudimen-
tary: feet short and stout ; femora amplified ; the intermediate and last
tibise much ciliated over their whole surface; the first pair with ten
spines on the outer side, apparently mobile, and increasing in length and
breadth from base to tip, the internal side furnished with four spines
having very long hairs ; tarsi long and slender; claws with appendages
in the form of bristles: abdomen with numerous hairs on the disc and
on the sides, the ostiolar canal more or less confused in the mesosternal
groove with the ostiole towards the middle and forming an oblique open-
ing with a distinct margin at the base and almost none at the tip (Sign.).

26. CEPHALOCTEUS MELOLONTHOIDES, Schiddte.
Cephaloctenus melolonthoides, Schiddte, in Kréyer’s Nat. Tidsskr. iv, p. 332
(1843).
Cephalocteus melolonthoides, Stal, Hn. Hem. v, p. 21 (1876): Sign, A. S. E. F. (6
s.) i, p. 40 (1881).

Fuscous or piceous, with ferruginous hairs ; scutellum and hemely-
tra at the apex of a weaker colour, membrane albescent at the apex: an-
tenne and rostrum ferruginous: neck pale yellow: feet rufous; pos-
terior tibize piceous, spines fuscous ; all the tarsi pale. Head occupying
almost one-sixth of the length of the body, broader than long by one half,
somewhat convex, impressed towards the sides with some unequal punc-

38 BE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

tures ; anterior margin of the head between the somewhat exserted eyes.
broadly rounded, deeply incised in the middle: sides of clypeus con-
verging towards the apex, united by a small transverse furrow behind
the middle: pronotum at least twice as broad as its median length,
scarcely twice as long as the head, narrower than the basal breadth by
one-third at apex, convex, the convexity transverse, almost the third part
of a circle; disc often flatly impressed in the middle, convexly sloped
anteriorly and at the sides; densely and minutely punctured, somewhat
smooth towards the anterior angles: scutellum almost twice as long as
the pronotum, longer by a fourth than the basal breadth, somewhat con-
vex, densely punctured ; anterior angles very acute; lateral margins,
straight, apex broadly rounded : hemelytra as broad as half of the an-
terior margin of the scutellum, densely punctured, somewhat convex,
sides convexly sloped, externally rounded: venter somewhat smoothish,
with ferruginous hairs (Schiddie). Long, 3¢ mill. |
Reported from Travancore.

Genus Strparopus, Dallas.

List Hem. i, p. 111, 125 (1851) : Walker Cat. Het. i, p. 166 (1867) : Stal, En.
Hem. v, p. 13 (1876): Sign. A. S. EH. F.(6 8.) i, p. 43 (1881). Includes Pachyc-
nemis, Jakowleff, Hém. Cauc., Trudy Russ. Ent. Obch, viii, p. 54 (1875).

Head very little longer than broad, rounded in front, with the apex.
very slightly emarginate ; the margins closely set with spines, the juga
meeting beyond the tylus; eyes of moderate size, globose, prominent :
ocelli very large, distant, placed close to the anterior margin of the pro-
notum : antenne short, not twice the length of the head, five-jointed, gra-
dually increasing in thickness from the base to the apex; basal joint.
short, second very small, third longest, gradually thickened towards the
apex, fourth and fifth ovate: rostrum slender, reaching the posterior
coxee, inserted close to the apex of the head ; basal and third joints about.
equal, second and fourth also about equal, longer than the others, fourth
thinnest: body oblong-ovate: thorax a little broader than long, almost
semicircular in front: scutellum rather longer than broad, with the apex
broad. Membrane well developed, passing beyond the apex of the abdo-
men, with longitudinal veins: anterior tibie compressed, cheliform,
slightly curved, with tbe basal half of the outer margin spinose, the in-
ner margin fringed with hairs, especially at the apex; tarsi inserted at
about one-third of the length of the tibie from the apex, very long and
slender, three-jointed; basal joint very long, forming more than half
the tarsus, second shortest, third about half as long as the first; inter-
mediate tibiee somewhat clavate, strongly curved, thickly set with spines
on the outside, especially towards the apex; tarsi inserted at the apex

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 39

of the tibie, rather short, three-jointed, apical joint longest, second short-
est; posterior legs very stout, rather short; femora very broad, some-
what compressed ; tibie very short, sparingly spinous on the outside,
much enlarged and abruptly truncated at the extremity, forming a large
oval disc, surrounded by closely set spines ; these spines at the extremity
of the inner margin run in a single oblique line across the inner surface
of the tibie, towards the upper margin and in the angle formed by
this row of spines with the truncated posterior margin, the tarsi are
inserted, and lie so concealed by the ring of spines surrounding this mar-
gin as to elude detection except upon a very close examination; the
tarsi are short, three-jointed, the apical joint largest, the basal joint very
little longer than the second (Dallas).

27. STIBAROPUS LATIPES, Westwood.

Cydnus latipes, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 18 (1837): Stal, En. Hem. v,
p. 26 (1876).

Stibaropus brunneus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 125, t. 3, f. 1 (1851) ; Walker, Cat.
Het. i, p. 166 (1867) ; Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 17 (1876).

Stibaropus latipes, Signoret, A. 8. H. F. (6 8.) i, p. 44, t. 1, f. 4 (1881).

9. Head, thorax and scutellum pitchy castaneous, more or less trans-
versely rugose: head castaneous in front with the vertex pitchy: ocelli
red : thorax with a shallow furrow across about the middle, in front of
which is a distinct, transverse, elevated line; the portion of the thorax
behind the furrow is finely transversely rugose as also the scutellum
which is furnished with a few scattered punctures. Corium and clavus
castaneous-brown, finely and densely punctured ; membrane pale brown-
ish-yellow, semitransparent: body beneath pale castaneous, impunctate ;
abdomen clothed with short hairs and with the apex pitchy: legs pale
castaneous, with the posterior tibie, darker; anterior tibie with the
apex black; tarsi reddish: rostrum and antenne reddish testaceous ,
antenne darker (S. brunneus, Dallas., Long, 105 mill.

Reported from N. India.

28. Sriparopus moueinus, Schiddte.

Scaptocoris molginus, Schiédte, Kréyer’s Nat. Tidsskr (2s.) ii, p. 458 (1849).
Stibaropus molginus, Stal, En. Hem. v, p, 17 (1876) : Sign. A. S. EH. F. (6 8.) i, p.
45 (1881).

Suboval: rostrum as long as the pectus: second joint of the an-
tennze longer by half than the third: scutellum transversely rugose,
broadly rounded at the apex: hemelytra punctured, piceous-castaneous ;
vertex and anterior part of pronotum, black piceous: clavus and exterior
margin of corium on the hemelytra, castaneous-rufous: beneath with

40 EK. T. Atkinson-- Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. I,

feet castaneous: pleura piceous; first pair of tibie black at the
apex. Head very densely rugulose: last joint of the antenne oblong-
oval, as large as the third : second joint of the rostrum a little thickened,
distinctly curved: anterior part of the pronotum minutely reticulose,
the reticulation unequal, posterior part transversely rugulose, the wrink-
lets equal, very dense, punctulate : scutellum as long as the pronotum,
rugulose like the posterior part of the pronotum, exceeding by one-sixth
the basal breadth ; a little dilated at the extreme tip, broadly rounded,
almost truncated, margin broadly depressed : hemelytra distinctly punc-
tured ; exterior area of corium divided into two parts by a straight
stria; marginal part narrow, puuctulate, the anterior part broad, very
smooth: membrane flavescent (Schiddte). Long, 94—10% mill.

Reported from Rangpur (Bengal) : a single specimen from Jalpai-
gori.

29. STIBAROPUS TABULATUS, Schiddte.

Scaptocoris tabulatus, Schiddte, Kréyer’s Nat. Tidsskr. (2 s.) ii, p. 459 (1849).
Stibaropus tabulatus, Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 17 (1876): Sign. A. S. EH. F. (6 s.)
i, p. 45 (1881).

Briefly obovate: rostrum as long as the pectus: second joint of
antennse one-fourth longer than the third: scutellum transversely stria-
ted, acutely rounded at the apex: hemelytra smooth. Weakly fulvous-
castaneous ; a double somewhat ring-shaped patch on the anterior part
of the pronotum and the humeral protuberances, piceous: first pair of
tibize fuscous at the apex; a transversely linear black spot near the pos-
terior margin of the fifth ventral segment, somewhat triangularly dilated
forwards in the middle of the segment: last ventral segment in ¢,
piceous. Head strongly rugose: last joint of the antennez elongate.
Sovate, one fourth longer than the third : second joint of rostrum curved
as regards the form of the anterior sete : pronotum more distinctly con-
stricted than in S. molginus and more narrowed towards the apex, an-
terior part more deeply reticulose, posterior part transversely striated,
the strie robust, here and there confluent : scutellum scarcely longer than
the pronotum, exceeding by one sixth the basal breadth, transversely
striated, the strie rather regular, deep, gradually more distant towards
the apex; apex scarcely dilated, acutely rounded, margin narrowly de-
pressed : hemelytra smooth or very obsoletely punctured, exterior area
of corium divided by an inwardly arched stria; marginal part broad,
interior part narrow, linear, dilated towards the apex: membrane flaves-
cent (Schiddte). Long, 7 mill.

Reported from Travancore.

———

1887. ] BK. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 41

30. Srrparopus CALLipus, Schiddte.
Scaptocoris callidus, Schiddte, Nat. Tidsskr. (1 s.) ii, p. 460 (1849).
Stibaropus callidus, Stal, En. Hem. vy, p. 17 (1876): Sign. A. S. E. F. (6s.)
i, p. 46 (1881).

Obovate : rostrum as long as the prosternum: second joint of the
antenne as long as the third: scutellum somewhat convex, rugosely
punctured, rounded at the apex : hemelytra minutely punctured. Ferru-
ginous-castaneous, anterior part of the pronotum and base of the scutel-
lum and hemelytra more obscure: apices of femora usually piceous, first
pair of tibie fuscous at the apex: last ventral segment in ¢@ with a
blackish spot. Head densely punctured, punctuation rugose: last joint
of antennee oval, one-fourth longer than the third: second joint of ros-
trum straight, third roundly dilated above: anterior part of pronotum
very minutely reticulose, the reticulation unequal, disc usually somewhat
smooth, posterior part deeply and densely punctured, the punctures trans-
verse, here and there confluent: scutellum one-fourth longer than the
pronotum, longer by half than the basal breadth, punctures transverse,
very dense at the base, here and there confluent, more distant towards —
the apex and gradually decreasing in size; apex scarcely dilated, obso-
letely margined, broadly rounded: the hemelytra minutely punctured ;
exterior area of corium without a dividing line; with a longitudinal im-
pression at the base, deeply punctured, remotely and very minutely punc-
tured towards the apex: membrane whitish (Schiddte). Long, 5—5z mill

Reported from Serampur (Bengal). Found flying in the evening
on the banks of the Hughli river.

31. SrIBaRorus FLAVIDUS, Signoret.

Stibaropus fiavidus, Sign., A. S. H. F. (6 8.) i, p. 47, t. 2, f. 6 (1881).

Yellow, rugose: head semi-horizontal, semi-perpendicular, the tylus
shorter than the juga, with two bristles at the tip, the juga with six:
eyes very prominent ; ocelli almost pedunculate or at least borne on a
small tubercle: rostrum reaching the insertion of the intermediate feet,
the first joint very long: the second joint of the antennz very short,
the third thrice as long as the second, the first almost as long as the third:
pronotum rugose, twice as broad behind as in front, the anterior border
_ marginate; a transverse groove beyond the middle; lateral margins
pubescent: scutellum longer than broad, rugose, almost carinate in the
middle, broadly rounded at the tip: hemelytra long, finely punctured;
membrane broad, white, with five veins: feet robust, pubescent, spinose,
the anterior small; tibiz curved, concave beneath, having the tarsi
inserted before the tip; the posterior very stout, the tibiz ending ina

6

A2 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

robust, spinose stump : abdomen pubescent ; ostiolar canal much grooved,

reaching three-fourths of the metasternum and ending in a rounded lobe

with the odoriferous aperture invisible. Allied to S. callidus. Schiddte,

differs in having the second joint of the antenne shorter than the third;

and the rostrum being longer (Sign.). Long, 6; broad, 23 mill.
Reported from N. India.

32. Srrparopus (?) minor, Walker.
Stibaropus minor, Cat. Het. i, p. 166 (1867).

Piceous, elliptical, convex, shining ; head slightly rugulose, about
one-third of the breadth of the thorax: rostrum, antenne and legs fer-
ruginous: thorax minutely punctured in front of the antemedial trans-
verse furrow; hind part transversely rugulose : scutellum minutely rugu-
lose, with a transverse impression very near the tip: legs incrassated ;
tibie clavate, setose; tarsi slender: hemelytra minutely punctured ;
membrane pale cinereous (Walker). Long, 5; mill.

Reported from Burma. ~ ;

33. STIBAROPUS (?) TESTACEUS, Walker.
‘Stibaropus testaceus, Walker; Cat. Het. i, p. 166 (1867).

Testaceous, oval, thick, convex, shining: head somewhat conical,
slightly rugulose, about one-third of the breadth of the thorax which is
thickly and minutely punctured, with a transverse median furrow:
scutellum transversely and minutely rugulose: legs short ; tibie setose ;
anterior femora and tibie thick ; hind femora and tibis much incras-
sated: hemelytra very minutely punctured; membrane pale cinereous
(Walker). Long, 5; mill.

Reported from India.

Genus Lactistes, Schiddte.

Kréyer’s Nat. Tidsskr. (28.) ii, p. 456 (1849); Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 17 (1876),
Sign. A. 8. E. F. (5 8.) ix, p. clxxii (1879) ; 1. c. (68.) i, p. 48 (1881).

In this genus, as in the preceding, the anterior tarsi appear to be
inserted before the end of the tibiew, due to a prolongation of the end’ of
the tibia (which is itself more or less emarginate) arising from the
union of the apical spines. Head normally ciliated : juga inclosing the
tylus: vertex more or less rugulose ; eyes spinose at the base: prono-
tum much narrower in front, with a median transverse impression :
corium almost twice as long as the membrane, the latter extending
slightly beyond the abdomen : ostiolar canal more or less rugose, with
the ostiole in an emargination beneath and usually accompanied by a

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. AZ

small hook-shaped tongue (Sign.). In Stibaropus, the posterior tibia
are thickened; in Lactistes, they are slender; in Scoparipes, they have
a longitudinal row of brush-shaped hairs, and in Adrisa, they are cylin-
drical. Schiddte separates Cephalocteus and Lactistes thus :—

Cephalocteus. Lactistes.

Tarsi equal, very minute. Pos- Tarsi unequal, first pair longer,
terior tibize clavate, setose, exter- last tibie narrow, compressed,
nally very spiny. First tibie pec- spiny. First tibie pectinate,
tinate, truncate. hamate.

34. LACTISTES RASTELLUS, Schiddte.

Lactistes rastellus, Schiddte, Kréyer’s Nat. Tidsskr. (2 s.) ii, p. 457 (1849) :
Stal, Overs. K. V.-A. Forh. p. 614 (1870) ; En. Hem. v, p. 17 (1876): Sign. A. S.
E. F. (6 s.) i, p. 49, t. 2, f. 8 (1881).

Blackish-brown, shining, oval: first pair of tibiee rounded internally
before the apex: third joint of antenne one-fourth shorter than the
second which is cylindrical. One-half longer than its greatest breadth
before the base of the pronotum ; somewhat convex, shining, castaneous,
the antenne and feet of a weaker colour. Head shorter by one-third
than its greatest breadth through the eyes, rugosely punctured, flattish,
margin somewhat elevated, minutely incised in the middle, frontal striae
converging from the median length : rostrum reaching the intermediate
cox, second joint straight above: antenne exceeding the head by one-
fifth, first and second joints of the same length, cylindrical, the second twice
as slender, third obconical, last two equal, ovate, one-fourth longer than the
third: pronotum one-sixth longer than the anterior breadth, shorter by
half than the basal breadth, convex, somewhat flatly sloped towards the
apex, distinctly constricted behind the middle, densely punctured, pos-
terior margin and anterior protuberances very smooth; sides sinuated
behind the middle; anterior angles obtuse, posterior angle somewhat
straight, callous, prominulous beyond the margin of the hemelytra :
scutellum as long as the pronotum, scarcely exceeding the basal breadth,
rather densely punctured, apex somewhat deflexed, somewhat obtuse:
hemelytra densely punctured, membrane hyaline (Schiédte). Long,

+ mill.

Reported from Serampur (Bengal), Philippines.
35. LACTISTES VICINUS, Signoret.

Lactistes vicinus, Sign., A. S. H. F. (6 8s.) i, p. 50 t. 2, f. 9 (1881).

2. Close to L. rastellus, Schiddte, but differs from it in the much
shorter, broad, and rounded tip of the tibiz, in the internal edge of the

44 BK. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

tibie being without tubercles, whilst the external edge has 5-6 robust
spines or teeth. Head rounded, emarginate in front, juga united with the
tylus, borders with a rim ; less rugose: pronotum punctured, margins
ciliated: hemelytra with three piliferous points: abdomen punctured :
the ostiolar canal more sinuous in front and behind, ending in a lobe
more angularly rounded, with a small tooth at the emargination: smooth
part of the mesosternum punctured: third joint of antennz oval, as
long as the second but stout; 4-5 joints are equal and longest (Sign.)-
Long, 7+; broad, 33 mill.
Reported from N. India.

36. LAcTISTES TRUNCATO-SERRATUS, Signoret.
Lactistes truncato-serratus, Sign., A. S. EH. F. (6 8.) i, p. 51, t. 2, f. 10 (1881).

@. In colour and form like L. vicinus, Sign., but differs especially
in the dilated prolongation of the posterior tibie which is short and
presents at the last spine of the external side two emarginations that
form three rounded teeth: the tarsi are very long. Head rounded,
emarginate in front, the tylus shorter than the juga but free, the juga
not touching at the tip: pronotum more punctured, with two irregular
smooth spaces on the anterior dise: scutellum less densely punctured :
hemelytra without piliferous points: abdomen punctured on the sides,
on the mesosternum in the glossy lateral part, and on part of the metaster-
num and near the insertion of the posterior femora: the episternum
much punctured: the ostiolar canal very irregular, ending in a small
lobe, rounded, with a valveless emargination, not a tooth (Szgn.). Long,
73; broad, 35 mill.

Reported from N. India.

Genus Scopariprrs, Signoret.

B. 8. E. F. (5 s.) ix, p. clxxii (1879); lc. p. 235 (1879): 1. c. (6 8.) i, p.
202 (1881).

Distinguished by the form of the posterior tibie in the $ which
are long, flattened, more narrow at the base and at the tip and have on
the internal surface a line or edge furnished with short, stiff hairs very
close, and the same line but with a few hairs only in the @ ; on the
external surface, there are spines as in the other genera of this section.
Head more or less rounded and furnished on the margin with hairs and
rather stout spinules; antenng 5-jointed of which the third is shorter
than the second: ostiolar canal broad, grooved transversely and ending
in a broad lobe with the lower opening surrounded by a kind of hood

(Sign.).

1887. | K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. AS

37. ScOPARIPES LONGIROSTRIS, Signoret.
Scoparipes ? longirostris, Sign., A. S. E. F. (6 s.) i, p. 205, t. 7, f. 24 (1881).

Brown-black; somewhat parallel, elongate: rostrum and tarsi,
yellowish : two first joints of the antenne, black, the rest brownish.
Head rounded in front, striated, finely punctured, spinulose, and ciliated
on the margin : second joint of the antennz longer than the third: ros-
trum very long, reaching the second ventral segment, the joints almost
equal, the second joint much arched: pronotum almost square, anterior
angles rounded, anterior border much emarginate, and strongly im-
pressed, finely punctured, also the lateral margins and on the median
transverse line ; much ciliated on the borders: scutellum rounded, im-
pressed at the tip and very concave; disc punctured: hemelytra shorter
and narrower than the abdomen, finely punctured, with 7-8 piliferous
points on the external side; membrane brown: feet black: anterior
tibiz, broad, with the usual spines: abdomen glossy in the middle,
punctured and striated on the sides (Szgn.). Long, 12; broad, 6 mill.

Reported from India P |

Genus Aprisa, Am. & Serv.

Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 89 (1843): Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 20 (1876) : Signoret.
A.S. EH. F. (6 s.) i, p. 205 (1881). Includes Acatalectus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 110,
122 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 64 (1867) and Geobia, Montr. Ann, Soc. Linn. Lyon.

(2 s.) v, p. 245 (1858).

Distinguished by its 4-jointed antenne, due to the union of the
second and third joints ; first joint short, not extending beyond the ante-
rior margin of the head, second scarcely oras long as the third and fourth
together, second joint gradually thickened from base to tip and a little
pubescent, third and fourth almost of equal length and very pubescent :
second joint of rostrum thickest and longest, the fourth is shortest ,
almost as long as the first; body oval, a little convex; corium twice as
large as the membrane: scutellum angular at the tip: the meso-and
meta-sternal plaques mates very large, the upper reaching the lateral
margin above the mesosternal furrow: the ostiolar canal which reaches
the middle of the metasternal space is more or less waved and ends in a
tubercle or rounded or angulated lobe; it is emarginate beneath with a
lage valvule varying with the species: feet and abdomen normal (Sign ).

38. AprisaA macna, Uhler.

Acatalectus magnus, Uhler, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. p. 222 (1860) ; Stal, En.
Hem. v, p. 27 (1876).
Adrisa magna, Signoret, A. S. E. F. (6 8.) i, p. 206, t. 7, f£. 25 (1881).

@. Black, shining, much punctured, the punctuation more or less

46 BH. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

confluent, head rounded, emarginate, with the anterior margin narrowly
recurved, juga meeting by a point of their surface in front of the tylus,
coarsely and deeply rugosely punctured: eyes testaceous, ocelli reddish :
antenne piceous, pubescent, terminal joints paler; rostrum pitchy black,
second joint thickened ; thorax subquadrate, anterior angles a little
oblique and rounded, behind the head, a slightly elevated, irregularly
crescent-formed surface, smooth and impunetate, remaining surface very
deeply, coarsely and confluently punctured, a series of very fine punc-
tures along the lateral margins, basal margin subtruncate, smooth, with
a very few coarse punctures: scutellum shining, rugosely punctured,
impunctate at the apex: corium subopaque, very finely and closely
punctured ; membrane fuliginous, somewhat opaque, freckled with spots
of yellow, beneath scabrescently punctured, venter densely so, its disc
shining, impunctate, margins trenchant; legs deep black, shining,
anterior and middle femora ciliated beneath, with a row of long slender
spines, those upon the posterior pairs very short, tibise densely spinose
(Uhler). Long, 19; breadth of abdomen, 103 mill.
Reported from Hong-Kong.

39. ApRISA (P) CLARA, Walker.
Acatalectus clarus, Walker, Cat. Het. iii, p. 535 (1868).

Black, elliptical, rather flat: sides of the head and of the thorax
with a few bristles: head hardly punctured ; sides and fore border very
slightly reflexed: eyes, rostrum, antenne and legs, piceous: rostrum
extending to the middle coxe: 1-4 joints of the antenne successively
increasing in length: thorax sparingly aud minutely punctured, smooth,
except on each side in front of a transverse middle furrow; a ferru-
ginous patch on each hind angle: scutellum rather thinly punctured,
smooth at the base, with a narrow ferruginous border on each side:
legs stout ; femora slightly dentate beneath ; tibize spinose: hemelytra
piceous, more thickly punctured than the thorax, with two veins near
the costa and with four near the hind border; membrane colourless
(Walker). Long, 104 mill.

Reported from India.

Genus Alruvs, Dallas.

Pt., List Hem. i. p. 110 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het, i, p. 148 (1867) : Stal, Hem.
Afric. i, p. 19, 20 (1864) ; En; Hem. v, p. 18 (1876) : Sign. A. S. E. F. (6 s.) i, p.
423 (1881). Includes Cydnus, Fieber, Eur. Hem. p. 83, 363 (1861).

Body oval or ovate, slightly convex ; margins at least of the head,
pilose or setose: head rounded at the apex, juga and tylus equally long ;

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 47

buccule continued through, slightly elevated : first joint of the rostrum
not extending posteriorly beyond the buccule: antenne 5-jointed, very
often somewhat short and furnished with subfusiform apical joints;
scutellum triangular, longer than broad, frena extended almost to the
apex: corium longer than the scutellum, with the apical margin
straight : prosternum longitudinally impressed: feet moderate, femora
sparingly setose, tibiee very spinose, first pair much compressed, upper
margin spinosely pectinate (Stal).

Signoret (l. c.) restricts thus, to those species of Dallas which
have the head spinulose and ciliated and in which the ostiolar canal does
not end in a cornet or ear-shaped opening of which the borders are more
or less flattened.

40. AirHus InDICcUS, Westwood.
Cydnus indicus, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 19 (1837); Stal, En. Hem.
v. p. 26 (1876) ; Sign. An. Mus. Gen. xvi, p. 632 (1880) ; Lethierry, 1, c. xviii, p. 649
1883).
a perosus, Stal, Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. p. 214 (1853) ; Hem. Afric. i, p. 23
(1864) ; Ofvers. K. V.-A. p. 614 (1870) ; En. Hem. vy, p. 18 (1876).
Aithus impressicollis, Signoret, A. S. HE. F. (3 8.) viii, p. 923 (1861).
Aithus indicus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 114 (1851) ; Walker. Cat. Het. i, p. 155
(1867) ; Signoret, A. S. EH. F. (6 s.) ii, p. 28, t.1, £. 69 (1882).

Small, black, shining, ovate, punctured: antenne moderate ; sides
of body setose : feet moderate, black: anterior tibiz, broad, spinose, four
posterior setiferous (Westwood). Body long 6 mill.

8, 2. Oval or ovate, black-piceous: head somewhat obtusely round-
ed, rarely somewhat semicirenlar, distinctly punctured, the base and the
tylus smooth, margin slightly reflexed, remotely pilose: antenne
fuscous-piceous, apical joints of a weaker colour, somewhat short, three
last joints somewhat incrassate, second a little shorter than the third :
thorax convex, in d, impressed before the middle, rather densely and
distinctly punctured, the base and transverse space before the middle,
smooth, lateral margins remotely pilose: scutellum moderately densely
punctured: hemelytra distinctly punctured ; membrane sordid hyaline
or very slightly infuscate: sides of venter sparingly punctured: tarsi
yellow piceeus (Z/. porosus, Stal). Long, 5;—6 ; broad, 3—3} mill.

Reported from S. Africa, Madagascar, Flores, Celebes, Borneo, Java,
China, Burma, India, Bombay.

4], Aituus BoRREI, Signoret.
Aithus borrei, Signoret, A. S. EH. F. (6 8.) ii, p. 32, t. 2, f. 73 (1882).

$. Brown, oval, shining, sparingly and strongly punctured: rog-

48 HK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. PMond;

trum, antenne coxe and feet, yellow; tarsi of a lighter colour; spines
on feet, black. Head rounded, emarginate in the middle, the tylus
shorter than the juga, the latter inclosing it, the borders also defined
and posteriorly with 13-14 piliferous points on each side: vertex almost
smooth, obsoletely striated : three ocelli near the eyes : rostrum reaching
the intermediate cox, antennz short, the second joint shorter than the
third: pronotum very convex, with a strong line of dots behind the
emargination and a slight impression; others at the anterior angles
and on the transverse impression; the lateral margins sinuate and
with 13-14 ciliated points: scutellum with the tip angularly rounded,
rugosely and sparingly punctured on the disc, the base smooth : hemely-
tra strongly punctured ; the marginal side visible to the tip but indis-
tinct from the middle of the corium, and appearing crenulated, due to
the presence of nine piliferous points or dots: the internal radial vein
ending in the middle of the corium: membrane very long, of a lght
yellow hyaline and extending from near its half beyond the abdomen ;
feet yellow, with black spines ; anterior tibie very broad, with seven
stout spines, the sixth and seventh almost united as in Lactistes : abdo-
men smooth, impressed on the sides, in the space occupied by the ciliated
points and the stigmata : plaques mates striated and punctured, the up-
per ending in a point on the suture, the lower separated from the smooth
lateral space by an almost straight line; the ostiolar canal not reaching
the middle of the metasternum and ending in a reniform lobe, with a
valvular tooth in the indentation. Differs from Ae. indicus, Westw. by
its much broader head, almost smooth, and the tylus shorter than the
juga which inclose it. In Ae. indicus, the head is longer than broad be-
tween the eyes and the tylus is very narrow in front and as long as the
juga which almost inclose it (Sign.). ong, 7; broad, 4 mill.
Reported from Silhet.

42, ANTHUS PERPUNOTATUS, Signoret.

Aithus ? perpunctatus, Sign., An. Mus. Gen. xvi, p. 634 (1881); A. S. E. F.
(6 s.) ii, p. 34, t. 2, f. 75 (1882).

Black: broadly oval, convex, much punctured over its entire sur-
face, much ciliated on the head and pronotum: two glossy spaces on the
anterior disc of the pronotum, at the basal angles of the scutellum and
a median line on the latter almost carinate. Head rounded in front ;
the tylus very narrow at the tip which reaches the juga, margins slight-
ly reflexed: pronotum ciliated on the sides and on the surface near the
margin at the anterior angles; hemelytra much ciliated on the mar-
ginal side, with 12-13 piliferous points: membrane short, brown: feet
black; tarsi pale; anterior tibise with eight spines on the external side

1887. ] EK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 49

and four on the internal side: second joint of the antenne much longer
than the third: rostrum reaching the intermediate feet: ostiolar canal
ending in the middle of the episternum, much rounded at the tip which
is curved back beneath, with a valvular emargination: the episternums
with three small dull plates (plaques mates), that of the mesosternum
occupying the entire internal angle along the coxa and continued on the
suture up to the border ; the lower, or that of the metasternum, occupying
only the space above the extreme lobe of the ostiolar canal (Sign.) Hasily
distinguished by its abundant punctuation and the form of the ostiolar
canal. Long, 6; broad, 33 mill.
Reported from Khandalla (Bombay ?).

43. AitnHus mAuRUS, Dallas.

Zithus maurus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 118 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 158
(1867) ; Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 26 (1876) ; Distant, Scien. Res. 2nd Yarkand Miss. p. 3
(1879).

$, ¢%. Black somewhat shining, very thickly and finely punctured :
head as long as broad, with the anterior margin semicircular, very
faintly notched at the tip, juga not passing the tylus: ocelli not very
large, red: thorax with a faint punctured transverse furrow about the
middle, the anterior and lateral margins, and the portion of the disc be-
hind the transverse furrow, very thickly and finely punctured: scutel-
lum rather elongated, very thickly and finely punctured. Coriaceous
portion of the hemelytra pitchy castaneous, finely and rather thickly
punctured, the punctures closer on the line of the veins, near which it
is darker than on the rest of the surface; membrane brownish, trans-
parent: abdomen very thickly and finely punctured on the sides, the
middle of the disc, smooth, shining, impunctate ; the posterior margins
of the segments very minutely denticulated: legs pitchy black, with the
tarsi ferruginous: rostrum ferruginous: antenne ferruginous brown
(Dallas). Long, 6} mill.

Reported from India ?

Genus Cypnus, Fabricius.

Pt. Syst. Rhyng. p. 184 (1803) : Cydnus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 110, 120 (1851) :
Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 164.(1867) : Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 18, 19 (1864) ; En. Hem.
v, p. 20 (1876) : Sign. pt. A. S. HE. F. (6 8.) ii, p. 145 (1882). Includes Brachypelta,
Am. & Sery., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 89 (1843). 3

Body oval: head produced, semicircularly rounded at the apex and
slightly emarginate in the middle, juga longer than the tylus, contiguous
at the apex, margins reflexed, remotely ciliated ; buccule rather elevated,
higher posteriorly than anteriorly : first jomt of rostrum not extending

50 HE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. I,

beyond the buccule posteriorly : antenne 5-jointed, first joint not reach-
ing the apex of the head: the lateral margins of the thorax ciliated :
scutellum broader than long, narrow at the apex: frena extended almost
to the apex of the scutellum : costal margin of the hemelytra remotely
ciliated, apical margin waved: prosternum longitudinally excavated :
feet robust, tibie spinose, first pair compressed, upper margin spinosely
pectinated (Stal). Signoret’s diagnosis slightly differs as he makes the
tylus and juga usually equal in length and bases his differentiation from
Aithus on the ostiolar canal having at the tip a free lobe, more or less
elevated, horn-shaped and more or less flattened on the sides.

44, CYDNUS VARIANS, Fabricius.

Cydnus varians, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 187 (1803): Sfal, En. Hem. v. p. 26
(1876) ; Sign., A. S. E. F. (6 8.) ii, p. 155, t. 6, f. 92 (1882).

Aithus varians, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 6 (1868).

Cydnus cyrtomenoides, Dohrn, Stettin Ent. Zeit. p. 40 (1860).

3, ¢. Black-piceous or piceous, basal margin of thorax and feet,
paler : membrane sordid whitish : tarsi piceous-whitish : head anteriorly
very finely and remotely punctulate: thorax and hemelytra distinctly
punctured. In stature like Athus indicus, Westw., but differs in its
much smaller size, head more obtuse, anteriorly very obsoletely and
remotely punctulate, tylus very slightly narrowed forwards, antennz
much shorter, ocelli situate nearer to the eyes, thorax more narrowed
anteriorly, punctuation on thorax, scutellum and hemelytra finer, first
pair of tibie with fewer spines but apparently longer and the venter
remotely sprinkled with fine, obsolete, small punctures (Stal). Long,
4; broad 24 mill.

Reported from Bengal, Bombay, Ceylon.

45. CyYpNUS ATERRIMUS, Forster.

Cimee aterrimus, Forster, Nov. Spec. Ins. p. 71 (1771).

Cimex niger, De Géer, Mém. iii, p. 269 (1773).

Cimex tristis, Fabr., Syst. Ent. p. 716 (1775) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 124 (1794).

Cydnus tristis, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 185 (1803) : Hahn, Wanz. Ins. i, p. 161,
t. 25, f. 83 (1831).

Brachypelta tristis, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 90 (1843).

Cydnus carbonarius, Fourcroy, Ent. Paris (1785) : sec. Sign.

Cydnus spinipes, Schranck, Enum. Ins. Austr. p. 275 (1781).

Brachypelta elevata, Uhler, Proc. Ac. Sci. Phil. p. 222 (1860) ; Cydnus id, Stal,

En. Hem. v, p. 20 (1876)
Var. (b). Cydnus sanguinicollis, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 185 (1803).
Var. (c). Cydnus brunnipennis, Fabr., 1. c. p. 185 (1803).
Brachypeltus aterrimus, Signoret, A, 8, E. F. (6 8.) iii, p. 358, t. 9, £. 186 (1883.)

eet ee

1887. ] HK. T, Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota, dL

Cydnus aterrimus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 12 (1851) excl. syn. pt.; Walker, Cat
Het. i. p. 164 (1867) : Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 19 (1864) ; Hem. Fabr. i, p. 6 (1868) ;
En, Hem. v, p. 20 (1876).

Black, somewhat shining, densely and distinctly punctulate : mem-
brane whitish hyaline, margined black at the base: thorax in ¢ an-
teriorly intruded and slightly transversely elevated in the middle (Stdl.)
$, $, long, 9-13; broad 5-6 mill.

Var. b. has the antenne, and basal limbus of thorax yellow-cas-
taneous. ¢, long 12; broad, 6; mill.

Var. c. has the antenns, corium and clavus, yellow castanéous, the
corium and clavus infuscate at the base. o&, long, 9; broad 5 mill.

Oval, elongate, deep black, finely punctured: base of vertex, an-
terior disc of the pronotum, two basal angles of the scutellum, smooth,
the last a little elevated: beneath smooth, shining in the middle, the
sides more or less granulated or punctured : feet smooth, shining, some-
times of a lighter colour, femora with several rows of spinose hairs, an-
terior and middle pair with two spines at the tip: anterior tibis strong-
ly amplified, the end having eleven strong spines on the external side
and four on the internal side and at the tip, several others on the an-
terior and posterior disc: trochanters, rostrum and antenne, piceous.
Head longer than broad, margins much raised in front, without hairs on
the border and shining only those proceeding from the piliferous points on
the vertex and those anterior below the head which spring from each side of
the base of the rostrum: the tylus strongly inclosed by the juga: eyes
small, without a spine at the base: ocelli very small nearer to the eyes,
than to the median line: rostrum short, stout, scarcely extending be-
yond the anterior coxe, first joint entirely hidden by the rostral ridges
which are rather raised ; the second joint stouter, equal to the third, the
last one-third less than the preceding: first joint of the antenne short-
est, the third less than the rest, second, fourth and fifth almost equal :
anterior border of pronotum strongly emarginate and showing behind
the indentation an impression, very strong in the g and less so in the
¢: scutellum triangular, the side hardly shorter than the base, tip
angular: hemelytra with 1—3 hairs, external margin very narrow : mem-
brane almost as long as the corium and extending by one-fourth beyond
the abdomen, dull plates (plaques mates) with the angles rounded and
weakly grooved; the glossy parts and grooves closely punctured : ostiole
ending in a broad, tumid, smooth, shining plate with the posterior con-
vexity circular (Sign.). Long, 10—13 mill.

Reported from Europe, Africa, India: specimens from Hardwar
Ciew. P.).

Add perhaps

52 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. I,

Cydnus nigritus, Fabr., Ent. Syst. iv, p. 123 (1794); Sign. A. S. E. F. (6 8.),
i, p. 147, t. 6, f, 85 (1882). Reported from China, Cochin-China, Europe.

Cydnus laticeps, Sign., 1. c. p. 162, t. 7, f. 98 (1882). Reported from Hong-
Kong.

Genus Gampsotes, Signoret.
A. 8. E. F. (6 8.) ii, p. 243 (1882).

Stenocoris and Gampsotes differ from the other genera of Cydnina
in the length of the rostrum which reaches the tip of the second seg-
ment of the abdomen. In Stenocoris, the third joint of the antennz
is much smaller than the second, and the 4-5 joints equal or almost so,
whilst the base of the second joint moves in a median groove on the
mesosternum. In Gampsotes, the second joint of the antenne is longer
than the third, the third is shorter than the fourth which itself is almost
as long as the second : the base of the second joint is free, crosier-shaped
and slender, further the first joint is only partly hidden by the rostral
ridges which leave the apical half of the joint free (S7gn.).

46. GAMPSOTES PARALLELUS, Signoret.

'Gampsotes parallelus, B.S. E. F. (68.), i, p. xxix (1881) : ii, p. 243, t. 8, £. 103
(1882).

Two and half times longer than broad, parallel, piceous: antenns
especially the joints, and the tarsi ferruginous; rostrum of a lighter
colour. Head longer than broad between the eyes, finely punctured, a
little ciliated : second joint of the antenns: hardly less long than the
third, fourth and fifth longest, the latter longer than the fourth: ros-
trum very long, reaching the third abdominal segment, second joint
arched and somewhat crosier-form at the base, third joint shortest,
equal to the first, the fourth slender and long, equal to the second :
pronotum strongly emarginate in front and punctured, except on the
anterior disc and at the posterior margin, weakly ciliated on the
sides: scutellum very long, rounded at the tip, much punctured, except
at the basal angles: hemelytra very long; membrane yellow hyaline,
extending slightly beyond the abdomen, with four obsolete veins ; corium
convex at the tip, much punctured, cubital portion with two almost
complete rows of points and a third smaller towards the scutellum: feet
comparatively short, normally ciliated and spinulose; anterior tibiee
much dilated: ostiolar canal ending in an irregular tuberculous lobe:
dull plates (plaques mates) occupying almost the entire meso- and meta-
thoracic space and weakly striated: abdomen very rough on the sides
and smooth in the middle (Sign.). Long, 53; broad, 2 mill.

Reported from India.

1887. } K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 53

Genus Macroscytus, Fieber.

Eur. Hem. p. 83, 362, (1861): Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 19, 23 (1864) ; En. Hem.
v, p. 18 (1876): Sign. A. S. E. F. (6 s.) ii, p. 465 (1882).

Body oval, depressed, ciliated with rare or very rare hairs: head
flat, semicircularly or somewhat obtusely rounded; juga and tylus of
equal length; bucculse continued through : antenne 5-jointed, moderate,
filiform, second and third joints somewhat equal, somewhat longer than
the basal: scutellum triangular, longer than broad, the frena continued
almost to the apex: corium longer than the scutellum, exterior apical
angle acute: prosternum longitudinally impressed : feet moderate, tibiz
slender, first pair somewhat compressed, upper margin pectinated with
remote spines, last femora beneath armed near the apex with a spine
or tooth. Closely allied to Mthus, Dallas, differs in having the body
very remotely ciliated, margin of the head always without small spines
and especially in its habit (Stal). Signoret makes the distinguishing
characters the large scutellum and especially the presence of a spine at
the tip of the posterior femora.

47. Macroscytus roveouus, Dallas.

Aithus foveolus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 113 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 157
(1847) ; Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 25 (1876).
Macroscytus foveolus, Signoret, A. S. EH. F. (6 s.) ii, p. 472, t. 12, £. 131 (1882).

$. Head rather small, with the anterior margin rounded, entire, the
juga not meeting beyond the tylus; pitchy brown, with the margins paler
and fringed with fine bristles: ocelli very large, red: thorax pitchy
brown, with the posterior margin castaneous, anterior margin with a
faint, finely punctured, transverse fovea; lateral margins finely and
thickly punctured, and fringed with long, stout, bristles: posterior
portion of the disc finely and sparingly punctured: scutellum pitchy
brown at the base, becoming castaneous-brown towards the apex, rather
strongly but sparingly punctured ; the tip with a distinct fovea. Cori-
aceous portion of the hemelytra bright castaneous-brown, thickly and
finely punctured; membrane brownish, semi-transparent : abdomen
beneath pitchy, very smooth, shining, with the disc impunctate, the sides
thickly and finely punctured: pectus pitchy, thickly and finely punc-
tured: anterior legs pitchy red ; four posterior pitchy, with the coxe
reddish ; all the tarsi ferruginous: rostrum pitchy red, with the apex
pitchy : antenne ferruginous, dusky towards the base (Dallas). Long,
BES mull.

Reported from N, India.

54 HK. T. Atkinson— Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [ No. 1,

48. MAcROSCYTUS BRUNNEUS, Fabricius.

Cydnus brunneus, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 185 (1803). Tanger.

Aithus brunneus, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 149 (1867) excl. syn. Syria.

Cydnus prozimus, Ramb., Fauna Andal. p. 112 (1839). Spain.

Athus badius, Walker, Cat. Het. p. 159 (1867). India, Ceylon, N. China.

Var. (b.) thus opacus, Stal, Ofvers. K. V.-A., Férh., p. 214 (1853) ; Macros-
cytus id, Hem. Afric. i, p. 26 (1864) ; En. Hem. v, p. 19 (1876). Caffraria.

Var. (c.) Cimex spinipes, Fabr., Spec. Ins. ii, p. 360 (1781); Mant. Ins. ii, p.
172 (1787); Ent. Syst. iv, p. 124 (1794). Cen. Africa.

Cydnus spinipes, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 186 (1803): Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 25
(1876).

Macroscytus brunneus, Fieber, Eur. Hem. p. 362 (1861) excl. syn. pt. ; Muls. and
Rey, Pun. Fran. ii, p. 32 (1866), Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p, 6 (1868): Sign. A. S. EH. F.
(6s.) ii, p. 477, t. 14, f. 136 (1882).

Stature and size of OC. aterrimus, Forster, but entirely brunneous
and more flat, thorax not retuse nor impressed with a median Stria:
antenne 5-jointed: feet spinose: last pair of femora inwardly dentate
(M. brunneus, Fabr.).

Oval: of a more or less deep brown; the varieties brunneus and
opacus, black and spinipes more or less finely punctured: corium some-
times glossy: rostrum, base of antenne and the tarsi, yellow. Head
rounded circularly in front; tylus as long as the juga which have 5-6
hairs along the margin: vertex scarcely carinate: ocelli approximate
to the eyes: rostrum reaching the tips of the intermediate coxze: two
first jomts of the antenne, yellow; the third shorter than the second,
the fourth and fifth the longest: pronotum convex in front, transversely
flattened without an impression; borders slightly margined and with
several hairs: scutellum long, reaching three-fourths of the abdomen,
angular at the tip which is sloped, convex at the base and on the sides,
very finely punctured on the disc: hemelytra almost flat, finely punc-
tured, the radial veins scarcely prominent, the marginal side with 3-6
piliferous points; membrane short, white, hyaline, veins clouded brown :
feet obscure, more or less deeply coloured, the tarsi yellow, all the
femora spinose beneath, the posterior femora with two stouter spines
at the tip which causes the posterior tibise to become somewhat distorted
at the base, this portion is reddish and glabrous: abdomen black and
smooth with some hairs on the margin: ostiolar canal grooved ; the tip
with two lobes having a broad irregular valvule in the posterior indenta-
tion; the dull plates (plaques mates) finely striated, the upper rounded
at the anterior angle. and between it and the mesosternal groove a
smooth space which extends to the level of the tip of the ostiolar canal.
In var. opacus, there is a weak punctuation in the smooth space of the
metasternum (Sign.). Long, 8; broad, 45 mill.

Reported from Europe, Africa, Asia: China, Ceylon, India.

1887, ] KR. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 55

49, Macroscyrus Expansus, Signoret.
A. S. EH. F. (6 s.), ii, p. 479, t. 14, f. 138 (1882).

Body oblong, oval, of a blackish-brown: rostrum, base and tip of
the antenne and the feet of a lighter colour: tarsi, yellow: hemelytra
light brown; finely punctured on the posterior disc of the pronotum,
the scutellum and the hemelytra. Tylus on a level with the juga which
have six hairs; vertex weakly furrowed: third joint of the antennz
shorter than the second: pronotum with 1LO—11 hairs on the lateral
margins ; behind the emargination the points are very obsolete: scutel-
lum smooth at the base, sparingly punctured on the disc, tip angular :
membrane hyaline ; abdomen smooth in the middle, with very fine small
strie, on the sides: the mesosternal dull plate (plaque mate) finely
striated, rounded at anterior angle, separated from the mesosternal
groove by a broad glossy band which is punctured and furnished with
small strive, that of the metasternum is finely striated and punctured :
the ostiolar canal ends in a two-lobed part of which the external lobe is
broadly dilated and there is a broad rounded valve in the indentation.
Possibly only a local variety of M. brunneus, Fabr., from which it differs
in its appearance but especially in the form of the tip of the ostiolar
canal which is here much dilated and is confused with the thickened fold
of the mesosternal groove (Sign.). Long, 7; broad, 4 mill.

Reported from Bombay.

Genus Grotomus, Mulsant & Rey.
Pun, France, p. 34 (1866) ; Sign. A. S. E. F. (6 s.), iii, p. 33 (1883),

Differs from Cydnus in the absence of small spines on the head.
The rostrum is short, usually not extending beyond the intermediate
trochanters which distinguishes it from Gampsotes : the anterior border
of the pronotum is not margined which separates it from Pangeus:
the absence of the tumidity on the lateral angles of the disc of the
pronotum which conceals the real angle as in Macroscytus and the
posterior femora being spinose at the tip give sufficient characters for
distinguishing it. Moreover the ostiolar canal is terminated by a reni-
form or cornet-shaped lobe (Sign.).

50. Grotomus pramaus, Dallas.

Aithus, pygmeus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 120 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 158
(1867); Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 26 (1876).

Cydnus rarociliatus, Ellenr., Nat. Tijd. Ned. Ind., xxiv, p. 139, f. 7 (1862)
Vollen., Faun. Ent. Ind. Neerl. p. 18 (1868).

Cydnus pallidicornis, Vollen., 1. c., p. 17 (1868).

Cydnus apicalis, Horvath, Hem. Het. récoltés en Chine, p. 3 (1879).

56 HE. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 1,

Athus palliditarsus, Scott, Hem. Japan, Trans. Ent. Soc. iv, p. 309 (1880).
Geotomus jucundus, F. B. White, A. M. N. H. (4:8.) xx, p. 110 (1877).
Geotomus subtristis, F. B. White, l. c., p.111 (1877).

Geotomus ? minutus, Motsch., Sign., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. xvi, p. 650 (1880).
Geotomus pygmeus, Sign., A. S. E. F. (6 8.) iii, p. 51, t. 3, £. 160 (1883).

?. Elongate-ovate, black, shining: head with the juga sparingly
punctured ; ocelli red; thorax smooth, somewhat quadrate, transverse,
with a short line of fine punctures close to the middle of the anterior
margin, a line of similar punctures across the middle, and a few scattered
punctures on the sides, scutellum long, rather thickly and finely punc-
tured, with the base impunctate. Coriaceous portion of the hemelytra
pitchy, very thickly and finely punctured, the punctures larger along
the veins; membrane whitish; body beneath, black; abdomen thickly
and finely punctured on the sides; the disc smooth: legs pitchy ; tarsi
pale orange; antenne pale brown, with the tips of the fourth and
fifth joints paler or testaceous (Dallas). Long, 31—4; broad, 13—2
mill.

Reported from India, Sumatra, Java, New Caledonia, Japan, China,
Hawaii.

51. GxotTomUS ELONGATUS, Herrich Schiffer.

Cydnus elongatus, Herr. Schiff., Wanz. Ins. v, p. 97, t. 27, f. 546 (1839).

Cydnus oblongus, Ramb., Fauna Andal. p. 115 (1839); Fieber, Hur. Hem. p. 364
(1861).

Aithus elongatus, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 148 (1876).

Geotomus elongatus, Muls. and Rey, Pun. France, ii, p. 35, 38 (1866); Sign. A.
S. E. F. (6 8.) iii, p. 212, t. 5, f. 176 (1883).

Body oblong, elongate, parallel on the sides: black-brown, corium
a little lighter: rostrum, antenne and feet, yellow-brown ; tarsi yellow :
punctured on the head, the posterior disc and the sides of the pronotum,
the scutellum (except the basal angles), and the hemelytra. Head
rounded in front, tylus as long as the juga and presenting two hairs at
the tip, the juga with 4—5 hairs: second joint of the antenne as long as
the third, the fourth and fifth longest: rostrum reaching the base of the
intermediate coxe: pronotum slightly impressed, punctured on the
posterior disc, also on the lateral margins and behind the anterior in-
dentation ; 7—8 piliferous points on the sides: scutellum long, punc-
tured, angular at the tip, witha longitudinal impression, basal angles
smooth: hemelytra punctured, a single piliferous point on the marginal
side: membrane white hyaline: abdomen black, smooth in the middle,
sides punctured: mesosternal plate extending to the lateral margin,
metasternal plate separated from the smooth space which has two rows
of dots, by an almost straight line, concave above, convex below : ostiolar

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. o7

canal very rough, narrow at the base, very broad at the tip which forms
a much rounded lobe presenting behind a strong excavation in which is
hidden the ostiole (Sign.). Long, 4; broad 2+ mill,

Reported from Europe, Asia, Africa.

52. GEOTOMUS ABDOMINALIS, Signoret.
A. S. E. F. (6 s.) iii, p. 219, t. 9, f. 184 (1883).

¢g. Oval, elongate: pitchy brown, the hemelytra of a lighter
colour. Head rounded in front; the tylus broader in the middle than
at the tip, as long as the juga and having two hairs at the tip, the juga
with five hairs on the margin: vertex finely punctured: the second
joint of the antenne longer than the third: rostrum reaching the level
of the intermediate coxe: pronotum strongly impressed in front behind
the anterior indentation and finely punctured in that space also on the
transverse line and along the lateral margins; the transverse groove,
absent in the middle, is visible on the sides below the piliferous points ;
lateral margins with five hairs: scutellum long, narrowly rounded at
the tip, finely punctured on its disc, basal angles smooth and very
convex: hemelytra punctured, corium more sparingly: membrane
slightly smoky, hyaline, projecting beyond the abdomen which is smooth
in the middle, strongly punctured on the sides: meso- and meta-sternum
without dull plates (plaques mates), and both sparingly but broadly
punctured : ostiolar canal, broad, short, ending in a broad ear or cornet
(Sign.). Long, 3}; broad, 2 mill.

Reported from India.

Genus CuiLocoris, Mayr.

Verh. Zool. Bot. Gess. Wien, xiv, p. 907 (1864); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 170
(1867): Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 21 (1876): Sign., A. S. E. F.(68.) iii, p. 517 (1883).
Includes Amnestoides, Sign., B. S. EH. F, (5 s.) ix, p. viii. (1880).

Margin of head with erect spinules: tylus as long as the juga:
eyes prominent, ocelli distinct : antenne 5-jointed, second joint scarcely
half as long as the third: margin of pronotum anteriorly and on both
sides, elevated ; scutellum short, triangular, reaching the base of the
fourth abdominal segment: odoriferous orifice with a long furrow, with
a rounded elevated lobe at the apex: first pair of tibie gradually
broader towards the apex, externally spinosely pectinated: tarsi in-
serted at the apex of the tibie (Mayr.)

53. CHILOCORIS NiITIDUS, Mayr.

Chilocoris nitidus, Mayr, Verh. Zool.-Bot. Gess. Wien, xiv, p. 907 (1864) : Walker
Cat. Het. i, p, 170 (1867); Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 21 (1876): Distant, Trans. Ent. Soc
p. 415 (1883) ; Sign., A. S. E. F. (6 8.) iii, p. 518 (1883).

8

58 EK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. I,

Shining, piceous-black: posterior margin of the pronotum, heme-
lytra, antenne, rostrum and feet, rufous castaneous: head strongly, pos-
terior part of pronotum and hemelytra finely, and the apex of scutellum,
punctured ; membrane hyaline: abdomen smooth (Mayr). Long, 5 mill.

Reported from Kashmir.

54, CHILOCORIS PICEUS, Sign.
A. 8. E. F. (6 8.) iii, p. 518, t. 15, £. 261 (1883).

Blackish-brown, lighter on the corium and on the lateral and pos-
terior margins of the pronotum. Head broad, eyes very stout; ocelli
nearer to the eyes than to the median line; vertex with a longitudinal
impression ; the border of the head, margined ; tylus broader in the
middle than towards the tip: pronotum strongly margined in front with
a longitudinal line and impressions ; anterior disc smooth, shining, not
punctured (except on the sides which are finely punctured), transverse
groove very distinct, with a line of dots; posterior disc weakly punc-
tured: seutellum blunt at the tip, sparingly punctured on the disc,
more so but more finely on the lateral margins: hemelytra strongly
punctured along the cubital veins with two rows of lines on the clavus,
the corium very finely punctured at the tip, almost smooth at the base :
membrane hyaline yellow: meso- and meta-sternum dull: ostiolar canal
very long but not extending beyond the margin, ending in a lobe trun~-
eated at the tip, rounded behind, with a median canal which disappears
towards the terminal lobe (Sign.). Long, 35; broad 12 mill.

Reported from India. Possibly same as preceding.

55. CHILOCORIS PARUMPUNCTATUS, Sign.
A. 8. E. F. (6 s.) iii, p. 520, t. 15, f, 202 (1883).

This species is distinguishable by the serrated margins of the
pronotum and of the base of the hemelytra from the teeth of which
issue hairs, nine on the pronotum and six on the hemelytra. Light
chestnut brown, shining, weakly punctured on the head; tylus very
convex and much amplified in the middle, narrow at the tip and on the
vertex much broader than the juga: pronotum strongly margined in
front, with 3—4 stout points behind the anterior indentation, the anterior
disc smooth, shining, longer than the posterior, very convex, and se-
parated from the latter by a strong punctured impression ; beyond the
groove on the posterior disc are some twelve stouter pomts and on the
groove on each side of the eyes, 3—4 stout points: scutellum blunt,
rounded at the tip, sparingly and strongly punctured on the disc, a
little more abundantly on the sides: hemelytra sparingly punctured

1887. | K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 59

on the corium which is almost smooth, more abundantly along the
cubital suture, the clavus showing a complete line along the suture and
a half-line near the scutellum; a second line of punctures on the
external radial vein and a strong impunctate line, not extending beyond
the middle of the hemelytra, on the internal radial vein: membrane
hyaline, extending beyond the abdomen which is smooth and shining:
meso- and meta-sternum entirely dull: ostiolar canal very long, extending
beyond the mososternum, stout at the source; then narrowing and
ending in a rounded lobe which points backwards; in the middle, a
narrow groove gradually widened until it is lost in the rounded lobe
(Sign.). Long, 22; broad, 1 mill.
Reported from India.

Sec. II. Sentripus Signoret.

A. 8. E. F. (6 8.) i, p. 26 (1881) ; iii, p. 521 (1883) :—Sehirida, Stal, Hem. Afric.
i. p. 27 (1864).

Without piliferous or setigerous points or dots on the vertex and
pronotum in front near the anterior margin and on the disc near the
transverse impression and above. ‘These characters are, however, so
weak and variable that Stal was probably right in sinking the divisions
into Cydnida and Sehirida made by him in 1864 and including the
whole as one sub-family of the Pentatomide in 1876 (En. Hem, v. p.
17, 1876).

Genus PeEttoxys, Signoret.

B.S. EH. F. (5 s.) x, p. xxxiii (1880); 1. c. (6 8.) iii. p. 522 (1883). Includes
Legnotus, Stal (nec Schiédte), Hem. Fabr. p. 7 (1868); En. Hem. v, p. 22 (1876).

Scutellum short, sides almost equal at the base, tip acuminate ;
membrane very large, but not projecting beyond the abdomen: ros-
trum short, scarcely extending beyond the anterior feet: intermediate
femora ciliated and with four short spines at the tip; anterior tibia a
little dilated, the posterior tibie straight: ostiolar canal broad, long,
with an opening of one half its size (Sign.).

56. PELTOXYS BREVIPENNIS, Fabricius.

Cimex brevipennis, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppl. p. 536 (1798).

Cydnus brevipennis, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 187 (1803).

Aithus brevipennis, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 158 (1867).

Legnotus brevipennis, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 8 (1868); En. Hem. v, p. 22
(1876).

Peltoxys pubescens, Sign., B. 8. HE. F. (5 s.) X, p. xxxiii (1880).

Peltowys brevipennis, Sign., 1, c. (6 3.) iii, p. 522, t, 15, f, 203 (1888),

60 EK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [ No. 1,

¢. Black, shining, above and beneath very densely and distinctly
punctured : first joint of the antenne and the rostrum, piceous: tarsi
pale yellow piceous. Tylus remotely punctured towards the base, im-
punctate before the middle, transversely rugose: thorax in the middle
almost twice longer than the head, convex towards the sides, behind
the middle, and anteriorly transversely slightly depressed, somewhat
convex before the middle, this convex part somewhat depressed in the

middle, anteriorly somewhat sloped: clavus with two rows of punc- .

tures: corium in the interior part behind the middle with four rows
of punctures, towards the base, and on the exterior part sparsely punc-
tured : membrane fuscous, (Stal). Long, 43: broad, 2 mill.

Reported from Tranquebar, India, Saigon.

Genus Tritomeacas, Amyot & Serville.
Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 92 (1843): Signoret, A. S. E. F. (6 s.) iv, p. 50 (1884).

Second joint of the antenne much smaller than the third : plaques
mates of the episternums small : lobes of the head, unequal or equal which
causes the anterior margin to appear more or less emarginate: tylus
almost as long as the juga. Head slightly reflexed on the margins and
appearing impressed or more or less emarginate in front: pronotum ap-
pearing flattened in the margins although really possessing a marginal
ridge: median angles of the prosternum less pronounced than in the other
genera of this section and therefore the median groove is not so deep:
mesosternal ridge indistinct, metasternum smooth: ostiolar canal with
an ear-shaped small tongue very distinct, the dull plates (plaques mates)
weakly developed above and below the mesosternal groove (Sign.).

57. TRITOMEGAS BICOLOR, Linneus.

Cimex bicolor, Linnzeus, Faun. Suec., No. 936 (1761); Syst. Nat.; (ed. 18) p.
722 (1767); De Géer, Mem. iii, p. 268 (1773); Fabr., Syst. Rhyng., p. 176 (1803 :
Wolff, Icon. Cim. p. 63, t. 7, £. 69 (1801): Stoll, Pun., p. 126, t. 32, £. 224 (1788).

Cyduus bicolor, Hahn, Wanz. Ins. i, p. 192, t. 31, f. 99 (1831).

Cydnus nubilosa, Harris, Exp. Eng. Ins. 90, t. 26, f. 8 (1776).

Sehirus bicolor, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 129 (1851).

Tritomegas bicolor, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém., p. 98 (1843) Schlb. Mon.
Geoc. Fenn. p. 21 (1848): Sign., A. S. E. F. (6s), iv, p. 50, t. 2, £. 217 (1884).

More or less oval: bluish-black, shining, punctured, spotted
white; two irregular spots on the anterior angles of the pronotum,
two others at the external base of the hemelytra and two not so large
at the external angle of the corium: usually also two small white dots
at the external angle and at the base of the pronotum as in the type,
white: head indented in front, juga with a channeled rim: feet blu-
sh-brown, with a more or less broad white ring at the base of the tibie:

TO EE a

a

1887. | G. King—New Species of Ficus from New Guinea. 61

antenns brown, second joint shorter than the third, the latter some-

times twice as long as the former: dull plates (plaques mates) less

developed with some strong, deep points, especially in the mesosternal

angle: ostiolar canal very long, projecting beyond the transverse two-

thirds of the metasternum (Sign.). Long, 5-7; broad, 23-5 mill.
Common in Europe and Asia.

IV.—A second series of New Species of Ficus from New Guinea.—By
Grorce Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L. 8., Superintendent of the Royal
Botanic Garden, Calcutta.

[Received March 28rd ;—Read April 6th, 1887. ]

Since reading my paper before this Society ‘‘ on some new species
of Ficus from New Guinea,” in January last, I have received from the
distinguished botanist and explorer, Signor Beccari of Florence, materials
which enable me to describe seven additional new species from that
island. The whole of these species were collected either by Sig. Beccari
himself, or by his companion Count D’Albertis. These seven species
all belong to the third of the sub-groups defined in my paper just re-
ferred to, namely, the group characterised by having “ unisexual flowers,
the males and galls being in one set of receptacles and the fertile female
flowers alone occupying another set of receptacles.” In this group these
seven species are distributed amongst the sections Sycidium, Covellia,
Husyce, and Neomorphe, for the distinguishing characters of which I must
refer to the paper already mentioned,

SycIDIUM.

Ficus conspicabilis, King. A tree (?) the young branches and leaf-
buds covered with short deciduous yellow hairs; leaves broadly ovate or
elliptic, the apex acute or shortly acuminate, the edges entire; the base
broad, slightly unequal, sub-cordate, 7-nerved ; primary lateral nerves
about 6 pairs; secondary nerves sub-transverse, little curved; lower
surface pubescent especially on the midrib and nerves, reticulations
minute distinct ; upper surface minutely lepidote ; length of blade about
8 inches ; petiole ‘8 in.; stipules densely covered with long, yellow, silky
hairs. Receptacles large, shortly pedunculate, axillary, solitary, de-
pressed-turbinate, both base and apex very concave, the surface
wrinkled, rough, minutely tuberculate, deciduously hispid-tomentose ;
length from base to apex 1:1 in.; breadth 1:6 in.; umbilicus much

62 G. King—New Species of Ficus from New Guinea. [No. 1,

depressed, large, with numerous scales; basal bracts 3, broadly triangu-
lar ; pedicel ‘2 in. long, hispid ; female flowers sub-sessile or pedicellate,
perianth of three distinct dark-coloured pieces; ovary ovoid, smooth ;
style terminal, longer than the ovary in the sessile, shorter than the
ovary in the pedicellate flowers.

New Guinea: Sig. Beccari (Herb. Beccari, P. P. No. 651.)

Ficus mespiloides, King. A tree; the young shoots with long, tawny,
adpressed, rather stiff hairs which are ultimately deciduous ; leaves hard
and rather harsh to the touch, sub-coriaceous, petiolate, elliptic, in-
equilateral, the apex shortly cuspidate ; the edges, entire, recurved; the
base narrowed, cordate or emarginate, sometimes oblique, 5 to 7-nerved ;
primary lateral nerves about 6 pairs, prominent beneath and minutely
adpressed-pubescent as is also the midrib; the rest of the under surface-
puberulous and obscurely and minutely tuberculate; upper surface
minutely lepidote, glabrous, rigid; length of blade 5 to 7 in.; petiole
scurfy and with a few scattered adpressed fulvous hairs; 4 in. long;
stipules ovate, acute, pilose externally, ‘4 in. long. Receptacles sessile,
axillary, solitary, sub-globose (the base and apex truncate), the surfaces
with many faint vertical ridges especially towards the apex, slightly
verrucose, when young scurfy pubescent, when mature nearly glabrous ;
1 in. long by 1:3 in. broad; the umbilicus large, wide, surrounded by a
rigid but in no way projecting annulus; basal bracts 3, leaving an annu-
lar scar where they fall off: fertile female flowers ellipsoid, rather flat,
smooth, the style long, terminal ; perianth of 3 lanceolate, dark-coloured,
free pieces ; male and gall flowers unknown.

New Guinea on Mount Arfak: Sig. Beccari (Herb. Beccari, P. P.
No. 962.)

CovELLtiA.

Ficus conora King. A tree, all the young parts softly pubescent,
the young branches pale-coloured; leaves petiolate, membranous, elon-
gate-lanceolate, slightly inequilateral, the apex acuminate, the edges
entire, the base narrowed, 3-nerved ; primary lateral nerves 5 to 8 pairs,
slightly prominent beneath and, like the midrib, tomentose; the rest
of the under surface pale in colour and (in the adult state) very shortly
hispid and minutely papillose (the papille white); upper surface co-
vered with very minute white dots but no hairs; length of blade 4 to 7
inches; petioles 35 in. long, tomentose ; stipules lanceolate, pubescent
externally, ‘6 in. long. Receptacles borne on long, thin, flexuose, leafless,
nearly glabrous, branches which issue from the base of the stem, soli-
tary, long pedunculate, turbinate, the apex very broad and depressed,
the sides faintly ridged, scurfy-pubescent, and with numerous flat

1887.] G. King—New Species of Ficus from New Guinea. 63

smooth warts, 1 in. across when ripe; umbilical scales large and thick ;
basal bracts none; peduncle thick, pubescent, bearing 3, small, broadly
triangular bracts at or below the middle, varying in length from ‘5 in.
to 1°25 in.; fertile female flowers pedicillate or sessile, the ovary sub-
globular, smooth; style elongate, subterminal; receptacular hairs few,.
pale, long: male and gall flowers unknown.

New Guinea, Ramoi: Beccari (Herb. Bece. P. P. No. 388).

Ternate, Acqui-Conora: Beccari.

The receptacles are often either partially or entirely covered by the
soil.

Ficus Arfakensis, King. A tree, the young shoots scurfy and softly
pubescent ; leaves petiolate, sub-coriaceous, lanceolate, acute, gradually
narrowed to the faintly 3-nerved base, edges entire; primary lateral
nerves 6 to 8 pairs, obsolete on the upper, prominent on the lower sur-
face, and like the midrib and secondary nerves adpressed pilose, the
rest of the lower surface minutely covered with white tubercles, sparse-
ly pilose; upper surface sparsely covered with adpressed whitish hairs :
length of blade 4°5 to 7 inches; petiole pilose, 6 in. long; stipules linear-
lanceolate, glabrous, nearly 1 inch loug. Receptacles borne on long,
ramous, slender branches which emerge from the base of the stem and
apparently creep on or beneath the surface of the ground, pedunculate,
ovoid, scabrid, slightly verrucose, °45 in across; umbilical scales nu-
merous, prominent; basal bracts 3, triangular.

Mount Arfak in New Guinea, at from 5000 to 7000 feet above the
sea: Sig. Beccari (Herb. Bece. without number). ,

The receptacle-bearing branches often carry towards their extre-
mities small leaves and modified stipules.

Eusyce.

Ficus Comitis, King. Young branches glabrous; leaves mem-
branous, elliptic, the apex shortly and narrowly cuspidate, the base
broad, 3-nerved ; primary lateral nerves about 8 pairs, diverging from
the thick strong midrib at a wide angle, prominent on both surfaces
but especially so on the lower which is thickly dotted with minute
white tubercles; glabrous except on the midrib and primary nerves
which are densely and softly puberulous, reticulations minute, very
distinct: upper surface glabrous, thickly dotted with tubercles like
those on the under surface, but slightly larger; length of blade 4 to 6
inches; petiole from ‘75 in. to 1°75 in. Stipules lanceolate, °6 in. long.
Receptacles pedunculate, axillary, in pairs, sub-globose or sub-pyriform,
the umbilicus rather prominent, gradually narrowed to the peduncle,
adpressed-puberulous, slightly verrucose; about °25 in. across; basal

64 G. King—New Species of Ficus from New Guinea. [No. I,

bracts none; pedicel ‘3 in. long, bearing 3 minute bracteoles below its
middle.

New Guinea, Andai: D’Albertis (Herb. Beccari, P. Papuanae
No. 531).

This has been collected only by Count D’Albertis. Its affinities are
with F’. chartacea, Wall.

NEOMORPHBE.

Ficus grandis, King. A tree; the young branches deciduously
hispid-tomentose ; leaves large, membranous, petiolate, ovate-elliptic,
the apex acute, edges irregularly and coarsely crenate-dentate, the base
rounded, not cordate, 7-nerved (2 being minute) ; primary lateral nerves
about 8 pairs diverging from the midrib at rather an acute angle; the
under surface finely reticulate and with numerous minute white papillae,
rather softly and minutely pubescent especially on the midrib and
nerves; upper surface scabrous from rather minute sub-adpressed
hairs; length of blade 10 to 13 inches; petiole deeply channelled,
pubescent, rather stout, 2°5 to 3°5 inches long; stipules ovate-acumi-
nate, smooth inside, puberulous outside, about 12 inches long. Recep-
tacles on short, thick, multibracteate, tubercled, leafless branches from
the main stem, on long thin peduncles, depressed-globular or shortly
pyriform, the surface slightly verrucose and scurfy but without hairs,
red when ripe; 1'4in. long and 2 inches broad; the apex very broad,
flat, slightly depressed ; umbilical scales numerous, prominent; basal
bracts 3, large, ovate-triangular, acuminate, glabrous; peduncles
nearly 3 inches long: male flowers with 1 or 2 stamens ; anther ovate, on
a thick filament; perianth of 3; obcordate, inflated, hyaline, pieces:
gall flowers pedicillate or sessile, the style sub-terminal, perianth absent ;.
fertile female flowers unknown.

New Guinea: Sig. Beccari (Herb. Becc. No. 601).

This vies with F. Roxburgh, in having the largest leaves and re-
ceptacles of any Asiatic member of the genus Ficus.

Ficus D’ Albertisii, King. A tree; the young branches with an-

nular swellings at the nodes, completely covered with closely adpressed,
minute, rusty, pubesence; leaves broadly ovate or elliptic, sometimes
obovate-elliptic, the apex acute, shortly cuspidate, the edges minutely
dentate or sub-entire ; base rounded, emarginate, or sub-cordate, some-
times unequal, 5-nerved; primary lateral nerves about 7 pairs; both
surfaces closely covered with very minute adpressed hairs, the upper
surface slightly harsh, the lower soft; length of blade about 9 inches,
petiole about 1‘5 in., pubescent, swollen at its insertion on the stem ;
stipules ovate-lanceolate, acuminate, adpressed-pubescent externally,

Xe

1887.] G.King—On some New Species of Ficus from Sumatra. 65

1:5 in. long. Receptacles in small clusters from leafless ebracteate
tubercles on the stem, pedunculate, pyriform, the sides with numer-

ous vertical ridges and clothed with short adpressed, apparently deci-

duous, scurfy pubescence; length 12 in., breadth 1 inch; the umbilicus
large, closed by 5 broad, rounded scales; basal bracts 3, ovate, decidu-
ous; peduncle stout, glabrous, *75 in. long; female flowers sessile or
pedicillate, slightly rugose, the style long, terminal, hairy: male and gall
flowers unknown.

Fly River, New Guinea, D’Albertis: (no number). Sumatra,
Beccari: (Herb. Beec. P..S. No. 736.)

V.—On some New Species of Ficus from Swmatra.—By Georee Kine,

M.B., LL. D., F. L. S., Superintendent, Botante Garden, Calcutta.
[Received April 1st ;—Read April 6th, 1887.]
Amongst the collections of dried plants made by Mr. H, O. Forbes,

during the journey in Hastern Sumatra of which an account is given in

his interesting volume entitled, ‘A Naturalist’s Wanderings in the

Eastern Archipelago,’ I find four undescribed species. Three of these
belong to the section Covellia, and one to Husyce. They are as follows :—

CoveELiia.

Ficus brachiata, King. A tree, the young shoots adpressed-pilose :
leaves thinly coriaceous, inequilateral, elliptic-lanceolate, the apex acute
er shortly acuminate, the edges entire or sometimes irregularly and

- minutely undulate; base acute, obscurely 3-nerved ; lateral primary
nerves 8 to 10 pairs, sub-horizontal, rather prominent beneath and

adpressed-pubescent, as are the midrib and secondary nerves, the rest of

the lower surface puberulous or glabrous, the reticulations minute, indis-

tinct ; upper surface glabrous; length of blade 4 to 5 inches; petiole
°> in. long; stipules 1 in. long, glabrous. Receptacles borne on long

Jeafless, glabrous, very ramous. branches which issue from the stem near

the ground, pedunculate, turbinate, verrucose, puberulous, about °5 in.
across ; the umbilical scales numerous and prominent ; basal bracts 3,
broadly ovate; peduncle °35 in. long; male and gall flowers not seen :

fertile female flowers mostly sessile, without perianth, the style elongate,
terminal and,straight in young, lateral and curved in old, ovaries.

Mount Dempe, Eastern Sumatra, at elevations of about 4500 feet :
Mr. H. O. Forbes (Herb. No. 2313).
This approaches F’. Miguelit, but has smaller, narrower leaves; the

receptacles are also smaller and borne on much longer branches.

9

66 G. King—On some New Species of Ficus from Sumatra. [No. 1,

Ficus Forbesit, King. A tree, the young branches, petioles and
midribs of the leaves covered with dense short tawny tomemtum ; leaves
thickly membranous, shortly petiolate, elliptic or obovate-elliptic, the
apex suddenly and shortly cuspidate; gradually narrowed from above
the middle to the blunt, 3-nerved base; the edges entire; primary
lateral nerves 12 to 20 pairs, prominent on the lower surface as are the
midrib and straight transverse secondary nerves, the whole of the rest
of the lower surface sparsely covered with stellate tawny hairs; length
of blade 12 to 15 inches; petiole stout, -25 in. long. Receptacles in lax
umbels from long, leafless, glabrous, little divided branches which issue
from the stem near its base, pedunculate, globose, glabrous, ‘25 in.
across, slightly umbonate at the apex, the base constricted into a short
stalk at the junction of which with the peduncle proper are 3 ovate
acute bracts ; male and gall florets not seen; female flower without obvious
perianth ; ovary obovate, about half as long as the style.

Sumatra, Mr. H. O. Forbes (Herb. Forb. without number).

The receptacular branches ramify very little ; at their apices there
are whorls of stipule-tike, lanceolate, bracteoles. The stellate pubescence
is very peculiar. This species comes very near F’. ribes, Keinw., from
which it differs chiefly in its leaves. The female flowers of this
are exactly like those of F’. ribes. I have been able to find no male flowers,
and I think it probable that, like rzbes, this species is practically
dioecious, male flowers occurring only in the receptacles of certain indi-
vidual trees. The species is known only from Mr. Forbes’s specimens,
which were probably all collected from one tree.

Ficus dimorpha, King. A small tree, the young shoots deciduously
hispid-tomentose; leaves petiolate, sub-coriaceous, inequilateral,
elliptic or obovate-elliptic ; the apex acute, shortly cuspidate; the edges
rather remotely dentate ; the base rounded, slightly auricled on one side,
3-nerved, with an additional minute nerve on the auricled side ; primary
lateral nerves 6 or 7 pairs, not prominent; the under surface dull,
harshly pubescent, especially on the midrib and nerves, the reticulations
indistinct ; upper surface glabrous and shining; length of blade 4°5 to
6 inches ; petiole *5 to °75 in., pilose ; stipules ovate-lanceolate, slightly
pubescent externally, ‘7 in. long. Receptacles pedunculate, in small
fascicles from the stem and larger branches, of two forms (a) those
containing gall and male flowers which are pyriform, truncate at the
apex, gradually constricted at the base into a long, thin, stalk at the
union of which with the peduncle proper are 3 deciduous bracts,
wrinkled, verrucose, pubescent; total length 2°5 inches, of which the
stalk forms more than half; breadth at apex 1 inch, peduncle proper
5. in., male flowers numerous under the bracts of the mouth, stamen 1;

1887.] G. King—On some New Species of Ficus from Sumatra. 67

perianth of 3 concave pieces; gall flowers elongate, with a short, sub

terminal style; perianth 3-cleft; (6) those containing female flowers
which are turbinate, the apex concave and the umbilicus depressed, the
base constricted into a stalk “4 in. long, length 1 in., breadth 1:3 in., pe-
duncle proper ‘2 in. long; fertile female flowers pedicillate, the achene
ovate-rotund, perianth undivided or splitting irregularly.

Mount Dempe, in EHastern Sumatra, at an elevation of about 3000

feet ; Mr. H. O. Forbes, Herb. No. 2175.

The elongate receptacles occur mostly on the stem, the globular on
the branches. The former contain perfect male flowers, scales with
rudimentary anthers, and gall flowers: the latter perfect, fertilised,
female flowers.

Eusyce.

Ficus dumosa, King. A shrub 3 to 9 feet high ; leaves long-petiolate,
membranous, from ovate-elliptic, acuminate, (rarely sinuate) to palmate,
with from 3 to 5 deep acuminate lobes, edges of all the forms irregu-
larly dentate, the apices of the lobes cuspidate, base cordate or rounded,
sometimes sub-auriculate, 5 to 7-nerved ; upper surface scabrid-papillose,
each papilla bearing a stiff hair, the nerves tomentose, hispid; under
surface more sparsely hispid, hirsute on the nerves; lateral primary
nerves 5 to 6 pairs; reticulations distinct; length of blade 5 to 9 inch-
es; petioles slender, hispid, from 2 to 4°5 in. long; stipules lanceolate,
hispid at first, subsequently glabrous, about *8 inch long; receptacles
axillary, sessile, in pairs, depressed globose, with a small few-bracted
umbilicus, sparsely hispid when young, smooth, scarlet to lake red
when ripe, and from ‘5 to 1 in. across; basal bracts 3, minute,
ovate, spreading; male flowers on the receptacles with the gall
flowers and near the mouth only, the perianth of four broad dis-
tinct pieces, stamens 2 perfect, or sometimes only, perfect stamen with
a rudimentary pistil: gall flowers pedicillate or sub-sessile, the peri-
enth of 5 lanceolate, free pieces; ovary globose, smooth; style short
lateral, stigma infundibuliform ; fertile female flowers in distinct recep-
tacles, sub-sessile or pedicillate, perianth as in the gall flowers ; achene
obliquely ovoid, slightly viscid, minutely tuberculate, the style elongate,
lateral: stigma pyramidal.

Kaiser’s Peak, Mount Dempe, and other hills in Eastern Sumatra
from 2000 to 6000 feet, Mr. H. O. Forbes (Herb. No. 2291).

This is closely allied to F. alba, Reinw., but it is well distinct,
differing from typical alba by its larger receptacles, longer petiolate,
thinner, leaves, which are sparsely hispid on both surfaces and not tomen-
tose below. I have not been able to find male flowers,

68 J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

V1I.—On the Mammals and Birds collected by Capratn CO. B. Yarn, ©.8. 1.
of the Afghan Boundary Commission.— By J. Scunty.

[Received May 30th ;—Read June 1st, 1887.]

Mr. Wood-Mason has asked me to contribute a paper-on the collec-
tion of mammals and birds made by Captain C. E. Yate in Northern
Afghanistan and presented by that officer to the Indian Museum; the
following notes are the result. The collection, I understand, was made
after the departure of the Naturalist of the Commission, so it may possi-
bly include some forms not secured by him, and doubtless additional
localities will now be made known for many of the species previously
obtained.

The collection contains 13 species of mammals and 110 species
of birds, those comprised in the first class being particularly interest-
ing. I have carefully examined every specimen entered in the follow-
ing lists, and the identifications are as accurate as I can make them
with the rather limited means of effecting comparisons. The localities
and dates are carefully entered by Captain Yate on every ticket and
most of the specimens of birds are sexed also; but I have found so
many errors in the sexing of the birds that I have thought it best to
omit this part of the record. When I havé noted the sex, I am respon-
sible for the entry.

Ihave to express my thanks to Mr. Wood-Mason for giving me
access to the collections under his charge atall sorts of unofficial hours,
for permitting me to take most of Captain Yate’s collection to my house
for identification, and for procuring for me from many quarters sundry
works for reference.

MAMMALIA.
1. ERinacrvs ALBULUS, Stoliczka.

1. Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, May 23.
2. Badghis, Herat.

This Hedgehog agrees well with typical examples of the species to
which I have referred it, from Yarkand. The fur on the whole lower
surface of the body is white, the head and cheeks are pale rufescent
fawn, the ears pale isabelline behind and white in front; the hands and
feet are brown above; with a few white hairs intermixed. There is no
nude area on the vertex ; the spines measure 0°8 to 0°9 inch and have two
dark and two pale bands, the tip beimg pale. Length of ear in front,
from orifice, 1°45; fore foot 0°85, with claws 1:02; hind foot 1.4, with
claws 1:53; tail 0°8. Teeth: ‘2 half the sizeof + 3, _c. has two fangs

(1887. | Birds from. Northern Afghanistan. 69

anterior and posterior, pm.1 two distinct fangs, pm. 2 three fangs, two
buccal and one palatine. H. albulus seems quite distinct from FH. awritus
with which I have compared it.

2. FELIS caupata (Gray).
1. Maimanab.

A flat skin, without skull. Nose to insertion of tail about 29°5 inches,
tail about 13, hairs at tip of tail 0°7, ear from orifice at front 2:2,
longest whisker 3°5, palma 3°2, planta 1-4. The ears are pointed, witha
small tuft of hair at the apex measuring about 0°25. The general co-
lour of the fur is, above, a pale yellowish grey with dusky streaks mainly
along the centre of the back from nape to root of tail. Below, the fur is
ereamy white with dusky spots showing through here and there. The
fur is soft and moderately long, grey at the base all over the body, then
isabelline, and, where dark markings appear on the surface, the tips of
the hairs are blackish. The head is grizzled grey, darker than the back,
_ the sides of the nose pale fulvous, the cheeks white. The ears are pale
isabelline behind, brown at the tips, and inside the hairs are whitish.
The limbs are pale yellowish grey in front, with faint dusky markings
near the body ; inside whitish except the plantar and palmar surfaces,
which are brownish black. Tail above on proximal half fulvous grey
with dusky dashes resembling the back, below whiter and almost free
from dark markings like the belly; rest of tail greyish white with four
black rings and a black tip linch long. This specimen is closer to F.
caudata than to any other species with which I am acquainted, but from
want of specimens for comparison, and in the absence of the skull, I~
cannot feel certain that the identification is correct.

3. Canis Lupus, Linn.
1, Afghan Turkistan.

A flat skin, without skull. Nose to root of tail 37°5 inches, tail 12,
hair at end of tail 2-5, ear from orifice in front 3:8. There is no black
on the ears or the hind limbs; the fore limbs have a narrow black
stripe down the front, ending about six inches above the point of the
toes. Down the middle line of the back and along the upper surface of
the tail the hairs are mainly black, and the tip of the tail is quite black.

4, VULPES MONTANA, Pearson.
1,2. Afghan Turkestan.

These are again two flat skins without skulls. From nose to root
of tail they measure about 29 and 31 inches, tail 15°5, hairs at end of
tail 2°5. The face is rufous with the usual dark patch below the eye,

70 J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

the ears are wholly black behind, the ordinary dark cross on the shoul-
ders is present, and the tail tip is white. One skin has the greater por-
tion of the front of the fore limbs black ; in the other this part is rufous ;
in both specimens the underparts are grey. In the larger animal,
probably a male, the fur is much longer and softer, and the tail more
bushy than in the other ; and the claws, which in both are unusually large,
curved, and sharp-pointed, are more powerful. Both these skins can be
fairly matched in the large series of V. montana which I collected in
Gilgit, and to that species I accordingly refer them.

5. SPERMOPHILUS BACTRIANUS, sp. nov.
1. 9 Khamiab, Afghan Turkestan, June 12.

Ear conch rudimentary, soles of hind feet densely haired, tail short,
not longer than hind foot, hair on body harsh, very short, unicolor.

Head and body (from skin) 9°5 inches, tail 1°5, with hairs at end
included 2°2, fore foot without claws 1°25, hind foot without claws 2°25.
On the head and whole body above and below the hair is very short,
harsh, closely adpressed, and of the same colour throughout from
base to tip. Upper parts nearly uniform pale fawn, the head slightly
darker and more brown, and the rump more tinged with rufous; a pale
isabelline band, from nostril toeye. Tail like the ramp with a black
subterminal ring and pale fulvous tip. Edges of lips, chin, throat, and
whole lower surface, including inner aspect of limbs, creamy white.
Outer aspect of limbs bright fulvous ; upper surface of fore and hind
feet pale isabelline, below to root of digits covered with creamy white
hairs. The outer toe has a long pencil of whitish hair on its under sur-
face which exceeds the tip of the claw by about half aninch. The
vibrisse are long, fine, and mostly brown ; and a pencil of long glistening
white hairs grows below the chin. The claws are black with pale horny
tips. There are three pairs of mamme. The skull is imperfect behind
and its total length cannot be given ; the posterior end of the nasals
extends further back than the termination of the premaxille :—

Inch.
Greatest breadth of zygoma,.. es baslgaliogs
Breadth of brain case behind PO i Ho processes,... 0°78
ASSEN Ot MOBS |). bse Fakes sy Baoslds Weheies sx saasan potent eoame
Breadth Jeg UPS MATING, #4 vs rasks Seee eager es ows oda ae ae Om
. sy 9 - AAP ONG, 1, 0, cohen cess onseseler tovdieteseeeee eae

Premolar to symphysis of nin bow iwis Gt eRe Ba
Posterior margin of palate to InCisOrs, ........eceeeeeeee O'98
Breadth of palate between pm. 2, ‘de pdeinesneeoemaeey lO
Length of mandible, condyle to HPO hy Feige whey ee

1887. ] Birds from Northern Afghanistan. 71

From the characters already given for this souslik, it could not be
referred to any species of Spermophilus belonging to the section in
which the hind feet are not haired below, e.g., S. fulvus, S. rufescens,
S. erythrogenys, S. brevicauda, 8. mugosaricus, S. concolor, or 8. musicus.
Of the section having well-haired soles, S. eversmanni and allies are also
excluded by the length of the tail ; Middendorff gives the length of tail
in S. eversmanni as 4°2 inches, with terminal hairs 5°5. Of the short-
tailed sub-section, S. cztellus, S. dauricus, 8S. guttatus, S. eanthoprymnus,
and S. mongolicus are excluded for various, but good and sufficient, reasons
which to enumerate would be long. The only likely species that re-
mains is S. leptodactylus of Lichtenstein, and, to it, I was at first dis-
posed to refer the specimen collected by Captain Yate. The position of
Lichtenstein’s species is, in the first place, involved in doubt : it was dis-
tinctly described as having the hind feet haired below, but, according to
Brandt (Bull Acad. Sc. St. Petersburg IT, p. 359), Eversmann proved
to his satisfaction that 8. leptodactylus was the same species as S. fulvus,
which has the soles bare.. However this may be, I have carefully com-
pared Lichtenstein’s detailed description of his Citillus leptodactylus
(Saugethiere, Tab. XXXII.) with the specimen under notice and can
only come to the conclusion that the latter is perfectly distinct, even if
the question of hair on the soles be left out of consideration. In de-
‘scribing this species as new I have not overlooked Brandt’s caution
about the young of bare-soled sousliks having sometimes that part to-
lerably well covered with hairs.

6. GERBILLUS, sp.
1. 3 Balkh, Afghan Turkistan, July 4.

Head and body about 5:4, ear at front from orifice 0°6, fore-foot
0°38, with claws 0°45, hind foot 1:2, with claws 1:3. Fur long, fine, and
very soft. Bright rufous brown or fawn colour above, many of the hairs
black tipped, the basal parts of the hair leaden grey ; below the hairs
white throughout their length. Lars fairly well haired, fawn-coloured
behind with a white margin, in front with scanty white hairs at the
margins; whiskers white. Fore limbs white above and below, the palms
naked; hind feet isabelline above, with whitish hairs on the the soles,
including the toes, except part of the hinder portion of the tarsus. The
tail is imperfect, but its basal part for about 2°5 inches is coloured like
the back above, and is slightly paler below.

The upper incisors are well grooved, the enamel folds of the upper
molars are completely united in the middle, exactly as in G. hurriane,
and the hinder molar has not a vestige of any posterior talon—the
outline of the crown as seen from above being simply a narrow oval,

72 J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

with the points of the oval buccal and palatine. The following are the
principal measurements of the skull :—
Inch.
Total longth, .....cccccocssccgnevvcccccasccssevesevevcnvessces LG
Breadth of zygomatic archy,....cccccosccsssccccsessesessese O'8D
af of brain-case at posterior root of zygoma,... 0°69
Length of palate to imcisors, ...s.scccssecsvesccesseevcesee 'O269
yy SE TRI ao Fa HUSK EN ves wad aes WC hien'se yaa Oaos ae
Mandible, condyle to sciaseeilinatta. Quaateoass 0°78
Although the upper molars agree best wath thee: of G. hurriane,
this specimen is quite different in character and colour of fur and in
shape of skull; neither can it be referred to G. erythrurus with which I
have compared it. It possibly represents a new species, but, as the
tail is imperfect, I do not propose a name for it.

7. Mus sacrrianus, Blyth.
1. g¢ Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 4.

This specimen agrees fairly well with typical examples of M. bac-
trianus, but the tail is shorter than the head and body, though this is not
of importance in a skin. In comparing this specimen, I have had occa-
sion to examine many specimens of M. pachycercus Blanford, from
Yarkand, and I may note that that species is quite distinct from M. bac-
trianus and has been happily named.

8. ARVICOLA GUENTHERI, Danford and Alston.
1. Afghan Turkestan.
Head and body 4-4 inches, hind foot 0°77, ear at front 0'4. The

external form and colours agree well with the original description of
the species from Asia Minor (P. Z. S. 1880, p. 62), except that in this
specimen the rudimentary thumb of the forefoot has a small nail,
The pattern of the molar teeth is very similar to that of A. guenthert,
with the following aunts _—

In this specimen ~~ *has not the rudimentary 4th sheesh on the

inner side so prominent ; it is barely indicated. On m2: however, this

posterior inner angle is distinct and must be counted, although in the

original description above cited it is omitted. 5 has the posterior lobe
less prolonged backwards and tends less to form an angle on the out-
side than in the Asia Minor species. %, 1 too has the anterior lobe more
compressed laterally in the present specimen. The following table
exhibits the molar pattern according to the usual mode of counting :—

(1887. ] Birds from Northern Afghanistan. 73

Spaces, External angles. Internal angles.
Paredes ; Peet 3 3
eee 4 3 tier ee
Se ecneans eons BS Mad oe
ae ae ee aed tree ys 5
~ ae 5 Bie i ace e
Btabhes.. Sire ROY SBM 3

9. ELLOBIUS INTERMEDIUS, sp. nov.

1. Bokun, Murghab, Herat, May 10,
2. Kila Wali, ditto ditto May 14.
3. Ditto dittc ditto May 26.

Head and body (from skins) 45 to 5 inches, tail 0°4 to 0°45, hind
foot 0°8 to 0:9, forefoot 0°55 to 0°67. Colour above, and on sides of head
below the zygomatic projection, bright pale yellowish red (or bright rust
colour). Head dark brown. Below greyish white throughout. Tail
pale fulvous, the terminal hairs at tip white. Fore and hind feet whit-
ish. Fur short (about 0°35 on hinder part of back), very soft and fine
dark grey or leaden at the base, except on centre of belly, where it is
white throughout its length. The bright colour of the upper surface
being due to the short pale coloured tips of the hair, any abrasion of
these gives the animal a dark leaden grey colour above.

Skull :— Inch. mm,
Breadth across hinder part of zygomatic arches,..... 1:05 27
- of interorbital GONBEVICTION, | elvdies eatleeve 2) 5'5
, of brain-pan behind iSieee comsthnbigt a:
PR COU, cco Sedadews Hoe! gideSeaek ea taaceiite? or ae Ee
Length from anterior molar ‘a INCISOLS, rece COA CIA
EPP OL WPPON MOLAM-SOTIES, 0 seo ted cecwsecansccacaacsscer OD 8
Meewor palate tO MCISONS, Cis. ievdecisscacaseccsceseas SOO 22°65
Breadth of palate between anterior molars, ......... ‘14 4
* Length of lower jaw, condyle to pe tegen ener ai ore Oo “Ze
5 Of lower molar Series, .......+600s Mesias Lilies 8°5

The nasals are shaped somewhat ate a wine-bottle bent in at the
sides, their external margins being nearly straight behind, then convex,
then strongly concave, and finally convex again at the front end; the
posterior ends are pointed, not truncated. The posterior ends of the
premaxille extend quite 3°5 mm. behind the ends of the nasals and the
game distance beyond the origin of the zygomatic arch. The zygomatic
aich is high throughout; the maxillary process does not reach the

10

74 J. Seully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

squamosal along the lower margin, a square process from the malar
interposing itself and forming the lower edge of the arch for a length of
15 mm.

The skull differs from that of H. fuscocapillus in having the nasal
portion shorter, the distance from anterior root of zygoma to symphysis
of premaxillaries being 15 mm. in LH. fuscocapillus against 12 mm. in the
present species ; the zygomatic arch is quite differently shaped, being
higher throughout, and the malar bone forms part of the lower margin,
while in H. fuscocapillus the maxillary and squamosal processes meet
along the lower margin, so as to exclude the malar; and the anterior
palatine foramina are much smaller and narrower.

From FE. talpinus, the skull of the present species differs completely
in the shape of the nasals and in the extension backwards of the end of
the premaxille ; the shape of the zygoma presents even a greater diver-
gence than from FE. fuscocapillus, but the arrangement of the bones in the
arch are closely similar in HL. talpinus and EH. intermedius ; the anterior
palatine foramina are very much smaller than in EH. talpinus, and there
are other differences which will be apparent on studying Mr. Blanford’s
very clear account of the contrast between the skulls of H. fuscocapillus
and LE. talpinus in J. A. 8. B., vol. L, pt. II, 1884, pp. 122 —123.

Teeth. The incisors are very long and pure china-white. The
molar pattern is as follows :—

External angles. Internal angles.
mm. 3 3
Mm. 2 3 9
*_3 3 * 2
ut sesh BAN hie: os
Cr eres ea Te ‘oacivewe $B
m, 3 3 8
m 1 ongd™— do not differ from the corresponding teeth in Z. fus-

cocapillus and EH. talpinus in any important particular. m 8 differs
markedly from the corresponding tooth in L. fuscocapillus and resembles
that of EH. talpinus in wanting a posterior lobe behind the hindmost
outer angle; both the internal angles too are less prominent in the
present species, the last angle being much rounded.

In ——. the anterior lobe is less developed than in HL. fuscocapillus,

but still there are 4 external and 5 internal angles, not 3 and 4 as in
E. talpinus.

1887.)

Birds from Northern Afghanistan.

75

The three species of Hllobius may be thus contrasted :—

E. talpinus.

1. Base
black.

2. Zygoma low, malar in-
terposed between maxil-
lary and squamosal pro-
cesses in lower margin.

of fur almost

3. Nasals convex exter-
nally.

4. Premaxille terminate
posteriorly opposite end
of nasals.

5. ™> has no posterior
lobe behind last outer
angle.

6. 57 angles 3—4.

E. intermedius.

1. Base of fur dark or
leaden grey.

2. Zygoma high through-
out, malar interposed be-
tween maxillary and
squamosal processes in
lower margin.

3. Nasals bottle-shaped, or
external margin alter-
nately convex and con-
cave.

4. Premaxille prolonged
behind hind end of na-
sals.

5. ™% has no posterior
lobe behind last outer
angle.

6.° | 7 angles 4—5 a

E. fuscocapillus.

1. Base of fur light grey.

2. Zygoma high in mid-
dle, maxillary and squa-
mosal processes alone
form lower margin.

3. Nasals bottle-shaped,
or external margin alter-
nately convex and con-
cave.

4, Premaxillz prolonged
behind hind end of na-
sals.

6: (2:2 hase: prominent
posterior lobe behind

last outer angle.

6. 37 angles 4—5.

For the comparison of the three specimens collected by Capt.

Yate, I have Mr. Blanford’s very full description of a skin and skull of
Ei. fuscocapillus (with figure of skull and teeth) in the paper before cited,
and three skins and a skull of the same species in the Indian Museum.
Ihave no specimen of ZH. talpinus for comparison, but Mr. Blanford
has so clearly and, Iam sure, accurately given the differences between
that form and FH. fuscocapillus that [ have no hesitation in deciding that
Capt. Yate’s specimen must be referred to a new species. The only
known locality for H. fuscocapillus is Quetta, and the Russian HL. talpinus
is recorded by Severtsoff from Western Turkestan ; so that the present
species is intermediate in its habitat, as well as in ils distinctive charac-
ters, between the two better known species of the genus. Severtsoff
calls his Turkestan specimens FH. talpinus, var. rufescens, and these may
prove to belong to the species I have described.

Capt. Yate notes on the ticket of one of the specimens, ‘ Hyes
scarcely visible ; caught by day.”

10. Lacomys RUFESCENS, Gray.

1. Shadian, Afghan Turkistan, August 2.
2. Ditto ditto ditto, August 6.

The above two examples belonging to a well marked and well
known species need no extended notice; they agree perfectly with spe-
cimens collected by Blanford in Persia. The species was originally
described from a specimen obtained in Afghanistan.

76 J. Seully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

11. Lepvus tenmannt, Severt.
1. Hindu Kush, Afghan Turkistan.

This specimen is not in very good order, and I refer it rather doubt-
fully to the species described by Severtsoff (see Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist.
1876, “The Mammals of Turkistan”), with which on the whole it seems
to agree best. So many species of Asiatic hares have been described
which differ only in minute particulars as to make the task of identify-
ing a particular specimen difficult and uncertain; for the number of
nominal species probably greatly exceeds the constantly distinguishable:
forms. In the specimen obtained in the Hindu Kush the ears measure
from orifice in front about 4°3 inches, at back 4°8, greatest breadth about
2°7. The anterior external part of the ear is coloured like the back ; the
posterior part being pale isabelline, black at the tip and partly down the
posterior margin.

The general colour above is mixed pale fawn and black. The chin
and belly are white and the throat and breast pinkish isabel. The basal
part of the fur above and where coloured on the limbs and breast is
grey; on the belly the fur is white throughout its length.

The premaxillaries end behind on a level with the nasals, the latter
bones having the posterior end sloping inwards and the junction of
their outer and hinder margins slightly rounded.

The mandible from condyle to symphysis measures 3°4 inches.

12, GAZELLA SUBGUTTUROSA, Guldenst.
1. o& Badghis, Herat.

Head and horns, with skin of head preserved. . Band from between
horns to nostrils rufescent fawn. A pale isabelline band outside this
from level of inner canthus of eye to upper lip. A dark rufous fawn
stripe from eye-pits to commissure of lips. The ear measures about
5°25 inches in length from orifice to tip in front. The horns from the
base curve outwards, forwards, then backwards, and at the tips they
curve inwards and forwards. There are 20 ringson each horn, and these
end about 2°5 inches from the tips. The horns measure 14°7 inches
in length along the curve in front, the distance of the tips apart is 6°9,
the greatest distance apart 7'5, and the girth at the base about 4°5,

13. CERVUS CASHMIRIANUS, Falconer.
1. Banks of Oxus near Balkh, Afghan Turkistan.

This is a cast left antler of an elaphine stag about which Capt.
Yate gives the following information, ‘“ This was a horn from the banks
of the Oxus near Balkh and will help to determine the identity of the

1887. | Birds from Northern Afghanistan. 77

deer found in the jungles along that river.” The antler is not perfect,
as the beam is broken above the royal, so that the form of the crown
cannot be ascertained ; the following are the measurements :—

Inches.
Length from burr to broken end of beam along curve inside, 17°8
Sry. OF DROW Title, ADOUL, cc... .cascecescce tes cesesdsenapdveteveers 0
GE Oe MG, ADOWU, civare dencvsccdssevispersvausqivecvesenser 0h
= of royal tine along curve, about, iiciseessereseessesuee FE
5, of beam above upper angle of royal,........0.cercscesees 69

Viewed in front, the beam is nearly straight (though of course in-
clined outwards) as far as the royal, where it begms to curve inwards.
Viewed from the outer side, it curves slightly back from the bez and
forwards to the origin of the royal ; above the royal, it curves gently
back and then forwards and inwards. The brow tine is straight and
directed somewhat upwards: the much longer bez is directed outwards
and upwards, and towards its tip it has a slight curve inwards; the
royalis directed first outwards, then it curves at about 3 inches from
the beam strongly upwards and inwards, the point being well inside
the line of the broken end of the beam. Without measurement, the bez
looks longer than the royal, and the middles of the bez and brow tines,
measured. along the middle line of the beam, are 2°5 inches apart, or
from upper margin of brow to lower margin of bez at junction with
beam about 1°7 inches.

It is quite clear I think that this antler agrees better with that of
C. cashmirianus than with that of any other deer to which it could be
referred. It is quite distinct from C. maral, as figured by Sclater in Trans.
Zool. Soc., Vol. VII. I may mention that Mr. Wood-Mason, who examin-
_ed this horn before I saw it, came to the conclusion that it must be
referred to C. cashmirianus. Of course the evidence of such a fragment
is not conclusive proof that the stag of the Oxus basin is really identical
with the Kashmir species; complete specimens are necessary for the
settlement of that point.

AVES.

1, Circus cyanevs, (Linn.).

1. ¢ Zulfikar, Badghis, Herat, November 25.

2. o Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 1.
3. @ Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 13.

4, o& Maruchak, ditto ditto March 10.

The males are in immature plumage ; one is noted as having the
iris yellow. A female, not adult, had the irides dark brown.

78 J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

2. Crocus macrurus, (Gmel.).
1. o& Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 18.

Adult, wing 13:7, iris yellow.

3. Crrcus cINeRACEUS, (Mont.).
1. o& Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 17.
In adult plumage, but with chestnut streaks on belly and flanks.

4. CIRCUS @RUGINOSUS, (Linn.).

1. o& Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 12.
2. o& Karawal Khana, ditto ditto, April 16.
3. § Kila Wali, ditto ditto, May 18.

5. SCELOSPIZIAS BADIUS, (Gmel.).
1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 13.
In immature plumage; wing 8°75 inches, tail 5:6, tarsus 1°52,
mid toe s. uw. 1:32; seven bars on the tail.
6. AccIPITER NisuS, (Linn.).

1. Hauz-i-Khan, Badghis, Herat, December 6.

In rather dark plumage; four bands on tail; wing 9°4 inches, tail
7, tarsus 2°35, mid toe 16. The specimen is marked male on the ticket,
and, if correctly sexed, may be referable to subspecies A. melaschistus.

7. Buovseo rrrox, (Gmel.).

1. o& Chahar Shamba, Mainmanah, January 27.
Zig Mainmanah,

3. @ Chahar Shamba, ditto. February 4.
4, ¢ Kara Bel, ditto. March 10.

In all, the tarsi are scutellate in front, the bare portion measuring
from 1°8 to 2 inches; the males have the wings 15°9 and 16°5 and the
females, 17°L and 17°8; in the four specimens, the tarsi measure 3:2 to
3°3 and the mid toe 1°6 to 1°6.

8. Mitvus micrans, (Bodd.).

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 4.
2. Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 9.
3. Ditto ditto ditto, April 9.

The wings measure 17 and 18 inches.

1887. ] Birds from Northern Afghanistan. 79

' 9. TINNUNCULUS ALAUDARIUS, (Linn.).
1. Jan. 21; 2. Feb. 4; 3. Feb. 7; Chahar Shamba, Maimanah.

10. TinnuncuLus cencuris, (Naum.).

ite

Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 21.
2.

Karawal Khana, Badghis, Herat, April 9.

These two specimens are alike ; the wing coverts are mostly rufous,
and there are a few small black spots on the abdomen and lower flanks.
Wing 9 and 8°9 inches, tail 5°6 and 5°75, tarsus 1°23 and 1°25.

11. Asio orus, (Linn.).

1. Kara Baba, Maimanah, March 10.

12. Carine BACTRIANA, (Hutton).

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, January 25.

2. Ditto ditto ditto, February 4.

13. Merops Apraster, Linn.

1, 2, 3, 4 Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 29 to May 1.
5, Minar Shadian, Afghan Turkistan.

No. 5 is a young bird with the back green, but the throat coloured
as in the adult.

14. CoractaAs GaRRULA, Linn.

1, 2, 3 Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 30 and May 1.

4. Min Darakht, ditto, June l,

15. CAPRIMULGUS EUROPAUS, Linn.

1, 2, Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, May 12.
3. Afghan Turkistan.

The pale eastern form separated as C. unwini.

No. 3 has rufous
bars on the wing where 1 and 2 have large white spots.

16. CypseLus apus, (Linn.).

1. Karawal Khana, Badghis, Herat, April 12.
2. Ditto ditto ditto ditto, April 17.
3. Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat May 13.

17. CyPsELUS MELBA, (Linn.).
1. Murghab, Herat.
Wing 8°5 inches, tail 3°35.

80 J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

18. Upvura Epops, Linn.
1. Maimanah Chul, March 6.

19. JiANIUS PH@NICUROIDES, Severt.

1. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 20.

2. Khwaja Gogirdak, Murghab, ditto, March 27.

3, 4, Darband-i-Kil Rekhta ditto ditto, May 18. .
5. Maruchak, Badghis, ditto, May 18.

All these specimens fall under section B of the rufous-tailed
shrikes as characterised by me in the Ibis, 1881, p 433. Nos. 3 and 4
are in full adult plumage, having the head very rufous, the bill, the
whole lores, and the post-ocular stripe black, and the lower surface of
the body white. Nos. 1, 2 and 5 are in immature plumage with bars on
the breast, but the head is distinctly darker than the back. In all, the
second primary is either intermediate in length to the fifth and sixth, or
equals the sixth. In all stages this species seems to me readily distin-
guishable from LZ. isabellinus, Hempr. and Ebr.

20. ERryTHROSTERNA PARVA, (Bechst.).

1, ¢ Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 29.

21. Pratincona caprata, (Linn.).

1. o& Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 19.
2. o& Karawal Khana ditto ditto, April 9.
a oS Ditto ditto ditto, April 19.
4. § Kila Wali, Murghab ditto, May 18.

22. PRATINCOLA MAURA, (Pallas).

1, 2, Kara Baba, Maimanah, March 6.
3. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 18.
4, Ditto ditto ditto, March 24, 4
5. Khwajeh Gogirdak, Murghab, ditto, March 27.
G6. Karasval Khana, Badghis, ditto, April . 9.

93. SyiviA AFFINIS, Blyth.

1, Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 28.
2. Ditto ditto, May 1.

24. SyiviA MINUSCULA, Hume.

1. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 13.

1887.) Birds from Northern Afghahistan. 81

25. SyLvIA MYSTACEA, Ménétr.

1. Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, April 22.
2. Jalaiar, Maimanah, June 2.

This is the species well described and figured by Blanford in his
‘ Zoology of Eastern Persia’ under the name of Sylvia rubescens. Its
occurrence in the localities above cited is of much interest, as the distri.
bution of the species is thereby considerably extended to both north and
east of its previously known range.

26. SyLvVIA FAMILIARIS, Ménétr.

1. Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, April 22.
2, Darband-i-Kil Rekhta, ditto ditto, May 18.

27. Hyponais pALLiIpA, (Hemp and Ehr.).

1. Jalaiar, Maimanah, June 2.
2. Ditto.

28. Hypouais rama, (Sykes.).

1. Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, April 22.
2. Ditto ditto, May 13. ©
3. Darband-i-Kil Rekhta, ditto ditto, May 18.

29. ACROCEPHALUS STENTOREUS, (Hempr, and Ehr.).
1, 2, Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, May 15,

30. Crrria ceTt1, (Marm.),

1, Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 20.
ae Ditto ditto, February 22.

31. MervuLa vuiearis, Selby.

1. g Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 2.
Brn? Ditto ditto, February 12.

These examples belong to subspecies M. maxima, the male having
the wing 5°6 inches and the female, 5°25.

32. Merv.a atricuLaris, (Temm.).
1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, January 25.

2,3. Ditto ditto, January 28.
4, - Ditto ditto, February 22.
5. Ditto ditto, April 4.,

2 and 3 have the lores, chin, throat, and breast quite black,
ll

82

J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammats and

33. CYANECULA sUECICA, (Linn.).

1. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, Mareh 18.
2. Karawal Khana, ditto ditto, March 24.
3. Ditto ditto ditto, April 9.
4, Yedikul, Maimanah, May 31.

34, MontTicoLa cyanus, (Linn.).

1. Darband-i-Kil Rekhta, Murghab Herat, May 18.
2. Shadian, Afghan Turkistan, July 12.
3. Ditto ditto, Sept. 1.

Nos. 2 and 3 are in immature plumage.
35. RUTICILLA. RUFIVENTRIS, (Vieill.).

1. Deh Tang, Ghorband, Kabul, October 8.
In female plumage.

36. RUTICILLA ERYTHRONOTA, (Eversm.).

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, March 3.
2. Andkhui, Maroh 20.

37. SaxicoLA morio, Hemp. and Ehr.

1. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 18.
2. Karawal Khana, ditto ditto, April ip
3. Shadian, Afghan Turkistan, July 9.

No. 3 is a nestling.

38. SAXICOLA OPISTHOLEUCA, Strickland.
1, Maruchak, Badghis. Herat, March 20,

39. SAXICOLA DESERTI, Temm..,
1. Maruchak, Murghat, Herat, March 19.

[No. I,

An adult male, wing 3°55 inches, black on lateral rectrices 1°7 ;
white edge on inner web of primaries not extending to shaft of feathers.
Second primary intermediate in length to fifth and sixth.

40, SaXICOLA FINSCHII, Heng].
1, Kara Bala, Maimanah, March 14,

41. SAxICOLA ISABELLINA, Riipp.

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 4.
2, cs ditto, April 17,
3. Khwaja Gogirdak,

The black on the lateral tail feathers measures 0'95 inch.

1887.] Birds from Northern Afghanistan. 83
42. CINCLUS ASIATICUS, Bechst.

Ly’) -dskar; Afghan Turkistan, Oct. 5.
2&3 Deh Tang, Ghorband, Kabul, Oct. 8.

No. 1 isa grey, spotted, young bird.

43. Hirunpo rustica, Linn.

1. 2, Karawal Khana, Badghis, Herat, April 12.

44. CoTyLE RIPARIA, (Linn.).
1. Karawal Khana, Badghis, Herat, April 14,

45. CoryLE RUPESTRIS, (Scop.).
1. Darband-i-Kil Rekhta, Murghab, Herat, May 18.

46. 'TROGLODYTES PARVULUS, Koch.

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, January 26.
2. Ditto ditto, January 28.
3. Ditte ditto, February 1.

Rather deeply coloured wrens, reddish brown above, the throat
grey, and the general barring not so prominent as in T. nipalensis.

47. Sirra syrraca, Ehr.
1. 2. Darband-i-Kil Rekhta, Murghab, Herat, May 18.
The wings measure 3°45 and 3°4 inches, tail 2°15, tarsus 1 and cul-
men 1 and 1:02.

48, Moracitia apa, Linn.

1. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, December 15,
2. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, March 3.
3. Ditto ditto, April 4.

49, Moracinta MELANOPE, Pall. |
1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 28.

50. BupyTEs MELANOCEPHALA, (Licht.).
1. g Khwaja Gogirdak, Murghab, Herat, Mar. 27.

This example is in full spring plumage.

51. Bupyres citReoua, (Pall.).
1,2, Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 28,

84,

J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

52. ANTHUS BLAKISTONI, Swinhoe.

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 3.
2. Ditto ditto, _ February 7.
3. Ditto ditto, February 8.
4,5. Ditto ditto, Februsry 22.

53. ANTHUS ROSACEUS, Hodgs.

1. Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 10.

In winter plumage.

54. ALAUDA GuTTATA, Brooks.
1. Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat.

Wing 3°6 inches, culmen 0°65, hind claw 0°5. Tertials 0°6 short of

longest primary, breast finely streaked.

5d. ALAUDA CRISTATA, Linn.

1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, January 4.
2. Ditto ditto, January 26.

The wings measure 45 and 4'0 inches, culmen 0°85 and 0°75.

56. CALANDRELLA BRACHYDACTYLA, (Leisl.).
1,2 Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 17.
3. Khwajah Gogirdak, Murghab, ditto, March 27.
57. MBLANOCORYPHA BIMACULATA, (Ménétr.).
1, 2,3. Hauz-i-Khan, Murghab, Herat, Dec. 12. |

58. CARDUELIS CANICEPS, (Vig.).
1. Andkhui, March

59. ERYTHROSPIZA OBSOLETA, (Licht.).
1, 2, Khwajah Gogirdak, Murghab, Herat, March 27,
Both examples have the bill black.

60. Passer montanus, Linn.

Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, January 29.

61. Passer 1npicus, Jard and Selby.
1, 2,3, 4. g Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 15.

1887. ] Birds from Northern Afghanistan. 85

62. PassER HISPANIOLENSIS, Temm.

1. Kara Bel, Maimanah, March 10,
2. Yulla Chashma, Murghab, Herat, March 10.
3,4, Khwajah Gogirdak, ditto, ditto, March 27.
5.6, Karawal Khana, ditto, ditto, April 12.

No. 5 is a young bird.

63. EMBERIZA PYRRHULOIDES, Pall.

| ae Maimanah.

2. ¢ Chahar Shamba, ditto, February 1.
64, EmprrizA SCH@NICLUS, Linn.

1. | @ Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Feb. 20.

2, ay Oo Ditto ditto, March 3.

4, @ Kara Bel, ~ ditto, «, March 10.

5, _$ Gulla Chashma, Murghab(Herat) March 10.
65. EmBeriza FucaTa, Pall.

1. Shadian, Afghan Turkistan, July 17.

In immature plumage with dark rufous patches appearing on
breast. The feet are very pale and the claws pale horny.

66. HuspizA LUTEOLA, (Sparrm.).
1,2, #@ Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 28.

a) 2 Ditto ditto, April 30.
4. 9 Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, May 12.
5. of juv. ditto ditto, May 13.

67. Corvus FRUGILEGUS, Linn.

1. Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 19.
2. Ditto ditto, March 23.

68. Corvus moNEDULA, Linn.

1. Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 18.
2 Ditto ditto, March 21.
3. Karawal Khana, ditto, April 15.
4. Maruchak, ditto, Dec. 25.

69. Pica rustica, (Scop.).
1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 3.
2. Ditto ditto, February 7.
70. Srurnus vuLtGaris, (Linn.).
1. Chahar Shamba, February 11.

86 J. Scully—On a Collection of Mammals and [No. 1,

71. STURNUS POLTARATSKYI, Finsch.

1,2 Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 11.
3. Ditto ditto, February 14.

72. Pastor noseus, (Linn.).
1, 2, Karawal Khana, Badghis, Herat, April 14.

73. CoLUMBA INTERMEDIA, Strickland.
1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 22.

74, CoLUMBA EVERSMANNI, Bonap.
1. Min Darakht, Maimanah, June I.

75. TURTUR AURITUS, Gray.
1. Chilik, Afghan Turkistan, July 2.

76. PTreEROCLES ALCHATA, (Linn.).

1.2 #@ Kham-i-ab, Afghan Turkistan, June 18.
Bi dO An ditto

77. PHASIANUS PRINCIPALIS, Sclater.

1. o& Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Feb. 10.
2. o& Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 10.
38.. oc Ditto ditto, March 20.
4. 2 Ditto ditto, March 26.
5. 2 Ditto ditto, Dec. 25.

This fine pheasant has lately been described as new, from specimens
obtained in the basin of the Murghab river by officers of the Afghan
Boundary Commission. It is very like Phasianus shawi of Hastern
Turkistan, but is fairly distinguishable from it by apparently constant
characters. I have examined some half dozen males of this pheasant,
and I note that the variation between individuals is very small; one,
however (No 1) above has a distinct wash of green on the rump and
upper tail coverts, and a small snow white spot on one side of the hind-
neck, marking the position of a demi-collar. On the characters and dis-
tribution of P. principalis, P. shawt, and other allies of P. colchicus, Mr.
Seebohin’s interesting paper in the Ibis for April 1887, p. 168 may be
consulted.

78. THTRAOGALLUS HIMALAYENSIS (Gray).

1, Dhap Darah, Hindu Kush, Turkistan, Oct. 7,

ee

1887.]
79.

80.

81.

82.

83.

84,

85.

86.

87.

88.

89.

90.

91.

Birds from Northern Afghanistan.

Corunix communis, Bonn.

1. o& Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 4.
2. 2 Karawal Khana, Murghab Herat, April 19.
3. & Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, May 6.

AQGIALITES CURONICA, Gmel.
1, 2, Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 10.

CHETTUSIA VILLOT#&I, (Audouin).

1, 2, Kham-i-ab, Oxus, Afghan Turkistan, June 12.

VANELLUS CRISTATUS, Meyer.
1, Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Feb. 11.

SCOLOPAX RUSTICULA, (Linn.).
1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Feb. 3.

GALLINAGO soLiTaRiIA, Hodgs.
1. Deh Tang, Ghorband, Kabul, October 8.

GALLINAGO scoLoPactNnus, Bonap.
1. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 5.

MAcHETES PUGNAX, (Linn.).

1. #@ Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, February 19,
a © Ditto ditto April 4.

ToTaNus OcHROPUS, (Linn.),
1. Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 14.

TRINGOIDES HYPOLEUCUS, (Linn.).

1, Darband-i-Kel Rekhta, Murghab, Herat, May 18,
2. Maruchak ditto ditto, May 22.

HIMANTOPUS CANDIDUS, Bonn.

1. Oxus, Afghan Turkistan

2, Kham-i-ab, ditto ditto, June 12,
OTIS TETRAX, Linn,

1. Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 12.

2, Chaman-i-Bed, Badghis, ditto Dec.
RALuus Aquaticus, Linn.

1, Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, Dec. 23.

87

88

z.
92,

93.

94.

95.

96.

97.

98.

99.

Seully—On a Collection of Mammals and Birds, Sc.

PoRZANA MARUETTA, Leach.

1. Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April Be
2. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, April 30.

PoRZANA BAILLONI, (Vieill.).
1, 2 Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, April 24.

CREX PRATENSIS, Bechst.
1. Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, May 7.

FunicaA ATRA, Linn.
1.. Andkhui, March

LARUS RIDIBUNDUS, Linn.
1. Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 18.

STERNA ANGLICA, Mont.

1. Oxus, Afghan Turkistan.
2. Kham-i-ab, Oxus, Afghan Turkistan, June 12.

Sterna MinutA, Linn.
1. Kham-i-ab, Afghan Turkistan, June 12.

PHALACROCORAX CARBO, (Linn.).
1. & Maruchak, Badghis, Herat, March 19.

A fine example in full breeding plumage.

100.

101.

102.

103.

104.

ANAS STREPERA, Linn.
1. Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 16,

ANAS ANGUsTIROSTRIs Ménétr.
1. Kham-i-ab, Oxus, Afghan Turkistan, June 12,

ANAS CREECA, Linn.
1. &# Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Jan. 25.
2. 9

ANAS PENELOPE, Linn.
1. & Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 15.

Funiauta cristata, (Linn.).
1, Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Feb. 20.

[No. I,

1887.] G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. 89

105. Funiauna nyroca, (Giild.).

1. &@ 2% Kila Wali, Murghab, Herat, March 5.
E> Maruchak, Badghis, ditto, March 16,

106, CianGuLa GLaucion, (Linn.).

1. @ Chahar Shamba, Maimanah Feb. 12.
2, Maruchak, Murghab, Herat, March 15.
2 ae Ditto ditto, March 20.

107. ErisMATuRA LEUCOCEPHALA, Scop.

1. Maruchak, Afghan Turkistan, March 21.

108. Mercus auspetius, (Linn.).

1. g& Adult, Maimanah, Feb. 10.
2. g jno. Chahar Shamba, Maimanah, Feb. 12.
he: se Ditto ditto, Feb. 17.

No. 1 is in fine black and white plumage.

109. TaporRNA VULPANSER, Flem.
1. Oxus, Afghan Turkistan, Feb.

110. Casarca Rutica, Pall.
1. Karawal Khana, Murghab, Herat, April 10.

VII.—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak.—By Groras
Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L. S8., Superintendent of the Royal Botanic
Garden, Calcutta.

[Received 29th March 1887 ;—Read 4th May 1887.]

Prior to the date of the punitive expedition which was despatched
to Perak some years ago, that province was practically an unknown
country. One of the results of the expedition just mentioned was the
location in the state of a British Resident. And as the office of Resident
has, fortunately for the interests of science and civilization, been held,
almost from its first institution, by Sir Hugh Low, we are now in pos-
session of the materials for obtaining some knowledge of its natural
history. During the past few years considerable botanical collections
have been accumulated by the Rev. Father Scortechini (now, alas! no
more) who collected on behalf of the Perak Government, and by Mr.
H. H. Kunstler, who collected for the Calcutta Botanic Garden. From
the materials brought together by these gentlemen and which have come

12

90 G. Kinge—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. [No. 1,

into my hands, I propose to draw up, as time permits, lists of species al-
ready described, together with descriptions of any which appear to be new.
And I now begin the series by an enumeration of the species of Loran-
thus indigenous to the province.

The list which follows contains in all twenty-five species, of which
eleven are described for the first time. At the end of the list I have
appended descriptions of two new Sumatran species collected by Mr.
H.O. Forbes. The genus being rather large and polymorphic, it has been
divided into sections. In the following enumeration, I follow the
sectional divisions adopted, in their Genera Plantarum, by Sir J. D.
Hooker and and the late Mr. Bentham.

Section I. EvLORANTHUS.

1. DZ. Lobbit, Hook. fil. Flora Brit. India, V, 204.

The commonest species in the province ; growing on trees of various
species, at elevations of from 500 to 4000 feet ; found also in Penang and
apparently also in Borneo. This species approaches very closely the
Sumatran species L. awanthus, Korth.

Section II. PH@NICANTHEMUM.

2. DL. pulcher, DC. Prod. ITV, 295; Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V,
205; DL. speciosus, Wall. Cat. 518; L. coccineus, Hook. Bot. Mise. t.
58; Dendrophthoe pulcher, Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. I, pt. 1, 821.

Common ; but scarcely ascending so high as the last. This varies
greatly as to the breadth of its leaves which in some plants is as much
as 3 inches, while in others it is barely 1 inch. Found also in Penang,
and represented in Tenasserim by the closely allied species L. Parishit,
Hook. fil., and in Java by L. Lyndenianus, Zoll.

3. L. pentapetalus, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I, 553, Hd. Carey and Wallich,
II, 290.; Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V. 206; DC. Prod. IV, 295; Wall.
Pl. As. Rar. iti, t. 225, and Cat. 503; Kurz For. Flora Burmah, ii, 322 ;
Griff. Notulae, IV, 617, and Ic. Pl. Asiat. t. 624, 625; Korth. Verhand,
Loranth. 66; Blume FI. Javae Loranth. 39, t. 14 and 23 A.; Phan.
pentapetalum, Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. I, Pt. 1, p. 823: Dendrophthoe penta-
petala, G. Don. Syst. ii, 419.

This is not very common in the province. It is a widely distribut-
ed species, being found in India from Nepal, along the outer and lower
Himalaya, to Sikkim ; thence through Assam, the Khasia Hills, Chitta-
gong, to Burmah: it extends also to the Andamans, Penang, Malacca,
Banka, Java, Sumatra, Borneo, and probably to other islands of the
Malayan Archipelago. Sir J.D. Hooker reduces to this species L
polycarpus, Wall, Cat. 540, and L. erythrostachys, Wall. MSS.

1887.] G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. 91

4, It. coccineus, Jack in Mal. Mise. I, 8; Hook. Bot. Mise. i, 278 ;
Hook, fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V, 206; Roxb. Fl. Ind. Ed. Carey and Wall. ii,
215; DC. Prod. IV, 296; Korth. Verhand. Loranth. 68 ; Griff. Notul. IV,
620, and Ic. Pl. Asiat. t. 626. LD. racemiferus, Wall. Cat. 539; Pha-
nicanthemum coccineum and Bennetianum, Miq. FI. Ind. Bat. I, pt. 1.
825, 826; Dendrophthoe coccinea, G. Don. Syst. ii, 419.

At low elevations: not common in the province: is found also in
Pegu, Tavoy, Malacca, Singapore, and Penang, and extends to India
(Cachar) and to some of the islands of the Malayan Archipelago.

Section III. HetTERANTHUSs.

5. Di. heteranthus, Wall. Cat. 537; Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V, 208 ;
DC. Prod. V. 306; L. eleutheropetalus, Kurz in Journ. As. Soc. Beng.
1871, ii, 64, and For. Flora Burmah, ii, 321; Dendrophthoe macrocalyz,
Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. I. Pt. 1, 821.

Found in this province only in Laroot.. This species extends as
far northwards as Chittagong, where it was once collected by Mr.
Lister. Wallich and Brandis found itin Burmah. Southward it ex-
tends to Java and Borneo.

6. Li. crassipetalus, nov. spec. Glabrous in all its parts, except the
bracteoles and calyx-tube which are puberulous; branchlets thick,
striate, polished, the bark dark coloured ; leaves coriaceous, rigid, petio-
late, scattered, broadly ovate-oblong, rarely ovate-elliptic ; apex obtuse ;
base attenuate ; shining on the upper, dull on the lower, surface ; nerves
invisible when fresh, obscure when dry, midrib slightly prominent:
length of blade 1-5 to 2 in. (in the ovate-elliptic leaves as much as 2°5 in.) ;
breadth about 1 inch, rarely 1°5 in.; petiole ‘25 in. long, stout; racemes
longer than the leaves, stout, rigid, erect, axillary, sparsely many-flowered ;
pedicel thick, :15 in. long, bearing at its apex a single broad, cochleate,
bract, bracteole 0; calyx-tube cylindric, the limb wide-spreading, trun-
cate, cup-shaped ; corolla straight, narrowly conical, petals, 5, thick,
distinct to their bases, smooth and yellowish externally, ridged and of a
bright red internally, ‘75 in. long; anthers linear, half as long as the
petals, basifixed : style filiform, stigma minute.

Perak, on Gunong Idjou. Scortechini, Nos. 363 and 521.

7. lL. productus, nov. spec. Quite glabrous ; branches long, straight,
strongly 4-angled, slightly flattened especially at the nodes, the bark
polished and dark in colour; leaves coriaceous, petiolate, opposite,
elliptic-lanceolate or ovate-oblong, gradually narrowed to the sub-acute
or obtuse apex, narrowed rather suddenly to the petiole at the base ;
nerves obscure even when dry, midrib slightly prominent; length of
blade 3°5 in. to 5 in.; breadth 1°5 in. to nearly 2 in. ; petiole about ‘5 in.

92 G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. [No. 1,

long; flowers crowded in small, sessile, axillary clusters; bract 0 ;
bracteoles cohering into a short, cylindric, obscurely 2 to 4-crenate tube
which, in the unfertilised flower, envelopes the whole of the calyx
except its limb; calyx-tube shorter than the cylindric, truncate limb ;
petals 4, distinct, fleshy, linear, *35 in. long, retlexed from about the
middle; anthers linear, basifixed, nearly as long as the filaments, curved
when mature; style shorter than the petals; stigma small, truncate ;
fruit ‘3 in. in diameter, globular, smooth, crowned by the rather long
cylindric calyx-limb and enveloped at its base by the persistent brac-
teolar cup.

Perak, at elevations of from 3000 to 3600 feet; Scortechini, Nos.
391 and 581; Kunstler (King’s collector) No. 3240.

A remarkable species ; with long, slender, polished branches which
are almost black when dry. From the flower-bearing axils there often
arise short, leaf-and-flower-bearing branches ; and as the leaves on these
(in herbarium specimens): usually fall off, they assume the appearance
of long-peduncled cymes. This is clearly a Heteranthus ; but it does
not quite conform to the definition of that section given by Mr. Bentham
and Sir J. D. Hooker in their Gen. Plantar. (111, 208), inasmuch as there
is no bract present, and there are bracteoles which form a cup almost
entirely enveloping the calyx in the flower, and persisting even in the
ripe fruit.

I have named this species from the length of its branches.

Section IV. CrcLhaNnrHus.

8. LL. scurrula, Linn. var. obtecta, Kurz For. Fl. Burm. ii, 3)9;
Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V, 209: ZL. obtectus, Wall. Cat. 534: Z. concavi-
folius, Griff. Notul. IV, 615.

Very common at low elevations; Scortechini, Nos. 3110, 4210.

The typical form of this species occurs throughout the whole of
British India; its other varieties, as defined in the Flora of British
India, viz., bengalensis, laevigata, and graciliflora having each a more
circumscribed distribution.

9. LL. ferrugineus, Roxb. Fl. Ind. I, 551, ii, 188; DC. Prod. IV,
299; Wall.. Cat. 500; Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V. 210; Jack in Mal.
Mise. i, 9, and in Hook, Bot. Mise. i, 279, t. 59; Dendrophthoe ferruginea,
G. Don Gen. Syst. iii, 420 ; Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. I, Pt. 1, 812.

Not uncommon at low elevations ; Scotechini, Nos. 630b, 2099.

Very common in Malacca, Singapore, and Penang: found also by
Kurz in lower Burmah. Distributed also in Sumatra and Java. A
specimen in the Calcutta Herbarium and named by him L. Oortianus
Korth, is the same as this: and, if Junghuhn’s identification is correct,

1887.] G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. 93

Korthal’s name, as being the older, must supplant Roxburgh’s. Den-
drophthoe ignea, Scheff. from Banka, according to the specimen in
the Calcutta collection, is also the same as this. J. Schultesii, BL, (FI.
Jay. Loranth, t. 2) appears to me referable to LZ. scurrula, Linn. rather
than to this.

10. LD. Malaccensis, Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. India, V, 210.

On high trees, at elevations of from 3000 to 4000 feet. King’s
Collector (Kunstler) No. 6286: found also at Malacca by Griffith.

Section V. DeENDROPHTHOR.

ll. ZL. grandifrons, nov. spec. Young branches rather thin, terete,
little swollen at the nodes, the bark dark-coloured, lenticillate: leaves
sub-opposite or alternate, rarely exactly opposite, coriaceous, petiolate,
broadly ovate or ovate-oblong, the apex sub-acute, the base rounded or
emarginate ; main nerves 4 to 6 pairs, ascending, prominent (as is the
midrib) especially on the lower surface; both surfaces dull, sparsely
pulverulent ; length of blade 5 to 8 inches, breadth 3 in. to 4°5 in.;
petiole “6 in. to 1 inch: the whole inflorescence covered with minute
pulverulent, sub-deciduous, tomentum ; racemes solitary, axillary, or from
the older leafless branches, woody, erect, or slightly curved, 2°5 in.
long, about 30-flowered, pedicels short; bract® small, thick, clawed ;
calyx-tube cylindric, inflated at the base, the limb much longer than the
short, sub-globose, ovary, 5 or 6 toothed; corolla-tube 3 inches long,
cylindrical, 5 or 6-striate, slightly inflated towards the limb; lobes of
limb ‘5 in. long, reflexed, linear; anthers basifixed, linear, about ha!f
as long as the lobes; style filiform, a little longer than the stamens;
stigma small, sub-globose.

In the low country, not very common. Scortechinit, No. 926;
Kunstler, Nos. 786 and 2067. Found also in the Lampongs, in Sumatra,
on trees by the edge of heavy forest. H.O. Forbes, No. 1665.

When young the whole exterior of the corolla is tomentose like the
calyx, but when fully expanded it occasionally becomes sub-glabrous.
The base of the corolla is whitish; the upper part pink. In advanced
bud some of the corollas are constricted at the apex and inflated towards
the middle; but when fully expanded the corolla is tubular, gradually
widening towards the mouth. This fine species comes near pentandrus
as to technical characters: but in general appearance it somewhat
resembles L. longiflorus, Desr. It is, however, well distinct from the
latter by its differently shaped, more distinctly nerved leaves; and
by its more erect, rigid, and scurfy inflorescence.

12. LZ. pentandrus, Linn. Mant. 63; Bl. Bijdr. 661; Hook. fil. FI.
Brit. Ind. V, 216; DC. Prod. IV, 305; Kurz For. Fl. Burmah, II, 320;

94 G. King—QOn the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. [No. 1,

Wall. Cat. 514: Korth. Verhand. Loranth. 80; Blume FI. Javae, Loranth.
33, t. 10: L. farinosus, Desr. in Lamk. Encycl. iii, 597; Roxb. Fl. Ind.
Kd. Carey and Wall. ii, 221; Griff. Notul. IV, 616, and Ic. Pl. Asiat. t.
620, f. 1, 2; Dendrophthoe pentandra and farinosa, Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. I;
pt. 1, 818, 819; Hlytranthe farinosa, G. Don. Gen. Syst. IV, 427.

Very common in all parts of the province at low elevations (Kunstler,
Nos. 4931, 7538, 7767; Scortechini, No. 605); distributed northwards
through Burmah and Chittagong as far as Sylhet, and southwards in the
Malayan Peninsula and Archipelago generally. Sir J. D. Hooker reduces
to this species L. rigidus, contractus, and Finlaysonianus, Wall. Cat.
Nos. 531, 6864, and 6871.

13. L. Scortechinii, nov. spec. Glabrous, the young branches thick,
terete, scarcely swollen at the nodes, the bark reddish; leaves coria-
ceous, petiolate, in verticels of about 6, oblong-lanceolate or oblong-
elliptic, the apex shortly caudate-acuminate, the base attenuate ; mid-
rib prominent on both surfaces, nerves invisible in fresh, obscure in
dry, specimens, about 15 pairs, sub-horizontal; length of blade 7 to 8
inches; breadth 2°25 to nearly 3 inches; petioles stout, 1:25 in. ;
racemes with a thick, pitted, woody axis little more than 1°5 in. long,
axillary; flowers numerous, crowded; bract minute, cochleate, clawed;
calyx tube cylindric, the limb irregularly dentate ; corolla curved, tubu-
lar, slightly expanded upwards and 6-angled near its junction with the
6-cleft limb; lobes of limb linear, slightly expanded at the base, about
a fifth of the length of the tube; anthers linear, obtuse, about half as
long as the lobes; style as long as the stamens; stigma globose,
small; corolla tube 4 in. long, limb 1 inch.

At elevations under 1000 feet, not common: Sortechini, No. 900;
Kunstler (King’s collector), No. 6020.

This is a fine species, and is distinguished amongst Asiatic Dendro-
pthoes by its large, verticillate leaves. The corolla is of a pale yellow,
the lobes of the limb being tinged with green: the stigma is red.

14. L. Duthieanus, nov. spec. Young shoots terete, not swollen
at the nodes, bark pale pinkish, sparsely lenticellate; axis of inflores-
cence and bracts minutely pubescent ; other parts quite glabrous; leaves
coriaceous, alternate opposite or in verticels of 3, petiolate, oblong-elliptic
or elliptic-lanceolate with sub-acute apex and attenuate base, midrib
and nerves invisible in the fresh, slightly visible in dry, specimens ;
length of blade 2°5 to 3 inches, breadth °75 in. to 1 in., petiole ‘4 in.
long ; racemes slender, axillary, shortly pedunculate, about 6-flowered ;
bract small, cochleate, clawed; bracteoles 0; calyx-tube cylindric, the
limb, short, truncate, waved; corolla tubular, bright red in colour,
curved, inflated upwards, constricted at the base and at the apex when in

1887.] G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. 99

bud, 6-striate, limb about one third of the length of the tube ; the lobes
6, linear, sub-spathulate, thickened at the tips, reflexed ; anther linear,
about half as long as the lobes, basifixed ; style filiform, as long as the
stamens ; stigma small, globular.

Collected only once by the late Father Scortechini, the exact loca-
lity being unknown.

A species allied to curvatus, Bl., but with a hexamerous, glabrous
corolla, which is moreover wider and of a different colour from that of
curvatus ; also with narrower and more irregularly disposed leaves than
in that species. Named after Mr. J. F. Duthie, Superintendent of the
Botanic Garden, Saharunpore.

Section VI. LoxaANnTHERA.

15. L. speciosus, Bl. Fl. Jav. Loranth. 15, t. 20, and 23 fig. C.
Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. I, Pt. 822.; L. coccineus, Reinw. MSS. (not of
Jack) Bl. Bijdr. 664; L. Reinwardtianus, Schult. Syst. DC. Prod. LY,
706: L. lorantherus, DC. 1. c. p. 316.

Apparently not common in the Province ; Scortechini, No. 1328 ;
on the banks of the Kinta river (Kunstler, No. 767.) There isa single
specimen in the Calcutta Herbarium from Malacca. The species is
found in Sumatra (Forbes No. 3234a) and in Java.

Section VII. Macrosouen.
a. longiflorae.

16. Z. formosus, Bl. Bijdr. 664 and Fl. Jav. Loranth. t. 15; DC.
Prod. IV, 297; Kurz For. Flora Burmah ii, 317; Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind.
V, 220; Macrosolen formosus, Mig. Fl. Ind. Bat. I, Pt. 1, 827; Hly-
tranthe formosa, G. Don Gen. Syst. 111, 426.

At elevations of from 3000 to 4000 feet, Kunstler, Nos. 2170 and
6264: found also in Java, and, according to a single leaf specimen in
the Calcutta Herbarium (Griffith, No. 2729), also in Burmah.

17. L. Kunstlert, nov. spec. Quite glabrous ; young branches stout,
terete, the bark pale; leaves coriaceous, sub-sessile, opposite, ovate-
oblong, gradually narrowed to the sub-acuminate apex, the base rounded,
not cordate ; midrib and nerves prominent on both surfaces (when dry)
but especially on the lower; primary lateral nerves about 6 pairs,
secondary about 8 pairs; length of blade 8 to 10 inches, breadth 3 in.
to 4°5 in.; petiole very stout, about ‘15 in. long; racemes very short,
from the axils of the leaves and also from the old wood; bracteoles 3,
minute, broad, united by their bases; calyx-tube cylindric, smooth, the
limb truncate, slightly wavy; corolla clavate and boldly 6-angled in bud,

96 G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. [No. I,

slightly curved, tubular, inflated at the base of the limb, lobes of the
limb 6, reflexed, sub-spathulate, keeled externally, the tips thickened ;
anthers half as long as the lobes, linear, basifixed, with a slight process
at the union with the filament ; style filiform, as long as the stamens;
stigma truncate; berry ‘5 in. long, ovoid, bright yellow at first, black
when ripe; length of corolla-tube 2°5 in., of limb ‘6 in.

At elevations under 500 feet, H. H. Kunstler (King’s collector),
Nos. 2669, 2760, 6009, 8460.

This comes near L. formosus, Bl., but has much larger leaves, which
have rounded (not acute) bases as in that species. The corolla also
differs. Mr. Kunstler describes this as a very handsome species, the tube
of the corolla being of a rich yellow, the hmb bright green externally
and dark red inside. Itis a large species, plants of it often reaching 8
to 10 feet in length.

18. LZ. dianthus, King and Scort. MSS. Quite glabrous, the young
shoots terete, thin, scarcely swollen at the nodes, the bark pale; leaves
thinly coriaceous, entire, shortly petiolate, opposite, exactly lanceolate
rarely ovate-lanceolate, the apex acuminate ; midrib and primary nerves
slightly visible when fresh, rather distinct when dry ; length of blade 3 in.
to 5 in., breadth ‘75 in. to 2°5 in.; petioles slender, ‘2 in. long; cymes
axillary, sessile, 2-flowered ; bracts at base of cyme 2, decussate, ovate-
acute; bracteoles of the individual flowers united into a short, thick
annulus which surrounds the base of the flower; calyx-tube smooth,
cylindric, the limb short, truncate; corolla narrowly tubular, inflated
and boldly 6-angled just under the limb, clavate in bud; limb with 6
twisted, reflexed, oblanceolate or sub-spathulate lobes which are keeled
and inflated at the base; anthers basifixed, linear, one-third of the
length of the lobes of the limb; style filiform, as long as the stamens ;
stigma small, capitate: fruit globular, smooth, ‘5 in. in diam., crowned
by the calyx-limb ; length of corolla tube 2°5 in.; of limb °75 in.

At elevations under 500 feet; Scortechini, Nos. 76 and 604a;
King’s Collector, Nos. 1870, 6446.

This species comes near formosus, Bl., from which the sessile, 2-
flowered cymes, single, decussate pair of bracts, the annulus formed of
the united bracteoles, and the globular berry are the best characters to
distinguish it. This also must be near JL. meluitangensis, Korth., of
which I have seen no specimen. The tube of the corolla of this species
is described as scarlet, and the lobes of the limb as green, with purple
edges and a pale line along the anterior surface. The late Father
Scortechini left a drawing of this species, to which I have added the
details. Heleft no MSS. name for the species, but, from a note on
the drawing, he appears to have considered it to be L. formosus, Bl. or

near it.

1887.] G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. 97

19. ZL. evenius, Bl. Fl. Javae Loranth. t. 16; D. avenis, Bl. Bijdr.
663.; Korthals Verhand. Loranth. 85; DC. Prod. IV, 397; Hlytranthe
avenis, G. Don. Syst. 11, 426.

Found only once in Perak by Father Scortechini: extends also to
Sumatra.

20. L. platyphylius, nov. spec. Quite glabrous. Young branches
4-angled ; leaves opposite or sub-opposite, thinly coriaceous, subsessile,
broadly ovate-rotund or sub-orbicular, edges entire or unequally and’
remotely crenate, the apex obtuse, the base cordate; primary lateral
nerves about 4 pairs, curving, somewhat distinct on both surfaces, the
midrib rather prominent; length and breadth of blade about 4°5 in. ;
petiole less than ‘15 in. long, stout; racemes very short, axillary, about
4-flowered ; bract single, bracteoles minute, coalescing into a sinuate-
edged cup less than a quarter of the length of the cylindrical, truncate,
calyx-tube ; corolla large, curved, tubular, expanding slightly upwards,
6-angled and inflated below the apex, clavate when in bud; limb 6-
cleft, the lobes spreading, linear-lanceolate or sub-spathulate, blunt and
inflexed at the tips, each with 2 ridges on the inner surface, inflated
and keeled at the base; filaments adherent to the tube; anthers linear,
basifixed ; tube of corolla 3°5 in. long; limb ‘8 in.; style filiform, as
long as the stamens; stigma small, sub-capitate ; fruit unknown.

Found only once by Scortechini, who has not noted the exact
locality.

A species recognisable at once amongst the Asiatic species of Ma-
crosolen by its large sub-sessile, nearly orbicular leaves.

b. racemulosae.

21. DZ. ampullaceus, Roxb. FI. Ind. I, 552, ii, 189, and Ed. Carey and
Wall. ii, 209 ; Hook. fil. Fl. Brit. Ind. V, 220; DC. Prod. IV, 296 ; Kurz
For. Fl. Burm. u, 316; Wall. Cat. 502. DZ. swb-umbellatus, Bl. Bijdr.
662 and FJ. Jav. Loranth. t.18; ZL. sphaerocarpus, Bl. Bijdr. 661 and
Fl. Jay. Loranth. t.17; DC. Prod. IV, 297; Macrosolen pallens, sphae-
rocarpus and oleioides, Miq. Fl. Ind. Bat. i, Pt. 1, 830, 831; Hlytranthe
spheeroidea, Don. Gard. Dict. IV, 127. |

On Ulu Bubong, at elevations from 500 to 1000 feet: Kunstler,
Nos. 7866 and 10697. This species, as limited by Sir J. D. Hooker
in his Flora of British India, is distributed from Bengal, Assam, and the
Khasia Hills to Penang, Malacca, and Singapore. I agree with Hooker
in considering it as probably a mere form of ZL. globosus, Roxb.; and,
if this view be correct, the synonymy of globosus should be reduced
here. The Wallichian species pallens (Cat. 523), carinulatus (529),
sub-globusus (538), olerfolius, (524), viridiflorus, (512), are all forms
of the same widely distributed and therefore variable plant.

13

98 G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. [No. 1,

22. L. Lowi, nov. spec. Glabrous everywhere, except the peduncles,
pedicels, and bracteoles, which are puberulous ; young shoots thin, terete,
slightly swollen at the nodes, the bark pale brown; leaves rigid, co-
riaceous, ovate-lanceolate, or elliptic-lanceolate, gradually tapering to
either end, the apex acute or acuminate, the edges recurved when dry ;
nerves invisible, midrib visible only on the pale, dull, under surface ;
length of blade 1°5 in. to 2in.; breadth ‘6 in., rarely *8 inch.; petiole stout,
"15 in.; racemes umbellate, in clusters of 1 to 3, in the axils of the
leaves, on short pedicels, 2 to 4-flowered; bract and bracteoles minute,
broadly ovate, acute, the latter united by their bases into a3-toothed
cup: calyx tubular, smooth, the limb very short, truncate, waved;
corolla about 1 in. long, the tube slightly curved, 6-angled and slightly
inflated at the junction withthe limb; lobes of the limb sub-spathulate,
thickened at the apex, reflexed, about a third as long as the tube;
anthers about a third as long as the lobes, linear; style filiform, nearly
as long as the stamens; stigma small, sub-globular.

Found only once in the province (by Fr. Scortechini) and the
exact locality not noted.

A species, in the texture of leaves and in inflorescence, approaching
L. retusus, Jack; but very distinct from that and from the other
Malayan species of Macrosolen. Named in honour of Sir Hugh Low,
British Resident in Perak.

Section VIII. ELyrrantHe.

23. L. albidus, Bl. Bijdr. 665, and Fl. Jav. Loranth. (sub Hlytranthe)
t. 22; Korth. Verhand. Loranth. 87; DC. Prod. IV, 299; Hook. fil.
Fl. Brit. Ind. V, 222; L. lecucosiphon, Griff., Notul. IV, 623, and Ic. PI.
Asiat. t. 619-623: Hlytranthe albida, Miq. FI. Ind. Bat. I, Pt. 1, 832.

Not common ; Scortechini, Nos. 428 and 626. This extends north-
wards to lower Burmah, and southwards to Malacca, Java, Sumatra, and
Borneo.

Section IX. LEPIOSTEGERES.

24, DL. Beccarwi, nov. species. Glabrous; the younger branches
quadrangular (at least when dry), the older branches terete; leaves on
rather long petioles, opposite or sub-opposite, thinly coriaceous, entire,
from ovate-lanceolate or ovate-oblong to sub-orbicular, very variable
even on the same plant, the apex sub-acute or obtuse, the base cuneate
or rounded, midrib prominent, especially on the under surface; primary
nerves about 6 pairs, slightly visible on the under surface (when dry) ;
length of blade 3°5 in. to .5in., breadth 1°5 in. to nearly 3 in. ; petiole
‘75 in, to 1:25 in. long ; capitula from the old wood, 20 to 30-flowered,

1887.] G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. 99

sessile, sub-globose when young, afterwards strobiliform and much elon-
gate; the bracts large, numerous, imbricate, coloured, from oblong to
semi-orbicular, obtuse, the inner 2 to 3 inches long, the outer gradually
shorter, all empty ; calyx short, cylindric, truncate; corolla, 3 to 3:5 in.
long, the tube splitting into 6, very narrow, linear segments which are
united for about ‘5 in. at the base, and then again slightly just below
the twisted, reflexed, linear, obtuse segments of the limb; anthers
linear, pointed, basifixed, *5 in. long: style filiform; stigma small,
rounded, exserted slightly beyond the anthers ; fruit sub-angular, globose,
‘3 in. in diam.

Rare in the province; occurring at elevations under 2000 feet.
Scortechini, 1208; King’s Collector, Nos. 5793 and 7956. Found also in
Borneo by Sig. Beccari (Herb. Becc. P. B. 1171).

This is the finest of all the Asiatic species of Loranthus. The enor-
mous bracts are of a pale red colour; the tube of the corolla is of a
deep claret purple, while the reflexed limbis yellow. The whole in-
florescence is about 6 inches long and forms a most striking object.

25. Loranthus Kingii, Scortechini MSS. Young branches pale,
terete, swollen at the nodes, slightly lenticillate when young, otherwise
quite smooth; leaves coriaceous, petiolate, opposite, exactly ovate-
lanceolate, smooth and with the nerves invisible on both surfaces, the
midrib prominent below ; length of blade 3 in.; breadth 1°25 in. to 1.5
in.; petiole about ‘5 in.; capitula sessile, axillary, strobiliform, 4 to 6-
flowered ; bracts large, empty, coloured, keeled., in two series, an outer
and an inner ; the outer of 6 to 7 decussate pairs, the uppermost of which
is linear-oblong, obtuse, 1°5 in. long, the lower pairs gradually smaller
and more or less acute; the inner series of a single lanceolate pair ;
bracteoles round each individual flower 4, linear-lanceolate, about *75
inch long; calyx very short, 6-toothed; corolla narrowly infundibu-
liform, curved below the middle, 1°75 in. long, split nearly half-way
down on ove side, and cleft at the apex for about one-fifth of its entire
length into 5, lanceolate, acuminate, reflexed teeth ; anthers basifixed,
linear, subulate, with a slight process at their bases; style filiform,
about as long as the stamens ; stigma small, sub-capitate: fruit elongated
ovoid, crowned by the remains of the calyx-tube.

* Perak; Scortechini, No. 1251.

The late lamented Father Scortechini left only a single specimen of
this with me. It appears, however, to agree with an imperfect specimen
in the Calcutta Herbarium from Malacca (Herb. Maingay No. 695).

* * % * * %

I take the present opportunity of describing two new species col-
lected by Mr. H. O. Forbes in Sumatra—both handsome plants, be-
longing respec tively to the sections Lovanthera and Lepiostegeres.

100 G. King—On the Species of Loranthus indigenous to Perak. [No. 1,

Loranthus (Sect. Loxanthera) Lampongus, nov. spec. Branches terete,
scurfy when young, as are the peduncles, ultimately all parts glabrous :
leaves thickly coriaceous, opposite or sub-opposite, entire, petiolate, ovate-
oblong to broadly ovate, apex sub-acute, or acute, base rounded, rarely
sub-acute, the midrib very prominent and the nerves very indistinct
on both surfaces, length of blade 4 to 5 inches: petioles stout, about
‘75 in. long; flowers in pairs on crowded short, stout, bifurcate axil-
lary peduncles; calyx tube short, cylindric, the lmb truncate, irre-
gularly and obscurely sinuate, sub-crenate ; corolla nearly 1°5 in. long,
clavate in bud, the cylindrical tube slightly inflated about the middle,
cleft at the apex to about one third of its length into 6 linear-lanceolate
lobes ; stamens 6, the filament arcuate, dilated at the apex, and at-
tached to the back of the linear anther below its middle; style fili-
form; stigma minute, clavate: bracteole short, broad, minute.

Lampongs, Sumatra: H. O. Forbes, No. 1737.

The curved filaments and dorsifixed anthers put this unmistakeably
into the section Lowanthera. That section, however, as at present de-
fined, is 5-merous. The definition of it must therefore be altered.to 5 or
6-merous. .

Loranthus (Sect. Lepiostegeres) Forbesit, nov. spec. Glabrous; the
branches terete, with pale bark, swollen at the nodes; leaves coriaceous,
petiolate, entire, opposite, ovate-oblong, sub-acute, the base rounded, or
slightly cordate; midrib thick, prominent on the under surface; the
nerves about 6 pairs, indistinct on both surfaces when fresh, slightly
distinct on the upper surface when dry; length of blade 4°5 in. to 5°5

in.: breadth 2 in. to 2°5 in.; petiole stout, *75 in. long; capitula 4 to 6-.

flowered, axillary, sessile, strobiliform, the bracts large, coloured,
keeled, in two series, an outer and an inner; the outer series of 5 or 6
decussate pairs of which the upper pair are 2°3 in. long, the second
pair about half as long, and the outer pairs gradually shorter, all ob-
tuse ; the inner series of 2 pairs, narrower than the outer, acuminate ;
each flower surrounded by 4 linear-lanceolate, keeled bracteoles about
1 inch in length; calyx tube very short, 6-toothed ; corolla tubular,
slightly widened above, the tube 6-angled, cleft for about one third of

its entire length into 6, lanceolate, acuminate teeth: filaments flattened,

grooved, adnate to the corolla-tube ; anthers linear, subulate, with a pro*

cess at their bases: style filiform, as long as the stamens ; stigma small,

cylindric. ‘al
Sumatra, near Kepala, at an elevation of 1200 feet. H. O. Ferbes,

Herb. No. 2844.
Mr. Forbes found this superb species growing on a Legummous
tree. The bracts he describes as being scarlet, and the corolla of a

brilliant lake colour.

Oe et di i ee ee ee ee

EEE —

1887. | E, Simon—Arachnides de V Asie méridionale. 101

VIII.—E’fude sur les Arachnides de? Asie méridionale faisant partie
des collections de Indian Museum (Calcutta). Par M. E. Simon,
de Paris —Communicated by Tue SUPERINTENDENT OF THE INDIAN
Museum.

[Received December 30th ;—Read June 1st, 1887. |
E
ARACHNIDES RECUEILLIS A Tavoy (TENNASSERIM) PAR Moti Ram.

Ordo ARANE AL.

Fam. Attide.

1.—Prexippus cunicivorus, Doleschall, Tweede Brjdr. etc., 1859,
p- 14 pl. IX, f. 5. (Attus).—
Menemerus culicivorus, Thorell, Rag. Mal. etc., I., p. 227; III, p. 508.
Kgaya, Tavoy.
Répandu a Java, aux Célébes, et 4 Amboine.

Fam. Lycoside.

Cette famille est représentée par deux espéces dont 1’ habitat est trés
étendu. Hippasa greenallie Blackw. est répandu dans toute I’ Asie
tropicale, dans 1’ Indoustan’ jusqu’ a Ceylan, et dans |’ Indo-Chine
jusqu’ 4 Malacca; nous |’ avons indiqué nous-méme de Birmanie, de
Pondichéry, et de Wagra-Karoor dans le centre du Dekkan. Ocyale
atalanta Sav. est encore plus remarquable par sa distribution: cette
espéce, trouvée pour la premiére fois en Asie, est répandue dans toute
l’ Afrique tropicale du Sénégal 4 Mozambique et jusqu’ 4 la Méditerranée
par la vallée du Nil. :

2.—HIipPAsa GREENALLIAZ, Blackw, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 1867 (Lycosa).
Priata agelenoides KH. Sim., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen. XX, 1884, p. 234.
Hippasa greenallie K. Sim., Bull. Soc. Zool. Fr., 1885, p. 31.

Tavoy.

3.—OcYALE ATALANTA, Aud. in Sav., H’g. 1825-27, Ar. XXII, p. 149,
wt IV., f. 10.

Dolomedes ocyale, Walck., Apt., I, 1837, p. 253.

Lycosa virulenta, Cambr., P. Z. 8. L., 1876, p. 600.

Ocyale atalanta, E. Sim., Ann, Soc. ent. Fr. 1885, p. 258.

Tavoy. —

102 E. Simon—Arachnides del Asie méridionale [No. 1,

Fam. Sparasside.

4,.—HETEROPODA VENATORIA, L.

Pour la synonymie cf. H. Sim., Rév. Sparass., 1880, p. 48.

Tavoy.

5.—HETEROPODA LANGUIDA, sp. nov.

Ceph.-th. long. 10 mm.; lat. 8,9 mm. Abd. long. 13 mm. Pedes I
long. 36, 5 mm.; IL 40 mm. IIL 33 mm.; IV 37, 5.

Cephalothorax evidenter longior quam latior crassus sat convexus
laete rufo-castaneus cervino-pubescens, postice in declivitate testaceo-
marginatus, stria thoracica longa. Oculi anticiin apicibus lineam rectam
formantes, medii lateralibus fere duplo minores inter se quam a latera-
libus paulo remotiores sed spatio diametro oculi paulo angustiore sejunc-
ti. Oculi postici in linea evidenter recurva, medii lateralibus saltem
% minores et a lateralibus quam inter se paulo remotiores. Medii aream
non multo longiorem quam latiorem sed antice quam postice multo
angustiorem occupantes, subaequales, antici vix minores. Clypeus sub«
verticalis planus oculis lateralibus anticis latior. Sternum coxe et
lamine rufo-castanea, pars labialis infuscata sed apice anguste testacea.
Abdomen oblongum antice obtuse emarginatum fusco-lividum. Pedes
mediocres sat robusti rufo-castanei, Scopule sat dense in metatarsis
anticis basin attingentes sed in posticis partem apicalem tantum occu-
pantes. Tibia IV cephalothoraci circiter aequilonga in parte secunda
aculeo dorsali munita. Plaga vulve antice depressa foveolata et longi-
tudinaliter carinata postice valde convexa semicirculari sed sulco
angusto et profundo longitudinaliter secta.

Tavoy.

H. mediocri BH. Sim. valde affinis, sed differt praesertim area oculo-
rum mediorum breviore et sulco plage genitalis multo angustiore
sublineari.

6.—HETEROPODA FERINA, sp. nov.

&, Ceph.-th. long. 7,6 mm. lat. 7,2 mm. Pedes I 39, 4 mm.; II
43,6 mm.; III 33,6 mm.; IV 37 mm.

Cephalothorax vix longior quam latior parum convexus obscure
fulvo-rufescens postice in declivitate et antice in clypeo testaceo-margi-
natus, supra lineis radiantibus obscurioribus notatus, stria thoracica
longa. Oculi antici appropinquati in linea recta, medii lateralibus plus
duplo minores et inter se quam a lateralibus remotiores spatio diametro
oculi vix angustiore sejuncti. Oculi postici in linea evidenter recurva,
medii lateralibus saltem 4 minores et a lateralibus quam inter se remo-
tiores. Medii aream longiorem quam latiorem et antice quam postice
angustiorem occupantes, antici posticis minores. Clypeus oculis latera-

1887. | faisant partie des collections de V Indian Musewn. 103

libus anticis paulo angustior. Sternum fulvo-testaceum. Abdomen
ovatum lurido-testaceum lurido-pubescens parcissime et inordinate fus-
co-punctatum et in parte apicali linea fusca transversim arcuata notatum,
venter immaculatus. Pedes longi parum robusti fulvo-rufescentes
femoribus dilutioribus sed supra levissime fusco-variatis. Scopule
long parum dense tarsos et métatarsorum extremitates tantum occu-
pantes. Tibia IV cephalothorace multo longior aculeo dorsali in parte
apicali sito munita. Pedes-maxillares fulvi tarso leviter infuscato,
femore supra ad apicem 4—1 aculeato, patella paulo longiore quam
latiore convexa utrinque uniaculeata, tibia patella longiore et graciliore
prope basin aculeis longissimis quinque instructa apophysa apicali arti-
culo multo breviore crassa antice directa nigra supra leviter rugosa et
impressa ad apicem excisa, breviter emarginata et minute bimucronata
(mucrone superiore altero longiore incurvo et acuto) infra in carinam
obliquam producta, tarso angusto longissime producto in parte apicali
teretiusculo, bulbo ovato simplici longitudinaliter sulcato.

Tavoy.

7.—Patystes Kocut, E. Sim., Rév. Sparass., 1880, p. 45.

Nous ne connaissions jusqu’ ici que la femelle de cette espéce.

&. Ceph.-th. long. 9 mm. Abd. long. 11mm. Cephalothorax humi-
lior quam in femina et paulo brevior quam tibia 4i paris, fusco-rufes-
cens flavido-pubescens, linea media nigra exillima longitudinaliter sectus.
Sternum coxe oris partes venterque lete rufo-brunnea vel livida. Ab-
domen supra fulvo-cervinum. Chelarum margo inferior dentibus sat
parvis quatuor lo singulariter posito reliquis subcontiguis, lo majore 20
et 40 minutissimis. Pedes multo longiores quam in femina fulvo-cer-
vini femoribus infra rufulo-tinctis scopulis nigro-sericeis. Pedes-maxil-
lares fulvi femore compresso Jeviter arcuato supra in parte apicali 4—1
aculeato, patella longiore quam latiore utrinque uniaculeata, tibia patella
longiore terete prope basin et intus aculeis longissimis 4 vel 5 armata,
extus apophysa apicali oblique divaricata sat valida valde uncata atten-
uata sed obtusa, tarso longe ovato supra cervino-piloso sed in parte
apicali vitta fusca densius pilosa ornato, bulbo rufulo longe ovato apice
depresso et processu membranaceo oblique munito.

Mita, Tavoy ; collines séparant la Birmanie de Siam.

Cette espéce a été découverte a Singapore.

8.—THELICTOPIS CANESCENS, sp. nov.

¢@. Ceph.-th. long, 9 mm.; lat. 7, 4mm. Abd. long. 12 mm. ; lat. 7,
5mm. PedesI 24mm.; Il 23,6 mm.;TII 19 mm.;IV 24,3 mm.

Cephalothorax niger laevis pilis albidis pronis, praecsertim antice
setis nigris mixtis, dense vestitus, crassus et convexus fronte lata, stria
remota sat brevi sed profunda. Oculi antici in linea leviter procurva,

104 EK. Simon—Arachnides del Asie méridionale [No Ag

medii lateralibus circiter } majores a lateralibus quam inter se multo
remotiores inter se spatio diametro oculi evidenter angustiore sejuncti.
Oculi postici in linea levissime procurva, medii parvi spatio diametro
eculi saltem.quadruplo latiore sejuncti, laterales mediis paulo majores
leviter prominuli. Area mediorum latior quam longior et antice quam
postice angustior. Clypeus oculis mediis anticis haud vel non multo
angustior. Chel robustissime ad basin valde geniculate nigro nitide
parce setose. Partes oris sternum coxeque nigra. Abdomen sat late
ovatum postice valde attenuatum et prope mammillas stria annulari pro-
funde constrictum fuscum, fulvo-cinereo pubescens. Pedes breves et

robusti femoribus atris reliquis articulis fusco-ravidis nigricanti-lineatis,

tarsis dilutioribus, albo-cretaceo pubescentes et nigro-setosi. Tibia cum
patella 41 paris cephalothorace paulo brevior. Tuibiz cunctz aculeis
dorsalibus carentes, quatuor antic aculeis inferioribus 5—5 sat brevi-
bus munite sed lateralibus carentes, postice aculeis inferioribus 3—3 et

utrinque lateralibus bine munite. Patelle mutice. Scopule sat breves

dense basin metatarsorum sex anticorum attingentes sed apicem metar-
sorum posticorum tantum occupantes. Plaga vulve oblonga multo
longior quam latior nigra rugosa et pilosa sulco medio lato rufulo et
depresso longitudinaliter secta.

¢. Ceph.-th. long. 8 mm; lat. 7,2 mm. PedesI 27, 7 mm; IT

28 mm.; III 23,2mm; 1V 28, 7 mm.

Femine subsimilis sed cephalothorace paulo latiore, pedibus paulo
longioribus, tibiis anticis aculeis inferioribus et utrinque aculeis latera-
libus binis instructis, metatarsis anticis aculeo laterali subbasilari et
tibiis cunctis aculeo dorsali submedio instructis. Pedes-maxillares ob-
scure fusci breves et robusti, femore brevi supra in parte apicali 3—1
aculeato, patella paulo longiore quam latiore convexa aculeo interiore
unico tantum armata, tibia patella breviore extus apophysis duabus
longis subsequis et teretibus insigniter armata, tarso magno late ovato
ad marginem exteriorem prope basin ample dilatato, bulbo rufulo con-
vexo valde complicato.

Collines séparant la Birmanie de Siam.

T. severe L. Koch affinis differt imprimis oculis inter se distanti-

oribus, plaga genitali longius ovata, etc.

Fam. Epeiride.

Les trois espéces qui représentent a Tavoy le groupe des Gastera-
canthine existent également dans le Cambodge et la Cochinchine.

9.—ACTINACANTHA PROPINQUA, Cambr., P. Z. 8. L., 1879, p. 288;
pl. XXVIL., f. 16. (Gasteracantha).

OE = ee

1887. ] faisant partie des collections de ? Indian Musewm. 105
id. K. Sim., Act. Soc. Linn. Berd., 1886.

Tavoy,—commun.

On peut ajouter 4 la description du Rev. O. P. Cambridge: Ster-
num nigrum dense et grosse nigro-granosum antice linea transversa
Seepe in medio interrupta utrinque maculis binis subrotundis ad apicem
macula elongata flavo-opacis levibus decoratum. Pedum coxe I et IV
fulve ad basin fusco-notate, sed coxee II et III omnino nigre. Scutum
ad marginem posticum punctis ocelliformibus decem (haud octo), sed
punctis IT et III conjunctis punctis mediis minutissimis. Longitudo
spinarum valde variabilis.

10.—GASTERACANTHA FRONTATA, Blackw., A. M. N. H., ser. 3, vol.
XIV, 1864, p. 40.

id. Cambr. P. Z. 8S. L. 1879, p. 2383., pl. XXVI, f. 9.

ad. EK. Sim., Act. Soc. Linn. Bord. 1886.

Tavoy: Mita, Egaya (trés commun).

Collines entre la Birmanie et Siam, ete.

11.—GAsTERACANTHA ANNAMITA, E. Sim., Act. Soc. Linn. Bord. 1886.

Kgaya. Tavoy.

12.—EHPEIRA MASONI, sp. nov.

$. Ceph.-th. long. 9,1; lat. 8, 3 mm. Abd. long. 14, 5; lat. 12,
5mm. Pedes I long. 33,4; II long. 32,4; III 19,5; IV 29 mm.

Cephalothorax niger parce et inaequaliter granulosus crasse et sat
longe flavo-pilosus, parte cephalica lata subparallela sat convexa prope
medium impressione transversa vix expressa notata postice striis
obliquis angustis discreta. Oculi medii valde prominuli aream obli-
quam paulo longiorem quam latiorem et antice quam postice paulo
latiorem occupantes, medii antici posticis plus duplo majores, spatium
inter medios posticos diametro oculi paulo angustius. Oculi laterales
a mediis latissime remoti prominuli haud tuberculati antici pdéstico
majores, spatio dimidio diametro oculi angustiore sejuncti. Oculi quatuor
antici lineam leviter procurvam formantes sed in medio clypeo area
ocularum paulo angustiore. Sternum nigrum immaculatum haud ru-
gosum flayo-hirsutum. Chele nigre sublaeves. Abdomen crassum et
altum sed supra deplanatum obtusissime triquetrum, supra atrum lon-
gissime et crasse flavo-hirsutum immaculatum vel macula anteriore
Simplici aut duplici albo-opaca notatum. Venter niger pone plicam
vitta transversa prope medium maculis transversis binis obscure tes-
taceis ornatus. Pedes robusti et longi nigri vel obscure fusco-ravidi
femoribus anticis infra cyaneo-tinctis, tibiis metatarsisque annulis sat
angustis albo-cinereo pilosis ornatis, patellis tibiisque supra deplanatis
et distincte bisulcatis, aculeis parum longis numerosis fulvo-rufulig
ad radicem nigris. Vulva uncus sat longus subparallelus et obtu-

14

106 E. Simon—Avrachnides de V Asie méridionale [tac els

sus supra marginatus prope basin leviter convexus parce rugosus et
pilosus.

Tavoy.

Ep. de haant Dolesch. sat affinis differt imprimis area oculorum
mediorum longiore, oculis mediis magis inaequalibus, lateralibus haud
tuberculatis, abdominis angulis humeralibus obtusissimis, vulva haud
foveolata unco longo et parallelo munita.

Pedes 41 paris ut in H. de haani paulo breviores quam anteri-
ores.

13.—EHPEIRA SUBMUCRONATA, sp. nov.

@. Ceph.-th. long. 8,5; lat. 6,7 mm. Abd. long. 13, 2; lat. 11 mm.
PedesI long. 24; II 23,2;III 14,7;IV 24, 8mm.

Cephalothorax ut in precedenti sed densius granulosus et impres-
sione cephalica majore et profundiore, obscure fusco-rufescens, parte
cephalica breviter albido-pilosa thoracica utrinque longe et crebre
flavo-hirsuta postice in declivitate glabra. Oculi medii valde prominuli
aream subverticalem haud longiorem quam latiorem et antice quam
postice non multo latiorem occupantes, medii antici posticis evidenter
majores, spatium inter posticos diametrum oculi fere equans. Oculi
laterales a mediis longissime remoti sub tuberculo infulo conico et
divaricato impositi subaequales et spatio dimidio diametro oculi angus-
tiore sejuncti. Oculi quatuor antici lineam evidenter procurvam for-
mantes. Clypeus in medio area oculorum latior. Sternum obscure
fuscum immaculatum flavo-pilosam grosse parce et inordinate granulo-
sum. Chele fulvo-rufescentes apicem versus sensim obscuriores. <Ab-
domen crassum et altum sed supra deplanatum triquetrum angulis
humeralibus acute productis angulo apicali tuberculis tribus contiguis
uniseriatis medio reliquis majore instructo, supra fulvo-cervinum parce
setosum et brevissime fulvo-nitido pubescens, antice in declivitate
fusco-piceum lineis transversis exillimis albo-pilosis transversim sectum
linea prima inter tubercula humeralia ducta integra aliis (2 vel 3) in
medio late interruptis. Venter obscure fuscus utrinque fulvo-margina-
tus pone plicam vitta transversa prope medium macula magna sub-
quadrata obscure fulvis ornatus. Pedes robusti et sat longi obscure fulvo-
ravidi, femoribus anticis infra cyaneo-tinctis, fulvo-pubescentes meta-
tarsis anticis annulo medio exili tibiis metatarsisque posticis annulo
basilari late albido-pilosis ornatis, patellis tibiisque supra deplanatis et
distincte bisulcatis, aculeis numerosis parum longis testaceo-pellucenti-
bus. Vulva antice fovea subquadrata postice tuberculo mediocri semi-
circulari piloso apice breviter et acute uncato munita.

Var. (2 junior). Cephalothorax fulvo-rufescens impressionibus
cephalicis fuscis. Abdomen fulvo-cervinum linea media longitudinali

1887. faisant partie des collections de V Indian Museum. 107

et utrinque lineis transversis fuscis notatum. Pedes fulvi femoribus
infuscatis tibiis metatarsisque posticis fusco-annulatis.

Tavoy. Egaya.

Ep. de haani et E. caput-lupt Delesch. valde affinis, differt prae-
sertim oculis lateralibus longius tuberculatis, apice abdominali trituber-
culato, ete.

Vulva fere ut in Hp. de haant.

Pedes 4i paris ut in Hp. caput-lupi longiores quam pedes quatuor
anteriores.

14.—CH#ROSTRIS PARADOXA, Dolesch., Tweede Budr. Kenn. Arachn.
Ind. Ar., 1859, p. 37, pl. IX, f. bl. et ph. X, £. 8. (pera).

Mintas et Mita, Tavoy.

Espéce répandue en Malaisie et dans |’ Indo-Chine.

15.—Nepuiva macunata, Fabr., Wnt. Syst., II, 1793, p. 425 (Aranea).

N. fuscipes, C. Koch, Ar., VI, 1839, p. 186, f. 528.

(Pour la synonymie cf. Fhorell, Rag. Mal. etc. III, p. 145).

Tavoy ; Mita, Tavoy.

Répandu dans toute l’Asie méridionale, la Malaisie, les Philippines,
et l’ Australie septentrionale.

16.—NEPHILENGYS MALABARENSIS, Walck., Apt. II, 1841, p. 103
(EHpeira).

Epeira anama, Walck., ft. c., p. 103:

Hpeira rhodosternon, Dolesch., Tweede Bijdr. etc. 1859, p. 40.

Nephila rivulata, Cambr., P. Z. 8. L.,1871, p. 517, pl. XLIX, f. 1-2.

Nephilengys hofmanni, L. Koch, Ar. Austr., 1872, p. 145; pl. XI, £.8

Nephilengys malabarensis, Thorell, Simon, tite

Egaya, Tavoy.

Espece répandue dans presque toutes les régions chaudes du
globe: en Afrique, en Australie, et en Amérique ; indiqué de Siam par
Thorell et par nous-méme.

17.—Mora rasticiata, E. Sim., Ann. S08: ent. Fr. 1877, Dil tos

Meta fastwosa, Thorell, Rag. Mal. ete., I, 1877, p. 413.

Meta fastigiata, EH. Sim., Act. Soc. Iann. Bord., 1886.

Tavoy ; Mintas, Tavoy.

Répandue aux Philippines, aux Célébes, et A Siam.

Fam. Pholcide..

18.—Puo.cus uLoNGATUS, Vinson, Ar. Ldéwn. etc. 1864, p. 135, pl. III,

E. 5.
P. phalangioides, Dolesch., Tweede Bijdr. etc. 1859, p. 47.

108 E. Simon—Arachnides de V Asie méridionale [No. I,

P. tipuloides, L. Koch, Ar. Austr., 1872, p. 281, pl. KX XH, f. 5.

P. distinctus, Cambr., J. L. S. Z., X, 1876, p. 380, pl. XI, f.
28-30.
_ P. margarita, Workman, A. § M,N. H. 5th ser. t. II, 1878, p. 401,
pl. XVIII. f. 1-2. |

P. elongatus, V. Hasselt, Tijdr. v. Ent., XX, 1877, p. 53.

id. Thorell, Rag. Mal. etc. II, 1878, p. 162.
Egaya. Tavoy.

Répandu dans presque toutes les régions chaudes, probablement
importé.

Fam. Drasside.

Subfam. Clenint.

19.—LEPTOCTENUS TUMIDULUS, sp. nov.

¢ (pullus). long. 15 mm. Cephalothorax ovatus antice parum
attenuatus fronte lata postice valde convexus et stria profunda sec-
tus, obscure fulvo-ravidus fulvo-pubescens, parte cephalica utrinque
lineolis fuscis obliquis parte thoracica linea marginali et vittis dor_
salibus latis pallide fuscis dentatis et lineis radiantibus obscurioribus
sectis notatis. Oculi fere ut in LD. denticulato sed area mediorum
latius transversa et oculis lateralibus seriei 2c a mediis latius re-
motis. Clypeus oculis anticis haud latior retro obliquus. Abdomen
sat late ovatum fusco-testaceum fulvo et albido-pubescens parce et
inordinate fusco-punctatum in parte anteriore punctis majoribus bi-
seriatim ordinatis notatum. Mammille inferiores fusce, superiores
flave. Sternum fusco-rufescens albido-setosum. Chele subnigree
nitide subtilissime vix conspicue transversim rugate, margine in-
feriore sulci quadridentato dentibus 1 et 2 reliquis paulo majoribus.
Pedes sat breves et robusti fulvo-ravidi confuse olivaceo-annulati.
Tibiee antics infra 5—5 aculeate (aculeis 3i paris reliquis longiori-
bus) metatarsis aculeis similibus 3—3. Tuibie posticew aculeis late-
ralibus inferioribus atque aculeis dorsalibus 3 uniseriatis instructs.
Patellee posticee utrinque uniaculeate. Tibia cum patella IV cephalo-
thoraci fere equilonga. Tarsi cuncti metatarsique quatuor anteriores
breviter et sat dense scopulati.

Tavoy.

L. denticulato KE. Sim. affinis, differt imprimis cephalothorace pos-
tice convexiore, pedibus brevioribus, etc.

1887. ] faisant partie des collections de V Indian Musewm. 109

Fam. Avicularide.

Sect. 1. Trionichi.

Genus ATMETOCHILUS nov.

Cephalothorax ovatus plus ¢ longior quam latior pubescens parte
cephalica lata modice convexa, fovea procurva semicirculari profunda,
parte thoracica humili postice attenuata et truncata. Area oculorum
compactilis circiter triplo latior quam longior utrinque subparallela
(oculorum series postica paulo angustior quam antica). Oculi quatuor
antici maximi subaequales fere aeque et sat anguste separati (intervalla
dimidio diametro oculi vix latiora) in linea modice procurva. Oculi
postici subaequales anticis multo minores utrinque approximati. Oculus
lateralis posticus antico fere duplo minor et ab antico spatio diame-
tro oculi paulo angustiore sejunctus. Chele robuste supra vise sat
breves intus ad apicem leviter convexe, rastello ex dentibus numerosis-
simis inordinatis iniquis et parum robustis composito. Pars labialis
paulo longior quam latior leviter attenuata et obtusa immobili a sterno
stria snperficiali vix expressa discreta mutica. Coxe pedum-maxillari-
um ad basin denticulis paucis armate. Sternum ovatum antice atte-
nuatum impressionibus magnis confluentibus antice foveam magnam
transversim semicircularem formantibus. Pedes robusti sat longi, me-
tatarsi quatuor anteriores tibiis circiter aequilongi, metatarsi postici
tibiis multo longiores. Tarsi metatarsique quatuor anteriores et tarsi
pedum-maxillarium scopulis parum densis setis intermixtis vestiti, tarsi
postici infra dense setosi. Metatarsi antici aculeis paucis instructi.
Ungues tarsorum cunctorum dentibus paucis basilaribus ad marginem
exteriorem muniti et ungues tarsorum anticorum dente minutissimo
submedio ad marginem interiorem tantum armati. Mammille superiores
articulo basilari crasso et sat longo, medio breviore, apicali medio
longiore basilari fere equilongo angustiore recto et attenuato.

Gen. Cystauchenio Th. sat vicinum differt oculis anticis magnis
sequis et parum disjunctis, sterno late foveolato, parte labiali ad basin
vix discreta, metatarsis anticis pluriaculeatis, mammillarum articulo
ultimo longiore et acuminato, structura ungium tarsalium, ete.

20.—ATMETOCHILUS FOSSOR, sp. nov.

2. Ceph.-th. long. 20; lat. 14,2 mm. Abd. long. 22, 5; Jat. 16,
5mm. PedesI 44,6; II 40,5; II 34,7; 1V 48,8 mm.

Cephalothorax sublevis sed opacus late fusco-rufescens pilis longis
pronis sericeis setis nigris mixtis parum dense yestitus. . Oculi quatuor

110 KE. Simon—Arachnides de V Asie méridionale [ Now ds

antici maximi subequales, medii rotundi, laterales ovati et obliqui, medii
a lateralibus quam inter se vix remotiores spatio dimidio diametro oculi
evidenter angustiore sejuncti, medii postici subrotundi levissime angu-
losi, laterales late ovati mediis vix majores et lateralibus anticis multo
minores. Chele nigree subleves valde et inequaliter crinite. Abdo-
men convexum late ovatum atro-sericeum tenuiter et parce setosum in
lateribus inordinate testaceo-striolatum infra obscure fulvum. Mammille
fulve. Sternum lete fusco-rufescens postice dilutius leve. Pedes-
maxillares pedesque subnigri coxis femoribusque infra dilutioribus et
rufulis, patellis tibiisque supra vittis duabus latis glabris et rufulis
ornatis. Tibie antice infra aculeis apicalibus binis et aculeis exteri-
oribus uniseriatis 3, metatarsi aculeis apicalibus binis et exterioribus
binis armati. Tibize posticee parce metatarsi numerose aculeati.
Tavoy.

Sect. II. Dionichi.

91.— ? Puricrus rnavopitosus, H. Sim., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., XX,

1884, p. 358.
Tavoy.
Je rapporte avec doute a cette espéce quelques jeunes individus en

mauvais état. .
P. flavopilosus a été découvert en Birmanie.

Genus CyYRIOPAGOPUS nov.

Gen. Selenocosmie affine. Cephalothorax oblongus multo humilior
subplanus fovea sublineari leviter procurva (haud semilunari), Tuber
oculorum parum convexum magnum saltem duplo latius quam longius @
margine antico spatio diametro oculi lateralis antici latiore sejunctum.
Oculi antici in linea parum procurva (margo anticus mediorum ante
centrum lateralium situs) subequales fere equidistantes spatiis diametro
oculi evidenter angustioribus sejuncti. Medii postici multo minores
quam medii antici et laterales postici late ovati recti. Laterales postici
anticis minores atque ab anticis spatio diametro minore oculi haud
latiore sejuncti. Pedes parum longi robustissimi extremitates versus
parum attenuati omnino mutici. Patella cum tibia IV evidenter longior
quam patella cum tibia I. Scopule densissime, in metatarsis sex anteri-
oribus basin articuli attingentes, in metatarso 4i paris partem apicalem
tantum occupantes. Scopule tarsorum cunctorum et metatarsorum
sex anticorum integra sed scopule metatarsi postici linea setosa anguste
sectee. Cetera ut in Selenocosmia.

a ————_ I _E _ E e —
. — —

1887. ] faisant partie des collections de V Indian Musewn. Li

Gen. Phrycto sat affine imprimis differt scopulis tarsorum integris
et linea oculorum anticorum magis procurva.

22.—CYRIOPAGOPUS PAGANUS, sp. nov,

@. Ceph.-th. long. 14 mm; lat. 11, 5 mm. Abd. long. 21 mm.
Pedes-max. long. 21mm. PedesI 39mm; II 36mm; III 32,2mm;
IV 43,6 mm.

Cephalothorax humilis subplanus obscure fusco-rufescens sat longe
et adpresse fulvo-cervino-pubescens. Area oculorum magna trans-
versa. Oculi quatuor antici subequales, medii rotundi, laterales longe
ovati equidistantes et spatiis diametro oculi paulo angustioribus separa-
ti. Medii postici late ovati subrecti, laterales postici longe ovati mediis
duplo majores sed lateralibus anticis minores. Abdomen oblongum
nigricans ferrugineo- pubescens et longe setosum. Pars labialis subplana
haud striata nec depressa in parte apicali minute et crebre spinulosa.
Chele sternum pedes-maxillares pedesque nigella ferrugineo-hirsuta,
tibiis metatarsisque supra ad apicem pilis albidis paucis angustissime
cinctis. Pedes breves et robustissimi. Tibia cum patella I breviores
quam iidem articuli IV (circiter ex 3 patelle). Metatarsus IV tibia
haud vel yix longior.

Tavoy. Heaya.

Ordo PEDIPALPI.

23.—THELYPHONUS FoRMOSUS, Butler, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. 1872,
p. 208, pl. XIII, f. 4.

La forme remarquable de la patte-machoire indiquée dans cette
espece par Butler (J. c. f. 4) est un caractére sexuel propre au male.
Chez la femelle la patte-machoire est de forme normale et se rapproche
beaucoup de celle de 7’. assamensis , Stol.; le trochanter offre également
cing dents au bord supérieur.

Les deux especes different par les caractéres suivants :—

In T. formoso trochanteris dentibus acutioribus tribus interioribus
subsimilibus (in assamensi dente basali obsoleto) pedum-maxillarium
articulis cunctis supra omnino levibus (in assamensi trochantere et
femore parce granosis) oculis mediis minoribus spatio subplano diametro
oculi saltem haud angustiore sejunctis (in assamensi spatio angustiore et
convexo), tarsi pedum li paris articulis cunctis muticis I et II subsequis
IJI—VII brevioribus et inter se subequis ultimo tereti recto preceden-
tibus duobus simul sumptis haud longiore (in assamensi articulis TV NG
VI, et VII intus ad apicem breviter dentatis et articulo V. reliquis
longiore).

Tavoy.

Déja indiqué de Tennasserim par Butler.

112 EK. Simon—Arachnides de lV Asie [No. ],

Ordo SCORPIONES.

24,.—Isomurrus varius, C. Koch, 1845.

Tityus varius, C. Koch, Ar. XI, p. 29, f. 864.

Isometrus varius, H. Sim., Ann. Mus. civ. Gen., XX, 1884, p. 363.

Tavoy.

Nous I’ avons déja indiqué de Birmanie. I] est en outre trés répandu
en Indo-Chine, 4 Siam et a Saigon, et en Malaisie, 4 Sumatra et 4 Java.

25.—PALAMNZEUS BENGALENSIS, C. Koch, 1842.

Buthus bengalensis, C. Koch, Ar. IX, p. 3, f. 696. .

Palamneus bengalensis, EH. Sim., Ann. Mus. Civ. Gen., XX, 1884,
p. 360.

Tavoy.

Trés répandu en Birmanie.

26.—ScORPIOPS ANTHRACINUS, sp. nov.

Long. trunci 25,5 mm. Candee 22, 5 mm.

Nigro-opacus corpore subtus coxis tarsisque dilutioribus et rufes-
centibus. Cephalothorax segmentis caude I, II, et III anterioribus
simul sumptis non multo brevior, supra fere planus subparallelus antice
parum attenuatus, ad marginem anticum profundissime et obtuse ex-
cisus et utrinque in lobum attenuatum et obtuse truncatum productus,
supra granulis grossis inequalibus inordinate conspersus, ante tuber
oculorum sulco lato profundo carinis granulosis limitato impressus pos-
tice sulco longitudinali angustiore et sulco transverso recto sed utrinque
antice flexuoso munitus. Tuber oculorum longe ante medium situm
ovatum leve subtiliter sulcatum spatio inter oculos diametro oculi haud
latiore seu paulo angustiore. Oculi laterales sub carina granulosa siti
in linea recurva I et II equales tertio minor. Segmenta abdominalia
supra grosse dense et inordinate granulosa, segmenta III—VI antice
leviter impressa et carina media longitudinali debili notata, segmentum
VII parcius granulosum et carinis granulosis binis subrectis munitum.
Seomenta ventralia levia nitida sed ultimum subtiliter coriaceum et in
parte apicali carinis quatuor debilibus sublevibus instructum. Cauda
sat debilis minute et parce granulosa, segmenta I—IV carinis octo in-
ferioribus sublevibus superioribus dentatis, carine dorsales in segmento
II, et imprimis in segmentis III et IV alte cristatis et dente apicali
fortiore instructe. Segmentum Vm segmenta III et IV simul sumptis
longitudine sequans, carinis septem minute et regulariter dentatis muni-
tum. Vesica longe ovata segmento caude Vo vix brevior subtiliter
coriacea et infra prope basin minute et parce granulosa, aculeo yesica
multo breviore. Pedes-maxillares longi et parum robusti femore et

1887.) faisant partie des collections de V Indian Museum. 113

tibia deplanatis et supra et infra carinis dense granulosis munitis supra
parce granulosis infra sublevibus, tibia intus dentibus validis sequis
binis subbasilaribus instructa infra prope marginem exteriorem punctis
impressis piliferis XIX uniseriatis munita, manu tibia non multo latiore
sed multo longiore parallela subtiliter granulosa subangulosa et costis
granulosis latis munita digiti mobili manu postica paulo longiore.
Dent. pect. 10—11.

Tavoy.

A S. Hardwicki Gerv. et solido Karsch differt manu angusta et cari-
nis dorsalibus segmentorum caude# dente apicali reliquis dentibus
multo validiore; 8. montano Karsch valde affinis sed differt imprimis
cephalothorace grosse granuloso, digito mobili pedum-maxillarium manu
longiore, dentibus pectinum 10—11, etc.

27.—LIOCHELES AUSTRALASIAZ, Fabr., Syst. Hnt., 1775, p. 399.

Ischnurus australasie, H. Koch, Ar. IV, p. 71, f. 294.

Ischnurus pistaceus, EH. Sim,, Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr. 1876,

Hormurus australasie, Thorell, H’tud. Scorpiol., 1877, p. 177.

Tavoy.

Trés répandu dans la Polynesie, la Malaisie, les Philippines, la
Cochinchine, etc.

A L. complanato C. Koch differt cephalothorace impresse punctato
in medio subtiliter rugoso haud granuloso, segmentis caude I et
presertim II et V infra valde dentatis, etc. A L. neocaledonico,
H. Sim. differt cephalothorace haud granuloso, caude segmento V infra
dentato, manu impresse punctata et granulis humilibus ornata, etc.

Le genre Liocheles Sundevall (Conspectus Arachnidum, 1833, p. 31)
correspond au genre Hormurus Thorell, comme |’ a démontré le Dr.

Karsch (Zettschrift. f. ges. Naturwissenschft. 1880, t. LILI, p. 480).

Ordo OPILIONES.

Sub-ordo OP. MECOSTETH I.

28.—MARACANDUS RETICULATUS, sp. nov.

sé. Long. 5, 8 mm; Lat. 4, 3 mm.

Scutum dorsale paulo longius quam latius antice obtuse truncatum
postice sensim ampliatum et recte sectum supra fere planum vix con-
vexum haud striatum nec impressum subtiliter coriaceum haud granu-
losum fulvo-olivaceum confuse fusco-retriculatum et transversim linea-
tum ad marginem anticum tuberculo medio minuto et utrinque (supra
radicem pedum-maxillarium) tuberculis albis binis longis et teretibus

15

114 E. Simon—Arachnides de lV’ Asie méridionale [No. 1,

munitum, in regione abdominali tuberculis nigris sex in series duas
parallelas ordinatis (anticis quatuor minutissimis granuliformibus ulti-
mis longis erectis et acutis) instructum. Tuber oculorum maximum
ovato-transversum haud sulcatum supra tuberculis parvis et obtusis
biseriatis (2-2 vel 3-3) notatum. Abdominis segmenta posteriora libera
et ventralia brunnea mutica sed serie granulorum minutissimorum
munita. Coxe fulve confuse fusco-atomarie, posticae ad marginem
posteriorem pone spiraculum tuberculis crenulatis paucis munite reli-
que coxe utrinque obtuse serrate et antics serie media grossius gra-
nulosa ornate. Chelee modice fulve leves nitide articulo basali con-
vexo subgloboso. Pedes-maxillares fulvi plus minus fusco-variati cor-
pore breviores, femore compresso infra tuberculis parvis obtusis et
ineequalibus uniseriatis munito atque intus ad apicem tuberculo paulo
longiore et acuto instructo, patella saltem triplo longiore quam latiore
basin versus longe attenuata supra leviter convexa infra plana, ad mar-
ginem interiorem fere mutica ad exteriorem tuberculis parvis et obtusis
4-5 munita, tibia patella saltem ¢ breviore subparallela infra plana ad
marginem interiorem aculeo subapicali acuto diametro articulo breviore
ad exteriorem aculeis similibus binis instructa, tarso tibia breviore sat
late ovato valde attenuato utrinque aculeis binis sat parvis munito,
ungue gracili tarso haud breviore. Pedes fulvo-olivacei plus minus
fusco-retriculati et sublineati sat longi et valde inequales antici reliquis
multo breviores cuncti cylindracei et mutici, tarsus I 9-articulati, tarsi
II 19, tarsi III 11, tarsi IV 13-articulati. Ungues mutici.

2. Long. 8 mm, lat. 5, 2 mm.

A mare differt corpore crassiore et convexiore brunneo-rufescenti
leviter et parce fulvo-variato, tuberculo frontali erecto multo longiore
et tuberculis obtusis binis apicalibus oculorum tuberis validioribus, re-
gione abdominali tuberculis quatuor ad basin crassis granulosis et
nigris ad apicem acutis et albidis anticis posticis minoribus, pedibus-
maxillaribus brevioribus tuberculo femorali interiori minutissimo aculeis
tibize et tarsi brevioribus, pedibus multo brevioribus fusco-rufescenti-
bus apicem versus sensim dilutioribus, tarso I 8, tarso IT 13—14,
tarso III 9, tarso IV 10-articulatis.

Tavoy.

Nous ne rapportons qu’ avec doute cette espéce au genre Mara-
candus; elle différeen effet des espéces types* par le scutum dorsal
sans stries transverses, le tubercule oculaire non déprimé, enfin par les
stigmates bien visibles—caractére exceptionnel dans la famille des
Phalangodide.

* M. macei E. Sim. du Bengale et M. mouwhoti H. Sim. du Cambodge, ef.
Ann, Soc. ent. Belg., 1880,

es

1887. ] faisant partie des collections de V Indian Museum. 115

Sub-ordo OP. PLAGIOSTETHI.
Genus GAGRELLA, Stoliczka.

Ce genre est représenté dans la région de Tavoy par les espéces
suivantes.

Conspectus specierum.

1.—Tuber oculorum omnino leve et muticum longi-
tudinaliter sulcatum, corpus Benes scuto abdomi-

nali vittis flavis quatuor ornato,. sip sthersspardargrecn GUAArWiLlAlG.
Tuber oculorum tuberculis At yee eeenecce
ordinatis instructum,.......... he 2
2.—Corpus fulvum, scuto Siiominat, oe. Face con-
fusa notato, infra omnino subleve,........c.secceceeeee CCTUINA.

Corpus nigrum postice flavo- ftaeeels sare: infra
subtiliter coriaceum et in processu sternali parce

QTATLOSTM, 0... ceerseccvavvarecvccsescecesstesnesssasvarvavenve binotata.
29.—GAGRELLA CERVINA, sp. nov.
Long. 6—8 mm.

Corpus brevissime ovatum valde convexum crebre et sat tenuiter
coriaceo-rugosum fulvo-cervinum, parte thoracica dilutiore et flavida
sed utrinque impressione obliqua infuscata notata, scuto abdominali in
parte prima vitta media lata fusca confusa notato, tubere oculorum
saltem supra et spina abdominali nigris. Pars thoracica ad marginem
mutica. Tuber oculorum altum supra visum subrotundum et tubercu-
lis parvis equis in series duas antice divaricatas parum regulariter
ordinatis instructum, intervallo oculorum diametrum oculi circiter
equanti. Spina abdominalis longa verticalis acuta usque ad basin sat
gracilis parce rugosa. Corpus infra subleve pallide flavo-testaceum,
coxis minute et parcissime granulosis sed utrinque crebre nigro-serratis.
Chele et pedes-maxillares omnino pallide flavi. Chele leves mutice.
Pedes-maxillares femore infra patella supra minutissime et inordinate
spinulosis, tibia patella haud longiore parallela. Pedes longissimi
cylindracei fusco-rufescentes trochanteribus nigricantibus femoribus
patellisque sat remote tibiis remotissime et minutissime spinulosis.

Mita, Tavoy.

30.—GAGRELLA BINOTATA, sp. nov.

Long. 8 mm.

Corpus breviter ovatum convexum omnino crebre et valde coriaceo-

116 E. Simon—Arachnides de V Aste méridionale, Sc. [No. 1;

rugosum, nigerrimum, parte thoracica ante tuber lineis binis exilibus et
utrinque supra foramen margine tenui obscure rufulis parum distinctis
notata, scuto abdominali antice utrinque spatio magno obscure rufulo et
postice maculis binis transversis levibus lete flavis ornato. Pars
thoracica ad marginem mutica. Tuber oculorum sat altum supra
visum subrotundum tuberculis parvis squis biseriatim ordinatis muni-
tum, intervallo oculorum diametro oculi non multo latiore. Spina
abdominalis verticalis mediocris acuta usque ad basin sat gracilis parce
granosa. Segmenta abdominalia infra subtilissime coriacea et in medio
granulis minutissimis paucis munita fusca ad marginem posticum et
utrinque dilutiora et rufescentia, processu sternali fusco sat remote
granuloso. Coxe nigricantes densius granulose utrinque serrate.
Chele leves mutice nigre, digitis dilutioribus. Pedes-maxillares nigri,
femore infra patella tibiaque intus minutissime et sat crebre spinulosis,
tibia patella vix longiore angustiore et parallela. Pedes longissimi
cylindracei nigri tarsis leviter dilutioribus femoribus minute et sat
’ remote spinulosis.

Tavoy.

31.—GAGRELLA QUADRAVITTATA, sp. nov.

Long. 8, 5 mm.

Corpus breviter ovatum convexum in medio prope spinam abdomi-
nalem grosse et crebre granosum antice posticeque sensim levius,
nigerrimum, parte thoracica ante tuber vitta media flava prope margi-
nem linea nigra exili secta postice secundum tuber crasse bifurcata,
pone tuber utrinque maculis binis transversis, scuto abdominali vittis
flavis quatuor integris dorsalibus duabus antice ampliatis et utrinque
marginali angustiore apicem haud attingente. Pars thoracica ad mar-
ginem mutica. Tuber oculorum sat humile supra visum paulo latius
quam longius omnino leve et muticum sed sulco longitudinali divisum,
intervallo oculorum diametro oculi multo latiore. Spina abdominalis
mediocris ad basin crassa et valde granulosa ad apicem subacuta.
Corpus infra subleve obscure testaceum segmentis transversim fusco-
vittatis et processu sternali infuscato. Coxe fusce presertim antics
sat dense granulose utrinque crebre serrate. Chele leaves mutics
nigre digitis dilutioribus. Pedes-maxillares obscure fusci femore infra
patella tibiaque intus minutissime et inordinate spinulosis, tibia patella
vix longiore angustiore et parallela, tarso longissimo compresso apicem
versus leviter et sensim incrassato. Pedes longissimi cylindracet
fusco-rufescentes trochanteribus femoribusque basin versus nigricanti-
bus femoribus minutissime (vix perspicue) et remotissime spinulosis.

Tavoy.

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Hquation of a Trajectory. 117

G. signate Stol. sat affinis differt corpore in parte granuloso (in
G. signata omnino granulosa) et scuto abdominali flavo quadrivittato
(in G. signata tantum flavo-marginato).

IX.—On the Differential Equation of a Trajectory. By AsutosnH MvuKno-
papHyAY, M. A., F. R. A. S., F. R. S. BE. Communicated by THE
Hon’sie MAHENDRALAL Sarkar, M. D., C.I. E.

[Received April 28th ;—Read May 4th, 1887.]

§ 1. The problem of determining the oblique trajectory of a
system of confocal ellipses, appears to have been first solved by the
Italian Mathematician Mainardi, in a memoir in the Annali di Scienze
Mathematische e Fisiche, t. 1, page 251, which has been reproduced by
Boole (Differential Hquations, 4th edition, pp. 248-251). Representing —
half the distance between the foci by h, and the tangent of the angle
of intersection by n, we obtain for the equation of the trajectory,

h? rit J? 5
oy a
— 2n tan (=7-1)+ les =O @e00 eee concen (1)
«M
4 14/1 -=
w
where C is the constant of integration, and M is given by the quadratic
(aw? +y2+h?)M=a (M2+h?2)..c.csccecees (2)

Now, this form of the equation is so complicated that it would be
a hopeless task to have to trace the curve from it; indeed, it is so
unsymmetrical and inelegant that Professor Forsyth in his splendid
work on Differential Equations (page 131) does not at all give the
answer. In the present note, the curve is represented by a pair of
remarkably simple equations which admit of an interesting geometrical
interpretation.
§ 2. Assume then
xM =h*cos*d
C= 2nr

where A is a new constant. Substituting in (1), we have

1—- 4 ts =

a

log =§ —————- = 2nd 2nd.

-M
yy see

118 A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation of a Trajectory. [No. 1,

1 ae erie:
v an(a +)

Th
xv

1 a 14e2mla +)

+
See
—

‘oa “i 1 an(A+)
—_— —_ — e
§ xv

M er an(At+)\ 2
2 Tie Tt

a 1 ps 2
pao <a) he? MA +9)
an(A + $) = { ae) 2

ar
2
But, M=— cos*h

*. Substituting in the above and extracting the square root, we get
gn +¢)
2 cos i) = 14e (r+)

1 an(At ¢)
*.%=h cos 6 —— ar

=h cos pE{mrthy. wren? }
— h cos ¢. cosh n(A+4). |

Again, substituting the value of M in (2), we have
(a? +y?+h?) — he = ccs = x (a a +n)
"ae +y?+h? =h? cos*p+a2? sec*p
oy? +h? sin’? = a? tan?p
o2 2

$ h® cos?? h? sin®??
and, since we have shewn that

x=h cos >. cosh n(A+ ),

we see at once that
y=hsin®? . sinh n(A+?).

Therefore, the co-ordinates of any point on the trajectory may be

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation of a Trajectory. 119

expressed in a very neat and symmetrical form, in terms of a parameter
> viz., we have

«= h cos ¢. cosh n(A+$). ite
y=hsin >, sinh n(A+?).

§ 3. The equations (A) admit of a very simple geometrical inter-
pretation.

Let A’A be the line joining the
foci of the system of confocal ellipses,
so thatOA=h. On A’A as diameter,
describe a circle having its centre at O.
Draw any radius OB, making the angle
AOB=?; draw BC perpendicular to
OA; then, we have OC=/h cos $, BC
=h sin?. Construct a hyperbola
CM, having its centre at O, and its
transverse and congugate axes equal
to OC, BC respectively; then, of

course, BC is a tangent and OB an asymptote to this hyperbola. Take
a point M on the hyperbola, so that the area of the hyperbolic sector
OCM may be n(A+ ) times the area of the triangle OCB: then, I assert
that M is a point on the trajectory, viz., the co-ordinates of M are

2=h cos $. cosh n(A+?).
y=h sin >. sinh n(A+?).

To see how this is, drop MN perpendicular on OA. Then, writing
for the moment OC=h cos $=a, BC=h sin $=, the hyperbola is

and, any point (z,, y,) as M on this hyperbola is obviously satisfied by
2, =a cosh y, y, =f sinh ¥. Now, the area of the portion CMN is given

vy B vy A
by oun = [ yde = B [ a/ a? —a2da
a ava
=F Sa/e —a? —a? log (w+a/ x? —a?) yose
a 2=o

a { a* cosh y sinh p—a? log very tae
2a a.
[<° @ = ereoshak}
B |
= 5- a” cosh y sinh yy — a’?

120 A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation of a Trajectory. ['No. 1,1887,

= a8 cosh w sinh y — i ay
=1 ON. NM—1 a8 = ONM — 1afy
“. OCM = taBy = OCB. yw.
But, ex hypothesit, OCM = OCB. n(A+¢)
.w=n(A+ 9),
which shews that the co-ordinates of M are given by
=acosh y=/h cos $. cosh n(A+?)
= B sinh W=/h sin #. sinh n(A+?),
and, anes M is a point on the trajectory. We thus see that not
only are the co-ordinates of M expressible in a very simple form, but
also that the position of M can be determined geometrically, correspond-
ing to any position of B on the circle; hence, the curve can be com-
pletely traced. It is easy to remark that whatever may be the value
of the arbitrary constant A, the point M lies on the hyperbola CM,
for a given value of ?. Finally, a geometrical relation is worth notic-
ing, viz., since the circular sector AOB = th?¢, we have from
OCM = n(A+?) OBC,

the equation

OCM = nA OBC+2n ——
OAB OBC

or, OCM = nA OBC +2n —. a

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

—@—

Part II—NATURAL SCIENCE.

No. II.—1887.

X.—On the Effects produced by Small Quantities of Bismuth on the Ductility
of Silver.—By Surcron-Masor J. Scutty, Assay Master, Calcutta.

[Received June 13th ;—Read July 6th, 1887. ]

Tt is well known that alloys of silver and bismuth, in certain propor-
tions, are brittle. In Dr. Percy’s valuable work on Metallurgy (Silver
and Gold—Part I), it is stated that alloys of silver with bismuth, in the
proportion of 50 per cent. and 33 per cent. of the latter metal, are brittle ;
while an ore of silver and bismuth, called Chilenite, in which bismuth
occurs only to the extent of 14°4 to 15°3 per cent., is said to be malleable.
The least amount of bismuth, however, which will injuriously affect the
ductility of silver, for example, in such an operation as the lamination of
silver bars for coinage, does not, so far as I am aware, appear to have
been experimentally investigated. It may here be mentioned at the
outset that an alloy of silver and bismuth may, by careful hammering, be
extended considerably, so as to pass muster as malleable; although, if
subjected to lamination by means of steel rolls, the same alloy will
crack at the edges and thus show a deficient ductility, as compared
with pure silver or some silver-copper alloys. It is to the deficiency in
ductility, as tested by rolling, of silver containing only very small
proportions of bismuth that I here wish to call attention.

My attention was first prominently directed, about two years ago, to
the injurious effects caused by small quantities of bismuth in silver by

16

122 J. Scully—On the Effects produced by small quantities of [No. 2,

the circumstance that some silver bullion, in the shape of English re-
fined bars of as high a fineness as 990 per mille, proved so brittle as to
be unfit for mintage. Attention was first attracted to this matter by
the peculiar behaviour under assay of the granulated samples taken
from this silver after melting. The appearances noticed under assay
will be referred to presently, but they led to the bullion being at once
tested for brittleness. A bar, about 21 inches long, 2°25 broad, and 1
inch thick, was hammered out at one end without cracking, but on
being passed through the rolls it cracked badly at the edges and was
pronounced to be “ brittle,’’ in the Mint sense of the term. The bullion
was then remelted in five plumbago pots, and a partial refinement of it
attempted in the ordinary way with nitre, about eight to ten pounds of
this salt being used for each pot. The resulting silver bars were not
appreciably improved by this treatment; hammering again proved an
inconclusive test, but a bar of the size I have mentioned broke in two
by merely dropping on the floor of the melting room.

In the meantime the assay had shown that the brittle bullion con-
tained bismuth, and that this was the only substance present likely to be
the cause of brittleness. The Indian process of assaying silver has been
described by Dr. Busteed in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of
Bengal (1870, Part II. p. 377); and a brief abstract of this paper is given
on p. 292 of Dr. Percy’s work before mentioned. The main features of
the process may here be briefly recapitulated for the purpose I have in
view. A fixed weight of the silver bullion to be assayed is dissolved in an
assay bottle, by means of nitric acid aided by heat ; the solution is diluted
with water and an eacess of hydrochloric acid is added, to precipitate all
the silver present as chloride. The silver chloride having been caused
to aggregate and settle by vigorous shaking, the bottle is filled up with
water and the supernatant fluid is subsequently syphoned off, to remove
all the now dissolved matter which may have been contained in the
bullion. Under these conditions of solution, precipitation and dilution
with water, chemists will readily understand that even a small trace
of bismuth, if it be in the silver, will reveal its presence by the
partial formation of insoluble oxychloride of bismuth. Now, in the
assay of the brittle bullion under consideration, solution in nitric
acid had been readily and completely effected by the aid of heat:
antimony and tin were consequently absent. Afterthe addition of water
and hydrochloric acid, however, the solution in the assay bottles could
not be cleared by shaking; the bulk of the silver chloride collected at
the bottom of the bottles, but the supernatant fluid remained turbid.
Tin and antimony being excluded, only two metals could produce this
result in the wet assay of silver, namely, mercury and bismuth. To

.

1887. ] Bismuth on the ductility of Silver. 123

determine which of these is the interfering metal it is only necessary to
note the effect of solar light on the silver chloride formed ; when mer-
cury is present the silver chloride maintains its pure white colour un-
altered, while in the presence of bismuth the chloride immediately ac-
quires the well known purple colour under the influence of daylight.
Our assays, then, being turbid after precipitation and yet the silver
chloride blackening readily under the influence of daylight, it was evi-
dent that bismuth was present. The turbidity produced was due to the
partial formation of bismuth oxychloride ; and this compound diffusing
itself in its characteristic manner through the solution had broken up
part of the silver salt into very fine powder, so that some hours had to
elapse before the supernatant fluid cleared by the gradual subsidence of
both bismuth oxychloride and the finely divided silver chloride. The
assay was of course thus rendered unreliable, since the silver chloride to
be weighed, and on which the calculation of the fineness rested, was
contaminated with bismuth oxychloride. A cupellation assay of this
bullion was at once had recourse to for ascertaining its fineness.

So far, then, this tender of silver bullion seemed to establish the
following points :— |

1. Silver bullion of as high fineness as 990 per mille is rendered
unfit for coinage purposes by an amount of bismuth which, in this par-
ticular case, could not possibly have exceeded 1 per cent., and was proba-
bly less than that proportion.

2. Hammering a bar of silver bullion is not a good test for de-
tecting brittleness, as far as mint purposes are concerned. .

3. The toughening of silver bullion 990 fine, and containing only
a small amount of bismuth, by the aid of nitre in plumbago melting
pots, is not readily effected.

4. The presence of a trace of bismuth in silver of high fineness is
immediately detected in the ordinary course of assay by the Indian
method, but this bismuth interferes with the perfect accuracy of the
results obtained by that process.

A comprehensive research seemed therefore called for to elucidate
the whole subject, and the necessity for this investigation has since
been emphasized by the fact that silver bullion contaminated with bis-
muth has frequently found its way to the Mint since its first discovery
here. The points to be investigated seemed naturally to group
themselves under the following heads :—

I. Is our ordinary wet assay of silver susceptible of such easy
modification as will enable us to obtain perfectly accurate results by it,
in presence of bismuth, without having recourse to the confessedly less
accurate assay by cupellation? And, how may small quantities of bis-

124 J. Scully—On the Hifects produced by small quantities of [No. 2,

muth in silver be readily estimated with the despatch indispensable for
mint operations P

II. What is the smallest amount of bismuth in silver that will
render it unfit for coinage, when present in bars of the Indian standard
fineness of 916°6 P And, what is the amount of bismuth that may be
tolerated in such bars without materially injuring their ductility P

III. How is silver bullion containing bismuth which may be
tendered to the Mint, to be dealt with, supposing that establishment
accepts any metal that is brittle; and how is the presence of bismuth
in refined bars to be accounted for ?

I. As the purity of the bismuth to be used in the experiments
now to be detailed was a matter of first importance, I may briefly men-
tion the steps taken to ensure the purity of the metal. Refined bis-
muth was dissolved in nitric acid, precipitated as basic nitrate by dilut-
ing largely with distilled water, the nitrate digested in solution of
caustic potash, and then well washed, dried, and reduced by heating
with charcoal in a clay crucible. A series of synthetical assays, made
by dissolving together pure silver and pure bismuth, the latter in the
proportion of from 1 to 5 millitmes, showed that our ordinary process of
assay, under such conditions, gave unreliable results, there being a sur-
charge, or higher report than should have been obtained, which varied from
0°7 to 2°7 mill. when the proportion of bismuth was from 3 to 5 milliémes.
A. modification in our process of assay was. evidently required if it were
to be used for determining the fineness of silver bullion containing bis-
muth ; and the necessary steps to this end were, after repeated experi-
ment, found to consist in adding the smallest possible amount of hydro-
chloric acid for the precipitation of the silver, and increasing the amount
of nitric acid in which it was first dissolved. _We use ordinarily for the
precipitation of an assay pound of silver 54 cc. of hydrochloric acid of
sp. gr. 1075, but 2°5 cc. of acid of this strength suffices for the complete
precipitation of an assay pound of even fine silver; so that we have here
at once a means of diminishing the tendency of any bismuth in the silver
to form insoluble oxychloride. If in addition to diminishing the amount
ef hydrochloric acid we added a considerable excess of nitric acid to the
solution (which acid would not in any way interfere with the silver
chloride formed), all risk of the partial formation of insoluble bismuth
salts seemed removed. This in fact has proved to be the case, and the
successful modified process for the assay of silver containing bismuth is
as follows :—

The assay pound of silver bullion containing bismuth is dissolved in
5:5 ec. of nitric acid, sp. gr. 1200, with the aid of heat, about 5 ounces of
water are added and then 10 cc. of nitric acid sp. gr. 1320. The silver

1887. | Bismuth on the ductility of Silver. 125

is now precipitated by the addition of 2°5 cc. of hydrochloric acid, and
after vigorous shaking the supernatant fluid will be found perfectly
clear; and it will remain so when the bottle is filled up with water, all
the bismuth present being in solution. Whenever samples of silver
now show the presence of bismuth during the assay, a fresh set is taken
up and worked by the modified process, the delay thus caused not
amounting to more than a few minutes. It may be mentioned here that
all our assays are reported to one-tenth of a milliéme (0'1 per mille).

Having thus ascertained the presence of bismuth in silver bullion
and put in practice a modification of the assay process which renders us
indifferent to its presence, it is still of importance to ascertain the
exact proportion of bismuth which is present in the bullion ; and, to be
of practical use for mint work, this determination must be effected
rapidly and as simply as possible. The ordinary directions given for
the separation of bismuth in the presence of silver, by first removing the
latter as chloride and then precipitating the bismuth as carbonate, do
not, I find, give accurate results when silver is present in such over-
whelming proportions as obtain in the cases under consideration.

I have therefore adopted the following plan, which a number of syn-
thetically prepared solutions have proved to give quick and good results,
though sometimes the amount of bismuth present is very slightly un-
der-estimated. The ordinary silver assay having given a rough visual
estimate of the amount of bismuth likely to be present, enough of the
bullion is taken to yield a fairly weighable amount of bismuth oxide in
the final result. The bullion is dissolved in agsmall amount of nitric
acid, the solution carefully diluted, and an excess of ammonium carbo-
nate at once added, the precipitation being aided by heating. The
carbonates of silver and copper at first formed are re-dissolved, and the
carbonate of bismuth after a time settles completely at the bottom of
the beaker. The contents of the beaker are then passed through a
filter, of which the weight of ash yielded by incineration is known, and
the carbonate of bismuth on the filter washed quite free of all traces of
silver. The filter is then dried, its contents transferred to a porcelain
crucible for ignition, the filter paper being ignited separately, treated
with a drop or two of nitric acid to re-oxidise any bismuth oxide reduced
by contact with the carbon of the filter, and the ash added to the cruci-
ble. From the weight of bismuth oxide thus found, after deducting
the weight of the filter ash, the amount of metallic bismuth present in
the sample of bullion taken for analysis can be at once found.

There are only two metals likely to interfere with accuracy of the
process here described, namely, cadmium and lead ; the carbonates of both
these metals being as insoluble in excess of the precipitant employed as

126 J. Scully—On the Effects produced by small quantities of [No. 2,

bismuth carbonate. Cadmium is very unlikely to be found in silver
bullion and its consideration may be neglected, but if the presence of
lead is suspected the carbonate filtered from the silver solution is dissolv-
ed in nitric acid, evaporated down with the addition of sulphuric acid,
and the lead sulphate formed (if any) collected and weighed in the usual
way. The bismuth is again precipitated as carbonate and treated as be-
fore directed. Many experiments have been made with synthetically
prepared mixtures of silver, copper, lead, and bismuth, the latter two
metals being in very small proportion to the silver, so as to imitate the
composition of some refined bars. Ullgreen’s plan for the separation of
the carbonates of lead and bismuth, by dissolving them in acetic acid
and then precipitating the bismuth by means of a lead rod, does not work
satisfactorily and requires too long a time for the precipitation.

II. As it seemed likely that a large number of experiments would
be required to determine accurately the smallest amount of bismuth
that would injure the ductility of our coinage alloy, and the still smaller
proportion that would not sensibly affect this ductility, it was deter-
mined to begin the enquiry by a number of laboratory experiments on
small bars of silver; before trying the effects of bismuth on ordinary
coinage bars and with the procedure for lamination carried out in
the Mint. These laboratory experiments were made in the following
way: Pure silver prepared for assay check purposes, or an alloy of
silver and copper of which the exact composition had been determined
by assay, was melted in a clean plumbago crucible under charcoal.
When the metal was infusion the necessary amount of bismuth was
rolled in a piece of paper, carried down at once to the bottom
of the silver bath, and then thoroughly mixed with the silver by
stirring. The calculated composition was confirmed by assay of the
silver. When this mixture had been accomplished, the contents of the
crucible were poured into an open iron ingot mould, and after cooling,
either quickly by plunging the casting into water or slowly in contact
with the mould, the bar so cast was tested for brittleness by hammering
and rolling. The bars cast were of two sizes, one set being 3°75 inches
long, 1:125 broad, 0°375 thick and weighing about 6°2 troy oz.; and
another set 2°69 inches long, 1:125 broad, 0°25 thick and weighing
about 4°1 troy oz. When reduced to the fullest extent by rolling, these
bars were converted into straps about 0°015 in thickness. In laminat-
ing them they were twice annealed, first after having undergone four
pinches in the rollers, and again after the tenth pinch from the beginning
Similarly shaped bars of silver, without bismuth, were occasionally lami-
nated in the same way to obtain a sure means of comparison. Before
any result was accepted as to brittleness or its absence, the bar under

1887. ] Bismuth on the ductility of Silver. 127

experiment was always remelted and tried at least a second time. The
number of experiments in this series amounted to fifty-three, and the
following is a summary of the results obtained.

Fine silver when alloyed with only 1 per mille (one thousandth
part of its weight) of bismuth, and the casting rapidly cooled by
plunging it into water as soon as it has set, has its ductility, as tested
by lamination, sensibly but slightly impaired, the straps resulting from
rolling having slightly jagged edges. When the proportion of bismuth
is increased to 2, 3, 4.and 5 per mille, the plan of cooling remaining the
same, the raggedness of the edges of the straps was somewhat increased
but not very markedly. If, however, the casting was allowed to cool
down completely, but very slowly, in contact either with the mould or a
stone floor, the results were very different. Under this condition of
cooling, a bar composed of fine silver with 4 per mille of bismuth was
completely brittle; it was readily broken and its fracture was strongly
crystalline. On laminating it, small cracks appeared all over the sur-
face on the second pinch, the bar emitting a crackling sound under the
rolls, much like the ‘‘ cry ” of tin, and on the 4th pinch the bar cracked
deeply at the edges. This remarkable effect on the molecular structure
of this alloy of silver and bismuth, as due solely to the mode of cooling
the casting, was repeatedly verified on the same metal by remelting and
cooling rapidly and slowly alternately. The case seems analogous to
that of bronze, where slow cooling of the alloy after casting is said to
make it hard and brittle.

Fine silver with 6 per mille of bismuth, rapidly cooled, was dis-
tinctly cold-short and crystalline on fracture; the bar cracked on the
surface at the 4th pinch. With 7 per mille of bismuth these evidences
of diminished ductility were slightly more pronounced. With 8 per
mille of bismuth the silver was still more brittle, the bar broke readily
when hammered, and cracked all over the surface on the 4th pinch from
the rolls. With 9,10 and11l per mille of bismuth, the bar of silver
could be readily broken in two by merely striking it against the edge of
an anvil, the fracture was coarsely crystalline, and the bar, in one case,
proved to be very red-short, a mere tap from the tongs sufficing to
break it in two when heated for the purpose of annealing. Although
these bars were so very brittle, it was still possible to roll them into
thin straps after careful annealing ; but the edges of the straps so pro-
duced were deeply jagged and indented by cracks. These bars also all
emitted the peculiar crackling noise under the rolls which has before
been mentioned.

An alloy containing 990 parts of silver and 10 of copper then had
added to it successively 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 per mille of bismuth, the cast-

128 J. Seully—On the Hffects produced by small quantities of [No. 2,

ings being rapidly cooled. The remarks already made with reference
to fine silver alloyed with the same proportions of bismuth would apply
here almost exactly, that is to say, the bars were rolled out to a thickness
of 0°015 with somewhat ragged edges, so that, although ductility,
as thus tested, was impaired, it was only slightly so. With 6 per mille
of bismuth (fineness of metal on assay 983'9) the edges cracked a little,
and, after annealing and rolling out, the strap had decidedly jagged
edges and was split for some distance at one end. The bars containing
4, 5 and 6 per mille of bismuth were now remelted and allowed to cool
slowly and completely in the mould. They were all found to be highly
brittle, broke easily under the hammer—the fracture being granular
and not crystalline—and on being rolled they cracked badly, all over
the surface and at the edges, on the lst or 2nd pinch; in one
case the bar broke in two on the 2nd pinch. That these very different
results were again solely due to the manner of cooling was proved by
remelting and rapidly cooling the castings, when the same metal proved
comparatively ductile, as first stated.

Silver of the Indian standard of 916°6 per mille (the rest being
copper) to which 2 per mille of bismuth was added, gave on lamination
straps with slightly jagged edges and proved to be red-short. With 4 per
mille of bismuth the bars showed a few surface cracks on being rolled, and
the resulting straps had decidedly jagged edges. Slow cooling of these
castings did not affect their ductility, thus showing a marked contrast
to what had been observed in the case of fine silver and the alloy con-
taining only 10 per mille of copper. _When the amount of bismuth was
increased to 5 per mille, the copper present remaining at 83°4 per mille,
the bars were decidedly brittle and cracked readily on hammering—the
fracture being again granular, and not crystalline as in the case of fine
silver. On lamination both surface and edge cracks developed after
four pinches from the rolls, and in annealing one of these bars the
whole surface blistered considerably, no doubt owing to the temperature
having been carried a little too high. Standard silver with 10 per
mille of bismuth, reducing the fineness as ascertained by assay to
906°6, was very brittle, the bars breaking easily under the hammer, and
on the 4th pinch from the rolls splitting and cracking all over the sur-
face. In the course of these latter experiments it was ascertained that
with from 83°5 to 70 per mille of copper present slow or rapid cooling
of silver alloys containing bismuth made no appreciable difference in
their ductility.

The foregoing experiments having furnished some information as
to the amount of bismuth that might be expected to injure our coinage
alloy, it was now decided to test that point practically, by operating on

1887. ] Bismuth on the ductility of Silver. 129
=

coinage bars subjected to the regular procedure for the manufacture of
rupees in the Calcutta Mint. The experiments made in this connection
were fourteen in number. The bars used here for coinage weigh about
253 troy ozs. and are about 20 inches long, 2:25 broad, and 1 inch thick ;
they are cast in vertical iron moulds. In lamination they are first re-
duced by 11 pinches to a thickness of 0°23 in.; they are then annealed
and finally reduced by 12 additional pinches to a thickness of 0:06 inch,
A number of bars, poured from a pot of which the contents had proved
on assay of a granulated sample to be 916°6 fine, were selected for the
experiments, and asa preliminary step one of the bars was laminated
to test its ductility. It rolled out with smooth “ wire” edges, and in-
deed its ductility was beyond suspicion asit resulted from a melting of good
coins. Another bar of the same batch was now melted and 1 per mille
of bismuth added to it, the result of the addition being checked, in this
and all following cases, by the assay of a granulated sample of the
metal, taken after thorough stirring. At the 8th pinch both edges of
the lower half of this bar began to crack, and at the 11th pinch these
eracks extended towards the middle line of the strap for about a quarter
of an inch, and occurred at about every half inch of the edge. After
annealing, and in the subsequent lamination toa thickness of 0:065 inch,
these cracks increased considerably in number, but did not become
sensibly deeper. The strap as finished was pronounced unfit for coin-
age purposes; for although two blanks conld have been cut from its
width, the edges were too jagged to admit of the blanks being obtained
exactly along the line from which it was desired to cut them—this posi-
tion being attained by means of a fixed lateral guide against which the
edge of the strap had to be maintained in cutting. With 2 per mille
of bismuth the results obtained on rolling were not much worse than
with 1 per mille. But the side cracks opened out more, and here again
it was noticed that the lower portion of the bar (upper and lower here
haying reference to the casting in upright moulds) was somewhat less
ductile than the upper part.

With 3 per mille of bismuth (fineness on assay 913°8) the bar
began to crack on both edges at the 9th pinch; at the 11th pinch there
‘were many cracks quite a quarter of an inch deep, aud after annealing
the bar these cracks increased at every pinch, so that at the 21st pinch
the strap was cracked all along both edges very badly. It would only
have been possible to obtain one blank from the width of this strap.

As it was perfectly clear that no further experiments were re-
quired with larger proportions of bismuth, the subsequent trials were
made on coinage bars containing 0°5 per mille, 0°25 per mille, and, by
dilution of the latter bars with standard silver, to even half and a quarter

7

130 J. Seully—On the Effects produced by small quantities of _ [No. 2,

of the lesser proportion just stated. Here the results were rather discor-
dant; they appear to have been somewhat influenced by the state of
different rolls, and by quick or slow annealing. The general outcome
of the tests, however, was that although some of the straps, containing
the proportions given of bismuth, were jagged at the edges, and so would
have yielded a diminished percentage in outturn of good blanks, others
were not materially worse than the average of straps without any bis-
muth at all. Asa result of this part of the enquiry, it may, I think,
be fairly concluded that if our coinage bars contain less than 0°5
per mille of bismuth their ductility will not be materially affected. It
must be borne in mind that these results only apply to bars of the size
and shape of those experimented on, and with the particular treatment
in lamination above detailed. With thinner bars and a different me-
thod of rolling, different results may be expected. The system of cut-
ting out blanks has also to be considered, for in some mints straps with
saw edges are not so prejudicial as in others.

III. We have now to consider the best way of dealing with jive
tendered for coinage which is proved to contain bismuth; and a few
remaining points. |

The only experiment on a large scale for refining such silver saad
as far as I know, has already been described. The want of success which
attended it seemed to be due to the very small amount of base metal in
the bullion, for the formation of a slag in which the bismuth oxide
could be entangled and removed by skimming; and possibly the reducing
action of the plumbago pots used may have pated to the difficulty. As
it seemed certain, however, that nitre would effect the desired oxidation
of the bismuth, some experiments were tried in this direction on a small
scale. About 20 troy ozs. of silver containing 2°5 per mille of bismuth,
and no other metal in appreciable quantity, was melted in a clay pot and
repeatedly treated with nitre and borax, the bath being skimmed from
time to time. After prolonged treatment in this way, the fineness of
the silver being three times tested by a dip assay, the report on the
silver was raised from 997°5 to 999:2; so there can be no doubt that
bismuth may be removed in this way. But the process, as several ex-
periments showed, is tedious; and of course is attended with a loss of
silver which in large operations would be of notable amount. Consider-
ing therefore that silver containing bismuth has hitherto only been met
with at the Mint in bars of high fineness, and that these are not readily
refinable by the ordinary process, it would seem as well, if such silver be
accepted at all, to deal with the bismuth init by the plan of dilution.
The proportion of bismuth any silver contains being ascertained, it may,
if convenient, be mixed by melting with sufficient silver free from bismuth,

1887. ] Bismuth on the ductility of Silver. 131

and with copper, so as to reduce the proportion of bismuth in the coin-
age bars to less than 0°5 per mille; and thus neutralize its injurious
effects on the ductility of the bars.

The explanation of small quantities of bismuth being found in re-
fined silver, ¢. e., silver which has undergone parting for the extraction
of the gold which was contained in it, seems sufficiently indicated in the
following extract from Dr. Percy’s work (Silver and Gold, Part I,
p- 474), where that author is referring to the experience of Dr. Rossler in
parting silver: ‘‘ Bismuth has been found in nearly all kinds of silver ;
but in parting by sulphuric acid itis lost partly in the fine silver and
partly in the slags.” The italics are mine. That small quantities of
bismuth adhere very tenaciously to silver, when once mixed with that
metal by melting, is shown by the following experience. A quantity of
silver containing bismuth, which had accumulated from the laboratory
experiments before detailed, was melted, granulated, dissolved in nitric
acid, and the silver precipitated as chloride. The silver chloride, after
repeated washings, was reduced by heating in a plumbago pot with
chalk and charcoal. The resulting ingots, on assay, showed at once that
bismuth was still present in them in very appreciable quantity.

It may here be of interest to mention that I have found about 0°7
per mille of bismuth in some old Hindu punched coins, forming part of
of a treasure trove which was found at Chaibassa, in the Singhbhum

District,

The following is a summary of the main results detailed in this
paper :—

1. The Indian assay process for silver bullion is, incidentally, a
delicate qualitative test for the presence of bismuth in such bullion.

2. The assay process can be readily modified so as to give accurate
results in the presence of such proportions of bismuth as are likely to
be encountered in practice.

3. Fine silver when alloyed with only 1 per mille of bismuth has
its ductility sensibly impaired thereby; and 1 per cent. of bismuth is
snfficient to render fine silver, or alloys of it with copper down to 906
fine, extremely brittle.

4, Fine silver alloyed with small quantities of bismuth, and silver-
copper alloys down to 980 fine when containing small proportions of
bismuth, have the remarkable property of being more ductile when
rapidly cooled in water after casting than if allowed to cool very slowly,
thus resembling bronze in this respect.

5. Coinage bars such as are used in the Calcutta Mint, and with
the procedure there adopted for rolling, are quite unfit for coinage

132 J. Scully—On the Hffects produced by small quantities of — [No. 2,

owing to brittleness, if they contain only 3 per mille of bismuth ; while if
the latter metal forms less than 0°5 per mille of the whole mass the
ductility of the bars is not much affected.

In conclusion, I have much pleasure in recording my appreciation
of the services of Messrs. J. R. L. Durham and E. Hood, Head and Se-
cond Assistants in the Assay Office, in carrying out under my directions
many details of the experiments recorded in this paper.

Calcutta, March, 1887.

P. S.—June 10th. The experiments detailed in the foregoing paper
were completed early in November 1886 and it was proposed to embody
the conclusions formed in an official report to be submitted this year.
It was suggested to me, however, that the subject investigated might be
of general interest, and I had determined to publish this paper when
I noticed in the Chemical News of March 21st, 1887, (p. 187), a short ab-
stract of a paper on “ Silver containing Bismuth” by Messrs. Gowland
and Koga of the Japan Mint. I have delayed presenting this paper
until I had read the full text of the communication from Japan (Journal
of the Chemical Society No. CCXCIV, May, 1887, p. 410), and I may
now make a few remarks upon it in connection with what I have
advanced.

Messrs. Gowland and Koga’s very interesting paper to a great extent
covers ground which I had not investigated, viz., the want of uniformity
in composition of silver bullion containing bismuth. This part of the sub-
ject was suggested to me for experiment, as some of my results seemed
to show that bismuth mixed with silver by melting and careful stirring
does not diffuse itself evenly throughout the solidified mass. But that
fact, now proved by Messrs. Gowland and Koga, was of no practical impor
tance to us in the assay aud valuation of bullion, seeing that it is an
invariable rule now inthe Calcutta Mint to premelt and assay by a
granulated sample every kind of bullion tendered to the Mint—from refined
bars 999°5 fine to Mexican Dollars. The well-known want of homogeneity
in solidified silver-copper alloys, and other contingencies to which
silver bullion is subject, render this course imperative for purposes of
valuation on any extended scale. The cutting of samples from silver
bullion for assay, even if the spot where such samples should be cut has
been determined after. most laborious investigation, can at best give
merely approximate results ; as indeed our authors admit for the case of
silver containing bismuth.

With regard to the toughening or refining of silver containing
bismuth, Messrs. Gowland and Koga mention that this operation is
successfully performed in the Japan Mint by prolonged exposure of the

1887. ] Bismuth on the ductility of Silver. | 133

molten metal to the oxidising action of the air, aided in some cases by
the use of nitre. This may seem at variance with our experience here,
but is probably not so after all. The brittle bullion treated in Japan
evidently contained a considerable amount of base metal in addition to the
bismuth ; the slags formed in the early stages of the melting consisting
chiefly of litharge, &c. What we had to deal with was refined silver
990 fine, and in this case of course it would be more difficult to free the
bullion from bismuth than if lead and other base metals were present in
sufficient quantity to form a copious slag. But in any case (without,
however, venturing to give any authoritative opinion on the subject) I
doubt whether the Indian Mints would willingly undertake any con-
siderable refining operations on bullion. The conditions under which
these Mints receive bullion are very different from those obtaining in
the case of the American and Australian Mints, and the Imperial Mint
of Japan. In those countries encouragement has to be given to native
_mining industries, and hence a good deal of work in the way of
purification and separation of metals is undertaken by their mints.
In India practically all the bullion is imported by banks and merchants,
from Europe, America, and elsewhere, and tendered to the Mints for
coinage at a fixed charge. The Indian Mints may therefore, as in the
ease of the Royal Mint in London, very properly require that all
bullion tendered to them shall be free from taint of brittleness, and
so far fit for coinage. It is for the importers to make sure that their
purchases are satisfactory in this respect.

As to the amount of bismuth that will render silver brittle, my re-
‘sults seem to be substantially in accord with those of Messrs. Gowland
and Koga. They found that pure silver alloyed with only 5 per mille
‘of bismuth was very brittle; the casting, I suspect, was allowed to cool
slowly. Coinage bars of 900 fine, containing nearly 14 per mille of
bismuth, were brittle and altogether unfit for coinags, as I should have
‘expected. But by special treatment in the way of repeated annealings,
some of these bars were rolled down successfully without cracking, al-
though they still could not be used for coinage.

In the other matters treated of in my paper the results obtained will
‘supplement those of my confréres in Japan.

134 A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conics. [No. 2,

XI.—On Monge’s Differential Equation to all Conics.—By AsvtosH
Moxuopapuyay, M. A., F.R.A.S., F. B.S. E., Communicated by
Tue Hon’sne Manenpratat Sircar, M. D., C. I. EB.

{Received June 30th ;—Read July 6th, 1887.]
§. 1. Introduction.

The present paper relates to the general differential equation of all
conics, which was first published by the French mathematician Gaspard
Monge in his memoir “Sur les E’quations différentielles des Courbes
du Second Degré,” (Corresp. sur l’E’cole Polytech. Paris, 1809-13,
t. II, pp. 51-54, and, Bulletin de la Soc. Philom. Paris, 1810, pp. 87-
88). The subject seems to have attracted the notice of English mathe-
maticians, from the following statement made by Boole in his Differ-
ential Equations, pp. 19—20:

‘““Monge has deduced the general differential equation of lines of
the second order, expressed by the algebraic equation

ax? + bey+cy? + ex+fy=1.

d®y\2 dey d®y dy dty dsy\3_
(a a ees abr age ( ae

But, here our powers of geometrical interpretation fail, and results
such as this can scarcely be otherwise useful than as a registry of inte-
grable forms.”’

It will be noticed that Boole adds no specific reference; and as
the equation was not found, even after diligent search, as well in the
printed works of Monge as in his manuscripts, it was at one time
believed that Boole had made a misquotation, till Professor Beman
pointed out the source of Boole’s statement (Nature, t. XX XIII, pp.
581-582). But I remark that the matter could have been settled in
no time, by a reference to the Royal Society Catalogue of Scientific
Papers, where Monge’s memoir is actually mentioned (see Vol. IV,
p. 441, tit. Monge, No. 22).* Lastly, it is to be noted that the subject
has been very recently considered by Professor Sylvester, in his bril-
liant Lectures on the Theory of Reciprocants, which have been reported
with commendable promptitude by Mr. Hammond in the American
Journal of Mathematics (See, in particular, Vol. IX, pp. 18-19).

§. 2. Derivation of the Mongian.

We shall first consider the question of deriving the Mongian from
the equation of the conic; the known methods are more or less lengthy

It is

* Monge’s Equation was also noticed by Lacroix; see his great work Traité
du Calcul Différentiel et du Calcul Intégral, Paris, 1810—1819, t, III, pp. 698—699,
as a note to § 634, t. II, pp. 371—372; I may add that Lacroix gives the reference
to Monge’s original memoir.

a

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conices. 135

and tedious; the easiest way known is that of Professor Michael
Roberts, who gave the following theorem in the Dublin Examination
Papers for 1876 (p. 269, Ques. 6) :

‘“ Prove that
d*y\3 (< Agi A (>! ?
(=) ae <1) a =)

where c, c’ are arbitrary constants, is a second integral of the dif-
ferential equation of the fifth order which represents a conic section.”

For Professor. Wolstenholme’s solution of this question, as well
as for the method of obtaining the Mongian by twice differentiating the
above equation, see Educational Times Reprint, Vol. XXIV, pp.
104-106, Question 4821; see also, Professor Burnside’s Question
7104, in Vol. XXXVIII, p. 71. The method which I propose is as
follows:

Let the equation of the conic be written in the standard form

(1) au? +2hay + by? +2ge+4 2fy+c=0.

Solving this as a quadraticin y, we have (ef. Salmon’s Conics, p. 72,
Ed. 1879)

(2) by=— (het f)t | (2 —ab)x* +2 (hf — bg)e-+ (f?— bc) } 2

which may be written, ;
(3) y=Pet Qtr Az? +2H2+B.

‘ ; aN?
Operating on both sides with (—) , we have

ary LON Ae Se 2
pertat (=) [(Av? +2Hz+B)*]
nes oe pee as hs 3.
~ ~ (Av? +2Ha+B)”
Therefore,
2 — ae ;
(2) ~* = +(AB—H2) *(Ae*4+2He+B).

3
Operating with (=). we have

d\ 8 (d?y\ — 37 _
Ge) (a) “J =6
which is accordingly the general differential equation to all conics;

if we write it in its developed form, after performing the operations
indicated, we have

2 2,5 2 8 4 3 3
(5 ) I A Bc 10 (4) =

da?) da® dx? dx? dx*
which is exactly the equation of Monge who wrote it in the now familar
form

9q?t — 45qrs+40r5 =0,

136 A. Mukhopadhyay— Differential Hquation to all Conics. [No. 2;

It may not be altogether uninstructive to point out that the ease
with which the Mongian is derived above is simply due to the fact
that, instead of differentiating (as other writers have done) the equa-
tion (1) which is an implicit function of # and y, we first express
y as an explicit function of x in (3), and then proceed to the differentia-
tion. ; .

It is interesting to investigate the differential equations of all
parabolas and circles by the above process. If the curve is a parabola,
we have h? =ab in the general equation (1), and (2) reduces to

by = — (haf) # } 2(f—dg)at (f2— be) b4,
which may be written
y = Pat Q +/ Ret.
Operating on both sides, as before, with (3): we get

da
d?y (=) =
ae a
da? 7 \da [(Re +8) ]
Boy lee
= +- — 3.
A (Re+S8)*
Therefore,
d*y — 2
(Ge) = ttm,
so that

(2)T(C)-"]=0
daz} -\dx? 4
which is accordingly the general differential equation of all parabolas.
When developed, this may be written |
d?y d*a _ P (2)
da? dx* das} ’
which equation was given by Professor M. Roberts in the Dublin
Examination Papers for 1875, (p. 277, Question 3).
If the curve is a circle, we must have a = b, h = 0 in the general
equation (1), so that (2) becomes | :

ay=—ft | at — 2age+ f? — ac | z
which may be written,
y= Q 3 /— «x? + 2Hx+B,

which leads to

dx ~~ (_9242Hx+B)?
dty | _—(B+H®)

le? - Aa : a
(— «? + 2H« +B)

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Hquation to all Conics. 137

From these, we have

Re pe 2
dx —«#?+2H«+B
and
d°y
dx?

= Constant,

i+(2))}

whence the differential equation of all circles is
d?y

G) [i+ aon =

a
But, ee, from the above values of © = lt we may derive

oe leat
dy\ ee = Jaane. |
‘28 : ay ~ (B+H2)””
; he
a aya ® _ dae
whence ee
@G) /d?y\3
= i
d®y\* d’y , dy /d'y dy d?y d*y
= ° =) ae oe da (4) ee doc dx? dx*’

and this would also be the differential equation of all circles. But,

then, if we examine this equation for a moment, we see that it con-

d*
tains and, therefore, the integral equation corresponding to it

ee
da*’
contains four arbitrary constants; hence the equation not only includes
all circles, but something more, viz., it denotes a certain family of
conics which include all circles. In fact, if we integrate the equation,
the result comes out in the form
Aw? + By?+2Gxe+2Fy+C = 0,

which represents conics referred to the centre.

§. 3. First Method of integrating the Mongian.

We shall next procéed to integrate the Mongian equation by
ordinary methods. As far as we are aware (and the same view is
apparently held by Boole and Sylvester), no direct integration of the
equation has as yet been performed, except Professor Sylvester’s
solution by the Theory of Reciprocants (Amer. Jour. Vol. IX, pp. 18-
19).

18

138 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Diferential Equation to all Conics. [No. 2,

d2 .
If we assume —! = z, the equation reduces to
da?

3
ge — 452 4-40 (F =) =0.

As this is homogeneous in z and its differential coefficients, if we put

| ud

the equation is transformed into
d?u du
eae = pee
9 Pe 18u ant AM 0
As this involves only the differential coefficients and the dependent

du d?% ~~ dv dv
1 1t7 ; 1 t —_ = — — pees
variable, a legitimate transformation is to pu 7), = = 2 oe

which give

9v ke — 18w+4u3 = 0.
du

To separate the variables, assume
v = (At3)u’,

dv dx :
whence rea a aah 2u(A+2).
Substituting and simplifying, we have

dN 2—6A?
idl | Wp BN
where the variables are separated,
' du 14+3A 1 6
Uhr Ge a aoe \-+ia fo
Integrating,

2 log ku = log X— 2 log (1— 3A),
where & is the constant of integration.
Therefore k?u?(1— 3A)? =,
which is the complete primitive required. It now only remains to
express wu, A in terms of x, y; for this purpose, it will be convenient
to enumerate the successive transformations we have used, viz.,

From these we get

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conies. 139

which, being substituted in the equation k®u?(1—3A)?=A, transform
2
it into | k?(2u? — 3v)? =v — >
which may be written
27h?o? — 3(14+ 12k'u?) 0+ w72(14+12k'u?) = 0.
Solving this as a quadratic in v, we have
18k?» = (14+ 12h?u2) + (14 12K) 3,
Introducing a new constant m, such that 124%m*?=1, this may be
written

= = = | (u? +m?) + m(u? +m”)? ;

which gives

2dax — evel We a eee
a (a Em?) + m(u +m)?
Let w= m tan ¢,
Therefore
bo gOS ide
ae
eee m(1+ cos cos $)
Ee fae Sa ap TE
Peleg Se cee »?
2 cos 3 2 sin 5
Integrating,
2mx p p
me 7% = tan 5 OF) — cot 3°
But
2 tan p 2 cot —
u 2
— = tan p = Se OR, ———
b tan* © eee,
2 2
2x
aay
1- (=+ n)
Hence,
2

hay sae
ag z fuse = =m (= ay

=~ log p mes n) |

140 . A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conics. [No. 2,

Therefore
me 2 eo;
grep . 1— (= + ) ae
2 3 —_—
and , a Ale?-+2H'04 B! 2
dz
whence, by two simple integrations, we easily pass to
y = Px+Q tr/ Ax? + 2Ha+ B, |

which at once leads to
aa*® + 2haey + by’? + 2gx+2fyte = 0,
the general conic-primitive sought. |

§. 4. Second method of integrating the Mongian.

We shall next proceed to shew how the Mongian equation may be
integrated by means of an integrating factor. The equation being
written, as before, in the form

8 2 3
gt D8 — 45g 22 140 (=) =0,

das da da

aia.
if we multiply this by the integrating factor z ° , it may be written,

—5 dz —Sdzd*z 40 —412 sdz\3
3 ee aa == 3 (/—) =
é da ae dc dx? i Ties &

By the application of ordinary methods (Boole, pp. 222—2z226.
Forsyth, pp. 82—85), the left hand member is seen to be a perfect
ditferential, and, integrating, we get

—5 dz —& ,dzy*
pe Syne ah
da * (az aren
which may be written
d —$ dz
os eae =-—3,,
ist
whence wei S = = — 3c, 44 3c.
Integrating again,
2
2 ° =¢,0°—Wrtc,,
d*y —#
whence oe a (c,x* — 2cga-+o3) *,

and the solution may be completed as before by two simple integrations.

eit

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conics. 141

It is worth noting that though this second method is apparently
much shorter than the first method, it may seem to be rather artificial
in the absence of any clue to the discovery of the proper integrating
factor ; the process, however, has the merit of furnishing an immediate
proof of Professor Roberts’ theorem, quoted above in §. 2. Thus, since

— i
eS = = — 3¢,%+3¢,,
we have

dx
= 9¢,(c,2? — 2cov +063) +9(co”— C13)
= 9,2 5 4.9(c,?—c,c,).

Beer He:
gs (zz) =.9¢, %2* — 18¢,¢,2+ 9c,"

aris 2
Multiplying both sides by 2°, and then substituting z = as

9c, =c, and 9(c,?—c,c,) =c’, we get

dy § (eS ag (Ey
gaat) Naas), = Yael
which is exactly Roberts’ theorem quoted above ; and this not only

shews that the Mongian can be derived from this equation, but also
that it is a second integral of the Mongian.

§. 5, Permanency of Form.

Professor Sylvester has remarked that the Mongian equation has
permanency of form, that is to say, if we seek the transformation of
the Mongian when y is the independent and « the dependent variable,
the required formula is obtained by interchanging « and y in the
Mongian ; this theorem, which is proved from the properties of pro-
jective reciprocants, may easily be established as follows. Correspond-
ing to the integral equation

(4) ax*®+2haey+by?+2gx+2fyte = 0,
we have Monge’s differential equation. If we interchange w#, y, we get,
corresponding to the integral equation

(5) ay?+2hyx + bx’ +2qy+2fe+c= 0,
the differential Reese

d® x da d'a d*x dx \%

©) 9 (Gp) age ap age age + (a) =°
But the equation (5) represents a conic, and as all conics are repre-
sented by the Mongian, the Mongian corresponds to (5); but, as (6)
also corresponds to (5), we see that the Mongian and (6) are identical,
or mutually transformable, which establishes the theorem in question,

142 A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conics. [No. 2,

By a similar reasoning, we can prove that the equation

dx* dx* dx}?
which denotes all parabolas, the aes
ote ee. aoe 3 dy Py dry
(a) a +*Z (as) ~8 dea

which represents all conics pie to co-ordinate axes through the
centre, the equation
ab) ve 3 dy
*(z, a Y da dx’

which represents all conics referred to eit axes through the centre,
the equation
dy dy d’y
(eZ ee oe
which represents all parabolas referred to two tangents as axes, and

the equation
déy dy (2
| rik 2) dx® Pe da \da” =),

which represents all circles, have permanency of form. Of course, by
actual calculation we can establish that, if in each of these equations
we make y the independent and « the dependent variable, we have
‘simply to interchange x and y. We subjoin below the formule neces-
‘sary for such a verification.

dy had
dx da
dy

d2x
dy dy?
da wae dx\*

dy

day? dx dx
dsy (ae) dy dy?
das ay

dy

dx da d® dx\* d* ad? xy 5
dey _ ay ap gt Nay) yp (ie)

dn* (F)

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Diferential Equation to all Conics. 143

da? pei

dey 109 = a) ae = (F ee
da — ign em ae

é a

day* ( , d'x d* 3 x0 \? dxy* d°x
A nan fash ag ae

+ men Oa a SIRT Uno Te
(zy

From the character of these formule, it must be evident that con-
siderable calculation is unavoidable even in the simplest cases of
verification.

§. 6. Geometrical Interpretation.

We shall, in the last place, refer to the geometrical signification
of the Mongian equation. It will be seen from the passage quoted
above (§. 1) from Boole, that he regarded this as a case where our
powers of geometrical interpretation fail. With respect to this pas-
sage, Professor Sylvester, in his Lectures on the Theory of Reciprocants
already mentioned (Amer. Jour., Vol. IX, p. 18), remarks, ‘“‘ The theory
of reciprocants, however, furnishes both a simple interpretation of
the Mongian equation, and an obvious method of integrating it”;
and the geometrical interpretation which the learned professor arrives
at, is that the differential equation of a conic is satisfied at the sextactic
points of any given curve. With regard to this geometric interpre-
tation, it may be remarked that it was not necessary to call in the
aid of the theory of reciprocants to establish this theorem. The
theorem is self-evident from the very definition of a sextactic point
as one where an infinite number of conics can be drawn having five-
pointic contact with the given curve; the integral equation of a conic,
with its five available arbitrary constants, denotes a determinable conic
for any given values of the constants, while the differential equation,
being free from constants, appropriately and adequately represents all
conics; and, as an infinite number of conics may be made to pass
through a sextactic point, the Mongian must be satisfied at sucha
point. But, apart from this, and with all deference to the opinion of
Professor Sylvester as that of one of the greatest of living mathematicians,
I believe that his geometrical interpretation is not the one contemplated
by Boole. A careful examination of the section on ‘“ geometrical
illustrations’’ (Boole, pp. 18—20) will make it clear that, by the
process of the geometrical interpretation of the differential equation
of a curve, Boole meant the determination of some particular geometri-

144 A. Mukhopadhyay—Differential Equation to all Conics. [No. 2,

cal property which belonged to every curve of the system covered by
the differential equation, and the inherence of which property was
adequately represented by the equation; take, for example, the case
of the circle, of which the differential equation is

fat (Hy poe 3% (TY) =o,

Boole points out that this equation represents in an “absolute
character’ the geometrical fact of the invariability of the radius of
curvature of all circles; in fact, I may remark in passing that this
equation represents the vanishing of the angle of aberrancy at every
point of every circle; for, if 6 be the angle of aberrancy, and, p, g, 7,
- the first, second, and third differential coefficients of y in regard to «,
we have the formula

tan 6 = p

(See Salmon’s Higher Plane Curves, p. 369, Ed. 1879). Hence,
when the angle of aberrancy vanishes, we have
(1+p*)r = 3p¢’,
which is the differential equation of all circles. We see, then, that the
differential equation of a circle is the “‘ absolute ” analytical representa-
tion of some geometrical property which belongs to all circles, and
the existence of which is manifested by the differential equation. But.
Professor Sylvester’s interpretation of the Mongian equation is of an
entirely different character ; it does not furnish us with some property
common to all conics; it is simply regarded as the representative of
a sextactic point on any curve. What Boole wanted was some intrinsic.
property, that is, a property belonging to the curve whose differential
equation we are interpreting; what Professor Sylvester arrives at,
is, if J am allowed the expression, an extrinsic property, that is to say,
a property belonging not to the curve in question, but to some evtra-
meous curve which has six-point contact with the given one. If
Professor Sylvester’s interpretation were the one contemplated by
Boole, nothing would be easier than to interpret a differential equation.
Thus, for example, with reference to the differential equation of a circle,
we might simply say that it is satisfied at a quadruple point on any
curve. Again, the equation
d*y d*y set dy 2
reer ahd Bed

when integrated, is found to represent all parabolas; but would it be
a sufficient geometrical interpretation to say that the equation is
satisfied at a quintic point on any curve? The whole point of the

1887. ] H. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. — 145

matter is, it seems to me, that the property discovered must belong to
the curve with which alone we are concerned, and must also be repre-
sented by the differential equation to be interpreted. We miss the
mark, if we bring in any other curve which is totally foreign to our
purpose. I believe, then, that though the theorem enunciated by
Professor Sylvester is perfectly correct, it is not the geometrical inter-
pretation of the Mongian equation as contemplated by Boole; what
Boole sought for in vain, has yet to be discovered. |
26th June 1887.

XII.—Notes on Indian Ruyncnota, Hetrroprera, No. 2.
By E. T. Atkinson, B. A., PRESIDENT.

[Received May 25th, 1887j:—Reed June Ist, 1887. ]
Fam. PENTATOMIDS..
Subfam. Scure.ierina, Stal.

En. Hem. i, p. 4 (1870) ; iii, p. 3 (1873) :—Scutellerides, Pachycorides, Tetyyrides
and Eurygastrides, pt, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. pp. 25-51 (1843) :—Praan-
guli pt, Amyot, A. S. H. F. (2s.) iii, p. 401 (1845) :—Pachycoride and Eurygas-
tridw, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 3, 43 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 1, 61 (1867) :—
Scutellerida, Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 32, 33 (1864) ; Hem. Fabr. i, p. 9 (1868).

Primary and subtended veins of wings distant, including a broad
area in the middle: hamus present: scutellum very large, without

frena.

Div. Envisurarti, Stal.

Meso- and meta-sternum with two high wrinkles or ridges, those on
the former higher forwards: thorax and scutellum at base, together
gradually convex; thorax, at base, produced hindward between the
basal angles of the scutellum: second joint of rostrum much shorter
than the two apical joints taken together, and a little longer than the
apical joint: venter furrowed, without stridulatory strigose spots, in-
cisures gradually curved on the disc.

Genus Oxyprymna, Stal.
En. Hem. iii, p. 5 (1873):—Elvisura, Stal (nec Spinola) Hem, Afric, i, p. 35
( 1864.)
Venter with a distinct broad furrow continued through it: seutellum
with a small spine at the apex. In Hlvisura, the spine is wanting,
19

146 KE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2

58. OXYPRYMNA SPINOLA, Sign.

Elvisura spinolle, Sign., A.S. HE. F. (4 8.) i, p. 55, t.2, f. 5 (1861); Walker
Cat. Het. i, p. 61 (1867).
Oxyprymna spinole, Stal, En. Hém. iii, p. 5 (1873).

Black shining : the head, pronotum, scutellum and especially the
abdomen, covered with a grey, powdery, pubescence: pronotum and
scutellum with round yellow spots. Head stout, rounded in front, the
tylus not extending beyond the juga; the lateral margins weakly
sinuate ; eyes a little prominent ; ocelli equally distant from the eyes and
the median line and somewhat near the posterior border; entire head,
above and below, except some weakly convex portions, covered with a
greyish pubescence which when removed discloses an extremely fine
punctuation: anterior border of pronotum straight, sides scarcely
sinuated, posterior border strongly rounded, and extending over the
scutellum ; posterior angles obtusely rounded; near the anterior border
are some depressions in which is the grey pubescence, also on the sides
and behind the posterior angles; on the disc are some small, round,
yellowish marks: scutellum acuminate at the tip, reaching the end of
the abdomen, and furnished with a strong median ridge; on each side,
near the lateral borders, are depressions clothed with the grey pubes-
cence, andon the disc 6-7 small yellowish patches like those on the
pronotum, and towards the second-third a punctured, yellowish band :
hemelytra extending weakly beyond the scutellum: abdomen with a
strong median groove and covered with a silken grey pubescence,
very abundant: feet short, stout, covered with the same pubescence.
(Sign.) Long, 16; broad 9 mill. Reported from India.

Genus SoLEeNOsTETHIUM, Spinola.

Solenosthediwm, Spinola, Ess. p. 360 (1837); Dallas. List Hem. i, p. 86 (1851)).
Solenostethium, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 26 (1843); Mayr, Reise
Novara, Hem. p. 13 (1866); Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 5 (1873). Includes Celoglossa,
Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 130 (1839); Herr. Schaff., Wanz. Ins. v, p. 59 (1839) ;
Stal, Hem. Afric. i, pp. 35, 52 (1864).

Body obovate: head a little convex, triangular, rather inclined and
flattened; eyes rather stout, globose; ocelli more distant from each
other than from the eyes; tylus longer than the juga; antenna, slender,
5-jointed, somewhat short, second joint shortest, 3-5 joints successively
increasing in length: first joint of rostrum not extending beyond the
lower surface of the head, fourth joint reaching the end of the rostral
canal, between the third pair of feet : thorax sexangular, basal produced
part truncate, basal margin straight, posterior and lateral angles round-

a ete Qeesp eee’ -

1887. ] K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 147

ed: scutellum very large, as broad as the abdomen: sterna and venter
furrowed, the sternal furrow ended on both sides by a high ridge, the
mesosternal ridges not produced anteriorly: venter in & with two
large, opaque, remotely somewhat-pilose spots : tibiss cylindrical, above
slightly bisubsulcate, furnished with a median ridge, margined on both
sides (Spin., Stal).

59. SOLENOSTETHIUM RUBRO-PUNCTATUM, Guérin.

Scutellera rubro-punctata, Guérin, Voy. Coq. Zool. ii. (2) p. 157 (1838).

Solenosthediwm rubro-punctatum, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 7 (1851).

Solenostedium rubro-punctatum, Voll., Faune Ent. ? Arch. Indo-Néer. i, p. 4, t. 1,
f. 1 ( ") (1843): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 4 (1867).

Solenostethium rubropunctatum, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 6 (1873): Distant, A. M.
N. H. (6 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Head, thorax and scutellum of a rather deep reddish brown: head
triangular, immaculate, with a small longitudinal elevation in the mid-
dle ; antenne black: thorax sprinkled with numerous, very small, in-
distinct, green dots; three round orange spots on each side, of which
one on the anterior margin immediately behind the eyes, another in the
middle and a third near the posterior margin; anteriorly a seventh spot
in the middle: the scutellum is without green dots and has six orange
spots at the base at an equal distance from each other, and four in the
middle behind these, also at an equal distance from each other: body
beneath ferruginous yellow with a small black spot on each side of each
segment of the abdomen: femora reddish, with the tibie and tarsi
black (Guérin). Long, 13; broad 83 mill.

Reported from China, Java, Assam. The Indian Museum has
specimens from Naga hills, Sikkim. The ¢ has 10, the ? 8 spots on
the scutellum. 8S. chinense, Stal, is probably only a local variety, as the
links between it and S. rwbro-punctatum are nearly complete.

Div. SPH#ROCORARIA, Stal.

Meso- and meta-sternum without ridges, sometimes furrowed.
- Body above very convex, beneath very slightly so: head transverse,
very much inclined or perpendicular: thorax and scutellum at the base,
together, gradually longitudinally convex, basal margin of thorax ob-
tusely rounded towards the basal angles of the scutellum, posterior
angles usually obtusely rounded, not distinguishable as angles: second
joint of the rostrum much shorter than the two apical together: venter
without stridulatory, strigose spots, incisures gradually curved towards
the middle.

148 E. T. Atkinsen—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. |. [No. 2,

Genus Hyprroncous, Stal.
Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. p. 615 (1870) ; En. Hem. iii, p. 7 (1878).

Body obovate, above much, beneath slightly convex: head much
inclined, triangular, with the eyes broader than long, very slightly con-
vex, lateral margins slightly sinuate near the eyes: rostrum reaching -
the apex of the third ventral segment, second and third joints almost
equally long, first and fourth shorter than them : antenne 5-jointed (?),
first joint not reaching the apex of the head: thorax sexangular,
anterior margin very broadly sinuate between the eyes, anterior lateral
margins subacute not retusely-sinuated before the lateral angles, basal
margin straight, posterior angles obtusely rounded: scutellum as broad
as the abdomen, gradually less convex towards the posterior part,
anterior margin of prostethium obtusely roundly-dilated towards the
coxe: mesosternum slightly sulcated: odoriferous openings continued
outwards ina long furrow: venter longitudinally, slightly furrowed
before the middle, sides flat, margins acute, incisures gradually curved
in the middle: feet somewhat shortish, tibiee furnished with two furrows
above. Differs from Spherocoris in having the anterior lateral margins
of the thorax not retusely sinuated at the lateralangles, the sixth
ventral segment in @ is roundly produced at the apex and covers the
genital segment and in @ is arcuately sinuate, leaving the genital
valvules free, also the tibize above are slightly somewhat 2-furrowed,
with a distinct wrinkle between the furrows.

60. HyYPERONCUS LATERITIUS, Westwood.

Spherocoris lateritia, Westw., Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 13 (1837).

Spherocoris lateritius, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 79 (1839) : Dallas, List Hem. 1,
p. 10 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 6 (1867).

Hyperoncus lateritius, Stal, Hn. Hem. iii, p. 7 (1873).

Obscurely rufescent, much punctured: pronotum with four dots
arranged in a transverse line; scutellum with twelve (six, four, two) ;
body beneath antenne and feet, rufescent ; abdomen with a large basal
spot (Westw.). Body long 11-113 millims.

Reported from China: there isa doubtful specimen in the Indian
museum from the Dikrang valley (Assam).

Div. Scutrennaria, Stal.

Meso- and meta-sternum without wrinkles or ridges, sometimes
furrowed : body beneath distinctly convex, generally above and below
equally convex or beneath more convex. Thorax at the base hind-
wards, scutellum at the basef orwards, more or less conyexly-inclined

1887, | KR. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. - 149

which is best seen from the side; thorax generally distinctly truncated
posteriorly before the entire base of the scutellum, basal angles general-
ly very distinct, situate before or outside the basal angles of the scutel-
lum: venter without stridulatory strigose spots, rarely in & with two
opaque spots, incisures gradually curved towards the middle: second
joint of rostrum generally shorter and often much shorter than the two

apical joints taken together. |

Genus Cantao, Am. & Serv.

Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 29 (1843) ; Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 3, 17 (1851 ); Walker,
Cat. Het. i, p. 14 (1867): Stal, Hem. Afric, i, p. 33 (1864); En. Hem. iii, pp. 8, 10,
(1873); Mavr, Reise Novara, p. 14 (1866).

Body narrowly obovate, elongate: head narrow, elongate, lateral
margins slightly sinuate ; rostrum not extending beyond the first seg-
ment of the abdomen: pronotum broader than long, basal margin
straight towards the sides, posterior angles very distinct, dentated, no
transverse furrow ; scutellum as broad as the abdomen, longer, distinct-
ly impressed at the base near the angles, somewhat truncate or flattened
at the tip; exterior margin of corium straight; membrane extending
beyond the end of abdomen; anterior margin of propleura entirely
obtuse, somewhat callous, posterior margin not sinuate at the angles:
venter without opaque spots, with a longitudinal groove in the middle,
sides more or less convex, genital segment in ¢ duplicate or divided
into two parts, the basal rounded at its tip, the other extremely trilobed
and truncate at the tip; vulvar plates in ?, narrow.

61. CantTao OcELLATUS, Thunberg.

Cimezx ocellatus, Thunberg, Nov. Ins. Spec. iii, p. 60, f. 72 (1784): Gmelin, ed.
Syst. Nat. i (4), p. 2183 (1788).

Cimex dispar, Fabr., Ent. Syst. iv, p. 81 (1794); Donovan, Ins. China, Hem.,
t. 13, f£.1 (1798), sec. Dallas: Stoll, Punaises, p. 143, t. 37, f. 260 A. & B. (1788).

Tetyra dispar, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 129 (1803); Schiddte, Kroyer’s Nat.
Tidsskr., iv, p. 281 (1842).

Callidea dispar, Burm., Handb. ii (i) p. 394 (1835) ; Herr. Schiff., Wanz. Ins. iii,
p. 99, t. 105, f. 324 (1835).

Calliphara dispar, Germar, Zeitschr., i (i) p. 123 (1839).

Callidea ocellata, Westw., Donovan 1. c. p. 47, t. 20, f. 1. (1842).

Scutellera dispar, Blanchard, Hist. Nat. Ins. iii, p. 158, Hém. t. 8, f. 2 (1840).

Cantao dispar, Am. & Serv., Hist. Ins. Hém. p. 29 (1848).

Cantao rufipes, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 17 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.14
(1867).

Cantao ocellatus, Dallas, 1. c. p. 17 (1851); Vollen., Faune Ent. I’ Arch. Indo-
Néerl., i, p. 10 (1863) ; Walker, I. c., p. 14 (1867); Stil, Hem. Fabr., i p. 9 (1868) ;
Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. p. 616 (1870); En. Hem. iii, p.10 (1873): Distant, A. M.
N. H. (5 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

150 KE. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

Orange yellow or carneous: head yellow, the base and antennso
ceerulean: pronotum and scutellum carneous, the former with some-
times many, sometimes fewer flavescent spots, some with a black point
scutellum large, with a small impressed moon-shaped black spot on
each side at the base, then three yellow rings marked with a black
point, the median larger, behind the middle are two small yellow
lunules spotted black and posteriorly rings with a black point in the
middle: pectus cyaneous: abdomen carneous with four cyaneous ma-
cular strie ; of which the median are larger: feet cyaneous, femora
rufous: varies with the sex, with thorax having on both sides a very
acute, incurved porrect spine, yellow at base, black at apex (C. dispar,
Fabr.). Long 14-23 mill. Very variable in the colour above, from a
pale sordid yellow toa deep rich orange-red, and in the spots on the

pronotum and scutellum, from almost immaculate with merely traces of _

spots, to the full number ; all these varieties occur in India.

Reported from Java, Sumatra, Philippines, China, India. The
Indian Museum has specimens from Assam, Sikkim, N. India, Malabar,
Ceylon, China.

Genus Pacintocoris, White, Dallas.

Pecilochroma, White, Trans. Ent. Soc. iii, p. 84 (1842): Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 11
(1873): Pecilocoris, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 100 (1848); List Hem. i, p. 4
(1851) ; Stal, Hem. Afric., i, p. 33 (1864); Mayr, Reise Novara, Hem., p. 17 (1866) ;
Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 8 (1867). The name Pecilochroma was used by Stephens in
1829 for a Lepidopterous genus of Tortrices, and Dallas with White’s consent
changed the name of the Hemipterous genus to Pécilocoris in 1848 and described
it for the first time, so that for very good reasons, the new name must stand.

Body ovate, convex: head rather large, broad, the lateral margins
sinuated before the eyes: antenne about half the length of the body,
5-jointed ; basal joint short, robust; second, shorter and most slender ;
3-5 joints each as long as, or longer, than the two basal united, nearly
equal, compressed, broad and furrowed longitudinally on the sides:
rostrum usually extending beyond the second segment of the abdomen,
sometimes nearly toits apex: scutellum slightly truncated at the apex :
abdomen with a more or less distinct .furrow beneath ; the three penul-
timate segments in the 3 not bearing the dull space on each side which
exists in Tectocoris, Hahn, and the anal plate, in do, simple, formed of
one piece, sinuated at the tip and fringed with hairs (Dallas).

62. P@cILOCORIS HARDWICKII, Westwood.

Tectocoris Hardwickii, Westwood, Hope, Cat. i, p. 13 (1837).
Tectocoris affinis, Westwood, 1. c. p. 13 (1837).
Pachycoris nepalensis, Herr. Schaff. Wanz. Ins; iv, p. 1. t. 109, f, 339 (1839).

8

ESE OO

1887. | BE. T, Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 151

Scutellera Hardwickii, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 185 (1839).

Pecilochroma Hardwickii, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 12 (1873); Distant, A. M. N. H.
(5 8.), iii, p. 44 (1879).

Pecilocoris Hardwickii; Dallas, Trans. E. S.v, p. 107, t. 13, f.8 (1848): List
Hem, i, p. 18, (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i. p. 8 (1867).

3, 2. Ovate, convex, above yellowish orange or red, opaque, rather
finely and thickly punctured, head black, thickly and strongly punc-
tured; eyes and ocelli brownish: pronotum with the anterior portion
and two large spots on the disc, black: scutellum slightly wrinkled
transversely at the base; normally, with eleven black spots, placed,
three at the base of which the median one is large and elongated-tri-
angular, a small round one on each side of the apex of this, a transverse
row of four across the disc, behind the middle, the two intermediate of
which are the largest and the two smaller towards the apex; these
spots ar¢ generally more or less confluent or partially obsolete, forming
several varieties: margins of the hemelytra black piceous: abdomen
beneath orange-red, very faintly wrinkled, the basal segment entirely,
the second (except the middle), the third and fourth on the lateral
margins, the terminal segment, except its lateral margins, (and in the
3, the base) and the anal apparatus, violet-black; the penultimate
segment is entirely red: pectus black, tinted with violet, finely punc-
tured; the lateral angles of the prostethium and part of the antero-
lateral margins, red: legs violet-black: antennze and rostrum black.
Dallas remarks that in P. nepalensis, Herr. Schaff., the spots have be-
come confluent so that the general colour of the upper surface is black :
the pronotum is nearly covered by the two spots on the disc which ex-
tend forwards to the black anterior margin and posteriorly to the
hinder margin; the five spots at the base of the scutellum are united,
forming a large waved band across the base, from the middle of which
the apex of the triangular basal spot projects, while the two interme-
diate spots of the transverse row are joined to one another and to the
two subapical ones, forming a large, rounded lobate patch. In
P. afinis, Westwood, the two subbasal and the two subapical spots are
wanting and the two spots on the disc are sometimes obsolete. There
are numerous varieties between these, but all are distinguishable by the
uniform red colour of the fifth abdominal segment (Dallas). Body
long, 17-20 mill. a very variable species: insome the spots are large
and confluent so as to make the general appearance of the upper surface
of the scutellum black, and in others red is the prevailing colour. P.
nepalensis, Herr. Schaff., if not specifically different, forms a well mark-
ed variety. Obovate, moderately convex; black, shining, finely and
closely punctured, on the antenne, feet and the underside, bright shin-

152 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [ No. 2,

ing violet: the posterior greater part of the thorax (except two round
black spots), a broad transverse band above the middle of the scutellum
having forwards four and hindwards three obtuse teeth, and the apical
margin of the scutellum, sanguineous. In it, the subbasal spots on the
scutellum are confluent so as to forma black band more or less broad,
posteriorly dentate; whilst in 7’. affinis, Westwood both the sub-basal
and sub-apical spots are wanting. P. hardwickii in Dallas’ figure,
forms the mean between these two extremes.

Reported from India, Nepal, Silhat: the Indian Museum has spe-
cimens from the Khasiya and Naga hills, Sibs4gar and Sikkim.

63. Pacinocoris LAtus, Dallas.
Pecilocoris latus, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 101, t. 18, f. 4 (1843) ; List Hem.
i, p. 12 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 9 (1867).
Pecilochroma lata, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 12 (1878).

3, 2, Rounded-ovate, not very convex ; above yellow, clouded with
orange-red, thickly punctured : head violet, shining, thickly and strong-
ly punctured; eyes brown; ocelli red: pronotum thickly punctured,
somewhat rugose, with the anterior angles, and two large spots on the
disc, extending to the posterior margin, deep blue-violet: scutellum
thickly and finely punctured, slightly wrinkled transversely at the base ;
with a spot in each basal angle, a large, irregular, transverse patch in
the middle of the base, and a transverse row of four spots of which the
two intermediate are by much the largest, across the disc, behind the
middle, deep blue-violet ; the surface around all the spots clouded with
orange-red: margins of hemelytra, black: abdomen beneath red, im-
maculate, thickly and finely punctured, and slightly pilose, with a strong
median furrow at the base: anal apparatus reddish: pectus thickly
punctured, yellowish, variegated with blackish violet, the prostethium
pale red, with a violet-black spot at the base of the anterior legs:
femora testaceous, [sometimes violet-black] their apices with the tibize
and tarsi shining violet-black: head beneath yellowish in the middle,
with its margins violet: antennz black, the two basal joints with a
violet tinge: rostrum testaceous with the two last joints black, the tip
reaching the base of the fourth ventral segment. In some the fine
spots in the middle of the base of the scutellum are confluent but nor-
mally they are as in P. Drurci, Dallas. Body, long 19-21 mill.

Reported from China, Assam. The Indian Museum has specimens
from Assam. The variety with the five spots at the base of the scutel-.
lum confluent agrees with P. donovani, Burm. in this particular, and also
in the absence of the two subapical spots and the length of the rostrum,
but differs in form and general colouring.

1887. | EK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 153

64. Pacinocoris orNATUS, Dallas.

Pecilocoris ornatus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p.15 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het.i, p. 9
(1867).

Pecilochroma ornata, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 12 (1873): Scott, A. M. N. H. (4s.)
xiv, p. 289 (1874).

Above orange-yellow, finely punctured with black: head rather
short, the tylus considerably longer than the juga, with the apex slight-
ly turned up; vertex black, with three rows of golden green punctures
of which the lateral are broadest, and include the ocelli; front of head,
deep red, punctured with violet and green; the apex orange: thorax
with the anterior and lateral margins and two large spots on the pos-
terior margin, black, leaving only a narrow transverse band and a longi-
tudinal median line, orange; scutellum with fine confluent black spots
on the basal half, forming a broad, irregular W ; four others across the
middle, united in pairs; forming a band interrupted in the middle, and
two close to the apex; all the black spots are tinted with violet and
brassy green; abdomen beneath ochreous, very finely punctured, with a
large strongly punctured golden-green spot, on each side of every seg-
ment ; ventral furrow reaching the apex of the fifth segment; pectus
testaceous, variegated with golden-green: femora of the same colour
with golden-green reflections ; tibize brown, slightly metallic ; tarsi pice-
ous: rostrum yellowish-brown, with the tip black, reaching the middle
of the fourth ventral segment: antenne violet black; basal joint
orange-black at the tip (Dallas). Long 15—15% mill.

Reported from N. India, Japan.

65. PacrLocoris DRURaI, Linn.

Cimex drurei, Linn., Mant. PI. ii, p. 584 (1771): Drury, Ill. Ins. i, p. 94, t. 42,
f. 1 & 5, a,b (1770): Sulzer, Gesch. i, p. 95, t. 10, f. 5 (1776): Fabr., Syst. Ent.
p. 697 (1775) : Spec. Ins. ii, p. 339 (1781) ; Mant. Ins. ii, p. 281 (1787) ; Ent. Syst.
iv, p. 83 (1794) ; Gmelin ed. Syst. Nat. i(4), p. 2129 (1788): Stoll, Punaises, p. 147,
t. 37, f. 267 (1788). India.

Tetyra drurei, Fabr. Syst. Rhyng. p. 1382 (1803): Burm. Noy. Acta Leop. xvi,
Suppt. i, p. 287 (1834).

Scutellera drurei, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i), p. 135 (1839).

Pecilocoris drurei, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p.103, t. 13, f. 6 (1848) ; List
Hem. i, p. 12 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 8 (1867).

Pecilochroma drureig Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 12 (1873); Distant, A. M.N. H.
(5 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Scarlet: head and antenne black; antenne 5-jointed, a little
longer than the thorax, the two first joints, shortest: thorax convex,
the lateral margins slightly reflexed, two suboval spots which form an
obtuse angle with the head and are truncated on the sides, black :

20

154 KH, T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

scutellum with two black bands formed of confluent spots [not always
confluent], the basal allowing two scarlet spots to be seen, that just below
the middle, irregularly indented on both sides and two round black
spots at the apex: hemelytra opaque, membrane fine and with the
wings semi-transparent: abdomen beneath scarlet, with an oblong
black spot at the anus, and four others on each side reaching the margin :
pectus, rostrum and legs blue-black (Drury). Long 18 mill.

Dallas remarks that the normal condition of this species exhibits
the typical colouring of the genus: in it the spots on the scutellum are
arranged,—five basal, of which the median one is somewhat triangular
and rather short, the two intermediate smallest ; two behind these, placed
opposite the intermedial basal ones, a row of four across the disc, rather
behind the middle and two towards the apex : the seven spots at the base
are frequently confluent, forming a large basal patch with three large
notches in its posterior margin (asin Drury’s figure) ; the row of spots
across the dise is also often united to form a transverse band. The
narrow basal segment of the abdomen and generally the second seg-
ment also, are violet-black; the stigmata of the other segments are
surrounded by spots of the same colour which generally occupy the en-
tire lateral margins of the segments and thus form a black border to
the abdomen; the terminal segment, except the posterior and lateral
margins, is black.

Reported from Hong-Kong, Silhat, Assam: the Indian Museum
possesses specimens from Sikkim and Assam.

66. PacriLocris OBSOLETUS, Dallas.

Pecilocoris obsoletus, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 104 (1848) ; List Hem. i, p.
12 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 8 (1867).

3. Ovate, above bright velvety-red, thickly punctured : head and
eyes, black ; ocelli reddish : thorax with the anterior and lateral margins
smooth, shining, rather coarsely and irregularly punctured ; two indis-
tinct yellowish patches within the anterior angles, and faint indications
of two elongated violet spots on the disc: scutellum slightly wrinkled
transversely at the base, and with indications of eleven violet spots,
placed five at the base, two behind these, and four in a transverse row
across the middle; the apical portion orange, finely reticulated with
red; margins of hemelytra bright red, thickly and coarsely punctured :
abdomen red, shining, with a few scattered punctures, and a faint
longitudinal furrow at the base; the basal segment pitchy black, a
small spot around each of the stigmata, and a large crescent-shaped one,
on the terminal segment, black; anal apparatus red: pectus violet-black,

1887. ] KE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 155

shining, finely and sparingly punctured, a dull space on each side of the
meso- and meta-stethium; the antero-lateral margins and the lateral
angles red: femora brownish, slightly tinted brassy, their apices, the
tibie and tarsi, brassy black; head beneath shining violet, punctured,
yellowish at the base: antennz black, the three basal joints tinted with
violet and brassy, the two apical covered with short greyish hairs ;
rostrum pitchy (Dallas). Long, 19 mill.

Reported from Hong-Kong: I possess specimens from Assam and
Sikkim. Dr. Stal united this species with P. druret, and, although
the indications of spots are arranged in exactly the same manner as in
P. drurei, the two subapical ones are generally wanting, whilst the red
colour of the margins of the hemelytra, the colour of the legs, the pecu-
liar texture of the margins of the thorax, and the clothing of the two
last joints of the antenne, mark it as a distinct species. In some, be-
neath, the colouring is exactly as in the preceding, whilst, in others, the
pectus and venter are entirely brassy green, and only the anal apparatus
and the antero-lateral and lateral margins of the pectus are red.

.

67. PaciLocoRis INtERRUPTUS, Westwood.

Tectocoris interrupta, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 14 (1837).

Scutellera interrupta, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i), p. 184 (1839): Herr. Schaff., Wanz.
Ins. v, p. 73, t. 172, f. 531 (1839).

Pecilocoris interruptus, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soe. v, p. 102 (1848): List Hemi.
i, p. 12 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i. p. 8 (1867).

Pecilochroma interrupta, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 13 (1873).

Broadly ovate, rather flat; above brassy black, thickly and finely
punctured: eyes pale brown, ocelli red: pronotum with the posteriot
margin and a curved longitudinal line on each side, within the lateral
angles, bright [orange] red: scutellum with a narrow, transverse line
on the disc near the middle, interrupted in the middle, and the apical
margin, bright [orange] red: margins of hemelytra brassy black, of
the abdomen black, variegated with bright red ; abdomen beneath, black,
shining, slightly brassy, the bases of 2-5 segments in the middle, and
a@ marginal spot on the junction of each segment, red: anal aparatus,
black, margined with red in the 9: pectus brassy black, thickly and
finely punctured : antenne, rostrum and legs, black (Dallas). Dallas
remarks that in a long series of this insect there is no indication of dis-
tinct spots, but it is probable that the anterior margin and two spots on
the disc of the pronotum are black, and that the spots on the scutellum
are arranged much as in P. hardwickwi. Body long 15-19 mill.

Reported from Nepal, India. The Indian Museum has a specimen.

156 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

68. P@cILOCORIS PURPURASCENS, Westwood.

Tectocoris purpurascens, Westwood, Hope, Cat. i, p. 14 (1837).

Scutellera purpurascens, Germar, Zeitschr. i. (i), p. 1385 (1839).

Pecilocoris purpurascens, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 103, t. 13, £. 5 (1848) ;
List Hem. i, p. 13 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het. i. p. 8 (1867). - .

Pecilochroma purpurascens, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 13 (1873).

3, 2. Ovate; above variegated with violet and black, thickly and
strongly punctured : head nearly smooth, shining, slightly wrinkled and
punctured at the base and the apex; eyes and ocelli brown: pronotum
with a small red spot in the middle of the anterior margin, a correspond-
ing one on the posterior margin and a small streak of the same colour
on each side towards the lateral angles: scutellum with a small trans-
verse streak on each side before the middle, a smaller longitudinal one
towards the apex and an oblique one on each side of this, on the lateral
margins, bright red: margins of hemelytra violet-black: abdomen be-
neath slightly wrinkled, shining brassy-green, the margins violet with
an irregular, transverse, red streak on each side of the 2-5 segments:
anal apparatus brassy black: pectus violet and green, shining, finely
punctured, with a dull black patch on the meso- and meta-stethium: legs
violet-black: head beneath violet and green, shining, punctured : an-
tenne and rostrum, black (Dallas). Dallas observes that the normal
arrangement of the spots (indicated by the strong violet tints on various
parts of the surface) is the same as in P. drurei. Body long 17—19
ndiHth dah,

Reported from Nepal, Sikkim.

69. Pacinocoris PuLCHER, Dallas.

Pecilocoris pulcher, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 105, t. 13, f. 7 (1848): List
Hem. i, p. 18 (1851): Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. Arch. Indo-Neéer. i, p. 5, t. 1, f. 2,
2a, (1863) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i. p. 8 (1867).

Pecilochroma pulchra, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 13 (1873).

3 Ovate, deep velvety purple, closely and finely punctured: head
above of a vinaceous purple, below violet and green, shining, orange at the
base, with four longitudinal impressions along the tylus and two oblique
dotted hollows at the inner side of the eyes, blackish along the margins
of the lobes: eyes brownish, ocelli small, reddish : 1-2 joints of antennee
violet, smooth, rest black, pubescent: pronotum broadly margined with
red laterally and anteriorly, and with a narrow, median longitudinal line
of the same colour, on the disc, reaching the posterior border: scutel-
lum deep purple with the base (irregularly), a transverse band across
the disc before the middle, and a narrow median line uniting these one
to the other, also a small spot on each side of the latter (sometimes

1887. ] HK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. a

wanting), shining violaceous: margins of the hemelytra brownish pur-
ple: abdomen with a strong furrow at the base, bright red, with a
violet reflection, smooth, shining, very finely and moderately punctured ;
a black spot around each of the stigmata and a faint band of the same
colour across the terminal segment: anal plate red: pectus purple va-
riegated with violet and greenish tints, shining, thickly and finely punc-
tured, the antero-lateral margins and lateral angles, red: femora brassy.
purple ; tibiz, shining violet; tarsi black: rostrum brassy black, basal
joint pale pinkish violet. Spots as in P. drure@i except that the two
subapical ones are wanting, others easily traced in the violet tints of
the base, and the broad band across the middle of the scutellum.
(Dallas). Body long 18-19 mill.
Reported from Malabar, Sumatra.

70. PactLocoris CHILDRENI, White.
Tectocoris childreni, White, Charlesworth Mag. N. H. iii, p. 542 (1839).
Tectocoris (Pecilochroma) childreni, White, Trans. Ent. Soc. iii, p. 84, t. 7, f. 1
(1838). _
Pecilocoris childrent, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 106 (1848) ; List Hem. i, p.
13 (1851) : Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 8 (1867).
Pecilochroma childreni, Stal, iii, p. 13 (1873).

Head (including eyes, antenne, and rostrum) black, distinctly
margined ; ocelli yellow: thorax and scutellum yellowish-fulvous, the
former in front black, the black colour extending in a narrow line along
the slightly raised lateral margin, with four transverse black spots,
the two dorsal ones larger and rather quadrate: legs green: scutellum
obtuse, with eleven black spots, three at the base, the median one tri-
angular and largest, two behind these sub-rotundate, four in the middle
(the two inner largest) and two near the tip: hemelytra black, some-
what shining: body beneath, purplish black, sides of abdomen with
four transverse yellow lines, sometimes confluent at the base and form-
ing a yellow patch, end of abdomen green (White). Long, 18; breadth
of pronotum, 11 mill.

Reported from Nepal, Sikkim.

The spots on the scutellum are placed,—three basal, of which the
median one is large, triangular and produced on each side at the base,
in such a manner that it appears as though in the normal state there
would be an additional spot on each side, as in P. drurei; two behind
these, a row of four across the disc, rather behind the middle and two
‘subapical. Distinguished from P. drure@i by the broad, black anterior
margin of the pronotum and the black anal plates: from P. hardwickii
by the margins of all the segments of the abdomen being violet-black

158 BE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

and from both, by the presence of four spots on the disc of the pronotum
and by the entire pectus being violet-black. It is possible that in the
normal condition the disc of the abdomen may be yellow or orange
margined with black (Dallas).

71. PacrLocoris opssus, Dallas.
Pecilocoris obesus, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 18 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 9
(1867).
Pecilochroma obesa, Stal, En. Hem, iii, p. 13 (1878).

Convex, rather short: above bright red, shining, very finely and
rather sparingly punctured, with the head, the fore-part of the thorax
and three or more less distinct spots at the base of the scutellum, brassy
green: thorax slightly excavated on the anterior margin, the impres-
sion strongly punctured and with a strong impression about the middle
of each antero-lateral margin: body beneath, antenne and legs bright
brassy green ; the antero-lateral margins of the pectus and a spot in
the middle of the abdomen, red: rostrum black, reaching the middle of
the third segment of the abdomen (Dallas). Body, long 133-14¢
mill.

Reported from Assam, N. India.

72. PM@cCILOCORIS RUFIGENIS, Dallas.
Paecilocoris rufigenis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 14 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 9
(1867).
Pecilochroma rufigenis, Stal, En. Hem, iii, p. 13 (1873).

Above orange-yellow with violet reflections, thickly and finely
punctured: head purplish red with the base and the whole of the tylus
black: thorax with the anterior and lateral margins violet and with a
black spot within each anterior angle: scutellum with a narrow black
band across the base and a black triangular spot on each side before the
middle, touching the lateral margin, its base faintly wrinkled ; basal
angles strongly rugosely-punctate: margins of hemelytra, black : abdo-
men beneath and anal plate reddish orange tinted with violet, smooth,
shining, very faintly punctured, the terminal segment violet-black,
except its margins and a transverse streak of the same colour on each
side of the rest of the segments, except the basal one: ventral furrow
distinct, reaching apex of the fifth segment: breast shining violet, with
the antero-lateral margins, red: legs brassy black: rostrum black,

reaching the base of the terminal segment of the abdomen: head, be- |

neath red; with the rostral canal violet-black : antenne black (Dallas).
Long, 19 mill.
Reported from Assam.

1887. ] KE. T. Atkinson—Notes ow Indian Rhynchota. 159

73. PM@cILOcoRIS ANISOSPILUS, Walker.
Pecilocoris anisospilus, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 9 (1867).

Black: head smooth, witha punctured furrow on each side be-
tween the eyes, and with another on each side in front: thorax bright.
red, with a black spot on each side on the disc and with a smooth
black band along the anterior margin which is largely punctured :
pectus with a lanceolate red streak along each side: scutellum bright
red, with three bands of black marks: the first band of five spots of
which the median is large and triangular reaching the fore border, the
inner pair are small and isolated, the outer pair large and lateral and
touching the anterior margin: of the second band of four black spots,
the inner pair are large, the outer pair, small and lateral; the third
band is composed of two black points : abdomen beneath red, black at
the base and at the tip (Walker). Rather shorter than P. dives,
Guérin; differs in the markings on the thorax and scutellum and the
abdomen beneath has no black spots on each side. Possibly only a
small variety of P. ornatus, Dallas. Long, 13 mill.

Reported from Cachar (Assam).

Genus TETRARTHIA, Dallas.

List Hem. i, p. 3, 20 (1851): Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 33 (1864); En. Hem. iii,
p. 8, 13 (1873): Mayr, Reise Nov. Hem. p.12 (1866): Walker, Cat, Het. i, p. 18
(1867).

Body elongate, sericeous: head rather long, convex, especially
anteriorly, lateral margins somewhat acute before the middle and
sinuated, no longitudinal impression near the eyes, tylus longer than
the juga: rostrum long, reaching the posterior margin of the fourth
ventral segment, first joint very short, second and fourth about equal
in length, twice as long as the first, second joint compressed, third
longest, about equal in length to the first and second taken to-
gether ; antennz 4-jointed, second joint about thrice longer than the
basal joint which does not reach the apex of the head: posterior angles
of thorax obtusely rounded, entire anterior margin of the profleura
obtuse, elevated, posterior margin straight at the angles: scutellum
rounded at the apex, covering nearly the whole of the hemelytra:
venter with a long furrow, sides flattish, anteriorly somewhat convex,
posterior margin of segments straight on both sides, the furrow of the
orifices long, straight or very slightly curved, abruptly produced for-
wards at the apex or emitting forwards a wrinkle or ridge: pectus
without a furrow for the reception of the rostrum or projecting flaps
covering the base of the antennze; legs moderate: tarsi 3-jointed,
second joint shortest (Dallas).

160 K. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

74, TETRARTHIA LINEATA, Walker.
Tetrarthia lineata, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 18 (1867).

Ferruginous-red, fusiform, bright-red beneath: four stripes on the
head and beneath on both sides, five stripes on thorax, of which the
outer pair are oblique, its anterior and lateral margins, a dot on each
side of the anterior margin of the scutellum and two oblique streaks
which converge hindward and a broad stripe on each side of pectus,
emerald-green: antennz piceous, fourth joint pale yellowish towards
the base: scutellum with a luteous dot on each side at two-thirds of the
length: abdomen beneath with two rows of black spots on each side
and with a black subapical patch: legs pubescent; tibiee and tarsi
‘above and femora towards their tips tinged with green: wings brown :
costa of the corium purple. Var.? No emerald-green markings: head
bluish-black : thorax bluish-black in front and on each side: scutellum
with no luteous dot: pectus blackish (Walker). Long, 142 mill.

Reported from Hong-Kong ; variety from Burma.

75. TETRARTHRIA VARIEGATA, Dallas.

Tetrarthria variegvta, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 20, t.1, f. 1 (1851) ; Stal, Ofvers.
K. V.-A. Forh. p. 616 (1870) ; En. Hem. iii, p. 14 (1873).

Tetrathria margine-punctata, Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. l’Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 13,
t. 1, f. 6 a-b (1863) ; Walker, Cat. Het. iii, p. 508 (1868).

Tetrathria quinquemaculata, A. Dohrn, Stettin Ent. Zeit. xxiv, p. 347 (1863).

Head black, with some scattered, coarse punctures, the lateral
margins and two parallel longitudinal lines brassy-green; eyes pale
brown ; thorax with a large, semicircular brassy green patch on the
disc, touching the posterior margin, and surrounded by a broad dull red
band which runs from one posterior angle to the other; four spots on
the disc, near the posterior margin, of which the two intermediate are
largest, and the anterior and lateral margins black: scutellum brassy
green in the middle, the margins dull red, punctured and thickly
clothed with fine golden hairs, witha large black patch in the middle
of the base, two small spots of the same colour immediately behind this,
and two large ones on the lateral margins immediately behind the mid-
dle; a large T-shaped black patch occupies the disc of the scutellum,
formed by a transverse band, before the middle, and a median longitu-
dinal one which reaches nearly to the apex, and is furcate posteriorly :
abdomen beneath red, with broad black margins: rostrum red: legs
black with the basal half of the femora bright red: antennee black with
the basal joint reddish and a pale band near the base of the fourth joint
(Dallas). Varies in having the scutellum and thorax rufous-testace-
ous: anal segment in 3 truncate at apex; finely erosulous and in the
middle with a somewhat prominent tooth. Long, 163 mill.

1887. | KE, T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 161

Walker remarked that T. margine-punctata, Voll. was probably only
a variety of 7’. variegata, Dallas ; and it is now recognized as such. The
type of this variety has the borders of the body above and the entire
body below covered with a grey villosity ; head a little punctured, with
a glossy chocolate-brown line in the middle ; two longitudinal lines and
the border of the eyes, golden-green ; antenne pale brown, pubescent ;
base of fourth joint whitish: eyes brown, ocelli yellow: pronotum
punctured, with a row of deep dots on the anterior border, preceding a
transverse glossy space which is of a chocolate-brown, the border being
golden-green: dise of pronotum and secutellum purplish black with se-
veral obscure metallic-blue lines: border surrounded by a row of yellow
triangular patches: body beneath yellow with some golden-green lines
on the head and pectus: ventral borders marbled with brown ; 5th and
6th segments altogether brown; rostrum pale yellow, with the tip
obscure: coxee and half of femora of a pale yellow, other half deep
brown : tibie and tarsi, yellowish brown. Long, 15 mill. A Silhat
specimen is paler and has the border of the scutellum interrupted at the
tip.

Reported from Phillipines, Java, Tondano, Celebes, Silhat. The
Indian Museum possesses specimens from Sibsd4gar (Assam).

Genus Scure.uera, Lamarck.
Syst. p. 293 (1801): Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 4, 18 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het.
i, p. 15 (1867): Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 33 (1864); En. Hem. iii, p. 9, 14 (1878) :
Mayr, Reise Nov. Hem, p.17 (1866). Includes Calliphara, Am. & Serv. Hist.
Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 30 (1843), nec Germar.

Body subsericeous or pilosulous, very oblong: head triangular, ob-
tuse, sloped: rostrum extending beyond the second ventral segment :
antenne 5-jointed, second joint not or only a little shorter than the first,
fourth the longest: pronotum with a transverse linear impression be-
fore the middle, generally strongly punctured, the base distinctly trun-
cated, posterior angles distinct, posterior margin of propleura generally
distinctly sinuated at the angles, anterior margin obtuse, thickened,
slightly amplified near the prosternum: the meso-sternum furrowed :
venter furrowed beyond the middle ; the furrow of the orifices very
long, gradually curved forwards towards the apex, the part of the me-
tapleura situate before the furrow, smooth, shining: feet rather long.

76. ScUTELLERA NOBILIS, Fabricius.

Cimesx nobilis, Fabr. (nec Linn.), Syst. Ent. p. 697 (1775); Spec. Ins. ii, p. 338
(1781); Mant. Ins. ii, p. 280 (1787); Ent. Syst. iv, p. 80 (1794): Gmelin, ed. Syst.
Nat. i (4) p. 2128 (1788); Panzer in Voet, Col. iv, p. iii, t. 47, f. 1 (1798); Wolff, Ic.
Cim. ii, p. 49, t. 5, f. 46 a-d, (1801): Stoll, Punaises, p. 8, t. 1, f. 1; p. 18, t. 2, f. 7,
and p. 20, t. 4, f. 22, 23 (1788).

21

162 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

Tetyra nobilis, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 129 (1803).

Tectocoris nobilis, Hahn, Wanz. Ins. iii, p. 24, t. 81, f. 247 (1835).

Tectocoris perpleca, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. 1, p. 4 and 15 (1887).

Calliphara nobilis, Germar, Zeitschr. i, (i) p. 124 (1839): Am. & Serv. Hist.
Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 30 (1843).

Scutellera nobilis, Lam. Hist. Nat. iii, p. 491 (1816): Burm. Handb. ii, (i) p. 395
(1835) ; Blanchard, Hist. Nat. Ins. iii, p. 158, Hém. t. 8, f. 3 (1840); Dallas, List
Hem. i, p. 18 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 15 (1867); Vollenhoven, Faune Ent.
Y Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 11 (1863) ; Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 14 (1873) ; Distant, A. M.
N. H. (5 s.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Oblong; cerulean-golden, spotted black: beneath rufous, with
lateral bands shining blue and gold (C. nobilis, Fabr.).

Light metallic green, varying to deep blue or even purple: body
above and beneath and legs covered with a fine greyish pubescence
more abundant on the head and anterior part of pronotum, abdomen
and legs: eyes brown, ocelli red: rostrum reddish or brown: first joint
of antennee reddish brown, rest black: pronotum with a deep transverse
groove anteriorly, a row of excavated points on anterior margin, lateral
margins reddish brown, three irregular spots towards anterior margin,
a median longitudinal line, a spot on each side thereof and on the
humeral angles, black: scutellum with a median longitudinal line reach-
ing to about the middle and three spots on each side thereof, black, a
smaller sublateral spot on each side between the second and third pairs,
sometimes also a sublateral spot between the first and second pairs, and
sometimes all or some are more or less obsolete: body beneath red with
a purplish tint ; head beneath, patches on pectus, and oblique transverse
bands on abdominal segments, interrupted in the middle and not reach-
ing the margins, golden blue or green: coxe and femora red, tips of
femora, tibie and tarsideep metallic violet. Varies much in size from
14 to 21 mill.

Var.:—Head green with three black spots: first joint of the an-
tennee black not red: lateral margins of pronotum without a red limbus,
first third green, rest blue with traces of five black spots ; scutellum
blue with ten black spots: abdomen beneath golden green, shining,
with a large orange yellow patch on the disc, margin orange, crenulated
black: anal plate green (Voll.).

Reported from Bengal, Pondicheri, Assam (Silhat, Cachar), Burma,
Panjab, India, Siam. The Indian Museum possesses specimens from N,
India, S. India, Karachi, Sikkim, Assam, and Calcutta.

77. SCUTELLERA FASCIATA, Panzer.

Cimex fasciatus, Panzer, in Voet, Col. iv, p. 108, t. 46, f. 2 (1798): Stoll,
Punaises, p. 138, t. 36, f. 251; var. p. 34; t. 7, f. 49 (1788).

a

1887. ] EK. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota, 163

Tectocoris nepalensis, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. 1. p. 14 (1837),

Calliphara nepalensis, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 125 (1839),

Calliphara amethystina, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 124 (1839).

Scutellera amethystina, Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. l’Arch, Indo-Néer, i, p, 12

(1863) : Walker, Cat. Het. iii, p. 507 (1868).

Callidea lanius, Stal, Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. p. 231 (1854).

Scutellera lanius, Stal, 1. c. p. 51 (1856): Walker, 1. c. i, p. 15 (1867).

Scutellera fasciata, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 19 (1851); Walker, 1. c.i, p.15
(1867) ; Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 14 (1873).

Body fusiform ; pilose on the head; first third of pronotum, body
beneath and feet, purple: head wrinkled only on the margins, beneath
and two first joints of the antenne, violet: eyes brown, ocelli red :
rostrum, half red, rest black: pronotum deeply grooved and with a row
of excavations on the anterior margin, lateral margins greenish or
golden; two spots at the anterior angles and four near the base brown
or blackish: scutellum with three bands, often interrupted (especially
the first), and two small lateral and one large median spot of the same
colour, all of them are sometimes more or less obsolete: body beneath
red, pectus with several violet spots, venter with two rows of oblique
spots, alternately violet and golden: stigmata black: coxee and femora
red: tips of femora, tibie and tarsi, deep violet. (S. amethystina,
Voll.). Body long 18-20 mill. | |

Westwood describes his 7. nepalensis as cerulean-green, clypeus
golden, head with a median line and two oblique spots between the
eyes, black; sides of thorax golden-yellow; dorsum with three inter-
rupted longitudinal lateral lines ; scutellum with two round spots at the
base, a broad waved band before the middle, two round lateral spots
and two others much larger and confluent beyond the middle, and the
apex, black. Long19 mill. Stal makes his S§. laniuws from Java a
variety marked by its greater size, more robust, subsanguineous above,
slightly shining violaceous, spots unicolorous without the violaceous
tinge. Long, 22; broad 9 mill.

Reported from Java, Borneo, Malacca, China, Burma, Assam,
Nepal, Sikkim.

Genus BRACHYAULAX, Stal.

Ofvers, K. V.-A. Férh. p. 616 (1870); En. Hem. iii, p. 9, 14 (1873).

Body very oblong, above slightly, beneath very convex, briefly
pilose, shining: head triangular, somewhat convex, sides very convex
before the eyes, lateral margins sinuate towards the base, rounded to-
wards the apex; buccule continuing through it, slightly elevated:
ocelli twice more distant from each other than from the eyes: rostrum
extending to somewhat behind the last coxe: antenne shorter by half

164 BE. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

than the body, first and second joints short, the latter extending to the
apex of the head and a little shorter than the first, third somewhat
longer. than the two basal together, fourth and fifth longer than the
rest, fourth especially compressed, dilated: thorax sexangular, anteriorly
truncated, distinctly transversely impressed before the middle, ante-
rior lateral margins, obtusely sinuated, obtuse: scutellum covering the
entire abdomen: prostethium triangularly impressed, margins of im-
pression elevated, subdilated: mesostethium obtusely sulcate: odori-
ferous apertures continued outwards in an elongated furrow, slightly
curved and abruptly abbreviated : sides of venter very convex, incisures
gradually curved second segment broadly sulcate in the middle: feet
- moderate, tibiz distinctly suleate above. Differs from Scwtellera, Lam.
. in having the furrow of the odoriferous apertures shorter, less curved,
and the venter furrowed only at the base (Stal).

78. BRACHYAULAX OBLONGA, Westwood.

Tectocoris oblonga, Westwood, Hope, Cat. i, p. 14 (1837).

Calliphara oblonga, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 129 (1839).

Scutellera oblonga, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 19 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.
15 (1867).

Brachyaulaz oblonga, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 14 (1873); Distant, A. M. N. H.
(5 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Ovate-oblong, metallic bluish-green; head with three spots be-
tween the eyes; thorax with six, three by three, the posterior larger ;
scutellum with three small basal, two larger rounded, two lateral small,
two behind the middle, rounded, large, and one sub-apical spot, or ten
in all: body beneath cerulean-green, base of the abdomen in the mid-
dle and the sides irregularly fulvous; antenne black, feet green
(Westw.). Body long, 137 mill.

Reported from Java, Assam, China. The Indian Museum has a
specimen from Assam which differs from the type in having the large
median spots on the scutellum confluent, forming two waved transverse
bands (Dist.) and in some these are connected by a median, longitudinal
arrow-shaped mark.

Genus CaLLipHarA, Germar.

Calliphara, pt, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 122 (1839): Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 9, 16
(1873). Includes Calliphara, Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 34 (1864) and Lamprophara,
1, c. p. 34 (1864).

Stal distributes the species belonging to this genus amongst the
subgenera Lamprophara, Oalliphara and Chrysophara to none of which
does he assign the only species recorded from India. The third joint
of the antennze is over twice as long as the second: rostrum reaching

1887.] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 165

at least the middle of the second ventral segment: the ventral segments
(at least the last and the penultimate) furnished at the apical angles
with a small tooth or spine which is sometimes covered by the hemely-
tra and then with difficulty distinguished: the scutellum does not
cover the exterior margin of the connexivum (Stal).

79. CALLIPHARA OBSCURA, Westwood.

Tectocoris obscura, Westwood, Hope, Cat. i, p. 14 (1837).
Calliphara obscura, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 18 (1873).

Head and pronotum black-coerulean ; the latter with three posterior
spots ; scutellum green, with seven spots (two, two subconfluent, two
rounded beyond the middle, and one small, subapical) ; body beneath,
black-ccerulean, venter green, with black lateral spots ; femora luteous
at the base. Body, long 17¢ millims.

Reported from Nepal. Stal inquires ‘an potius Insule Philippine.’

80. CALLIPHARA NOBILIS, Linneeus.

Cimezx nobilis, Linn., Cent. Ins. i, p. 17 (1763) ; Ameen. Ac. vi, p. 400 (1763).

Cimex pustulatus, Panzer in Voet, Coll. iv, p. 111, t. 47, f.11 (1798).

Scutellera Buquetii, Guérin, Voy. Coq. Ins. ii (2), p. 159, 162 (1830).

Callidea nobilis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 25 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 32
(1867).

Calliphara buquetii, Stal, Berlin Ent. Zeitgschr. x, p. 153 (1866); Ofvers. K
y.-A, Forh. p. 618 (1870).

Calliphara nobilis, Stal, En, Hem. iii, p. 17 (1873).

Above light green, shining, in some specimens with violet reflections :
head rather small, triangular; eyes brown very prominent; in the mid-
dle, a small smooth green elevation, a little dilated hindward and bound-
ed by two small grooves: antenne in d', nearly half the length of the
head, in 2 a little shorter, black, with the joints flattened: thorax al-
most straight or only a little emarginate on the sides, punctured ; on
each side in front an impression, black at the bottom, placed obliquely,
and four small round black spots, a little beyond the middle; in some
specimens there is an oblong red spot between tho two anterior im-
pressions, in others there are only two spots on the sides: scutellum
slightly grooved at the base, much punctured, with a longitudinal line
in the middle having no punctures and feebly marked; three small,
round, black spots on each side, and a smaller in the middle and near the
tip: thorax beneath, red, with large green spots, confluent on the
sides; margin red, partly visible above: abdomen vermillion, sides
broadly bordered green and on their external margin are four large
black dots, and inwards four black patches less well defined, the extreme
external margin is red: rostrum black, red at the base: femora red,

166 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

tips partly green; tibie and tarsi deep green (S. buqueti, Guérin).
Long, 16—17; broad, 8—8j mill. at base of scutellum.
Reported from Philippines, Java, Timor, China, Burma.

Genus Curysocoris, Hahn.

Wanz. Ins. ii, p. 38 (1834); White, Trans. Ent. Soc. iii, p. 85 ( 1841-43) ; Stal,
Hem. Afric. i, p. 34 (1864) ; En. Hem. iii, p. 9, 18 (1873).

Includes Callidea, Am. & Serv. (nec Burm.), Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 31
(1843) ; pt. Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 22 (1850); Walker, Cat. Het.i, p. 25 (1867) :—
Eucorysses, Am. & Serv., 1. c. p. 31 (1848) ; Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 34 (1864); Mayr,
Reise Nov. Hem. p. 18 (1866) :—Galostha, Am. & Serv., 1. c. p. 32 (1843) :—
Cosmocoris, Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 34 (1864) ; Mayr, Reise Nov. Hem. p. 18 (1866).

Stal distributes the species belonging to this genus amongst the
subgenera Hucorysses, Cosmocoris, and Ohrysocoris, all of which are repre-
sented in India. Differs from Calliphara in having the scutellum co-
vering the whole connexivum, except the basal part. Body above
glabrous: the third joint of the antenne atleast twice as long as the
second : the three last joints of the rostrum unequal in length: lateral
margins of the head neither carinated nor reflexed, anterior margin of
the prostethium not callous behind the eyes, obtuse: meso-sternum, at
least anteriorly, somewhat sulcated, the furrow generally slightly
carinated on both sides: posterior margin of the propleura distinctly
sinuated at the posterior angles: the ventral segments, at least the last
or the penultimate, furnished at the apical angles with a small tooth,
often covered by the hemelytra and then difficult to distinguish.

Subg. Huconyssres, Am. & Serv.

Head somewhat large, not much inclined, sides not deeply sinuated :
anterior lateral margins of pronotum straight or somewhat so: basal
part of the scutellum not, or but very obsoletely, elevated: entire tibiee
above furrowed : sixth ventral segment in 9, as far as known, obtusely
or very obtusely angulately prominulous in the middle of the apex.

81. CHRYSOCORIS GRANDIS, Thunberg, Stal.

Eucorysses grandis, Stal, Berlin Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 154 (1866).

Chrysocoris (Eucorysses) grandis, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 18, (1873): Scott, A. M.
N. H. (48.) xiv, p. 289 (1874) : Distant, 1. c. (5 s.) iii, p. 44 (1879); J. A.S. Ben.
xlviii, (2) p. 37, (1879).

Var. a :—Cimex grandis, Thunberg, Nov. Ins. Spec. p. 31, t. 2, f. 46 (1783):
Gmelin, ed. Syst. Nat. i (4), p. 2133 (1788).

Calliphara grandis, Germar, Zeitschr. i (1), p. 128 (1839).

Callidea grandis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 23 (1851): Vollenhoven, Faune Ent:
VArch. Indo-Néerl. p. 18 (1863) : Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 32 (1867).

Eucorysses superbus, Uhler, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phil. p. 221 (1860).

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 167

Callidea distinguenda, Uhler, 1. c. p. 286 (1861).

Var. b :—Cimesx baro, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppt. p. 528 (1798).

Tetyra baro, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 129 (1803); Schiddte in Kréyer’s Nat.
Tidsskr. iv, p. 279 (1842).

Calliphara baro, Germar, Zeitschr. i (1) p. 127 (1839).

Callidea baro, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 22 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 26
(1867).

Tetrarthia tetraspila, Walker, 1. c. i, p. 19 (1867).

Var. c.:—Eucorysses pallens, Am. & Serv. Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 31, t. 1, f. 4
(1843).

Callidea baro, Vollenhoven, 1. c. p. 17 (1863).

Head and spots on pectus at the coxe, flavescent, the head some-
times shining purplish, median streak and basal intraocular part, black :
rostrum reaching the middle of the third ventral segment.

Var.a. Large, elongate, tumid, glossy, violet beneath, sanguineous
above with black spots: head blue with the median line and antenne
black: pronotum sanguineous, much swollen, the anterior margin
fringed with violet, at the base, black: a dot on each side behind the
anterior angle and a large spot on the disc, black: scutellum sanguine-
ous, the black of the pronotum appears to extend over the base; five
black spots on the scutellum one rounded on the median line near the
base, two others costal appearing like a band interrupted in the middle,
another forms a band abbreviated on two sides and the fifth is near the
anal margin: a sanguineous spot sometimes occurs in the middle of the
venter: feet black (Cimex grandis, Thunb.). Body long, 25 mill.

Var. a. 2, sec. Stal :—Black, thorax, scutellum, spots on pectus at
cox and transverse median spot on 4—5 ventral segments, yellow-
testaceous: margins of thorax and of scutellum shining-violaceous :
entire narrow margin, discoidal spot and lateral angles of thorax, basal
limbus, spot near base, lateral transverse spot on both sides before mid-
dle, abbreviated band behind middle and obsolete subapical spot on
scutellum, black: spot on basal angles of ventral segments, yellow-
testaceous, much tinted violaceous.

Var. b.:—Body large: head pale; antenne, median line and
margin black-cyaneous: thorax pale, shining, with a large ovate spot
reaching anterior margin, cyaneous: scutellum large, smooth, pale,
shining, with three cyaneous-black spots, the median one cordate: pectus
cyaneous: abdomen pale with cyaneous bands: feet cyaneous (Cimex
baro, Fabr.) Stal describes this variety as flavescent or yellow-testace-
ous: antenne, rostrum, anterior spot on thorax, basal limbus and three
spots before middle of scutellum, pectus, lateral posterior band on seg-
ments, basal streak and apical spot on venter and the feet, black: six
spots on the pectus, three at the coxe and three at the lateral margins,
flavescent,

168 E. T, Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

Var, c.:—<c. Pale yellowish, shining above: head with a median
longitudinal line and its posterior part, shining black: lateral margins
of the pronotum slightly sinuate in the middle, a patch of shiningblack
rounded hindwards, touching the anterior margin: two oblong, black,’
transverse patches on the disc of the scatellum, its base having on
each side a similar black spot: body beneath shining black-bluish with
transverse lateral bands of a pale shining yellow which unite on the
two penultimate ventral segments: anal plate pale shining yellow, feet
black metallic-bluish: antennee black (H. pallens, Am. & Serv.),
Long, 25 mill.

All these varieties occur in India and are represented in the Indian
museum collection. Reported from Japan, China, Siam, Assam,
(Silhat), Bengal, Tenasserim, Java.

82. CHRYSOCORIS IRIS, Germar.

Calliphara iris, Germar, Zeitschr. i(i), p. 128 (1839): Herr. Schaff., Wanz. Ins.
V, p. 80, t. 171, f. 526 (1839). Bintam.

Callidea sexmaculata, Dallas (nec Leach), List Hem. i, p. 23 (1851); Vollen.,
Faune Ent. PArch. Indo-Néerl., p. 18, t. 1, f. 7 (1863): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 31
(1867). Java.

Chrysocoris (Eucorysses) iris, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 19 (1873).

Purpurascent, shining violaceous: antenne and feet black, three
spots on thorax also its posterior margin, and six spots on scutellum,
black (Germar). Schaffer observes that in the example figured by him
the ground colour appears to be brown, lighter posteriorly ; head,
thorax and base of scutellum of a rich violet with rosy red, turning to
green on the sides of the thorax and scutellum: feet and antenne
darker. His figure shows anterior and posterior margins of thorax
black, a median longitudinal streak proceeding from the anterior margin
and posteriorly behind the middle confluent with a short transverse,
streak, black: four spots on scutellum joining an arcuate interrupted
transverse band before the middle, and two larger oblong transverse
spots behind the middle. Long, 24 mill. It is like C. sexmaculatus,
Leach, but differs in its smaller size, body (especially the head) purpu-
rascent-flavescent, smooth head and shorter rostrum which somewhat
reaches the apex of the third ventral segment.

Body above purple with silvery blue reflections: head transversely
wrinkled at the apex, vertex of a bronzed blackish green; eyes brown,
ocelli brown-yellowish: beneath, the sheath of the rostrum of a metallic
ereen, labrum yellow: antenne black, second joint one-sixth of the
following : thorax punctured, most strongly in the middle of the ante-
rior margin which is of a bronzed green and on the disc, the space be-
tween these two is smooth ; a cordiform spot on the disc, an abbreviated

1887. | K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhyuchota. 169

band along the posterior border and two small spots at the lateral
angles, black, these angles slightly, acuminate: scutellum punctured,
more strongly at the anterior angle, basal elevation smooth: two

‘bronzed-black spots behind the basal elevation, a black spot at each

anterior angle, another pair much larger, almost quadrate behind these
near the lateral margin, and a transverse band interrupted in the mid-
dle, black; hemelytra black, with the costal margin purple; pectus
varied with green, black and red: venter red with purple margins ; a
large basal spot, a smaller anal spot, an oblique stria on the sides, shin-
ing black: feet metallic black, pubescent(C. sexmaculata, Voll.). Body
long, 24 mill.
Reported from Java, Bintam, Singapore, Tenasserim.

Subg. Cosmocoris, Stal.

-Head somewhat large, not much inclined : pronotum with the ante-
rior lateral margins more or less distinctly sinuated in the middle, fur-
nished in the & anteriorly with a rather deep triangular impression,
scutellum transversely elevated at the base: tibie above towards the
apex somewhat flat or furrowed.

83. CHRYSOCORIS coxALIs, Stal.
Callidea coxalis, Stal, A. S. E. F. (4s.) iv, p. 47 (1864): Walker, Cat. Het. i,
p. 28 (1867). Tringany.
C. (Cosmocoris) coxalis, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 19 (1873).

? Brassy-green, shining, feet more obscure, of the colour of steel :
antenne and rostrum black; a small spot towards the ocelli and a me-
dian stripe on the head, five spots on the pronotum and eight on the
scutellum, subviolaceous-black ; disc brassy-black varying in breadth :
cox, trochanters and base of femora sordid yellow-whitish. Head
moderate, distinctly sinuate before the eyes : second joint of antennz one-
third shorter than basal, the fourth (in ¢& at least) dilated, furrowed ;
pronotum sparingly and finely punctured, disc before the middle a little
more distinctly punctured ; antero-lateral margins very slightly sinuate,
narrowly and distinctly reflexed, with two anterior transverse spots, one
orbicular on each side at the lateral angles, and three large median
elongate reaching the base, the median one in the form of a continued
stripe, the other two extended forwards beyond the middle of the pro-
notum: scutellum as broad as the abdomen, not so densely punctured,
slightly transversely elevated at the base, there smooth, with eight
spots, the subbasal median one formed like the letter T, the rest, trans-
verse, large: sixth ventral segment in Q, posteriorly obtusely sinuate
(Stal). Long, 13-15; breadth of pronotum, 7-8 mill.

Reported from Singapore, Tringani, Tenasserim (?).

22

170 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. (No. 2,

Subg. Curysocoris, Hahn.

Head somewhat small, bending much forwards, sides generally
strongly sinuated: thorax in & without an anterior triangular impres-
sion: basal part of the scutellum not or only slightly elevated : tibie
above towards the apex flat or furrowed. Stal still further divides this
subgenus into the sections Chlorolampra including C. germari, Esch. ;
Chlorochrysa, including C. stockerus, Linn. and Chrysocoris including C.
dilaticollis, Germar.

As the species of this subgenus are not readily distinguishable I
adopt the following scheme partly from Stal (Hem. Fabr. i, p. 11) as
some help to identification :—

1-2. Venter without any flavescent spot or mark.—C. cihventae
mihi.

2-1. Venter with disc, at least, flavescent.

3-17. Lateral margins of pronotum straight or nearly so.

4-16, Pronotum posteriorly with a single black spot in the middle,
sometimes wanting, the hs lateral margins entirely or nearly en-—
tirely reflexed.

5-9. Disc of venter flavescent, with four long rays occupying the
apical part of the segments, terminated anteriorly inwards by a black
transverse spot that reaches the base of the segments and is remote
from the black-irised spiracula.

6-8. Ventral limbus ccerulean or brassy-green: posterior margin
of pro- and meso-stethium concolorous: femora flavescent beyond the
middle.

7-8. Pronotum with ten black or black-ccerulean spots.—C. elatus,
Stal.

8-6. Ventral limbus, rufescent or purplish, rarely flavescent and
purple: posterior margin of parts of pectus, flavescent ; femora beyond
the middle, miniaceous.—C. patricius, Fabr.

9-5. Almost entire venter ora very great part of the disc flaves-
cent, with on both sides short rays that occupy the base and the apex of
the segments and are not terminated by a transverse black spot: scutel
lum typically with the apex black or obscurely violaceous, no sub-apical
rounded spot.

10-8. Posterior black spots on the pronotum remote from the
base, rather small; ventral limbus brassy-green, or ccerulean, or pur-
plish-violaceous.

11-12. Pronotum with 5or 7 black spots, that on the lateral
‘angles very small or wanting: femora beyond the middle, flavescent.—
CO. purpureus, Westw. O. viridis, mihi.

12-11. Pronotum with 7 or 8 black spots, the anterior median one

1887. ] K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 171

sometimes wanting, 3 large median posterior spots, reaching the base.—
C. stolii, Wolff.

13-12, Spots larger and broader, colour more purplish above.—C.
porphyricolus, Walk.

14-12. Pectus without flavescent spots and lines.—C. ornatus,
Dallas.

15-12. Scutellum broadly orange at the apex.—C. andamanensis,
mihi. |
16-4. Pronotum with 11 black spots and posteriorly in the mid-
dle with 2 oblong spots, antero-lateral margins somewhatacute poste-
riorly, and a little reflexed.—C. marginellus, Westw.; ©. pulchellus,
Westw.

17.3. Lateral margins of anterior part of the thorax, depressed,
flat, rounded.—C’. eques, Fabr. ; C. dilaticollis, Guérin.

84, CHRYSOCORIS ATRIVENTRIS, Atkinson.

Proc. A. S. B. p. 11, (1887).

Closely allied to C. hypomelena, Voll. from Borneo, differs in the
markings on the thorax and in the entire venter being almost wholly
deep black. Brassy-green, irrorated golden, shining, closely punc-
tured: head beneath and feet lighter brassy-green, very shining : venter
deep black, smooth, slightly shining. Head much inclined, obtus ely
triangular, rounded at the apex; except the tylus, irrorated golden :
eyes, ocelli, antenne and rostrum, black; 3-5 joints of antenne some-
what flattened ; rostrum reaching almost the apex of the second ventral
segment, extremity of tip brownish: thorax with three black spots
towards the anterior margin, the lateral subovate-oblong, transverse,
impressed, smoothish, the median irregularly triangular, smallest ; to-
wards the posterior margin three larger spots, of which the lateral] oblong,
longitudinal, and the median obtusely triangular, smallest; lateral
margins reflexed, a very small black spot on the slightly prominulous
posterior angles: scutellum with the basal elevation smooth, shining,
and with seven black spots; on each side three lateral, of which the two
first are ovate-oblong, transverse, and the third is somewhat rounded
posteriorly, also one subbasal median, obtusely-triangular, having its
apex pointing hindwards. Head beneath and pectus very bright, shining,
brassy-green; antenne black: entire venter intensely black, smooth,
slightly shining; barely traces, under the microscope in the sun, of a
slightly purplish limbus and a slightly brassy-green margin to the
stigmata: feet blackish, femora tinted brassy-green towards the apex ;
tibie finely ciliated, externally of a blue-steel colour. Long 14; breadth
of pronotum, 8 mill. .

Example from Delhi.

172 EK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [ No. J,

85. CHRYSOCORIS ELATUs, Stal.

Callidea Stockerus, Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 114 (1839), excl. syn. 7
Chrysocorés elatus, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 11 (1868); En. Hem. iii, p. 20 (1873).

Thorax with ten bluish-black or black spots: discoidal spot on
scutellum narrow, linear or somewhat so; disc of venter flavescent with
four long rays, occupying the apex of the segments and terminated
anteriorly inwards by a black transverse spot that reaches the base and
apex of the segments, remote from the black-cinctured spiraculan,
ventral limbus ccerulean or brassy-black ; posterior margin of pro- and
meta-stethium concolorous ; femora flavescent beyond the middle.

Reported from India.

86. CuHrysocoris, Fabricius.
Cimex patricius, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppt. p. 527 (1798) ; Stoll, Punaises, p. 125,
t. 82, £. 222A (1788).

Tetyra patricia, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 131 (1803); Schiédte in Kréyer’s Nat.
Tidsskr. iv, p. 286 (1842).

Scutellera patricius, Guérin, Voy. La Coquille, Ins. p. 159 (1830).

Callidea bengalensis, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 15 (1837); Germar,
Zeitschr. i (i), p. 118, (1839) ; Dallas, List Hem. i, p.28 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het.
i, p. 27 (1867).

Callidea basilica, Germar, Zeitschr.i (i), p. 117 (1839) : Walker, 1. c. i, p. 28
(1867).

Callidea patricia, Germar, l. c. p. 121 (1839); Walker, 1. c. i, p. 2 8 (1867).

C. (Chrysocoris) patricius, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 11 (1868) ; En. Hem. iii, p. 20
(1873).

Oblong, one-third the size of S. nobilis: head, thorax and scu-
tellum ccerulean blue: head shining, with a dorsal line and a spot on
each side at the base, black: thorax with a dorsal line and four spots on
each side, black: scutellum large, with nine spots arranged 3, 3, 2, 1,
black : body flavescent, marginal bands ccerulean, and the margin of the
abdomen, red : feet black, femora rufous (Fabr.). Dark greenish-blue ;
pronotum with seven spots, scutellum with eight large black spots ;
femora rufous, apex and tibisv green; trochanters whitish ; abdomen
palely luteous, margin purplish-rufous, with oblong, transverse, greenish-
black spots (0. bengalensis, West.), a somewhat ovate median oblong
spot, with a longitudinal row of three rounded spots on both sides and a
rounded spot before apex black. Pectus shining, sparingly punc-
tured, brassy-green or cyaneous, six spots at the insertion of the
feet and anterior and posterior margins of meso- and meta-sternum,
yellow ; posterior margin of pro-sternum, yellow, lateral margin and
posterior angles, red: lobes of anterior margin very short, truncate,
externally angulate. Hemelytra black-cerulean, internally fuscescent

1887. | K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhyuchota. 173

their exterior margin yellow towards the base; membrane and
wings fuscous-black. Feet pubescent; coxe, trochanters and femora,
red, the femora cyaneous at apex, tibie with a small groove before
apex, cyaneous; tarsi-black: venter moderately convex with the
sides punctured, shining, yellow, margin above the black stigmata red or
luteous, a large quadrate spot occupying the middle of the three anterior
segments and another rounded on penultimate segment, black or fus-
cous; 2-5 segments with a brassy-green spot on each side: anal seg-
ment horizontal, enescent, thrice broader than length, deeply transverse-
ly impressed, the apex broadly emarginate.

@. The @ has the antenne more slender, shorter than head and
pronotum, two basal joints longer than the eyes, 3-5 joints with small
obsolete grooves: sides of pronotum more narrowly margined before
the eyes, margin not dilated in the middle: anal segment of venter
deep red (Schiddte). Long, 73-8 mill., humeral breadth, 43 mill.

The discoidal spot in the scutellum is broader than in C. elatus,
Stal, gradually amplified forwards before the middle: genitalia in ¢
more reflexed behind the middle than usual: subapical rounded spot
in the scutellum black.

Reported from Bengal, Tranquebar : the Indian museum has spe-
cimens from Calcutta and Ceylon.

S. Antenne a little longer than the head and pronotum together,
stoutish ; two basal joints much shorter than the head, scarcely as long
as the eyes, either black, or fuscous, or rufescent; second joint very
short, one-fourth the length of the basal; remaining joints black, pubes-
cent, almost of the same length, depressed, with a small groove on the
upperside; third thrice as long as the basal, fourth and fifth with a
deep groove on the lower side. Head deflexed much shorter than broad,
obtusely three-angled, anda little convex, smooth, shining, ccerulean
greenish or cyanean; clypeus obscurely cyaneous, at the extreme apex
ruddy ; eyes of moderate size, prominent; clypeus linear, obtusely pro-
minulous at apex; margins of the rostral groove, narrowly elevated :
rostrum reaching the base of the abdomen subcylindrical, piceous,
rufescent at base, second joint a little longer than the rest. Pro-
notum broader than long, convex at the base, as high as the scutel-
lum, more sparingly punctured, denser towards the somewhat ele-
vated humeri, anteriorly convexly sloped, smooth, within the apex
depressed and rather densely punctured ; entirely brassy-green or shin-
ing cyaneous, sometimes purpurascent at the sides, with three longitu-
dinal rows of black spots of which the median row is composed of two
large quadrate spots and the lateral rows of three smaller, rounded
spots: the humeral protuberances are also black and the lateral margins

174, K. T. Atkinson— Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

before the obtuse-angled, rounded humeri somewhat straight. Scutel-
lum ovate almost twice as long as the pronotum, almost one-half longer
than basal breadth, shorter than abdomen, moderately convex, basal
semilunar elevation rather high, flatly inclined at the sides, posteriorly
convexly sloped, somewhat depressed and truncate at the extreme apex ;
densely punctured, basal callus smooth, shining ccerulean or cyaneous,
sides and apex more or less purple.

87. CHRYSOCORIS PURPUREUS, Westwood.
Cimex stockerus, Fabricius, (nec Linn.) Syst. Ent. p. 696 (1775); Spec. Ins. ii,
p. 338 (1781); Mant. Ins. ii, p. 280 (1787); Ent. Syst. iv, p. 79 (1794); Wolff, Ic.
_ Cim. ii, p. 47, t. 5, f. 44 (1801): Stoll, Punaises, p. 17, f. 15, 16A. (1788).

Tetyra stockerus, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 131 (1803).

Scutellera stockerus, Latr., Gen. Ins. iii, p. 181 (1807).

Callidea stockerus, Burm., Handb. ii (i) p. 894 (1835): Westwood in Donovan’s
Ins. China, p. 48, t, 21, f. 1 (1842). :

Callidea purpurea, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 15 (1837): Germar,
Zeitschr.i (i) p. 115 (1839); Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 26 (1851); Vollenhoven,
Faune Ent. l’Arch. Indo-Néer. i, p. 31 (1863) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 26 (1867).

C. (Chrysocoris) purpureus, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 10, 11(1868) ; En. Hem. iii,
p. 21 (1873): Distant, A. M. N. H. (5 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Cerulean-purple: pronotum with 5 and scutellum with 6-7 spots,
antenne and tarsi, black; body beneath, luteous, margined purple and
with purple stigmata; anus golden ; femora luteous with apex and
tibie purple ; tarsi black (C. purpureus, Westw.) Stal notes that in his
examples the pronotum has only two spots anteriorly and the discoidal
spot on the seutellum is smallish and oblong. Vollenhoven gives the
colour above as deep blue, head slightly tumid, and transversely
wrinkled, eyes blackish, ocelli yellowish-brown ; antenne black, first
joint blue, orange at the base, second joint one-fourth the length of the
third in the 9 : basal half of the rostrum yellow, rest brown, reaching
second ventral segment: pronotum rather elevated, without a transverse
groove, strongly punctured, with five (2 and 3) black spots: scutellum
strongly punctured (except at the basal elevation which is almost
smooth,) with six black spots arranged in two rows and a median trian-
gular spot which is sometimes obsolete and is replaced by a green re-
flection : body beneath yellow or orange with the exception of the head
and the margins of the pectus which are violet, of the margin of the
abdomen which is purple and of a basal spot on the venter and small
stigmatal spots which are black: feet orange as far as two-thirds of the
femora, remainder violet, tarsi black. Body long. 15-17 mill.

Reported from Bengal, Bombay, Assam. Specimens from Assam
vary in colour from purplish to sanguineousabove. The Indian museum
has specimens from Utakamand, §. India and Bihar.

ih

1887. | E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 175

88. CHRyYsocoris viripIs, Atkinson.
Proc. A. S. B. p. 12, (1887).

Allied to C. purpureus, Westw. Above light brassy-green, densely
punctured : antenne black, basal joint brown, rostrum almost reaching
apex of second ventral segment : head and pronotum irrorated golden, the
latter with a smoother transverse band close to, and parallel with ante-
rior margin, and bearing slight traces of three blackish spots also traces
of three median distant spots, lateral margins slightly reflexed, posterior
angles slightly prominulous: scutellum with a steel-blue, smooth, semi-
circular, basal elevation; on each side, three smallish black spots, the
basal resting on the basal elevation, no discoidal or apical mark ; beneath
very sordid flavescent turning into ferruginous, sides of pectus brassy-
green, stigmata black, irrorated green, base of anal segment slightly
black, no black spot on basal segment: feet somewhat ferruginous, apex
of femora, and tibis externally, brassy-green. Differs from C. purpu-
reus in colour and markings above, in the less-obtuse apex of scutellum,
. and absence of purple border and black basal patch on the abdomen.
Long, 15-16 mill.

From the Panjab,

89. CHRYSOCORIS STOLLII, Wolff.

Cimew stollii, Wolff, Ic. Cim. ii, p. 48, t. 5, £. 45 (1801).
Scutellum stockerus, Guérin, Voy. La Coquille, Ins. ii, p. 159 and 161 (1830).
Callidea stollii, Germar, Zeitschr.i(i) p. 114 (1839); Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 26
(1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 27 (1867), excl. syn.
C. (Chrysocoris) stollii, Stal, Hem. Fabr.i, p. 11 (1868): En. Hem. iii, p. 21
(1878).
Antenne 5-jointed, black, first joint ferruginous: head, thorax and
scutellum coerulean: head very shining with a longitudinal streak and a
spot on both sides at the fuscous eyes, black; two small impressed lines
‘on the apex: rostrum 4-jointed, black, flavescent at the base: thorax
with six black spots, the anterior three small, the posterior three large,
oblong ; posterior angles rather prominulous, black: scutellum shining
greenish, margin and apex purple; with eight black spots, three on
each side, one in the middle oblong and large, and one at the apex
_ (sometimes obsolete) transverse: hemelytra black, shining ccerulean ;
exterior margin, rufous; interior margin broadly whitish: membrane
fuscescent, striated externally black: wings hyaline with a large black
spot on the apex: abdomen beneath flavescent, throughout very finely
impressly punctured, margin purple, on both sides with five black points
on some of which is a small line: pectus flavescent with three violaceous
spots on each side: anus with a black spot: feet unarmed; femora

176 EK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

flavescent, at the apex violaceous; tibie violaceous (Wolff). Long, 13;—
14 mill.

Reported from China, Cambodia, Siam, Tenasserim, Burma, Assam,
N. India.

Differs from C. purpureus, Westw. in its smaller, narrower body,
thorax more elevated posteriorly, scutellum deeply impressed at the
base and the number of the spots.

The discoidal spot on the scutellum is broadish and obovate.

90. CHRYSOCORIS PORPHYRICOLUS, Walker.

Callidea porphyricala, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 29 (1867).
Chrysocoris porphyricolus, Distant, J. A. S. Ben. xlviii (2), p. 37 (1879).

Gilded green, nearly fusiform, minutely punctured: head with a
blackish stripe which has on each side of it a blackish spot and is bor-
dered by two deep parallel furrows: pronotum with three longitudinally
elongated purple spots in front of which there are three transversely
elongated spots; a small cupreous spot on each angle near the hird
border; scutellum with three large purple spots on each side; a slight
transverse furrow which is curved to the anterior border on each side,
tip purple: abdomen beneath red with black dots along each side
of it and with a black subapical patch: legs red; femora towards their
tips and tibie purple; tarsi black. (Walker.) Body long, 15 mill.

Reported from India, the Indian museum has specimens from
Tenasserim and Sikkim: differs from preceding in the purplish tint
more or less throughout above and the larger size of the spots.

91. CHRYSOCORIS ORNATUS, Dallas.

Callidea ornata, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 27 (1851).
C. (Chrysocoris) ornatus, Stal En. Hem. iii, p. 21 (1873).

Above brilliant golden-green, becoming purplish after death(?), thick-
ly and rather strongly punctured: head impunctate with a black spot on
the vertex: pronotum with three small black spots close to the anterior
margin, three large ones touching the posterior margin and one in each
lateral angle: scutellum with the basal elevation smooth nearly im-
punctate, with a large triangular black patch on the disc, a large oblong
black spot on each side of this, at the middle of the scutellum, and two
smaller ones towards the apex: abdomen bright orange-red with the
margins crimson; the stigmata and a large spot at the base and the
apex, black: pectus violet, tinged with golden green: legs, rostrum and
antenne black, the legs tinged with violet (Dallas). Body long, 133-14
mill,

*

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 177

Reported from China, Assam. Not strongly distinct from C.
stollii, pectus without flavescent spots and lines, entire feet coerulean-
black.

92. CHRYSOCORIS PULCHELLUS, Dallas.
Callidea pulchella, Dallas, List Hem. i p. 25 (1851): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 26
(1867).
Chrysocoris pulchellus, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 22 (1873).

Closely allied to O. marginellus, Westw., but differs in its smaller
size, in having the antenne much broader and thicker and the second
joint smaller than in that species; the head, in addition to the median
longitudinal line has a small black spot on each side in front of the
ocelli; the black spots also occupy more of the surface than in C. mar-
ginellus and are arranged precisely in the same manner; namely, nine on
the pronotum of which three small ones on the anterior margin, one in
each lateral angle and four large oblong ones on the disc towards the
posterior margin ; eight on the scutellum, placed, two, close to the base,
forming an interrupted transverse band, a somewhat triangular one on
middle of disc, one on each side of this, two behind the middle and one
close to the apex: abdomen yellow with the margin crimson; stigmata,
black, with a row of golden green spots within them and within these,
another row of black ones; a black patch at the base and apex of abdo-
men: pectus violet and green: coxe yellow: femora red with their
tips, tibie, tarsi, rostrum and antenne black. (Dallas.) Body long,
125 mill.

Reported from India, Silhat.

93. CHRYSOCORIS ANDAMANENSIS, Atkinson.
Proc. A. S. B. p. 12, (1887):

Above deep blue turning into purplish or into green, or green,
shining, deeply and densely punctured : eyes and ocelli brown: antenne
black, basal joint flavescent (except the apex): rostrum flavescent,
reaching posterior coxe: thorax densely punctured, transversely sul-
cate before the middle, with a broad smooth band close to anterior
border, marked by three black, oblong, transverre spots, also between
the band and the base, three large, longitudinal, black spots of which
the median is triangular with its apex pointing forwards; margins
slightly reflexed, posterior angles slightly prominulous and blackish :
scutellum with a semicircular basal elevation, smooth, immaculate ; three

_ rounded spots on each side, of which the last is the largest, and a linear

longitudinal median basal streak, black; broad apical limbus bright

orange: body beneath flavescent, sides of pectus, stigmata, and trans-
23

378 EK. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

verse streaks therefrom on anterior margin of each segment on both
sides, apex of femora and tibie externally, steel-blue ; anal segment
violet-black. Hasily distinguished by its size and the broad, orange,
apical limbus of the scutellum. Long, 17; breadth of pronotum, 9
mill,

The Indian Museum possesses a long series from thc Andaman
Islands.

94, CHRYSOCORIS MARGINELLUS, Westwood.

Callidea marginella, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 15 (1837): Germar,
Zeitschr. i (i) p. 117 (1839) ; Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 25 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het.
i, p. 26 (1867).

Callidea celestis, Stal, Ofvers. K.V.-A. Forh. xii, p. 181 (1855); 1. c. xiii, e hs
(1856) ; Walker, 1. c. iii, p. 510 (1868).

C. (Chrysocoris) marginellus, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 12 (1868); En. Hem. iii, p.
21 (1873).

Size of O. purpureus, Westw.: coerulean-green, thorax with twelve
spots, two intermediate, oblong; scutellum with nine, and an oblong
anterior median stripe, black: thorax beneath golden-green; abdomen
palely luteous with golden-greenish submarginal spots, margin broadly
purple, stigmata black; femora rufous-fulvous, apex and tibie green
(Westw.?. Body long, 18-14 mill.

3. Obscurely virescent-chalybeous ; thorax with 11 black spots;
scutellum densely and deeply punctured, with a basal transverse eleva-
tion, with 8 black spots of which the median longitudinal: pectus moré
obscure, yellow at the coxee; abdomen yellow, each segment having on
both sides a chalybeous-violaceous spot, last segment violaceous-black :
femora cinnabar, apex and the tibise chalybeous: antenne and tarsi,
black. Head green chalybeous, subimpunctate, shining, tylus more ob-
scure: antenne black, second joint very minute: thorax sinuate ante-
viorly, sides oblique, broadly obliquely truncate on both sides posteriorly ,
scarcely so anteriorly, posteriorly (especially on the sides) more punctured,
shining, chalybeous; adorned with eleven spots of which 3 anteriorly,
2 basal close together subelongate and 3 on each side placed triangular-
ly, black: scutellum flatly-produced at the apex, densely and roughly
punctured especially on the sides, transversely elevated at the base and
there impunctate, green-chalybeous, adorned with seven rounded spots
(arranged 2, 2, 2,1) and an elongate median spot sometimes dilated at
the base, black: pectus obscurely chalybeous-violaceous, yellow at the
coxe: abdomen roughly punctured on both sides, yellow, adorned with
a black basal spot and obscurely chalybeous, transverse, lateral spots,
last segment, violaceous-black: femora cinnabar, with apex and the
tibiz chalybeous: tarsi black. Colour sometimes somewhat golden »

AT ee CP

1887, | E. T, Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 179

green, margin of abdomen, weakly violacescent (Stal). Long, 19;
broad, 9 mill.

Reported from Madras, Bengal, Bombay, Celebes, Borneo. The
Indian Museum has specimens from Chandbali (S. coast of Bengal).

95. CuHrysocoris EQUES, Fabricius.

Callidea eques, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 28 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i., p. 32
(1867).

Chrysocoris eques, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 11, 12 (1868).

C. (Chrysocoris) eques, Stal, Hn. Hem. iii, p. 21 (1873).

Var. a. Cimex eques, Fabr., Ent. Syst. iv, p. 79 (1794). Tranquebar.
_ Tetyra eques, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 181 (1803): Schiddte in Kréyer’s Tidsskr,
iv. p. 284 (1842). .

Scutellera eques, Guérin, Voy. La Coquille, Zool. ii, p. 158 (1830). Philippines.

Callidea eques, Burm., Handb. ii {i) p. 394 (1835); Germar, Zeitschr. i (i)
p. 112 (1839): Voll., Faune Ent. ’ Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 27 (1863).

Galostha eques, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 33 (18438).

Var. b. Callidea schwaneri, Vollenhoven, Faune l’Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 26, t. 2,
f, 7 (1863) ; Walker, 1. c. iii, p. 511 (1868). Borneo.

Var. c. Var. nicobarensis, Atkinson, Proc. A. 8. B. p. 13, 1887). Nicobars.

Callidea eques, Mayr, Reise Novara, p. 24 (1866). Nicobars.

Var. d. Callidea formosa, Westwood. Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 15 (1837) ; Germar,
Zeitschr. i (i) p. 113 (1839). China.

Callidea dorsalis, White in Gray’s Zool. Misc. p. 80 (1842).

_ Var.a. Body ovate, above green: a band on the head between the
antenne emitting a branch up to the base and two small spots, deep
black: dorsal line on thorax and four spots on each side (3,1) deep
black: scutellum large with eight deep black spots (2, 2, 2,1) and the
dorsal spot anteriorly bifid: abdomen black, margin green with black
points : feet ccerulean (CO. eques, Fabr.). Long, 11—13 mill.

_ Var. b. Head flat, smooth, green, with the ocular margin blue: the
eyes and ocelli brown: antenne black, very pubescent, the second joint
only one-fifth the length of the following: pronotum a little punctured,

except perhaps on the anterior angles; lateral margins much dilated,

green or blue, disc golden: scutellum very tumid without a basal eleva-
tion, much punctured, principally near the anterior angles, a little flat-
tened at the apex; colour green or golden red with a more or less large
black spot at the extremity: deep violet beneath, middle of the venter
black also the tarsi, or venter green with a large discal streak and small
marginal spots, black. This variety has the following subvarieties :—

1. Black spots on the lateral angles of the pronotum.

2. In addition, a black spot on the anterior margin of the pro-

notum,

180 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

3. a T-shaped spot or two small lines on the disc of the scutellum.

4. Seven rather indistinct spots on the pronotum, scutellum with a
small median line, two lateral and one anal spot.

5. Five rather distinct spots onthe pronotum and five larger on
the scutellum (C. schwanert, Voll.).

Long, 11-12 mill.: all from Borneo.

Var. c. nicobaricus, mihi, is represented in the Indian Museum by a
long series from the Nicobar islands.

Above shining green; eyes brown; antenne black: pronotum with
the lateral margins much dilated, semicircularly rounded, edged black ;
anteriorly with a transverse row of three black spots of which the
median is largest, triangular, having its apex pointing hindward ; three
black spots arranged in form of a triangle at the posterior angles, some-
times but two, and then with the basal margin black, on which rests a
median triangular spot with its apex turning forwards and meeting the
triangular median spot of the anterior row: scutellum without a basal
elevation, no discal spot, three black spots on each side andone at the
apex: body beneath entirely brassy-green, tinted violet or steel blue,
especially on the pectus, a small median transverse patch on the ante-
rior margin of each segment, also the stigmata and base of anal segment
violet black: feet of a steel blue, tibize internally sordid ferruginous.
Long, 11-12 mill.

Mayr describes what is probably the & of this variety, also from
the Nicobars, as having the pronotum anteriorly with three black marks
of which the median is largest, in the middle with two rounded black
marks and near the posterior margin three like them, of which the
median is connected by means of a black line with the median mark on
the anterior border: scutellum shining green, bluish on both sides
with three pair of blackish spots, of which the anterior and median pair
are rounded, the posterior transverse; the median \-shaped mark is
wanting and there is hardly any trace of the usual apical black spot:
the basal segments of the abdomen are for the most part violet and
somewhat green, the median are green with blackish-violet oblong
streaks, stigmata violet and base of anal segment black.

Var. d. Brassy-green, pronotum with the sides reflexed, broader
than the scutellum, spotted black and with two large, rounded dorsal
spots, sanguineous ; scutellum sanguineous; body beneath and feet
brassy, the former spotted black, the stigmata deep blue (C. formosa,
Westw.). Body long, 11-12 mill.

Reported from China.

Reported from Tranquebar, Malacca, Singapore, Banca, Sumatra,

Java, Borneo. The Indian Museum has a long series of variety ¢. from »
the Nicobar Islands.

|
7
|

1887. ] KE. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota, 181

96. CHRYSOCORIS DILATICOLLIS, Guérin.

Scutellera dilaticollis, Guérin, Voy. La Coquille, Zool. ii, (2) p. 160, 164 (1830),

Chrysocoris stollii, Hahn (nec Wolff), Wanz. Ins. ii, p. 39, t. 44, f. 186 (1834).

Callidea abdominalis, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 15 (1837); Germar,
Zeitschr. i (i) p. 112 (1839).

Galostha stockerus, Am. & Serv. Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 34 (1843).

Callidea dilaticollis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 28 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het.i, p. 28

(1867) : Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. l’ Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 28 (1863).
Callidea stockerus, Stal, Ofvers. K. V.-A. Forh. p. 389 (1855).
Chrysocoris stockerus, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 12 (1868).

Var. Callidea swmatrana, Vollenhoven, 1. c. p. 28, t. 2, f. 9 (1868).

C. (Chrysocoris) dilaticollis, 8tal, En. Hem. iii, p. 21 (1873).

Above shining blue, more or less greenish: head broad, triangular ;
eyes prominulous ; median longitudinal line, black: antenne black, in
Sat least as long as the body, in @ shorter, two last joints compara-
tively stout: thorax anteriorly as broad as the head, abruptly produced
posteriorly in asmall, fine, rounded dilatation on each side ; no depres-
sion in front, broader than the scutellum and almost twice broader than
long, surface smooth or very weakly punctured ; with two rows of three
round, rather large black spots, and the lateral dilatation, also, black in
the middle: scutellum with seven round, black spots and a large trian-
gular spot towards the base, very broad in front, a little emarginate on
the sides and having in some specimens a small green line in the mid-
dle ; the posterior spot is placed in the middle and near the tip: thorax
beneath of a beautiful shining green, with small yellow lines, on the
sutures: rostrum green, with the base orange: abdomen bright orange
yellow, with a quadrate patch at the base and the anus black-blue ;
sides green with two rows of four black dots on each side: femora bright
orange yellow with their tips, the tibie and tarsi blue-green ( Guérin).
Long, 10—12 ; broad at the base of the scutellum, 53—6 mill.

Reported from Java, Sumatra, Celebes, Timor, Malacca, Burma
India, China. The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Arakan in
which the abdomen beneath is almost entirely dark brassy-green, the
disc of the last three segments alone being orange yellow and in this
respect approaches Var. swmatrana, Voll.

Genus Lamprocoris, Stal.

Hem. Afric. i, p. 34 (1864); Mayr, Reise Novara, Hem. p. 18 (1866): Stal, En.
Hem. iii, p. 9, 22 (1873). Includes Sophela, Walker, Cat. Het.i, p. 17 (1867).

Stal distributes the species belonging to this genns amongst the
subgenera Lamprocoris aud Sophela, both of which are represented in
India. Third joint of the antenne longer than the second ; tibie cylin-
drical neither flat nor furrowed above: prostethium impressed behind

182 EK, T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

the eyes within the anterior margin which is amplified betweeu the eyes
and the sternum: anterior margin of the basal angles of the scutellum
subreflexed ; ventral segments unarmed in the apical angles; near the
sides, anteriorly and posteriorly, somewhat convex or tumescent.

97. LAMPROCORIS LATERALTS, Guérin.

Scutellera lateralis, Guérin, Voy. La Coquille, Zool. ii (2) p. 159, 160 (1830).

Callidea lateralis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 28 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 28
(1867): Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. l’ Arch. Indo-Néerl. p. 32, t. 2, f. 11 (1863).

L. (Lamprocoris) lateralis, Stal, Berlin Ent. Zeitschr. x, p. 155 (1866); En. Hem
iii, p. 22 (1873).

Head rounded at the tip, triangular, punctured, with two longitudi-
nal grooves in the middle; green, shining, the sides and the space be-
tween the grooves of a rich Prussian blue: antenne black: pronotum
and scutellum bluish-green, the former very tumid and very broad be-
hind, punctured, lateral posterior angles rather prominulous ; above and
anteriorly, with two oblong black spots, placed transversely and trend-
ing a little obliquely, towards the tip of a median and longitudinal line
of which the extremity reaches their level and whioh ends at the pos-
terior margin; on each side of this line are three long oblique spots
which do not reach the posterior margin: scutellum punctured, with
three transverse rows of black marks, of which five are on the anterior
"margin in the form of a crescent, four towards the middle, of which the
two median are much the largest, three behind these, almost united by a
weak brown mark, two more behind these last and often a very small
transverse spot at the posterior extremity : body beneath is of the same’
colour as above: abdomen with a broad red band, commencing close to:
the base and ending near the anus, it occupies half the first segment, the
2-4 and half the fifth segment, and has four black-brown stigmatic dots.
on the margin: feet concolorous: hemelytra brown ; wings transparent,
tip alone infuscate (Guérin). Long, 9—10; broad, 6—6}; mill.

Reported from Java, Sumatra, Assam. The Indian Museum
possesses a specimen from Sikkim.

98. LAMPROCORIS ROYLII, Westwood.

Callidea Roylii, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 16 (1837): Germar, Zeitschr.
i (i) p. 119 (1839): Dallas, List. Hem. i, p. 28 (1851); Walker Cat. Het. i, p. 28
(1867).

Var. Scutellera pulchella, Westwood, Royle, Ill. Bot. Him. p. liv, t. 10, f. 6
(1839).
Lamprocoris roylii, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 22 (1873): Distant, A. M. N. H. (5 s.)
iii, p. 44 (1879).

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 183

Rufous cupreous or golden, varied with black: pronotum with the
dorsal line, three spots on each side and the humeral angle, black :
scutellum with three basal and five apical spots, also a broad lunated
band in the middle, black, margined green: body beneath greenish ;
abdomen with black band and on the margins rufous spots (CO. Royliz,
Westw.). Body long, 95 mill.

Brassy or coerulean-black, shining: disc of pronotum anteriorly and
posterior margin tinted cupreous or brassy: scutellum, intensely green
and gold, a transverse basal band and another median oblique (inter-
rupted in the middle), and three rounded spots (posteriorly and ar-
ranged in form of a triangle), ccerulean black: scutellum covering
the abdomen : two basal joints of antenne short, equal, third almost
twice as long as the second, last longest of all. Long, 105; broad, 6}
mill, (S. pulchella, Westw.)

Reported frem the Himalaya, Bengal, Nepal, Assam. The Indian
Museum has specimens from Sikkim and Mussoorie.

99. Lamprocoris optusus, Westwood.

Callidea obtusa, Westw., Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 16 (1837); Germar, Zeitschr. i
(i), p. 119 (1839): Voll., Faune Ent. lArch, Ind. Néerl. i, p. 32 (1863): Walker,
Cat. Het. iii, p. 510 (1868).

L. (Lamprocoris) obtusus, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 22 (1878).

Golden-green : two anterior spots on the thorax, a dorsal line and
four other oblique, black: eleven black spots on the scutellum : body
beneath and the feet, black with a golden tinge; margin of abdomen,
fulvous, stigmata black (Westw.). Long, 95 mill.

Reported from Java.

100. LAmPROCcORIS SPINIGER, Dallas.
Callidea spinigera, Dallas, Trans. Ent. Soc. v, p. 186, t. 19, f. 1 (1849).
Sophela spinigera, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 18 (1867).
Lamprocoris (Sophela) spinigera, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 22 (1873): Distant, A. M.
‘N. H. (5 s.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Broadly ovate, rather convex; above brownish testaceous, with
violet or brassy reflections, very thickly and finely punctured: head
violet, shining, faintly punctured and transversely wrinkled, the tylus
darker in colour; eyes brown, ocelli red: pronotum faintly punctured
with the lateral angles produced into a small acute spine on each side,
the anterior and lateral margins and in the & the whole anterior por-
tion, cupreous or violet, shining: on each side, towards the anterior
margin, is a small transverse fovea, surrounded by a brassy green ring:
scutellum very finely punctured and faintly wrinkled transversely,

184. E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

especially at the base which is brassy, cupreous or violet : hemelytra
with the margins pale testaceous : margins of the abdomen projecting
slightly beyond the scutellum, bright red, crenated, each segment bear-
ing two small projections or tubercles; abdomen beneath, deep blue
violet, very smooth and finely punctured, with a strong brassy-greem
reflection ; a violet line on the margin of each segment, running be-
tween the red tubercles ; anal apparatus red, violet at base in & : pectus
shining violet, punctured; the antero-lateral margins and the promi-
nent lateral angles, reddish: legs shining violet, finely pilose; tarsi
black: antennze and rostrum black, the former covered with short
hairs. (Dallas.) &,long with membrane 15; 92,16 mill.

Reported from N. India, Assam, Sikkim (Ind. Mus.)}: varies some-
what in the colouring above and beneath : above often purplish nacreous,
beneath the disc of abdomen shining red.

Div. Teryraria, Stal.
En. Hem. iii, p. 3, 24 (1873).

Body beneath distinctly convex, generally above and below equally
convex or below more convex: thorax and scutellum at the base con-
jointly gradually longitudinally convex, very rarely slightly convexly
inclined, basal part of thorax somewhat produced backwards between the
basal angles of the scutellum or the thorax posteriorly gradually round-
ed between the lateral angles, basal angles very obtuse or rounded:
venter in both sexes with two stridulatory spots, longitudinally very
densely and very finely strigose, oblong or elongate, extended through
at least the fourth and fifth segments, sometimes difficult to distinguish,
intermediate incisures straight on the disc or biundated, abruptly and
obtusely subangulately curved at the sides of the disc: orifices very
distinct (Stal).

Genus Horna, Am. & Serv.

Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 41 (1843): Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 5, 39 (1851): Mayr,
Reise Novara Hem. p. 15 (1866): Walker, Cat. Het., i, p. 55 (1867): Stal, Hem.
Afric. i, p. 35, 53 (1864) ; En. Hem. iii, p. 24 (1873).

Body nude, above and beneath convex: head altogether convex,
with a continued median lobe, bucculze rather elevated before the mid-
dle: second and third joints of the antennz subequal in length, or the
second a little longer than the third: thorax sexangular, anterior lateral
margins, distinctly sinuated, lateral angles produced, more or less acu-
minate, posterior angles rounded, posterior margin straight: scutellum
as broad as the abdomen, rounded at the apex, not produced: proste-
thium dilated anteriorly, covering the base of the antenne: sterna

ee a eee ee

1887. ] BK. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 185

slightly sulcated: disc of venter with two sericeous-shining spots, last
segment sinuated at the apex: feet somewhat robust, tibize above flat

(Stal).

101. Horra curcuLionipEs, Herr. Schaff.

Pachycoris curculionides, Herr. Schaff., Wanz. Ins. iii, p. 106, t. 107, f. 331 (1835) ;
Germar, Zeitschr. i (i) p. 106 (1839).

Pachycoris punctulatus, Germar, 1. c. p. 105 (1839).

Hotea curculionides, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 39 (1851); Walker, Cat. Hem. i p. 56
(1867) ; Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. l’Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 37 (1863).

Hotea (Tylonca) curculionides, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 25 (1873) ; Distant, J. A. S.
B. xlviii (2) p. 37 (1879); A. M. N. H. (5 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Ochraceous, deeply and thickly punctured brown or black, except
on the vertex and anterior margins of the pronotum where the colour is
more yellow: head beneath black, except the borders of the rostral
groove: eyes and ocelli greyish yellow, the latter very small: two first
joints of the antenne yellow, the two next brownish and the last, brown :
the feet are even more punctured than the body: the tibiz reddish.
This species varies much in the depth of its brown colour and the punc'
tures more or less strong and black; Germar’s H. punctulata is of a
very deep brown; some specimens have three longitudinal lines on the
head and thorax less punctured and Ighter, and a zigzag transverse
band on the scutellum, from the most advanced portion of which proceed
three other light lines which reach the margins (Voll.). Long, 8—9 mill.

Schaffer’s figure shows the upper surface deep brown without spots.
The Calcutta form has four longitudinal patches of a deeper colour
proceeding from the anterior margin of the pronotum, the two median
are continued obliquely inward almost to the posterior margin where
they meet. The scutellum has on each side an oblique small oblong
spot near the base on each side, and a large subquadrate patch on each
side beyond the middle, and two at the apex, all of a darker colour.
Specimens from Tavoy and Assam have the same spots more or less
distinct.

Reported from Amboina, Java, Sunda, Celebes, Timor, Ternate,
Sumatra, Assam. The Indian Museum possesses specimens from Tavoy,
Calcutta and Sikkim.

102. Horea nicrorura, Walker.
Hotea nigrorufa, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 57 (1867).
Red, short-elliptical, thickly black-punctured, and with numerous
small irregular black marks: head with five irregular red lines, and

with two longitudinal furrows: antenne black; first joint red ; fourth
24,

186 E. T. Atkinson— Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

red at the tip: thorax with a red longitudinal line; sides luteous ;
angles acute: scutellum with an apical patch, which is not varied with
black: abdomen luteous along each side: legs red, black speckled ;
tarsi black: hemelytra brown ; corium red, with black punctures: wings
cinereous. Var.a. body red, with the exception of the punctures.
Var. b. like var.a: punctures red, here and there black. (Walker).
Body long, 10$ mill.
Reported from India.

103. Horsa(?) pirrusa, Walker.
Hotea (?) diffusa, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 57 (1867).

Testaceous, elliptical very minutely punctured: head slightly ros-
triform, with two black longitudinal lines, which in the forepart. are
accompanied by two slight furrows: thorax somewhat rounded along
the hind border, angular on each side, contracted in front ; two slight
and interrupted black lines; a transverse lanceolate ferruginous-border-
ed mark on each side near the fore border: scutellum with a short
longitudinal streak on each side, composed of minute black speckles.
(Walker). Body long, 93 mill.

Reported from India.

Div. OpoNTOTARSARIA, Stal.
En. Hem. iii, p. 4, 26 (1873).

Head longer than broad or equally long and broad : anterior lateral
margins of thorax anteriorly not, or but very slightly, rounded : pro-
pleura not, or but slightly, impressed near the lateral margins : orifices
not distinguishable : second joint of antenne straight.

Genus ALPHOcORIS, Germar.

Zeitschr. i, p. 58 (1837): Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 5 (1851): Stal, Hem. Afric. i,
p. 35, 60 (1844): Mayr, Reise Novara Hem, p. 13 (1866): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 59

(1867).

Body stout, especially beneath convex, narrowly oval or oblong,
greyish-tomentose : head stout, not margined, very convex, bucculz
rather elevated : antenne short, somewhat longer than the head: thorax
sexangular, posterior angles obtusely rounded, lateral angles not promi-
nent, obtuse : scutellum a little produced at the apex, the produced part
sinuate or somewhat sinuate at the apex: prostethium somewhat dilated
at the apex: sterna deeply sulcate: ventral incisures curved (Stal),

ee

1887. | H. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 187

104. ALPHOCORIS LIXOIDES, Germar.

Alphocoris livoides, Germar, Zeitschr. i, p. 59, t. i, f. 3 (1839): Am. & Serv.,
Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 44 (1843): Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 41 (1851): Stal, Hem.
Afric. i, p. 60. (1864): En. Hem. iii, p. 26 (1873): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 59 (1867).

3, 2. Oblong, narrow, yellow-testaceous, beneath with feet (ex-
cept ventral limbus) blackish: above, rather densely and distinctly
punctulate, with four obsolete fuscous streaks; apex of scutellum sub-
truncate or slightly sinuate : disc of venter sometimes yellow-testaceous
and adorned with two black streaks (Stal). Long, 95—10; broad,
3—33 mill.

Reported from North India, Senegal.

Div. EuRYGASTRARIA, Stal.

En. Hem. a p. 4, 29, (1873): Eurygastride, pt., Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 43
(1851).

Differs from Odontotarsaria, in having the orifices distinct: se-
cond joint of antenne somewhat curved.

Genus Euryeaster, Laporte.
Subg. id. Ess. Hém. p. 69 (1832): Eurygaster, Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 61 (1864) ;
Eu. Hem. i, p. 18 (1870); iii, p. 29, 30 (1873). Includes, according to Stal ;—
Bellocoris, pt., Hahn, Wanz. Ins. ii, p. 42 (1834) :—Eurygaster, Spin., Hss. p. 365
(1837); Mulsant & Rey, Pun. Scut. p. 59 1865) :—Tetyra, Germar, Zeitschr, i, (i) p.
72 (1839): Herr. Schiff. Wanz. Ins. v, p. 48 (1839) :—Eurygaster, subg. Platypleurus,
Mulsant & Rey, Pun. Scut. p. 59 (1865).

Body oval or ovate, a little convex above and beneath: head flat or
very slightly convex; antennez short, slender: thorax sexangular :
scutellum with the sides parallel, much narrower than the abdomen,
leaving the entire costal part of the hemelytra free : abdomen with the
sides flattened broader than the thorax: orifices extended in a rather
long furrow, abruptly abbreviated ; sides of mesosternal furrow neither
carinate nor rugose; tibie furrowed above. In the section to which
E. maurus, Linn. belongs, the lateral margins of the pronotum are
straight or somewhat so; the scutellum is marked on both sides at the
base near the basal angles with an oblong callous spot and the smooth
longitudinal line is not callous (Platypleurus, M. & R.).

105. EURYGASTER MAURUS, Linneus.

BE. (Platyplewrus) maurus, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 30 (1873).
Tetyra maura, Fallen, Hem. Suec. Cim., p. 12 (1828): Burm., Handb. Ent. ii, p.
390 (1835): Germar, Zeitschr. i, p. 73 (1839); Rambur, Fauna Andal. ii, p. 100

(1841).

188 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

Eurygaster maurus, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 53 (1848) ; Dallas,
List Hem. i, p. 48 (1851): Fieber, Eur. Hem. p. 370 (1861): Mulsant & Rey, Pun.
France, p. 59 (1865): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.66 (1867): Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 12
(1868): Douglas & Scott, Brit. Hem. i, p. 65 t. 2, f. 5 (1865): Saunders, Trans.

Ent. Soc. p. 119 (1875): T. Sahlb., K. S. V.-A. Handl. xvi, 4, p. 14 (1878): Distant,
Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 415 (1883).

Var. a.—Cimex maurus, Linn,, Fauna Suec., p. 246 (1761): Fabr., Syst. Ent., p.
99 (1775) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 87 (1794).

Tetyra maura, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng., p. 136 (1803).

Thyreocoris austriacus, Schranck, Fauna Boioc. ii, p. 68 (1801).

Odontotarsus maurus, Spin., Ess. Hém. p. 363 (1837).

Eurygaster cognatus, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 11 (1837).

Var. b.—Tetyra picta, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 136 (1803).

Odontotarsus pictus, Spin., Ess. Hém. p. 363 (1837).

Eurygaster orientalis, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 11 (1837).

This species varies much in size and colour from brownish tawny
without markings to luteous with stripes and patches of brown.

Var. a.—Greyish or fuscous, scutellum at the base with two white
spots (Linn.). Rufous-brunneous, punctured black: thorax with two
diverging streaks, somewhat fuscous: scutellum with two minute basal,
whitish spots, and an elevated median line, paler: beneath obscurely
luteous, with a black spot before the anus (H. cognatus, Westw.).
Long, 10§ mill.

Var. b.—Head and thorax obscure, a little irrorated with black:
scutellum large, obscure; with two callous spots asin 7. maura, two
spots in the middle and a dorsal line bifurcated posteriorly, yellow :
connexivum spotted fuscous on both sides (7. picta, Fabr.). Fuscous-
rufescent, punctured black, variegated paler; a slender line from the
head to the apex of the scutellum and two other oblique lines united to
it (having the appearance of a triangular scutellum) and a pair of
larger spots at the sides of the scutellum: beneath rufescent, punctured
black, especially in the middle of the abdomen (ZL. orientalis, Westw.).
Long, 9-10 mill.

Reported from Europe, Africa, India, Japan.

Div. OponToscELARIA, Stal.
En. Hem. iii, p. 4, 30 (1873).

Body setose or pilose: head transverse, somewhat semiorbicular,
thorax anteriorly broader than the head, anterior lateral margins dis-
tinctly rounded : the scutellum very broad: propleura deeply impress-
ed or excavated towards the lateral margins, the part lying beyond the

depression a little deflexed: venter without stridulatory strigose spots ;
orifices not distinguishable (Sta/).

1887. ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 189

Genus Arctocoris, Germar.

Pt., Zeitschr.i (i), p. 46 (1839): Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 31 (1873). Includes,
Trochrotus, Am. & Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém., p. 39 (1843); Fieber, Eur. Hem.
p. 86, 377 (1861) ; Mayr, Reise Nov. Hem. p. 18 (1866).

Body thickly clothed with long hairs: lateral margins of thorax
incised or sinuated behind the middle, between the sinus a deep trans-
verse impression,

106. ARcTocoris INcISus, Stal.
Arctocoris incisus, Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 31 (1873).

3. Narrowly subobovate, punctulate, black, turning above into
ferruginous, greyish-pilose and subtomentose: thorax before the mid-
dle slightly roundly-narrowed, transversely impressed very distinctly
in the middle, lateral margins very deeply incised in the middle, anterior
angles somewhat prominent forwards. The 3& has on the ventral disc
of 4th, 5th segments on both sides, a deep black opaque, subimpressed,
oval spot. Allied to A. lanatus, Pallas, but differs in being smaller,
narrower, subobovate, narrowed hindwards, thorax only narrowed at
the apex, lateral margins very deeply incised, not obtusely sinuated,
and with the buccule more elevated (Stal) Long 5, breadth of pronotum,
3 mill.

Reported from Bengal.

Species of uncertain position.
107. CALLIDEA FASCIALIS, White.

Callidea fascialis, White, Trans. Ent. Soc. iii, p. 86 (1842); Dallas, List Hem,
i, p. 28 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 27 (1867) ; Stal, En. Hem. iii, p. 31 (1873).

Head short, in front rather blunt, with a large pinkish-violet
spot, on the side of the two impressed preocular lines, the space between
these, being green: first joint of the antennz testaceous at base, green
at the tip: rostrum reaching the posterior coxe, black at the tip, yel-
low at the base: thorax with seven black spots; two distant anterior
ones in front connected by a narrow slightly curved black line: five
posterior ones, the median, largest, and square, apparently connected
together at the base by an obscure band, which has a slight pinkish
hue on the posterior blunt angle of the thorax: legs yellow, femora at
tip, bluish green, tibiz rufescent, ciliated: scutellum convex, posterior-
ly bent down, blunt at apex, with a semicircular impression at the base,
deepest on the dorsum; at the base there is a narrow, transverse black
band, sinuated on the posterior margin ; a little before the middle there
is another transverse black band, broadest in the middle beyond which

190 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

are three spots, one of them subapical: abdomen beneath, yellow, sides
tinged with pink, each segment being marked laterally with a black
spot, the inner sides of which are tinged with green. (White). Body
long, 11 mill.

Reported from India, Assam.

108. CALLIDEA HISTEROIDES, Walker.
Callidea histeroides, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 28 (1867).

Blackish purple, short-elliptical, largely punctured: head with
two longitudinal furrows which diverge between the eyes, space between
the furrows somewhat ridged in front: antenne black; second joint
rather more than half the length of the first: thorax with two green
stripes, very thinly punctured ; punctures mostly along the fore border
and along a transverse antemedial furrow; a fusiform, transverse,
slightly depressed, ringlet on each side in front of the furrow : scutel-
lum with a green band bordering a transverse furrow which is curved
on each side to the fore border: abdomen beneath green, with a
purplish band along the fore border of each segment and with a deeply
dentate red stripe along each side: legs blackish green; tarsi black.
(Walker). Long, 8—9 mill.

Reported from Cachar (Assam).

109. Cattipga GippuLa, Walker.
Callidea gibbula, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 29 (1867).

Purplish black, elliptical, thinly and roughly punctured : head with
two longitudinal furrows, which diverge on the vertex: thorax with a
very slight transverse furrow, which is curved on each side to the base :
abdomen beneath, greenish at the tip, and with two deeply dentate
lateral stripes, which do not extend to the base (Walker). Long, 8—9
mill.

Reported from the Panjab.

110. Catuipra scripta, Walker.
Callidea scripta, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 29 (1867).

Purple, short-elliptical, largely punctured: head with two longi-
tudinal furrows, which diverge towards the face and more towards the
hind border: antenne black; second joint nearly as long as the first:
thorax with two golden green stripes, which are much abbreviated in
front, and thence emit two oblique branches towards the hind angles ;
a fusiform transverse cupreous ringlet on each side in front : scutellum
with a transverse furrow which is curved on each side to the fore

1887. ] EH. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 191

border; four cupreous green-bordered bands: second, third and fourth
bands connected on each side ; second connected in the middle with the
third, forked on each side, fourth apical: pectus blue: abdomen beneath
blue; a purple band on the fore border of each segment ; a dentate
red stripe on each side: legs green; tarsi black (Walker). Long, 9—10
mill.

Reported from Cachar (Assam), N. India.

111. Caniipea contraRiA, Walker.
Callidea contraria, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 30 (1867).

Gilded green, short, stout, nearly elliptical, rather thinly and
roughly punctured: head purple in front with two longitudinal fur-
rows which diverge on the vertex: antenne black; first joint purple ;
second more than half the length of the first: thorax with seven short
purple stripes, in front of which there is a transverse purple spot on
each side: scutellum with three purple spots near the base, and with
three purple bands of which the second is interrupted ; three hinder
transverse spots, one on each side and one subapical: pectus purple:
abdomen red; under side with a row of black dots along each side
with a purple disc: legs bluish green; tarsi black (Walker). Long,
10—11 mill.

Reported from N. India.

112. Fira arprens, Walker.
Fitha ardens, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 45 (1867).

Gilded green, elliptical, largely punctured: head with two longi-
tudinal furrows, which diverge between the eyes and converge slightly
on the hind border; vertex purple between the furrows: antennez
4-jointed (?), black ; first joint reddish at the base: thorax and scutellum
mostly brilliant reddish cupreous; the former with six purple spots ;
the latter with eight purple spots; three on each side; seventh elon-
gated, on the disc near the base ; eighth sub-apical : pectus with a trans-
verse yellow streak on each side: abdomen beneath with a bright pur-
ple stripe along each side, and with a yellow patch on the disc: legs
red; tibie and tips of femora blackish green; tarsi black: hemelytra
black ; space towards the base, except the costa, cinereous, nearly
hyaline: wings cinereous, nearly hyaline (Walker). Long, 83 mill.

Reported from India.

113. Camntya varioLosa, Walker.
Cenina variolosa, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 82 (1867).

Aeneous: head with a pale yellow spot on each side: antenne

192 EK. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

yellowish, piceous towards the tips: thorax mostly yellowish, with a
pale yellow border ; an eneous band in front, containing two quadrate
whitish spots, behind which there is an seneous spot ; punctures eneous :
scutellum yellowish, excepting the punctures and a patch on the disc,
and three whitish spots on the fore border: legs whitish ; femora at the
base and coxe black : corium yellowish, with eneous punctures (Walker.).
Body, long, 2 mill.
Reported from Burma.

Subfam. Prentratomina, Stal.
Hem. Afric. i, p. 32, 76 (1864); Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. (3), p. 31 (1872); En.
Hem. v, p. 28 (1876).

(a). The primary and subtended veins of the hemelytra generally
close to each other and diverging at the apex, parallel or somewhat so :
hamus generally absent: scutellum varying in size, generally furnished
with frena: entire basal margin of thorax touching base of the scutel-
lum : rostral furrow anteriorly not or but very slightly narrowed.

(>). Rostrum extended behind the first pair of coxe, of variable
length, 1-2 joints elongate, the second entirely or to the greatest part
extended behind the buccule.

(c). Scutellum generally reaching or extending beyond the middle
of the abdomen, rarely short, and if so, narrow at the apex and only
slightly or very slightly produced behind the frena: membrane mode-
rate or small.

(d). Tarsi 3-jointed: tibiz generally furrowed above.

(e). Rostrum slender, more or less remote from the labrum which
is inserted below the apex of the tylus; rostral furrow anteriorly some-
times coarctate: buccule usually higher anteriorly, parallel, not united
posteriorly.

The divisons of this large sub-family are still only tentative
and cannot be satisfactorily arranged by any one working only in
India away from the types. I only give when possible what may be
considered a probable arrangement after consulting the very consider-
able literature on the subject.

Diy. Popoparia, Stal.
En. Hem. vy, p. 29 (1876).

Anterior lateral margins of the thorax produced in a tooth or spine
before the lateral angles which on this account appear as if sinuate or
emarginate: entire antenniferous tubercles or a great part prominulous
beyond the lateral margins of the head, generally acutely produced
outwards at the apex: first joint of the rostrum not extended behind the

1887, ] E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 193

buccule which are everywhere equally high or posteriorly higher:
eyes strongly prominulous or slightly stylate: frena sometimes occu-
pying one-third the length of the scutellum which generally reaches the
end of the abdomen,

Genus ScorrnopHara, Stal.

Ofvers. K. V.-A. Forh. p. 502 (1867): En. Hem. vy, p. 33 (1876) ; Horvath, Wien
Ent. Zeit. ii, p. 165 (1883).

Body ovate: head somewhat convex, more or less sinuate before
the eyes; juga flattened, entirely distant, not narrowed before the
anteocular sinus, not converging before the somewhat elevated tylus,
rounded at the apex or roundly truncated: antenniferous tubercles
placed below the lateral margins of the head and entirely prominulous
beyond those margins, acutely produced outwards at the apex ; buccule
continued through, low, everywhere equally high: antennz somewhat
short, basal joint entirely visible from above, second joint distinctly shorter
than the third, fifth joint scarcely or only a little stouter than the fourth
elongate fusiform: rostrum reaching the last pair of coxe: thorax
transverse, furnished with a gular ring prominulous on both sides in a
more or less acute tooth, and armed before the humeral angles with au
acute tooth: scutellum large, longer than the corium, reaching the
apex of the abdomen, slightly narrowed behind the base, the basal
part with frena: prostethium furrowed, the furrow with elevated
margins: second genital segment in & entirely hidden, the third seg-
ment only yisible. (Horvath.)

114. ScormvopHara ArFrFinis, Haglund.

Scotinophara affinis, Haglund, Stettin Ent. Zeit. xxix, p. 153 (1868); Stal, Eu.
Hem. vy, p. 33 (1876).

Q@. Fuscous-lurid, beneath blackish, densely and strongly punc-
tured ; rostrum, tibis (base excepted) and tarsi, rufescent ; pronotum
anteriorly with a very minute annulated tooth, sides subsinuate, lateral
angles very slightly emarginate: scutellum distinctly truncate at the
apex, extended to the apex of the abdomen. Closely allied to S. lurida
Burm. from which it scarcely differs except in the anterior tooth on the
pronotum being smaller, sides of thorax more distinctly sinuate, and
thorax somewhat more impressed. Rostrum reaching the last pair of
coxe: membrane almost hyaline, margin fuscescent: second joint of
antenne rufescent (Haglund). Long, 9; broad scarcely 5 mill,

Reported from Rangoon,

25

194 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

115. ScorTrnopHaRA LURIDA, Burmeister.
Tetyra lurida, Burm., Noy. Act. Ac. Cees. Leop. Car. Nat. Cur. xvi, Suppt. (i) p.
288 (1834).
Podops luridus, Germar, Zeitschr.i(i) p. 64 (1839); Dallas, List. Hem. i, p.
52 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 72 (1867).
Scotinophara lurida, Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 33 (1876); Scott, A. M. N. H. (4s.)
xiv, p. 289 (1874) ; (5 s.) Distant, iii, p. 44 (1879) ; Trans. Ent. Soc. p. 415 (1883).

Fuscous: head small; eyes free, almost stylate ; clypeus produced
forwards, with a distinct groove on each side, in whichthe antenne lie :
antennez with 1-2 joints of equal length, half as long as the third, 3-5
joints of equal length, the last incrassate : pronotum narrowed forwards,
on each side on the anterior angle a small acute spine, a similar one on
each humeral angle, a weak, transverse furrow beyond the middle:
scutellum a little shorter than the abdomen: rostrum, tibiw, and feet
reddish. (Burm.) Long, 103; broad, 6; mill.

Reported from Canton, Japan, Assam.

116. ScoTINOPHARA BISPINOSA, Fabricius.

Cimex bispinosus, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppt. p. 530 (1798).

Tetyra bispinosa, pt. Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 1388 (1803).

Scotinophara bispinosa, Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 21 (1868); En. Hem. vy, p. 33
(1876).

2. Blackish; thorax behind the middle, scutellum, hemelytra and
broad ventral limbus fuscous-flavescent, punctured ferruginous-black :
antenne, rostrum, tibie and tarsi greyish flavescent ; last joint of an-
tenne, fuscous: spine of antcrior and lateral angles of the thorax large,
black, pallescent at the apex. Readily distinguished by the great spines
of the thorax, almost equally long, pallescent at the apex and the
anterior lateral margins of the thorax being straight. Head with the
juga and tylus equally long, anteocular spine moderate: third joint of
antenne scarcely twice longer than the second: thorax slightly trans-
versely impressed between the spines of the lateral angles; anterior
angles with an acute spine turning outwards and forwards, subequal in
length to the first joint of the antenne; lateral angles with a spine
turning outwards scarcely shorter than the spines of the anterior angles ;
anterior margin depressed, anterior lateral margins straight, entire,
unarmed, somewhat callous behind the middle: scutellum reaching
apex of abdomen, about 4th basal part somewhat narrowed hindwards,
thence lateral margins subparallel, posteriorly rounded, apex obtuse,
subsinuate: tubercle of apical angles of ventral segments distinct,
pallid (Stal). Long, 8; breadth of pronotum, 43 mill.

Reported from Tranquebar.

1887. | KE. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 195

117. ScorrvopHara coarcrata, Fabricius.

Cimes courctatus, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppt., p. 530 (1798).

Tetyra bispinosa, pt. Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 138 (1803).

£ Podops bispinosus, Herr. Schiff., Wanz. Ins. v, p. 45, t. 158, f. 496 (1839)
Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 53 (1851).

Scotinophara coarctata, Stal, Hem. Fabr., i, p. 21 (1868); En. Hem. v, p. 33
(1876).

Body oblong, entirely obscure: very slightly shining; head and
anterior part of thorax, black: thorax on each side with two small teeth,
one towards the apex, the other towards the base: scutellum coarctate
on both sides in the middle (Fabr.).

3S Differs from S. bispinosa, Fabr. in having the thorax anteriorly
and the head more inclined, thorax scarcely transversely impressed in
the middle, teeth of its anterior and lateral angles minute, equal in size ;
anterior lateral margins straight, slightly rounded anteriorly (Stal).
Long, 7; broad, 4 mill.

Reported from Tranquebar, Ceylon.

118. ScorinopHaRA TARSALIS, Vollenhoven.

Podops tarsalis, Voll, Faune Ent. Arch. Indo-Néer. p. 42, t. 3, f. 8 (1863) ;
Walker, Cat. Het. iii, p. 520 (1868).

_ Scotinophara tarsalis, Stal, Hn. Hem. v, p. 33 (1876); Distant, A. M.N. H.
(5 s.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Body above rather deep brown, covered all over with an immense
number of small black dots which have the effect of making it appear al-
most black: head and pronotum covered with a weak yellowish pubes-
cence: tylus a little more tumid than the juga of which the further angles
are weakly prolonged : the spine on the sides of the head rather robust :
first joint of antenne of an obscure brown, the rest of a light brown:
eyes blackish ; ocelli rather small: pronotum emarginate anteriorly and
with two strong, broad spines at the anterior augles; lateral borders
weakly widened inthe middle, and the lateral angles end in an acute
point followed by a small notch: scutellum rather flat, a little narrowed
before the middle and oval at the apex, usually with two glossy yellow
spots near the basal angles: body beneath, black, punctured, with a
spare yellow pubescence: rostrum light brown: femora and four first
tibize black, posterior with half of the tibie light brown which is the
colour of all the tarsi: angles of ventral segments and margins are
nodulose (Voll.). Long, 6 mill.

Reported from Java, Borneo, Assam. In Assam usually with legs
luteous punctured with black.

196 i. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

119. ScormnopHAaRA oBscuRA, Dallas.

Podops obscurus, Dallas List Hem. i, p. 52 (1851); Voll., Faune Ent. Arch.
Indo-Néer. p. 41, t. 3, f. 6 (1863) ; Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 72 (1867).

Scotinophara obscura, Stal, En, Hem. v. p. 34 (1876) ; Distant, A. M. N. H. (5 s.)
iii, p. 44 (1879).

Above brown, obscure, thickly and rather finely punctured; head
rather small, black, narrowed in front; juga longer than the tylus, but
not meeting infront of it, a small spine on each side in front of the
eyes: thorax blackish in front, with a short spine at each anterior
angle, the antero-lateral margins nearly straight, and the lateral angles
emarginate: scutellum reaching the apex of the abdomen, distinctly
truncated at the apex, constricted a little before the middle: body be-
neath pitchy black, very thickly and finely punctured and sparingly
clothed with short golden hairs: femora black with an indistinct pale
band near the apex: tibize and tarsi pale brown: rostrum and antenne
pitchy (Dallas). Long, 7—8 mill.

Reported from Assam, Tenasserim, Borneo, Java.

120. ScoTinoPHARA NIGRA, Dallas.
Podops niger, Dallas, List. Hem. i, p. 53 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 72
(1867).
Scotinophara nigra, Stal, En, Hem. v, p. 34 (1876).

Pitchy black, somewhat obscure, thickly punctured, sprinkled with
yellowish hairs: head rather long, with a strong spine before each eye ;
tylus as long as the juga, elevated into a tubercle about the middle :
thorax gibbous in front, with a faint furrow across the middle; the
antero-lateral margins reflexed, rounded; a long spine directed for-
wards, on each side at the anterior margin, and a small one at each
lateral angle; scutellum as long as the abdomen, contracted before the
middle, somewhat truncated at the apex, with a small pit in each basal
angle: outer margin of the hemelytra and the edge of the abdomen
pitchy red: legs concolorous; tarsi ferruginous: rostrum pitchy red,
with the basal joint black: antenne pitchy (Dallas). Long, 73-8
mill.

Reported from India P

121. ScorinoPHARA SPINIFERA, Westwood.

Podops spinifera, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p, 16 (1837); Stal, En. Hem,
y, p. 125 (1876).

Black, coarsely punctured ; head anteriorly attenuated, subtruncate
at the apex; a porrect spine on both sides before the eyes: pronotum
scabrous anteriorly, abruptly elevated, sides acutely serrate and furnish-

1887. | B. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 197

ed with a lateral tooth; posterior angles of the abdominal segments,
acute (Westw.). Long, 83 mill.
Reported from Bengal.

122. ScormopuHara timosa, Walker.
Podops limosus, Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 72 (1867).

Tawny, punctured, piceous beneath: head carinated: pronotum
with an obliquely porrect spine on each side in front; hind angles
forming two acute teeth: scutellum extending almost to the tip of the
abdomen, much narrower than the breadth of the abdomen which is
tawny along each side, beneath: femora piceous (Walker). Long, 6-7
mill.

Reported from N. India: the colour distinguishes it from S. nigra,
Dallas, with which it agrees in structure, |

Genus Stortuecoris, Horvath.
Wien. Ent. Zeit. ii, p. 296 (1883).

Body briefly oval: head transverse, slightly convex, gradually
dilated forwards before the anteocular sinus: juga flattened, entirely
distant, not converging before the somewhat elevated tylus: antenni-
ferous tubercles produced outward in a conical spine placed in the same
plane with the lateral margins of the head ; buccule continued through,
low, everywhere equally high: antennz shortish, basal joint altogether
visible from above, stoutish, second joint much shorter than the third,
fourth joint somewhat shorter than the third, fifth joint a little stouter
than the fourth, elongate-fusiform: thorax transverse, anterior lateral
margins acute, irregularly serrated, furnished with a process behind the
anterior angle, produced in an acutish tooth before the humeral angles,
disc transversely impressed in the middle, anterior lobe somewhat
rugose, furmished on each side with a transverse furrow behind the
anterior margin which gradually disappears towards the anterior angles
and there approaches the anterior margin: scutellum large, longer than
the corium, reaching the apex of the abdomen (<) or nearly reaching
it (@), slightly narrowed behind the base, thence slightly amplified ;
frena short: prostethium furrowed, furrow with moderately elevated
margins: feet moderate; tibie furrowed: second genital segment in &
entirely hidden, only the third genital segment visible (Horv.). Differs
from Scotinophara, Stal, in the shorter rostrum and the gular ring with-
out a tooth on each side: from Amauropepla, Stal, in the head not being
narrowed forwards before the anteocular sinus, in the tylus being
somewhat elevated, and in the rostrum being longer,

198 E. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

123. SroRTHECORIS NIGRICEPS, Horvath.
Storthecoris nigriceps, Horv., Wien. Ent. Zeit. ii, p. 297 (1883).

3, Q. Fuscous-testaceous, rather densely punctured fuscous : head,
pectus and a very large discal patch on venter, black: juga extending
distinctly beyond the tylus, gradually a little dilated before the middle,
obliquely roundly truncated at the apex: spine of the antenniferous
tubercles, robust, straight, obliquely turning out wards and subacute at
the tip: the anterior lateral margins of the thorax behind the triangu-
lar gular process, very slightly rounded and dilated, the obsolete intra-
marginal furrow parallel with the margins: the continued median line
more or less obsolete on the thorax and three callous basal spots on the
scutellum, pallid: scutellum truncated at the apex (<), or rounded @ :
membrane whitish-hyaline: lateral borders of metastethium and venter
broadly yellow-testaceous, punctured black; ventral spiracula and
small basal spots on the connexivum, black; rostrum, antenne and
feet, yellow-testaceous, variegated with black, sparingly greyish-pilose :
third joint of the antenne more than thrice longer than the second
(Horv.). Long, 7; broad, 4 mill.

Reported from the Himalaya.

Genus AMAUROPEPLA, Stal.
Ofvers. K. V.-A. Férh. p. 502 (1867); En. Hem. v, p. 34 (1876).

Differs from Scotinophara in having the head gradually narrowed
forwards before the anteocular sinus: the anterior lateral margins of the
thorax rounded and denticulate: head somewhat flat: tylus not
elevated.

124. AMAUROPEPLA DENTICULATA, Haglund.

Amauropepla denticulata, Haglund, Stettin. Hut. Zeit. xxix, p. 151 (1868): Stal,
En. Hem. vy, p. 34 (1876).

3. Oblong, above lurid, beneath black-fuscous, entirely densely
punctured black; rostrum and feet sordid flavescent ; membrane and
wings whitish-hyaline, external margin of membrane hardly flavescent ;
thorax with the sides serrate and lateral angles boradly emarginate.
Head with tylus shorter than the juga which are hiscent at the apex ;
bucculz elevated: eyes very prominent, almost pedunculate: ocelli
placed a little behind an imaginary line drawn between the base of the
eyes, twice more distant from each other than from the eyes: antenni-
ferous tubercles externally spinose, entirely visible from above: first
and second joints of the antennw subequal, one half the length of the
third: rostrum short, reaching the middle between the anterior and

1887. | H. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 199

intermediate coxe#: sides of thorax slightly rounded, irregularly ser-
rate or denticulate, transversely impressed on the disc; posterior mar-:
gin, straight: scutellum large, reaching apex of abdomen, spathulate,
with the sides sinuate, broadly rounded at the apex; frena short :
abdomen densely punctured; miuute tubercles behind the spiracula
less distinct : feet moderate, tibis hardly sulcate externally towards the
apex (Haglund). Long, 10; broad, 5; exp. hemi. 18 mill.
Reported from Rangoon.

Genus MenAnopHara, Stal.
Ofvers. K. V.-A. Forh. p. 503 (1867); p. 152 (1868) ; En. Hem. vy, p. 34 (1876).

Differs from Aspidestrophus, Stal, in having the head very slightly
convex behind the middle, somewhat concave towards the apex, margins
acute; rostrum reaching the intermediate coxe ; body oval.

MELANOPHARA DENTATA, Haglund.

Melanophara dentata, Haglund, Stettin Ent. Zeit. xxix, p. 152 (1868): Stal, En.
Hem. v, p. 34 (1876).

@. Black, opaque, above finely, remotely, abdomen more densely,
punctured ; briefly, palely pubescent; rostrum and tarsi, obscurely
rufescent ; thorax anteriorly elevated and marked with gyrated smooth
impressions ; impressed. transversely in the middle; anterior angles
with a very minute tooth, sides rounded and furnished with four small
teeth, lateral angles with a large acute spine and behind it slightly
emarginate. Head anteriorly rounded, very slightly emarginate ; juga
longer than the tylus, contiguous: ocelli situate behind an imaginary
line drawn between the base of the eyes, twice more distant from each
other than from the eyes: antenniferous tubercles broad, externally
strongly dentate, altogether distinct from above: first and second
joints of the antennew equal, one half the length of the third: buccule
much elevated, continued through: rostrum reaching the intermediate
coxx, third and fourth joints equally long, second subequal to them :
thorax anteriorly with less distinct, smooth, gyrated or tortuous im-
pressions ; posterior margin, straight : scutellum broad, rounded at the
apex, not reaching the apex of the abdomen ; sides before the middle
slightly sinuated ; frena not reaching the middle; membrane slightly
fuscescent: spiracula and minute tubercles behind the spiracula, dis-
tinct; tibize externally distinctly suleate (Haglund). Long, barely 9 ;
broad, 43 mill. 7

Reported from Rangoon.

200 E. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

Genus AspipEestRopHtus, Stal.

Ofvers. K. V.-A. Forh., xi, p. 232 (1854): Freg. Hug. Resa, Ins., Hem., p. 219
(1859) ; Ofvers. 1. c., p. 503 (1867) ; En. Hem. v, p. 34 (1876).

Body somewhat broadly subovate, subpubescent: head subgua-
drate, rather convex, somewhat deflexed towards the apex, spinose on
both sides before the eyes; juga scarcely longer than the tylus, ob-
liquely truncate or sinuately truncate outwards at the apex, margins
obtuse: rostrum reaching the posterior coxe; antenne as long as the
head and thorax together: the thorax transversely, a little sinuate
anteriorly, subtruncate posteriorly, sides slightly rounded, crenated :
scutellum as long as the abdomen but half its breadth, slightly sinuate
on both sides towards the base, broadly rounded at the apex: feet mo-
derate, basal and apical joints of tarsi equal in length, the intermediate
very small (Stal).

126. ASPIDESTROPHUS MORIO, Stal.

Aspidestrophus morio, Stil, Ofvers. K.V.-A. Forh. p. 232 (1854); Free. Hug.
‘Resa, Ins, Hem. p. 219, t. 3, f. 1 (1859); Vollenhoven, Faune Ent. l’Arch. Indo-
Néer. i, p. 43 (1863); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 74 (1867). Stal, En. Hem. vy, p. 34
(1876); Distant, A. M. N. H. (6 8.) iii, p. 44 (1879).

Aspidestrophus lineola, Vollenhoven, l. c. p. 44, t. 3, f. 10 (1863) : Walker, 1. c. iii,
p. 521 (1868).

Black-piceous, roughly punctured, sordid ochraceous pubescent and
silky ; an almost apical ring on the femora and the tarsi, sordid yellow-
testaceous (Stal). Long, 73; broad, 4¢ mill,

3. Head square, rounded in front ; head and pronotum punctured,
of a very deep brown with a yellowish villosity, rather close: antenne
of the same colour: scutellum contracted obliquely on each side to-
wards the base, pitchy brown, with a spare punctuation on the disc,
closer towards the borders, weakly yellowish pilose: hemelytra of the
same colour, rather strongly punctured, with some short, yellowish
hairs towards the base of the costal border: beneath of a pitchy colour,
the sternum with a yellowish villosity ; abdomen punctured, sparingly
pilose; each segment has a small round tubercle behind each stigma :
feet of the same colour as the body, except a small patch beneath almost
at the end of the femora, and the tarsi which are yellowish-white.
(Voll.). Long, 73 mill.

Reported from Java, Borneo, Sumatra, Assam.

A. lineola, Voll. is smaller (6 mill.), of an almost black brown or
black and is not so pubescent. A small line on the pronotum, a semi-
circular subapical spot on the femora and apex of antenne, yellow,

1887.] EK, T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. | 201

Div. Hatyaria, Stal.

En. Hem. v, p. 34 (1876) :—Includes Sciocorides and Halydes, pt., Am. &
Serv., Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 118, 103 (1843) :—Sciocoride and Halydide, Dallas,
List Hem. i, p. 130, 150 (1851).

Venter anteriorly on both sides with a short transversely rugose or
strigose streak or with the venter furrowed: head long, rostrum reach-
ing behind the last coxe: antennw remote from the eyes, third joint of
the rostrum much longer than the fourth ; eyes strongly prominulous.

Genus Mzcipea, Dallas.

List Hem. i, p. 139 (1851) ; Stal, Hem. Afric. i, p. 79, 182 (1864); Ofvers. K.
V.-A. Forh. p. 58 (1872) ; En. Hem. v, p. 34, 37 (1876): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 179
(1867). Includes Cerataulax, Signoret, A, 8. E. F. (2 8.), ix, p. 335 (1851).

Body somewhat elongate, somewhat depressed: head oblong-trian-
gular, produced, somewhat convex, juga much longer than the tylus,
anteriorly gradually narrowed and converging, or somewhat hiscent,
lateral margins of the head not flattened; antenniferous tubercles en-
tirely visible from above: buccule slightly elevated: eyes globose,
rather prominulous ; ocelli large, on a line with the base of the eyes:
rostrum reaching the metasternum, inserted towards the apex of the
head, second joint much longer than the third, about as long as the two
apical taken together, third longer than the fourth: antenne 5-jointed,
stoutish, gradually stouter towards the base, first joint not reaching the
apex of the head, second joint as long as or longer than the others,
three-cornered and somewhat thickened towards the base, fourth joint
longer than the fifth: anterior lateral margins of thorax obtuse, some-
what entire or very obsoletely crenulated, slightly simuated: scutellum
triangular, much narrowed at the apex, frena extended to a distance be-
yond the middle: hemelytra scarcely narrower than the abdomen; mem-
brane with simple veins: mesosternum somewhat furrowed: feet mo-
derate, femora unarmed at the apex; tibie somewhat furrowed; tarsi
3-jointed (Sial.). ,

127. Mucipra inpicA, Dallas.

Mecidea indica, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 139, t. 3, f. 3 (1851); Trang. Ent. Soc.
(n. s.)ii, p. 9 (1852); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.179 (1851): Stal, Hn. Hem. v, p. 38
(1876).

2. Pale yellow, thickly and finely punctured; eyes black : gcutel-
lum very long: membrane transparent, whitish: ventral stigmata
brown: rostrum with the tip black: antenne with the second joint very
long, more than twice the length of the third, dilated towards the bage :
4-5 joints shorter than the second, but longer than the third ; fourth

26

202 BR. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. [No. 2,

longer than the fifth: antenniferous tubercles spinous on the outside
(Dallas). Long, 105 mill.
Reported from Bengal.

Genus Datpapa, Am. & Serv.

Hist. Nat. Ins. Hém. p. 105 (1843); Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 153 (1851) : Stal,
Hem. Afric. i, p. 80, 101 (1864): Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 218 (1867): Stal, Ofvers. K.
y.-A. Férh. p. 508 (1867); En. Hem. v, p. 36, 43 (1876). Includes Udana, Walker,
1. c. iii, p. 549 (1863).

Body oval or ovate: head scarcely or only very slightly convex :
juga more or less distinctly sinuated at the apex outwards or obliquely
truncated: buccule reaching the base of the head, angulated anteriorly,
antenne 5-jointed, slender, the first joint not or only very slightly ex-
tending beyond the juga, not longer than the marginal space of the
head lying between the eyes and the place of insertion of the antenne :
eyes globose rather prominulous; ocelli in a line with the base of the
eyes: rostrum extending a little beyond the last pair of feet, first joint
not or only slightly extended beyond the buccule: anterior lateral
margins of the thorax crenulated: membrane with about six simple,
longitudinal veins: mesosternum carinated: venter slightly sulcated
at the base: feet somewhat long; tibie broadly furrowed above, first
pair sometimes dilated (Sia?).

128. Dawpapda ocunata, Fabricius.

Cimex oculatus, Fabr., Syst. Ent. p. 703 (1775) ; Spec. Ins. ii, p. 347 (1781);
Mant. Ins. ii, p. 285 (1787) ; Ent. Syst. iv, p. 99 (1794).

Halys oculata, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 181 (1808).

Dalpada aspersa, Ellenr., Nat. Tijdssk. v. Ned. Ind. xxiv, p. 140, f. 8 (1862).

Dalpada oculata, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 184 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 218
(1867) ; Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 22 (1868); En. Hem. v, p. 43 (1876); Distant, J. A.
S. B. xlviii (2), p. 37 (1879) ; A. M. N. H. (5 8.) iii, p. 45 (1879).

Grey: antenne usually as long as the body, fuscous, with two
white rings ; head, fuscous, immaculate; pronotum greyish or variegated
fuscous-testaceous, furnished posteriorly with a small, obtuse prominence ;
scutellum paler at the apex and at the base, on both sides with a very
glabrous yellow spot: hemelytra concolorous; wings black: beneath
yellow witha lateral line, fuscous, and the margins of the abdomen
variegated fuscous and ferruginous: femora scabrous, pallid, black at
the apex ; tibize black (annulated yellow), first pair dilated at the apex ;
tarsi pallid, black at the apex, four posterior feet pale, genicule black
(Fabr.). Stal observes that the specimens usually found in collections
are clouded with fuscous-zneous above, a large smooth spot at the
basal angles and nearly the third apical part of the scutellum, flaves-
cent, and the anterior tibie are dilated. Long, 15—18 mill,

1887. | BE. T. Atkinson—Notes on Indian Rhynchota. 203

Reported from China, Siam, Cambodia, Tenasserim, Assam, Silhat
Malacca, Penang, Java, Borneo, Sumatra, Celebes, Bouru, Philippines.
The Indian Museum has specimens from Sikkim, Assam, Arakan,
Tavoy.

129. DaALpPADA vuRSICOLOR, Herr. Schaffer.

Halys versicolor, Herr. Schaff. Wanz. Ins. v, p. 76, t. 169 f. 520 (1839) ; vii, p. 60
(1844),

Dalpada versicolor, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 185 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p.
220 (1876); Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 43 (1876): Lethierry, Ann, Mus. Gen, xviii, p. 648
(1883).

Yellow-fuscous, variegated with bronze or steel-green patches :
head elongate, tylus extending beyond the juga which form outwards
two obtuse angles: eyes large: antenne slender: sides of pronotum
weakly serrated anteriorly, angles acute: two subminiaceous spots at
base of scutellum of which the apex is long and slender; membrane
with eight veins of which the outer on each side is indistinct: margin
of abdomen yellow-ochreous with steel-green spots: beneath pale
erange with greenish pulverulent outer border and a black longitudinal
spot posteriorly. Long, 14 mill.

Reported from Java, India, Burma.

130. DAupPapaA cLAVATA, Fabricius.

Cimez clavatus, Fabr., Ent. Syst. Suppt. p. 532 (1798).

Halys clavata, Fabr., Syst. Rhyng. p. 181 (1803).

Dalpada clavata, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 184 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p- 219
(1867). Stal, Hem. Fabr. i, p. 22 (1868) ; Hn, Hem. v, p. 43 (1876); Distant, A. M.
N. H. (5 8.) iii, p. 45 (1879).

Head porrect, unidentate on both sides: thorax not serrated but
armed on both sides with a small dull-black clavate protuberance, two
white dots at the apex: scutellum cinereous at the apex: hemelytra
spotted fuscous: abdomen flavescent, margin black, spotted yellow
(Fabr.).

Closely allied to D. versicolor, H. S., head a little longer, lateral
angles of pronotum somewhat more obtuse, more thickened and flexed
upwards; without the somewhat large, smooth, spot on the basal angles
of the scutellum but at the base near the angles, a small smooth spot ;
dots more fuscous, less brassy (Stal). Long, 15—16 mill.

Reported from Tranquebar, Assam.

131. DaALpapa PiLicornis, Stal.

Dalpada pilicornis, Stal, En, Hem. v, p. 44 (1876).
&. Stramineous; head, pronotum, hemelytra, and pectus, distinct-

204: K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. LNo. 2,

ly and irregularly punctured brassy, an indistinct median streak and the
apex of the lateral angles of the pronotum less densely punctured, the
lateral angles of the pronotum rather prominulous, neither tumid nor
rugose; scutellum with a somewhat large, smooth, oval spot on the
basal angles, third apical part and discoidal streak somewhat smooth,
sparingly punctured; membrane greyish, veins fuscous: connexivum
aeneous, segments banded with yellow; venter testaceous, sparingly
punctured fuscous-aeneous, anteriorly subsulcate, extreme angles of
segments, acneous ; antenne, rostrum and feet pilose, the feet sprinkled
with fuscous ; second joint of the antenne shorter than the third : ros-
trum somewhat extended beyond the last coxe; tylus and juga equally
long. o& with the genital segment strongly tri-impressed, costate be-
tween the impressions (Stal). Long, 10; broad, 5 mill.
Reported from the Nilgiris (Madras).

132. Dapapa conctnna, Westwood.

Halys concinna, Westwood, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 23 (1837).

Dalpada concinna, Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 44 (1876.)

Greyish-luteous, punctured with fuscous: two black lines between
the eyes; thorax anteriorly serrate; posterior angles prominulous,
black; basal angles of scutellum pallid; membrane hyaline, longitudi-
nal veins fuscous, with some oblong dots scattered between; feet con-
colorous: sides of abdomen with black spots, a single small white spot
in the middle. (Westw.). Long, body 14—143 mill.

Reported from China, India. Dallas unites this with D. clavata,
Fabr.

133. DALPADA NIGRICOLLIS, Westwood.

Halys nigricollis, West:, Hope, Cat. Hem. i, p. 22 (1837) (0).
Halys obscura, West. 1. c. p. 22 (¢): Dallas, 1. c. p. 184 (1851).
Dalpada nigricollis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 184 (1851) ; Walker, Cat. Het., i, p. 219

(1867). Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 44 (1876).

Q. Greyish luteous, everywhere punctured with brassy-black:
slender, longitudinal, median line on the pronotum and four minute
dots, luteous ; sides of pronotum hardly serrate, posterior angles sub-
prominulous ; basal angles of scutellum, whitish: membrane pallid,
with six fuscous longitudinal veins and the same number of interme-
diate longitudinal fuscous dots: feet luteous, dotted black: base of
fourth and fifth joints of the antenne, white. (Westw.). Long, 17—18
mill.

Reported from Bengal.

3. Smaller than the ? : the head and the thorax, blackish : an-
tenue fuscous, second joint incurved ; sides of thorax entire, posterior

semantics tii limpet tasmanian

:
:

1887.) K. T. Atkinson—WNotes on Indian Rhynchota. 205

angles subacute, prominulous, black: scutellum fuscous, punctured
luteous, basal angles luteous ; membrane whitish, the longitudinal veins
slender with several fuscous dots strewed between them: abdomen
fulvous with a broad lateral band fuscous, feet luteous, punctured
fuscous (Westw.). Long, 12—13 mill.

Reported from Nepal, India.

134. DaLPADA AFFINIS, Dallas.
Dalpada affinis, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 185 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 219
(1867) ; Stal, En. Hem. v, p. 44 (1876).

Q. Closely allied to D. nigricollis, Westw.; body broader, head
longer, lateral angles of pronotum tuberculose, large, obtuse, whitish at
the apex: scutellum immaculate at the base, somewhat broad at the
apex: membrane fuscescent, veins more obscure: sides of the abdomen
variegated with fulvous and black: antenne fulvous, two last joints,
fuscous (Westw.). Long, 17—18 mill.

Reported from N. India.

135. DanpPapa vaRiA, Dallas.

Dalpada varia, Dallas, List Hem. i, p. 185 (1851); Walker, Cat. Het. i, p. 220
(1867) ; Stal, Hn. Hem. v, p. 45 (1876); Distant, J. A. S. B. xlviii, (2) p. 37 (1879) ;
A. M.N. H. (5 s.) iii, p. 45 (1879).

3. Greyish-testaceous, punctured black ; lateral angles of the pro-
notum subtuberculate ; head, pronotum, scutellum, corium and margins
of abdomen, variegated greenish-aeneous: scutellum with two whitish
spots at the base; corium rufescent at the apex ; membrane fuscescent,
subhyaline, veins fuscous and the basal spot black: abdomen beneath,
testaceous, sides punctured and subapical spot, black: feet and rostrum
testaceous (Westw.). Long, 18-183 mill.

Reported from Silhat, Assam: when the pubescene is removed the
apex of the scutellum is broadly luteous. The Indian museum has a
specimen from Tenasserim.

136. DALPADA ALTERNANS, Westwood.
Halys alternans, Westwood, Hope, Cat. i, p. 22 (1837).

Closely allied to D. nigricollis (2), Westw.: differs especially in
having the sides of the pronotum almost straight, oblique, posterior
angles not prominulous : membrane with six longitudinal veins, fuscous,
extended almost to the apex, the three internal connected at the base ;
internal space fuscous; feet with fuscous and luteous rings: sides of
abdomen with abbreviated transverse, black striz (Westw.), Long,
16—17 mill.

Reported from Bengal.

SP Ow"

206 J. Wood-Mason—Description of Lyreidus channeri. _[No. 2,

XIII.—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indion Marine Survey
Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CarprentTER, R. N,,
Commanding. No. 4. Description of a new Species of Crustacea be-
longing to the Brachyurous Family Raninide.—By J. Woop-Mason,
Esq., Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of Com-
parative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College of Bengal,
Calcutta. |

[Received and Read August 5th, 1885. |

(With Plate I.)

LYREIDUS CHANNERI, 0. sp.
Proc. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, August 1885, p. 104.

3. Carapace transversely moderately convex, longitudinally blunt-
ly carinate and slightly arched from near the posterior margin almost to
the level of the spines marking the commencement of the antero-lateral
margins, from which level to the end of the rostrum it is slightly con-
cave; its antero-lateral margins armed with two pairs of long slender
and acute outwardly and forwardly directed spines, of which the pos-
terior are nearly twice the lengthof the anterior pair (the left one of
which has been broken off early in life and is now only represented by a
tubercular scar) : its sides parallel from the larger pair of spines back-
wards to the insertion of the chelipeds, whence they gradually and re-
oularly converge to the rounded angles of the concave-truncate posterior
margin; and rapidly convergent from the same pair of spines forwards
to about the level of the middle of the 3rd joint of the external maxil-
lipeds, whence they suddenly run parallel to, or slightly divergent from,
one another to the ends of the extraorbital spines. The rostrum is
semi-oval, or, in other words, has the form of a triangle with the apex
rounded and the opposite sides slightly arched, and, like the eye-pe-
duncles, is surpassed by the long and acuminate extra-orbital spines.

Immediately in front of the two small crescentic muscular impres-
sions near the middle of its length, the carapace is crossed by a faint
depression, interrupted by the median carina and continued on the
sides, passing immediately in front of the junction of the finely beaded
postero-lateral lines with the linea anomurica some distance to the rear
of the hinder pair of antero lateral spines, and deepening as it goes, to
the buccal frame ; in front of this depression the puncture of the surface
is much coarser and thicker than behind it. The antero-lateral margin
is finely granulated and, with the contiguous subhepatic and anterior
pleural regions, slightly hairy. Two faint depressions, marking out a
cardiac region, pass off from the posterior ends of the crescentic im-

J. WOOD-MASON, Journ.Asiat.Soc.Bengal,1887, Vol LV. PtIl art.

Behari lal Das, del. West Newman &Co.imp. —
Parker & Coward lith.

1887. | J. Wood-Mason—Description of Lyreidus channeri. 207

pressions, extending rather more than half way to the posterior margin,
and slightly converging as they go; and two oblique elevations, situated
about midway between the median carina and the postero-lateral mar-
gins, with which they are parallel, are present on the posterior third of
the carapace.

The eye-peduncles have the same form as those of L. tridentatus,
and reach nearly to the level of the end of the rostrum, but the eyes
they carry are in process of reduction to the condition of those of so
many Reptant and Brachyurous Crustacea that inhabit the muddy depths
of the sea, and, moreover, are unequally reduced on the two sides of
the body, the left being represented by an oval and convex obsoletely
faceted, thick, and opaque-yellow cornea, situated, as in the typical
species of the genus, on the outer apex of the peduncles, with the
subjacent pigment showing through the integument at its base as a
dark lead-coloured circumferential band, while all that is to be seen in
the corresponding part of the right eye is a smooth and very slightly
convex area marked out by the transparence of the pigment of the
subjacent ophthalmic tract.

The propodite of the chelipeds is armed below with two acute
triangular spines, of which the distal is twice the size of the proximal ;
its low dorsal crest ends distally in a small tooth; the cutting process
of its inner edge is divided into five irregular tooth-like lobules;
and its tip is strongly hooked or incurved. The cutting edge of the
dactylopodite is obsoletely two-toothed. The only armature of the
carpopodite is a single long and acute spine, answering to the distal of
the two in L. tridentatus. The meropodite bears a sharp spinule in the
place of the tubercle seen in the typical species. The dactyli of the lst
and 2nd pairs of legs are shorter and broader, particularly those of the
former, and the crests of the two preceding joints in the former also are
all more lamellar, the dorsal ones being in addition distally produced to
sharp teeth. No direct comparison of the 3rd pair of legs in the two
species is possible, as these limbs are wanting in the only specimen of
the Japanese form available for comparision, but, judging from DeHaan’s
figure, the two last joints would appear to be much more expanded in
the Indian one. All the legs are slenderer.

The third and fourth abdominal terga each beara very sharp re-
curved spine in the middle line.

Dr. Giles notes that the animal was in life, “ except a little brown
tint in front, of a uniform salmon colour ;” and in the spirit-specimen
all the upper surface of the carapace in front of the transverse impres-
sion, with the exception of the lateral spines, is still darker coloured
than the rest of the body.

208 J. Wood-Mason—Description of Lyreidus channeri. [No. 2,

The unique example from which the foregoing description has been
drawn up measures :—

millims.
Length of carapace from tip of rostrum to posterior margin ...... 25.0
5 53 $5 to the middle of a straight
line joining the bases of the posterior spines ......... 8.5
Length of carapace from the posterior margin to the same straight
Tami Ae a. Shed h oot alt eae
Breadth of exeupitd ia across dade: ianaMeIded satseat Vesaildvnpee)) aaa

Breadth of head between tips of extra-orbital seeneasuly.. ailisteecte iime

Distance between tips of posterior antero-lateral spines ............ 18.0
Length of posterior antero-lateral spines ..........ccscccessceseescseseees BAO

> 5s anterior antero-latéral (9%, 84.0, Whi Ue, Gee 3.0
, genital appendages .....c..esccees ae ee ay 5.5
», rostrum, measured from a Junin’ aie daha eahene

tially to the bottom of the supra-obital emarginations, 2.0
extra-orbital angles, measured from the same straight
HIRE; soe sen wt 3.4

This interesting Boson a may oie once he idiatinprielied from
either of the three previously described species of its genus (L. triden-
tatus, DeHaan, Faun. Jap. Crust. 1850, p. 138, tab. XX XV, fig. 6, 3,
I. elongatus, Miers, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1879, p. 45, both from the
seas of Japan, and DL. bairdii, 8.1. Smith, Proc. U. S. Nat. Hist. Mus.
1881, ITI, p. 420, from 100 fathoms, off the South Coast of New Eng-
land) by the conspicuous armature of its carapace, by its bispinose ab-
domen, and by its partially aborted eyes.

A single male only of it was dredged up in the trawl from a depth
of 405 to 285 fathoms with a bottom temperature of 48° to 50’ Fahr.
in the ‘ swatch-of-no-ground,’ a deep and narrow valley running north-
wards from the floor of the Bay of Bengal to within a short distance
of the shoals lying off the conjoined mouths of the Ganges and
Brahmaputra, in Lat. 21° 6’ 30” N., Long. 89° 20’ E

EXPLANATION OF Prate I.

“
“

9 9

Fig. 1. Lyreidus channeri, W.-M., &. Natural Size.

Orbital, antennary, and buccal view. x 2.

, 38. Four terminal somites of abdomen, seen from below as they lie closely

applied against the underside of the cephalothorax. x 3.
4, Dorsal view (to the right) of the abdomen, with side view (to the left) of
its spinigerous 3rd and 4th terga. x 3.

» », 5a. Outline views from above, or optic sections in the plane of the fringing
setae, of the left and right eye-peduncles respectively, to show (a.) the
sete that fringe their two margins up to the corneal membrane on each

(b.) the thickness and the relative deyelopment of the cornea,

*

side ;

Asiat.Soc.Bengal, 1387, Vol.LVI,Pt.I. P11

“& INES,Journ. :

ry . |
i Fae © i
<> = Ses Oa LY

She hy ey BING PZ

B.L.DaS, del. ef J-W.M, Photo.

te,

a Re RS Ue

fC oe re

1887.] E. J. Jones—On some Nodular Stones obtained by, §c., 209

which, opaque in both eyes, exhibits an obscure and degenerate faceting
in the left, but is devoid of all traces of facets in the right, the
shorter and the broader of the two; and (c.) the relative amount of
pigment, represented by the dark shading. x 12. Zeiss’ a*. Oc. 2. er
camera.

Fig. 6. The right chela. x 3.

» 7. Lyreidus stenops, n.sp., ¢. Dorsal view (to the right) of the abdomen,
with side view (to the left) of its spinigerous 4th tergum, x 2.

o 8. The carapace of the same in outline. Natural Size.

This species may at once be distinguished from its congeners by its narrow
metope, its unarmed carapace, and its decumbent abdominal spine. A single
specimen of it, with a male and two females of another species identical with
the specimen from Japan referred in the above description to L. 3-dentatus, has
been received by me from Hongkong from Brigade-Surgeon Hungerford, since this
paper was written.

eewNeow~nreees=<= 00 00 errs

XIV.—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indian Marine Survey Steamer
‘Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED Carpenter, R. N., Commanding.
No. 5. On some Nodular Stones obtained by tr wishin off Colombo
in 675 Fathoms of Water.—By H, J. Jonus, A. R. 8. M., Geological
Survey of India.
[Received February 2nd ;—Read March 2nd, 1887. ]
(With Plate IT.)

These nodules were forwarded to the Superintendent of the Indian
Museum, and by him passed on to the Director of the Geological Survey,
by whom they were subsequently entrusted to me for examination.

The results of this investigation, though owing to want of time in-
complete, are, as will be seen, of considerable interest ; and I hope at
some future time to be able to go into the subject more fully.

The nodules were obtained during a trawling operation off Colombo
in water of 675 fathoms, and are stated to have been found associated
with sand and mud, which formed a hard calcareous crust at the
bottom of the sea, and a small quantity of which was forwarded with
the specimens.

The stones are irregularly rounded, and vary in shape from almost
spherical to roughly cylindrical with rounded ends. The specimens re-
ceived varied in size from 1—4 inches in length and 1}—3 inch in thick-
ness. Externally, they are rough and mostly have one or two small
excrescences of the size of a pin’s head, and a few small pittings of about
the same size; the colour is dirty light grey.

27

210 E. J. Jones—On some Nodular Stones obtained by ([No. 2,

On breaking them open, the fractured surface has much the appear-
ance of an ordinary slate without the cleavage, and is of a much darker
colour than the exterior. Running along the central line of a long
cylindrical one which I broke open, there is a narrow vein of a brownish
colour.

A microscopic examination of a thin slice shewed merely a confused
mass of aggregates resembling in their structure that of spherulites,
such as occur in the so-called spheerulitic lavas, with the remains of
Foraminifera and Radiolaria disseminated throughout the mass. With
ordinary light, little is to be seen except more or less radiating fibrous
aggregates, but, as soon as the section is observed between crossed
Nicol’s prisms, the whole field is seen to be covered with little dark
crosses with their limbs parallel to the planes of the prisms, and, on
revolving the stage, the limbs of the crosses keep the same orienta-
tion whilst the section revolves.

It is when thus observed that the aggregates are seen to be entirely
distinct from one another, as each cross keeps to its own aggregate,
and the crosses do not overlap; so that, by revolving the stage, the limit
of each aggregate can be determined by tracing the path of the outer end
of one of the limbs of the crosses.

In the volcanic rocks in which this structure is known, it appears
to be due to incipient crystallization in a glassy mass; and at first it
might be supposed that these masses were of igneous origin. This idea,
however, is untenable on account of the remains of Foraminifera
(of several species, the most easily recognised of which are the
globigerine) and Radiolaria which are sparsely scattered through the
mass and, in some cases, enclose a spherulitic aggregate.

An indeterminate greenish substance, which probably consists of
glauconite, is also seen scattered through the mass.

The only difference that can be detected between the central vein
and the’ portion between it and the exterior is that the aggregates in
the central vein are much larger and the colour brown instead of
green, and that it is unacted on by hydrochloric acid, which dissolves
out some calcic carbonate from the other portion.

As mentioned by Mr. Daly in his letter forwarding the nodules,
these are very heavy, having a sp. ger. of 3°77 at a temperature of 30° C.
as against water of 4° C.

A qualitative analysis shewed the nodules to consist in great part
of baric sulphate together with small quantities of calcic and strontic
sulphates, small quantities of caleic and magnesic phosphates, aluminic
silicate, calcic carbonate, and traces of iron, sodium, and manganese.

Not having the time to devote to a complete quantitative analysis,

1887. ] trawling off Colombo in 675 Fathoms of Water. 211

I made, in order to arrive at an approximate estimate of the propor-
tion of baric sulphate present, a determination of the sulphuric acid.
An average sample from two of the nodules powdered and dried at
100° C. gave 82°5 °/, of baric sulphate, the whole SO, Ho, being calcula-
ted as SO, Bao”.

This result is, however, of course too high, as asmall quantity of the
SO,Ho, is combined with Ca. and Sr. in the form of calcic and strontic
sulphates, though, from the results of the qualitative analysis, it is pro-
bably not much too high; and we may, I think, safely take 75°/, as the
percentage of baric sulphate present.

In order to see whether the material was derived from the mud in
which the nodules occur, and which also contained Foraminifera, I made a
qualitative analysis of the mud, and found it to consist mainly of alumi-
nic silicate, with small quantities of calcic carbonate, some iron, and a
trace of manganese ; there was also a trace of an alkaline earth which
was not removed by boiling with hydrochloric acid and subsequent
washing, but this, on spectroscopic examination, shewed itself to be
lime.

In spite of the negative result of the analysis of the mud, I am in-
clined to think, from the presence of the Foraminifera both in the mud and
enclosed in the nodules, that the latter have been formed at the bottom
of the sea either at the spot where they were found or at no great dis-
tance therefrom, though it is difficult to imagine how the material was
obtained, but it is possible that a careful analysis of a larger quantity of
the mud would reveal a trace of Barium, for sea-water contains a slight
trace of this element.

I cannot at present call to mind any instance of spherulitic
structure occurring without the aid of heat.

In volcanic lavas and in artificial glasses, it may be regarded as
concretionary, or as resulting from incipient crystallisation or devitri-
fication around certain points or nuclei. The nuclei when they exist
consist either of a granule or a minute crystal or crystallite, but most
commonly no nucleus is discernible.*

In this case, however, it would seem, that it must be due to slow
segregative action; and, baric sulphate being very slightly soluble in
water, the deposition would be very slow and may have been to some
extent crystalline, at any rate sufficiently so to produce the same effect
as incipient crystallisation from a glassy mass.

The execution of the accompanying plate has been kindly superin-
tended by Mr. J. Wood-Mason.

* Rutley’s Study of Rocks, p. 183.

212 G.M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

EXPLANATION OF Puate II,

Fig. 1,2. The external appearance, natural size, of some of the nodules.

Fig. 8. A thin slice treated with hydrochloric acid and seen between crossed
Nicol’s prisms ; shewing the dark crosses and radiating structure of the aggregates.

Fig. 4. A thin slice shewing some of the enclosed Foraminifera as seen by or-
dinary light; from a microphotograph (Smith and Beck’s 13” obj.) taken in the Bio-
logical Laboratory of the Indian Museum, Calcutta.

XV.—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indian Marine Survey
Steamer ‘ Investigator’, Commander ALFRED CARPENTER, R. N., Com-
manding. No.6. On Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal.—
By G. M: Gitns, M.B., F. BR. C..8., Swrgeon-Naturalist to the
Marine Survey.

[Received and Read March 2nd, 1887. ].
(With Plates III—VIII.)

CoNntTENTS.

§ 1. A description of two new Species (i. Phronima bucephala and ii. Phron-
mella hippocephala) of the Amphipod Family Phronimide, with some Remarks on
the Genera of the Family.

§ 2. Rhabdosoma investigatoris.

§ 38. Amphipronoé longicornuta.

§ 4. Lestrigonus bengalensis.

§ 5. Eurystheus hirsutus.

§ 1. A Description of two new Species of the Amphipod Family Phro-
nimide with some Remarks on the Genera of the Family.

The genus Phronima of the division Hyperina and family Phroni-
nuide is a very limited and peculiar one. The species that belong to it
are remarkable for their bizarre form, and for the circumstance that
the head is considerably prolonged downwards, like that of a quadruped,
in a direction at right angles to the long axis of the body.

The number of joints in the legs appears to be less than the normal
seven. This is due, on the one hand, to the coxal plates being fused with
the pleuron of each segment, and, on the other, to the circumstance that
the dactylopodite is in most instances very small or reduced to a mere
rudiment. Spence Bate* gives as a generic character that the 6th
thoracic appendage (third pereiopod) has the dactylopodite fused with
the propodite. This is, however, I am inclined to believe, an error,
arising probably from the want of fresh specimens. Such also appears

* Catalogue of Amphipodous Crustacea in the British Museum, p. 316.

G.M.GILES, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal. 1887 Vol. LVL PtIL. Plt.

G.M GE ded. Autolype.

mC Ww YN Ww

3aALoinv

“003xX ©

Al'td ‘I 4d ‘IAT (9A ‘2897 ‘Te Buceg ‘00g "yeIsy “Utnop ‘gaya ToO' NO

G.M.GILES, Journ. Asiat.Soc. Bengal. 1887. Vol. LVI Pt. IL PLN

8 x 25.

GM.G. del. ; West Newman & CP amp
Perker & Cowara chr lith.

iba ae

West Newman & C¢ imp.

G.M.GILES, Journ Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 1887. Vol. LVI. Pt. IL.

> — Same eT

:

G.M.GILE:S, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal 1887, Vol. LVI, Pt.IL

PLVIL_

S
Nt
N

750.8

Boar

v

‘

z ; West Newman &C° imp.

‘duire5 7g weumen'{sey ; “UAT, preMopy sssred ‘TSP DOWD

THA ted TTI AT 1A 'LESL Te6ueg 00g yeIsy UaNoP “SHyTID NW’ a.

’ mm penny. e fie
Te CL APE Ea

1887.] G.M. Giles—Sia new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 213

to be the case not only in the sixth but in the two preceding appendages
of one of the species described below. A careful examination, however,
of various intermediate examples, furnished by the different appendages
of the two species that have come under my notice, has satisfied me that
the dactylopodite is neither absent nor fused with the propodite, but is,
in such instances, represented by a minute spine-like body articulated
to the distal extremity of the propodite, and usually flanked by a pair of
tiny hairs, which appear again in a more developed form in the similarly
placed “‘ dactyloptera’’ which Spence Bate (loc. cit.) describes on the
dactylo-propodital articulation of P. sedentaria.

Both my species were taken in the drift (surface) net,—the one that
has been named P. bucephala, off the Mutlah light in a depth of 15
fathoms, the other, Phronimella hippocephala, in somewhat shallower
water off the mouth of the Dhamra river on the Orissa Coast. Both
are perfectly colourless and transparent, so that most of the internal
organs, muscles, &c., can be seen with the greatest facility through the
integument. The circumstance of my only having obtained a single speci-
men of each in the surface-net appears to point to their not being nor-
mally surface organisms. While under observation, living in the tube
of the net, although perfectly capable of swimming with considerable
activity, they yet showed a tendency to sink to the bottom and rest
there. For these reasons, it is probable, that their true habitat is the
bottom in the localities and depths already mentioned.

In his recent monograph on the Phronimide,* Claus divides the
family into two sub-families—the Phrosinine and the Phronimine.
With the first we have nothing to do, as neither of the species to be de-
scribed can be referred to this subfamily. Of the Phronimine, he
enumerates four genera, of which Phronima Latr. is thus defined :—

“* Body produced, with much narrowed and elongated last thoracic
segment, with 3 pairs of styloid uropods.. Head short, but elevated,
with much produced vertico-oral axis. In the female the anterior an-
tennee two-jointed, and posterior antenne represented by a globularly
arched basal joint provided with a short bristle. The mandibular palps
are wanting even in the male. Maxillipedes strongly compressed with
lanceolate lamine and a conical “tongue” (Zunge). Both pairs of
gnathopoda slender, with weak, apposed subchele. The 5th pair of
thoracic appendages provided with slender apposed shear-like forceps.
Three pairs of gill-sacs on 4th, 5th, and 6th thoracic segments.”

Now, the family, so far as it is known, is of such variable charac-
ter that each new addition to its numbers appears to require a genus to

# Arbeit. aus d. zool. Inst. d. Univ. Wien u. d. zool. Stat. in Triest, 1879, II, 1.

214 G.M. Giles—Siz new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

itself; and to the genus, as thus limited, neither of my forms can be
said perfectly to agree.

To the less limited genus of Spence Bate, however, one of them
corresponds in every point, but it differs from the genus as defined by
Claus in the following points :—I1st., in my one female specimen, I can
make out no trace whatever of inferior antenne ; 2nd., the subchela of the
“5th” (6th) thoracic appendage cannot be said to be slender, the fixed
ramus being very stout and almost quadrate; 3rd., there are two extra
small gill-sacs on the 2nd and 3rd thoracic segments, a character ex-
tremely abnormal, but of the reality of which I carefully satisfied myself.
To avoid, however, the necessity of manufacturing a new genus, I
describe it as a member of the genus Phronima, as defined by Spence
Bate, under the name of P. bucephala.

With the second of the species to be described the case is differ-
ent, as it will not fit into any genus, whether the Phronima of Spence
Bate, or the genera distinguished by Claus, namely, Phronima, Phroni-
mella, Phronimopsis, and Paraphronima. Of these the species comes
nearest to the definition of Phronimella, which is thus given by Claus :—

“Body much produced, entirely transparent, with but two pairs of
style-shaped uropods, head short, with high-arched upper surface,
vertico-oral axis much produced. The two front segments united
without suture. Mandibular palps wanting even in the male. Tongue
(Zunge) of the maxillipedes reduced to a wart-like excrescence. Both
pairs of gnathopods slender with weak apposed subchele. The third
pair of thoracic appendages somewhat smaller, the fourth much pro-
duced. The fifth pair of legs with a much produced apposed pair of
subchele. Three pairs of gill-sacs on the 4th, 5th, and 6th thoracic
segments.”

With this definition, the specimen agrees in the very important
detail of possessing but two pairs of style-shaped uropods, and in nearly
every other item save in this that, in our species, the “3rd” (4th)
thoracic appendages have the unfortunate peculiarity of being the longest
and almost the largest of the whole series, instead of being smaller. A
minor difference is that the two first thoracic segments, although united,
shew signs of a short, but perfectly distinct, suture between their pleura.

On this account, one is reduced to the alternatives of either widen-
ing the range of Phronimella by cutting out the character referring to
the third thoracic agpendage, or of making a new genus. The making
of new genera is an expedient which should, I take it, be avoided when-
ever possible, so that I prefer to adopt the former alternative and to ~
describe the species as Phronimella hippocephala.

I will now proceed to the description of the two species.

i ee

“=o

oe aF

OO ee eee Oe ee ee ee a eT

1887.] G.M. Giles—Sixv new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 215

(i.) PHRONIMA BUCEPHALA, n. sp., Pl. ITI, Figs. 1 & 2.

Head large, and broad at the top, which is almost completely
occupied by the regularly arranged series of components of the apical
eyes. These latter, though essentially paired organs, very nearly blend
in the middle line, so that only a small space in that situation is
unoccupied by their visual cones. The dorsal aspect of the head forms
a large, transversely oval shield, which is separated from the anterior
and lateral surfaces by a distinct horizontal fold. The portion of
the head below this forms a truncated cone, tapering from the shield
like vertex to the mouth, which is placed on the truncate (ventral)
aspect; the whole presenting a curious resemblance to the head of a
buffalo, which is further heightened by the circumstance that the
maxillipedes, lying along the posterior aspect of the truncated cone,
present an outline much like the large fleshy fold behind the lower jaw
of that animal. The lateral eyes are placed on the lateral aspect of the
head, immediately below the fold that separates the lower truncate
portion from the oval apical shield. Their component cones, like those
of the apical eyes, are regularly arranged, but are somewhat widely
separated, so that there is no true faceting, although a close approach
to the true compound faceted eye is attained.

The antennules are short and two-jointed; the first joint about a
quarter the length of the second, which is of clavate form, and termi-
nated by a tuft of fine, short hairs: the entire length of the organ being
a full third less than that of the conical portion of the head.

The antenne are obsolete.

The gnathites are somewhat small and are articulated to the in-
ferior or ventral aspect of the truncated cone. Only enough was seen
of them to establish their being quite of the usual type, without any
salient peculiarities, and that the mandibles are unprovided with any
appendage. An unfortunate lurch of the ship spilled the portion of the
dissection containing them as they were being separated for the pur-
pose of drawing.

The thorax, as seen from above, forms with the cephalic shield a
pear-shaped body ; its five anterior dorsally visible segments being very
broad, the penultimate tapering rapidly, and the last being very long and
narrow. The first two are short and hard to distinguish from each
other.

All the thoracic appendages, with the exception of the anterior

- gnathopoda, are provided with branchial sacs, but the last two of these

greatly exceed the rest in size. 1st gnathopod about one-sixth the length
of the body. The dactylopodite very minute and claw-shaped, its

216 G. M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

articulation with the propodite flanked by a pair of minute flattened
hair-like bodies. The propodite is simple, slightly falciform, its poste-
rior border fringed with fine, short, stiff sete. It forms, in conjunction
with the prolonged postero-inferior angle of the carpopodite, a somewhat
incomplete subchele. The meropodite and ischiopodite are short and
triangular, and the basipodite is stout and cylindrical, forming more
than a third of the length of the appendage. The 3rd thoracic append-
age, or 2nd gnathopod, is of generally similar form to the preceding,
but is longer and slighter, equalling a fourth of the whole body length.
The subchela, too, is even less perfect, the prolonged postero-inferior
angle of the carpopodite amounting to little more than a stout spine.
The 4th and 5th thoracic appendages, subequal and closely resembling
each other, just equal the combined head and thorax in length, the
anterior being slightly the longer and stouter. In both, the dactylopodite
is minute and claw-like, propodite and carpopodite subequal and
cylindrical, but stouter, and a third shorter than the two preceding
joints, the ischiopodite short and triangular, and the basipodite long,
cylindrical, swelling somewhat at its distal extremity, and forming
quite a third of the length of the whole limb. The 6th thoracic append-
age is by far the strongest of the series; it is, however, considerably
shorter than 3rd and 4th, being as long only as the thorax. The
dactylopodite is represented by a mere rudimentary spine. The propodite
forms a stout curved claw which, in apposition with the inferior border
of the carpopodite, forms a powerful subchela. The carpopodite is
triangular, its inferior border being nearly as long as the lateral. The
antero-inferior angle is prolonged into a powerful spine, and the inferior
border is armed with three dentations, between which are a correspond-
ing number of small, isolated tufts of hairs. The meropodite and
ischiopodite are short and quadrangular, and the basipodite, forming
fully half the length of the limb, is stout, cylindrical, and strengthened
along its posterior border by a narrow buttress. The 7th and 8th thoracic
appendages are alike in plan, the former being, however, decidedly
the smaller, especially as to the basipodite, which is much longer and
stouter in the 8th appendage. In both, the dactylopodites are minute
and claw-like, the propodites of an elongated pyriform outline. The
carpo- and meropodites cylindrical, the ischiopodites short and triangu-
lar, and the basipodites spindle-shaped.

Abdomen narrow, tapering, depressed rather than compressed,
the first three segments long, diminishing from before backwards, the
first nearly equalling the long last thoracic segment in length, the third
being but half its length. The last three together only equal the 2nd in
length,

1887.] G.M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 217

The first three abdominal appendages are of the usual amphipod
type, the first and third being subequal, the middle one slightly the
longest. The last three abdominal appendages are alike in plan, and the
fourth is the longest. They consist of a long cylindrical basal joint
provided with a pair of lanceolate rami with serrate margins. The
penultimate pair are the shortest of the three and the last but little
inferior to the fourth in size. The basal joint of the fourth has the
appearance of being composed of two joints; such an arrangement is,
however, froma morphological point of view, so improbable, that,
although it is represented in the drawing, I have hesitated to describe it
as such. Both sides, however, appeared alike.

The telson appears obsolete.

The unique specimen is certainly a female, but the unlucky accident
to the dissection prevented my dissecting out the generative organs.

Its actual length was 5°75 mm.

(ii.) PHRONIMELLA HIPPOCEPHALA, n. sp,, Pl. III, Fig. 3.

The second species differs from the first in many important points,
Speaking generally, it is, both as to body and limbs, if I may use the
expression, a much more lanky species.

The head somewhat resembles that of a horse in shape, but the
resemblance is not nearly so striking as that of the first species to the
head of a bull. It is not so broad at the top, and no fold surrounds it;
so that the appearance of a cephalic shield is not produced: its dorsal
aspect is covered with a large, widely separated pair of apical eyes.
The lateral eyes are situated low down laterally, of medium size,
and of the same structure as in the first species.

Both antennules and antenneé are present; the former, much the
larger, consist of a three-jointed peduncle and a flagellum of eight
or ten short segments, total length equal to a third of the body exclusive
of the head. The first two joints of the peduncle are short, while the
third, of dilated spindle-shaped form, makes up more than half the
length of the organ. Near the distal extremity it is provided with a few
short, flattened hairs. The flagellum is quite naked with the excep-
tion of one or two small hairs on the last joint.

The antenne are little more than half the length of the antennules
and consist of a peduncle formed of three short joints and a naked
tapering flagellum as long as that of the antennule, the proximal arti-
culations of which are ill-marked.

Being unwilling to destroy my only specimen, the gnathites and
masxillipedes were not closely examined: they appeared to resemble very
clgegly those of the first species,

28

218 G.M. Giles—Sitw new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2

The thoraz is long, narrow, depressed rather than compressed,
the first two dorsally visible segments scarcely separable. The third
has the inferior angle of its pleuron produced into a sort of triangular
spine, overlapping the second. The fourth and fifth, of nearly equal
length, form the widest portion of the body; the sixth longer and
narrower than these; and the last, the longest and narrowest of all,
is provided behind with a spine on either side of the middle line and
has this posterior border considerably everted, so as to admit of
hyperextension of the abdomen on the thorax.

The 5th, 6th, and 7th thoracic appendages are avoided with
branchial sacs, the hindermost being the largest. In the gnathopoda, the
coxal extension of the pleura is considerable, and extends well below the
level of any of the rest. The gnathopoda are on the same general plan
as those of the first species, but are much longer and more slender, and
their subchele are far less developed, being represented, in the anterior
of the two, by a process some distance from the inferior extremity of the
carpopodite, and, in the posterior, by a small projection half way along

its length (this is if anything somewhat exaggerated in the drawing).
The 4th is considerably the longest of all the appendages. It is,
however, very slender, both the 5th and 6th exceeding it in stout-
ness. It equals in length the thorax and first two segments of the
abdomen, and to all appearance consists of but five joints, the dacty-
lopodite being represented only as a minute hair-like body. The
propodite is very long and tapering, forming nearly a third of the length
of the limb. The carpopodite, meropodite, and basipodite are long and
cylindrical, and the ischiopodite is short and quadrangular. The 5th
closely resembles the preceding, but is shorter than it by the length of
the basipodite, the carpopodite being less than half as long as that of the
3rd. The postero-inferior angle of its ischiopodite is prolonged into a
spine, and the posterior border of its much stouter basipodite is armed,
along the distal half of its posterior border, with three strong serrate
spines. The 6th is considerably the stoutest of the series, and equals
the thorax and first segment of the abdomen in length. The dactylopodite
is represented only by a minute hair-like body, the propodite, long and
falciform, the carpopodite, a long flattened body, the opposible inferior
border of which is but of small extent, is armed along its anterior
border with six powerful serrations, so that the extremity much more
resembles the sabre of a Squilla than a subchela. The mero- and ischio-
podites are short and triangular, each having the anterior border armed
with two serrations. The basipodite, cylindrical above, is three-sided
below, each border ending in a strong spinous process, in addition
to which the anterior border is armed with three stout, and the posterio

1887.] G.M. Giles—Siw new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 219

with two smaller, serrations. The 7th and 8th are alike in all respects,
Save size, the hinder being the larger. With the exception of the
short triangular ischiopodites, all the joints are cylindrical. The longer
of the two barely equals the abdomen in length. In both the dactylopo-
dites are minute and hair-like.

The abdomen is slightly shorter than the thorax, the segments
diminishing in length from before backwards. The anterior extremity
of the first segment, where it joins the thorax, is much constricted, the
broadest part of the region being across the secondsegment. The last
three segments together barely equal the third in length.

The three anterior abdominal appendages are of the usual type, the
middle one being the largest and the hindermost, the smallest. The
fourth consists of a cylindrical basal joint nearly as long as the third
abdominal segment. It is provided with two lanceolate entire-margined
rami, the outer of which is slightly the larger. The fifth is represented
only by a short bud-like rudiment. The last closely resembles the
fourth, but is somewhat shorter, and its rami are equal.

The telson is rudimentary.

A single specimen measuring about 7 mm. in length.

§ 2. RHABDOSOMA INVESTIGATORIS, n. sp, Pl. IV.

This species presents a close resemblance to &. whiter and BR.
armatum, forms which have recently been demonstrated to be male and
female of one species by Claus,* by whom, as also by J. H. Streets,f they
are well described. The two must accordingly now stand as &. armatum
(Milne-Edwards).

After comparing the present species with the above descriptions,
I am inclined tothink that it is a distinct form, more especially as
the animal was obtained, although at some distance from the land,
from the shallow muddy water about the Palmyrus shoals. Still, the
resemblances are so numerous that the shortest way of describing the
new species will be to enumerate the differences from the above quoted
descriptions of R. armatum.

Two specimens, one male and the se female, were obtained ;
the latter being that shown in the figure. It is probably an adult, as
the brood-pouch, although empty, is well-marked and of considerable
size.

The differences, described from the female as the more complete
specimen, are as follows.—l. The head is shorter, not equalling (rostrum
included) one half the total length of the body. 2. The mandibular

* Arbeit. aus d. zool. Inst. d. Univ. Wien. u. d. zool. Stat. Triest, 1879, II, 2.
t+ Proc. Acad. Sc. Phil., 1878, pp. 287—290.

220 G. M. Giles—Sia new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

palp is longer, exceeding in length considerably the first joint of the
inferior antenne. 3. Spence Bate (Cat. Amphipodous Crust. Brit. Mus.
1862) describes R. whitei as “ having the coxa of first pair of gnathopoda
produced to an obtuse point”: this is wanting in our species. 4. All
three of the authorities agree in describing considerable differences
between the Ist and 2nd gnathopoda in size, length, and formation :
in the present species these are subequal and very closely resemble
each other. 5. Spence Bate describes the pereiopoda (last 5 thoracic
appendages) as gradually increasing in length posteriorly, the fourth
pair longest, the fifth obsolete. In our form, the third is longer than the
fourth, aud the fifth, although either obsolete or destroyed in the male, is
represented by a club-shaped basipodite in the female. 6. The same
writer also gives the last three abdominal appendages as differing con-
siderably in length, the last being the longest, while in our form they are
subequal, the first being a trifle the longest.

Length of male 2°5 c. m., of female 4°9 c. m.

The male differs further in the inferior antenne being much shorter,
and the mandibular appendage correspondingly diminished.

I append a table of measurements from Claus of R. armatwm; and
a comparison of the corresponding measurements of the present species
in an adjacent column is, I think, alone sufficient to establish the specific
distinctness of the two forms. The measurements are in millimeters.

R. investi-
R. armatum. gatoris,
ii 3 a = Sy oe ee
eS He |g
Length of rostrum (broken) .... |, 15 | 18 | 20 | 36 | 24 | 28 +| 10
9 ” Odd sSiwe sus esane eee 64 8 8 9 10 11 44 8
yy ong CNOLAK ceceve woes coe 6:4 8 9 9 1 | Fy 4 7
» 9», anterior abd. segs. Tal Ob el AO TBs di), rie 5 7
» 9» Ath abd. seg. ssssoere 3 4 f 8 al os SE
» 9» oth & 6th abd. segs. 33.1 43 | BR ae 2 33
” ” GEIGON csiscdie Hecvewes 6 9 8 10 18 234 32 6
» 9» Lst caudal style Sssi6 saa 6 8 72 | Seer tO. | ai 31 53
ee ee eae Mr 45 | 43) 54; 8 | — ae 52
3 i. i. OTe. 5, 99 eee 6 8 7 9 |;— |18 | — 53

In the male specimen of our species the rostrum is very much
broken, in the female it is nearly complete. The specimens are preserved
in the Indian Museum.

§ 3. AMPHIPRONOE LONGICORNUTA, n. sp., Pl. V.

Three specimens of the small amphipodous crustacean to be de-
scribed below were taken in the drift-net in the clear but shallow water
of the Mergui Archipelago.

It probably has its proper habitat at the surface, as it swims easily,

1887.] G.M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 221

though with no great speed. Its most salient peculiarity is the immense
length of the rigid 5-jointed antenne, which are much longer than in
any form hitherto described, and are carried folded up and directed
obliquely downwards and forwards in front of it.

The total length of the body is 6°5 mm., and the animal is opaque,
of a pale pinkish brown tint, and plentifully sprinkled with deep mad-
der-brown pigment spots, which are most numerous on the pleura and
coxze of the thorax, and on the entire surface of the 2nd and 3rd
abdominal segments.

It is stoutly built, not markedly compressed.

The head is large, its length, depth, and breadth each equalling
rather less than 1th the body length; its entire upper and lateral
surfaces occupied by the large regularly faceted eyes, and its anterior
inferior aspect deeply hollowed for the reception of the antennules and
of the first joint of the antenne.

The thorax forms the broadest and deepest part of the body, but its
segments are short, so that its entire length is but 2th longer than
the head. The coxal plates are united to the pleura, without any very
obvious suture, and the first and the last two segments have their
terga ankylosed.

The antenneé and antennules are formed on almost exactly the same
plan as those of Rhabdosoma. On looking at the latter genus, one is in-
clined to be led to the conclusion that the curious antennsz have been
evolved to enable the animal to reach out beyond the enormously pro-
longed rostrum and cephalon generally, which latter formation together
with its generally slender form certainly suits the attainment of a high
rate of speed. The present species, however, demonstrates the danger of
such hasty deduction, as we have here the antenne of even greater
proportional length than in Rhabdosoma, while the head and body
generally are short and stout and the entire plan of its structure is
adapted for strength rather than speed.

The antennules, when at rest, are almost completely hidden within
the depression of the antero-inferior face of the cephalon, the tip
of the flagellum only being visible; they consist of a three-jointed
peduncle of peculiar form (Fig. 2.) and a three-jointed flagellum (Figs. 2.
& 3.). The basal jointis articulated to the recessed surface of the
cephalon, close to the middle line, at a point about even with the
middle of the eye. The first two joints are short and compressed
and quadrate, directed obliquely downwards and forwards; the third
joint is much larger, and is much compressed, so that, seen from
below, it appears merely slightly clavate, viewed laterally, it is seen
to be broad and of falciform outline, curving round, so that its distal

222 G.M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

border comes to be directed upwards and forwards. Its convex border
is thickly clothed with a multitude of very fine, soft, flexible hairs,
regularly arranged in distinct, but closely placed, transverse rows. The
body of the joint is filled up by a large ganglionic mass, which appears
to send off branches to the bases of the hairs. The flagellum (Fig. 3.) is
extremely small in proportion to the peduncle, and consists of three
joints, subequal in length, compressed, and diminishing progressively in
breadth, so that the last joint is cylindrical; the first joint is provided
with a circlet of soft clavate or spindle-shaped flattened hairs not so
long as, but considerably broader than, those of the distal joint of the
peduncles. The second has a similar pair of hairs springing from a de-
pression on its distal aspect, while the last joint, which presents two
slight constrictions in its length, is free from hairs, with the exception
of three stiff tapering auditory bristles at its extremity. The entire
organ is less than a millemeter in length and is so articulated as to be
capable of flexion and extension only, no lateral play being practicable.

The antenne take their origin a little behind, but much external
to, the antennules, so that their first joint is placed close to the wall
of the recess, and, in their habitual posture, they are completely hidden
from the outside. The first joint reaches quite to the front of the recess,
so that, to the casual observer, the second appears to be the first joint
of the appendage, and to take its origin considerably in front of the
antennules. The 2nd, 3rd, and 4th joints are carried folded sharply upon
one another and the 2nd and 3rd of them are each half as long as the
animal exclusive of the last two abdominal segments; the fourth is
slightly shorter and the fifth very short: the proportional length of the
5 joints being as 25: 67:67:60: 3; and the whole length of the organ
being a little over 9 mm., or about 15 times the length of the body.
Each joint is thickly clothed with extremely fine short hairs, too small
to be visible except under very high amplification. The musculature of
their appendages is peculiar. In the first joint, a pair of powerful
muscles, flexor and extensor, are located in its proximal two-thirds, and
act by means of two distinct tendons on the second joint. In the re-
maining articulations, the muscles are confined to a small part of the
distal extremities, which are dilated for their reception, the muscles
in each case being in pairs so that no lateral motion is obtainable. .

The mouth-organs appeared to be very rudimentary, but were not
closely examined.

The 2nd and 8rd thoracic appendages (gnathopoda) are short and
stout and can scarcely be made out in the usual position of the animal,
being carried folded closely against the ventral surface of the body.
They closely resemble each other, differing only in the more anterior

1887.] G.M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 223

being stouter with its basipodite shorter than in the hinder; they are
provided with a curious complex subchela (Fig. 7.). The dactylopo-
dite forms a stout sharp claw and is articulated to the propodite by
a movable joint acted on by powerful muscles. The propodite consists
of a stout cylindrical curved body so bent that its posterior border is
apposed to the prolonged inferior border of the carpopodite. This
posterior border is armed with a strong flat plate provided with a
toothed cutting edge. The carpopodite is stout, compressed, and
quadrangular, and has its infero-posterior angle prolonged into a sharp
process. The posterior half of this border is formed by a thin plate with
a toothed edge, opposable to the smaller plate on the propodite. In
extreme flexion, these two plates overlap each other, the carpopodital
plate passing inside that of the propodite; all the remaining articula-
tions are compressed, but broad and strong, the meropodites are short
and triangular, the ischiopodites short and quadrangular. The basi-
podite of the 2nd gnathopoda is as long as all the other articulations
together, while that of the first is but 3 as long; in both, the articu-
lations are curved forwards and extremely stout. A cord-like glandular
body runs through the middle of each of these appendages ending in
the base of the propodite. It is difficult to be certain as to the point of
exit of its duct, but this was doubtfully made out as opening near the
angle between the two limbs of the subchela. The muscles of these
appendages are large and distinct, each joint being provided with a
flexor and extensor; in the two distal articulations, the flexor is by far
the more powerful, but in the next the two are nearly of equal strength,
while, of the muscles contained in the basipodite, the extensor is the
more powerful, and its tendon, passing through the ischiopodite, is
inserted into the base of the meropodite, being reinforced by only a
small slip taking origin from the former joint, while only a small
accessory slip of the extensor contained in the basipodite is inserted
into the ischiopodite. The 4th and 5th thoracic appendages are cylin-
drical and of the usual ambulatory type; they are subequal, slightly
exceeding the thorax in length, but the fifth is slightly the stouter of the
two. The 6th and 7th are like the two preceding appendages, save that
their basipodites are strengthened by strong buttress-like developments
of their anterior and posterior borders ; the 7th but little exceeds the 5th
in length ; but the 6th is the longest of all the thoracic appendages, equal-
ling the thorax and the first abdominal segment inlength. The 8th tho-
racic appendage is peculiar, its basipodite is formed on the same plan as
those of the sixth and seventh, but is shorter, and if anything broader, so
that its outline approaches the circular, and its remaining joints are so
short that together they do not equal the breadth of the basipodite.

224 G.M. Giles—Siz new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. (No. 2,

The first three abdominal appendages are subequal and are of quite
the usual amphipod type, but are rather short. The three remaining
(Fig. 8) abdominal appendages differ greatly in length; the lst has
the protopodite as long as the basipodite of the longest thoracic append-
age; its two rami are foliaceous, the inner. slightly exceeding the outer
ramus. The 5th is but half the size of the 4th, and the irregularity of
its rami is more marked, while the last appendage is but half the length
of the penultimate and has its inner ramus nearly twice as long as the
outer.

The animal agrees well with all the characteristics of the genus as
given in Spence Bate, though the 8th thoracic appendage would perhaps
be better described as stunted than as rudimentary.

§ 4. LeEsTRIGONUS BENGALENSIS, n. sp., Pls. VI. & VII.

In looking over the literature referring to the genera Lestrigonus
and Hyperia, it becomes increasingly apparent that Spence Bate’s
suspicion as to the doubtful value of the latter genus was well founded.
One after another species of Lestrigonus have been paired off as males
with Hyperia females, so that the latter genus must, in all probability, be
entirely abandoned, as its retention could only be justified by the dis-
covery of a form whose males retain permanently the character of the
genus.

The present species is one of the commonest surface organisms of
the Bay of Bengal, and is especially so in the more truly pelagic por-
tion of its area.

I was on this account able to obtain a large number of specimens,—
including (a) females of Hyperia form, but with rudimentary inferior
antenne ; (b) immature males of Hyperia-form; and (c) 9 mature males
of Lestrigonus form,—amongst which all stages between the two latter
conditions were observable.

I notice that the pelagic Lestrigoni are very generally credited with
being parasitic on meduse, &c. In the present species, this is not
the case. I have occasionally seen them ensconced in the cavity of a
Salpa, but believe this to have been an accidental circumstance, as by
far the larger number were captured swimming freely.

The specimen figured (Pl. VI.) was taken in the drift-net about
100 miles from land in the Bay of Bengal, the depth of the water in the
locality being 850 fathoms. Seven specimens were obtained on this
occasion and some hundreds have since been taken.

As all specimens of the Lestrigonus-form are of nearly equal size,
and all the appendages are fully developed, it is probable that they are,
in spite of their small size, adult animals. The greater part of the

1887.] G. M. Giles—Siz new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 225

surface of the body and appendages is liberally besprinkled with patches
of black pigment, so that, seen in the water, they appeared of a dark
reddish grey tint. The pigmentation is deepest on the pleura of the
thoracic segments, on the basipodites of their appendages, and on the
abdomen. The lower part of the cephalon, too, including the gnathites,
is so deeply pigmented, that it is extremely difficult to make out the
arrangement of the parts, as they are almost opaque to transmitted and
nearly impossible to be illuminated by direct light. The entire length
of the animal is 2°5 m.m.

The only two of the members of the genus enumerated in Spence
Bate and elsewhere which approach it in size are DT. ferus and L. fuscus,
though both of these are considerably larger than any of my specimens.
Moreover, in the present species, the seventh thoracic appendage (fourth
pereiopod) is considerably larger than the preceding and succeeding ap-
pendages, whereas in DL. ferws all three are described as subequal, and
in L. fuscus the third pereiopod is stated to be longer than the fourth.

It differs also from the description and figures of these species in
several other particulars, I would, therefore, propose to name it D.
bengalensis.

In swimming, it progresses by a series of jerks, lying on its side and
moving in small circles.

The head is the broadest portion of the animal, the two immense
eyes projecting considerably beyond the very narrow thorax when seen
from above. The eyes are of large size and distinctly faceted, the anterior
faceted membrane being easily separable, and they cover the entire upper
and lateral aspects of the head, the anterior aspect of which is deeply
excavated for the reception of the antenne.

The thorax is composed of seven distinct, but very short, segments ;
the junction between the pleura and the coxal plates being hard to make
out, as also are the junctions of the terga of the first 5 thoracic segments.
The segments increase in length slightly from before backwards, but not
to any very marked extent; the entire thorax forming less than a third
of the entire length of the animal.

The first three abdominal segments are of very large size, especially
the first two, either of which is as long as any three of the thoracic
segments. The fourth abdominal segment is much shorter and narrowed
in front, so as to be freely movable under the much excavated posterior
border of the third. The fifth and sixth abdominal segments are very
small, and the latter is united without suture to the short, accurately
semicircular telson.

The antennules are as long as the entire body of the animal plus
the protopodite of the sixth abdominal appendage. Their peduncles

29

226 G.M. Giles—Sie new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

consist of three joints, of which the first is large and globular and filled
with a number of muscular bands, that are evidently capable of
moving its articulation with the second in all directions. It contains
also a small antennular gland. The second is extremely short, and the
third, which is pear-shaped, is provided, along its inferior border, with
a number of closely set exceedingly fine hairs. The flagellum consists
of between 20 and 30 long, narrow articulations, longest in the middle
of the organ, the first being exceptionally short. Hach joint carries
two or three exceedingly fine hairs, and the last, a pair of blunt, cylindri-
cal hairs of uniform thickness throughout.

The antenn@ are shorter than the antennules, equalling in length only
the head, thorax, and first two abdominal segments ; and, like these, their
peduncles are three-jointed, the third joint being considerably longer than
the two first. The flagellum is also closely similar, but differs in the first
joint being long and conical, and in the armature of the terminal joint,
which is provided with a pair of bifid (or, possibly, four) tapering hairs.

The dissection of the gnathites was attended with considerable
difficulty no less on account of their extreme minuteness than because of
their dense pigmentation, so that I am even now by no means satisfied
as to the exact relative position of the parts in this stage of the
animal. The mandibles (Fig. 6.) are stout and provided with a long
three-jointed naked palp. Their masticatory plate (shown separate-
ly in Fig. 7) is peculiarly well developed, being provided with several
rows of regularly arranged conical teeth. The maxille are liberally
toothed and the maxillipedes have one of their lobes terminated by a
biramous jointed appendage.

The second of the thoracic appendages is short and stout and pro-
vided with a somewhat incomplete subchela. The third, longer and
somewhat slighter, has the subchela very well developed, the opposable
prolongation of their carpopodites being distinctly hollowed out for the
reception of the cylindrical propodite. The remaining thoracic append-
ages are of the usual type, increasing regularly in size to the seventh,
which is largest; the sixth and eighth being subequal. The eighth hag
its posterior border provided with a strong buttress-like plate. Some
of the posterior thoracic appendages are provided with gill-sacs, but I
was unable to satisfy myself as to their exact number and position in
this stage of the animal, although they are probably identical with those
of the Hyperia-stage. a

The first three abdominal appendages are subequal, and on the
usual amphipod plan. The remaining three have long protopodites
and small equal rami, the first two being subequal, while the last is a
quarter shorter than the preceding two pairs.

1887.] G.M. Giles—Six new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal 227

The form (the Hyperia-stage) figured on Pl. VI. was obtained on the
same occasion as the Lestrigonus bengalensis. The specimens were about
equally divided between the sexes; and I have little doubt that the
males (Fig. 1.) are merely a young stage of this species, as they agree in
all essential particulars save the smaller development of the flagella of
the antenne. Even here the difference lies only in the smaller length of
the individual joints and not in their number. Seen apart from the
more fully developed forms, they would certainly be assigned to the
genus Hyperia, especially some specimens, smaller than that figured, in
which the antenne are even shorter. If this supposition be correct,
distinctions between Hyperia and Lestrigonus can hardly, as already
advanced, be of generic value. Whether or not all male Hyperia ulti-
mately develop a long flagellum is of course doubtful, but there can be
little doubt that all Lestrigonus pass through an Hyperia-stage. Speak-
ing generally, the Hyperia-stage is shorter and stouter and more like
the female (Fig. 3.) described below. In this specimen, I could clearly
make out three gill-sacs attached to the 4th, 5th, and 6th thoracic
segments. I was more fortunate, too, in the dissection of the gnathites
in the younger than in the adult specimen; and a glance at the in-
complete figures of those of the adult form as compared with those
of the more completely figured Hyperia-stage confirms the opinion as to
the identity of the two forms. With the exception of the antenng, the
appendages are practically identical in both, save that in the younger
form they are proportionally a trifle shorter than in the adult.

The female, in general form, closely resembles the young male; she
is, however, shorter, but more stoutly built, the very short thoracic seg-
ments being of remarkable depth. The principal external difference
between the sexes lies in the antenns, which, in the female, are
remarkably ill developed. In the antennules, there is a three-jointed
peduncle, practically identical with that of the male, but the flagellum
is reduced to a rudimentary first jot. The antenne are reduced
to a rudiment of the basal joint of the peduncle. All the females
collected carried in a well-developed brood-pouch a number (about 18
or 20) of largish (6°25 m.) ova, none of which had gone beyond the stage
of segmentation. The length of the specimen figured is 1°75 mm.

§ 5. EURYSTHEUS HIRSUTUS, n. sp., Pl. VIII.

The species described below was taken on the same occasion ag
Lestrigonus bengalensis. It is nearly transparent and, saving a few
scattered patches of reddish brown pigment, colourless. Only a single
specimen was obtained.

The animal is 4 m.m. long.

228 G. M. Giles—Sia new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. [No. 2,

The head is ths of the total length, irregularly quadrate and
smooth ; it is produced anteriorly into a small blunt rostrum, and the
small eye, which is pigmented red brown and consists of numerous
ocelli, is placed opposite to the root of the antennules.

The thorax and abdomen are of equal length and of nearly the
same depth and breadth throughout. In the thorax, the segments in-
crease regularly in length from before backwards, while the first two of
the abdomen are subequal to the hinder thoracic segments and the third
is much longer than any other segment, the last three decreasing rapidly
in length.

The antennules are rather more than half as long as the body; the
peduncle forms the larger half of their length and consists of three
stout joints, the distal two of which are fringed on their lower surface
by a number of very long flexible hairs, the proximal joint is beset
with extremely fine short hairs only, the secondary appendage is
small and consists of four short joints well provided with short stiff
hairs, and the flagellum consists of about eleven short articulations
liberally fringed below with short fine hairs.

The antenné are somewhat shorter, slightly less than half the body
length ; their peduncle consists of five joints, of which the first two are
extremely short, the second being armed with a strong downwardly
produced spine, the third joint is longer and stouter than either of those
of the antennules and the fourth and fifth subequal in length and consider-
ably longer; as in the antennules, the two distal joints are liberally
fringed below with long flexible hairs; the flagellum is short, barely
equalling the last joint of the peduncle in length; it consists of seven
short joints all well provided with hairs, the last joint carrying, in
addition, a pair of peculiar stout bifid hairs.

The gnathites could not be examined, with the exception of the
maxillipedes, which are remarkably long and pediform.

All the thoracic appendages are remarkably hirsute, being covered,
in addition to the large stout hairs, shewn in the figure, with a perfect
coat of fine hairs visible only under considerable amplification. The
second and third are very weakly subchelate, the propodites being merely
dilated and not produced into an opposible member. The first is much
smaller and slenderer than the second, but both are on the same general
plan, the dactylopodites being barely serrated and the propodites armed
only with one or two stout spines. The fourth and fifth are subequal,
the fourth slightly the longer and stouter; they slightly exceed the
second in length and are of the usual ambulatory type. The sixth,
seventh, and eighth thoracic appendages agree in having their basipo-
dites very large and strengthened by large anterior and posterior buttress-

j
.

_ NL Ol EE eee eee

1887.] G.M. Giles—Sia new Amphipods from the Bay of Bengal. 229

like plates; they differ, however, considerably in length, the fifth being
the shortest of all the thoracic appendages, while the sixth and seventh
much exceed the anterior ones, the seventh being more than half as
long as the body, and the eighth even longer.

The first three abdominal appendages are rather long and slender,
but are quite of the usual type. The last three are short and cylindrical,
having both their protopodites and rami armed with a number of short
very stout spines; they decrease regularly in length from before back-
wards, the fourth being as long as the fifth and sixth together, and the
sixth, very short. The telson is a short compressed lamina armed with
a number of short tooth like spines similar to those on the posterior
abdominal appendages.

EXPLANATION OF THE PLATES.
Prate III.

Fig. 1. Phronima bucephala, n. sp., male. x 18. Fig. 2. Last three abdo-
minal segments of the same with their appendages. x 60. Fig. 3. Phronimella
hippocephala, n. sp. x 12°5.

PLATE IV.

Fig. 1. Rhabdosoma investigatoris, n. sp., female, as seen by dark ground illu-
mination. x 38. Fig. 2. Thorax with appendages of the same. x 14. Fig. 3.
End of an antennule. x 200.

PLATE V.

Fig. 1. Amphipronoé longicornutus, nu. sp., male. x 17. Fig. 2. Antennule.
x 39. Fig. 3. Flagellum of antennule. x 180. Fig. 4. An antenna. x 7.
Fig. 5. First joint of an antenna. x 40. Fig. 6. Head seen from below (diagram-
matic). Fig. 7. 2nd thoracic appendage. x 110. Fig. 8. Last three abdominal
segments. x 25.
PuaTE VI.

Fig. 1. Lestrigonus bengalensis, n. sp., male. x 40. Fig. 2. Last joint of
antennule. x 400. Fig. 3. Last joint of an antenna. x 400. Fig. 4. Peduncle of
antennule. x 100. Fig. 5. Peduncle of antenna. x 100. Fig. 6. Mandible and
its appendage. x 200. Fig. 7. Masticatory plate of mandible. x 200. Fig. 8.
The maxilla. x 200. Fig. 9. Portion of maxilipede. x 100. Fig. 10. Last three

segments of abdomen with their appendages, seen from above. x 60.

PLATE VII.

Fig. 1. Lestrigonus bengalensis, nu. sp., immature male. x 40. Fig. 2. Last
three segments, seen from below. x 40. Fig. 3. Lestrigonus bengalensis, female.
x 40. Fig. 4. An ovum from her brood-pouch. x 40, Fig. 5. Head of female,
front view. x 40. Fig. 6. Mandible and its appendages. x 200. Fig. 7. 1st
maxilla. x 200. Fig. 8. 2nd maxilla. x 200. Fig. 9. Maxillipede. x 200.

Puate VIII.

Eurystheus hirsutus, nu. sp. x 40.

ONIN NIN INI NIN INI NS wes

230 A. Carpenter—The Mean Temperature of the [No. 2,

XVI.—Natural History Notes from H. Ms Indian Marine Survey
Steamer ‘Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED Carpenter, R. N,,
Commanding. No.8. The Mean Temperature of the Deep Waters of
the Bay of Bengal. By Oommander Carprnter, R. N., D. S. Oy
F. R. Met. Soc., F. Z. S.—Communicated by Tun SuPERINTENDENT OF
THE InpIAN Museum.

[Received August Ist ;—Read August 3rd, 1887.]
(With Plate X.)

The temperature curves of the deep sea at different points in the
Bay of Bengal vary but little at depths greater than 100 fathoms. The
larger number of observations have naturally been made in shallow
waters, that is to say, in less than 300 fathoms ; but, still, more than one
observation has now been obtained for every 100 fathoms down to 1900
fathoms. The greatest depth at which the temperature has been ob-
tained is 2,105 fathoms, off the east coast of Ceylon, at which depth a
Casella-Miller thermometer shewed 33°.7 Fahr. corrected for pressure,
the correction being 0°°8 subtractive. As will be seen by the following
example, the uniformity of temperature comes to be a check on the ac-
curacy of the thermometers and, vice versé,on the accuracy of the depth
found.

No. of | Depth | Correct-
Date. Thermo-| in Fa- | ed tem- Locality.
meter | thoms. |perature.
used.
Os A WBBD nyse 31478 675 41°'7 | Near the head of the Bay of Bengal.
ZOO LYV .. F886 75500 19042 675 421 | Hast of Little Andaman Island,

Boag Vs, 1886; sy. 32096

675 | 41°8 | Off Colombo, Ceylon.

Here we see only a variation of half a degree at the same depth in
widely different places, and the error of reading off absorbs quite half of
that. Unfortunately, the scale is not cut on the thermometer tube but
on porcelain at the side; and, as the bent tube of the Miller-Casella ad-
mits of a small movement, care has to be taken to hold the tube firmly
against the scale, so that both mercury ends shew similar readings, be-
fore taking the reading of the minimum index, which has been pushed
up the tube to some lower temperature whilst under water. The uni-

PU. X.

GARPENTER, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Bengal, 1887, Vol. LVI, Pt. I.

Bay of Bengal.

Depth in Fathoms.

| |
sh ia 4 4 5
“paooeaao 7 BEER EE eee EEEEE EEE EE EEEEE PEFECH
3 a HI H
{ ct alata a re
i=} } |
2 3
nu t
3 ee :
$ | ro
fo} TI
| IS OOIS ao
SECC
& | jt o
g 7 H
EECo ae aa
° ia i 14 |
8 [
Ht a
ett Ht
a EEC fat] ai peat a je 4 a
fala tstalstetat stale in Ce
BEEEH ae fer f=iaha etal elo|isfst eal sltel attain ata oa sued Peo
El nlaletatataiate| EE ia o C] EERE EEE EEE EE F
ct
9 im ime |
: ie , |
2 : ietaletabale H
Fe f I | | ET
HH ia rH “| f !
=} _| Lt t | | ABS
gssseetft fal Fltinasareaniiatize siititssectt ae
Ct iGOOE Sa fof 1 a ina a CI
2 conegammam EEE EEE EEL eH : BESS estes
5 ry a r a Eee | Ae
im EEE a8 cI Coo
3 ct oh HEH EEE
; in 1] al ial i] | + I jal
el mI a a Ce | | | i
sey aa Bae eee on EE nae = a He
a i aoe alm yia i
(sha
see : EEE mana Ht
atelet :
2 selalala eat ae aaa ah Co CARRERE EERE EEE EERE EEEEEEELE
SEEEEEET EEE zis HI Fre Ht stale
oH seg ggueeage saarerecet eee
PEE ; Hy + {-+
S tt t ct t cl co HI
x Bsial (alee abel aie tals etal) alata] [tal olel eh etel stata) etet alah sl an| asl efataletalfel ala: be) tsst ssa eats ota a eles
TI [| ia ID SESE a] at | fa ic a | mB Os L
aialetal SEE poSoeoe! ei si nae is ie i aa YL
oft ig x SHertts E iH [ i Ht PEPE EEE EEE EEE ne
PEPE ro
Boog 1
| [| a |e]
g | ooo

fo} tod
re) CT [
He :
Fi ERE EEE
g Poet
3 Saisie
[
fo}
°
a
lo}
oO
3 im
:
ao
Sa! im
i=}
o
|
°
°o
=
1
te}
a
°o
f=}
D-}
C|
3
. a
is}
5
c-}
o
i=}
i—]
+
o
=}
=]
i=}
x
S qOSoS
4 1
3 g
i=)
At
ie}
cr)
4
Pas
é
of =
zl Paes alata alata
=| jt
=| as ee
* = t.
a | | i Ls —
: a - a Oo > <) 2a — aon oe FON 5 o ™= oO ag = 6
;. Beak ta Reourare ye rodune 1,

36

33

1887. ] Deep Waters of the Bay of Bengal. 231

formity of temperature also shows a uniform origin, for the change of
temperature in large bodies of water is slow. The submarine inflow
which must come from the southward to make up for the great eva-
poration of the bay, is therefore probably uniform in temperature and
widely spread. It should be mentioned, however, that the observations
have been entirely made in the fine season between November and May ;
and, although surface disturbance by wind would be unlikely to affect
deep currents, yet it is just possible that the great climatic difference
between the two monsoons may upset the balance in other ways and so
alter the rate of submarine inflow.

Slow-moving deep currents such as would exist at the bottom of
the Bay of Bengal cannot be accurately tested by any means yet de-
vised. It is true that the United States Coast Survey have lately de-
tailed a vessel specially to take the strength and direction of the Gulf
Stream in the Straits of Florida, and that a careful section was obtain-
ed, by means of special fittings, of the strength and volume of the
stream in that its narrowest portion. But even there, where consider-
able movement might have been expecied, it never exceeded one mile
an hour at the bottom, which was only some 400 fathoms deep. It is
then unlikely that the same instrument, ingenious as it is, would be of
any service at the greater depths owing to the far greater sources of
error and the very much slower movement.

Whatever current-meter is used will have to be very sensitive, and
must be anchored at the bottom for at least thirty hours, without being
fouled by fish or weed, to minimise errors of lowering it down, pres-
sure, hauling up, &e.

Surface currents are, however, guaged with comparative ease, and
the depth of these as yet found by the “ Investigator ” range from 80
fathoms to 175 fathoms in the open waters of the bay.

Off the Rivers Hughli and Ganges, a higher temperature was fre-
quently found at five to ten fathoms than at the surface, and this pro-
bably occurs when the fresh water of the rivers brings down a lower
temperature, and temporarily overlies the salt water.

Future observations of temperature will be unlikely to vary more
than one degree Fahr. from the mean curve given in the accompanying
plate for depths greater than 100 fathoms; but at depths between 10
and 100 fathoms they may vary 5° either way.

A remarkable verification of depth by aid of the thermal reading
was made in March last. When tabulating the mean temperatures
last January, I noticed that the temperature shewn at a cast of 1400
fathoms, made in 1885, in Lat. 19°.34' N., Long. 91°.07’ E., was far more
suitable to a depth of 1000 fathoms. Upon reference to the Sounding

232 <A. Carpenter—The Mean Temperature of the, &c. [No. 2, 1887.]

Record Book, it was seen that the cast was given a value of only “ fair,”
whilst a remark was made that “the wire appeared to have lain on the
bottom,” too light a weight having been used to shew the instant of
contact. The opportunity offered soon after of making another cast on
the same spot with an improved sounding machine, when a depth of
912 fathoms was obtained with a temperature differing only one degree
from that of the former cast.

Whilst taking some soundings east of the Andaman islands in
November last, I found that there were two abnormal temperatures,
one of 41°.7 at 782 fathoms instead of 40°.5, which is the mean at that
depth, and one of 41°.2 at 1010 fathoms instead of 37°.7. Both of these
temperatures point to the water having been warmed by passage over
some shallower ridge of about 740 fathoms (see accompanying plate).

If we look at a chart of the east side of the Bay of Bengal, we see
that there are three inlets into this partly enclosed sea. One is only
150 fathoms deep, viz., Preparis Channel; one is not marked with any
depth, viz., the Ten Degree Channel ; and one has 760 fathoms marked
nearly on the ridge between Acheen Head and Great Nicobar. The
two high temperatures at 782 fathoms and 1010 fathoms seem to prove,
so far as two observations can be a proof, that no greater depth than
740 fathoms exists on the ridges between Acheen Head and Great
Nicobar and in the Ten Degree Channel.

A glance at the curve will show that a striking change occurs at
150 fathoms, and that below that depth the diminution of temperature
is much more gradual.

This agrees with our observations of the depth of the surface cur-
rents, that is to say, of the quick-moving portion of this ocean. After
1200 fathoms the change of temperature becomes very slow. A line
joining Sandoway in Arrakan with Calingapatam on the Orissa coast
forms the southern limit of the 1200 fathom contour of the bottom of
the Bay. Down to 1200 fathoms the thermometer is a check on the
depth obtained, but deeper than that there is too little change.

The mean temperature of the first 150 fathoms being a moving
variable* may have some influence on the climatic conditions of the
Bay.

A warm surface current was met with in April in Lat. 17°.34' N.,
Long. 88° H., where the water down to 120 fathoms was all 4 to 7 de-
grees above the mean, the greatest difference being at 60 fathoms. It
was then setting to the H. N. H.

* By ‘a moving variable’ I mean that that portion of the ocean which moves
most rapidly has also the most varying temperature.

~—_erarrrern nanraeenneE—eeeeeee_<5uwrr eres _eee eee

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

——

Part II.—NATURAL SCIENCE.

No. II1I.—1887.

~~

XVII.—On the Chiroptera of Nepal.— By J. Scuty.
[Received July 28th ;—Read Ang. 3rd. 1887],

The local distribution of our Indian Mammalian fauna is not only
of special interest to naturalists in this country, but is also important to
those who are mainly concerned with questions of general geographical
distribution. To be of real use, local lists should be founded on speci-
mens actually captured in the region under review; less direct evidence
should rarely be accepted. And nowhere, perhaps, in this great country
is greater precision required in assigning a station to the forms which
inhabit it than in the case of the Himalayas. For not only does the
fauna of these mountains differ markedly according to the elevation
above sea-level, but it also varies strikingly as we proceed from east to
west in them. We have, moreover, in the Himalayas a meeting ground
of Palearctic, Indian, and Malay forms; and, for the elucidation of the
complex questions of station and habitat of species, strict accuracy is
required in lists of forms inhabiting merely political divisions of the
Himalayas.

In view of the considerations above mentioned, the expression so
often affixed to a species of ‘‘ Habitat, Nepal”? might be only a degree
less vague than ‘“‘ Habitat, Himalayas,” were it not for what may be
called an accident. The term “ Nepal” may mean either the whole
State of Nepal, or a very small part of it, the Nepal Valley. The
State of Nepal is about 500 miles in length, and has an average breadth
of about 100 miles; part of this country differs in no way from the

30

234 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

adjoining plains of India, but most of it is highly mountainous, and
in it, indeed, is found the highest mountain in the world. The Nepal
Valley, the true “ Nepal” of the natives, is a small tract, some 20
miles in length by 15 in breadth, at an elevation of from 4050 to
4500 feet above sea-level, in which is situated the capital of the state,
Kathmandu. But the Nepal Valley is the only part of the state
which has been efficiently explored zoologically, and, consequently, we
may be pretty certain that, when the term Nepal only is used to denote
the station of a species, the Nepal Valley is what is really meant.

IT once lived for two years in the Nepal Valley, and while there
made large collections of zoological specimens. Amongst these, I pre-
served 40 specimens of bats, and, on my return to England, I spent some
time on a careful identification of them, by reference to published de-
scriptions and by comparison with specimens in the British Museum.
In this way, I ascertained that the whole of my specimens were referable
to only 10 species, and the next step was to find out whether the forms
I had secured were previously known to occur in Nepal. This task
proved much more difficult than the mere identification of the species ;
the information available about the species of Chiroptera actually in-
habiting Nepal being somewhat vague and confused.

In order to show why the matter lacks precision, it is necessary to
trace the source of our information on the subject.

Mr. Brian H. Hodgson, to whose labours zoological science is so
largely indebted, lived for more than twenty years in the Nepal Valley ;.
and during this time he made very extensive zoological collections, and
described many new forms. He discriminated altogether twelve species
of bats from Nepal, and to every one of these he gave a new scientific
name.-- Unfortunately, however, he did not describe all the species
whose names he published, and some of the descriptions he gave were
not sufficiently full to fix the species intended without doubt. Mr.
Hodgson presented most of his specimens from Nepal to the British
Museum, and he also gave a few to the Asiatic Society of Bengal. This.
led to Dr. J. E. Gray and Mr. Ed. Blyth identifying some of Hodgson’s
species with others previously named by different authors, andin some
cases to more extended description of the Nepalese specimens. Some
doubt and error were in this way introduced, as will be explained fur-
ther on ; the doubt hanging over the species named by Mr. Hodgson but
never described by him.

Mr. Hodgson left Nepal in 1844. He never returned to that
country, but, after a visit to England, he settled for some years at Dar-
jiling, in the Sikkim Himalayas east of Nepal, and collected zoological
specimens there largely. These spoils he also gave to the British

1887. | J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 235

Museum and to the museum of the East India Company in London.
Mr. Hodgson’s name had, however, become so firmly connected with
Nepal in the minds of English zoologists, that some portion of his
collections in Sikkim were wrongly assigned by them to Nepal. So
that, mainly by Dr. Horsfield, Hodgson’s additions of Chiroptera from
Darjiling were published as coming from the former country. Owing
to this confusion, at least half a dozen species of bats frem Sikkim,
never obtained by Hodgson in Nepal, were credited to the latter country
on the strength of that naturalist having collected them.

In 1876 and 1878, Dr. Dobson’s two admirable works on the
Chiroptera appeared. The task this author had on hand was too ex-
tensive to permit his paying particular attention toa relatively small
question like the station of certain species in Nepal; he had, moreover,
to be guided to some extent by previous writers, and to rely on museum
labels, which are not always accurate. He has in consequence given in
his works some species as from Nepal which were not obtained there
by Hodgson or any one else, and has altogether omitted mention in his
synonymy of two names given by Hodgson to Nepalese species.

In short, without much balancing of evidence, it was impossible to
draw up a correct list of the bats of Nepal from the writings of the
authors I have referred to; and I consequently determined to investi-
gate the whole question with the aid of the specimens I had myself
collected. The result of my enquiry is set forth in this paper.

I have already mentioned Mr. Hodgson’s collection of bats from
Nepal. This forms the foundation of our knowledge on the subject,
and the subsequent additions of material can be readily indicated. In
1871, a collector of the Indian Museum obtained 3 specimens of bats,
representing two species, at Kathmandu; and the third and last collec-
tion of Nepalese Chiroptera is my own.

Mr. Hodgson named 12 species from Nepal, but some of his speci-
mens in the British Museum show that he really obtained 13 species in
that country. The collector of the Indian Museum did not, I think,
add anything to Hodgson’s list, although one of his specimens was
described as a new species by Dr. Dobson (see p. 253). Of the 10 species
which I obtained, no less than 5 were never secured by Mr. Hodgson in
Nepal. The inference I draw from this is that the list of species of
Chiroptera now actually known to occurin the Nepal Valley does not
completely represent the forms to be found there. A considerably
extended list must be the reward of future workers in that country.

As regards a list of bats inhabiting the whole State of Nepal, that
would certainly include a very large number of species not to be found
in the Nepal Valley ; for anything I know to the contrary nearly every:

936 J. Scully On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No 3;

species of bat found in India may occur in Nepal territory. That must
be mere matter of conjecture, for, as I have mentioned, we have only
certain knowledge of the majority of forms which occur in and near the
Nepal Valley.

In the following list reference is made under every species to the
ample descriptions given in Dr. Dobson’s works. Detailed descriptions
would therefore be quite superfluous in this paper; but I have endea-
voured to include such information as is available, from Indian sources,
regarding the habits of the animals. Itis matter for regret that our
knowledge of the habits of bats is so scant.

I, Preropus MEDIUs.

Pteropus medius, Temminck, Monogr. Mammal. i, p. 176 (1827) ; Dobson, Mono-
gr. Asiat; Chiroptera, p. 18 (1876); Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 51 (1878).
Pteropus leucocephalus, Hodgson, J. A. 8. B. vol. iv, p. 700 (1835).

Mr. Hodgson appears to have obtained a number of specimens of
this bat in Nepal, as he presented four examples collected there to the
British Museum. The type of Pteropus leucocephalus measured, length
of head and body 10 inches, and expanse 46; the weight of the animal
was 22 ounces. Dr. Dobson mentions that all these Nepalese examples
have the head and under surface paler than usual, and that one speci-
men has an abnormal additional upper molar, immediately behind the
third molar.

Mr. Hodgson informs us that this species never appears in
the central region of Nepal save in autumn, when it comes in
large bodies to plunder the ripe fruit in gardens. So far as the
Nepal Valley is concerned, this remark hardly accords with my two
years’ experience of that portion of the country ; for I was never able to
obtain a specimen of Pteropus medius there. Of late years, at all events,
this animal can only be regarded as a straggler to the Nepal Valley,
and, whenever it does make its appearance there, I have little doubt that
it merely travels about a dozen miles from the low and hot valley of the
Trisul Ganga, immediately to the north-west of Nepal. Its route to a
point so far in the interior of the Nepal mountains would naturally be.
along the easy gradient offered by the valley of the Gandak river, and
its eastern-brauch up to Nowakot (or Nayakot).

An interesting note will be found in Dr. J. Andergon’s ‘ Catalogue
of the Mammalia in the Indian Museum’ (1881, p. 101) on some semi-
migratory movements of Pteropus medius, in immense numbers, during

autumn.

1887. ] J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 937

2. CYNONYCTERIS AMPLEXICAUDATA.

Pteropus amplexicaudatus, Geoffroy, Ann. du Mus. xv, p. 96 (1810).

Pteropus pyrivorus, Hodgson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. vol. iv, p. 700 (1835).

Cynonycteris amplexicaudata, Dobson, Mon. Asiat. Chir. p. 29 (1876) ; Cat. Chir.
Brit. Mus. p. 72 (1878).

Mr. Hodgson’s description of his Pteropus pyrivorus from Nepal
leaves little doubt that he was referring to Cynonycteris amplexicaudata :
he gives, length of head and body 6 inches, tail 0°5, expanse 24; weight
5 ounces. And Dr. Dobson’s examination of the type specimen in the
British Museum settles the question. Mr. Hodgson says that these bats
only appear in Central Nepal in autumn, and at midnight, when they
come in large bodies to plunder the fruit-gardens. As the animal was
considered a perfect pest from the havoc it made among the ripe pears,
he called it pyrivorus. He adds that when these bats appear in Central
Nepal they must necessarily come from a very considerable distance,
and that in the plains it is noted of them that they will travel 30 or 40
miles, and as many back, in a single night, in order to procure food.

These remarks of Mr. Hodgson as to the habits of Pteropus pyrivo-
rus have been repeatedly misapplied to a totally distinct species of bat.
Dr. J. EH. Gray wrongly placed Pt. pyrivorus as a synonym of Cynopterus
marginatus in his List of ‘ Mammalia in the British Museum’ published in
1843. In 1844, Blyth confidently asserted that Pteropus pyrivorus was the
same as Oynopterus marginatus (J. A. S. B. XIII, p. 479) ; it does not
appear that he had seen an example named by Hodgson,but Gray certainly
had two Nepalese specimens before him which are still in the collection of
the British Museum. Horsfield, Hodgson himself, Hutton, and Dobson
followed suit in this wrong determination. Hutton (P. Z. 8. 1872,
p, 693), under the head of C. marginatus, quotes Hodgson’s account of
Pt. pyrivorws and makes some remarks about the (supposed) wonder-
ful feat accomplished by this bat in travelling from the plains to the
Nepal Valley, and back again, in a single night. Dr. Dobson gives
Pt. pyriworus as a synonym, and quotes a portion of Hutton’s remarks, in
his article on Cynopterus marginatus in the Monograph of Asiatic
Chiroptera (p. 26). But in the ‘ Catalogue of Chiroptera in the British
Museum,’ published two years later, he finds that Pteropus pyrivorus is
undoubtedly Cyn. amplexicaudata, and gives Mr. Hodgson’s remarks
about its habits, correctly, under the description of the latter animal.
The proverbial immortality of error, however, asserts itself, for, in the
work last mentioned, we find the article on Cynopterus marginatus
transcribed from the Monograph without excision of the references to
Pieropus pyrivorus. The latter title is given as a synonym with a re-

238 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

ference to P. Z. S. 1836, p. 36 ; and, at page 83, Capt. Hutton’s misapplied
remarks about QO. marginatus being a perfect pest in Nepal &c. is re-
peated. It is easy to show that both these entries are erroneous. There
is no mention of any bat on page 36 of the Proceedings of the Zoologi-
cal Society for 1836; the page should be 46, and there will be found the
name only of Pteropus pyrivorus, whose characters have to be sought for
in the ‘Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,’ that is to say, in
Hodgson’s original description in Vol. IV, 1835. Moreover, Dr. Dobson
does not find any specimen of Cynopterus marginatus from Nepal in the
British or Indian Museums, Mr. Hodgson never having obtained any
example of it in that country. As to Captain Hutton’s remarks on the
habits of (so-called) Oynopterus marginatus in Nepal, that writer of
course knew nothing of the bats of Nepal beyond what he derived from
Hodgson’s published accounts, and he merely followed Blyth and others
in supposing that Pt. pyrivorus was a synonym of C. marginatus.

About the great distances supposed to be traversed by C. amplem-
caudata in a single night in search of food, I think there is a miscon-
ception—at least so far as relates to the Nepal Valley. At the
time Mr. Hodgson wrote his account of this species, he was probably
not familiar with the Nowakot (or Nayakote) district, about 16 miles
only ina direct line from Kathmandu. This part of the country, al-
though situated to the north-west of the Nepal Valley, is more than
2000 feet lower than the latter; one part of it, at Devighat, being less
than 2000 feet above sea-level. The climate, vegetation, and fauna of
this district naturally differ strikingly from those of the Nepal Valley,
and here certainly we may expect to find both Pteropus medius and
Cynon. ampleaicaudata quite at home. A glance at any recent large
scale map of India will show the broad valley of the Gandak river
stretching from the plains into the Nepal hills, and Nowakot in the
valley of the Trisul Ganga, the eastern affluent of the Gandak. Al-
though so far in the interior of the hills, it will readily be understood
that, in such hot malarious valleys, we have a direct continuation of the
climate and flora suited to 0. amplexicaudata. It is no wonder then
that this bat should stray from the Nowakot district into the Nepal
Valley in search of food, at suitable seasons ; and the supposition of its
travelling 40 miles in a direct line over hill and dale, to visit the Nepal
Valley at midnight, may be dismissed as improbable.

Three examples of this species, from Nepal, were presented by Mr.
Hodgson to the British Museum, and these were probably the only
specimens he obtained in that country.

1887. ] J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 239

3. CYNOPTERUS MARGINATUS.
Pteropus marginatus, Geoffroy, Ann. du Mus. xv, p. 97 (1810).

Cynopterus marginatus, Dobson, Mon. Asiat. Chir. p. 24 (1876) ; Cat. Chir. Brit.
Mus. p. 81 (1878).

I obtained only two specimens of this species in Nepal, one from the
Nowakot district about 16 miles north-west of Kathmandu; and another
just within the Nepal Valley, which had evidently strayed there from the
Nowakot district. The captures were effected on the 13th and 27th of July.
The first example obtained is a female, evidently an old animal, as the
molars are much worn, and the second is a male, apparently full grown,
but not old.

The following are measurements taken from these specimens after
preservation in alcohol :—

2 cy)
Length, head and Bai eee he ee corer be 3°6 3:2
ee sanereske ican’ Heaavs wees Geir 0°45 0°45
» head. 1:3 1°25
ikl ear (anteriorly ‘from notch) . 0-7 0:7
Breadth, ear ........ 0°47 0°45
Length, ear to tip of nostril . Ie] ig |
» eye to tip of nostril .. 0°5 04:7
» ‘forearm.. a 2°5 2°43
» thumb and claw.. 0-9 1:03
» third finger... 4°] 3°95
jt -ffth’finger... 3:1 2°9
Pee TIDID, . wie 0°95 0°86
foot and claws.. mits 0°6 0°55
Expanse.... Meee tviie trlctes ae ace eed cvcnvestaxvenervenaqunavaver |, eO 16:0

The dental formula of these two specimens is :—

Incisors #, canines 2, premolars 4, molars * = 30,

Ears margined with white; wing-membrane from basal half of
first toe ; fur olive-brown above, pale fulvous beneath. Claws black,
with white tips. Compared with specimens of C. marginatus in the
British Museum, I could not detect any difference except in size, the
Nepalese examples being decidedly small and having short ears. My
measurements accord best with those of CO. brachyotus, from S. Anda-
man Island, given by Dobson in the Monograph of Asiatic Chiroptera ;
but, as this variety does not even figure as a synonym in the Catalogue
of Chiroptera published by him later, it is to be presumed that C. mar-
ginatus must be regarded as a species which varies greatly in all
dimensions.

Mr. Hodgson did not obtain this species in Nepal, and, although it
has often been quoted as from that country on his authority, it has been

240 J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. (No. 3,

shown, under the head of Cynonycteris amplexicaudata, that this was
founded on error. Consequently, the present notice is the first authentic
record of the occurrence of C. marginatus in Nepal.

4. RHINOLOPHUS LUCTUS.

Rhinolophus luctus, Temminck, Monogr. Mammal. ii, p. 24 (1835); Hutton,
Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1872, p. 694; Dobson, Mon. Asiat. Chir. p. 39 (1876); Cat.
Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 105 (1878).

Rhinolophus perniger, Hodgson, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. vol. xii, pt. i, p. 414
(1843.)

There seems to be no doubt now that the species described by
Hodgson, from Nepal, under the name of Rhinolophus perniger is, as
Blyth first stated, the same as Rh. luctus, Temminck. Mr. Hodgson
gives the following measurements of the type of Rh. perniger, a female:
length of head and body 3°25 inches, tail 1°12, head 1°31, expanse 17,
ear from anteal base 1°68, ear from crown of head or posteal base 1°37,
radius 2°62, third finger 40, tibia 1°37, foot 0°81. Captain Hutton
gives, for Rh. luctus from Masuri, head and body 3°5 to 4'6 inches,
tail 1:95 to 2°12, ear 1:5, expanse 17:12 to 18°5, radius 2°75 to 3, third
finger 4°5,

Mr. Hodgson did not present any example of Rh. perniger to the
British Museum, but he gave a skeleton of the species to the Asiatic
Society in 1842, which is at present in the collection of the Indian
Museum. Dr. Dobson enters this example in the catalogue appended
to his ‘ Monograph of Asiatic Chiroptera’ (p. 194), and under the heading
of locality he puts ‘“ Nipal?’’ There can, however, be no doubt that
this specimen having been received from Mr. Hodgon in 1842 must have
come from Nepal and no other country. Ihave not been able to trace
any other authentic record of a Nepalese specimen of the species.

Concerning the habits of this bat in Nepal, Mr. Hodgson says that it
is shy and never approaches houses or cultivated country ; and that it
dwells in the deep forests and caves of the more precipitous mountains.
On this Captain Hutton remarks that such are not the habits of Rh.
luctus at higher elevations in the Himalayas further west than Nepal.
I am disposed to think that Hodgson’s observation is correct, so far as
Nepal is concerned. I never obtained a specimen in the valley during
my residence there, and, if it had anything like the habits of Rh. minor
or of the different species of Phyllorhina in Nepal, I could not have
failed to secure such a fine and conspicuous species as Ih. luctus.

As Mr. Hodgson obtained very few specimens of it in Nepal (per-
haps only one), and judging from my own want of success, I believe

1887. ] J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 241

this species to be rare in that locality. It probably affects higher ele-
vations than the Nepal Valley. Captain Hutton has given a very in-
teresting account of the habits of Rh. luctus ; this has been quoted in
Dr. Dobson’s Monograph and, being therefore readily accessible, need
not be reproduced here.

5. RHAINOLOPHUS MACROTIS.

Rhinolophus macrotis, Hodgson, Blyth, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. vol. xiii, pt, i, p.
485 (1844); Hutton, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1872, p. 699 ; Dobson, Mon. As. Chir.
p. 45 (1876), Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 110 (1878).

This species, which is only known with certainty to occur in Nepal
and Masuri, was first described by Mr. Hodgson from the former locality
in 1844. He presented a specimen of it to the British Museum, and
another to the Asiatic Society which is now in the collection of the Indian
Museum. These are the only two known examples of the species from
Nepal. Mr. Hodgson mentions that Rhinolophus macrotis has no pubic
false teats, and he gives the weight of his type specimen as one-third of
an ounce.

In the following table, measurements of examples of this species
from various sources are contrasted. In column I. are entered Mr.
Hodgson’s original measurements, II. contains those given by Mr. Blyth
of a female example sent by Mr. Hodgson to the Asiatic Society, ITT.
shows Captain Hutton’s results for recent examples captured at Masuri,
and IV. contains Dr. Dobson’s measurements of an adult male sent by
Captain Hutton from Masuri to the Asiatic Society. Dimensions in

inches.

ti EE bee ig
MPMMHTIG DOKY | 31... .c0scesccseessenna | 17 | 162°) 237 told | 17
SR SE FOOTE Li) ai daa fee sewice. | OFFS PHONED — 0:75
Har from anteal base... ....sereseeee | O'93 | 0°62 1:0 0°85
BrtOPUAL OF CATS... .cccccree sevaceccoees 025); — = ams
cas ses canere sevasestvuss,| Oro | O'S 0°87 0°8
ni dcccaclsvctteesscsssectse |) 0 — aoe we
etree, coy crsccecqecoesds || LO 1°62 re? 16
THA ANGE... ........0.scseseeeesssseees | B'S 2°25 2°37 oD.
I fl 5s Ue vsgiseaelevavawess ae | O°62)))) — < same
ado ha chciceycvevpesianeesyeestt O62 .- 0°63.) O°4:40.0°75 | -0°7
EE rire foc use nce teviesnare srscevece | DFO ae 9
os sig atneielessave vevcevaccsee | = | 0°37 oo 0°35

31.

242 J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepai. [No. 3,

It will be seen that Captain Hutton’s dimensions considerably ex-
ceed those given by the other authorities. The most noteworthy di-
vergence is in the length of the head and body, but Hutton expressly
says that his measurements are taken from fresh specimens, so that part
at least of the discrepancy may be accounted for by the shrinking of
specimens preserved in ‘alcohol.

Mr. Hodgson does not give any particular account of the habits of
this species in Nepal. Hutton’s note about the manners of these bats in
Masuri is this, ‘They come out of the caves in the earlier twilight
hours, and may be seen flitting rapidly at some height in the air, chasing
the small flies and beetles which abound during the rainy season.”

Dr. Dobson mentions that the type of Rhinolophus macrotis is in the
collection of the Indian Museum. There are three specimens of this
species in that collection, an adult female in alcohol presented by Mr.
Hodgson in 1842, from Nepal, which has been mentioned above ; and two
adult males in alcohol from Masuri, presented by Captain Hutton in
1852. The Nepal specimen is therefore doubtless the type as under-
stood by Dr. Dobson, but this fact is not mentioned in the catalogue
appended to his Monograph, nor in Dr. Anderson’s ‘Catalogue of
Mammalia in the Indian Museum’ (1881).

6. RAINOLOPHUS AFFINIS.

Rhinolophus afinis, Horsfield, Zool. Research. Java, (1824); Dobson, Mon. As.
Chir. p. 47 (1876); Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 112 (1878).

This species is entered here with considerable doubt. The only
ground for its inclusion is an entry in the ‘ Catalogue of Chiroptera in
the British Museum’ of a specimen of Fh. affinis from “ Nipal,” pre-
sented by Mr. Hodgson. It is quite possible that the locality quoted
merely rests on the evidence of an erroneous museum label, and that the
specimen was really procured by Mr. Hodgson in Darjiling, where Rh.
affinis appears to be common. No synonym is quoted under the entry
of this particular specimen to show that it ever bore a name bestowed
by Mr. Hodgson; and specimens of V. mystacinus, Megaderma lyra, and
Plecotus auritus, certainly obtained by Mr. Hodgson in Darjiling or the
Sikkim Tarai, and never in Nepal, are in that work entered as from
Nepal.

A reference to the register of the British Museum would settle the
question ; for, if the specimen of Rh. affinis presented by Mr. Hodgson
vas only received in 1847, or on any subsequent date, it could not have
been collected in Nepal.

1887. ] J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepai. 243

However, the species is very likely to be found in Nepal, asit —
occurs both east and west of that country in the Himalayas, at Dar.
jiling and Masuri.

7. RHINOLOPHUS MINOR.

Rhinolophus minor, Horsfield, Zool. Res. Java (1824); Dobson, Mon, As, Chir.
p. 50 (1876), Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 114 (1878).

Rhinolophus subbadius, Hodgson, Blyth, Journ. As. Soc, Beng. vol. xiii, pt. i,
p. 486 (1844).

In a catalogue of the mammals of Nepal by Mr. Hodgson, printed
in Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, Vol. X. Pt. II, p. 909 (1841), a species called
Vespertilio subbadia is mentioned. The description of this form as
Rhinolophus subbadius only appeared three years later, as cited in the
above synonymy. Dr. Dobson does not notice the title of Rhinolophus
subbadius at all, either in his ‘ Monograph’ or ‘ Catalogue of Chiroptera
in the British Museum.’ It will be useful to recall the descriptions and
measurements given by Hodgson and by Blyth of Rh. subbadius. The
account given by the former author is too vague to fix the species,
but he fortunately sent a specimen of it to the Asiatic Society, which
Blyth described in the paper in which Hodgson’s diagnosis appeared.

Hodgson says that, in his species, the ears are not longer than
the head, are truncated at the tip [or somewhat obtusely pointed],
and ovoid. Nasal appendage quadrate, not salient, with a transverse
bar nearly surmounting it towards the head. Blyth’s diagnosis is,
Anterior nose leaf very small, oblong, rounded above. Vertical mem-
brane conspicuously developed, and pointed posteriorly. Behind verti-
cal membrane a short and broad transverse membrane, divided into two
lateral lobes. Hindmost angular peak with sides slightly emarginated
towards the point. Nostrils not externally fringed with membrane.
Over the lip is the usual horse-shoe. The following are the measure-
ments given (a) by Hodgson and (6) by Blyth of this Nepalese
species.

(a) (0)

Length, head and body...... bg Ghee hae Say 3,
ETRE oo) OS SR ae en P25)". 3. O62

BID? Peel Pe Le CO O2 oo OR
AT Sa eae ene 0°62... O0*5

Ue Ror @eatens hoods 28s 1:25 ... 1:37

5 third finger ......... 2°25 ... 1°88

5) BUD, ah anGaercaaaiaet Noe tat Oe

FOSGHEE Se. 2 DAE LF Gad
ot EEE eRe Se ot: le

244 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [ No. 3,

No specimen of Rh. subbadius was presented by Hodgsou to the
British Museum; the example he gave to the Asiatic Society was en-
tered in Blyth’s Catalogue (p. 25) as No. 69 A. This number seems to
have been accidentally removed from the specimen, and it cannot now
be traced with certainty. I shall refer to this specimen later on.

I obtained an example of this species in the Nepal Valley which
gave the following measurements. Length head and body 1°65 inch,
tail 0°75, head 0°7, ear, 0°65, nose-leaf 0°44 x 0°28, forearm 1'4, thumb
0:23, third finger, metacarpal 1'1, first phalanx 0°43, second phalanx
0°65, fifth finger, metacarpal 1°13, first phalanx 0°36, second phalanx
0°45, tibia 0°62, foot and claws 0°3.

Kars subacutely pointed ; antitragus separated by a deep angular
notch. Posterior connecting process acutely pointed, considerably ex-
ceeding the vertical process of the sella in height. Terminal process of
posterior nose leaf narrow and emarginate. Lower lip with three verti-
cal grooves. Second lower premolar in the tooth row. Second upper
premolar rather widely separated from the canine, and the first upper
premolar standing in the tooth row. Wing membrane to tibia, 01
above ankle-joint. |

I have no doubt that this specimen represents Rh. subbadius of
Hodgson, and I thinkit is also certainly an example of the variable
Rh. minor of Horsfield. I have compared my Nepalese specimen with
examples of Rh. minor in the British Museum, named by Dr. Dobson.
The sella is exactly the same shape, but the ears are rather larger and
the horizontal nose-leaf, or horse-shoe, is slightly larger, and conceals
the lip more. These slight differences are not of much importance,
and I believe Rh. subbadius, Hodgson, may be safely considered a
synonym of Bh. minor.

With regard to the original specimen received by the Asiatic So-
ciety from Mr. Hodgson, I have already said that it cannot be traced
with certainty. In the catalogue of specimens appended to Dr.
Dobson’s Monograph, No. 69A of Blyth’s Catalogue is not accounted
for; but three specimens of Lh. minor are entered of which the locality,
date, and donor are unknown. These bats came to the Indian Museum
from the Asiatic Society, and of one of them Dr. Dobson notes that the
sex is undeterminable, and that it is in a dilapidated condition. It is
possible that this specimen is the type of Rhinolophus subbadius, re-
ceived from Mr. Hodgson in 18382. In noticing these three specimens
of Rh. minor, Dr. J. Anderson mentions that they are types (Cat.
Mamm. Ind. Mus. 1881, p. 110).

This species does not appear to be common in the Nepal Valley ;
I noticed it only on a few occasions, and Mr. Hodgson does not furnish

1887. ] J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 245

any notes about its habits. Captain Hutton records it from Masuri, but
the measurements he gives of his specimens are not reconcilable with
the known dimensions of Rh. minor. He gives the length of head and
body as from 3 inches to 3°25, &c. I think the specimens whose dimen-
sions he records could not have been Rh. minor.

8. RHINOLOPHUS FERRUM-EQUINUM.

Vespertilio ferrum-equinum, Schreb., Saugeth. i, p. 174 (1775).

Rhinolophus tragatus, Hodgson, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. vol. iv, p. 699, (1835).

Rhinolophus ferrum-equinum, Dobson, Mon. As. Chir. p. 53 (1876); Cat. Chir.
Brit. Mus. p. 119 (1878).

This species is fairly common in Nepal. The following particulars
are extracted from Mr. Hodgson’s original description of his Rh. traga-
tus, obtained in the Nepal Valley :—Length of head and body 2°62 inches,
tail 1°87, expanse 15:5, weight 2 ounces. The pubic false teats are
strikingly developed, and have the same shape as the true pectoral teats,
bnt even exceed them in size. The ears are “‘ tremblingly alive all over ”
and capable of considerable movement and compression. ‘ So soon as it
is dark, they come forth from the cavities of rocks, in groups, to skim
the surface of standing crops, or to glide around and between um-
brageous trees, in search of nocturnal insects, which constitute their
sole food. They make their exit rather sooner than the true bats
| Vespertilionide], and always in considerable numbers. They are not
migratory, nor subject to hibernation. They breed once a year, towards
the close of summer, and produce two young, differing from the parents
chiefly in the very restricted development of the nasal appendages.”

These remarks on habits must of course be understood as applying
only to Nepal and regions having a similar climate. In Gilgit, for in-
stance, where the winter is much colder than in the Nepal Valley, Rh.
ferrum-equinum certainly hibernates [see my paper on the Mammals of
Oiew, P.Z.'S. 1881, p. 199].

9, PHYLLORHINA ARMIGERA.

Rhinolophus armiger, Hodgson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. vol. iv, p. 699 (1835).
Phyllorhina armiger, Dobson, Monogr. Asiat. Chir. p. 64 (1876) ; Cat. Chir. Brit.
Mus. p. 135 (1878).

Mr. Hodgson was the first to name and describe this bat, from spe-
cimens obtained by him in Nepal, of which he presented three to the
British Museum. This fine species is very common in the Nepal Valley
at all seasons. Owing to its large size and peculiar method of hunting
for its prey, its habits can be readily observed. In the following table

246 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

detailed measurements of eleven examples which I preserved are set
forth. It is somewhat remarkable that more than four-fifths of the
total number secured should have been females.

Ce tee ee ee | ul el ae | ¢

Length, head and a, eh AEN 4:0 |4'1 |3°8 |4°1 |3°65/3°63 '3°7 [3:9 [36 [40 [40
jy bAML Se sees cneeescsee | — [2°25 [2°85 [21 12-2 12-4 [O-4 [2-3 [2-4 [2-4 [1-9

. head.. $ woe [1°27 ]1°84 [1°34 /1°3 |1°384/1°3 1:3 |1°3 [1:3 11-28 1-4

os ear (anteriorly) . oo (ROLZ (115 [L1L7 [1-2 1B 111 [11 (1°15 11°16 [1°25 11-23
Breadth of ear (anteriorly). 0°94 /0°9 |0°95|I'1 0°95 | 0°94|0°93 |1°0 {0.96 |1°0 0
Length, forearm.... . . [8°45 |3°45 [3°5 [3'4 (3°5 | 3°43 [8°56 |3°6 (3°45 13'4 3°6
, thumb and claw... [0°47 [0°54 |0°55 [0°55 |0-54 | 0°55 |0:53 [0-55 |0'53 |0-55 [0-55

» third finger .. . |453|47 [47 153 [4°65 | 467/52 [49 14°75 14-65 14°95
o Afbirfinger .. sos +. 3°68 8 ‘7 |3-65|3°75 |3°8 |3°73 (38 |3°85|3°7 [3°65 3-85
ss CRUST ists anemia Yaiss ms aie 15 (L'4 [4514 [14 11°53 [1°42 |1°44 [1°43 (1°56
a calcanmeum .weccesee | — 0°87 |0°93 |0°82 |0°85 | 0°83 |0°8 [0°87 |0'8 0°82 |0°97

0°7 |0°7 10°72 10°65 | 0°73 |0°74 |0°73 |0°67 |0°65 |0°7
— |23°3 |21°5 [21:0 | 21°3 [22:0 |22°3 |21°5 [21-0 |2°02

c foot and claws.... |0°65
Expanse @eeeteaoeeosne@ eeeoer eee enve 21°4

In all the specimens the glandular frontal sac is distinct, but is
smaller in the females than in the males. The wing-membrane is at-
tached to the tibia above the ankle-joint, and the distal end of the cal-
caneum is distinctly marked in all. Pubic warts are present in six of
the females, but are absent in the three remaining examples of this sex ;
in one case a pubic wart measures 0°28 inch in length. Hodgson found
the weight of his type specimen (a male) to be 3 ounces; in the only
specimen I weighed, an adult female, I found the weight 1°5 oz. or just
half the figure Mr. Hodgson gives.

This bat usually harbours during the day in caves, or commonly in
lofts, out-houses, and sheds that are little used; in the latter localities
it suspends itself, by the claws of the feet, from the rafters. When at-
taching itself in this way to the edge of a beam or rafter, the animal
sways, pendulum-like, a few times until the impetus given during flight
is exhausted ; andit then hangs motionless with its wings folded close
to the body. If slightly alarmed by the opening of a door, or any un-
usual noise in the room it occupies, the head is thrust out and turned
carefully in various directions, asif for the purpose of finding out the
cause of disturbance. On such occasions I have purposely dropped a
heavy book on the floor so as to alarm the bat thoroughly. The animal
would at once fly off and either take several turns round the room, or
else leave it; but it invariably returned quickly and attached itself to
the spot it had previously oceupied.

It comes out for the capture of its prey about sunset, and its hunt-
ing grounds are gardens, orchards, cleared spaces in woods, or avenues

1887. ] J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 247

of trees ; somewhere near trees always. It is sometimes found flying on
a level with the tops of the trees, but more commonly nearer the
ground; a very characteristic movement it has is aslow but steady
sweep round a leafy tree, or clump of trees, in search of insects which
frequent the lower branches. While it was intently occupied in this
eircular flight I have been nearly touched on the face by this bat, as
I walked across the grounds attached to my house in Nepal. And in
passing so close to one it could be distinctly heard crunching the hard-
bodied insects it had caught, between its strong teeth.

Sometimes these bats seem to come out of their day retreat before
the insects they are in search of are to be found in plenty. On the 25th
August about 6 p. m., I noticed an example of Phyllorhina armigera
flying close to a tree. It circled twice round the tree while I was
watching it, keeping about three feet above the ground. Apparently
finding that none of the insects it wanted were about, it suspended itself
to asmall horizontal branch of the tree, just 3; feet above the ground,
and so remained for some time. It was probably waiting for a more
propitious hour. Whether this was really the explanation of the pause
in its flight or not, it seems certain that this bat does not ordinarily
remain very long on the wing. Ihave often observed that in the early
part of the night it alternated its pursuit of insects with short periods
of repose in an out-house. On one occasion, I observed a bat of this
Species return three times during the evening (from about 8 to 10 p. M.)
to a room I happened to be occupying; and curiously enough it always
attached itself to precisely the same part of the ceiling. That part of
the room, however, was the point furthest away from me, and my pre-
sence may have influenced the bat in its selection of the most quiet
spot.

On another occasion, one of these bats had suspended itself to the
ceiling of my study late at night, and it first attracted attention by the
pattering of its droppings on the floor. On being alarmed at some
noise I made in moving books, it quitted its perch and flew lumberingly
round the small room. It soon ended by knocking itself violently
against a wall and then fell on the floor, apparently exhausted and
stunned. When I approached it, however, it flew up and once more
hooked on to a beam exactly where it had been before. It does not
enter lighted rooms in houses so commonly ag so many other species of
bats do. Indeed, on the rare occasions when I have found it in this way,
its object in coming in was evidently for rest merely, either temporarily
or for the night.

When captured alive (a large butterfly-net answers for this pur-
pose), this bat has a fierce and forbidding aspect owing to its depressed

248 J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

muzzle and prominent canine teeth ; the ears are kept in quick tremu-
lous motion, and there is also frequent but slight movement of the facial
erests. The animal is easily shot during its flight, and most of my
specimens were obtained in this way.

Hodgson says that Phyllorhina armigera breeds once a year, to-
wards the close of summer, and produces two young, differing from the
parents chiefly in the very restricted development of the nasal append-
ages. I made no observations on this point, but I note that in a female
specimen captured on the 27th July, the pectoral teats, which are
situated near the anterior margin of the axilla, are enlarged.

10. PHYLLORHINA FULVA.

Hipposideros fulvus, Gray, Mag. Zool. and Bot. ii, p. 492 (1838).
Phyllorhina fulva, Dobson, Monogr. Asiat. Chir, p. 71 (1876) ; Cat. Chir. Brit.
Mus. p. 149 (1878).
The following particulars are derived from three examples of this
bat captured in the Nepal Valley on the 21st and 22nd August, and the
10th of January :

2 g f

Length, head and body 2:0 21 1°99
Re tems sils, Biers ED «Ra S-? AS
CA AU Gand a Le: ae 07a" O70" “OTS

iY, WOR EA ie cere salar en 0°85 0°82 0-9

Pie wSpeawring 2. A. 2 16 1:64 16

» third finger..... 2°45 25 24

j, OM inger’.,. 35, 2:15 2:14 2:0

Bh dled OAR: ipa he scisleia as 0:73. 0°75: “072
PuLAIoanen, eno ae! 0°33 0°34 0:3

» calcaneum ...... 0°35 '".0:4'" O37
PU RAOUMISG Sei. g 5 ete vee 102 100 —

Nothing in the coloration of these specimens recalls Mr. Blyth’s
remark (J. A.S. B. XIII, Pt. i, p. 489, 1844) that this species is perhaps
the most vividly coloured of the whole class of mammalia. The fur is
long, dense, and soft, above smoky brown, the hairs white at their bases ;
below paler, especially on the throat. Ears and membrane dusky. Wing-
membrane from the tarsus.

These examples agree well with specimens of Phyllorhina fulva in
the British Museum, named by Dr. Dobson. That author considers
that Ph. fulva is only a variety of Ph. bicolor, and on this point I cannot
offer any useful opinion. But Ph. amboinensis, which he also regards as
a variety of Ph. bicolor, seems to me quite distinct from Ph. fulva.

1887. ] J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 249

This species is not uncommon in the Nepal Valley, although Mr.
Hodgson never obtained it. It often comes into lighted rooms at night
to hunt for insects. While being pursued in a room, it constantly flies
very low down, not more thana couple of feet from the floor. Itisa
permanent resident in Nepal and does not hibernate there.

1l. PHYLLORHINA AMBOLNENSIS.

Phyllorhina amboinensis, Peters, M. B. Akad. Berl. 1871, p. 323; Dobson, Mon.
Asiat. Chir. p. 72 (1876) ; Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 150 (1878).
Phyllorhina micropus, Hutton, Proc. Zool. Soc. 1872, p. 703.

I captured two specimens of this bat in the Nepal Valley on the

22nd of October; the animals had entered a lighted room on the

ground floor about 9 o’clock in the evening.
The following are dimensions of these examples—both females—in

inches :—

1 2
Length, head and ast mye 1°6 ig
seid ae ikea Kasse ye Opt tat

:, faad.. \rtcenen Sh . Sear gs 0'6o. ~ 0°65

Boon CAR itini ced cen qanel aavont 5% MACOS 0°62

Length, forearm... ............ 140 137
5 a. HIE DNASE... cy vccinc ee oO 2°1

eee Epil MATE vn cries wag EO 1:78

Bere ee GUAR oaurees si ate acca vote 0°58 0°57

big POO Ui. 6 ate tiaras | Woah are Oe
oY, Chleateunt, .. stvciwes O20 0:3
PPR BAMGO ack wae -ce cere icycbveos, POT 8°9

These specimens agree well with a bat in the collection of the
British Museum, from Lingasugur in the Deccan, which had been
compared with the type of Phyllorhina amboinensis in the Berlin
Museum by Dr. Dobson. Inthe Nepalese specimens the wing-membrane
is attached to the tarsus.

Mr. Hodgson never obtained this species in Nepal.

Captain Hutton observes that it occurs in the summer months both
in the lower hills near Masuri and in the Dehra Doon. He adds that one
was taken on a warm evening in September, having flown in to the lights
in aroom, and another was taken at the foot of the hills, in the same
way, in October; but that it is by no means common,

32

250 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

12. VESPERUGO NOCTULA.

Vespertilio noctula, Schreb., Saugeth. i, p. 166 (1775).

Vespertilio labiata, Hodgson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. vol. iv, p. 700 (1835).

Vesperugo noctula, Dobson, Mon. Asiat. Chir. p. 88 (1876) ; Cat. Chir. Brit.
Mus. p. 212 (1878).

Mr. Hodgson appears to have obtained only one specimen of this
bat in Nepal, the type of his Vespertilio labiata, now in the collection
of the British Museum. In his description, he says that the colour of
the fur is saturate brown throughout and that of the skin, wherever
uncovered by hair, purpurascent. His measurements are, length of
head and body 3 inches, tail 2, and expanse 15.

I only secured a single specimen of Vesperugo noctula in the Nepal
Valley, on the 2nd of July, in the following manner. About 8 o’clock
in the evening, I heard the very shrill scream of some small animal in
my bedroom, and, on going into the room, I found this bat attached to
the mosquito-net covering my bed. In its flight, it had apparently
alighted on the net, and there got its claws so firmly entangled that it
could not escape.

The following are the measurements of this specimen :—length,
head and body 3:1, tail 2:1, head 0°9, ear 0°75 x 0°6, tragus 0°3 x 0°18,
forearm 2°05, thumb 0°34, third finger 3°65, fifth finger 2:2, tibia 0°75,
calcaneum 0°7, foot and claws 0°45; expanse 15:0.

The colour of the fur above is rich olive-brown, beneath paler
brown, and the fur on the membranes is buff. Ears and membranes .
dusky. |
Vesperugo noctula is, I think, not common in the Nepal Valley.
Mr. Hodgson says that it is found there throughout the year, does not
hibernate, and quests for food solitarily.

13. VESPERUGO ABRAMUS.

Vespertilio abramus, Temminck, Monogr. Mammal. ii, p. 232 (1835).

Scotophilus fuliginosus, Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Collect. Brit. Mus. p. 4 (1845).
Vesperugo abramus, Dobson, Mon. Asiat. Chir. p. 97 (1876); Cat. Chir. Brit.
Mus. p. 226 (1878).

This is a very common species in the Nepal Valley, where it is to
be found at all seasons. It is very active in hunting over gardens and
woods, and its flight is quick. It often enters houses at night, in pur-
suit of insects attracted by lights. The breeding season would appear
to be in the cold weather; for none of the adult specimens captured
from May to August showed any sign of rutting, but a male secured
in November was evidently in rut,

1887. | J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 251

The following are dimensions and some particulars of the speci-
mens preserved :—

Length, head andbody.... .... | 173 | 18 /18 /19 |18 | 1°79 | 1:82
rs cl 9k Se gic ee ea 1°5 1°63 | 1°55 | 1°37 | 1°55
-. head.. 0°6 0°64 | 06 0°63 | 0°65 | 0°63 | 0°63
3 ear. Leet aero 0°5 0°5 0°58 | 0°55 | 05 0°53
¥5 GERZURs «ac selene wjeteet|- O;2e | O'21))),0'22..) 0:25 +) Or21. | O23, 1), Oras
. PAD OREM ae". n'e., deiaipisas |) kOe | baty | Lo 1°3 1:3 1:28 | 13
MONOID sc lade eceeeees | O29) O25 OS 0°25 | 0°24 | 9°24 | 0°27
os third finger.... ...... | 2°35 | 2°4 2°4 2°55 | 2°45 | 2:3 2°5
ae mth finger ....0dca.e0 | 16. 17 7 E77 | E75 | 6s | bs
MME. ocaddicaesies deees 0°52 | 05 0°5 06 O’5I | 05 0°53
‘4 foot and claws ..ecce. . | O26 | O26 | 0:27 | 03 0°26 | 0°27 | 0°25

Expanse eeseeoven ereoe es 88008 eeee 8°8 9°0 10°0 10°1 9 0 89 9°7

Fur above dark olive-brown, below paler and rather rufous brown ;
basal part of fur above and below blackish. Membranes dusky. Ina
male captured on the 8th November the testes appear in the form of
oval bodies, 0°3 inch in length, placed on each {side of the base of the
tail, below, in a temporary scrotum. Iu this specimen, the colour of the
fur differs perceptibly from that of the other examples. The fur above
is arich brown, with awash of gold-colour in parts, due to the hairs
being pale-tipped ; below, the colour is sandy brown. The tips of the
claws are pure white. Oncomparing these Nepalese examples with
specimens of V. abramus in the British Museum, I could not detect any
appreciable differences in the shape or position of the teeth, or in any
other specific characters.

Mr. Hodgson presented five examples of Vesperugo abramus, ob-
tained in Nepal, to the British Museum; but he does not appear to
have discriminated the species, as he gave no name toit. The speci-
mens were entered in the Catalogue of Hodgson’s collection, by Dr.
J. E. Gray, as Scotophilus fuliginosus, with Vespertilio fuliginosus,
Hodgson, as a synonym. The latter title 1s really a synonym of
Miniopterus schreibersii, as is proved by Hodgson’s original description.

14. HARPYIOCEPHALUS LEUCOGASTER.

Murina leucogaster, Alph. Milne-Edwards, Nouv. Arch. Mus, vii, Bull. p. 91
(1871); Mammif. du Tibet. p. 250 (1872).

Harpiocephalus leucogaster, Dobson, Monogr. Asiat. Chir. p. 157 (1876) ; Cat.
Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 283 (1878).

I obtained a single specimen of this bat in the Nepal Valley,

252 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

on the 2nd of September. It was found dead in my room, early
in the morning, and had probably killed itself by dashing against a
wall.

Length, head and body 1°85 inch, tail 1.4, head 0-7, ear 0°6, tragus
0°3, forearm 1°25, thumb 0°4, third finger 2°4, fifth finger 1°85, tibia 0°65,
foot aud claws 0°33; expanse 9°3.

Kars oval, broadly rounded above ; the inner margin convex, with a
distinct spur-shaped process near its base, which projects forwards
towards the posterior angle of the eye; outer margin convex.

Wing-membrane to base of distal phalanx of outer toe. Inter-
femoral membrane angularly emarginate at termination of calcaneum ;
extreme tip of tail projecting.

Fur golden-orange on head, the base of the hairs greyish; on the
back pale rufous brown, grey at the base. Fur on membranes bright
ferruginous, the upper surface of the interfemoral membrane and toes
being well covered. Beneath, the fur is white throughout on the chin
and throat, the rest of the lower parts having bicoloured fur—grey at
the base with white tips.

Upper inner incisor longer than outer incisor and not touching the
canine at the base; from the outer side of its base a cusp projects in-
wards. First upper premolar in the same plane as the canine.and se-
cond premolar, about equal to the latter in vertical height and about
three-fourths of its size in cross section.

Nose, lower lip, and sides of head to ears, nude and dark fleshy ;
membranes brownish black, but orange-coloured along forearm. Com-
pared with a specimen of JH. leucogaster in the British Museum, from
Tibet, the ears, teeth, and thumb and claw are of the same size and
shape. The only difference observable is in the colour of the fur,
which is very ferruginous above in the Nepal specimen and brown in
the animal from Tibet. As the two specimens must certainly be re-
ferred to the same species, it would seem that the colour of the fur is no
more a reliable character in this species of Harpyiocephalus than in
other Chiroptera (cf. Dobson, Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 284).

Mr. Hodgson did not obtain this species in Nepal. Of its habits
in the north-west Himalayas, Captain Hutton says that it occurs at an
elevation of about 5,500 feet, but does not appear to be common in the
hills, the Dehra Doon being probably its true locality there. An
example which flew into a room at Jeripani (below Masuri), at neght,
kept low down in its flight, instead of soaring towards the ceiling,
passing under the tables and chairs, as if afraid to emerge into the
broad glare of the lamps. ‘‘ This likewise is the mode of flight when
searching for insects in the open fields, where it skims closely and

1887.] J. Seully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 253

somewhst leisurely over the surface of the crops and grass” (P. Z.S.
1872, p. 712).

15. VESPERTILIO NIPALENSIS.

Vespertilio pallidiventris, Hodgson, Calc. Journ. Nat. Hist. vol. iv, p. 286 (1844),
(name only) ; Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Collect. Brit. Mus. p. 4 (1846) (not described).

Vespertilio pallidiventer, Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Collect. Brit. Mus. 2nd Ed. D2
(1863) (name only).

Vespertilio nipalensis, Dobson, Proc. Asiat. Soc. Beng. 1871, p. 214; Mon. Asiat.
Chir. p. 141 (1876) ; Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 302 (1878).

The name Vespertilio pallidiventris first occurs in a list of the
mammals of Nepal by Mr. Hodgson, published in the ‘ Calcutta Journal
of Natural History’ in 1844, Although the name given by Mr. Hodgson
to this Nepalese species of bat appears in several lists subsequent to
that date, he never gave any description of the animal. As he did not
present any examples of it to the British Museum or the Asiatic Society,
I imagine that he only obtained one specimen, which must have been
lost, somehow, after it was figured. There is a well executed figure of
V. pallidwentris in the collection of plates of Mammals of Nepal pre-
sented by Mr. Hodgson to the Zoological Society of London.

In 1871, a collector of the Indian Museum obtained a bat in
Kathmandu, which Dr. Dobson described as a new species under the
name of V. nipalensis, the type and only known specimen being an adult
female example. preserved in spirit, and now in the Indian Museum,
Calcutta. I have carefully examined Hodgson’s original plate of V.
pallidiventris, with Dr. Dobson’s description and figure of V. nipalensis
before me, and, so far as any conclusion can be arrived at on such data,
I believe that both these names apply to the same species. The plate
of V. pallidiventris represents a true Vespertilio, as evidenced by the
shape of the ear and by the narrow, acutely pointed tragus; and the
whole lower surface of the animal is coloured pure white. This white
colour of the under-parts is perhaps the most marked feature in V.
nipalensis. And, Dr. Dobson’s type specimen having come from the
very place where Mr. Hodgson obtained his V. pallidiventris, there can
be no reasonable doubt about Hodgson’s title having priority. But as
the latter naturalist never defined his species by any description how-
ever short, or was helped toa definition by any writer before the name
V. nipalensis was published, V. pallidwentris must be regarded as a
synonym merely, under the accepted rules of zoological nomenclature.

Nothing is recorded about the habits of V. nipalensis. It appears

254 J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No.3,

to be restricted to Nepal, and, from what has been said above, it would
seem that it is not common even in its only known habitat. A full de-
scription of the animal, with measurements of the type, is given in Dr.
Dobson’s works above cited.

16. VESPERTILIO FORMOSUS.

Vespertilio formosa, Hodgson, Journ. As. Soc. Beng. vol. iv, p. 700 (1835).
Vespertilio formosus, Dobson, Mon. Asiat. Chir. p. 140 (1876); Cat. Chir. Brit.

Mus. p. 311 (1878).

In his original description of this species from Nepal, Mr. Hodgson
gives the following measurements of the type specimen: length of head
and body 2°5 inches, tail 2, expanse 12°5. He notes that the animal has
a sharp visage, and that the nasal bones are slightly convexed and
unite easily with a low forehead, in this respect contrasting with his
Vespertilio fuliginosa (Miniopterus schreibersit).

Of the habits of V. formosus in the Nepal Valley, Mr. Hodgson
merely records that it remains there throughout the year and does not
hibernate ; and that it quests for food solitarily.

In the Himalayas, this bat seems to be common at Darjiling, and in
Dehra Doon, and Lower Masuri; but I think it does not occur plenti-
fully in the Nepal Valley, as only one example appears to have been
obtained by Mr. Hodgson (the type, now in the British Museum), and I
never secured a specimen there.

17. VESPERTILIO MYSTACINUS.

Vespertilio mystacinus, Leisler, Kuhl, Deutsch. Flederm. Ann. Wetterau. Na-
turk. iv, p. 55 (1819) ; Dobson, Monogr. Asiat. Chir. p. 133 (1816) ; Cat. Chir. Brit.
Mus. p. 314 (1878).

This is one of the commonest bats in the Nepal Valley. It may be
seen every evening throughout the year, flying rather high in the air ;
and it frequently enters houses at night for a short hunt near lamps or
other lights. On such occasions, two individuals are often found asso-
ciated. Ten examples were secured from June to November. Of these
eight are adult (53,39 ), and, though they were captured in the months
of June, July, August, September, and October, they do not show any
sign of breeding. In none of the males are the testes descended, and in
the females the mammez are not enlarged. An immature female was
obtained on the 30th June, and avery young male, just able to fly, on
the 3rd July. The following table shows the dimensions of the adult

specimens :—

1887. | J. Scully—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 255

ee | | |S | TT | LT

a" a" 4 ¢ ¢
Length, head and body ... | 1°9 1'8 a | 15 15 2°0 1°95 | 1°9
= Rl iris: Qeieiess del t ES 1°55 | 1°6 15 1°55 |-1°5 1°45 | 16
= DD ty cinuiaiie aes 1) Ono 0°6 06 0°58 | O06 0°63 | 06 | 0°61
= 2 ee Ne ied bat 05 O57 | 05 0-5 O51 | 0°53 | O52
Fl GFAGUS...6-- vee | O'27 | O23 | 0°26 | O25 | 0-25 | 0°24 | O24 | O26
= BOP ORI 6. wavelets a>) d SOs) WBA, |, beds 1°32 ) 1°35 | 1°4 1:35 | 1:43
ss BPN as pcs ws: ve, | OG | 0729 | O27 | O28 | O26 | 0°27 | 0°27 | O27
» third finger.. ...| 2°25 | 2:26 | 2:2 | 217 | 22 | 2:15 | 227 | 23
See iiia finger ccs. 0) 1°74 | 27 14% | 293 |17 |.1:75.| 1-75, 28
¥5 foot and claws .. | 0:3 O34 ' O37 | 074 0°34 | 0°37 | 0°36 | O04
* calcaneum...... | 0°6 0°6 ODF | O57 ft 05a" | Oa: 06 —
Rl... evarse (Oe | eo liSed | 9:3 | 95 195 | 97 | 100

Fur above dark brown; beneath ashy, the basal part of the hairs
being black. Muzzle, ears, and membranes dusky, with a purplish tint.
The specimen whose dimensions are entered in the third column above
differs from all the others in having the forehead rather abruptly
raised above the face line, the ears longer, and the third finger different-
ly proportioned. The metacarpal bone is longer than in any of the
other examples, but the first phalanx of the third finger is shorter,
measuring 0°4, while in the other specimens it varies from 0°5 to 0°55.
On a comparison of specimens at the British Museum, I find an ex-
ample of V. mystacinus in that collection with the third finger propor-
tioned as in this abnormal individual ; and all these Nepalese bats agree
perfectly with the common V. mystacinus in shape of ear and tragus,
and in other essential characters.

Considering how common this bat is in Nepal, it is very singular
that Mr. Hodgson never seems to have obtained a specimen of it there.
His first acquaintance with the species was made years after he left
Nepal, when he procured it at Siligori, in the Sikkim Tarai, and named
it Vespertilio siligorensis.

18. VESPERTILIO MURICOLA.

Vespertilio muricola, Hodgson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. vol. x, pt. ii, p. 908
(1841) (name only); Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Collect. Brit. Mus. p. 4 (1846) ; Dobson,
Monogr. Asiat. Chir. p. 134 (1876); Cat. Chir. Brit. Mus. p. 316 (1878).

Vespertilio adversus, apud Hutton, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1872, p. 710.

This is another species from Nepal which Mr. Hodgson named but
never described, He presented three examples of it, obtained in the
Nepal Valley, to the British Museum, and of these Gray noted in the
catalogue above quoted, “ Feet large, elongate, half free; tragus
elongate, lanceolate, subfalcate ;” no measurements or other diagnostic
particulars are given. It is difficult tosee how this can be considered a

256 J. Seully— On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [ No. 3,

definition of the species, and yet I believe it is the only description we
had of Hodgon’s V. muricola before the appearance of Dr. Dobson’s
‘Monograph.’ That author has satisfied himself that the title Vespertilio
caliginosus of Tomes, dating from 1859, as well as three or four other
defined names published before the appearance of his monograph, really
apply to the species named, but not described, by Hodgson as V. muri-
cola. Under these circumstances it seems. doubtful whether Hodgson’s
title can be retained for the species; but, as Dr. Dobson has used the
name of V. muricola in his two important works, and changes in
nomenclature are to be deprecated, I have here followed his
example.

On a comparison of specimens, V. muricola is readily distinguished
from V. mystacinus by the shape of the tragus. In the former, the
tragus is concave on its inner margin, and is decidedly inclined inwards
and rather forwards; while in V. mystacinus the tragus is more erect
and has a straight inner margin.

Nothing is recorded about the habits of this species in Nepal, but
Captain Hutton writes, ‘This is a common species at Mussooree and
in the Dehra Doon. It is early onthe wing, coming out of caves and
hollow trees, flying high, and is very rapid in its movements.” .

19. MINIOPTERUS SCHREIBERSII.

Vespertilio schreibersii, Natterer in Kuhl, Deutsch. Flederm, Wetterau. Ann. iv

p. 41 (1819).
Vespertilio fuliginosa, Hodgson, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng. vol. iv, pp. 700 and

701 (1835).
Miniopterus schreibersii, Dobson, Monogr. Asiat. Chir. p. 160 (1876) ; Cat. Chir.

Brit. Mus. p. 348 (1878).

Mr. Hodgson, in describing his Vespertilio fuliginosa, says that in
size it is somewhat smaller than Vespertilio formosa, and with the ears,
lips, and muzzle as in the latter species. The face is sharp, but the
rostrum is somewhat recurved, owing to the concave bend of the nasal
bones which join a high forehead with a considerable curve. He notes
that the dentition of V. fuliginosa is a ees Meee thus differing

from V. formosa and V. labiata (= V. noctula),in which the molar series is

- The colour, he says, is wholly sooty brown.
G2

This description is sufficient to show that Hodgson was referring to
Miniopterus schrevbersii. In Gray’s ‘ Catalogue of Hodgson’s collection

in the British Museum’ (1846, p. 4), six specimens of bats from Nepal

d 887. ] J. Seul'y—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. 257

are entered under the name of Sooty Scotophile (Scotophilus fuliginosus),
with a remark that the feet are very small, in the wing to the base of
the toes. This attachment of the wing-membrane would not apply to
M. schreibersii, in which ‘that membrane only reaches the ankle; but
Dr. Gray appears to have suspected that he was including two species
under one name, for he adds, “a.—e. Specimens in spirit. f. A
Specimen with a rather larger tragus, without any small lobe at the
outer side of its base.” The last-mentioned specimen was probably the
type of Hodgson’s V. fuliginosa, and I am rather surprised not to find it
figuring in the list of specimens of M. schreibersit in the latest cata-
logue of bats in the British Museum. As has before been mentioned, the
first five specimens called by Dr. Gray Scotophilus fuliginosus are really
examples of Vesperugo abramus.

I obtained a single specimen of M. schreibersii in the Nepal Valley,
on the 8th of February, which gave the following measurements :—

Length, head and body 2°2 inches, tail 2°2, head 0°7, ear 0°52,
tragus 0°24, forearm 1:9,thumb 0°3, third finger 3°52, first phalanx of
third finger 0°45, fourth finger 2°6, fifth finger 2:1, tibia 0°75, foot and
claws 0°4, caleaneum 0°55; expanse 13°5.

The fur is rich alec brown above, and pale brown on the lower
surface; the basal part of the fur being everywhere blackish brown.
This example was secured in a curious way. I shot a crow (Corvus
splendens) one evening in my garden, and as it fell a bat dropped from its
claws, which proved to be M. schrevbersit. The bat had evidently just
been captured and killed by the crow, probably out of sheer mischief.

Mr. Hodgson says that this species remains in Nepal throughout
the year and does not hibernate, and that it is solitary in habit when
hunting for its prey. Captain Hutton mentions that in Masuri it is
found in caves and caverns, and even in crevices of rocks, and is occa-
sionally attracted to the lamps ina room. This no doubt means that
the light of lamps attracts insects, and in pursuit of these the bat en-
ters rooms. |

It will be seen that, in the foregoing list, 19 species of bats are ad-
mitted as occurring in Nepal. One of these (Rhinolophus affinis) is ins
cluded with doubt, the specimen of that species presented by Mr.
Hodgson to the British Museum having possibly been obtained in Dar-
jiling, and not in Nepal. Of the total 19 species, 3, namely, Pteropus
medius, Cynonycteris amplexicaudata, and Cynopterus marginatus, are
certainly not part of the fauna of the Nepal Valley. They have been
found there as mere stragglers from a neighbouring tract of the country
which differs essentially, in point of elevation and of fauna and flora, from

33

258 J. Scully-—On the Chiroptera of Nepal. [No. 3,

our valley. These three bats extend all along the Himalayas, in the low
and hot portions adjoining the plains; and they only penetrate into the
hills for considerable distances, in suitable localities, up low-lying river
valleys.

Of the 15. or 16 species of Chiroptera properly belonging to the
Nepal Valley, only one (Vespertilio nipalensis) is, so far as known, pecu-
liar to this small part of the Himalayas. Another species (Rhinolophus
macrotis) is only known to occur in Nepal and at Masuri further west
in the Himalayas. All the rest have a more or less wide range in the
Himalayas, both east and west of Nepal.

A few words remain to be said about certain species which have
been hitherto wrongly attributed to Nepal by various authors. The
number amounts to six or seven, and these I will now briefly notice.

1. As already shown, Cynopterus marginatus has been included in
the Nepal list by many writers owing to a misidentification of Pteropus
pyrivorus, Hodgs.

2. Megaderma lyra is said to be represented by specimens in the
British Museum from Nepal, in Dr. Dobson’s ‘ Catalogue of Chiroptera’
(p. 157). This is erroneous, as the specimens referred to were pre-
sented by Mr. Hodgson, and he first obtained the species in the Siligori
Bungalow, Sikkim Tarai, in 1847, long after he had permanently left
Nepal.

3. Synotus darjilingensis is given by Dr. Horsfield (P. Z.S. 1856,
p. 395) as from Nepal, under the names of Barbastellus communis and
Plecotus darjilingensis, Hodgs. This is clearly wrong, as the title given
by Hodgson sufficiently shows.

4. Plecotus auritus is indicated by Dr. Dobson (Cat. Chir. Brit.
Mus. p.179) as from Nepal, on the evidence of the type specimen of
Plecotus homochrous, Hodgson. That type, however, was obtained by
Hodgson in Darjiling (Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Coll. 1863, p. 2), and he
never got the species in Nepal.

5. Dr. Horsfield states (P. Z. 8. 1856, p. 394) that Murina suillus
(= Harpyiocephalus harpia) was obtained by Hodgson in Nepal. This
is not so: the species was called Noctulinia lasyura by Hodgson,
and was obtained by him in Darjiling (Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Coll. 1863,

2).
d # Vespertilio mystacinus has been stated by more than one writer
to have been procured by Hodgsonin Nepal. This is a mistake: he
first obtained the species in the Siligori Tarai, and named it V. siligo-
rensis. Vespertilio darjilingensis is also attributed by Horsfield (loc.
cit.) to Nepal; it is probably the same as V. mystacinus, and if
Hodgson got it in Nepal he must have named it on the model of lucus

a non lucendo.

R. B. FOOTE, Journ. As. Soc. Bengal, 1887, Vol. LVI, Pt. II.

C)

16

PLATE XI.

Ne vali % (ae
) heyrala YN ar AS
\ s ,
; inet m
aN “olay mp be giv Siggazen

} cf

ae '
\ okheal

Woe

Anjanvel

GohagarhY

Ty oat, subline
pweee eee

PNawndg

Jaigarh es 7 ~
190" >»

a
" : x
eS S Horte d

(g
Rutnagher i "y yh 7 + x ne << «lit
ne subrikonda Ws
i Beret a &, 2
a / Th
Rajapur Wy \oDavankony la Vas
. J ‘ <a Y
Visiadrug G2 Sheen spney! 2 eS
Anarias of arses 2 We Miksa } ads ~ :
Bank Deano i Nisee B gaa wud 8 Wadyeihh \gvonpars é “Machurlea |
5 Teas Ss

Rafribiig?

Kalladgie’ 4
Gokak:

Malwan

i

x
y

Farle °

~~ {Masulipatan yg

Rum wet
mopapal

sjpEne

Mud gal aia

rn & 9 Ae \

Vingorla Adank 4

Darsi_ +S ly,
K'| j

Se x
Panj hy vs Sas Soa Naas Nanda

Marmagom B o& aig
Pande
nis thy RC

ye

Padile
‘0

Koliger eX:
Lia ie Vil fs
ied
% oud 3 ‘5
eee
Sean K a ota te
\ ee } nicole
§
a ) argu

va

atthe Bi

eS are 4 l
€.

Koilfaurtlar

C.Ramas & Kalgh

Kaw ali
sie °

|
|}
Nello?

Vinkataphelam|

J
Hollol 3 ae

Pym xy
Kanitiyhya

a)
Dav fants

< Dodert
6

Dhak har %
/ Weta
\\ ; i E \ Kad:

\ Chit: ildpoog Coes ; ‘ Kadri wien
New Vidinal \ Feats eas? chai be
ys aN CON fete Ars hl Sak
CoORS, : § 5 \ er

nik

f eT 2 {
Cudiban da

1

_ sdlonyial

wun. vamlxonda

| Zeige g
| Koptttlipog 2 = Ne
| S Wade Ys intake Mdhanagel
| fee lapse "re
° OWN !
a 1

—2
K toNeg abe 2

1°

V ee hres me

mn Sa

VaTne
a OWEN, Matin a Sober ee
a tf luge

aa i oe oa KQasiicaanpye nde

\ Mulivurdiur

i

DP) jandutas, £)Singarikunda

Res
SFE amapamam

o\
of SP Devi

Nizampugern

%, AS S

uu

o

a

a

(0)

Irpmagham

‘oromandel
talikeat

12)

aah LAOoy a
vale ham Koogexc os Cheer 4
Pp Elifodlpeni Danke alica SY = a Faun f p | S
2 be Tatrupu SP ee \tranquebar a
Be i et ee
| F © Fee (races Nequpatam 4K
SOUTH INDIA = DM oe
i = a) 1 oy Rial = foe © Madarnium
: a se =, Bul Padukoire ») aN S
shewing the en § DiRtiaitubny A PRO) Palin
wk f Tripaturs \ a 4 one. 1 +t
oleae dan. 2
OHIEF LOCALITIES AT WHICH NEOLITHIC AND PALCOLITHIC Besser * — at
‘usual Vin de 2
gm °Shevagamy 4 » PB! Pedro
REMAINS HAVE BEEN FOUND Otay Gnmnaear
Vi, Upung oS

=
Middleburg
Deltt I

RO 9 Ko
4 Wipe }
Pa),
Scale 1 Inch = 64 Miles, or = 554+,5a0, |
0 0 a9 60 80 190 SS a0 200 Miles Ramesveram

ws Neolithic Settlements.
4 Other Neolithic finds.
4 Paleolithic finds,

%,
| Madaw

Kavative!)\ ) ta pdndide

CLIT
L

Mocletivoes

“ly

L. epambul

‘eleyur S
Ly HFroneh Rocks \ == .
AREA hevari i
8 Nulkead
MYSORE -8 vr ty
9 = oCallega: pa
i i Tauangud, oManduy: se
o
« ~
erdacyilui =

ot ;
Deen

AS
<r

Printed from a transfer to stone.in the Lithographic Office, Survey of India Department, Calcutta, October 1887.

a Wa
a ae
7in, ¢
4 4
“

he ty

var 2
.
_ . '
Patel ty, é
ui Cig, bet 3 pts ‘
a. ‘ rene we Vg a
f
— x Ny . i :
Rae ue ney Sy een et arena ners niet Sy SeNMASS RB eK KIA AT pH ety
- 4 = Q Stle Aap.)
* " spy oe oe eh p
ot * or nutty } ve ~ ee
Ay had
at Posat~ ps.
2 lope ‘
\ b eS ;
= , ie ta)
re A: A J
Pan's AG,
‘As
Rte Ne
erent J ;
oe, RL RG Pe Bee ome RAT (Cap fais 41 tad ka gate oe
,? ; fis Tas Me ... Puy sa T as Pou by R j - oe
ad <5 & ° ri i
a Se fT ae | | |
* 7 ¥ ey | wiitteays é 1 ;
+f Se Meet ean a re Ve
he “hs

4 wie \ 4 ; ~
wr : piteervine he: pers ; aia =~ Pp. : , ; ving
‘ A q \ J

‘

1 887. ] R. B. Foote—On the Stone Age in South India. 259

7. Lastly, Nycticejus nivicolus Hodgs. is said by Dr. Horsfield
(loc. cit. p. 395) to be from Nepal. I am not certain as to what this
species really is ; itis possibly Harpytocephalus harpia, before mentioned,
but, whatever it may be, Hodgson did not get it in Nepal. The correct
locality for the type is, “‘ Sikkim Himalaya, northern region, near snow”
(Gray, Cat. Hodgson’s Coll. 1863, p. 3).

Considering that the list of Nepal bats is a short one, the number
of errors that have collected about it is more than usually large.

' X VIII.—Notes on some recent Neolithic and Paleolithic Finds in South
India.—By R. Bruce Foorn, F. G. 8., Superintendent of the Geo-
logical Survey of India, Fellow of the University of Madras.—Com-
municated by THE SUPERINTENDENT OF THE INDIAN Museum.

[Received and Read August 3rd, 1887. |
(With a Map—PI. XI.)

ConTENTS.,

§ 1. Introduction.

. Earliest recorded finds in South India.

§ 3. Mr. Fraser’s discoveries at Bellary. Letter to the Geological Magazine,
1873. My finds in Bellary District and the South Mahratta Country,
exhibited at the Vienna International Exhibition and presented to the
Geological Survey Museum, 1873.

§ 4. Mr. Valentine Ball’s paper “‘ On the Forms and Geographical Distribution
of Ancient Stone Implements in India,” 1878.

§ 5. Finds in Salem, Tinnevelly, Madura, Trichinopoly, Nellore, and Kistna
Districts, and the Nizam’s Territory. Absence of littoral Kitchen-
middens of the Danish type.

§ 6. Collection of Celts from North Arcot District described by Mr. John
Cockburn.

§ 7. Cache of Neolithic Implements and Pottery at Patpad, Banaganapalle
State, Karnul District. Finds in the Yerra Zari Gabbi, in Billa
Surgam, and other Caves, 1883—85.

§ 8. The Neolithic Settlements of the Bellary-Anantapur Country, 1884—87.

| Slag and Cinder-mounds and Camps. Celt-factories. Selection of gra-
nite-gneiss hills for the great majority of the settlements. Varieties of
implements, &c. found. Varieties of stone selected for use. Pottery
and other implements. Connection of the Neolithic and Iron Ages.

§ 9. Paleolithic remains from the shingle-fans at base of the Copper mountain,

south of Bellary.
§ 1. So many communications have been made to this Society on
the subject of prehistoric stone implements of various ages, discovered.
in different parts of India and its dependencies, that I should hesitate

260 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

before making a further one, did I not believe that I have really fresh
matter of great interest to lay before you, having during the last few
years made various finds which determine the age of a hitherto uncer-
tain group of remains, and throw light on the connection of the Neolithie
and. Ivon periods. The mere discovery of important centres of manu-
facture of Neolithic or polished stone implements is by itself a point of
great interest, and I have the pleasure of informing you of the discovery
of several centres of the kind. j

Most archeologists regard it as a well-established fact that our
ancestors, to speak of mankind generally, passed through at least three,
and in some countries four, grades of progressive civilization indicated
by the character and material of their weapons and domestic imple-
ments.

In South India, up to the present day, three of these grades, or
periods, are known to have been passed through by the old inhabitants ;
the Rude Stone Period, the Polished Stone Period, and the Iron Period.
A Bronze or Copper Period has not, so far, been traced in the south, and
iron had been introduced among the people living in the Southern
Deccan, and was probably manufactured by them at the same time that
they were still using and making implements of polished stone.

I have used the terms Paleolithic and Neolithic not only because
they are extremely convenient, but because, so far as South India is con-
cerned, they are, so far as our present knowledge goes, very fit and suit-
able terms. Abundant geological evidence exists in the south that a
great period of time elapsed between the era of the old Stone-chippers
and that of the Stone-polishers.

Whether the latter were descendants of the former is at present
impossible to say, for no evidence has been yet found to prove or dis-
prove the idea.

§ 2. The former existence of the old Stone-chippers in South India
was unknown till 1863, when J had the good fortune to discover the first
chipped implement in a lateritic gravel at Palaveram a few miles south
of Madras. A few months later, Dr. King and I had the further good
fortune to come upon another lateritic gravel some forty miles north-west
of Madras, where implements, all made of quartzite, occurred in situ and
abundantly. A fine series of these, including many of the type speci-
mens figured in my papers in the Madras Literary Society’s Journal
and the volume of the Norwich Prehistoric Congress (1868), is now
in the Indian Museum.

At that time, no discovery of Neolithic or polished implements had
been published, nor, so far as I know, had any been made, and it fell to
me to make the first discovery of such during the course of the follow-

1887.] Paleolithic Finds in South India. 261

ing year, 1864, This find (a ring-stone) was noticed in my paper on the
Paleolithic implements published in the Madras Journal of Literature,
and is now in the Indian Museum. Not very long after, I found a good
celt near the Arconum junction of the Madras Railway, which was also
recorded in the same paper.

In 1865, it became known that celts of diverse shapes and sizes and
in large numbers were to be seen in little shrines, or stuck up on end
round the foot of sacred trees, close to many of the temples on the
Shevaroy hills in Salem District. Considerable numbers of these were
procured, and some found their way into the British Museum, but, so
far as I know, nothing was published about them. In the same year,
I found a small, but very well made, celt about eleven miles south of
Nellore.

A solitary celt was reported as found on a hill near Mercara in
Coorg, and the find, which was communicated to this Society in 1868 by
Mr. H. A. Mangles, has repeatedly been quoted by various writers, Mr.
W. T. Blanford, Mr. V. Ball, and Mr. John Cockburn amongst them, as
the first made in South India, my Arconum celt being ignored, though
published in 1865.

§ 3. The next Neolithic discovery in the south was made by the
late Mr. William Fraser, M. I. C. E., about 1872, when he was District
Engineer of Bellary. I first heard of his discovery from himself towards
the end of that year. He had found numerous celts and chisels in various
stages of manufacture and use, together with corn-crushers and mealing-
stones, and much broken antique pottery on two hills, the North Hill at
Bellary and the Peacock Hill five miles to the north-east. Mr. Fraser very
kindly took me to both hills, and afforded me the pleasure of finding
some specimens for myself, to which he added a few more from his own
small but choice collection.

On taking leave of him, I urged him strongly to communicate his
discovery to some scientific society, which he promised to do, but un-
fortunately never did. He died suddenly afew months later, and his
collection of celts was lost, probably thrown away in ignorance of its value.
It included some good celts and several remarkably good specimens of
the long narrow chisel type, a form which, so far as I know, has not
yet been found in other parts of India.

On my way from Bellary to Gadak, I passed a notable conical
mound of slaggy cinders which stands in the middle of a small pass,
the Budi Kanama, across a line of hills about sixteen miles west of Bel-
Jary, and has been described several times by various writers many years
ago, among them by no less excellent an observer than the late Captain
Newbold. It has been held to be of volcanic origin, and the natives

262 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

regard it as the funereal mound of some great Rakshas or demon. I
had only a few minutes to devote to looking over it, as I was on the
march and much pressed for time. Brief as my search was, I foand one
celt and some mealing-stones and corn-crushers in the little rain-gullies
cut in the sides of the mound, and on several lumps of slag found the
impressions of stalks of coarse straw; this sufficed to disprove the
volcanic cone theory, so I went on. At Hampasagra, sixty miles west of
Bellary, I found a good celt lying on the top of the bank of the
Tungabhadra. In the South Mahratta country, [ had made a few good
finds in the two previous years, the best being some seven or eight good
celts of medium size on the top of a small hill fifteen miles south-west of
Kaladgi. I did not publish any separate notice of these finds beyond a
brief reference to them in a letter to the Geological Magazine, in which
Talso drew attention to Mr. Fraser’s discovery. This letter appeared
in April 1873. Some of these (with my Bellary specimens and a
very fine collection of Paleolithic implements that I discovered in
fluviatile gravels in the banks and beds of the Malprabha river and its
main southern affluent, the Benihalla), I exhibited at the Vienna
International Exhibition in 1573. My collection was much admired by
the Austrian archeologists, and I was strongly pressed to sell it, but de-
clined, and afterwards presented it to the Geological Survey Museum, to
which it was sent from Vienna. In 1882, it was made over to the
Archeological section of the Indian Museum, together with all the
other collections of Paleolithic and Neolithic implements.

§ 4. Among the number of those who saw and examined my speci-
mens in the Vienna Hxhibition was Mr. Valentine Ball, then of the
Geological Survey of India, a gentleman who had made various com-
munications to this Society on the subject of stone implements in India.
In 1878, Mr. Ball read a paper before the Royal Irish Academy, with
elaborate tables showing the distribution, in India, Burmah, and parts of
the Indian Archipelago, of stone implements of all kinds. Mr. Ball
forgot my Bellary specimens, overlooked my letter to the Geological
Magazine, and ignored the various references to Neolithic finds made in
my various papers on Stone Implements in South India. The Shevaroy
hill celts he had not heard of, and he assumed Mr. Mangles’ Coorg celt to
be the only Neolithic implement ever found in South India. On this
very slender foundation, Mr. Ball built up a decidedly bold, if not
hazardous, theory that the occurrence of polished celts only in the
north-eastern quarter of India and in Burmah, of only chipped imple-
ments in the southern half of India, and of only cores and flakes in the
north-western quarter of the country, was due to the different im-
plements having been made by different races of men occupying these

1887. | Paleolithic Finds in South India. 263

three distinct provinces, which met and slightly overlapped each other
in Central India. Here and there, it was true, a few implements
characteristic of one province occurred well within the limits of another,
but such an occurrence was to be treated as what is geologically termed
an ‘outlier’, and held not to affect the general validity of the theory.
Mr. Ball rejected the terms Neolithic and Paleolithic for India as con-
veying erroneous ideas of progression. He says in the paper referred
to, ‘‘ The different forms of implements seem to be rather indices of
race than time.” The early inhabitants of South India, according to this
theory, attained only to a much lower platform of civilization than did
those of North-eastern India.* While passing his paper through the
press, Mr. Ball became acquainted with the collection of Shevaroy hills
celts in the British Museum, which seems to have staggered him some-
what, but he still stuck to his theory and merely added a note in the
press to this effect : “‘ If the locality ”’ (the Shevaroy hills) “is authentic,
we have another instance of an outlier. Such exceptions to the main
features of distribution will possibly be from time to time discovered,
but they must become very numerous before they can be considered to
outweigh the facts upon which the general conclusions in this paper
have been founded.”

Mr. Ball’s paper remained unknown to me for more than six years
after its publication, else I should have written at once to show how
ill-founded it was, in ‘view even of the knowledge of Neolithic remains
then existing. When I did become acquainted with it, rather more
than three years ago, I was making almost daily fresh discoveries of
Neolithic remains in the South, and had not time to write a paper in
reply, but mentioned it in a letter to Dr. John Evans, F. R. S., the
greatest living authority on stone implements, and he communicated
this letter and some others about my new finds to the Anthropological
Society, in whose Journal for August 1886 an abstract of them was
published.

§ 5. The Shevaroy Hill celts constituted the earliest Neolithic
find made south of the latitude of Madras, and twelve years elapsed
before any further discoveries were made in that direction. In 1878, I
found the cutting half of a small celt at Uta Kovil four miles north-east
from Arrizur in Trichinopoly District. Tanjore District yielded no
Neolithic implements, and Madura District was also very unprolific, the
only specimens found being two chert cores and a chert flake with a
serrated edge formed by 7 consecutive small notches in close apposition.
These were found on the surface of gravels of very recent formation.

* The question of the distinctness of the two stone ages will be referred to
again later.

264 R. B. Foote—Note on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

Of uncertain age, but probably Neolithic, is a carved bone pendant
that I obtained in 1883 out of the mud of a very interesting submerged
forest at the west end of Valimukkam Bay on the south coast of the

Ramnad zamindari. This is the only piece of worked bone that I know of
as having been found in South India, excepting some cut bones discovered:

in the ossiferous caves of Billa Surgam in Karnul District. The
pendant was in all probability used as an ear ornament. It is pierced at
the thinner end by a small well-drilled hole, and shows four incised lines
going clean round it, one a little below the perforation, the other
about +” above the round, thicker (lower) end. It was probably well-
polished, and, though weathered, is still smooth enough to be rather
glossy. J had hoped to find much of value in the Valimukkam sub-

merged forest, my first visit of afew minutes duration having given

me the bone pendant, but, on re-visiting it last year, I found that the ac-
tion of a small river which opens into the bay close by, combined with a
heavy surf, had covered over the greater part of the old forest area with
a broad sandbank, while the surf had removed a large number of the old
tree stumps which had been visible at low tide at the time of my first

visit. I had a long tramp about over the peaty mud flat still remaining,’

but found nothing more than a piece of old pottery too much rolled to
show its real character.

At my first visit to Cape Comorin in 1869, I was struck by the large
consumption of shellfish made by the fisher-folk living in the coast
villages, speculating that their ancestors might have had similar tastes,
and I hoped that an examination of the coast would show the existence of
middens, such as proved so wonderfully rich in prehistoric remains on
the coasts of Jutland and Schleswig. In 1881, 1882, and 1883, I carried
out the geological survey of South Travancore, Tinnevelly, and Madura,
but unfortunately found no true kitchenmiddens, and fear that none will
be found there, for my work, though not absolutely exhaustive, was very
close in many places where such remains might have been expected.
The remains of shellfish, chiefly of a large species of Mytilus, lie about
in great quantities in many places near the coast and, here and there,
at places far inland, but they do not occur in sufficiently great accum-
ulations to deserve the name of middens, or to hide any prehistoric
remains.

The Neolithic remains I obtained in Tinnevelly (in 1883) were cores
and flakes of a chert foreign to that part of the country. They were found
at the south end of the red sandhills forming the “teri”? west of Sawyer-
puram, a well-known station of the Gospel Propagation Society’s Mission,
eleven miles south-west of Tutikorin. The south end of the teri had been
largely denuded by wind action, which had removed the fixed red sand

es

1887.] Paleolithic Finds in South India. 265

toa depth of 15 or 16 feet, and exposed a dark red surface of hard
sandy loam over an area of several acres. On this surface, I noticed
some flakes of a brown chert I had seen nowhere in the South, and
these flakes led me to search closer, and I soon found several well-made
cores of the Jabalpur type. With the chert flakes were a few of limpid
quartz, also a foreign stone in that immediate neighbourhood. A
number of fragments, mostly small, of antique red pottery accompanied
the chert implements and showed strong signs of having had their edges
much worn by the action of “sand blast” at some previous time when
the teri* was in a moving condition.

The northern part of the Carnatic had previously yielded me a few
Neolithic implements, a small but perfect celt eleven miles south of
Nellore (1865) and half of a large ring-stone the drilling of which had
never been quite completed. This ring-stone, or perforated hammer,
was found in 1875 at Vemavaram ten miles north-east of Ongoze and
close to the northern boundary of Nellore district.

Some four miles to the east of the famous Amravati tope, I found
(close to the village of Vayikunthipuram, on the south bank of the
Kistna) what appears to be the body of a good-sized celt minus the
cutting edge. This was made of a buff and purple mottled sandstone of
upper Gondwana age. The only other implement made of this material
was a cylindrical fragment (wanting both ends) of doubtful use,
unless it may be regarded as part of a prehistoric “rolling pin.” This
I got on the site of a Neolithic settlement at Jerlacherru, nine miles
W. of Kammamet in the Nizam’s territory. The settlement had existed
between two granite-gneiss hills, and the fields all round were covered
thickly with fragments of high class antique pottery. I could only
mourn the hard fate which denied me time to examine this very pro-
mising locality.

Another Neolithic site, on the left bank of the Umni-ern, 3 or 4
miles south of Kammamet, that I could only pass by on the march
looked also very promising.

I must not forget to mention that I picked up the pointed end of
a celt just south of the village of Matur, 27 miles south-east of
Kammamet.

Proceeding westward, I came across a small hill of granite-gneiss
south of Poolloygooda (21 miles east by south of Bonagiri), where
were a considerable number of highly polished deep grooves worn into
the hardrock. From their shape and size, I inferred they must have been

* Teri is the name given by the Tamil people exclusively to the great drifts of
red sand which form so remarkable a feature along the eastern side of Tiinnevelly

District.
34

266 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

made in grinding the cutting edges of celts, and my inference has since
been confirmed by finding similar polished grooves on granitoid hills in
the Bellary country which were great centres of the celt manufacture.
The grooves were about 10 to 14 inches long, about 13 wide in the mid-
dle, and tapered off to a sharp point at either end. The greatest depth
of the groove was at the centre and varied from 1} to nearly 2 inches.
The polish was best preserved in the grooves that had been filled up
with soil washed in by rain.

A few miles west of this place, I came on a large dyke of very fine
grained greenstone, the surface of the western end of which, near the
village of Arur, had been considerably broken up and yet showed no
signs of ordinary quarry work ; a large quantity of débris of an uncommon
character lay about, which struck me as having possibly been produced
in the manufacture of stone implements; some of the fragments being
very shapely flakes. A few minutes’ search gave me a well-shaped celt
in the first or rough stage. Further search would I feel sure have pro-
duced more evidence as to this having been a celt factory, but I had
not the time to spare for it.

§. 7. In October 1883, I had the pleasure of making a very inter-
esting find at Patpad, a small village 4 miles west of Banaganpalli, in
Karnul District. The spot on which the find was made isa piece of
slightly irregular ground, triangular in shape, and enclosed between the
high road, the end of a small limestone ridge, and a small stream which
runs south-east into the Suru river, a confluent of the Penernu, or Northern
Pinakini. Near the centre of the ground, I noticed a few fragments of
bright red antique pottery sticking in the sides of a tiny rain-gully.
Being greatly taken up with excavations in a large cave some distance
off, I thought no more about them; but, a few days later, having found
some interesting prehistoric pottery at some depth in excavating in one
of the passages of my cave, and taken a great deal of trouble in getting
all the pieces and sticking them together, my head servant, a bright and
observant little Madrassee, excavated some of the broken pottery I had
seen in the rain-gully just referred to and pieced it together into a very
shapely bowl. After that, he dug over several square yards of the ad-
jacent ground, under my superintendence, and we unearthed a consi-
derable number of articles of pottery of various shapes and sizes, but all
broken more or less. They were buried only 5 or 6 inches below the
surface, and the place where they lay was justin the regular track of the
village cattle to their drinking place and thus crossed every day
several times by large herds. The wonder was everything had not been
reduced to powder.

The different vessels found are mostly of admirable shape, several

1887. ] Paleolithic Finds in South India, 267

of them really elegant. They are of the typical glazed red and black
earthen-ware so characteristic of the prehistoric graves of Coimbatoor
and the Nilgiris. Two forms are, so far as I know, peculiar to that find,
the one is like a flower-pot with an extremely small base, the other is coni-
cal with slightly excavated sides and no base, so that it must have been
perched on a ring-stand when in use, and not held in the hand. Several
such rings fitted for larger vessels were found there. In the soil which had
filled some of the vessels, I found several good agate and chert cores,
and afew iron implements of (with one exception) small size; long
arrow-heads with strong barbs, one of which is now in the Indian
Museum collection, and other forms. With these were several green-
stone corn-crushers, a large stone pestle with polished sides, and a highly
polished slyking-stone, or slickstone, made of a hornblendic rock. There
were also a small number of point bones too much broken to identify.
In addition, I found a small white bead made out of some shell, a human
premolar, a shell-scraper made by grinding away the lower half of
one valve of a unio shell, and, lastly, a pottery spindle-whorl. The sur-
face of the ground afew yards to the east, which was freely scattered
over with broken antique pottery, yielded a good number of agate and
chert cores and flakes, all of the Jabalpur type, also a variety of larger
flakes, and several small but well worked scrapers. One of these latter
is an exact match to an old flint scraper from Yorkshire which I
have in my collection. A large quantity of mostly bright-coloured
pieces of chert, agate, jasper, quartzite, and lydian stone was also collected
on the same bit of ground; having doubtless been brought there to be
used in making flakes; all these stones are foreign to that immediate
neighbourhood, and the agates and lydian stones must have come from a
distance of 40 miles at the very least. Some of the pottery found in the
Yerizari-gabbi (cave) is ornamented in precisely the same way as the
large fragment of a pot (found lately at Quetta together with a very fine
ringstone and a jasper corn-crusher) which Mr. Wood-Mason is exhibit-
ing to-night.* No celts were found at Patpad, but I got a broken cylin-
drical hammer on the path leading to the Yerrazari-gabbi, and, as I
shall show presently, cores and flakes and the prehistoric red and black
glazed pottery occur largely, together with celts and a variety of other
typical Neolithic implements, in various places to the west of Patpad ;
such being the case, I do not hesitate in regarding the Patpad find as
late Neolithic overlapping into the Iron Age. The whole find was pre-

* Pottery with the same peculiar ornament has also been found on the North
Hill Bellary and at Palavaram close to Madras.—Identically the same ornament
appears also on pottery figured by Sir William Dawson from the old Red Indian
city of Hochelagas in Canada.

268 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

sumably a cache rather than a burying place. A very fine chert flake,
with an excellent core of the same material, was found at Paspalla, a
village some 9 miles west of Patpad.

§ 8. I come now to the most interesting and important part of my
subject, the occurrence of numerous Neolithic settlements in the Bellary-
Anantapur country, to which I proceeded at the end of 1884 to take up
the geological survey of that region. Hver since my expeditions with
Mr. Fraser to the North Hill and the Peacock Hill, I had been longing to
revisit that quarter, and my desire had been much increased by my great
find at Patpad.

I was most anxious also to settle if possible the real nature of the
great cinder-mound at Budikanava which I have already referred to
above.

I revisited the North-hill at Bellary with much success and initiat-
ed a friend, Mr. Justin Boys, the Agent of the Madras Branch Bank at
Bellary, into the delights of celt-hunting, which he has since followed
up with a very satisfactory result, namely, the discovery that the north
and east sides of the Bellary Fort Hill were also at one time inhabited
by the Stone-folk.

At the first possible opportunity, I revisited the Peacock Hill, or
Kapgallu as it is called by the country people. Mr. Fraser had taken
me up and about the southern side of Kapgal, and we had secured but a
small quantity of implements, mostly celts and chisels, but noticed no
special signs of manufacture. On my second visit, I explored the
whole hill, and, on the northern side, near the summit, found abundant
traces of the manufacture of implements and of the residence of the
manufacturers. Kapgal had evidently been a settlement of the Stone-
folk for a considerable period and an important centre of celt manufac-
ture. The traces of residence were very numerous in the shape of
small terraces revetted with rough stone walls, great accumulations of
made ground full of ashesand broken pottery and containing many im-
plements of all sorts, a large proportion of them damaged, many so
much so that they had evidently been rejected as useless. Bones of
bullocks, chiefly broken, occur pretty numerously and especially in the
ashy parts of the made ground. Other traces of residence were small
tanks made by damming up the little stream which drained the northern
side of the ridge. Large blocks of the local granite-gneiss had been
hollowed for some purpose or other and so well worn by use, or purpose-
ly fine-tooled, that their inner surface was all but polished. A number
of these had evidently stood close to the structures that I assume to
have been tanks. Some still remain there as if ready for use, but many
have been broken, and their fragments lie close by. These block

1887.] Paleolithic Finds in South India. | 269

troughs were not deep enough to hold any quantity of water, but may
very likely have been used for mixing some kind of dough, for which
they were very well adapted. A few blocks showed very shallow hol-
lows, and such hollows are very common on rock surfaces, both in the
open and under rock-shelters. Some of these I believe to have been
mealing-troughs in which the grain the people used was finely mealed
with mealing-stones after having been roughly bruised with smaller and
lighter corn-crushers. Both of these kinds of implements are met with in
great numbers here and in almost every one of the many settlements of
the folk that I examined in the Bellary-Anantapur country, and are
especially numerous where great accumulations of ashes and other
kitchen stuff are met with.

The signs of manufacture of implements I found on Kapgal con-
sisted of large numbers of unfinished celts in all possible states of com-
pletion and great quantities of flakes struck off from the selected frag-
ments of rock in the process of fabrication. In the case of Kapgal
settlement, the stone to be worked was procurable on the hill. Itisa
fine grained pale greenstone (diorite ?), which occurs here and there in
irregular bands of some thickness within the mass of a huge dyke of
coarse black diorite that runs along the northern slope of the hill
parallel with its axis. In other settlements, the celts were found to be
made from pieces of greenstone of convenient shape collected from dykes
which in many cases occurred only at considerable distances ; and, in
these cases, the makers often worked up pieces whose exterior was
greatly pitted by weather action and did not take the trouble to remove
the weathered part except where the cutting edge was made. In some
few instances, pebbles were selected and so chipped as to utilize one or
other of them naturally. At Kapgal, this was not the case, and conse-
quently the celts there found have a much more recent look than those
from many of the other settlements.

There is a great variety also in size and shape among the celts and
chisels, especially the former. This was doubtless intentional to suit
special purposes, but to some extent the makers evidently accommodated
themselves to the shape of the rough stone selected for treatment. This
cannot fail to strike the eye when a large series of the implements is
examined. Great differences in skill, in taste, and in patience must
have existed among the workers; the beauty of shape and finish of the
implements varying so very greatly. Some are really elegant in shape
and others downright clumsy. The stages of manufacture through
which the more or less carefully chosen rough stones passed were cer-
tainly four in number, — chipping and picking, grinding and polishing.
The first stage, the chipping, was in all probability done by means of

270 R. B. Foote—WNotes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

stone strikers, hammers, in fact, without handles, of which large num-
bers of all sizes and weights occur in all the settlements in which the
manufacture was carried on. Inthe second stage, the surface of the
chipped implement was picked or “ pecked ” over with a sharp-pointed
striker (by which all the little ridges between the numerous chipped out
surfaces were broken down and the surface rendered approximately
even), and great labour saved to the grinder, who put the implement

through the third stage of progress, and gave it a good sharp and even

cutting edge. The fourth and final stage consisted in polishing the
implement all over.

The grinding and polishing was done by rubbing the implements
backwards and forwards on the surface of the granite rocks, or of big
blocks, which became worn into the shallow elliptical troughs above
referred to, and of which several were met with on the Kapgal hill; on
some of the other settlements, these are very numerous and occur in groups
where the grinders had sat together sociably over their work. On the
Budihal Hill, in Anantapur District, 8 miles south-east of Bellary, are
several remarkable groups of these polishing places. They are placed
on high rock terraces, regular coigns of vantage commanding good
views over the country where the operators could work and watch with
great ease. On one rock terrace, twenty are to be seen in a space just
15 yards square. Other polishing troughs are found well under cover of
great rock shelters, or in small caves, where perfect shade was obtainable
during the heat of the day. .

The implements lay about exposed on the surface or partly im-
bedded in the made ground, and some were found at a depth of 2 or 3
or more feet, where rain-gullies had cut deeply into the made ground.
In every case in which I obtained numerous implements, the quantity
of broken pottery was also very great, and I hardly ever got the one
without the other; and now, whenever I come across fragments of
antique black and red pottery, I make a special search for implements,
and very rarely fail in finding something of interest.

The most numerous implements are strikers and corn-crushers, next
to them numerically come the mealing-stones, then celts and chisels, the
last being very rare. Less common than celts, but less rare than
chisels, are worked scrapers of the Esquimaux type! Cores and core-
flakes are also rare, but I imagine many more would be found, if regular
excavations of the made ground of the built, or natural, terraces were
carried out and the material all carefully sifted. This I had no oppor-
tunity of doing in any case, as my geological work did not admit of my
devoting sufficient time for close research. In many of the settlements,
numerous small stones differing in kind from the local rock were found,

1887. | Paleolithic Finds in South India. 271

such as agates, chert, jasper, lydian stone, and quartz of different kinds ;
these had doubtless been collected to be converted into flakes and
small scrapers, or, possibly, simply because of their bright and pleasing
colours. In three places, stone beads of good workmanship were found ;
of these two were of reddish carnelian, two of delicate green quartzite
of extremely fine texture, and one of shell. Lastly, I must not omit to
mention several pieces of tolerably soft deep red hematite which had
been rubbed down to smooth surfaces on one or more sides and in all
probability been so rubbed down to furnish a pigment for decorative
purposes, very likely as rouge for the cheeks of the Neolithic ladies.
The North Hill at Bellary yielded several of these, and I noticed other
pieces of hematite which had evidently been brought from a distance
for some similar purposes, but had never been used.

Of the dwellings of the Neolithic folk, no positive traces remain ;
from which it may reasonably be inferred that they were of rather
perishable character, like the thatched huts with mud walls of so large
a proportion of the lower classes among the present inhabitants of the
Southern Deccan. It is useless to speculate about what they may have
been like. Small roofless huts, with rough mud and stone walls, exist
in plenty at some of the many settlements, but in each case there were
manifest signs of comparatively recent occupation of the place, and in
no case did I find any implement or fragment of antique pottery inside
such huts, although I carefully searched many of them.

Mr. Fraser discovered two settlements of the Neolithic people, those
of the North Hill at Bellary and the south side of the Peacock Hill; and,
since December 1884, I have found over forty others, large and small. Of
these, I have prepared a list, which will be found further on. I have
indicated the principal ones on the map accompanying this paper, from
which will be seen how they cluster together chiefly in the neighbourhood
of Bellary. Of the forty odd I have enumerated, ten, judging them
by the number of implements they yielded, may be reckoned as first class,
eight, as second class, and the remainder, as third class.

The respective positions of these different settlements are of im-
portance and show that the old Stone-folk had a very decided preference
for occupying commanding positions which were defensible against
their enemies. These they seem to have found preferably on the granite-
gneiss hills so numerously met with in the Bellary-Anantapur country.
Not a single one of their settlements is found on the non-granitoid
hills in the immediate neighbourhood, though many of these are as lofty,
or much more so. I have given much careful consideration to this
important point, and think that four good and sound reasons appear to
have prevailed with the stone-folk when selecting the sites for their

272 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

settlements. Doubtless, other considerations may have influenced them,
but they are not so obvious. The four which seem to have mostly in-
fluenced them were:—l. The more perfect isolation of the granite-
gneiss hills, which mostly rise singly out of the plains, or, if in clusters,
are yet individually detached and therefore more suitable for defence
than posts on continuous ridges, such as are generally formed by the
schistose rocks. Some of the granite-gneiss hills are nearly perfectly
castellated by the disposition of the rock masses. 2. Rock shelters of
great efficiency and comfortable terraces are to be found in numbers
on many of the granitoid hills, but hardly ever on the schistose hills.
3. The collection of rain water and its storage would, from the nature
of the ground, be much easier on the average granitoid rock than on the
average schistose hill. 4. The schistose hills are, in very many cases,
generally, in fact, surrounded by a heavy and broad talus most detri-
mental to easy agricultural work. The granitoid hills, on the contrary,
- form, as a rule, no great talus, but rise up straight out of the great cot-
ton-soil plains, so that the Neolithic field labourers could have been
quite close to places of refuge in case of attack from other tribes, and
yet have been able to carry on their agricultural work.

I only know one bond fide settlement situated on the schistose
rocks, and this is in the open plain far away from any hill. This is near
Sanawaspuram 16 miles N. by EH. of Bellary.

Yet another reason in favour of the granitoid hills is that, from the
many bare sheets and scarps of rock which they show, they do not bear
continuous slopes of long grass capable of being burnt over, as are the
uninterrupted slopes of the schist hills. The absence of these great
grass spreads was a great element of safety for the thatched huts on
the hills.

I referred above to the remarkable mound of slaggy cinders occur-
ring on the Budi Kanama pass, 16 miles west of Bellary, which mound
had been described by various writers 40 or 50 years ago, one of them
supposing it to be a voleanic ash cone! Captain Newbold, the most
eminent amateur geologist and archeologist that South India has
known, was another of these writers, and he favoured one of the native
theories accounting for the origin of the mound, namely, that it was the
result of a great funeral pyre on which all the dead killed in some great
local battle had been cremated. Another native legend ascribes this
mound to the death of Hdimbassurah, a great Rakshas, or giant,
killed by Bhimasainah, one of the Panch Pandus. Captain Newbold
rather opposed. another hypothesis that the mound might be due to the
celebration of some great holocaust of animals offered on the occasion of
some great religious celebration, The proper way to test the real

1887. ] Pal@olithic Finds in South India. 273

origin of this much debated mound would of course be to cut a section
through it, a work which ought to be executed by the Archxological
Survey. The mound is certainly not the product of one huge burning,
the cinder occurring in distinct layers 2’—4’ thick with thin layers of
made ground between them. It was from these that the celts and
various mealing-stones and corn-crushers I found there were washed
down by action of rain. I noticed no other traces of residence, nor any
at all of a manufacture of celts. I cannot help inclining to the holocaust
theory, for, in other cases (notably at the important settlement on Kuri
Kuppi hill and at the quadrangular cinder camp west of Sanawaspura 61
miles N. by E. of Bellary), the number of mealing-stones and corn-
crushers was very large, many of them being imbedded in the cindery
mass. Bones of animals, too, mostly bovine, occur frequently. Frag-
ments of pottery too are very numerous. Many of the marrow bones
had been broken as if to extract the marrow. I did not notice a single
human bone in any one case, or any evidence pointing to a ceremonial
cremation.

The cinder mounds at Sanawaspur, and the larger of the two west
of Halakundi and near the foot of the Copper Mountain, form quadran-
eles about sixty yards square by external measurement, the sides
making a low breastwork much trodden down and cut by rain action.
I do not think they exceed 5 feet in height above the general level, for
T noticed no places that I could not overlook.

Except in the absence of the signs of manufacture of implements,
these two quadrangular camp-like piles of cinder showed much the
same style of things as occurred on many of the larger ash-covered
terraces in the typical hill settlements. Celts and chisels were proba-
bly less numerous in the camps than on the hill terraces, but mealing-
stones and corn-crushers are quite as common, and broken pottery is
not rare. At the Sanawaspuram camp, I obtained fragments of two
small bottle-shaped earthenware vessels.

At the North Hill, Bellary, and several other settlements, I found
numerous lumps of hematite which did not appear to have been collected
for conversion into any implement, for which purpose they were evidently
unfit either from their small size or softness, and with them, here and
there, were pieces of iron slag, which may not improbably be traces of the
local manufacture of iron. Similar indications of an iron-smelting in-
dustry were found in considerable quantity by my friend Mr. C. Cardew,
Superintendent, Locomotive Department, Bellary-Kistna State Railway,

in the great Neolithic settlement which formerly existed on the high

ground south-west of the Guntakal Railway junction. Strongly con-

firmative of the existence of the iron industry at Bellary is to my ap-
35

274 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

prehension the existence of a small brown earthenware tuyere which I
found on the east side the Fort Hill at Bellary among a large quantity
of broken pottery. This tuyere is now in my collection.

Of special interest are two implements found respectively by my
friends Messrs. Boys and Cardew, the first a ring-stone found on Bellary
Fort Hill, the second a wooden comb excavated from a thick bed of pure
white ash in the Guntakal settlement.

The ring-stone, of which Mr. Boys found one half, was a very large
one of rather oval shape externally, but the well-drilled central hole is
perfectly circular.

A very fine collection of celts in various stages of manufacture
and of other implements was made by another friend, Mr. Henry Gom-
pertz, Deputy Superintendent, Madras Revenue Survey, on the north
side of the Bellary Fort Hill, and on the Sangankal hills between the
Bellary hills and Kapgul Hill.

Up to the present, no celt has been found in South India which has
been drilled for the insertion of a handle, as were many European-made
axes and hammer-heads. A very fine celt (in my collection) which was
found on the Shevaroy hills shows, however, the commencement of a drill-
hole on each of the broad sides. These holes are exactly opposite each
other and an inch or more from the middle towards the cutting edge of
the implement. The Celt-folk were, however, well acquainted with the
art of drilling small objects in hard stone, as is shown by the well executed
perforations of the carnelian and quartzite beads already mentioned.

A specimen (also in my collection) from one of the Bellary settle-
ments shows the general outline of a typical celt, but the broad end has
been left quite thick instead of being ground to an edge, while the
pointed end has been ground to a narrow chisel edge transverse in
direction to that which should have been the broad cutting edge. There
are no signs of use on this specimen, which, so far as I know, is quite
unique ; and I am unable to imagine for what special purpose it may
have been prepared.

A few specimens of whetstones, or hones, have been found in the
Bellary settlements, which may perhaps have been used to give the last
final edge to specially choice celts. I have two such in my collection
which show strong marks of use. The marks are rather semicircular,
and just such as would be produced by whetting the rather rounded
edge of a celt. Mr. H. Gompertz found such a stone of rather flat
shape lying on a piece of rock under a good rock shelter on the north
side of Bellary Fort Hill. On the whetstone lay a small celt exactly
as if it had been put down suddenly and never taken up again by the
workman,

.

1887.] Paleolithic Finds in South India. 275

At Koganur, 7 miles E. S. EH. of Davangere in Mysore, I pick-
ed up from the surface a large lump of stone (quartzite, if I re-
collect right) one end of which had been deeply ground into with such
semicircular strokes. The stone had also been very well drilled right
through the centre with a narrow hole a little more than an inch in
diameter. No other traces of Neolithic remains accompanied this
hammer, which, if fixed to a strong handle, must have formed a most
formidable weapon, as the head weighs several pounds. By whomsoever
it may have been made, the artificer had a very good knowledge of the
manner in which to drill a very hard stone.

A remarkable fact with reference to the varieties of weapons and
tools made by the Neolithic people of South India is the absence hitherto
of any traces of their having manufactured stone arrow-heads, such as are
frequently found in other countries occupied by tribes who had attained
to a very similar grade of civilization. It is hard to imagine that the
Neolithic people of the Deccan were unacquainted with the use of the bow
prior to the first introduction of iron. That they used brass after be-
coming acquainted with iron is clearly proved by the discovery of un-
questionable iron arrow-heads in the Patpad cache and in many pre-
historic graves in the South. With an abundance of stone, such as
agate, chalcedony, lydian stone, jasper, and chert, fit for making arrow-
heads, it is certainly most remarkable that no true worked arrow-heads
have yet been found, and it is most desirable that all prehistoric explorers
in India should pay special attention to this point. I have found some
few flakes of chert and jasper that might have been used to tip an arrow,
but I have found and seen none that were obviously prepared for that
purpose.

I give here a list of the localities in the Bellary-Anantapur country
at which the Neolithic folk have left traces of their residence and modes
of life.

List of Settlements with their direct distances from Bellary Fort.
First Class. )

1. Kapgal, N. side of hill... 5 miles N. EB of Bellary.
2. Guntakal Junction ...... Se E. of de
ee emda” TAD igs cov anes cas ate EOF » do,
4, Iddapinkal Fort Hill ...... TD 5; saa, OF "do.
D. Wino Mam Hall. 18... S.E:. of .da
O. Lompadury Hill ..c.i.cccis 20m yo ue. Of doe
7. Daroji Hill ......cceeessseeeee 18° 5, N.W. byW.of do.

276

R. B. Foote— Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

8.
9.
EO.

12.

38.

39.

Kuri Kuppa Hill ......... 18 miles W. N. W. of Bellary.
Gadiganur Hill, foot of 213, W.N. of do.
Latwaram Hill,,........... 28 , SH.by H.of do.

Second Class.

Bellary North Hill ...... — ~- — _
Bellary Fort Hill.......... _ —
Saudamma Konda (hill) 33 ,, N.E.
Sanarasama Konda (hill) 32 ,, N. HE. of "do:
Ram Durg Fort and Hill 24 ,, E

Karamukalu Hill ......... 183 ,, 8

Third Class.
Kapgal S. E. side of hill 5 miles N. H. of Bellary.

Halakoté N. Fort Hill... 314 ,,° N. of ido!

Ditto South Hill ...... 1 Mle Aa of “dae
Manakurti Hill i... 80) IN. B.S None
Hospett Hill (Alur Taluq) 26 ,, N.E.5°N.of do.
Hatti Bellagul Hill ...... 24 ,, N. H. of ~ “do:
Nagaradoni fort Hill...... 29° ,, ‘Es N. E. oF sae
Chippagwi Bil otis ve 2755 ES by NS sok
Yerragudi Hallyn ik 42 5, E.by 5° S.0f —do:
Wajra Karur (low hill)

WV MOR ask eisieas tesieretes Ola by. 2, Oy eo” Okan
Hill east of great dyke

east of Urava Konda 32 ,, S.E.byH.of do.
Urava Konda (hill) ...... 265 ,, ‘8S. Eby Es oP aio:
Koté Koté West Hill’,,. 163° ,, Hy 8S. ED “of “aor
Beder Bellagal Hill ...... 6 , W.by 5°S.o0f Sag
Kolagal East Hill..,...... 33 ,, N.W. of do.

Ditto, West Fide ssccs (... 55...IN. We of do.
Hill N. of Badanhatti... 13. ,, N.N. W. of “de:
Higunda Bin. 24 4, 8.8, Boor
Rupangudi Fort Hill ... 13 ,, S.E. of do.

List of Cinder Mounds and Camps.

:
:
.
Budi Kanama or Budi-
punts, s,s re05 L3G miles W. 5°. of Bellary,
Hala Kandi Camp and 1
TUOMAS Ai stevens dovere . Or ysz/ >, > DY SOL mee
Sanawaspuram Camp... 20 ,, N.5°E. of do,

1887.] Paleolithic Finds in South India. 277

Smaller Cinder heaps.
40. Rocks S. of Kapgal...... 43 milesN.E. of Bellary.

4\.° Korikuppa Hill. iig. 12 5, OW NA ok ao
42. Kakballa hill fort of °
43. Ditto: — do, Snddle { 20. ip Nhs oe Ae

Captain Newbold mentions some cinder mounds on Kapgal Hill
which if still in existence escaped my attention. The great cinder
mound at Nimbapuram a little to the N. HE. of the ruins of Hampi
(Vijayanagar), I have not yet visited. Like the Budikanama mound, it
is regarded by the natives as the cremation heap of one of the great
Rakshasas. It is singular that Newbold, though so keen an observer in
many branches of science, should have so completely overlooked the
celts and many other Neolithic implements lying so freely scattered
about on Kapgal Hill and not unfrequently at Budikanama. It is more
than probable, from his descriptions of the geology of the Bellary
country, that he must have examined pretty closely many of the other hills
in that quarter where the Neolithic settlements now referred to occur.
Only one explanation seems possible to account for so able an archeologist
missing these finds, namely, that, his eye being untrained and his atten-
tion not being awake to this class of prehistoric facts, he passed them
by unheeded. It was not till many years after his time that the great
stir in the scientific world caused by the recognition (by Lyell, Prestwich,
Evans, Falconer, and the great leaders among French and German
geologists) of the true value of Boucher des Perthes Paleolithic finds
extended to India, and was followed by the discovery of the Paleolithic
quartzite implements of Palavaram and the Attrampakkam nullah,
which really started prehistoric research in this country.

The following list enumerates the varieties of implements made of
stone which have been found in the Bellary-Anantapur Neolithic settle-
ments.

1. Celts...... a body narrow and round—butt end pointed.

Bei do. do. and do. do. blunt.
E24. - do, do. and flat do. broad.
d. do. broad and round do. pointed.
és) Ao: do. and flat do. broad.
f. battle-axe type do. blunt.
g. cutting edge, an abrupt wedge.
h. do. a rounded wedge.
a whole body worked square.

2. Chisels... a. body long and narrow.
b. do. much wider than cutting edge.
C.

do. increasing backward to a thick butt; edge
transverse to general plane of body.

278 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,
3. Hammers a. round,
b. square.

4. Ring-stones. |

5. Pestles.

6. Corn-crushers, . globular, 13”—2%" diameter.

7. Bone-crushers, do. 35”—5” do.

8. Strikers, .. a thick type.

9. Mealing-stones, . bv. flat type.
10. Slyking-stones, . (slick-stones).
11. Sharpening-stones,... (hones).
12. Scrapers, . a. heavy.

b. light.
e. circular.

13. Worked flakes.
14. Unworked flakes, .,. triangular, “knife type,” &c., &c.
15. Cores, small, . Jabalpur type.

16. Flakes from small cores.

17. Beads.
18. Reddle-stones.
19. Stone vessels, ..» bowl-shaped.
20. Mealing places, deep, on rocks or detached blocks.
21. Polishing places, do. do.

22. Edging grooves, do. do.

The variety of stone selected for different purposes was consider-
uble as will be seen by the following lists.

Varieties of stone selected for use.

Granite

one ee eevesee see seeees

Granite QNEISS... 1. ween 99

Epidote granite... ......40
Gneiss (ZEON) .1+ seesee eve

Greenstone of Chaat

a is
VATED G cence ces. senses

Quartz very rarely used...
Siliceous breccia of
Dharwar age, vey ij
rarely USCC ....s.seeeee

for mealing-stones and corn-crushers.

mealing-stones, mealing-troughs, polish-
ing and edging places on the.rocks,

deep troughs for water.
these were evidently very

,, corn-crushers fayourite stones and

,, mealing-stones often fetched from long
distances.

corn-

crushers, strikers, hammers, pestles,

celts, scrapers, mealing-stones,
| flakes.

,», corn-crushers and scrapers.

mealing-stones.

1887.] Paleolithic Finds in South India. 279

celts of the flat type, very commonly —

Hornblende schist sf for | at Gadiganur, elsewhere very rarely.

very silky variety)... Bhatia!

tite ee Sag ae stones, mealing-stones, beads

(very rarely).

Heematite, jaspery,... ... », mealing-stones, corn-crushers.

JASPST, VOC. ..v.ciesrsvsveess 5, COVES (rare).

Heematite, earthy aoe »» pigment.

Agate... Gs cxsvesiesecny <p Cores and flakes,

Gustin. Sih ot ais ww 5, beads.

ey Lower , cores, flakes, flake knives, scrapers, strikers.
Vindhyan age... ...

Lydian stone. .» 4, flakes and scrapers.

The bulk of the neolithic pottery is of very high class for Indian
pottery, for, though it will not at all compare with Htruscan and Greek
pottery, yet many specimens have been met with showing great elegance
of form with very superior quality of the clay worked. As it is impos-
sible to enlarge intelligibly on such subjects, unless they could be illus-
trated by well-executed illustrations, I will make my remarks on this
subject very brief, reserving a full account of my pottery finds till
some future time when I shall have had them built up into shape and
figured. The quantity of broken pottery found lying about in the old
settlements is very great, and affords in many cases abundant proof either
that the population was very large, or else that the period of residence
represented was of great duration. I thinkall the pottery collected or
examined by me at the different settlements was wheel-made. In point
of size and shape, the articles found can only be described as legion.
The patterns of ornament employed were also extremely numerous. I
have lately begun to collect fragments of sufficiently large size to show
the special patterns ornamenting them, and I can only express my sur-
prise at the great variety of patterns the old potters had invented. It
is the exception rather than the rule to find the same pattern used twice
over. Many of the patterns are so pretty as to cause very great regret
that they are known from fragments only.

None of the vast number of specimens I have examined belonged
to angular mouthed vessels ; all without exception were round, but, with
that limitation, they represented all possible varieties of shape, from
extremely shallow plates up to rather elongated oval vessels of great
size and thickness of walls, and to narrow-necked bottles.

I noticed no vessel with handles either external or internal,* but

* The internal handles for suspending vessels over a fire without risk of the
flames touching the suspending ropes, such as were used by the North American

280 R. B. Foote—Notes on some recent Neolithic and [No. 3,

a tolerable number were found which were furnished with legs, probably
three or four in number. In many settlements, I found fragments of
flat saucer-like vessels perforated with many holes placed close together.
These had evidently constituted strainers of some kind.

I found several small, rather rudely circular, flat discs of pottery
about 2 inches in diameter, the edges of which had been coarsely ground.
These were very probably lids to lay upon the mouths of vessels re-
quiring to be closed; such discoid lids are used occasionally now-a-days
for the same purpose.

The pots ornamented with a raised fillet marked with impressions
greatly resembling those to be made by a human finger* found in the
Yerra Zari Gaffi (Cave) struck the diggers whom I employed as very
strikingly different from the pottery made locally at the present time,
and they remarked upon this very intelligently. Indeed, the new and
strange patterns of the old pottery called forth many more remarks
than any of the other finds we made in that quarter.

In no case did I find any sign of the localities where the potters
had followed their trade. These were probably well removed from the
settlements (whether the latter stood on the hills or in the plains), near
to the rivers, where suitable clays would be likely to be found.

§. 9. While camped at Halakundi 5 miles south of Bellary along
the Bangalore road in December 1884, I obtained some 20 or 30 chipped
Paleolithic implements made of jaspery hematite schist; they are all
of rather small size but of the typical shapes, oval, pointed oval with two
or three of the square-edged hatchet-shape so specially characteristic of
the south of India. They were collected from the surface of a ploughed
field which lies on a great fan or cone of dejection of detritus (chiefly hema-
tite and hornblendic schists) formed by one of the numerous torrents
coming down from the north-eastern flank of the Sugadevi belta or
Copper mountain, the highest part of the band of Dharwar rocks lying
south of Bellary. Jam unable to offer any- further evidence as to their
origin at present, but they are in type utterly different from the rudest
of the Neolithic implements, and they do not occur intermixed in any
place that came under my notice. ;

Similar implements occur at distant intervals in the talus fans
along the Copper mountain ridge westward. Two good specimens were

Indians, have not yet been found by me, but they may have been used. I have one
piece of thick pottery which might have served in sach capacity. It would be most
interesting if it were to be established that the old potters of the two continents
had both hit on this most ingenious expedient.

* IT am doubtful whether the impressions in question are really those of human
fingers, for in none could I detect the impression of the edge of the nail,

1887. ] Paleolithic Finds in South India. 281

obtained at Joga, a small village at foot of the northern ridge of the
Sandur basin, 24 miles west of Bellary. The majority of the specimens
‘ have been a good deal worn by rolling. I have had no opportunity of
studying the circumstances under which they occur in the gravel fans in
question, and merely wish to record the finds.

The theory has been advanced that the implements of rude Palzo-
lithic type are really the agricultural tools of the people, who, for other
domestic or warlike purposes, manufactured the various wholly or par-
tially polished implements generally classed as Neolithic. This theory
will, however, not fit in with the facts observed in the Neolithic settle-
ments above described. Nearly all the implements of Paleolithic type
found in the Bellary country consist of jasperyhematite, only a very
few of quartzite. Implements of these materials and of the older type
are extremely rare in the various settlements I have searched; only
two or three inall were found to the hundreds and hundreds of specimens
of the newer types. It is impossible that the manufacture of hema-
titic jasper and quartzite implements should have been carried on to
even a very moderate extent without leaving behind piles of splinters
and flakes of the red and purple and brown stones of which they were
made. These flakes and splinters would be quite as conspicuous on the
granitoid hills as the green and black ones left in the preparation of
the celts, chisels, and hammers made of greenstone of different kinds.
The latter kind of splinters and flakes occur very largely, the former not
at all. Furthermore, if the hematite and quartzite implements of the
so-called Paleolithic type were the agricultural tools of the Neolithic
people, how comes it that the former are not found largely in broken or
at least used condition around the hills inhabited by their makers? It
is most unlikely that the people left the rich black soil tracts around
their strong places uncultivated, and yet, if these were cultivated by
the particular form of tools they are assumed to have used, remains
of the latter must assuredly be met with here and there near the
strong places in question. As a matter of fact they have not been
found in such localities, and, from their absence, only one inference
seems reasonable, namely, that they were not used as supposed by the
Neolithic people, but belonged to another and older race. In none
of the different lateritic gravels and other deposits which have yielded
typical Paleolithic implements in the South has the faintest trace of
any polished implement of any kind, or of any pottery, however coarse,
been found. While the deposits in which the Neolithic remains occur
cannot by any possibility be treated as geological formations—they are
all of them manifestly accumulations of matter entirely due to direct
human agency,—and, geologically speaking, date only from yesterday.

36 |

282 KE. Simon—F’tude sur les Arachnides de Asie méridionale [No. 3,

To my mind nothing can be clearer than the existence of a great break
in time between the Paleolithic and Neolithic Periods in South India.
Whether this great break will ever be closed in by future archeological ©
discoveries remains to be seen.

PN NN es OO"

XIX.—LH'tude sur les Arachnides deV Asie méridionale faisant partie des
collections de V Indian Museum (Calcutta).—Par M. E. Simon, de
Paris. Communicated by THE SUPERINTENDENT OF THE INDIAN
MusgumM.

[Received September 22nd ;—Read November 2nd, 1887].
LT.

ARACHNIDES RECUEILLIS AUX Ings ANDAMAN PAR M. R. D. OLDHAM.

Fam. Attide.

1.—CyYT#A ALBOLIMBATA, sp. nov.

@. Long. 7mm. Cephalothorax crassus convexus postice attenua-
tus levis, niger, in medio dilutior et rufescens, obscure rufulo-pubescens,
vitta marginali latissima postice interrupta crasse albo-pilosa cinctus,
parte cephalica in medio fulvo albidoque pilosa et parte thoracica vitta
media postice abbreviata et acuta alba notatus. Oculorum pili supra
fulvi infra oculos albidi. Pili clypei crassissimi albidi. Oculi antici
parum disjuncti in linea parum recurva. Oculi ser. 2 vix ante
medium (inter oculos laterales anticos et medios posticos) siti. Oculo-
rum series 3a cephalothorace haud vel vix angustior. Abdomen oblon-
gum, supra nigrum et squamulis micantibus parce ornatum, in parte
basilari sinuosa albo-marginatum et lineis mediis quatuor albidis sinuosis
et fere inordinatis notatum et pone medium linea transversa alba valde
dentata sectum, venter simpliciter fulvo-pubescens. Pedes, preesertim
antici, breves et robusti, fulvo-ravidi, femoribus tibiisque ad basin atque
ad apicem, patellis metatarsisque ad apicem nigro fulvove annulatis,
partibus fulvis crasse albo-pilosis, tibiis anticis patellis non multo
longioribus, aculeis validis et numerosis: patellis cunctis biaculeatis,
tibiis metatarsisque anticis aculeis inferioribus et lateralibus instructis.
Chele robuste fusco-rufule, leves, albido-hirsute, margine inferiore
sulci dentibus geminatis binis instructo. Vulve plaga antice fovea
parva semicirculari, postice plagula rufula levi et plana, recte transversa
et utrinque rotunda notata.

Port Blair.

0. sinuate Dolesch. et OC. alburne Keys. sat affinis, differt cephalo-

1887.] faisant partie des collections de V Indian Museum. 283

thorace crassiore pube ad maximam partem simplici, pictura cephalo-
thoracis et abdominis, etc.

Nora.—Le genre Cyte@a Keyserling (in L. Koch, Arachn. Austral.,
1882, p. 1380) se rapproche des genres Huryattus Thorell, Sccea UL.
Koch,* Hasarius E. Sim. (emend. H. adansoni), Ptocasius H. Sim.,
Ascyltus Karsch, Oocalus C. Koch, par l’armature de la marge inférieure
des chélicéres, qui offre deux dents géminées ou mieux une dent trés
comprimée cariniforme et échancrée au sommet avec les angles formant
deux pointes aigués.—I] se distingue du genre Huryattus Th., par l aire
oculaire parallele, nullement dilatée en arriére, des genres Scea L. K.,
Hasarius et Ptocasius H. §., par sa pubescence squameuse et la marge
Superieure des chélicéres pourvue de 2 ou 4 dents, tandis qu'elle n’ en
offre que deux chez les genres cités.—I1 différe du genre Ascyltus Karsch,
par le céphalothorax non dilaté ni conique aux angles antérieurs et les
tibias antérieurs pourvus d’ épines dorsales et latérales externes. Enfin,
il se distingue du genre Cocalus C. Koch} par les yeux antérieurs en
ligne recourbée, les yeux de la 3¢ ligne évidemment plus petits que les
latéraux de la premiére, les chélicéres médiocres et verticales dans les
deux sexes. ,

Indépendamment des espéces decrites par Keyserling dans I’
ouvrage de L. Koch, le genre COytea renferme encore le S. sinuatus
Doleschall, classi par Thorell dans le genre Plexippus, le Plexippus laticeps
Thorell, et peut-étre aussi les P. expectans, ruber (Walck.), argentosus,
severus, nimbatus, frontaliger, ochropis, pupulus Thorell (Rag. Mal. etc.
111) de Nouvelle Guinée, |’ auteur ne décrit malheureusement pas pour
toutes ces espéces |’ armature des chélicéres.

2.—CYLLOBELUS[ MINIACEOMICANS, sp. nov.

@. Long 56mm. Cephalothorax niger pube subsquamosa pallide

* Scea L. Koch 1879, nom préoccupé que nous proposons de remplacer par
celui de Servea.

+ Le type du genre Cocalus est le C. concolor C. Koch, de Malaisie, qui nous
parait étre la méme espéce que le Salticus (Attus) forceps Doleschall ; cet auteur a bien
figuré la bifurcation de la dent principale des chélicéres. Le Pleaippus erythroce-
phalus C. Koch, de Java, appartient probablement au méme genre, le Cocalus
cyaneus C. Koch, de Surinam, pour lequel C. Koch a plutard proposé le genre Psecas
s’ en éloigne au contraire beaucoup et parait plus voisin des Mevia.—Plusieurs des
espéces décrites par Thorell sous le nom generique de Cocalus sont trés douteuses
pour le genre (C. salaz), par contre plusieurs de ses Plexippus pourraient lui ap-
partenir (P. aper, catellus).

t Pour le genre Cyllobelus, cf. H. Sim., Ann. Soc. ent. Fr. 1885, p. 390. Le
Salticus collingwoodi Cambr. (Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond. 1871, p. 621, pl. xliv f. 5)
de Labuan, appartient peut-étre 4 ce genre ; il serapproche de C. miniaceomicans par

son systéme de coloration.

284. BE. Simon —Arachnides de 1 Asie méridionale [ No. 3,

cinereo-viridi nitida obtectus, parte cephalica inter oculos posticos vitta
transversa lata leviter arcuata, parte thoracica maculis binis latis
obliquis et vitta submarginali lata postice interrupta lete miniaceo-
pilosis ornatis. Oculorum pili faciei supra aurantii infra oculos albidi.
Clypeus subglaber paululum retro obliquus et in medio depressus, oculis
anticis tantum % angustior. Oculi antici contigui, in linea recta. Oculi
ser. 2 fere in medio inter laterales anticos et posticos siti. Oculorum
series postica cephalothorace haud augustior, Abdomen ovatum, postice
acuminatum, splendide viridi-metallico squamulatum, antice maculis
binis magnis, pone medium vitta transversa latissima medio triangula-
riter dilatata miniaceo-pubescentibus et vittis transversis angustioribus
pallide cinereo-viridibus decoratum. Venter antice et in medio sub-
glaber utrinque et presertim postice squamulis splendide violaceo-
micantibus ornatus, Sternum nigrum albo-squamulatum. Pedes longi
fulvi, valde nigro-lineati, femoribus anticis fere omnino nigris. Pedes-
maxillares luridi, femore infuscato.
Port Blair.

Fam. Lycoside.

3.—SPHEDANUS* MARGINATUS, sp. nov.

@. Long. 195mm. Cephalothorax oblongus fusco-rufescens, pilis
plumosis fulvis albisque mixtis vestitus, vitta submarginali latissima
valde flexuoso-dentata atque in parte cephalica lineis trinis (media
recta lateralibus arcuatis) albo-pilosis ornatus. Oculi medii subsquales,
aream evidenter longiorem quam latiorem et antice quam postice
angustiorem occupantes. Oculi quatuor antici appropinquati subzequales
lineam leviter recurvam formantes. Clypeus oculis anticis non multo
latior. Abdomen longe oblongum fuscum, supra pilis plumosis fulvo-
nitidis subtus pilis simplicibus albidis dense vestitum. Chelz fulvo-
rufescentes albido-setose#, margine inferiore sulci dentibus equis trinis,
superiore dentibus trinis medio majore instructis. Sternum olivaceum
albo-pilosum. Pedes lutei, aculeis nigris longis et numerosis ut in
S. undato Th, valde instructi (vulva haud plane adulta).

Port Blair.

A S. undato Thorell praesertim differt cephalothorace longiore et
albo-variegato, area oculorum mediorum evidentius longiore, etc.

Fam. Epeiride.

A.—GASTERACANTHA ANNAMITA, E. Sim., Act. Soc. Linn. Bord. 1886.
Commun aux Iles Andaman: Port Blair, Havelock.

* Sur le genre Sphedanus, cf. Thorell, Studi s. Ragni Malesi et Papwani, I,
p. 182, Génes, 1877.

1887. | faisant partie des collections de ? Indian Museum. 285

Nota.—Stannedclavis canningensis Stol., qui m’ a été communiqué en
méme temps que le précedent par |’ Indian Musewm, parait tres commun 4
Barren Island (Baie de Bengale). Contrairement aux conclusions que
nous avons donnée précedemment, cette espece pourrait n’ étre qu’ une
variété de S. brevispina Doleschall. Les caractéres que nous avons
indiqués pour séparer les deux formes s’ effacent considérablement
chez les exemplaires du Barren Island.

5.—CYCLOSA ALBISTERNIS, sp. nov.

2. Long. 75mm. Cephalothorax pallide luridus, longe albo-pilosus,
anguste nigro-marginatus, parte cephalica postice maculis geminatis
binis divaricatis albo-opacis notata, ovato-elongatus, parte cephalica
parum convexa haud constricta. Area oculorum mediorum longior
quam latior, oculi postici majores juxte contigui, antici anguste separati.
Oculi laterales a mediis sat late remoti utrinque contigui et subzequales.
Clypeus oculis mediis anticis haud latior. Abdomen altissimum, oblon-
gum, antice valde prominens, simpliciter et obtuse acuminatum, prope
medium obtusissime vix distincte bituberculatum, postice attenua-
tum et sat longe productum, apice obtuse trifidum, mucrone
medio reliquis longiore et graciliore, testaceum pallide flavo-
aureo-guttulatum, utrinque leviter nigro-variagatum et striolatum.
Mammille nigre. Sternum albo-opacum. Oris partes pallide testacez.
Chele fulve. Pedes breves, luridi, femoribus annulo submedio angusto
et macula superiore subapicali, tibiis metatarsisque annulo apicali
angusto nigricantibus notati, tibiis aculeis brevibus paucis munitis,
metatarsis muticis. Vulve uncus rufulus acute triquetrus, supra ad
apicem sulcatus, scapum fuscum transversum utrinque rotundum, in
medio depressum et plagula media rufula cordiformi notatum.

3. Long. 46mm. Cephalothorax paulo latior et humilior, fuscus,
parte thoracica in medio late dilutiore et rufula, subtiliter coriaceus,
parte thoracica in medio depressa et sulco longitudinali abbreviato secta.
Abdomen minus et presertim angustius, postice breviter productum et
simpliciter obtusum, fusco-olivaceum, in parte fasali lneis longitudinali-
bus albis quatuor, medianis rectis postice divaricatis, lateralibus arcuatis,
in parte apicali punctis albidis biseriatim ordinatis ornatum. Venter ni-
gricans. Sternum fusco-rufulum, maculis marginalibus dilutioribus orna-
tum. Pedes, presertim antici, longiores, coxis anticis fuscis, patellis fuscis,
reliquis articulis luridis, annulo medio angusto et annulo apicali lato
fuscis ornatis, tibiis metatarsisque anticis parce aculeatis. Tibia paris
Qe tibia paris le leviter robustior et levissime arcuata, intus aculeis
robustioribus et brevibus biseriatis 6—4 armata (serie inferiore dimidium
apicalem articuli tantum occupante). Pedes-maxillares breves et robusti
fusco-rufuli, bulbo maximo, transversim late ovato, apice apophysibus

286 BE. Simon—Arachnides de V Asie méridionale © [No. 3,

tribus munito, apophysi superiore depressiuscula late rotunda, media
gracili sed obtusa, inferiore styliformi longe bifida.

Var. 2. Abdomen supra vitta longitudinali rosea anguste argenteo
fuscoque marginata lete decoratum.

Port Blair. Havelock.

C. anseripedt Walck. affinis, imprimis differt in femina cephalo-
thorace lurido sterno albo, oculis lateralibus a mediis remotioribus,
pedibus anticis brevioribus angustius annulatis, vulve unco acutiore et
rufulo, ete. |

Nora.—nous possedons aussi cette espéce de Ramnad (Hindoustan
méridional).

6.—TrTRAGNATHA GRACILIS Stoliczka, Journ. Asiat. Soc. Beng.
XXXII. Pt. II, 1869, p. 244, pl. XTX, f. 2 (sub meta).

Saddle Hill (North Andaman Island) ; Havelock.

Paraitcommun. Décrit par Stoliczka des environs de Calcutta sous
le nom générique de Meta.

Fam. Avicularida.
Genus SatTzicus nov.

Cephalothorax humilis subplanus haud vel vix longior quam latior
sed antice valde attenuatus et. fronte angusta, fovea thoracica pone
medium sita valde recurva. Area oculorum a margine antico parum
remota, saltem 4 latior quam longior. Oculi quatuor antici in linea
validissime procurva semicirculari, medii lateralibus saltem duplo
majores et a lateralibus quam inter se remotiores. Oculi postici mi-
nutissimi utrinque contigui atque a mediis anticis parum distantes.
Spatium inter oculos laterales anticos et posticos iatissimum. Chelee
parves, subverticales, mutice. Pars labialis coxeque omnino mutice.
Pars labialis paulo latior quam longior. Sternum sat latum sed antice
valde attenuatum. Pedes (co) sat longi 4, 1, 2, 3, aculeis paucis
gracilibus muniti, tarsis metatarsisque anticis longe sed parum dense
scopulatis, posticis setosis sed tarsis cunctis fasciculis unguicularibus
validis munitis. Ungues bini graciles et (saltem posteriores) mutici.
Patellz anticz tibiis non multo breviores. Trochanter paris 4ee longus et
teres, coxa non multo brevior. |

Generi Sarpedoni Cambr. (gen. mihi ignoto) sat affinis, differt im-
primis oculis mediis anticis lateralibus saltem duplo majoribus (in
Sarpedone paulo minoribus) et fovea thoracica valde recurva (in Sarpedone
recte transversa).

Nora.—Le genre Sarpedon Cambr. (Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1883,
p- 358), qui nous est inconnu en nature, a été comparé par I’ auteur au

1887, ] faisant partie des collections de? Indian Museum. 287

genre Moggridgea, dont il parait cependent différer grandement, ce
dernier appartenant a la série des Avicularide trionichi.

Tl est selon nous beaucoup plus voisin du genre Leptopelma Ausserer ;
P auteur ne parle pas des chélicéres, qui d’aprés la figure (loc. cit., pl.
xxxvi, f. 1) paraissent mutiques.

7.—SATZICUS ANDAMANICUS, sp. nov.

So. Ceph.-th. long. 5 mm.; lat. 48 mm. Pedes I 15-7 mm.; III
15:2 mm.; IV 17:3 mm.

Cephalothorax fulvo-rufescens sublevis fulvo-nigroque longe se-
tosus, area oculorum nigra. Abdomen breviter ovatum, fusco-test-
aceum longe et crebre fulvo-sericeo hirsutum. Chel, sternum, pedes-
maxillares, pedesque fulva, pedes extremitates versus obscuriores. Pedeg
1 tibia patella non multo longiore haud incrassata, intus prope apicem
calcare unico simplici ad basin crasso ad apicem abrupte graciliore,
leviter uncato armata, inferne ad marginem exteriorem aculeis trinigs
gracilibus uniseriatis munita. Metatarso mutico. Pedes postici fere
mutici.

Port Blair.

Un seul exemplaire male en trés mauvais état auquel manquent les
pattes-machoires et les pattes de la troisiéme paire.

Nota.—La collection renferme en outre un certain nombre de 7 jeunes
araignées, qui ne sout pas en état d’ étre décrites. Ces espéces appar-
tiennent aux genres Homalattus Wh., Oxyopes Latr., Argiope Sav.,
Nephila Leach, Hpewa Walck., Meta C. Koch, » (Hortttia Sav., Chira-
canthiwm C. Koch.

288 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

XX.—A Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry.—By Asutosh MuxKnopa-
pHyay, M. A., F. R. A. S.,, F. BR. S. E. Communicated by Tus
Hon’siueE MAnENDRALAL Sircar, M. D., C. I. EH.

[Received October 27th ;—Read November 2nd, 1887. |
(With three Wood-cuts.)

CoNnTENTS.

§. 1. Introduction ; object and scope of the memoir.
§. 2. Basis of analytical geometry ; relation between analysis and geometry.
§§. 3—5. The Right Line:
(§. 3). The Line at Infinity.
(§. 4). Coordinates of intersection of two lines given by the ge-
neral equation of the second degree : the Point-function.
(§. 5). Area of triangle formed by any line with two lines given
by the general equation.
§§. 6—7. The circle.
(§. 6). Meaning of the constants in the equation of a circle.
(§. 7). Chords and tangents of circles and conics; geometrical
meaning of Burnside’s Equation.
§§, 8—15. The general equation of the second degree in Cartesian coordi-
nates.
(§. 8). Preliminary remarks on the general equation.
(§. 9). Transformation of the equation; the Asymptotic Con-
stant.
(§. 10). Invariants and Covariants of a single conic.
(§. 11). Lengths of axes and area of a conic.
(§. 12). Asymptotes of the conic.
(§. 13). Equations for the eccentricity of the conic.
(§. 14). The Director-circle in rectangular and oblique coordi-
nate-axes.
(§. 15). Reduction of the general equation to the asymptotes as
coordinate-axes.
§§. 16—20. Laplace’s linear equation to a conic.
(§. 16). Genesis of Laplace’s equation.
(§. 17). Meaning of the constants.
(§. 18). Elliptic motion.
(§. 19). Geometric interpretation.
(§. 20). Eccentricity from Laplace’s equation. .
§. 21. Area of triangle formed by two tangents to a conic and the chord of
contact; various applications.
§§. 22—23. Theorem on the inclination of tangents.
(§. 22). Formula for the inclination of tangents to conics and of
their chord of contact, to any line.
(§. 23). Applications of the theorem ; verification.
§. 24. Generation of similar conics.
§. 25. Onasystem of three parabolic envelopes,

1887.) A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 289

§§. 26—27. Reciprocal polars.
(§. 26). Reciprocal of central conic.
(§. 27). Reciprocal of evolute of certain curves including conics.
§§. 28—29. Theorems on central conics.
(§. 28). Properties of the ellipse.
(§. 29). Properties of confocals.
§§. 30—31. Theorems on the parabola.
(§. 30)... A dynamical problem.
(§. 31). Applications to the parabola.
§. 32. A geometrical locus.

§. 1. Introduction.

§. 1. Object and Scope.—It is my object in the present
paper to bring together a number of theorems in plane analytic geome-
try which have accumulated in my hands during my study of that
subject. Some of the simpler of these theorems have already been
given in my Lectures on Plane Analytic Geometry, now in course of
delivery at the Indian Association for the Cultivation of Science;
a few have been enunciated elsewhere without demonstration; most
of the propositions, however, are here published for the first time. I
believe that either the theorems themselves, or the methods of estab-
lishing them are original; and, except in a very few instances where
I have inserted well-known results for the sake of avoiding disconnect-
edness, I have considered them either for the purpose of giving a proof
simpler and more complete than that usually given, or with a view to
throw light on the connection between the various parts of the subject.
As the different sections of this paper are, to a great extent, practically
independent of each other, for the sake of facility of reference, an
outline of the principal topics discussed is added above.*

§. 2. Basis of Analytical Geometry.

§. 2. Analysis and Geometry.—The notion of either space or
number, or of both, les at the root of every department of mathematics.
Analysis is the science of number; geometry is the science of space ;
but, as space is homogeneous, and, as every homogeneous substance
can, by the choice of a unit, be represented by a number, space can be,
for mathematical purposes, represented by numbers; hence, the possi-
bility of applying analytical methods to geometrical investigations, and
of founding a science of analytical geometry. This possibility was
first realized into practice by the illustrious French mathematician René
Descartes, who invented the method of coordinates. With respect

* For a full analysis of this paper, see the Proceedings for 1887, pp. 232-235,
37

290 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

to this method, there are two points which ought to be most carefully
noticed. In the first place, to determine the position of any point,
we must choose an origin, and, then, fix the position of the point by
its coordinates, which may be defined to be independent quantities of
the same order which fix the position of a point; we see, then, that the
two essentially distinct ideas of origin and coordinates are fundamental
in this theory ; and, if we consider the matter for a moment, we find
that the same two ideas are ever present in every system of coordinates
that we may choose. Thus, looking to a comparatively modern part of
the subject, the theory of Elliptic Coordinates, we see that the posi-
tion of any point is determined by the lengths of the semi-axes of the
conics which can be drawn through that point confocal to a given Gonic,
called the primitive conic ; here, then, the point-origin of the Cartesian
system has been replaced by the fundamental conic, and the ordinate
and abscissa have been replaced by. the semi-axes of two conics.
Hence, we conclude that in every system, we must have an origin,
which is, as it were, a unit or symbol of reference, and which may be
a point or a conic, or any other figure, according to the system we
choose ; and, having fixed our origin, we determine the position of a
point by coordinates, which may be lines straight or curved, or any
other geometrical figure; the only essential ideas being those of a
symbol of reference, and of the independence of the quantities which
fix the position of the point relatively to that origin or symbol of
reference.

Having thus fixed the position of a point, we next consider how
to represent a curve. A curve is defined to be an assemblage of points
arranged according to a definite law ; the equation of a curve, therefore,
is the analytical representation of that geometrical relation which must
subsist between the coordinates of a point, in order that that point
may be on the given curve. In other words, the equation of a curve
may be defined to be the analytical representation of some geometrical
property of the curve; and, as a curve has an infinite number of geo-
metrical properties, the question naturally suggests itself whether the
analytical representation of each of these properties will give a different
equation of the curve. Asa matter of fact, we do know that, in what-
ever way we may derive the equation of a curve, we are led to equations
which are apparently different from each other, but which are really
not distinct, and which may all be made to coincide by suitable trans-
formations. Indeed, if the reverse had been the case, it would have
been manifestly impossible to create a science of analytic geometry ;
and the reason why all the equations of a curve are really identical
is a simple outcome of the fact that all the innumerable geometrical

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay— Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 291

properties of any curve are dependent on each other: the truth of any
one being assumed, the others can be deduced from it as necessary
mathematical consequences. We see, therefore, that though a curve
has an infinite number of geometrical properties, it can have only one
equation, and this accords with the great Law of Nature that, in
every natural system, there can be only one relation between the component
parts. This, then, is the second fact which made possible the very
existence of Analytical Geometry.

From what has been pointed out above, it is evident that the
equation of a curve is, as it. were, a conyenient repository of all theorems
connected with it, and all its properties may be established by algebraic
transformation of the equation. From this, as well as from the funda-
mental relation between analysis and geometry noted above, it is clear
that, to every algebraic transformation, there corresponds a geometrical
fact, and vice versd. Take, for example, the subject of the transforma-
tion of coordinates. We all know that transformation is of two kinds ;
it may be a change to new axes, parallel to the old ones, through a new
origin, which may conveniently be termed Translation-transforma-
tion ; or, again, the transformation may be to new axes, inclined to
the old ones, through the old origin, which may be called Rotation-
transformation ; if, in any case, both these kinds are combined, we
may call it Compound-transformation ; and from the known alge-
braical formule for compound transformation, it is clear that this
geometrical process is nothing but the exact counterpart of the alge-
braic process of linear transformation. Similarly, it may be re-
marked that the problem of inversion is a case of quadric transforma-
tion.

Sok Ee Bight ine.
§. 3. The Line at Infinity.—The equation of any line being
ee a
a of

where a,\\b are the intercepts on the co-ordinate axes, the equation of
the line which is at an infinite distance from the origin is obtained by
substituting herein
C=),

which gives T— 0;
Without any real change of generality, we may write this

A=0
where A is any constant; this, then, is the equation of the line at in-
finity ; it will be of use in determining the asymptotes of the conic given
by the general equation of the second degree (§. 12), |

292 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

§. 4. Coordinates of intersection of two lines. The following
method of investigating the condition that the general equation of the
second degree

ax? + 2hey +by? +2gx+2fytc=0
may represent two right lines, is shorter than the proofs usually given,
and has, besides, the advantage of furnishing at once the coordinates
of the point of intersection of the lines represented by the equation.

Let (#’, y’) be the point of intersection of the lines; removing
our origin to this point, the equation becomes

av® +2hay+ by? +29'%+2fy+c’ =0 ssebeVueneeke 4p
where g' =ax'+hy'+9,
| f = ha! +by' +f,

o! = ax! +2haly!+by! +20! +2fy' be.
But the equation (1) now represents a pair of lines through the origin,
and, as such, it ought to be homogeneous in the second degree ; therefore,.
each of the quantities g’, f’, c’ must vanish separately, which gives

ax'+hy'+g=0 ececce serene (2)
ha’ + by’ +f=0 eoe cre eee coe (3)
ax! +2hely! + by! +2ge!+2fy'to=0 veces (4)

Multiplying (2) by #’, (8) by y’, and subtracting the sum of the pro-
ducts from (4), we get
ga’ +fy'+e=0 Rpcresde COD
From (2) and (3), we have
ed gO

gee 8 Gb he
which are, accordingly, the coordinates of the point of intersection
of the lines represented by the given equation. Eliminating 2’, y’,
from (2), -(3); (5), we have the condition that the discriminant must
vanish in order that the equation may represent two right lines, viz.,

dsiaeet(e)

a h g
h b fi =O Adena yy
g f ¢

As the equation
an + 2Qhay + by? + 2ga+2fy+c=0
is transformed to
ax*® +2hay + by? =0
when the axes are removed to the point of intersection of the lines, it
follows that, as the angle between the lines is not altered in magnitude
by the transformation, the angle between the lines given by the general

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 293

equation of the second degree is the same as that between the lines
ax? +2hay + by? = 0.

The quantity c’, which occurs in this investigation, may be called
the point-function of the conic.

Definition.—The point-function of any curve with respect to
any point is the function which is obtained by substituting the coordi-
nates of that point in the expression the vanishing of which gives the
equation of the curve. It is clear that the point-function with respect
to any point on the curve itself is zero, while the point-function with
respect to the origin is the absolute term in the equation of the curve.

§. 5. Area oy a Bogus —If the general equation of the second
degree ss
ax? +2hey+ by? +24 2fytcHO ——— esecvecseeee (8)
represents a pair of right lines, to investigate the area of the triangle

formed by these two lines with the line

le+my =n. : ececadeae” CO)

Remove the origin to the point |
‘laa y fiat
ea

which is the point of intersection of the pair of lines represented by
(8). The two equations then become

axv® + 2haxy + by? =0 iasterantete it GLO)

and |
hf — bn) ( hg —af\ _
(a+ = ee y+ apa) =
or le + my = p, © Bice ALE)
= a
ey = Unf — 10S bo) $mChg— an Ad) (12)

Now, suppose that the lines in (10) are made up of the two
yo me w= 0, YM BHO, “Aasieiseves--Clo}y (14)

so that ;
2h
Mm, +m, sie iy 000000000000 (15) =
my, Ms = , eee osesevece (16)
4h? —2
whence m,*+m,? = b2 ap Bee eve ccecce (17)

The. coordinates of the point. of intersection of (11) with (13) are

294 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

given by

~ l+mm,
If, therefore, 5, is the length of the line intercepted between the
new origin (which is the point of intersection of the pair of lines) and
the point of intersection of (11) with (13), we have

_p?d+m,*)

‘iain. )? sraatoacveeve (lo)
Similarly, if 8, be the length of the line intercepted between the new
origin and the point of intersection of (11) with (14), we have

2h Utm,*)-
2 — (l+mm,)? eoeocee oes een (19)
Hence, from (18) and (19), we get

pt {14 (m,2+m,%+m,%m,? |

o45;% = ——————— Ee ::
: { 19 +m(m, +14) +m*mym,

Therefore, substituting for m,, m, from the system of equations (15),
(16), (17), we get

p?/ pt a/ | air +(a- by» }
Perorms -Zhmi+bl= 090 000.006 000 (20)
But, if ¢ be the angle between the lines given by (10), we have
o/h — ab
tan o= — ey 5 7
Qn/ h? — ab
J {4+ (a—2) |
so that age area of the triangle in question is
= 29,0, singh
pia —ab
_ am? — 2hml-+ bl? bi?
2
{ (hf — bg) +m(hg — af) +n(h? — ab)

(h? —ab)® (am? —Qhml+ 1?)
by substituting for p from (12). Hence, finally, using the determinant
notation, and altering the sign of n, we have the general
Theorem.—If the general equation of the second degree
ax? + 2hay + by? +2gx+ 2fy+e=0
represents a pair of right lines, the area.of the triangle formed by this

6,5, =

whence sin d=

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memioir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 295
pair with the line

An+py+v = 0
is
a h A}?
h b pe
g f v
i eerie as ae © art eS ee, ee oe ake et ae pe sear (21)
| a h els h r
7 7 0

The length of the portion - Ax+py +v=0 which is intercepted
between the pair of lines is also easily found ; for, from (12), the per-
pendicular from the point of intersection of the pair of lines on

Ax +eryt+v=0
is at once seen to be
a h rX
h b ph
ne tae ie v
SG 2 ad)(A* +n)! bt

Hence, the length of the intercepted portion is

200 pee oot eee (22)

P a h r
os al h b yn
pe. A g f v
2 eae : a 23
a h a h r
r pe 0

The product of the two sides is, by a glance at (20), written down.
to be

‘ a h AA?
2h a—b)’ |h b pe
b—a 2h g i Vv
h - ; i. b pe ves (24)
b h a h r
r 0

pe
As an application of the formula in (21), we can find the area of
the parallelogram formed by the two lines
ax? + 2hay+ by? ree te ene 0
with ax? + 2hay+ by? =
which are two lines through the origin parallel to the first pair. By
subtracting the equations, we see that

2gu+ 2fy+o= 0

296 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

represents that diagonal of the parallelogram which does not pass
through the origin. The area of the triangle formed by this diagonal
with the first pair is

{ 29 (lif — bg) +2f (Tig — af) — 0 (* — ad) }*

4(h* — ab)? (af? — 2fgh-+ bg?)
and that formed with the second pair is
a pe — ab)?

4(12 — ab)* (af = 2fgh+b9*)
But, since the discriminant vanishes, it is clear that
2g (hf — bg) +2f (hg — af) — 2c (It — ab) =0
af’? —2fgh+bg?=c (ab—h?).
Hence, adding the above expressions, the area of the quadrilateral in
question is found to be

1 c

2 / ih? — ab
It may be noted that this expression is only apparently independent of
Ff, 9, for the vanishing of the discriminant shews that a, b, c, h are
functions of f and g. |

§§. 6—7. The Circle.

§. 6. Meaning of the Constants in = ghedabs of a Circle.—

The equation of a circle
a? + y? +29x%+2fy+c=0
being thrown into the form
(e-—g)! + -fY =o tf —4,
the quantities — g, —f are seen to be the coordinates of the centre, while,
if r be the radius, we have
rP=gPtf—c.

To determine the geometric meaning of c, let 5 be the distance of the
centre from the origin, and ¢, either of the tangents drawn from the
origin to the circle; then,

8 = 7? +H
and, also, O° = f?+ 9%
r = fi+g?— C
which give a ae senateard aye. Coe

Hence, c denotes the square of the tangent drawn from the origin to the ©
circle. We thus infer that, if the equations of a system of circles agree
in either f or g, the locus of their centres is a right line parallel to a
given line at a given distance from it, and their common chords are
parallel, being all perpendicular to this given line; if both f and g are

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 297

the same in all the equations, the system is concentric ; if ¢ alone is
the same in all the equations, the circles are such as can be intersected or-
thogonally by a circle of radius a/c, described round the origin as
centre; and this shews at once that as a system of co-axal circles can
be orthogonally intersected, their equations must necessarily be of the
form
x+y? —Qkaem + 0,

where 4 is constant, but & variable.

The geometric meaning of ¢ also furnishes the length of the tang-
ent drawn from any point to a circle, for, the equation of the circle
being |
x + 4?+ 29x +4+2fy+o= 0,
and the point from which tangents are drawn being (a’, y’), remove the
origin to this point; then, the new absolute term is clearly the point-
function of the circle with respect to the point (w’, y’), and this,
therefore, is the length of the tangent sought. It follows as a conse-
quence of this, that the geometric meaning of the equation of the
circle is that, if the length of the tangent drawn from any point to a
eircle yanishes, that point must be on the curve itself.

§. 7. Chords and Tangents of Circles and Conics.—The fol-
lowing equation of the chord joining the two points (#’, y’), (x, y”,) on
the circle

e+y=r sna ven dU LAS)
is due to Professor Burnside, (Salmon’s Contes, §. 85, Ed. 1879, p. 80),
(a= we) (a we") + (9 YY my’) SOPH Y? HT, coc yescecsess (27)
It is easily verified that this is actually the equation of the chord ; the
following geometrical interpretation, however, shews the genesis of the
equation, )

On the line joining the points (#', y'), (x, y”) as diameter, describe
a circle; any point (x, y) on this circumference is such that the lines
joining (z, y), («', y'), and (a, y), (#, y"), include a right angle; this
condition, expressed analytically, gives for the equation of the circle

ee aes ey ey YO coerce ass (29)
The chord in question may now be regarded as the common chord of
the two circles represented by (26) and (28); and then, from the ele-
mentary principle that S+S’=0 represents any locus through the
common points of S=0, S’=0, we at once write down Burnside’s
equation (27), the proper value of & being easily seen to be given by

14+4=90.
The generalisation to the conic given by the general equation
ax® + Qhay + by? +2ge+2fyt+cH=O ssecvvescees (29)

38

298 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

is easy, viZ., uta
a («— 2") (% — #") + 2h(e — “!) (y—y') +009 Sey y= 0 (30)
represents any conic through («#’, y'), (2, y'), which may, it is useful
to notice, satisfy three other conditions: and the chord in question,
being the common chord of (29) and (30), must have for its equation
a (%— x!) (« — x”) +2h(e—2')(y—y") +by—y)Y—-y")
= ax*+2hey+by?4+2ge+2fyto - tine oes SBE
I have not, however, been able to find if the conics (29) and (30) are
connected by any very special or peculiar relation: their centres are
not coincident; the centre of (30) is not on the chord whose equation
is required ; their asymptotes, however, include equal angles, and their
axes are parallel; in fact, they are similar and similarly situated, and,
therefore, necessarily equi-eccentric.
The equation of the tangent at any point may be deduced, as usual,
from the equation of the chord; or we may first obtain by Joachims-
thal’s method the equation of the pair of tangents from an external
point, and thence obtain the equation of the tangent at any point of
the curve. The same equation, however, may be obtained by transform-
ation, if we know the equation of the tangents from the origin; thus,
the conic being
ase® + 2hacy + by? +2gx+2fy+te=—0

and («', y’) the external point, remove the origin to this point, so that
the conic becomes

ax’ +2haey + by? 4+2q’«+ 2fy+e' =0, |
where the values of /’, g’, c' are the same as in §.4. If now y= mzx be
any line through the new origin, it will touch the conic if the quadratic
in x, )
(a+ 2hm-+ bm?)x? +2(9’+f'm)«+c' =0,
has equal roots, which condition gives |

c'(a+2hm+ bm?) = (9'+f'm)?,

and by substituting |

pags
x

we have for the equation of the tangents, referred to the new origin,
c'(aa* + 2hay + by") = (gatfiy)’,
which may be written
c' (ax?+ 2hay + by? +29'x+ 2fy +e’) = (g’x+fyt+c’)*.
Reverting to our old axes, we have at once the equation in the form
(Conic) x (Point-function) = (Polar)’,
which is, of course, the same equation as that obtained by Joachims-
thal’s method.

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 299

§§. 8—15. The General Equation of the Second Degree.

§. 8. Preliminary.—The discussion of the general equation of
the second degree deservedly occupies an important position in the
application of analytical geometry to the theory of lines of the second
order; for, in analytical geometry properly so called, the question of
degree or class is of fundamental importance, and the curves of the
second degree should be called lines of the second order, and not conic
sections, the proper point of view from which their properties ought to
be studied being the fact that the equation representing them is of the
second degree, and not the other fact that they are sections of a cone
and have foci and directrices. The truly logical order of treating the
subject is first to have a chapter on the equation of the first degree,
containing the properties of right lines, then a chapter on the general
equation of the second degree, and, as distinctly subsidiary to this,
chapters on the circle, the ellipse, and the other conics. We proceed,
then, to give the barest outline of such a systematic discussion as is
indicated here. It may usefully be noted that the object of the dis-
cussion is twofold, viz., in the first place, the problem is how to trans-
form the equation to its simplest forms, and thus to classify the
different kinds of conics; in the second place, we obtain some general
formule for such properties as are common to all conics.

§. 9. Transformation of the Equation.—The general equation
of the second degree being

S = ax? + Qhay + by? + 2ge+2fyto=0, ..ccseseeeee (32)
first change the origin to («’, y’), so that the equation becomes
an” + Qhay + by’? +29’e+ 2f’y+c' =0
where

g ae es" ee he

YS y’
c = Point-function.

If, then, we make g’=/’=0, that is, if we have for the coordinates of
the new origin

Dace hf — gap
fa a4 =o, OBB BAN

the transformed equation is

aa? + Qhay + by? +

A
ab—
where A is the discriminant (§. 4). In order that this transformation
may be real and possible, we must have (ab—h”) different from zero,

300 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

The first point of departure, then, in the classification of conics, depends
on the equation
ab—h’ 7 or 290.
The case in which k?=ab does not admit of the above transformation,
and it must be treated separately (see Carr’s Synopsis of Pure Mathe-
matics, §§. 4430—4443). In the case where (ab — h?) does not vanish,
we proceed further, as follows. Turn the axes about the new origin
through an angle 6, where @ is given by
2h

tan 20= aunt wweeveverove (56)

and the new equation becomes
A

2 2 iy 24, WQ¥
| Ax’? +By conn nig Pees Totes
where A, B are certain constants to be determined hereafter. This
equation may be put into the form

~ Ba eae oak (38)
; 1. A i._B we,
if Ba RTT Grete BI), GO)
ond Q=—>.. joo | los ahaa

Definition.—The quantity which we have denoted here by Q, we
will call the Asymptotic Constant, the reason for which name will
appear in §. 12. The quantities a, P are called the semi-axes of the
conic.

§. 10. Invariants.—In the last section, we transformed the ge-
neral equation of the second degree to its simplest form (38); but, we
did not calculate the quantities a, 8 which depend on A, B. Asa rule,
the calculation of these quantities in every particular case is a laborious
task; we, therefore, find out some functions of the coefficients which
remain unaltered by transformation, and which are, accordingly, called
Invariants of the conic. These invariants may be of different classes ;
thus, there are certain quantities which remain unaltered for a transla-
tion-transformation, and which may appropriately be called Transla-
lation-invariants ; to this class belong a, h, b. Again, there are
certain quantities which remain unaltered for a rotation-transformation,
and which may, accordingly, be called Rotation-invariants ; thus,
the absolute term is a rotation-invariant; but the most important of
these invariants are embodied in Dr. Boole’s theorems that the quanti-
ties

a+b —2h cos w ab — h?

. 3 .
sin?w sin?w

anteca (G2) aa

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 301

belong to this class (Salmon’s Contes, §. 159, Hd. 1879, p. 159). Again,
as we have seen that a, b, h are translation-invariants, it follows that
a+b—2h cos w ab — h?

r)

sin*@ sin?@
are invariants for the compound transformation as well, and may, accord-
ingly, be called General Invariants. We shall now proceed to investi-
gate, by a process analogous to that employed by Dr. Boole, certain in-
variants which include as particular cases those noticed above.
Suppose that by a rotation-transformation the equation
at? + 2hey+ by? + 2ge + 2fy+o=O0
assumes the form
AX? 4+2HXY+BY?+2GX+2FY+4+C=0,
Then, by the same transformation
ev +y?+2xy cos w
is altered into
X?+Y?+2XY cos &,
because each of these expressions denotes the distance of the same
point from the fixed origin. Hence, we have
(a +A)a* +2(h+rAcos w)xy +(b+A)y? +2ge +4+2fy +c
= (A+A)X?4+2(H+A cos 8)XY+4(B+A)Y?42GX+42FY+4C.
Kach side of this identity will resolve itself into linear factors for the
same value of 4; hence, equating the discriminant of each side to zero,
we have the two equations

c sin’, A?+ | Cab — 2h cos w) — (f?+ 9? — 2f9 cos w) r
+ abe+ 2fgh —af? — bg? — ch?=0
C sin’. 2+ | C(A+B—2H cos @) — (F?4+G®—2FG cos 8) r

+ABC+2FGH — AF? — BG?— CH?=0.
As these quadratics in A must be identical, we have, by equating the
coefficients of corresponding terms, the two relations

at+b—2hcosw f?+9°—2fg9 cos

sin*w c’sin*w
A+B—2H cos Q _ ¥’+G?* — 2FG cos 8 AA
zo sin? C sin? Q sb siecle
abe+2fgh —af?—bg’?—ch*? ABC+2FGH — AF’ —BG*’— CH?
ee ee Oe es
c sin*w C sin* 8

If f=0, g=0, these equations furnish Dr. Boole’s invariants, As we
have noticed that c is a rotation-invariant, these results shew that the
functions

o(a-+b — 2h cos w) —( fg" —2fg cos «) > sino sscsce. (46)

302 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

A . |
eon esecvesecse (40)
are rotation-invariants.

In order to see if any of these is a general invariant, we must
examine whether they are translation-invariants. It will be found on
examination that the first is not a translation-invariant, while for the
second we know that, by a translation-transformation, the equation

| ax* + 2hay + by?+ 2gx+2fy+c¢=0
is transformed into : .
a’ x? + 2h’ xy +b'y? + 2q’x+ 2fy+e’ =0,
where
ee) e 2a, RH hb S48,
which, by the way, shews that the part of the second degree in the
general equation is a covariant for translation-transformation,
and g =ax'+hy'’+9 .
f = he! +by' +f

e’= Point-function,

from which, by actual calculation, we find that the coefficients of x, ay,

y*, #, y in :
a'b’c’ + 2f"9'h’ — a’f’ — b'g*—ch"
all vanish, and the absolute term is A. Hence, we infer that A isa
translation-invariant, and so also is
A
sin’w’
since w is unaltered by translation-transformation ; thus, from what

precedes, we have finally that
aA

sin?w
is a general invariant of the conic. To sum up, we enumerate below
the principal invariants of the general conic.
I. Translation-invariants.
(aiog. (i). Gi), b.@ (iv). A.
II. Rotation-invariants.

a+b —2h cos w

i) Absolute term. ii
(i) solute term (31) =r
a Ob
_ sin?w
Gi) a+b—2h cosw f +9%—2fy COS w
ge sin?o c sin’w
. fo +9" —2fy cos »
(v) sin’w Cr ¢ sin*w

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 303

III. General invariants.
. atb—2h cosa .. ab—h?
Ge 1

(ii)
It is clear that since any function of an invariant is an invariant, various
invariants may be deduced from these by combining them in different
ways or by imposing limiting conditions on them. Thus, for rectangular
axes, A is a general invariant ; and, if we examine the equation

ax® + 2hay+ by’ + ofy = 0;

which denotes a conic referred to a tangent and normal as coordinate-
axes, we see that it has the three general invariants, (a+b), (ab—h?),
af*. :

We have shewn above, by actual calculation, that the discriminant
is a translation-invariant ; it is interesting to note that the same result
may be obtained as an illustration of Dr. Boole’s method. Thus, if
by translation-transformation the equation

ax” + 2hay + by’ +2gx+2fytc=0
is transformed into
a, X°+ 2h, XY+b,Y°+29,X+2f,¥Y +c, =0,
the same transformation changes
a+ y?+ 2ey cos w

sin*w sin?w

sin?w

into
(X — #,)?+ (Y—y,)'+2(K — «,)(Y —y,) cos a,
whence we have
au’ + zhay + by® + 2ga+ 2fy+c+r(x?+y?+2xy cos w)
= a,X?+2h,XY+6,Y?+29,X+2f,Y+c,

+2{ (K—a,)*+(Y—y,)* +2(K — 2, )(¥ -y,) 008 w t
Equating the discriminant of the left hand side to zero, we have
— e sin?w, A? + { (a+b — 2h cos w) — (af? + bg? — 2fg cos w) ‘ r

+A=0 vevnvearotty (45)

If we equate to zero the discriminant of the right hand side, the equa-
tion in A apparently comes out to be a cubic ; but the coefficient of A

is found on calculation to be zero, while, in the coefficient of A%, the
terms involving «,”, ~,y,, ¥,7, ©, y, separately vanish, and the constant
is ¢ sin? ; hence the equation may be written
c sin?w, A?7+RA+A, =0. aincideeteaiian CAG.
Therefore, equating coefficients, we have
Oe
which shews, as before, that A is a translation-invariant. It may be

304 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No 3,

noted that, from a comparison of (48) and (49), it is clear that the value
of R in (49) is
1 c(a+b— 2h cos w) — (af?-+bg* — 2fg cos w) ;
as, indeed, may be verified by direct calculation.
§. 11. Lengths of axes and area of conic.—We have shewn

above that the semi-axes a, 8 of a conic are given by (39) and (40), viz,
Re a eae
a7" G B=
and, from the theory of invariants explained above, we have further
b— 2h b-- h?
Pye ees SuSE [es TOME CT

sin?

sin20
Hence, if p be a semi-axis, we have
at — (at +89 )o* 470? 0. ica ssachser Auep
where
a ee
a*+B%=—Q (<+ a} a? B? = AB:
Substituting in (52) from (50) and (51), and putting from (41)

A
e= 3 -- h2’
we get
of A(a+b—2hcosw) , , A?® sin*w By, en (53)

(ab—h®)?— ? * (ab —h2)?
which is, accordingly, the equation furnishing the semi-axes of the given
conic ; and, as it is a quadratic in p?, it shews that there are four semi-
axes, which may be grouped into two pairs, the two axes in each pair
being equal in magnitude but opposite in direction. It follows from
(53) that, if p,?, p,? be the roots of the quadratic in p?, the area of the
conic is

7 Asin w
TPP, = ar Muu Coa
(ab — h?)?

Again, it is clear that A and B will have the same sign or different signs,
according as AB is positive or negative, that is, according as AB is
greater or less than zero; hence, since A and B in the equation (37)
A
2 oF ci A
A il Cale
are connected by the relation (51)

it follows that A and B, and thence necessarily a?, 6* in the equation (38)

Re 2
pa + x = 1,
a® B32

1887.} <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 305 -

will have the same sign or opposite signs, according as (ab — h*)7 or
20, or according as the curve is an ellipse or hyperbola. This com-
pletes the classification of conics. (§. 9).

§. 12. Asymptotes.—In the ordinary text-books (cf. Smith’s
Oonics, §. 174, Ed. 1882, p. 187), the method of finding the equation of
the asymptotes of the general conic is given as follows: it is first proved
that the asymptotes of the conic in the particular case

x?

ae bt :
are given by

“ey?

a were

and thence it is inferred that, in the general case, the equations of the
conic and asymptotes must differ only by a constant; the logic of this
reasoning is, to say the least, hardly satisfactory ; the following method
is both easy and rigorously logical.

The asymptotes being tangents to the conic at infinity, they may
be regarded as a pair of lines passing through the points of intersection
of the conic and the line at infinity. Now, the equation of the conic
being

S=ax? + 2hayt by? +2gx+2fy+c=0,
and that of the line at infinity having been shewn (§. 3) to be
A=0,
any conic through their common points is
S+A=0;
and, in order that this may be a pair of lines, its discriminant must
vanish, whence, as usual,
A
A=-Q=- eae

and the asymptotes are given by
S=Q, |
which shews that the asymptotic constant in (41) is a constant which
must be equated to 8, to furnish the equation of the asymptotes.
The above process may be represented in a modified form as fol-
lows ; the conic
ax* + 2hey 4+ by? +29x%+2fy+c=0
being transformed to the centre, becomes
A
ax® + Zhaey + by? Jigga =e
whence it at once follows that the quantity to be added to the right
hand side of this equation to give the asymptotes is the asymptotic
constant. Now, if we transform back to our old axes, the left hand
39

306 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memovrr on Plane Analytic Geometry. (No. 3,

side becomes
ax® + 2hay + by? + 2gx+ 2fyt+e,
while, A and (ab—/h*®) being translation-invariants, the right hand side
remains unaltered, and the equation sought is accordingly
A
= ne sts Seaaep sor LODE

It follows from (6) that the point of intersection of the asymptotes in
(55) coincides with the centre of the conie, and that, accordingly, the
centre is the pole of the line at infinity. It is also clear that the asymp-
totes will be at right angles to each other and the conic will be a rec-
tangular hyperbola, if (a+b)=2h cos ow, in oblique coordinates, and
(a+b) =0 in rectangular coordinates.

§. 13. Eccentricity—The eccentricity may be calculated in
different ways according to the definition we employ.

First method.

8 — B
De tgere er
where a, B are the semi-axes of the conic. We have
24. G2
a
2—e8&= +8 3
ae
fez
1 — e2 = ee >

which give
(2—e)? _ (2+ f2)2
1) ee”
and this, by substitution from (39) and (40), becomes
(2—¢)? (A+B)?
ie ee —_— — Ape © oO P20 DTS DOD (56)
But, from the invariants (42) and (43), we have
a+b—2h cos w

A+B=— - 9 rY
s1n°w
yh
ap e
s1n*w

so that equation (56) becomes
oe en ore A

—e (ab— h*) sin*w
which is the familiar equation. It is clear from (57) that (1 —e*#) and
(ab —h*) are simultaneously positive, zero, or negative; hence, we have

even ik
according as
1A Love F00b,

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 307

or according as the conic is an ellipse, a parabola, or an hyperbola.
In the equilateral hyperbola, we have
a+b—2h cos o=0,
whence e= ae 2.
Second method.

where ¢ is the angle between the asymptotes. The equation of the
asymptotes from (55) being

A

we have
2 sin o. r/ hk? —ab
= ee ee as Aves. 468
snd a+b—2h cos w (8)
But sec’ = (2c0s a — 1) ‘i
a aa
sec® 5 of

i af
sec 5)

whence we have

tant ¢ = sect @ —1=(

e )- pee = 1)
2— ~ (2-2)?
Therefore, from equation (58),
&— 1a) Ge eb) cinta
(2—6)2 (a+b—2h cos we
which is the same equation as (57).

Third method.

The eccentricity may be defined to be the ratio of the distance of
any point on the conic from a focus to its distance from the correspond-
ing directrix ; the calculation on the basis of this method will come in
most appropriately when we presently deal with Laplace’s Linear HEqua-
tion of a Conic (§§. 16—20; see, in particular, §. 20).

§. 14. Director-circle—The director-circle of

S=ax? + 2hay + by?+ 2gx+ 2fy+e=0
being the locus of intersection of orthogonal tangents, its equation in
rectangular coordinates is known to be
(ab— h) (2 +y%) + 2(yb — fh)w-+ 2( fa — hg)y
+c(a+ b) —f2—g?=0, — ssoseesessee (59)
which may also be written in the form
D=(a+b)S — (axthy +g)? — (hat byt+f)®?=0 wrcasessese. (60)

308 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

The centre of the director-circle is seen from (59) to be the point

een

ab—h® = ab—h?
which coincides with the centre of the conic; and, if R be the radius,
we have
pe = hab" | Chg af) _ clatt) = (+e)
(ab—h*)* (ab —h*)? ab — h?

-. = (a+6) A

Gb — we”
which shews that in rectangular axes the square of the radius of the
director-circle is equal to the sum of the squares of the semi-axes of the
conic given in equation (53).

That the same propositions hold for oblique coordinates may easily

be shewn, viz., the equation of the tangents to the conic from (#’, y’)
being

(ax®+ Qhoy + by? + 2qx+2fy +c) X
(aa! + Qhae'y! + by! +2ger’ + 2fy’ +c)
2
= { (ax’ + hy’ +9) 2+ (ha' + by’ +f)yt+ge +fy' + ; ;

the condition that these lines may include a right angle, gives for the
locus of («’, y’) the circle

(ab — h*) (a® + y*+ 2xy cos w)
+2 \ (gb —fh) + (fa — gh) cos w } x

+2{ (fa—gh) +(gb—fh) cos w } y
+c(a+b) — (f?+9*) +2(fg —ch) cos o=0
Comparing this with the standard form
(w—a)?-+2(a@ —a)(y—B) cos w+ (y— By =7%,
or (a%+y?+2ay cos w) —2(a+f cos w)#—2(B +a cos w)y
+a%+ 62+ 2a8 cos w—7r?2= 0,
we have at once

fh—bg ,_hg—af
ba a ae ab — h®
which give the same coordinates of centre as before, while we have for
the radius
7% = a2 + 2aB8 cos w+ B?
c(a+b) —(f? +9") +2(fg — ch) cos w
>. ab — 1? paar

= | (fe bg)? + (hg — af)® — (ab — h*) c(a+b) — (f#+ 9?)

+2 | (fh — bg) (hg — af) — (fg — ch) (ab — h@) i cos | (ab ae

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 309

= [- (a+b) A +2h cos w. A]|+ fe ey

_ —(a+b—2h cos w) A

‘ (CLES | JL

which, by a glance at (53), is seen to represent, as before, the sum of
the squares of the semi-axes. From the value of the radius given above,
it is clear that, when the conic is an equilateral hyberbola, the radius
vanishes, and the director-circle is a circle of infinitesimal radius, viz.,
it is the centre of the conic itself, and the asymptotes, therefore, are
the only tangents of the equilateral hyperbola which are at right angles
to each other.

§. 15. Hyperbola referred to the asymptotes.—In this section,
we purpose to investigate what form the general equation assumes when
the axes of coordinates are transformed to the asymptotes ; two methods
will be given, the first very direct and elementary, the second partly
geometrical and requiring a knowledge of the invariants given above.

First method.

Let the general equation of the second degree be

ax*® + 2hay + by? + 2gx+ 2fy+c=0.
Transfer the coordinate axes to the centre of the conic, which is also
the point of intersection of the asymptotes ; the conic then becomes

ax® + 2hoy + by? +

A
0 vreeee (61)

and the asymptotes are given by
ax®+ 2hay + by? = 0. dev'ves Yeowse (02)
Now the equation of either asymptote may be taken to be y= mz, so
that the two values of m are found, by substitution in (62), to be the
roots of the quadratic
bm?+2hm+a=0. emeatate COO)
Hence, if a, B be the angles which the two asymptotes make with the
axis of x, both tan a and tan 6 must satisfy (63), so that we have
b tan?a+ 2h tan a+a=0
or b sin’a+2h sina cosa+tacosta=0 14... (64)
and similarly,
b sin?B+2h sin B cos B+a cos*B=0 — aseseesersee (65)
Now, the angle between the original axes being w= 5 the ordinary

formule for the transformation of coordinates (Salmon’s Conics, §. 9,
Hd. 1879, p. 7) become in this case

y sin w= X sin a+ ¥ sin B.

x sinw=X cosa+Y cos Bp.
Substituting these in (61), and arranging, we have for the equation of
the conic

310 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

(a cos*a+2h cos a sin a+b sin®a)X?
+(a cos*8+2h cos B sin B+) sin?B) Y?

+2| a cos a cos B+/h.sin (a+ f)+) sin a gin B)XY

But, by (64) and (65), the coefficients of X? and Y? vanish, and the
equation becomes

A
2H ay + ——,_ aaa Seo wos vou aciis ual OOM

where H is the quantity to be calculated. For this purpose, we note
that, if m,, mg be the two roots of the quadratic in m given by (63), we
have

=}

2h
ata Mm Ms = e
Now, we see that

H= cos a cos B jah (tan a+tan 6)+6 tan o tan p}

2
=” ” cos a cos B,

where
cos®a cos®6 = \ (1+ m,?)(1+ m,*) ‘ -) om = tan a, my = tan B.

| Com + mis)*-+ (I — My ms)? | as
b2
~ (a—b)? +4?

— fe
Therefore, H= + calla

b
a, | (a —b)*4+ 412 |
and, finally, the equation (66) becomes

ientan ov [@-d bye an |
ame aN fab — eye?
which is, accordingly, the equation of the hyperbola referred to its
asymptotes, which was sought.

Second method.
The same result may also be obtained as follows. The equation of

the conic, referred to its centre, being, as before,

=
ax* + 2hay + by? + ——- aes vial Nevicuveiee, UO)

and remembering that the absolute ee is a rotation-invariant, we sce

1887.) A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. BLL

that, when referred to the asymptotes, the equation must assume the
form
A

Ax* + 2Hay + By? +——, abu hi eathiny naperieents” (Om)
Now, in this equation, the axis of x being an asymptote, one value of #
must be infinite, and, therefore, in this equation, r regarded as a quadratic
in x, we must have A=0; similarly, the axis of y being the other
asymptote, we must have B=0; so that (69) reduces to

A
2H xy +——; ora ==, meeicdecnieat, CEO)

To calculate H, we remark that, since the original axes are at right

angles, we have o= z and, ag also A=0, B=0, the invariant relation

ab—h? AB —H?
sintw sin? Q_
reduces to
— H? = (ab—h?) sin? QO, secseeeee (71)

where © is the angle between the asymptotes,

ax*® + 2hay + by* = 0. sewuinaeae’ (ba)
But, a, B being the angles which the asymptotes make with the axes,
we have Q=a—f, and, from equation (72),

Bi Se
im, 0 = 2M ab
a+b

Qf h®—ab
el ge a—b)e+410

gan Oo ———

so that (71) becomes
He ee ee
(a — b)®? + 4h?

and (70) gives for the required equation

as { Ga byt aI F
ae (ab — h2)2 ae?
which is the same result as that obtained before. It may be noted
that the value of H might have keen obtained with equal ease by using
the other invariant relation

a+b—2hecosw A+ B—2H cos 2

sinto sin? Q

The geometrical meaning of this equation of the hyperbola is easily
seen, viz., taking p,*, p,* for the squares of the semi-axes of the conic, and
remembering that our original axes were rectangular, we have from (53),

wy=t

312 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 8,

py + po? = mor —
A2
pi a tabs (ab — h?)®’
so that (p,2- as = (p+ pq”)? —4& py? py’
A? (a—b)e+4i8 |
¥ (ab — he)

The equation (67), therefore, may be written
wy =z (Difference of squares of semi-axes),
which is a well-known result.
If the conic had been originally referred to axes inclined at an angle
w, the equation of the hyperbola referred to the asymptotes would have
been

aoe = Aab = cam | @- b)? + 4h? — 4 cos w 5 (0+ 0)=a0 anol]

and the right hand side may be proved to be the difference of the squares
of the semi-axes | given by (53).

§§. 16—20. Laplace’s Linear Denciton

§. 16. Genesis of Laplace’s Equation.—The theorem that
p=Aa+ By+C,
where p is the distance of any point on the curve from a fixed coplanar
point, represents a conic is first due, substantially, to Laplace (Mécanique
Céleste, Ed. 1878, t. I. p. 177). In integrating the equations for elliptic
motion, he gets
dr = dx + ydy,
which leads to

h2

Laplace then explicitly adds that ‘Cette équation, combince avec
celles-ci,
2=ax-+ by, pe ne

pe une équation du second degré.”’ It is proposed to examine here
the geometrical meaning of the arbitrary constants in what I have
called Laplace’s Linear Equation to a conic.

§. 17. Meaning of the Constants.—That this equation represents
a conic may be shewn in various ways, and some additional information
regarding the constants may be gained from each standpoint of view.
Thus, squaring the equation and putting

paw die

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—WMemoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 313

we see that it is the equation to a conic which is an ellipse, a parabola,
or an hyperbola according as
A?+B* Z=7 1.
Now, knowing that the curve is a conic, we may next compare its equa-
tion with the focal polar equation
l=p (1+e cos 8).
Remembering that p is a function of x and y, we conclude that the
absolute terms in the two equations must be identical, whence
C=l=semi-latus-rectum.
Again, as the equation may be written in the form
=a . ae k/ AE BR,
/ AP +B? |
where p is the distance of any point on the curve from a fixed point, and
Azx+By+C
VJ Ait BP
is the perpendicular on the line Ax +By+C=0, we see, by attending to
the focus-directrix method of generating conics, that the curve is a conic
of which the directrix is

Axvx+By+C=0,
and the eccentricity is given by
e& — A?4+ B®,

§. 18. Elliptic Motion.—In order to represent these properties
geometrically, and to shew their relation to elliptic motion, it is con-
venient to begin with the following method of integrating the equations
of motion. We have, as usual,

dx px

Now = = cos 6, ~=sin 6;
dé
therefore e. (=) = — sin 6. —= — - h,
1 @
whence pa eat (=),

ld
and, similarly, == -— (“).
40

314 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

The equations of motion, therefore, become
dao pd sy

Integrating, we get

dt T
‘ dy da
and since on eae h,
we have

which leads to
h2
Up = i + Ax + VY;

which is Laplace’s equation. Comparing this with the form
p=Axz+By+C,
we find, as it ought to be,

h2 !
= = semi-latus-rectum.

This shews why, in integrating the equation
dr=Xdx + ydy,

h? :
Laplace at once puts ma for the constant of integration.

§. 19. Geometric interpretation—The subject may be made
still clearer by the

help of a diagram.
The ellipse is ori-
ginally referred to
rectangular axes
through the focus
S; suppose that the
coordinate axes re-
volve round the
origin, making an
angle XS«# (=6@)
with the former po-
sition. Then, we
have

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 310

6. PM = PS,
whence
e?, PM?= PS? = SQ?4 QP?
= a? +y?*,

But, as PM is parallel to SZ, we have
PM=p-— x cos 6—y sin 6,
which gives
(ep—ex cos O—ey sin 6)? = x? + y?,
as might also have been obtained, but not so easily, by putting
x= Xcos6+Y¥ sin 6
y= —X sin 6+Y cos 6
in the equation

Comparing this with the equation
(C +Axe+By)?= p= x+y,
we get
C=ep, A= —e cos 6, B= —e sin 8,
whence, as before,

e? = A?+ B?
Also tan 0=-F,
and aed 2
fk IOVS Se

Now, when 6=0, the new axis of X coincides with tlie major axis of the
ellipse ; but, when 6=0, we have also B=0, by virtue of the relation

B
tan 6= at

therefore
(C+Az)? = a? + y2,
and, putting x=0, this gives, as before,
y= O= Ly
&
Again, the equation of the directrix is
| x cos 6+y sin O=p,
which, by substituting for @ and p, gives
Ax+By+C=0,
and this agrees with our previous result.
It may be noticed that Gauss uses this form of the equation of a
conic, and calls it the “characteristic equation” (Theoria Motus, §. 3),
Tt is easy to see that when B=0, we have A=e, and

316 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

p=C-+ ex, |
which is the form finally adopted by Gauss. Since «=p cos 6, we have
C
oT cos 6”
which is the ordinary polar equation. If A=B=0, we have
he
aa a
pe

which is the circle. The whole theory of lines of the second order may
be based on the form
p=C+ex,
and, by means of this equation, Gauss has deduced the most complicated
properties of elliptic motion with remarkable ease and elegance,
§. 20. Eccentricity.—If we square the equation
p= Ag+ By +C,
and compare the result with the standard form
ax® + 2hay + by? +2gx+ 2fy+c=0,
we have, by equating coefficients,
a A?’—-l1 h AB 6b Bt-1

— ee — eee immed

c co’ es Ct’ oo: Ge

Therefore
(a— bet ah? _ Olea ide 4A2B2 (A2+4B2)2 et
erry ae ACO ec ae
and ;
ab—h*® (A*—1) (B*—1)—A?B2 1-¢&
ere one mG
which lead to
ee — ae Tye 0,

and this is the well-known equation for the eccentricity (§. 13).

The value of the eccentricity in oblique axes may also be obtained
from Laplace’s equation ; for, if p be the perpendicular on the directrix
from any point on the curve

p=Ax+By+0O,
we have p= ep,
_(Ax+By+C) sin sin gah

= eS Ua: A24 B2—2AB cos a. o,

whence

A?+ B?—2AB cos w
RE seeasnetnnes (73)

Now, squaring Laplace’s equation, and substituting for p*, remembering

that in oblique axes

ee =

p* = x* + y2+42zry cos w,

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 317

we get
- (A2—1) «242 (AB—cos o) ry+(B?—1) y24+2ACr%+2BCy+C?=0,
a comparison of which with the standard equation

ax® + 2hay + by? + 2gx%+2fy+ce=0

gives
ee Ee) h_ AB—coso 6 B?—1
oe EO) ee eS
whence
a+b—2hcosw _ A2+ B?— 2AB cos w— 2 sin®w
iP HILy é a C2 Tr Gay
_ (2 —2) sin*w
= cen
and

ab—h* sin®w — (A2+ B2—2AB cos o)

ree — ————F TT a

er
_ (le?) sin*o
= Gee
by substitution from the value of e? in (73). These lead to the familiar
result

(e?—2)? (a+b—2hcos w)?
1-2 ~ (ab—h®) sintw *
§. 21. Area of a triangle.

§. 21. Triangle formed by two tangents.—We now proceed
to investigate the area of the triangle formed by two tangents drawn
from any point to the general conic, and the chord of contact. For this
purpose, we will first confine our attention to the simple case when the
tangents are drawn from the origin, and then an easy application of in-
variants will smoothly lead to the solution of the general problem.

The tangents which can be drawn from the origin to the conic

S = aa*+ 2hay + by*+29¢+ 2fyt+c=0
are given by (Salmon’s Conics, §. 147, Ed. 1879, p. 149)
(ac — 4?) «+2 (ch—gf) ay+ (be ~f2) y®=0, ..+ (7A)
and the chord of contact being the polar of the origin is
gx +fytc=0. et ee ae i 59.

The area of the triangle formed by the intersection of the lines in

(74) and (75) is at once written down by substitution in (31), viz.,
1 =O Loft by o18 = Bh = abe)
an aft = Bg igt

which may be written

Area = te 78) noe von eed GZOD

318 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

Now, if the tangents are drawn from any point (2’, y’) to the conic S,
we may make that point our new origin, and by this transformation we
know that c is changed into the point-function 8’, while A and (ab—h?),
being translation-invariants, remain unaltered by the transformation ;
hence, as a generalization of (76), we are able to enunciate the following
general |

Theorem.—If from any point (a’, y’), tangents are drawn to the
conic

ax® + 2hay + by? + 2ga+2fy+c=0
the area of the triangle formed by the two tangents with their chord of
contact is
Sif a
pe a eae (77)

where A is the discriminant and S’ the point-function of the conic.

A variety of particular theorems may be deduced from this general
formula; thus, if the curve is a parabola, the area in question is

S’
ee
and, if, further, the point from which the tangents are drawn be the
origin, we have the theorem that, if the general equation of the second
degree represents a parabola, and two tangents be drawn from the origin
to the curve, the area of the triangle formed by the two tangents and
the chord of contact is
pare a

Ja = g/d
Again, the chord of contact being the polar of («’, y’) with respect
to the conic, has for its equation
(aa’+ hy’ +g) 2+ (he + by +f) y+ge’+fy'+c=0,
and, therefore, if p be the perpendicular let fall on this chord from
(x’, y'), we have easily

S’

8”?
tees oa! gh ES SOE og BREF SD
P= (al + hay + 9)? + (ha + by +f a SS
But, if D = O be the equation of the director-circle of the couic, and,
therefore, D’ its point-function, we have from (60)
(azx’ + hy’ + 9)?+ (ha’+ by’+f)?=(a+b) S’—D’.
Hence (78) gives
soe oe 79
p [+h pe — Dr pececs coe ove fi ).
It is now easy to find the length of the chord intercepted between the
points of contact of the tangents, for if A be the length sought, we
have

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 319

yi 2(Area of triangle)
a Ee) Sf ek Loe

P

which, by the help of equation (77), reduces to
D 2/{a) S’D’— (a+b) as}
- SF pe eee
Hence, we have the

Theorem.—If from any point («’, y’) two tangents be drawn toa
conic given by the general equation, the length of the chord of contact
is

2/{A8'D'- (att) 483}
(ab—h*) S’— A ,

where 8’, D’ are the point-functions of the conic and of its director-
circle, respectively.

Various particular cases may be deduced from the general formula
in (80). Thus, if the tangents be drawn from any point on the director-
circle, that is, if the tangents be orthogonal, the length of the chord of
contact is

. (80)

28'n/— (a+b) A
(ab—h?) S’— A"
Again, if two tangents be drawn from the directrix of a parabola to the
curve, the length of the chord is

of: a+b Wet fae
2S _ a 2S
/ 2 ae ang OO: b
If the curve is an equilateral hyperbola, the director-circle degenerates
into the centre of the conic, and the chord in question, being the line at
infinity, is of infinite length; this also follows from (80), for in this
case

=0,S'=— a = ag ere 0,

so that the numerator becomes es square root of a zero-quantity, while
the denominator also vanishes, and, therefore, the limiting value of the
apparently indeterminate expression is really infinite.

Again, we can easily find the area of the triangle formed by the
chord of contact with the lines joining the centre to the points of con-
tact. For the chord of contact, being the polar of (#’, y’), is

(aa’ + hy'+9)«2+ (he + by +f)y+ge' +fy+co=0, .. (81)

and the centre being
(= bg hg-y
ab —h® ab—12/)?

the perpendicular from the centre on the line in (81) is given by

320 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

{ (ax + hy’ +9) hf — bg) + (hen' + by’ +f) (hg — af) + (ge +fy'+¢)(ab— I?) }

a
+ (ab—h?) { (ase’ + hy’ +9)®+ (ha’+ by +f)?}. f
If, therefore, p, be the length of the perpendicular in question, this

reduces to
A

(ab—H?) a/ { (a+b)S’—D'}
Hence, as the length of the chord is given in (80), the area of the
triangle is written down to be

ne me (7 ae (83)

2 Pi eee oesoce

(ab— h?)§ (ab— h2) 8’ — a}

Tt must be carefully noticed that the two triangles whose areas are given
in (77) and (83), being on opposite sides of the chord of contact, are
affected with opposite signs; hence their algebraic sum establishes the
truth of a property enunciated by Prof. Nash, viz., we have the following

Theorem.—lIf two tangents are drawn teen any point (@, y’) to
the conic )

n= mre sts

ax®+ 2hay + by? + 2gu+2fy+c=0,
the area of the quadrilateral formed by the two tangents and the two
lines joining the centre to the points of contact 1s

/ — As’

ab Te”
where §’ is the point-function of the conic.
It is easy to remark that the geometrical meaning of the equation
of the conic is that, when the area of the quadrilateral vanishes, the
locus of the point must be the curve itself. Again, since we know from
geometry that the area of the quadrilateral is real or imaginary according
as the point is outside or inside the curve, we infer from (84) that any
given point is inside or outside the curve according as AS’ is positive or
negative, which is equivalent to the statement that the point is inside
or outside according as the discriminant and the point-function have the
same or different signs, and the same result, of course, also follows from
the formula in (77). Here we may add that if from any point two
tangents be drawn to a conic, the angle between the two tangents will be
real, only if a certain relation holds amongst the coefficients in the equa-
tion of the conic ; thus, first taking the simple case when the tangents are
drawn from the origin, we have the tangents given by equation (74), viz.

(ac — g*)x*+ 2(ch — fg)xy +(be—f*)y*= 0,
and clearly the angle between these two lines will be real, if

(ch — fg)? 7 (ac— g*)(be — f*)
A 2%.

tery

or

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay— Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 321

Hence, remembering that the discriminant is a translation-invariant, we
can at once generalize the theorem to the case where the tangents are
drawn from any point, viz., the angle between the tangents is real, if
the discriminant is negative ; but we have shewn that, if the tangents
are real and the point outside the curve, the discriminant and the point-
function must have different signs, so that, as the discriminant is negative,
the point-function must be positive; hence, finally, we have the very
simple

Theorem.—Auny point is outside a conic, on the curve, or inside it,
according as the point-function is positive, zero, or negative.

§§, 22—23. Inclinations of tangents to conics.
§. 22. Theorem.—We shall now prove a theorem which shews
how some well-known properties of the circle and the ellipse are corre-

lated.
Consider the conic

x2 2
+= 1 iets ci (OD)

where b? is essentially indeterminate in sign and value. The tangents
at any two points (a, ¥1), (#2, Y2) are

Le, YY
at ag ae HO ee ce
ae 79
and their chord of contact is
@ (%+ 2%) dint +42) 2 = i ed en, (88)

-) ae aan
Hence, if 0, , w be the angles of ane of the two tangents and of
their chord of contact to a directrix, we have

a?
Soe
tan 0= ae soestat annem ee)
a® Yo
tan p= ae bes Hstetened COU)
a® YW+Yo
tan w= — 5: ers. (08)
Substituting for y,, yg from (89) a (90) in
aren ie ae 1
abe ae oe
we have
a? a2

=a... (92), (93)

= aS —. % ——
J/ 2 +0? tan? @ ee tan? lan? ¢ rs
41

322 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

But, substituting for y,, y. from (89) and (90) in (91), we have

x, tan 6+, tan >
t — A a Dis same x Deb oeeeesn nee z
an wy Ppa (94)

Now, assume

22
a® + b2 tan? pa Ns
. Cos

2 2
a2 +52 tant g = —

cos? P|
so that
= 1 —e? sin? 6, p2 = 1 = e? gin? $,
a cos 6 a@ Cos
and vy ee Ho — a pee

be <
Substituting these values in (94), we arrive at the following symmetrical
theorem, viz., if 6, >, y be the angles of inclination of any two tangents
to a conic and of their chord of contact to a directrix, we have

A cos 647! cos >’

where the eccentricity of the conic is given by

ee ae ee pe
~ gin?@ ~ gin2”
(See Hducational Times, November 1885, my Ques. 8337).

§. 28. Applications.—To verify the truth of this theorem, we
proceed to some applications. In the parabola, e=1, so that
A= cos 6, n= cos #,

e2 —

which give

2 tan w/=tan 6+tan 9,
a result which can be proved independently, and is often useful in the
elementary theory of projectiles. The particular case of the circle is
specially interesting. _Here e=0, and A=u=1, whence

a2 sin sin 6+sin ? Bea wie
cos 6+co0s ¢ ade
and 2~= 6+,
or y—O=o—ywW.

To see the geometric meaning of this analytic condition, observe that,
in the circle, the foci coincide with the centre, and the position of the axes
becomes essentially indeterminate, while the directrix is situated at an
infinite distance. Now draw any two tangents OA, OB toa circle, and
let OA, OB, BA intérsect the line at infinity in the points C, D, E;
ZOCD=6, ZODC= —¢?, ZBEC=y, ? being taken negative as it is
measured in a direction opposite to that in which 6, y are measured ;

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 323

hence we have
ZLOAB= ZCAE = 0- an
ZOBA=y- 9.
Therefore ZOAB= ZOBA, and OA= OB, just as it should be, so that
the geometric meaning is the equality of two tangents to a circle drawn
from any external point. Lastly, if we draw any two tangents OA, OB
to any conic, and, if OA, OB, BA intersect a directrix at C, D, H, we
have as before
ZOAB=6-y, ZOBA=y- #.

Now draw through the centre two radii-vectores of the curve (pj, po),
making angles 6, with the conjugate axis ; then, from the polar equation
to the curve, we have

am b2 b2
eos ae ‘sin2@’ pa? = 1—é& sin*p’
so that
b b
Py aoa. we

which furnish the geometrical meanings of the symbols A, w in the
statement of the theorem. Substituting for X, w in our original equation,
we have

py; Sin 6+ pp sin $

t =
aay p, cos 6+ p, cos ¢”

whence
| Pe sin Cy — PY o>

pg sin sin (0 - Wp) zapyi
and this asserts that the tangents OA, ark are proportional to the central
radii-vectores which are obviously parallel to them. In the case of the
circle, the indeterminateness in the position of the axes makes all the
radii-vectores equal, so that, as shewn before,

OA=OB, ~y—?=6-Yy.
It may be remarked that we might have started from the polar instead
of the Cartesian equations, as just shewn, and thus worked up to the
value of tan w given above; it is also useful to notice that, though the
theorem was obtained from a very particular form of the equation of a
central conic, it is perfectly true for the general conic, inasmuch as
the eccentricity only appears in the final result.

§. 24. Similar Conics.
§, 24. Generation of Similar Conics. Given any conic, any other
conic which is concentric with it, and similar and similarly situated,

may be generated as the locus of a point through which any two chords
of the conic being drawn at right angles to each other, the sum of the

324 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memovir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

reciprocals of the rectangles under the segments of each chord is constant,
the variation of this constant furnishing the different members of the
family of similar conics.
Let
ax* + Qhay+ by? +2qxe+2fytAcH=O — ssesresrese (95)
be the primitive conic, and («’, y’) the point through which the chords
are drawn at right angles to each other and whose locus we seek.
Transferring the origin to this point, the conic becomes
ax? + 2hay+ by®@429'e+2fyto’ =O vrecsceseeee (96)
where c’ is the point-function. The polar form of this equation is
(a cos? 6+ 2h cos 6 sin 6+6 sin? @) p?+ 2(g’ cos +f" sin @) p+c’=0 ... (97)
Hence, if p,, pp be the segments of the chord drawn through the new
origin, inclined at an angle @ to the axis of a, and pz, p, the segments of
the chord at right angles, we have, from (97),
C
Pi Pa =F cos? 0+ 2h cos 6 sin O-+0 sin? 6’
—— ————— C —EE
P3 Pa @ sin? — 2h sin 0 cos O+b cos’d

so that

which shews that the sum of the reciprocals of the rectangles is im-
dependent of the direction of the chord, and for any given value of this

1
sum, say —, the locus of (a’, y’) is given b
Y in Y ef Ad
OA Dil
ie

which may be written
ax*+ 2hay + by? + 2aet+ 2fyAc=k* (A+D) seccsecseeee (98)

and this, of course, represents a conic concentric with the primitive one
given by (95), and similar and similarly situated; and we get a
family of similar conics by assigning all possible values to &. It
is interesting to remark that the property established here is general
in a twofold sense, viz., if the sum of the reciprocals of the rectangles
under the segments is to be constant, the point may be any point on the
conic given by (98), and the chords may be inclined at any angle to the
axis of #, provided they include a right angle. The same results, of
course, could have been obtained by applying the process to each of the

conics separately, viz., if we have the central conic
gel eas

a

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 325

the value of
1 ]

: P1 P2 P3 P4
is found to be

and the locus in question is

Similarly, if we have the parabola

y* = 4azx,
the value of
1 1
Pi Po P3 Ps
is ae Se
y?—4Aax! f
and the locus sought is
y*® —Aax= k*,

Lastly, as in the equilateral hyperbola, we have (a+b) =0, the required
conic-locus is the given conic itself, and we have the following

Theorem.—If through a given point P in the plane of any conic,
any two chords be drawn mutually at right angles, the sum of the
reciprocals of the rectangles under the segments is constant; and, for
different values of this constant, the locus of P is a family of concentric,
similar and similarly situated conics, which, however, all merge into the
primitive conic when it is an equilateral hyperbola. (Cf. Salmon’s
Conics, §. 181, Ex. 2, Hd. 1879, p. 175).

§. 25. Theory of Envelopes.

§. 25. On Three Parabolic Envelopes.—As an illustration of the
theory of envelopes, we proceed to discuss the envelopes of the sides of
all equilateral triangles inscribed in a given triangle.

Let ABC be the given triangle, and
A'B'C' an equilateral triangle inscribed in
it; let r be the side of this equilateral

triangle, and let LAC'B' =5+46, so that

2
ZA'C'B =e — 6, ZBA'C' = = +0 iB.

326 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No 3,

Zap = pus 6—A. Then, in order to find the envelope of B'O’, take
AC, ABas oe axes of « and y respectively, so that the equation of B’C’ is
see es |
AB’ iG — eve (99)
Now, we have from the geometry of the figure

/2
AC’ =——sin (F-9-A}, OOD eee 608 coe (100)

a i acs
AB! = sin (+9), cnet Mie ci
while | |
c=AB=AC'+C’'B
gives
sin (F-9- A) sin (F+9-B)
[ere oo ss aes
[ sin (= — A) sin (= _ B) |
= a 3 9
Pecks > “eineA + an B iy
{ cos (=- B) cos (= - os
} 5 i siti Bcioy ay isin A si
which may be written in the form
-=P Cos d6+Q sin 0, 090000 oo ve0 (102)
where
P= ee (opti eob BY iuxsstsevsye 08)
Ge =e Ce) ca 69 2) (104)
The equation of B/C’ in (99), therefore, reduces to
| sin A sin A ;
=)

Sie Qa
sin (E+ é) sin (= — §— — A)
which may be written

| @ sin (S-A)+y sin 5 cos 6+ | y cos 5 — a cos (F-4) sin @

= sa sin (5-+6) sin (=-46-a)

== | cos (5 = pg A)+oos a },

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 327
and this may be written
r { cos A+ cos (= —-A— 20) } =E cos 6+F sin 6, ... (105)

where

E=2 sin A} a sin (=- )+y sin 5 | ait tee chal BOK)

F=2sin A y COS 37 # COS (F-A) Sesriem CLO)
Eliminating r between (102) and (105), we have
J . as :
2c cos A+ cos € — A —26)
= PE, 2 cos? 6+ QF. 2 sin? 6+ (QE+PF),. 2 sin 6 cos 6.
Assuming, therefore, 20=$, this may be written
ef |
2c cos A-+2c cos (G-A — 2)
= PE+ QF + (PE —QF) cos $+(QE+PF) sin ¢
Expanding cos (¢ —-A= ¢), and arranging the coefficients of sin ¢ and

cos ¢, this may be written I 30
M sin ?+N cosP?=K sti vad mien (108)

where
M = QE+ PF — 2¢ sin (F- A) sti idee H@QQ)
T
N = PE — QF—2c cos (=- A) sci (110)
K = 2¢ cos A—PE-—QF O00 ee0 cov nce (hEY)
The envelope of (108) is obviously
M?*+N2= K2,

and this, being written in the form
M*=(K+N)(K—-N),
leads, on substitution from (109), (110), and (111), to the equation

(QE + PF)? —4c sin @ tb A). (QE+ PF) +40? sin? (= oF A)
= Ac? cos? A — cos? G — A)
— Ae { [cos A — cos ( = A) PE +[ cos A +cos (= - A)] QF } '
+4 PQEF,
which may be written

328 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

(QE — PF)? — 4c [ Q. sin (F—a)+P cos (=-a) —cos A |e

—4e [P sin (= - A) ar {cos (— A) +005 A}] F+4c? sin? A=0.

As E and F are linear functions of # and y, while P and Q are constant
quantities, it is clear that this equation of the required envelope
represents a parabel, and a diameter of this parabolic envelope is given
by ) QH= PF,

which is equivalent to

{P. cos (F-a)+Q sin (F-4)}o- {P cos Q sin 3h y=0,

or, since
< T

sin (5 +B)
P cos ere) os a
3 3 sn B ’
the equation of the diameter may be written
x sin (E+ C) —y sin (7-+B) =0
The diameter can be geometrically constructed as follows, viz., on BC
describe externally an equilateral triangle BDC, and join AD; then AD

is the diameter ; for, if the point D be (a, y); we have
DC sin A DB sin A

wee OE oe cr

= ) = ?
4 sin(G+C) * sin G+)
so that the equation of AD is
© Sin (E+ c) = y sin (+3),

which is also the equation of the diameter.

Again, if we consider the envelopes of the other two sides, they also
will be parabolas, and their diameters will be obtained by joining B and
C to the remote vertices EH and F of the equilateral triangles described

externally on the opposite sides ; and, since, from elementary geometry,
AD, BH, CF intersect in a point, it can easily be shewn, from Hue. III. 22,

and

that the acute angle between any two of them is 5 Thus, finally, we
have the
Theorems.—The envelopes of the sides of the equilateral triangles

which can be inscribed in any given triangle ABC, are three parabolas ;

/
'

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 329

the acute angle between every pair of the three axes is 33 if, through

the vertices of the given triangle, diameters of the parabolas be drawn,
they intersect in a fixed point which may be determined geometrically,
viz., if equilateral triangles BDC, CHA, AFB be described externally on
the sides, the lines AD, BE, CF are diameters of the enveloping para-

bolas and meet in a point, the acute angle between each pair being z

§§. 26—27. Reciprocal Polars.

§. 26. Reciprocal of Central Conic.—It is well-known that the
first focal pedal of a conic, being the locus of the foot of the perpendicular
dropped from a focus on any tangent, is, in the case of central conics,
the circle described on the axis-major as diameter ; hence, as the reciprocal
of any curve is the inverse of its pedal, it is clear that the inverse of
pedal of the first focal pedal of any central conic is the reciprocal polar
of a circle, which reciprocal is known to be a conic; hence it follows
that the second pedal of a conic with respect to a focus is the inverse of
a conic whose position and magnitude may be determined geometrically.
For we know that the reciprocal of a circle of radius a, with respect to
a circle of radius 4, is a conic which is an ellipse if the origin of recipro-
cation lies within the given circle, the focus of the conic is at the origin

: . yer
of reciprocation, the semi-latus-rectum is —, the eccentricity is —, where
a : a

c is the distance between the centres of the given circle and the circle of
reciprocation, and the directrix is a line at right angles to the central

i ke ue F
line drawn at a distance — from the origin of reciprocation. Now, in
C

the question under consideration, we have to find the reciprocal of the
circle described on the major axis as diameter, with a focus as origin of
reciprocation ; hence the conic is an ellipse, a focus of which is the

é : ; Ae is
focus of the given conic, the semi-latus-rectum 1s —, the eccentricity is
a

equal to the eccentricity of the given conic, and the directrix is a line at

right angles to the axis-major of the given conic, at a distance — from
ae

the given focus.
These results are easily verified analytically, for the given conic
being
ae
a alia Cary
remove the origin to the focus, say the negative one; then the conic is

42

330 A. Mukfiopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

and the first pedal, being the circle on the major axis as diameter, 1s

(x ow, ae)? + y? = a*,
the coordinates of any point on which may be expressed by means of a
single parameter, v7z.,

x=a (e + cos #),

y=asin >,
and hence the equation of any tangent may be thrown into the form

(2—ae) cos? + y sin =a.

A line at right-angles to this through the origin (which is now the
focus) is

x sin ?—y cos $=0,
and, as the second pedal of the conic, or the first pedal of the cir cle, is
the locus of the intersection of the two lines, we have, by solving for
sin ? and cos ,

pt ay a an
sai a + y? — at a2 +2 — aew’

where (a, y) is, of course, a sith on the pedal, viz., the actual equation
is
a (a* +4") = (a? + — aex) ,

which quartic, therefore, is the second pedal of the given conic with
respect to a focus. ‘To see that this is the inverse of a conic, we have
only to take its inverse, viz., substituting for w and y

hPa key

Bry Bae
respectively, the second-pedal-quartic is seen to be the inverse of
a® (a*+y?) = (k® —aex)?,

which is, of course, a mg viz., this may be written

en en 2kPew

be a®b® ab?
which is equivalent to

b2 bf

It may be noted that any two conics having a common focus have two of

their common chords passing through the intersection of their directrices ;

in the present case, therefore, two of the chords of intersection of this

conic and the given conic are parallel to the directrices; one of these

chords is found, by subtracting the equations of the conics, to be the line
"ke — 8

ae ie

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 331

§. 27. Reciprocal of Evolute of Conic.*—We now purpose to
investigate the reciprocal polars of evolutes of conics; but as all central

conics are included in the equation

eles (Y=, sieGanie sestiagl Le)

we will discuss the problem with regard to this general case. Since the
reciprocal is the inverse of the pedal, and as the pedal of the evolute is
the locus of the intersection of the normal and the line drawn at right
angles to it through the origin, it is clear that the reciprocal polar of
the evolute is the inverse of the locus of the point of intersection of
the normal at any point of the curve, and the right line dropped per-
pendicular to it from the origin. Now, the normal at any point («, y)
of the curve in (112) is

BEY gmc? (Si a

a \a
where X, Y being the current coordinates, the equation may be written
m—1 m—1 m — 2 m— 2
ee y Kay (2 ad f pre (113)
q’” pir a” bm |
The straight line through the origin at right angles to this, is
m—1 4m 1
Saye ee ~ hehe e cess JOLLA)
es a”™

At the common point of intersection of the two lines given by (113)
and (114), we have

2(m—1) 2 (m—~—1) m—1 ypm— 2 m— 2
— + lx ( ) G ——* (115)

qu p2m pm a pm
r 2 (m—1) 2(m—1)) m—1 m— 2 m— 2
x y a x x y
i + Tee di wy rs )( ace hn ; (116)

If (€, ») be the inverse of the point whose coordinates are given by
(115) and (116), and /? the constant of inversion, we have

keX hey}
a aye If mB ym—2\ see peepee (117)
a b ( qi” oe bm )

* The theorems established in this section were discovered by me about three
years ago, and were, on the 29th August, 1885, communicated to Mr. W. J.C. Miller,
Mathematical Editor of the Educational Times, with a view to their publication in
that journal. They have since been published as questions 8571, 8707, 8773, 8993;
9049, 9074, 9148, 9162, 9163, 9204; but, while some of these questions have appeared
under my name, the others have been, for reasons best known to Mr. Miller himself,
ascribed to different gentlemen who had, perhaps, just as much to do with the
theorems with which they have been credited, as the proverbial man in the moon.

332 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

ke Y he, m2
1 Saye eae im 8h Boe srt ccecve (118)
ay. ai ( = Y
a 5™

Tf, now, we eliminate w and y between the equations (117) and (118) by
virtue of the relation

we shall obtain the equation of the locus sought. For this purpose, we
find that

ue Ks

and

a1 A gets doy RNS ie RE LOE EN
ro k | m2 ym 2 f eveere screen (120)
j abay | ea} A
bv a’ be J
Therefore, finally, replacing (€, 7) by (a, y), we find from (119) and (120)
the
Theorem.—The reciprocal polar of the evolute of

@" +0)"

is the curve

Ta ae
er er]
1 1

=) (2) 4a(4Y, mit <a

where & is the radius of the circle of inversion.
A host of interesting results may be obtained by assigning particular
values to m and & in (121); a few are noted below.

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 333

If m= 2, k?=a*®¥ b®, we see that the reciprocal polar of the evolute
of the conic

with regard to the circle described on the line joining the foci as diameter,
is the curve
a® bo?

ate +—=1] evo eve a8

oeoe (122)
which, when the hyperbola is equilateral, becomes
}. Sh ook
xe ye ae eereee concen (123)
Again, if m= 2, k=1, we see that the reciprocal polar of the evolute
of the hypocycloid

is the curve
2

a y®P yeh aft
(5+5) = (= a7, i) ) 200090200 b60 (124)
the radius of the circle of inversion being unity; if a=, the polar
equation of the reciprocal polar becomes

T= Qa SEC 26. 000 e00 coc one (125)

Again, since the evolute of the conic

ee

me pp

(;) +(3) =

where

we see, by putting m=2, k®=a*%—b?, that the reciprocal polar of the
evolute of the evolute of the conic
) ip :
a® 02

with respect to the circle described on the line joining the foci as
diameter, is the curve

a2 b2\° Q
(5.45) OS orate Cate C18)

Again, by putting m=-— 2, and attending to equation (122), it is
clear that the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the reciprocal polar of the

334 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

evolute of the conic

with regard to the circle described on the line joining the foci as

diameter, is the ourve
=(7 Ss 2) (127)

(3) + HOO -OOS

Here we may remark in passing that since the reciprocal polar of the
evolute of the reciprocal polar of any curve can be geometrically proved
to be the locus of the extremity of the polar subtangent, it is clear that
the curve in (127) is the locus of the extremity of the polar subtangent
of the evolute of the conic :

2°, 3
age

a2 2
a2 aa

Hence, transforming to polar coordinates, we have the
Theorem.—The locus of the extremity of the polar subtangent of

the curve
Pay } sin O\F
-) =\a a, cs he

which is, of course, the evolute of the gies is the curve

(5-2) b= (22)'+ (SY) fx

fc 2 Shes 8
. cos 6\3 sin 0\3 ;

5 — t Coe vee eee ave
oe ( ; ) an 6 ( : ) ) (128)
which is, of course, the polar dorm of the equation (127).

Again, by putting m= 3, k®=ab, we find that the reciprocal polar
of the evolute of the parabola

(:) +() =

with respect to a circle of radius r/ ab, is the cubic curve
ya-y .% bah
Oe eas Bi). * sgaievbeetee (129)
By the application of the same process to the parabola, a variety of
new theorems may be obtained, viz., taking the parabola of the un‘
degree,

y= As”, epaies's vealed Clee
the normal at any point (#, y) is

dag SS ge Mara lle eye TD iene GY

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 335

while the line at right angles to this through the origin is

Y¥ —Ans™ *X=0 Mika
so that, at the point of intersection of the lines given by (131) and (132),
we have

1 + d2nra2(™—D) Y = dna”, ow. (14 Anyx"—*), — saveee (133)

1 + A2n2z2(™—1) xa. ax (1+Anyx™—*), 1... (184)
and the inverse of the X, Y is given by
k2 X ke
SS ee ee oe Pe SS ae ee eee ccrececce 135
: XP4+ 8 (1+ Anya”—*) eit
12 ¥ he. Ana}

= —__. — —_____——_—. cibhateenaed ft OO
Po + YY? x ele Anya"—?) or
where £, 7 are the coordinates of a point on the locus sought; hence,
eliminating x, y between the equations (135) and (136), by virtue of the
relation in (130), we have, after replacing €, 7 by x, y respectively, the
Theorem.—The reciprocal polar of the evolute of the parabola of
the n*” degree
y= Ax
is the curve
1 ae n—l1
yar ( +. 4) = Nek) pe cges (137)
where k is the constant of inversion.
As before, by assigning particular values to A and » in this equa-
tion, we may deduce various theorems.
Thus, the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the parabola
y* =4az,
with regard to a circle whose diameter is equal to the latus-rectum, is
the cubic curve
r (cos? 6 + cot? 6) = 4a cos 8, keene Loo)
of which «= 2a is an asymptote.
Again, the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the parabola
y* = 4ax,
with respect to a circle of radius a, is the cubic
a> = y? (a— 2x), iscuwsscee (Loo)

of which «= 5 is an asymptote.
Again, the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the parabola

y’ = 4a (x4 a),
the focus being now the origin, with regard to a circle whose diameter
is equal te the semi-latus-rectum, is the curve
r cot d=a sin 6, ieomcts CRU

336 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

which represents a circular cubic, of which «=a is an asymptote, and
the point at infinity a point of inflexion.

Again, the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the evolute of the
parabola

y’ = 4a (x«+2a),
the origin now being the centre of curvature at the vertex, with respect
to a circle of radius a, is the quartic
y” (3x74 2y*) = a? a, seecmnebe nets CAGES
Similarly, the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the parabola
y? = 4a (a+ 2a),

with respect to a circle of radius k, is the cubic

ax? = k*y?,
It is useful to notice that if we are given any curve
L=f 1s, Ga 0, bie ssspanions, (iaiay

the normal at any point (#, y) is
du
(Y —y) qn SX -*) 4 svebsecenens (148)
while the line at right angles to this through the origin is

At the common point of intersection of these two lines, we have

be > (=) \x= i a (rae 7) deosesaese (les

du\* a “( du du
{ (=) +(7) Y= (yee) coe 146)

whence it follows that if (, 7) be the point inverse to (X, Y), the
coordinates are given by

du
oo eR a dy
f=, yao ie’. du _ du BOO bee vet ace (147)
Y dx 4 dy
du
12 ¥ Ny da
| X?+ Y’ du du Bee oreseeese (148)
y dx i dy

Therefore, the equation of the reciprocal polar of the evolute of the
curve given by (142) is obtained by eliminating x and y from the three
equations (142), (147), (148); and, the general theory being thus given,
the question is reduced to one of elimination.

It is interesting to note that if the coordinates of any point on the
given curve can be expressed in terms of a single variable parameter ¢,

1887.]| A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 337

the coordinates of the corresponding point on the reciprocal polar of the
evolute, may be similarly expressed. For, remembering that

du
da Say
du dx’
2
the formule in (147) and (148) may be written
dx
=k". : = h? at
dy dy dx
ya te Y 6 +a ap
dy dy
eet eo

dy 4 oy
Yoel 9 Og TS ap
so that, if the coordinates of any point on the given curve be given by

v=f, (P)
y=fo (P),

we see at once that the coordinates of the corresponding point on the
reciprocal polar of the evolute are given by the system

ee SA Qt ore
fi %) f'1 ) +h ) fe (P)
F's (P)

2= Ph.

fi O fi @) +h2 O) fo (9)
It is clear that the coordinates of any point on the n” “ reciprocal polar
of evolute”” may be obtained from this system; and the coordinates of
points on the curves given above may also be expressed by means of a

single variable parameter.
§§. 28—29. Theorems on Central Conics.

§. 28. Properties ofthe
Ellipse.—In this section we
shall investigate the truth of
some theorems on the ellipse.

I. Let? be the eccentric
angle at any point P on the
ellipse

ee
atpah

so that, if A, A’ are the vertices
and S, S’ the foci, the coordi-

43

338 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

nates of A, A’, S, S’, P are (a,o0), (—a, 0), (ae, 0), (— ae, 0), (a cos >,
b sin p), respectively. The equations to PA, PS, PS’, PA’ are easily
found, viz.,

x—acos? acos?—a,

Ae eee Peer?
or | yo Pg et tnsiigrusacee, AD
or yer een ee me a |
or yar oe “Ne prrrerre s
pain Faget sam tits
or yore pee Salen (152)

Let p, q be the intercepts made by PA, PA’, and 7, s those made by
PS, PS’, on the minor axis. Then we have

a b sin > ey b sin >
~ l—cos?’ 1=Ty cos ¢
ag be sin > _ be sin ?-

p= , sa |
e—cos > e+cos $
so that we get

2b ee oR 2
Pr SG pqy=0’," Sa ES 5
x 2be? sin > ie be? sin? Ll 1 2

Tes e? — cos? ?’ TAS Com @ 7's basin?
This shews that the sum of the reciprocals of the intercepts made by
PA, PA’ on the minor axis is equal to the sum of the reciprocals of the
intercepts made by PS, PS’ on the same axis; it also follows that, since
pq = b*, the rectangle under the intercepts made by PA, PA! is always
constant and equal to the square of the semi-axis-minor. Again, p, q are
the roots of the quadratic
z* — 2b cosec ?. z+b?=0. sha do vicsviege ae
Similarly, 7, s are the roots of the quadratic
2° —2b dA? cosec P. +027 A7=O —reeaceeseeee (154)
where A? satisfies the equation
nas cs sin? f .
e? — cos? >

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 339

which is equivalent to
| sin?? =?
Again, since the equations of all the four lines PA, PA’, PS, PS’, are
known, the angle between any two of them may be found, viz.,
2 ab

i. ne
tan APA’ = ia e ekasicncexs” (2088
p mue sin $
1 2
cot SPA = —2.o+* | tan §— sin ¢ | Be: (157)
2
cot S’/PA! = -. te: cot an = sin $ » (188)
We have shewn above that
telidss Aignd 2 2

g r ee s bsin¢? ordinate of P’

whence the ordinate of P is a harmonic mean as well between r and s
as between p and gq. Again, it is evident that the theorem holds, even if
S, S’ are not the foci, but any two points on the major axis equidistant
from the centre ; for, in that case, instead of putting OS=ae, we have
to put OS = ak, where is a certain constant ; thus, we have the theorem
that the ordinate of any point P is a harmonic mean between the in-
tercepts made on the minor axis by the two lines joining P to two points
on the major axis equidistant from the centre.

In order to see whether the formule

1 i_it_2
C4 Cr se
pq=F’,

hold for any curve other than the conic, let us take the inverse question
in a more general form, viz., take O as the origin of coordinates, and
BOA, OQP any two lines through it, A, B being fixed points; then,
if BQ and AP intersect in R, required the locus of R, when

aims bt Sole stolid Male

Po oe 9 te
pg=*,
where OP=p, OQ=q. Let a, P be the coordinates of R; OA=a,
OB= —b; then

340 <A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,
But, since OP = p, OQ =4q, we have

whence

panty ee BE ose vovwsad.n BO
so that

Hence the theorem that the ordinate is a harmonic mean between the
intercepts holds only when a=, that is, when the line on which the in-
tercepts are made is equidistant from the fixed points; thus, we have the

Theorem.—Given two points and a line equidistant from them ;
then, taking for axes the given line and the line joining the points, the
ordinate of any point is a harmonic mean between the intercepts which
the lines joining the point to the given points make on the given line.

Again, if pg =k’, we must have, changing a, B into a, y in (159) and
(160),

Sl? € 1
ee 7-7) e=1,

shewing that the theorem holds only when P les onaconic. In the
particular case when the given line is equidistant from the given points,
we have a= J, and the conic is

x? y?

lf the two lines are also at right angles, they are the axes of the conic,
and. the given constant /; is the semi-axis-minor.

II. To determine the position of a point P on an ellipse such that,
if the normal at P intersects the minor axis produced in G, the polar of
G may subtend a right angle at P.

Using the same diagram, let the ellipse be

>=tTta=1,

and P the required point where the eccentric angle is ¢, so that the

coordinates of P are a cos ?, b sin ?. Then the normal at P is
ax by ner

—-—- 3 eae by)
cos? sing f

(o, Ae Cc = *). |

so that G is

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir om Plane Analytic Geometry. 341

Let CD be the polar of G with respect to the conic, so that CD is parallel
to the axis-major and has for its equation
b3
4 I= ~~ @sin ¢
Transfer the origin to P, and take the new axes parallel to the old;
then the ellipse is

(at+acos?)* (y+b sin >)?
oe ee
a* b@
ae yy? 22cos¢ 2 sin ? |
or ata fee haar aa Oe isatsgire (LOE
The line CD is
b8
y+b sin $= Bars yr
or Te ew icin La ot (162)
b
ae 2 gin? 2 eos?
where pee ene (a® sin? 94-0? Cos? p)'o wisi.es séc0! C163)

Now, PD, PC are two lines through the new origin, and through the
intersection of the conic with the line; their equation, therefore, must be
z* y* 2cos? 2 sin

ae b2 Xa xY + Aun. y2=0 aielotela oasiatevaiets (164)
These will be at right angles, if
tl 2nd
ag at serge

Substituting for A from (163) and simplifying, we have

sat we: ( i 3)( +d = itary (165)

which determines the value of $, and, therefore, of P; it is remarkable
that the result is dependent simply on the eccentricity.

III. A very interesting point arises, if we seek the envelope of the
sides of any triangle PSS’ having its vertex P at any point on the ellipse,
and its base-ends any two points 8, 8S’ on the axis-major, equidistant
from the centre, so that OS =OS'’=. Then, from (150), the equation
of PS is

Pn bk sin $
~ a’ cos 9—k * 5) Gos ¢—h’
which may be written
(ba — akb) sin $— ay cos $=— aky,
and the envelope of this for different values of $ is

(ba — akb)*?+ aty? = athty?, Per ahe AO dt CLES)
which is equivalent to
b? (4 — ak)*=a* (k*®— 1) y? dev ene sangre OROA)

or b (a—ak)=+ar/k—1ly;

342 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 8,

apparently, therefore, the envelope is a pair of right lines passing through
the fixed point (ak, 0), and real only if k is greater than unity, that is,
if the point S is outside the ellipse. But, looking to the geometry of the
figure, it is clear that the envelope must be the given point 8S, so that
the analytical solution furnishes, apparently, a whole line for the
envelope, while geometrically only one definite point on that line satisfies
the demand of the problem; the discrepancy, however, is only apparent,
viz., the equation (167) may be written
b® (a — ak)? +a? (4/1 — k)* y2=0,
so that this must be equivalent to
) x= ak
y=0 } ;
which is, of course, the point in question. Such instances of degenerate
envelopes are by no means rare.

§. 29. Properties of Confocals.
I. Given a system of confocal ellipses, to find the locus of points
where the tangents cut off a constant area from the axes.
Any conic of the system is
ue y? :
Ce ae 1, eee cvescecce (168)

where, for the moment,
A? = a?+)2, B?= b?+ 2, c? = A? — Be = a? — D?.
Take a point (€, 7) on this ellipse where the eccentric angle is $; the

tangent is
x °° a4 pn m= 1,
and the intercepts made on the axes are

A B
cos ?’ sin ?’
so that, if h® be double the constant area in question, we have

AB
sin ? cos eoevee cence (169)
Hence we get the system

&2 = A cos? $= (a? +A?) cos? $, lide oe ae

1° = B* sin? > = (b?+A*) sin? , ova eee lee
and from (169)
(a* + d*) (b? + d2) = h* sin? $ cos? 9. bere laa es

The elimination of A, ¢ from these three equations will lead us to the
equation of the locus. For this purpose, observe that from (170) and
(171),

£2 y2 = (a+ A?) (b? + A*) sin® p cos* ? = h* sin* > cos* ,

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 343

so that
En =h? sin? > cos? >. devine ved de fe)
Again, from (170) and (171),
= eS giles, ee
ae ante ete
, ‘ c® én
or & gin? p — y? cos? $= c* sin? > cos? $= =a
(]
from (173).

This may be written

# sin? 9 — a? (1—sint 9) = 5 &,

whence
2 2
cannery Wer Oh hi
mesa otpage co OM)
2 2
paecees 0 eee dui)

Bie hata
Substituting for sin ? and cos ¢ from (174) and (175) in (173), and
simplifying, we have
(PE + W2q) (MRE — cq) = 18 (E+ a?)
which is the equation of the locus in question. Hence, we have the
theorem that the locus of points on a system of confocal ellipses where
the tangents cut off a constant area from the axes is the bicircular
quartic through the origin
(cP + h?y) (hea — cy) = h? (ar +y?)*, — seeseeseesee (176)

where c is half the distance between the foci, and h? double the given
constant area.

It is not difficult to see that this quartic-locus is the inverse of a
central conic, for, substituting for # and y

ks key
apy? OM Beye
respectively, we find that the bicircular quartic is the inverse of the conic
(ca + h@y) (h?x — cty) = h? k4, rapes Mak ble 8

where & is the radius of inversion; it is easy to see that this conic is an
equilateral hyperbola concentric with the confocal ellipses, and, if 6 be
the inclination of its transverse axis to the line joining the foci of the
confocal family, we have

he
tan 26=1 (; —_ a)

which furnishes for tan 6 the two values
h?—c® c#+h2
h? +62? (& — he

344. A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 8,

II. To investigate the locus of points on a system of confocal
ellipses, where the eccentric angle has a constant value.
Let any one of the confocal system be

2 a
=1

x
at R
where A? = a?+A*, B’=b?+2’; then, if > be the eccentric angle at any
point (€, 7), we have
. € = A® cos’ ? = (a?+A?) cos? 9,
7’ = B’ sin? ¢= (b? +A?) sin? ¢,
so that the locus in question is the hyperbola
2 2
a ¥ a o a — B=, ssesseeseese (178)
and this is evidently a member of the confocal family ; hence it follows
that, given a system of confocal ellipses, the locus of points where the
eccentric angle has a constant value is one of the confocal hyperbolas
which intersect the system orthogonally ; in other words, given a confocal
system of ellipses and hyperbolas, each hyperbola intersects the ellipses
at points where the eccentric angle has a constant value, and, by varia-
tion of this constant value, we get all the hyperbolas of the system, and |
from a known theorem, the envelope of all these hyperbolas is an
imaginary quadrilateral.
Similarly, if we have the hyperbola
P) ee
a ae
which is one of a confocal system, and $ the eccentric angle at any point
(€, 1), we have

1,

&% = (a’+A*) sec? ¢,

n°? = (b? +2’) tan? 9,
so that, if the eccentric angle has a constant value, the locus is

2 2
ago page wee Fisamturere ew
and the envelope of this, for different values of the eccentric angle, is
the parallelogram formed by the four lines
(e242 — a2) = 4e?y?, ii aveskow BOP
viz., the four lines are
—e+ty+xe2=0, c—ytu=0, cty—x%=0, cty+e=0.
§§. 30—31. DLheorems on the Parabola,
§. 30. A Dynamical Problem.—Take the parabola
y? = 4ax,

which, when the origin is removed to a point on the principal axis at a

distance na from the vertex, becomes
y = 4a (a@+na). ‘itsssiener (LOND

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 345

Imagine a particle to describe the parabola under the action of a force
directed to the new origin as centre; and suppose it to be started from
the apse with the velocity in a circle at the same distance. Then

2y ot — da =,
and (2) +y TY 2 =
But x ay = ,
so that oF ay _
whence (x+2na) ot —h.
Therefore oe —P v — 2a. P. =,

where P is the central force.
This may be written

h? P P
mn A, Bic ne
(a+2na)?~ 7 (y*? — 2ax) = = 2a (x+2na),
which gives
h? ,
—5.7,.-o.0\3" eeaseecvseaes 182
- 2a (a+2nqa)? (182)
But a +y? nel 2

y? =4a (x+na).
Eliminating y, this gives a quadratic for x, whence we derive
aT
x+2na=2a (n—1)+ r+ 4a? (1 —n)} -
Substituting in (182), we get
“La r
on a Se
{ a (n=1) 4/1 +4a* (l—7n) ;
which gives the law of force in terms of the radius vector. For an
interesting discussion of a kinetic difficulty in connection with this
dynamical problem, see a note by Dr. Besant in the Quarterly Journal of
Mathematics, t. XI, 38.

§. 31. Geometrical Applications.——Thus far we have solved a
purely dynamical question; we now proceed to obtain some interesting
geometrical properties of the parabola. We have

pa=P=-55(5)
pdr RB ar \pry

Siheee GAG

4

346 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No 3,
Hence, from (183), we get

a neti
a at i (n= 1+ /[ 194 4a An) | t*

If, therefore, we take p for all values of r from+oo to— 0, we have

on rdr
(a) | Taeome raw)

To evaluate this definite integral, let us first take the indefinite form.
Put
v* = 4a* (1 — n) tan? ¢,
r=24 re 1l—n tan ,
dr =2a /1—n sec? > d,
r+ 4a* (1—n) = 4a? (1—n) sec? 9.
If, therefore, I be the indefinite integral, we have

I- 4a* (1—n) tan > sec* ¢ dp
rs (n—1) +20 4/T=n sec $ |

= _ 4a* (1—n) sin ¢ dp

© a ees ae cos # }
~ 4a* (l1—n) sin > db

4 (1—n)* {1—4/T=n cos # |"
Sas) 1 d (cos ?)

Y tae f Tame"

1 1

Now, sec? $=1+ tan? ¢=1+4 day from (185).

pee ve (185)

Therefore
4a* (1—n)

ao —
ie Pe at dae (l—n)’

and, when r= na, this gives
4, (1 eos n) |

and, when + = 00 :

cos *#¢=0,
These give the limits of the transformed integral; if, therefore, Q be the

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 347

value of the definite integral, we have

I 2
a3 (-5)=20 ~~ and?

1 2
3 _) oh ee eee (187)

Hence we have the theorem that, if we take any point on the axis of a
parabola whose distance from the vertex is na, the sum of the squares of
the reciprocals of all the perpendiculars dropped from this point on

whence, finally,

It is obvious that

successive tangents to the parabola is equal to —.
NA

these perpendiculars are the radii-vectores of a pedal of the parabola ;
hence, the following theorems may be enunciated.
Theorem I.—A is the vertex and 8, the focus of a parabola whose

latus-rectum is 4a; points So, Ss, ...... Sg are taken on the principal
axis such that AS, =S, 8,=...=a;. the sum of the squares of the
reciprocals of the radii-vectores of the pedal of the parabola with regard
to Sn is aya (188)

Theorem II.—The sum of the squares of the reciprocals of the
radii-vectores of all the pedals of the parabola with regard to §,, Sg... Sop is

a ee 1 (z\'
=— (a+ sat we) =5 (=) reese cles)

Theorem III.—If we take only the odd pedals, the sum of the
squares of the reciprocals of all the radii-vectores is

Oy ae 1 (z\?
=i (atgte~)=a(%) eed sO

Theorem IV.—If we take only the even pedals, the sum of the
squares of the reciprocals of all the radii-vectores is

261-1 1 (z\*
=" (= +t vu) =5 (=) ered)

§. 32. A Geometrical Locus.

§. 32. General Theorem on Conics.—If from any point P two
tangents be drawn to the conic

ie tieasate cen CORT

to investigate the locus of the middle point of the chord of contact when

348 A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. [No. 3,

P is constrained to move on any curve

iis, 4) = 0. eit eee
Let 6, be the eccentric angles at the points of contact of the tangents ;
then the tangents are

© cos 6: ein §=1,
a b

= cos 644 sing =1,
a b

aud, if X, Y be the coordinates of P, we have
6+

If, further, € 7 be the coordinates of the middle point of the chord of
contact the locus of which is sought, we have

f=5 (cos 6+cos ¢) Site Ce

hee:
n=5 (sit Oe IO) ein say inv chs (195)

The locus is obtained by eliminating 6, between these and

6+ . O+¢
sin Toe

COs aoe
FE Os Se =
_o-# b __o-$ 0. Tey Ges)
2 2
From (194) and (195), we have
é = COS cos ee
a 2 2
east ood saat
b 2 2
whence, squaring and adding,
=> &
cos* pate ee (197)
Also, by division, from (194) and (195),
ie ee
2 bE
whence
sin ae as ee ve NTS Ee Ties (29S), GSD)

2 J/ PE + aty® 2 A/ bee arn?

|
|

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 349

Substituting from (197), (198), and (199) in (196), the equation of the
locus sought is found to be
arbre a*b2n
F (aoa wars) = hs” i destawiwweye CROC)
We have, therefore, the
Theorem.—If from any point P, tangents are drawn to the conic

=-—+ a =.0,
a

and P is constrained to move on any curve
F (a, y) = 0,
the locus of the middle point of the polar chord of P with regard to S is

= y
cae 1+8
Similarly, if we consider the parabola
y* == Aan,
any two points on the curve are
(a tan? 6, 2a tan 6), (a tan* ¢, 2a tan ?),
so that the coordinates of the point of intersection of the tangents are
given by
X=a tan Otan >
Y=a (tan 6+tan ),
and the middle point of the polar chord is given by

f=5 (tan? 6+ tan? ?),
n= a (tan 0+tan ?).

These give

a 2s

j= — +2 tan @ tan ®,

a a
whence a

re
_ 2a Z me
2a

Hence, substituting in F (a, y) =0, we have the
Theorem.—If from any point P tangents are drawn to the parabola
y* = Aax,
and P is constrained to move on the curve
F (a, y) =9,
the locus of the middle point of the polar chord of P with regard to the

parabola is
aa
r (! — y)= 0.

We will here simply add that the result obtained above in equation
(200) is an immediate consequence of a new method which we propose
to call the Method of Elliptic Inversion.

26th October, 1887.

1887.] A. Mukhopadhyay—Memoir on Plane Analytic Geometry. 349

Substituting from (197), (198), and (199) in (196), the equation of the
locus sought is found to be
arheé aby
F (sap oe Re Oh) Sh gaeinesoo)
We have, therefore, the
Theorem.—If from any hours P, peat are drawn to the conic

2
sS= “at ag yf —l1=0,
a
and P is constrained to move on any curve

F (@, y) =0,
the locus of the middle point of the polar chord of P with regard to 8S is

x Y
F { ——, —— }=
es =)

Similarly, if we consider the parabola
y® Es Aan,
any two points on the curve are
(a tan® 6, 2a tan 8), (a tan? >, 2a tan $), .

so that the coordinates of the point of intersection of the tangents are
given by

X=a tan 6 tan >

Y=a (tan 6+tan 9),
and the middle point of the polar chord is given by

é=5 (tan* 0+ tan? ?),
n= a (tan 6+ tan 9),

These give
“pig Oe
aa —-+2 tan 6 tan ¢,
whence
2 <a .
x7 2a ZI ¥2%
2a

Hence, substituting in F (a, y) =0, we have the
Theorem.—If from any point P tangents are drawn to the parabola
y* = Aas,
and P is constrained to move on the curve
F («, y) =0,
the locus of the middle point of the polar chord of P with regard to the

parabola is
y2 — 2ax
a i)

We will here simply add that the result obtained above in equation
(200) is an immediate consequence of a new method which we propose
to call the Method of Elliptic Inversion.

26th October, 1887.
45

350 A. Barclay—List of the Urediner occurring [No. 3,

XXI.—A Descriptive List of the Uredinex occurring in the Neighbourhood

of Simla (Western Himalayas) —By A. Barcuay, M. B., Bengal
Medical Service.

[Received 7th October ;—Read November 2nd, 1887.]
(With Plates XII.—XvV.).

The neighbourhood of Simla is particularly rich in species of
Uredines ; and, as I have paid much attention to them during the last
four years, it has been suggested to me that a descriptive list of them
might usefully be recorded for the use of future workers in this very
interesting field of cryptogamic botany. I have acted on the sugges-
tion after much hesitation, for, with the very limited leisure at my dis-
posal in the course of an active official life, I cannot hope to make the
list a complete one, nor, indeed, can the descriptions of many of those I
notice be as complete as might be desired. N evertheless, so far as they
go, my statements may, I hope, be accepted as correct in every respect,
for every one of them has been made after careful and repeated observa-
tion. I may, therefore, be permitted to hope that the list may serve
some useful purpose, more especially as no such attempt has ever before
been made in India, so far as I am aware.

With regard to the order in which such a list should be given, I
have determined, after some hesitation, to bind myself by no very strict
rule, but, in general, to enumerate, first, all those Species which bear
aecidial fructification and, then, to go on to those which are at present
known to me only in the teleutosporic stages. With reference to the
eecidium-bearing species, I may note that I have described them ge-
nerally as they occur in seasonal sequence, beginning with those which
appear earlest in spring, and ending with those which disappear last
towards autumn. The only exception I have made in following out this
plan is to withdraw from the general list all those forms which occur
on the Coniferw, as I thought it better to enumerate the characters of
these few well defined species together, rather than to disperse them
among the others, which occur_on hosts having no special relationship
with one another.

In the present contribution, I will confine myself to the ecidial
forms with which I am acquainted on hosts other than the Conifere ;
but, before proceeding to a description of them, I may draw the atten-
tion of the reader to one or two points of special interest concerning
them.

A. BARCLAY, Journ Asiat.Soc.Bengal 1887, Vol.LVI.Pt.Il.

A.Barclay, del. ; West, Newman. &C? chr.imp.
Parker & Coward, lith.

PLAUL

A BARCLAY, Journ.Asiat.Soc. Bengal, 1837. Vol CYL. Poedt.

D

q

i\)

ji

S

——— \
Ki \
a i}
<A

Tai
SAU

AX
SSK

We ey:

SS

Zi

IN

Bs
Lill

Wid NG
AS

ae
A Barclay, del. West, Newman &O° chr.inip.
Parker & Coward,hith.

PL.XIV.

Se

Ses
eas

RSENS

A ._BARGLAY, Journ. AsiatSoc.Bengal 1887, Vol.LVI.Pt.1L.
e

West Newman kC? chr.imp. ~

Parker & Coward lith

A. Barclay, del

Pl

West Novaman&C° chr. imp.

I

IVE ES:

eee

O.

887.V

=

ae ab

Bardlay, del

A.BAROLAY, Journ Asiat.Soc. Beng

Parker & Coward, lith.

A
fe

, 7 a i — _ .
a — of —. 4 al — wT. , —— oe " iv — _ =~ a eS ee eee —_— .- — = + ee

1887. ] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 351

In the first place, it will be observed that I have related several of
them with a mark of interrogation to species already described as
- occurring in Europe. Until the complete life-histories of these are
known, it is impossible to state definitely whether they are correctly so
related or not. They are probably all varieties of, or identical with,
the European forms with which I have associated them. In only one
case (that of cidiwm Urtice, Schum.) has the life-history of the
Indian variety been fully traced.

Five of the species described are I believe quite new, in only one of
which (Acidium Strobilanthis) have I been able to trace the whole life-
history. That on the wild strawberry (Fragaria vesca) appears to be a
complete autoecious Uredine, but I have unfortunately not been able to
prove this by actual experiment. And, in this connection, I would
again draw attention to the inconvenience caused by the system of
nomenclature now adopted of naming species of Uredines after their
teleutosporic forms, an inconvenience which it appears to me will
increase as our knowledge of this family is extended, for it sometimes
happens that a host bearing an ecidium bears also a teleutospore,
which, however, has no relationship whatever with the ecidium. For
example, according to this principle, I have been obliged to name the
Afcidium which occurs on Valeriana Wallichi Uromyces Valeriane,
although I have abundant evidence that the teleutospores have no
genetic relationship whatever with the Aicidium. In all probability,
future investigation will show that the Uromyces. borne on this host is
related to some other A‘cidium on an entirely different host, whilst
the teleutospores borne on some other host are related to the Aicidium
on the Valeriana in question. In the cases of Strolilanthes Dalhou-
sianus and Urtica parviflora, which bear Aicidia whose complete life-
histories are known, teleutospores (puccinia) are also borne, which,
however, have no relationship with the Alcidia.* The Acidium
on Jasminum revolutum presents no unusual features, but those on
Huphorbia cognata and Andrachne cordifolia display aberrant features
of great interest. Indeed, these two Atcidia differ so markedly from all
others that I have regarded them, provisionally, and until I shall have
had further opportunities of working out their complete life-histories,
as belonging to a new genus, which I propose calling Monosporidium.

With these introductory remarks I shall pass on to a description of
the several species.

* See “ Scientific Memoirs by Medical Officers of the Army of India,” Part IT,
Calcutta, 1887.

352 A. Barclay—List of the Uredinee occurring [No. 3,.

Y.—AICIDIAL FORMS.
1.—ANcIpIuM SANICULA, sp. nov.
Sanicula (Europza, L. P)

The earliest Aicidium which I have observed in Simla is that
which occurs on Sanicula Huropea. Towards the latter end of March,
some of the earlest leaves of this plant which are being unfolded in
spring may be found attacked by this parasite. It is by no means an
uncommon fungus. The invaded areas of the leaf are usually small,
and generally convex below, where the aecidial cups are usually borne,
though a few may open also on the upper surface of the leaf. The
eecidia discharge their spores through a porous like opening at their
summits, 2. e., the peridium does not open widely as in most cases with the
fragments of the torn tissue forming a stellate opening. The petioles
are also frequently attacked and at such places they are thickened and
often bent. A single leaf blade may present from one to three patches
of invasion, these patches being slightly paled in colour as seen from
the upper surface.

Acidiospores—The moistened ecidiospores measure on an average
25°4 x 19°4 uw, the measurements exhibiting extremes of 26 mw in length
and 20 win breadth. The epispore is finely punctated and contains
from two to three germ pores. The endospore is very fine and not
readily distinguishable from the epispore (Fig. 1, Pl. XII.). The spores,
when placed in water under suitable circumstances, readily germinate,
throwing out long curved tubes measuring 6 to 7 «in diameter. Only
one germinal tube is produced by each spore. ‘The peridial cells mea-
sure about 30 x 22 pw (Fig. 2, Pl. XII.).

Remarks.—This ecidium is, I believe, a new species ; but may be com-
pared with that which I have described below on Pimpinella diversifolia.

2.—Uromyces VALERIANZ, Schum P
Valeriana Wallichii, D. C.

Next to the foregoing A‘cidium one on this plant is among the
earliest of these parasites to be found in spring. Towards the end of
March, some plants may be found in initial stages of attack; but it is
towards the latter part of April that it is seen in its fullest develop-
ment. This Alcidium is one of the most common and abundant in
Simla, and individual plants are often so extensively affected in blade
and petiole as to be completely destroyed. The affection is usually
confined to the blades and petioles of the radical leaves, but may
also be found on the upper leaves of the flowering stalks and even,
though rarely, on the bracts of the flower heads. When a leaf is ex-
tensively affected, it is considerably distorted, and the parts actually

ee a a

1887. | in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 353

invaded by the mycelium are considerably thickened. At an early
stage of the affection, patches of pale yellow discoloration may be ob-
served on the leaf blades, which are usually convex above. On this
upper convex surface, a few spermogonia may be seen, whilst the eci-
dial fructification usually emerges from the lower or concave side. The
ecidia consist of short tubular peridia filled with reddish yellow
spores bursting at their summits in a stellate way.

The spermoginia are remarkably few and their mouths are sur-
mounted by a tuft of paraphyses.

The ecidial affection above described is met with abundantly
throughout the time the plants are in flower, but, as soon as the seeds
are being matured, towards the middle or end of May, this affection
disappears entirely. After an interval of some weeks from the time
the ecidial parasite has entirely disappeared, these plants are seen to be
attacked by a teleutospore-bearing mycelium also mainly on the radical
leaves, though occasionally also on others. This affection always ap-
pears on leaves which bear no trace of formerly having borne the
zecidial parasite. The spores are extruded from dark brown pustules
of minute size, which usually occur in great numbers on each affected
leaf. Hach pustule is surrounded by a zone of yellow discoloration.
At first, these spores are extruded only from the upper surface of the
leaf, but later also from the lower surface, exactly opposite the site of
the upper spore bed and therefore from the same mycelium. The
lower pustule is usually smaller than the upper. At first, when a spore
pustule exists only in the upper surface of the leaf, the affected area
bulges upwards (convex upwards) with a corresponding concavity
below; but this disappears when the lower surface is also involved in
spore extrusion.

Afcidiospores—These are abstricted serially from basidia arranged
on a flat hymenium. They are pale orange-yellow round or oval bodies
measuring, when dry, 17 x 15 y and, after lying some time in water,
22 x 20m (Fig. 12, Pl. XII.). The epispore is smooth and unmarked.
They do not germinate readily in water (Fig. 10, Pl. XIII.). The peridium
consists of a layer of single cells.

Teleutospores.—These are brown single-celled bodies—Uromyces—
borne singly on stalks (Fig. 13, Pl. XII.). They are somewhat pear-shaped,
measuring when moist 20 x 22 pw, and the stalks bearing them are
about twice the length of the long diameter of the spore. The spores
are readily detached from their beds without any portion of the stalk
adhering to them. The epispore is firm and resistant and a little
thickened towards the base, where it joins the stalk. It is sparsely
beset externally with tubercles. A few fine paraphyses usually occur

354 A. Barclay—List of the Uredinese occurring [No. 3,

among the spores. Most spores exhibit a nuclear space or body in the
centre. Although I placed them in several nutritive solutions and in
water, I never observed them germinating.

Remarks.—I have made very numerous experiments with the view
of tracing the life-history of this very common Aicidium, but without
success. JI am quite convinced that the teleutospore-bearing fungus
has no connection whatever with that bearing the ecidium, not only
because many carefully conducted experiments failed to establish any
such connection, but also because a considerable interval elapses, as I
have already noted, between the complete disappearance of the Aici-
dium and the appearance of the teleutospores. I have also attempted
to reproduce the Acidium by inoculating leaves with almost every
teleutospore with which I am acquainted, and most of which I hope to
describe later in this series.

This fungus may be identical with Uromyces Valeriane, Schum, in
which the ecidiospores are stated to measure 17 x 24 mw and the
Uromyces spores, 20 to 26 by 15 to19. The latter fungus, however, also
possesses uredospores, which are entirely absent in the Himalayan
species.

3.—Puccinia Viota, Schum P
Viola serpens, Wall.

An Aicidium of a very destructive kind is extremely common on
Viola serpens in spring (April) and occurs simultaneously with that
described on Valeriana. As a rule, large areas of the leaves become
affected and very frequently the petiole also is extensively involved.
Sometimes there is scarcely a portion of the whole leaf, blade and stalk,
which is not involved, and, in such cases, the whole leaf speedily suc-
cumbs to the parasite. In such extreme cases, the blade of the leaf is
crumpled up almost beyond recognition, while the affected stalk is bent
in various directions and considerably hypertrophied. Limited patches
on the leaf blade are generally round and very deeply bulged down-
wards, 7. e., with a concavity upwards. The ecidia are borne most
usually on the under surface of the leaf, but a few burst forth also
from above. But little discoloration is caused by the mycelium on the
upper surface of the leaf, which is only slightly paled.

Later in the season, about the beginning of June, when the eci-
dial fungus has disappeared, the new leaves of the violet are often at-
tacked by another puccinia-bearing parasite. Many leaves may now be
found, in the same localities where formerly the ecidial parasite was
common, studded with numerous dark brown or black pustules of the
size of a small pin’s head, mostly on the under surface. These pustules
are irregularly scattered over the leaf blade, bursting through the epi-

1887. ] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 355

dermis (after having raised it considerably) by a clean rent. Opposite
the pustules, on the upper surface of the leaf, small greenish yellow
spots may be seen. Although the greater number of pustules emerge
from the lower surface, yet many also burst forth from the upper sur-
face, especially when the leaf is very largely attacked (Figs. 4 & 5,
Pua.) |

It has been stated above that these puccinia-pustules are usually
borne on newly unfolded leaves, but, in one or two instances, I found the
dried up remains of ecidial patches on the petioles of leaves which
bore these teleutospores. This observation naturally led me to think
that the two forms were genetically related, and I accordingly made
numerous attempts to establish the relationship upon experimental
grounds, but always without success. I am therefore inclined now to
regard the two parasites as entirely distinct, and I am supported in this
view here, as in the case of Valeriana above, by the fact that, as a rule, a
distinct interval of about a month or more elapses between the complete
disappearance of the ecidium and the appearance of the teleutospores ;
and it is quite exceptional to find any trace of old ecidia on plants
bearing the puccinia-producing mycelium. I may here note that I have
made numerous attempts during the last two years to connect the
Afcidium on the violet with several teleutospores occurring on various
plants in Simla, but, as in the case of the even more common Valeriana
Ajcidium, always without success.

Aicidiospores.—When well moistened in water, the spores measure
21 x 18 p, but, when dry or immediately after immersion in water, they
measure on an average 19 x 14-8. They readily germinate in water,
throwing out a single more or less sinuate tube measuring about 6 y» in
diameter (Fig. 6, Pl. XII.). This germ-tube has a tendency to throw
out short lateral branches. The orange-red contents of the spore
wander into the furthest end of the tube. The spores appear to have
3 to 4 germinal pores, but only one germ-tube is formed by each.

Teleutospores—These are dark brown puccinia easily detached
from their beds without any portion of the stalk remaining adherent
(Fig. 7, Pl. XII.). When dry, these spores measure as follows :—whole
length, 30,; length of upper cell, 14; length of lower cell, 164;
breadth at septum, 18 w. The spores are somewhat thickened ‘at their
free ends, sometimes to the extent of 4. Among these puccinia-spores,
a few single-celled spores were often found which may have been
either uredospores or a second form of teleutospore. They are brown
bodies with thick resistant walls covered externally with prominent
tubercles. They measure, when dry, 20 x 18 won an average: I never
observed their germination. Some freshly collected spores were

356 A. Barclay—Jist of the Uredines: occurring [No. 3,

placed in water in a growing cell on the 20th March, and they germi-
nated freely, although some spores preserved in botanical drying paper
since the previous autumn had lost vitality (Figs. 7 & 8, Pl. XII.). The
promycelium from the upper cell emerges from the apex, whilst that
from the lower cell emerges from a point close to the septum. The
promycelium produces four sporidia from four cells into which the
end of the promycelium is divided, the most distant one being produced
upon a sterigma arising from the very apex of the germ-tube
(Figs. 7,8, 9, Pl. XII.). The sporidia are oval, measuring from 6 x 4 mw
to7 x 5p (Fig. 10, Pl. XII).

ftemarks.—It is possible that this fungus is identical with, or, more
probably, a variety of, Puccinia Viole, Schum., although the measure-
ments of the latter given by Winter* do not agree with mine very
nearly. Winter’s measurements are as follows :—ecidiospores 16 to
24 «by 10 tol8 yp (average 20 x 14) against my measurement of
21 x 18; uredospores.19 to 26 w in diameter against my measurement
of 20 x 18»; teleutospores 20 to 35 w by 15 to 20 w (average 27:5 x
175) against my measurements of 30 x 18 y. The characters of the
teleutospores as given by Winter agree with those of mine.

4.—Puoccrnta PiMprneLLa, Strauss.
Pimpinella diversifolia, D. C.

The next ecidium which attracts attention 1s not so common as
those above described, and occurs on Pimpinella diversifolia. This
parasite may be found in certain localities towards the end of April or
the beginning of May, and is very soon after that missed again. Indeed,
towards the end of May, it has already become very scarce. The fungus
usually attacks the first leaves that are unfolded of this plant, these
being simple leaves of the shape of the common violet leaf. The
compound leaves later unfolded were very rarely found attacked. The
invaded areas of leaves are discoloured, becoming pale yellowish green,
and the ecidia are borne almost wholly on the under surface, though a
few occasionally break through the upper surface.. The ecidial fruit
consists of tubular peridia measuring about 2 to 2°25 m.m. in length
which burst at their summits in a stellate manner. In addition to the
leaf blade, the petiole is not unfrequently attacked, and here the peri-
dial tubes are somewhat longer than they are on the leaf blade.
Several distinct patches of ecidia sometimes occur on a single petiole,
but in such cases the blade is also largely affected. At these places
on the petiole the tissues are somewhat hypertrophied. The leaf blade
also where invaded is thickened, the depth of the laminal tissues at

* Die Pilze Deutschlands, &c. Von Dr. George Winter.

1887.} in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 357

such places being about 0:44] m.m., whilst the normal thickness is about
0:239 m.m.

A little later, towards the end of May, when the ewcidial parasite is
becoming rare, some of the compound leaves (never the. simple ones)
may be found attacked by.a separate mycelium bearing uredospores.
This uredospore-bearing mycelium is never found on the same leaf
bearing ecidiospores, and itis therefore quite probable that the two
mycelia are in no wise genetically related to one another, The uredo-
pustules are minute, circular, and saffron-coloured, mostly on the upper
surface of the leaf, though by no means infrequently also on the lower.
Sometimes the upper surface of a leaf may be seen to be densely covered
with these uredo-pustules.

Again in autumn, about the end of September and October, the
same plant may be seen largely affected by a puccinia-bearing fungus,
a distinct interval having elapsed since the disappearance of all trace
of the uredo-bearing fungus. These puccinia-pustules are minute and
round, like the uredo-pustules, but black, and occur both on the upper and
‘lower surfaces of the leaves, sometimes in great profusion. The stem
is also often affected; the pustules here are linear, their long axes
corresponding with the long axis of the stem.

The «cidiospores are reddish yellow with very thin walls, the
epispore and endospore not being distinguishable from one another :
they are round, oval, or somewhat fusiform (Fig. 14, Pl. XII.). The round
spores measure 20 to 21 win diam., the oval about 32 x 20 yw, and the
fusiform about 38 x 14 pw, shortly after being wetted with water.

The spermogonia are likewise situated on the under surface of the
leaf: they measure about 0163 m.m. in depth and 0.189 mm. in
breadth. Their mouths are beset with paraphyses projecting about
0.063 m.m. The spermatia are round or oval and measure 4 x 3 pm.

The peridium consists of elongated cells, very unlike those of the
ecidium on Sanicula described above, measuring about 60 x 20 p, and
easily detached from one another by teasing (Fig. 15, Pl. XII.).

Uredospores—These are reddish yellow round or oval bodies with
coarse tubercles on the surface of the epispore. On an average, the
moistened spores measure 22 x 183 pw. They germinate readily in
water. (Fig. 3, Pl. XII.). .

Teleutospores.—These are brown two-celled bodies (puccinia) readi-
ly detached from their beds with avery small portion of the stalk re-
maining adherent to them. In each cell, a clear nuclear body or space
may be seen. The epispore is marked externally by fine ridges. They
are not thickened at their free ends. As with the uredospores, I never
succeeded in getting them to germinate in water. Their measurements

46

358 A. Barclay—Tist of the Uredinese occurring [No. 3,

are as follows :—whole length of spore 30m; length of lower cell 13 p
and of upper cell 17; breadth at septum 23 w; extreme breadth of
upper cell 24 w and of lower cell 22 yu.

Remarks.—At first it seemed extremely probable that all the three
forms above described were phases of one fungus, and I attempted fre-
quently to establish a relationship between them by experiment, but
always without success. This alone, however, does not justify me in
definitely denying a relationship between them, since it is quite possi-
ble that some condition of my experiments militated against the mani-
festation of a relationship. However, the experiments were carefully
conducted and often repeated. I also attempted to reproduce the ecidium
by laying the teleutospores found on several grasses in the neighbour-
hood on the young leaves; but in these attempts also I failed.

This parasite is probably identical with Puccinia Pimpinelle,
Strauss, in which the ecidiospores are said to measure 18 to 35 pw long
and 16 to 21 » broad (average 26°5 x 18°5 »), the uredospores, 23—32 pw
long and 19 to 24 mw broad (average 2775 x 21°5), and the teleuto-
spores, 26 to 35 pw long and 17 to 26m broad (average, 30°5 x 21°5).
The only feature in which this fungus differs from that which I have
described is in the characters and size of the uredospores. In Strauss’s
plant the uredospores are said to be pale brown, while in mine they are
reddish yellow and smaller.

5.—PvUcCcINIA CORONATA, Corda P
Rhamnus dahtricus, Pall.

The Aicidium which occurs on this plant is not very common, al-
though occasionally an attacked tree or bush is very extensively affect-
ed. The fully ripe ecidium may be found as early as the latter part
of May, but it is more usually met with about the middle of July. The
fungus attacks leaves, young stem (igs. 1, 2,3, Pl. XIII.), and drupes,
the last sometimes very extensively indeed. When the leaf is attacked,
the invaded areas are usually small, and generally only one patch occurs
on each leaf. These patches are dark reddish brown above, surrounded
by a halo of pale yellow (Fig. 2, Pl. XIII.), and the orange-yellow ecidia
are borne on the lower or concave surface of the leaf, opposite the dark
central part seen above (Fig. 1, Pl. XIII). The red colour of the
patch is due especially to discoloration in the palisade cells, and the
abnormal thickness to hypertrophy of the spongy tissue, the palisade
cells retaining their normal dimensions and characters. The tissues —
in the areas invaded are very extensively permeated by hyphex, and
many cells are destroyed. While the thickness of the leaf blade
is normally 0°126 m.m.,it is about 0440 m.m. in patches bearing ripe

1887. ] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 359

eecidia. A patch of ordinary size measured 1 c.m. in total diameter,
the central reddish brown part measuring 6 m.m. in diameter. The
patches are sometimes considerably larger, however, and more irregular
in shape. The ecidia are tubular structures, very deeply sunk into the
laminal tissue, measuring about 1:75 m.m. in length, and therefore re-
sembling in some degree the Alcidium on Pyrus variolosa described
below. With very few exceptions, the ecidia burst from the lower
surface of the leaf. These patches on the leaves are often placed near
the margin of the leaf, and are usually between and not over the princi-
pal veins; but when a vein is involved it is considerably thickened.
When the stem is attacked, which occurs but rarely, it is considerably
swollen. The drupes when attacked are often densely covered with
zecidial tubes, set at right angles, all over them.

The spermogonia are formed on both the upper and lower surfaces
of the patches, and may often be found ripe when the ecidia on the
same patches are also fully developed. They are inserted between the
cells of the single layer of palisade cells when situated on the upper
surface. They have a tuft of paraphyses protruding through their
mouths, and measure about 0:°107 m.m. in depth and breadth.

The ecidiospores are round orange-yellow bodies of very uniform
size measuring 23 » in diameter when recently wetted with water
(Fig. 5, Pl. XIII.). The peridial cells are roughly hexagonal, adhere very
firmly to one another, and measure about 26 x 16 py. The centre of
each cell contains orange-yellow matter like the contents of the zci-
diospores (Fig. 4, Pl. XIIT.).

Remarks.—There can be little doubt that this _Aicidium is caused by
a Puccinia, with all the characters of Puccinia coronata, which occurs
on Brachypodium sylvaticum in Simla, but unfortunately I have not had
sufficient opportunities of verifying this. So far as my insufficient
experiments go, I have always obtained negative results. I am also not
quite sure whether this A’cidium does not also occur on Sageretia
oppositifolia.

6.—PucciniA FRAGARIZ, nov. sp.
Fragaria vesca, Linn.

During May, and just before it flowers, the Wild Strawberry, Fra-
garia vesca, may in some years be seen attacked by an ecidial fungus.
This parasite is, however, a rare one, and I found it on two occasions only
in 1885 at localities distant a few miles from one another, and on each
occasion only a single affected plant was found. Alcidial fructification
was found both on the petiole and on the leaf blade. It is somewhat
curious that the same leaf bore simultaneously uredo and teleutospore
pustules, but all the three forms of spore-pustules were quite distinct

360 A. Barclay—List of the Uredines occurring [No. 3,

from one another, with green normal tissue between them—at least, I
could not trace any mycelial connection between them. The ecidial
fructification consists of groups of e«cidia on the margins of the leaves.
The portions of the leaf blade bearing these quickly wither and dry up
after the ecidia ripen. The ecidia break through both the upper and
lower surfaces of the leaf, but more frequently from the lower. Sper-
mogonia of the usual form are frequently present, especially on the
petiole when this is affected, and they are placed usually close by the
side of the ecidia.

The ecidiospores are pale yellow and very irregular in size and
shape, varying from round to oval, often faceted and irregularly
angular. Their average measurements when moistened are 22 x 15°8 p-
The epispore is finely punctated (Fig. 6, Pl. XIII.). Placed in a decoction
of cow-dung (Brefeld) several in 24 hours threw out short germinal
tubes of an average diameter of 53 yp, but the greater number of
Spores would not germinate.

The wredospores are oval or pear-shaped and pale yellow in colour
(Fig. 7, Pl. XTII.). They are produced in little circular yellow pustules,
which are situated on both surfaces of the leaf. The external surface
of the epispore is beset with prominent tubercles. The moistened
Spores measured on an average 21 x 17. Placed in a decoction of
cow-dung, only two were found to have germinated on the 5th day,
whilst those placed in water did not germinate at all (Fig. 8, Pl. XIII.).
The teleutospores are contained in little black pustules situated close to
the eecidial fructifications. They were produced on both the upper and
lower surfaces of the leaf blade, but more frequently on the lower sur-
face, as in the case of the ecidia. Thespores are dark brown, two-
celled bodies, puccinia, easily detached from their beds, breaking off
with only a small fragment of stalk adhering (Fig. 9, Pl. XIII.). The
average measurements of these spores when moistened were as fol-
lows :—whole length 31°7 »; length of upper cell 15°8 w, and breadth of
same 22°4 »; length of lower cell 15°8, and width of same 2] p. The
stalks bearing these spores are from 2 to 25 times the whole length of
the spore. Amongst these teleutospores a few uredospores occurred of
the characters above given. The teleutosporeS’ were sown in a decoc-
tion of cow-dung, as well as in water, but they did not germinate. On
one occasion, in autumn (November), I found a single leaf of this plant
plentifully covered with teleutospore-pustules. I did not succeed in
getting them to germinate.

From want of sufficient material, I could not experimentally de-
termine a genetic relationship between these different spores, but the
close proximity of the teleutosporic sori to the ewcidial fructification and

1887.] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 361

the occurrence of uredospores in the teleutospore-pustules lend some
support to the view that we have here to do with a complete autoecious
Uredine. However, in the absence of experimental evidence, this remains
@ mere presumption.

Remarks.—I believe that this is an entirely new species, and I have
therefore named it Puccinia Fragarie, in accordance with recognised
precedent in nomenclature, although I should have preferred naming it
Meidium Fragarve.

7.—/NcIDIUM LEUCOSPERMUM, D. C. P
Anemone rivularis, Ham.

This fungus is remarkably localised. During the last three years,
although I have looked for it everywhere about Simla, and the host
may be found everywhere, I have found itin only two localities, one in
Simla (Annandale), the other in a forest (Cheog) about 14 miles distant.
In these localities I have found it in June, July, and the beginning of
August, before the plant flowers. The most striking peculiarity of this
vecidium is that it is white. The whole leaf is often involved, though
generally only well-defined portions are, and frequently the margin of
the leaf (Fig. 11, Pl. XTIL.). The sxcidia break out almost entirely from
the under surface, though a few may occasionally be seen on the upper
surface. When a young immature leaf is attacked, as is often the case,
there is a striking arrest of growth, the leaf never attaining the usual
size shown by sister leaves of the same plant which are not affected—
indeed, a fully affected young leaf is often only one quarter the normal
size. The petioles were never seen to be attacked. Sometimes every
leaf of a plant was found attacked. The attacked areas after the
ripening of the ecidia quickly turn brown and wither.

The ccidiospores, when just wetted, are round or oval and measure
on an average 17-7 x 15:6 uw. The epispore is beset with very minute
tubercles (Fig. 12, Pl. XIIT). I never succeeded in getting them to
germinate in a growing cell. The peridial cells measure about
18 x 16 p.

The spermogonia, formed only on the upper surface of the leaf,
measure about 80 pw in depth and 120 yin breadth. They are very
superficially situated, having their bases sunk only through the epider-
mis and resting on the palisade cells. A tuft of paraphyses projects
through their mouths about 40 to 50 yw in length.

Remarks.—Puccinia Anemones, Pers., occurs on A. nemorosa and
A. ranunculoides, forming powdery masses of teleutospores (without
uredospores) on the under surfaces of the leaves. Hach of these hosts
also bears an Aicidium, that on A. ranunculoides (Alc. punctatum,
Pers.) having violet-brown ecidiospores and that on A. nemorosa

362 A. Barclay—List of the Uredines occurring [No. 3,

(4c. leucospermum, D. C.) having white spores. Although I have
carefully searched for teleutospores on A. rivularis in Simla, I have
never found them, and I am therefore constrained to call this A‘cidium
4c. leucospermum in the meantime. Schrodter, I understand, thinks
the teleutospores on A. nemorosa are related to the Aicidium borne on
the same host, whilst Fuckel relates the Aicidium on A. ranunculoides
with the teleutospores borne on it. The Himalayan Acidium would
appear to throw some doubt on the connection between their teleutos-
pores (Puccinia fusca, Relhan) and the two ecidia, or, at any rate, if
that be indisputable, the Himalayan Acidium must be entirely different,
being most probably a heteroecious Uredine.

8.—Aicipium THALICcTRI FLAVI, D. C. ?
Thalictrum Javanicum, Blume.

The Acidium on this plant, as in the case of that just described
on Anemone, is remarkably localised, although the host is widely
diffused. It is therefore a rare parasite, although, in the localities in
which it is found, it occurs abundantly enough. It is met with during
the rains, in July, while the plant is flowering. Only the leaf blades are
as a rule affected, but occasionally the petiole is also attacked, when it is
considerably hypertrophied and distorted. Fig. 1, Pl. XIV. represents
the petiole attacked in two places: in both cases it will be seen that
the petiole has become considerably elongated and in one case also bent
completely round through 360°. When the parasite attacks the leaf
blades, little reddish yellow spots are formed as seen from above,
measuring ordinarily from a minute point to 4 or 5 m.m. in diameter.
Sometimes, however, the patches are much larger—in one case 1 c. m. in
diameter—and then the leaf is considerably distorted, especially when
a main vein is involved. These larger patches are reddish brown
above. The attacked areas are generally convex above at first, but
often, as the area becomes larger, the converse obtains. The patches
are frequently placed over a prominent vein, which is then, within the
affected area, considerably swollen. The number of patches on a single
leaflet varies from one to twelve or perhaps more. These attacked
areas on the leaf blade are considerably thickened: the normal thick-
ness of these delicate leaves is 0°095, m.m., whilst near a young still im-
mature ecidium it was found to be 0°410 m.m.

Spermogonia are formed abundantly both on the upper and lower
surfaces, and to the naked eye appear as minute pellucid reddish yellow
spots. They are of the usual structure, measuring about 63 to 80 mw in
depth and 75 to 94 » in width. These structures are well sunk into
the leaf tissue. Their mouths are surmounted by a tuft of paraphyses

1887. ] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 363

about 60 to 65 win length. The tissues of the leaf are not so greatly
hypertrophied in the spermogonial stage as they afterwards become,
the depth of the laminal tissues near a ripe spermogonium being 0°189
m.m. in one case.

The peridium (Fig. 13, Pl. XIIT) consists of a single layer of angular
flattened cells measuring from 31°5 or 37°8 » in length by 16 to 31 pin
breadth, or on an average 33°6 x 23°21 pw, shortly after immersion in
water. It opens stellately. The ecidiospores are oval or round (Fig. 14,
Pl. XIII.) reddish yellow bodies with a smooth epispore. The contents
are either homogeneous or granular, more usually the latter. When
just wetted, they measure about 25 » in diameter, and the epispore is
about 1°5 w« to 2 in thickness. They are given off serially as usual
from basidia, but there are intermediate cells between succeeding spores
Grae. FS, Pl. XITT.).

Remarks.—It may not be out of place here to refer to a very fine
Aicidium on Thalictrum minus, Linn., which I found on the 7th May
1884 at Urni, a village on the Hindustan-Thibet road about 126 miles
from Simla towards the “ Interior.” It is quite possible that this is
the same species as that which I have just described as found in Simla,
but it gives rise to very considerably greater distortions and hypertro-
phies in its host. The attacked plants were indeed extremely distorted :
sometimes a whole flower head exhibited a mass of small eecidial tubes
(Fig. 16, Pl. XV.), and individual leaflets when largely invaded exhi-
bited the most curious forms (Fig.17, Pl. XV.). In this form, sometimes,
though not very frequently, the stalk also was affected. The ecidio-
Spores are orange-yellow, and measured, when dry, 19 x 16monan .
average, but, when well moistened, 22 x 18 p.

It is possible that both these forms are identical with, or varieties
of, Meidium Thalictri flavi, D. C., the ecidiospores of which are said
to measure 17 to 28 uw long and 14 to 20 » broad.

9.—icip1um JAsMINI, nov. sp.
Jasminum humile, Linn.

An Aicidium may be found on this plant during July and August,
but is decidedly uncommon. The parasite attacks both leaf and petiole,
but more commonly the leaf blade, giving rise to an irregularly circular
patch, slightly paled above, greenish yellow and brownish red below.
These patches vary in size, but are usually about 8 m.m. to 1 ¢. m. in
diameter. The involved areas of the leaf are slightly thickened. The
eecidia burst out exclusively from the under surface of the leaf, so far as
my observations extend. They contain brilliant orange-yellow spores,
the peridium, a short tubular structure, bursting at the summit in a

364 A. Barclay—List of the Uredinesx occurring [No. 3,

stellate manner. Spermogonia exist only on the upper surface, pre-
ceding the appearance of the ecidia by a very short time—indeed,
while ripe spermogonia exist on the upper surface of a patch, young
unopened ecidia may also be found on the lower surface of the same
patch.

The mycelium, which ramifies between the parenchyma cells, is
colourless. The bases of the spermogonia extend to the inner level of the
palisade cells, and the bases of the ecidia from the other side reach
down to the same point. The spermogonia measure about 126 win
depth and 157 mw in breadth, and have a tuft of paraphyses projecting
from the mouth to about 63 p.

The peridium consists of a single layer of flat cells, more or less
hexagonal and measuring about 26 x 22 pw (Fig. 2, Pl. XIV.). These cells
are thick-walled and contain some yellow oil globules in their
cavities.

The ecidiospores, after lying a few minutes in water, measured
26°2 x 20°2 onan average. Their contents are of a brilliant orange-
yellow colour, and they have a thin epispore without any markings
(Fig. 3, Pl. XIV.). I did not succeed in observing their germination, as
they steadily refused to grow in water. The only other species of Jas-
mine common in Simla is J. officinale, L., but this host nevers bears an
Aicidium, although the closely related J. grandiflorum, L., which grows
at considerably lower elevations, harbours a yery distinct and peculiar
one, which I hope to describe later,

10.—Monosporipium EupHorsiz, gen. et sp. nov.
Euphorbia cognata, Klotzsch.

Towards the end of July and during the first half of August, a very
peculiar Aicidium on this plant presenting some very unusual charac-
ters is not uncommon; and some individual plants are very extensively
attacked. Only the leaf blades are attacked, so far as I have observed,
and a single leaf may exhibit from one to six patches of invasion.
These patches are circular and rosy red above with a broad and irre-
gular halo of paled yellowish tissue around them, the paling increasing
in area as the patch grows older (Fig. 4, Pl. XIV.). On the under sur-
face the patch is quite white and cushion like (convex). When very
young, this cushion on the lower surface of the leaf is uniformly con-
vex, and with a field lens a few pellucid spots may be seen in its centre,
which are spermogonia. Later, as the spermogonia wither, a very dis-
tinct pit or depression is formed in the centre of the cushion, and, while
this central pit enlarges in area, so the circular cushion surrounding it
becomes more and more prominent and whiter. At last the central pit

a a ee ere SS rE, me

1887. ] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 365

is very distinct with now black points, the dried up spermogonia, over
it (Fig. 4, Pl. XIV), and then the epidermis covering the surrounding
cushion tears circularly near the external margin of the cushion and curls
up inwards towards the centre disclosing a bed of white secidiospores (see
left-hand patch in Fig. 4, a. and b.). The spermogonia, which are extremely
superficially placed (see Fig. 6, Pl. XIV.), are thus situated on the under
surface of the leaf only. They are of the usual form and structure with
a tuft of paraphyses protruding through the mouth. The whole organ, ex-
cluding the paraphyses, measures about 50 » in depth and 100 » in breadth.
The ecidiospores, when just wetted with water, measure from 22 x 20 uw
to 19 x 18 p, the average of several measurements being 21 x 19-2 pu.
The spores are colourless and almost round (Fig. 5, a. Pl. XIV.) with an
epispore densely studded with minute tubercles. The distribution of
the myceliwm is peculiar and deserves description. In a section of a
leaf passing through the ecidium, it will be seen that the mycelium
lies mainly in two strands, one under the upper epidermis, between it
and the palisade-cells, the other and larger under the lower epidermis,
between it and the spongy cells (Fig. 6, Pl. XIV.). Moreover, the charac-
ter of the layer of hyphe under the upper epidermis is of a somewhat
looser, more pseudo-parenchymatous character, than that under the
lower epidermis (Fig. 7, Pl. XIV.). It should be noted that these
layers of mycelial filaments are composed solely of hyphe without any
part of the host tissue being involved within them, and thus resemble
strikingly the non-algal parts of lichens. The palisade-cells and spongy

. tissue between the two layers of mycelium are indeed extremely little

affected or altered in any way. While in unaffected normal places the
length of the palisade-cells is about 60 p, and the depth of the spongy
tissue layer about 50 p, these measurements within attacked areas are
about 56 » and 36 pw, thus showing some diminution in size, especially
in the spongy layer. The lower mycelial layer is about 50 w in depth and
the upper layer only 24. The ecidial fructification is, as it were,
inserted within the lower mycelial layer (see Fig. 6, Pl. XIV.), some
strands passing above it and some below it. The peridiwm consists of
a layer of cells about 32 x 30 pin size, forming only a roof to the
extremely large circular ecidium (see Fig. 6, Pl. XIV.). These cells
are very loosely attached to one another, readily becoming isolated. Such
an isolated cell is shown in Fig. 5, b. Pl. XIV; and this figure also shows
that it is beset externally with tubercles. The scidiospores are given
off in rows from a pseudo-parenchymatous hymenium without any well
defined basidia, and have no intermediate cells between successive spores
(ea 6, Pl. XTV.). The eecidiospores, aS Seen in rows in sections of leaves
that have been hardened in absolute alcohol, are cubical (Fig. 6, Pl. XTV.).

47

366 A. Barclay—List of the Uredines occurring [No. 3,

The germination of these scidiospores is very peculiar and un-
like that of any other species with which I am acquainted, with
the single exception of the ecidiospores of the Adcidium on another
Euphorbiaceous plant (Andrachne cordifolia) described further on. I
have not here, unfortunately, access to special memoirs on the develop-
ment of individual Uredines, so that I am unable to state definitely that
the mode of germination of these spores is altogether unknown, but, so
far as I have been able to consult the works of others on this subject, I
have not seen this mode described. The spores germinate fairly readily
in water, throwing out the usual single germ-tube, measuring 5 pw in
diameter (Fig. 7, Pl. XV.). After a time, from 24 to 48 hours, a secon-
dary spore (sporidium?) is formed at the end of the germ-tube, not
upon any sterigma, but simply separated from the tube by a septum
(Fig. 9, Pl. XV.). This secondary spore is round or oval, is double-
contoured, and contains well defined granules in a mass of proto-
plasm (Fig. 9, Pl. XV.). They measure as a rule 14 win diameter. The
day after the formation of this secondary spore, it germinates while
still attached to the primary germ-tube, throwing out a secondary
germ-tube which soon takes on a spiral form (Fig. 8, Pl. XV.). After
this, the whole structure perishes, and I have not been able to deter-
mine its future history.

Remarks.—This Aicidium is evidently not Mc. Huphorbic, Gmelin,
(or Uromyces Pisi, Pers.), as in this species the mycelium is described
as pervading the whole plant or shoot, deforming all the leaves and
preventing the formation of flowers on the shoots attacked. In the
Aicidium above described, only local and well-defined areas of the leaves
are attacked by the mycelium; the leaves are not altered in general
shape, and the shoots bear flowers as usual. For much the same
reasons this Alcidium is not Uvromyces scutellatus, Lév., which also
markedly deforms the leaves. It remains to consider its affinities with
the genus Endophyllum and especially with H. Huphorbice silvatice,
D. C., on Huphorbia amygdaloides, which is said to cause a well defined
alteration in the leaves of the host, rendering them shorter and wider
and somewhat fleshy, and discolouring them to a pale yellowish green
colour. Moreover, this parasite has orange-yellow spores 16 to 26 p
long and 12 to 18 » wide, whilst in the Simla Avcidium the spores are
colourless or pale brownish and measure, as stated above, 22 x 20 p to
19 x 18 p. Moreover, the germination of the ecidiospores of the last
mentioned Alcidium is different from that described in the case of
Endophyllum, which is essentially of the nature of the germination of
teleutospores. There is, however, some resemblance between the two
AXcidia in this respect, for we may consider the secondary spore of the

1887. ] “an the Neighbourhood of Simla. 367

Simla Aicidium to be of the nature of a sporidium, and then the only
difference that exists between them is that, whilst in Endophyllum
four deciduous sporidia are formed on sterigmata, in the Simla parasite
only one non-deciduous one is produced directly at the end of the pro-
mycelium instead of at the end of a sterigma. But these differences
are still great enough, I think, to entitle the species to be regarded as
the type of a very distinct group of the Alcidiomycetes having its
closest affinities with the genus Endophyllum. The only other Aici-
dium with which Iam acquainted that would find a place in this new
group or genus would be that which I have described further on on
Andrachne cordifolia. I would define the characters of this new

(provisional) genus as follows :—
MonosPoRIDIUM, gen. nov.

Spore layer very like, or identically the same as, that of the Aici-
dia of Puccinia and Uromyces. The spores are abstricted in rows, but
behave in germination somewhat like teleutospores in that the germ
tube (promycelium?) produces a secondary non-deciduous spore
(sporidium ?) directly at its extremity without the intervention of a

sterigma.
11.—Puccrnia Graminis, Pers.
Berberis aristata, D.C.

During August, the Barberry may frequently be found attacked by
an ecidium-bearing parasite. Only the leaves are attacked, and, on
them, circular patches are formed, almost crimson-red on the upper
surface with a narrow halo of pale yellow-green (Fig. 3, Pl. XV) and
pale rosy red below with pale yellow ecidia thickly strewn over it.
A single leaf may contain from one to six oreight such patches. A
medium-sized patch measures from 4 to 5 m.m. in diameter (including
the halo of yellow), but sometimes the patches exceed 1 c. m. in
diameter. With a field lens, numerous spermogonia may be seen on the
upper red surface, but also afew in the centre of the lower surface,
around which the ecidia are arranged. ~

The ccidiospores, when just moistened, measure from 22 x 17 u
to 20 x 18 p, or, on an average, 20°8 x 17:8 uw. The contents are bright
orange-yellow, and usually on one side of the spore a colourless space is
left filled apparently with colourless protoplasm (Fig. 8, Pl. XIV) giving
a characteristic appearance to the spores. The peridial cells are gen-
erally square in outline and measure about 20 x 18 yu (see Bigs 9 PE
XIV.). They are thick-walled, thicker on one side (Fig. 10, Pl. XIV.),
and contain orange-yellow matter in their centres.

When invaded by mycelium, the leaf is generally considerably

368 A. Barclay—List of the Uredinee occurring [No. 3,

thickened, and the cells of the host are filled densely with starch grains.
The spermogonia are situated mostly on the upper surface of the leaf,
though some are borne also on the under surface. They are of the
usual structure, well sunk into the tissue of the host, and with a tuft
of paraphyses protruding from their mouths. These organs generally
measure about 0198 to0'151 mm. in depth and 0138 to 0.126
m.m. in width, the tuft of paraphyses measuring about 75 p in length.

Remarks.—There can be no doubt, I think, that this is identical
with Puccinia Graminis as described by De Bary, although I have not
confirmed its genetic relationship with the Puccinia on cereals which
occurs very abundantly in all the fields around Simla. I am also not
quite certain that all the three forms of Berberis which occur in Simla
(namely, B. vulgaris, L., and B. Lyciwm, Royle, in addition to that al-
ready mentioned) bear the same species of Aicidium. The subject is
one which requires further investigation and I will therefore leave it at
present an open question.

12.— _ Aicrp1um Urtica, Schum., var. HIManayeEnse.
Urtica parviflora, Roxb.

T have described the life-history of this remarkable and very com-
mon Atcidium elsewhere,* so it is only necessary here to state briefly its
characters. The parasite gives rise to remarkable hypertrophies of the
tissues of the host invaded, usually the leaves and petioles, though fre-
quently also the stems. When attacking the leaves, it has a special
proneness to invade the main veins; and, by causing very great hyper-
trophy in them, gives rise to remarkable contortions. When it attacks
the stem, it usually produces well defined comparatively large tumours or
excrescences. The parasite is usually found in its fullest development
during July. The hypertrophy of the parts invaded is due mainly to
the increased size of the parenchyma cells, which are stored with nu-
tritive material, and, to a very subordinate extent, to mycelial invasion.
The mycelium penetrates some of the parenchyma cells forming haus-
toria of the branched type.

The spermogonia measure about 0178 m.m. in depth and breadth
with a tuft of paraphyses 68 p long.

The wcidiospores are contained in a peridiwm of a single layer of
flattened polygonal cells measuring on an average 20 w in diameter.
The ecidiospores are given off in long rows from basidia arranged
very regularly on a level base. They are yellow round bodies with
finely granular contents and beset externally with minute deciduous

* “ Scientific Memoirs by Medical Officers of the Army of India,’ Part II.
Calcutta, 1887.

1887. | in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 369

tubercles. The moistened spore measures on an average 15°6 x 13:1 p.
The life-history of this ecidium is completed on Carex setigera, Don.
The uredospores on this second host measure from 19°8 x 13°5 p to
192 x 128 py. The teleutospores (puccinia) are 56 w long by 15 ps
broad on an average. The upper cell measures 24 to 20 » in length
by 12 to 17 » in breadth, whilst the lower cell varies from 20 to 14 pin
length and 12 to 14m in breadth. In germinating, each cell forms a
promycelium which divides at its end into four compartments each
forming a sporidium atthe end of a slender sterigma. The sporidia
measure 12 x 8yu. For further particulars I must refer to the paper
already alluded to.

13.—Acip1um SrrRopILaNntuls, Barclay.
. Strobilanthes Dalhousianus, Clarke.

The Aicidium which occurs on this plant is probably the most
common and widely diffused in Simla. I have described its life-history
fully in a paper in “ Scientific Memoirs by the Medical Officers of the
Army of India”*, to which I would refer those who desire further in-
formation, while here I will only note its main characters. The para-
site may be found abundantly during July and August attacking only
the leaf-blades and very rarely indeed the petiole. The leaves are
often found very extensively bespattered with circular discoloured
patches, yellow or yellowish green above and rosy or purplish or yellow
below. The patches usually measure about 4—5 m.m. in diameter, but
sometimes more, and are usually slightly concave above. The sper-
mogonia are borne on the upper surface and may be recognised as minute
points. The ecidia are borne on the lower surface. The invaded
areas are considerably thickened, the thickening being due mostly to
hypertrophy of the spongy cells and toa lesser extent to that of the
palisade-cells. The mycelial filaments are of the usual characters and
form here and there simple tubular haustoria.

The peridiwm consists of a single layer of flattened angular cells
measuring on an average 163 x 116 w. The ecidiospores are given
off in rows, as usual, without intermediate cells. They are irregularly
round pale orange-yellow and measure, when just moistened, 18 x 16 pm.

The spermogonia measure about 100 win depth by 94 » in width.
They are formed both on the upper and on the lower surface of the leaf,
but more frequently on the upper. They have a tuft of paraphyses
protruding through their mouths about 80—90 wm.

This fungus completes its cycle of development on Pollinia nuda,

* “ Scientific Memoirs by the Medical Officers‘of ihe Army of India,” Part II,
Calcutta, 1887.

370 A. Barclay—List of the Uredinese occurring [No. 3,

Trin. The uredospores on this last mentioned host measure, when just
wetted, 21°6 x 20°24. The teleutospores (puccinia) on the same mea-
sure 36 w in length by 16m at the septum. The septum divides the
spore into two equal halves. The promycelia from each cell divide at
their ends into four cells, each of which produces a sporidium at the
end of a slender sterigma. The sporidia measure from 10 x 6 p to
12 we 4 pee
14.—GYMNOSPORANGIUM CLAVARLEFORME, Jacq. ?
Pyrus variolosa, Wall.

An Aicidium (Roestelia) on this single species of the several mem-
bers of the Pomacezw in and about Simla is fairly common from May to
August: but I have observed in this case, as in several others, that in
some years it is more common than in others. For example, in 1885, I
found no difficulty in obtaining as many specimens as I desired: in
1886, I experienced the greatest difficulty in finding a very few, while
now, in 1887, it is again fairly common, though not so common as in
1885. It attacks only the leaf-blades and no other parts, so far as my
observations have extended, forming well defined patches, orange-red
above and yellowish below, the upper surface being densely studded
with spermogonia. Generally the fully developed older dark green
leaves bear these ecidial patches, the younger paler leaves being only
exceptionally attacked and these late in the season, namely, in July,
The area of the leaf blade invaded varies in extent from a few milli-
meters in diameter to 1 c. m. or even a little more, and is considerably
thickened. While the thickness of the normal leaf blade is about 0°170
to 0190 mm., the attacked parts when ecidia are developed measure
about 0°880 m.m. The thickening of the leaf blade is due mostly to an
apparent proliferation of the spongy tissue cells, which are also altered
in form, becoming long palisade-like cells instead of irregularly round
as under normal conditions. The true normal palisade-cells are about
44 yin length, whilst the transformed spongy cells are 63 to 107 » in
length. The mycelium ramifies throughout the cells of the attacked
areas. ;

The ecidia are very deeply sunk, long tubular structures, the
portion sunken beneath the level of the epidermis being about 0°756 m.m.
in length and about 0°190 m.m. in diameter. Hach ecidium is situated
on a minute papilla and is extruded only from the under surface of the
leaf, never from the upper. That portion of the ecidial fruit which
projects freely beyond the level of the epidermis is about 1 to 2 m.m.
in length.

The peridium consists of a single layer of cells, the lower ones
being more elongated than the upper. Those situated about the middle

le ee ace. SS

1887.] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 371

measure about 70 x 22 pw, and all are beset with prominent rod-like
excrescences (Fig. 5, Pl. XV.). When the ecidium is ripe, the peridium
bursts longitudinally in strips from summit to base.

The ecidiospores are round or oftener oval, measuring, when
just wetted, 286 x 246 mw onan average. They are pale brown in
colour and their surfaces are beset with minute tubercles (Fig. 6, Pl.
XYV.).

The spermogonia are formed only on the upper surface of the leaf,
and when ripe have a sticky clear fluid over them probably secreted by
the tuft of paraphyses, which, arising from the very base of the organ,
project considerably (about 50 to 60 w,) from the mouths. They are
well sunken into the tissue of the leaf, their bases pushing down and dis-
integrating the palisade-cells. They remain covered over by the cuti-
cle until ripe, when the cuticle is raised and opened by a porous opening.
The formation of the spermogonia precedes that of the ecidia by a
very considerable length of time. In the spermogonial stage, the hy-
pertrophy of the leaf tissue is not so great as it becomes later, the
thickness of the lamina being about 0°41 m.m. If sections of the leaf
through a spermogonium be stained with Spiller’s purple, it will be
found that, while the sterigmata are coloured blue, the spermatia are
coloured brick-red. The spermatia are oval and measure 8 x 4 p.

Remarks.—From the nature of the dehiscence of the peridium, there
can be no doubt that this Alcidium is identical with or allied to Gymno-
sporangium clavarieforme, Jacq., though in some respects it is not unlike
G. juniperinum, L., especially in the colour of the spores. JI made very
frequent and numerous attempts to reproduce this A’cidium with teleu-
tospores from a Gymnosporangium on Cupressus torulosa which is by no
means uncommon on the few trees which occur in Simla, but always
without result. Notwithstanding these negative results, 1 am still,
however, inclined to believe that this Gymnosporangium (the only one
I am acquainted with in these parts) is genetically related to the Aici-
dium just described, and I attribute my negative results to the influence
of some unknown condition attending my experiments, although I have
varied the conditions in every conceivable manner.

15.—Monosporipium ANDRACHNIS, gen. et. sp. nov.
Andrachne cordifolia, Mull. Arg.

During August, especially towards its latter end, an Alcidium
is not unfrequently met with on this host, which is common at eleva-
tions a little below that of Simla. It is not, however, a common
Aicidium. Only the leaves are attacked and on them circular
patches are formed by the fungus, red above with an irregular halo of

372 A. Barclay—List of the Uredineee occurring [No. 3,

yellow around it (Fig. 2, Pl. XV ) and pale rosy red beneath (Fig. 1, Pl.
XV.). The patch is concave on the upper or red surface, the under
surface being correspondingly convex, and on this latter surface only
are the Aicidia produced. Generally only one patch is to be found on a
single leaf, though I have seen as many as six. The patches are usually
very uniform in size, generally measuring about 6 m.m. in a diameter.
The centre of the under surface of the patch is occupied by a number
of spermogonia, while around it the ecidia are grouped more or less
irregularly. A few spermogonia, however, emerge from the upper
surface also. This Alcidium, therefore, in its general characters
already resembles that described above on LHuphorbia cognata, but
differs notably in the ecidia being isolated cups, whilst in Huphu-
bia we may imagine that the several cups have all fused together into
one large circular ecidial fruit. The peculiar arrangement of the
mycelium, however, in layers so characteristic of M. Huphorbiae
is not found here. The mycelium ramifies generally among the
cells as in other ecidia. The palisade-cells are not disarranged or
deformed in any way, but the spongy tissue cells are hypertrophied and
proliferated. The thickness of the leaf where invaded and where ripe
aecidia were borne was in one instance 0°334 m.m., whilst the normal
thickness was 01138 m.m. The spermogonia are very small and super-
ficial, as in M. Huphorbiae. They are insinuated between the epidermis
cells and measure about 44 win width and 25 to 30 mwindepth. The
zecidia when fully ripe measure about 0°265 to 0°248 m.m. in width and
0:233 to 0°217 m.m. in depth.

The ecidiospores are round, oval (Fig. 11, Pl. XV.), colourless, or very
pale brown, and measure, when just wetted, on anaverage 21°6 x 18°4 p,
varying from 20 x 16 to 24 x 204. They are given off in rows with-
out any intermediate cells. The peridial cells are flat and irregular in
shape, imbricate in arrangement, and measure from 18 to 24 m in
diameter (Fig. 10, Pl. XV.). They are beset with small ridges or
tubercles. The mode of germination of these scidiospores is exactly
like the peculiar germination of the spores of Monosporidium Huphor-
biae. The spores germinate very readily in water, throwing out a
long non-septate tube, when the empty spore wall is seen to be
beset very densely with minute tubercles. After lying in water 24 to
36 hours, a secondary spore is formed at the extremity of the germ
tube (Fig. 13, Pl. XV.) just as I have described it in the case of Euphor-
bia. This secondary spore or sporidium is separated off from the
germ tube by a septum, but never falls off altogether from the tube.
In a cultivation of 48 hours’ duration, I saw numerous secondary spores,
and several of them, while still attached, had commenced to germinate,

|

1887. ] in the Neighbourhood of Simla. 373

throwing out narrow tubes, which, though twisted a little (Fig. 14, Pl.
XV.), never became spiral as in the case of M. Huphorbiae, nor so long.
These secondary spores measure from 18 x 15 » to 22 x 16 wand on
an average 20°3 x 15. They are double-contoured and contain large
granules in their protoplasm.
16.—Aiciptum CompositTarum, Martins.
Myriactis nepalensis, Less.

I have never found this Alcidium actually in Simla, where the host
is common, but at Mashobra, a few miles beyond the Station, at about
the same elevation. It may be found there towards the end of August
and beginning of September. Only the lower leaves are affected, and
generally before the plant sends up its flowering stalk, though I found
one plant with three of its lower leaves affected while it was in full
flower. The patches are circular and usually single, but sometimes more,
on each leaf, and they are very large, measuring about 1‘5 c. m. in
diameter. The upper surface is pale yellow with a dark discoloured
centre as the patch becomes older, while the lower surface is very
pale yellow and here the ecidia are borne in great numbers thickly
set together. With a field-lens it may be seen that the spermogonia
are borne on the upper surface quite on the margin of the patch and not
within it.

The ecidiospores are irregularly round or oval, pale yellow, and,
when just wetted, measure from 14 x 14 to 17 x 12m and on an

-average 16 x 15:2 uw. (Fig. 15, a., b., Pl. XV.). The spores are given off

in rows as usual. The epispore is thin.

The peridial cells measure about 34 x 16 w to 42 x 20 wand are
arranged in an imbricate manner (Fig. 15, c., d., Pl. XV.).

Remarks.—The Aicidium not occurring actually in Simla, so far as
Iam aware, I have not been able to pay special attention to it. I
presume it may be included under Meidium Compositarwm, Martins,
although the measurements I give of the ecidiospores are smaller
than those given by Winter in the case of Puccinia flosculosorum, Alb.
& Schw., and Uromyces Junci, Desmaz. However, as I do not know of
any teleutospore belonging to this A‘cidium, I cannot do better than
refer it provisionally to A. Compositarwm, as recommended by Winter.

Concluding Remarks.——This completes the list of secidium-bearing
Uredines I have hitherto been able to examine in Simla, with the excep-
tion of the five which occur in Conifere, and which I hope to describe
in a future paper. Three of these (on Abies Smithiana and Cedrus
Deodara) I have already described. in this Journal.* The other two
occur on Pinus longifolia and P. excelsa.

* J. A. S. B. 1886, vol lv, pt. ii, pp) 1—11, pls. i—iii; pp. 140 - 143, pls. iii, iv ;
et pp. 223—226, pls. vi, vii.
48

374 A. Barclay—List of the Uredinee occurring [Norte

In addition to these, I have seen Alcidia on a species of Geranium
(probably nepalense) and on Ranunculus diffusus, but in each case I only
once found specimens, and unfortunately in each case I was unable
to examine them. They are extremely rare about Simla. I may here
also note that a very interesting Alcidium occurs on Jasminum grandi-
Jlorum, L., whose life history I am now engaged in investigating, but it is
confined to the low-lying valleys near Simla and never appears in the
station, which is too high for the host. A nearly allied species (Jasminum
officinale, L.) which occurs abundantly in the woods about Simla never
harbours this parasite or that which I have described above on
Jasminum humile.

DESCRIPTION OF THE PLATES.

Plate XII.
1. Sanicula : wscidiospore, x 350.
2. Ditto : peridial cells, x 350.
3. Pimpinella : uredospore, x 350.
4. Violet : leaf, lower surface, natural size.
5. Ditto : leaf, upper surface, natural size.
6. Ditto : gecidiospore, 24 hours in water, x 250.
7a Ditto : promycelium, x 350.
8. Ditto : ditto.
9. Ditto : ditto: showing terminal sporidial formation, x 250,
10. Ditto : germinating sporidium, x 350.
oe, Ditto : peridial cells, x 400,
12. Valeriana : scidiospore, x 580.
13. Ditto : uromyces spore, x 580,
14, Pimpinella : wcidiospore, x 350.
15, Ditto : peridial cells, x 350.
Plate XIII.
1, Rhamnus: leaf, lower surface, natural size,
2. Ditto : ditto, upper surface, natural size.
3. Ditto : stem attacked, natural size.
4, Ditto : peridial cells, x 350.
5. Ditto : wcidiospore, x 350.
6. Fragaria : wcidiospore, x 350.
G: Ditto : wuredospore, x 350.
8. Ditto : germinating uredospore, x 350,
9. Ditto : teleutospore, x 350,
10. Valeriana: ecidiospore, x 400.

11. Anemone: outline of leaf showing attack: natural size.
12. Ditto +: wscidiospore. x 480.
13. Thalictrum: peridial cells, x 350.
14. Ditto : wcidiospore, x 350.

15. Ditto : basal cells of a row of zecidiospores showing intermediate
cells, x 480.

drake ia ek Ie

Thalictrum :

Jasminum
Ditto
Euphorbia

Ditto
Ditto
Ditto

Berberis
Ditto
Ditto

Andrachne
Ditto
Berberis
Berberis
Pyrus
Ditto
Euphorbia
Ditto

Ditto
Andrachne

Ditto

Ditto

Ditto
Ditto
Myriactis

in the Neighbourhood of Simla.

375

Plate XIV.

portion of shoot showing petioles attacked, natural size.

peridial cells, x 350.

gecidiospores, x 350.

a. leaf, natural size.

b. same somewhat enlarged.

a. vecidiospore, x 350.

b. peridial cell, x 350,

transverse section of leaf showing peculiar disposition of
mycelium and superficial nature of spermogonium.

a. layer of mycelial filaments on lower side of leaf ; b.
same on upper side, x 480.

zecidiospore, x 350.

peridial cells, x 350,

two isolated peridial cells, x 350.

Plate XV.

under surface of affected leaf, natural size.

upper surface.

upper surface of attached leaf, natural size.

peridial cells, x 350.

peridial cells, x 350.

gecidiospores, x 350.

zecidiospore germinating, x 350,

germinating zcidiospore, showing formation of secondary
spore (sporidium) and its germination while in situ,
x 350.

secondary spore (sporidium), x 350.

peridial cells, x 350,

zecidiospores, x 350.

showing end of germinal tube (promycelium ?) of exci-
diospore with commencing formation of secondary
spore or sporidium, x 350,

completely developed secondary spore, x 350.

showing germination of secondary spore (sporidium) 350.

a. row of zecidiospores ; b. isolated spore ; c. and d. peri-
dial cells, x 350.

Flower head of Thalictrum minus completely involved and distorted by
the Aicidium, natural size, approximately.

Leaf of same.
covered profusely with ecidia outside with a few tubes also inside,

natural size, approximately.

Leaf deeply hollowed, much enlarged and thickened, and

376 J. Wood-Mason—Description of Lyreidus gracilis. f

XXII.—Natural History Notes from H.M.’s Indian Marine Survey
Steamer ‘Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CARPENTER, R. N.,
Commanding, No.8. Description of a new species of the Brachy-
urous Genus Lyreidus from the Depths of the Andaman Sea.—By
J. Woop-Mason, Esq., Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and
Professor of Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College
of Bengal, Calcutta.

LYREIDUS GRACILIS, n. sp.

3. Very closely allied to ZL. channeri.* Body and legs slenderer.
Rostrum acutely triangular with straight sides. Extraorbital and
antero-lateral spines absolutely as well as relatively longer. The head
being narrower and more produced, its sides (between the extraorbital
and anterior antero-lateral spines) are less deeply hollowed out, and its
supraorbital borders, more deeply and narrowly emarginate. LHye-
peduncles and cornez equal and similar, apparently of the same form
and proportions as in the left eye of L. channert, the former reaching
to about the junction of the second with the apical third of the length
of the rostrum, the latter opaque yellow with the subjacent pigment
showing through the cuticle as a dark ring round their bases. Propodite
of the chelipeds armed below with three triangular spines. The mero-
podite bears two sharp erect spinules about the middle of the length of
its upper border. In all other respects much as in LZ. channert.

The unique example obtained measures :—

Millims.
Length of carapace, from tip of rostrum to posterior margin, ... 233
‘3 ¥ % o, to middle of a straight
line joining bases of posterior anterolateral spines, 1) oe
"5 from same straight line to posterior margin, 15:0
Bias of carapace, across the parallel-sided part, ... oo) Re
Breadth of head, between tips of extraorbital spines,... we, ae
Distance between tips of posterior antero-lateral spines, se JED
Length of posterior antero-lateral spines, fy 1s wee
Pine) amerion ped ee ne 3°7
» 9, rostrum, from a straight line inte to et bottoms of
the supraorbital emarginations, Ss ws 1h eee
» », extraorbital spines from the same tangent, he 4‘0

Locality. Off Port Blair; 271 fathoms; green ooze ; January
2nd, 1888.

* Supra, p. 206 et seqq, pl. i.

NPN eM Oe MOO NB OS”

EN 'D Besket

Names of New Genera and Species have an asterisk (*) prefixed,

PO ONS OO Oe Oe Sm

Abies smithiana, 373
Accipiter melaschistus, 78

13 nisus, 78
Acrocephalus stentoreus, 81
Actinacantha propinqua, 104
an compositarum, 373

3 euphorbie, 366

= fragariz, 361

yg jasmini, 363
5 leucospermum, 361, 362
= punctatum, 361

e » - : Sanicule, 352

strobilanthis, 351, 369
56 thalictri flavi, 362, 363
< urtice, 351
» var. himalayense, 368
Aigialites curonica, 87
.Alauda cristata, 84
» guttata, 84
*Amphipronoé longicornuta, 212, 220, 229
Anas angustirostris, 88
» crecca, 88
‘4, penelope, 88
», Strepera, 88
Andrachne cordifolia, 351, 366, 367, 371
Anemone nemorosa, 361, 362
+ ranunculoides, 361, 362
rivularis, 361, 362
Anthus blakistoni, 84
» rosaceus, 84
Aranea, 107
Argiope, 287
Arvicola guentheri, 72
Ascyltus, 283
Asio otus, 79
*Atmetochilus, 199
fossor, 109
Attus, ‘101
» forceps, 283
Barbastellus communis, 258
Berberis, aristata, 367
= lycium, 368
. vulgaris, 368
Brachypodium sylvaticum, 359

{ A complete Index to the articles on Rhynchota published in this volume will

Budytes citreola, 83
é melanocephala, 83
Buteo ferox, 78
Buthus bengalensis, 112
Cerostris paradoxa, 107
Calandrella brachydactyla, 84
Canis lupus, 69
Caprimulgus europeus, 79
unwini, 79
Carduelis caniceps, 84.
Carex setigera, 369
Carine bactriana, 79
Casarca rutila, 89
Cedrus deodara, 378
Cervus cashmirianus, 76, 77
» maral, 77
Cettia cetti, 81
Chettusia villotzi, 87
Chiracanthium, 287
Cinclus asiaticus, 83
Circus eruginosus, 78
» cineraceus, 78
5 _ cyaneus, 77
», macrurus, 78
Citillus leptodactylus, 71
Clangula glaucion, 89
Cocalus, 283
45 concolor, 283
~ cyaneus, 283
‘5 salax, 283
Columba eversmanni, 86
Pa intermedia, 86
Coracias garrula, 79
Corvus frugileeus, 85
»» monedula, 85
», splendens, 257
Coturnix communis, 87
Cotyle riparia, 83
» rupestris, 83
Crex pratensis, 88
Cupressus torulosa, 371
Cyanecula suecica, 82
= albisternis, 285
var., 286

” ”

be issued with the last of the series in a subsequent volume,

378

*Cyclosa anseripes, 286 |

presets, 283 |
miniaceomicans, 283
baeaee amplexicaudata, 237, 238,
240, 257
Cynopterus brachyotus, 239
marginatus, 237, 238, 239,
240, 257, 258
Cypselus apus, 79
3 melba, 79
Sty DOpArShaS 110
5 paganus, 111 |
Cystauchenium, 109 |
Cytza, 283 |

% albolimbata, 282

alburna, 282
» sinuata, 282
Dendrophthoe coccinea, 91
farinosa, 94
ferruginea, 92 |
ignea, 93
- macrocalyx, 91
pentandra, 94
pentapetala, 90
pulcher, 90
Delonas ocyale, 101 |
Ellobius, 75
fuscocapillus, 74, 75
intermedius, 73, 74, 75
talpinus, 74, 75
» var. rufescens, 75
Elytranthe albida, 98"
avenis, 97
farinosa, 94
formosa, 95
A spheroidea, 97
Emberiza fucata, 85
pyrrhuloides, 85
scheeniclus, 85
Endophyllum euphorbie-silvatice, 366
Epeira, 107, 287
anama, 107
caput-lupi, 107 )
dehaani, 106, 107

9?

%)

9
*

”
>
”?

9

ieee masoni, 105 |
ve rhodosternon, 107 |
- submucronata, 106.

Erinaceus albulus, 68, 69
” auritus, 69. |
Erismatura leucocephala, 89 |
Erythrospiza obsoleta, 84 /
Erythrosterna parva, 80
Euphorbia amygdaloides, 366 :
> cognata, 351, 364, 372

Kuryattus, 283 -

*Kurystheus hirsutus, 212, 227, 229
Euspiza luteola, 85
Felis caudata, 69 et a
Ficus, 61, 64, 65

> alba, 67
arfakensis, 68
brachiata, 65

99
*

*”

>

Index.

Ficus chartacea, 64
comitis, 68
conora, 62
conspicabilis, 61
dalbertisii, 64
dimorpha, 66
dumosa, 67
forbesii, 66
grandis, 64
mespiloides, 62
miquelii, 65

__ vibes, 66
roxburghii, 64

Fragaria vesca, 351, 359
Fulica atra, 88
Fuligula cristata, 88

3 nyroca, 89
Gagrella, 115

* binotata, 115

cervina, 115

quadravittata, 115,116 |

i signata, 117

Gallinago scolopacinus, 87

- solitaria, 87

Gasteracantha, 104

annamita, 105, 284.

pe frontata, 105

Gazella subeutturosa, 76

Geranium nepalense, 374

Gerbillus erythrurnus, 72

¥ hurriane, 71, 72

Gymnosporangium clavariesforme, 370,

371
juniperinum, 371
Harpyiocephalus, 252
a harpia, 258, 259
leucogaster, 251, 252

**¥ * KK XK KX X

9?
*

as

”»

P]

9

”
Hasarius, 283
. adansoni, 283
Hersilia, 287
ee oan ferina, 102
a laheuida, 102
” mediocris, 102
7 venatoria, 102
Himantopus candidus, 87
Hippasa greenalliz, 101
Hipposideros fulvus, 248
Hirundo rustica, 83
Homalattus, 287
Hormurus australasiz, 113
Hyperia, 224, 226, 227
Hyperina, 212
Hypolais pallida, 81
i rama, 81
Ischnurus australasize, 113
es pistaceus, 1138
Tsometrus varius, 112 :
Jasminum grandiflorum, 364, 374
humile, 363, 374
officinale, 364, 374 > °
BE revolutum, 361
Lagomys rufescens, 75

38

7

Index. 379

Lanius isabellinus, 80
5, Pheenicuroides, 80
Larus ridibundus, 88
Leptoctenus denticulatus, 108
+ pullus, 108
* 5 tumidulus, 108
Leptopelma, 287
Lepus lehmanni, 76
_uestrigonus, 224, 227
a poses re. 212, 224, 225,
227, 229
re ferus, 225
fuscus, 225
Liocheles, 113
a australasie, 113
? complanatus, 113
i neocaledonicus, 113
Loranthus, 89, 90, 99
= albidus, 98

se ampullaceus, 97
= avenis, 97
a axanthus, 90
* . beccarii, 98
es bengalensis, 92
5 carinulatus, 97
és coccineus, 90, 91, 95
- concavifolius, 92
55 contractus, 94
* * crassipetalus, 91
.* curvatus, 95
dianthus, 96
* 5 duthieanus, 94
7 eleutheropetalus, 91
0 erythrostachys, 90
Ps evenius, 97
Pk farinosus, 94
rf ferruginenus, 92
i finlaysonianus, 94.

* ‘5 forbesii, 100
# formosus, 95, 96
* globosus, 97

- graciliflora, 92
* x grandifrons, 93
_ heteranthusg, 91
fe kingii, 99
* a kunstleri, 95
Pa levigata, 92
* m lampongus, 100
3 lecucosiphon, 98
Le lobbii, 90
as longiflorus, 93
ed ‘le lowii, 98
PP loxantherus, 95
i lyndenianus, 90
¥ malaccensis, 93
bs meluitangensis, 96
obtectus, 92
:. oleifolius, 97
oa oortiauus, 92
ms pallens, 97
i parishii, 90
ie pentandrus, 93

eran na pentapetalus, 90
s platyphyllus, 97
- polycarpus, 90
* fe productus, 91
: pulcher, 90
. racemiferus, 91
Ss reinwardtianus, 95
“ retusus, 98
rf rigidus, 94
ii schultesii, 93
* - scortechinii, 94
s scurrula, 93
fe > var. obtecta, 92
* speciosus, 90, 95
5 sphaerocarpus, 97
be sub-globusus, 97
ss sub-umbellatus, 97
;, viridiflorus, 97
Lycosa, 101
» virulenta, 101
bys eidus bairdii, 208
ts channeri, 206, 208, 376
is elongatus, 208
es gracilis, 376
Bee. stenops, 209
tridentatus, 207, 208, 209
Machetes pugnax, 87
Macrosolen, 97
sf formosus, 95
BS oleioides, 97
.» pallens, 97
S sphaerocarpus, 97
Mevia, 283
Maracandus, 114
macei, 114
- mouhoti, 114
* - reticulatus, 113
Megaderma lyra, 242, 258
Melanocorypha bimaculata, 84
Menemerus culicivorus, 101
Mergus albellus, 89
Merops apiaster, 79
Merula atrigularis, 81
» maxima, 81
. vulgaris, 81.
Meta, 286, 287
ss fastigiata, 107
», fastuosa, 107
Milvus migrans, 78
Miniopterus schreibersi, 251, 254, 256,
257
Mogegridgea, 287
a 351, 364, 367, 371
andrachnis, 37 1
* AM euphorbiz 364, 372, 373
Monticola cyanus, 82
Motacilla alba, 83
P melanope, 83
Murina leucogaster, 251
» suillus, 258
Mus bactrianus, 72
»» pachycercus, 72

380

Myriactis nepalensis, 373
Nephila, 287
fuscipes, 107
maculata, 107
- rivulata, 107
Nephilengys hofmanni, 107
Rs malabarensis, 107
Noctulinia lasyura, 258
Nycticejus nivicolus, 259
Ocyale atalanta, 101
Otis tertax, 87
Oxyopes, 287
Palamneeus bengalensis, 112
Palystes kochi, 103
Paraphronima, 214
Passer hispaniolensis, 85
» indicus, 84
» montanus, 84
Pastor roseus, 86
Phalacrocorax carbo, 88
Phasianus colchicus, 86
* principalis, 86
5 shawi, 86
Phoenicanthemum bennetianum, 91
coccineum, 91
pentapetalum, 90
Pholcus “distinctus L108
» elongatus, 1C7, 108
» margarita, 108
» phalangioides, 107
Ws tipuloides, 108%
Phrictus flavopilosus, 110
Phronima, 212, 218, 214
% x bucephala, 212, 213, 214, 215,
229
sedentaria, 21
Phronimella, 214
As hippocephala, 212, 213, 214,
217, 229.
Phronimopsis, oi
Phryctus, 111
Phyllorhina amboinensis, 248, 249

»”

)

>?

ns armigera, 245, 247, 248
oy bicolor, 248

is fulva, 248

micropus, 249

Pica rustica, 85
Pimpinella diversifolia, 352, 356
Pinus excelsa, 373
» longifolia, 373
Plecotus auritus, 242, 258
y darjilingensis, 258

a homochrous, 258
Plexippus, 283
3 aper, 283
argentosus, 283

» catellus, 253

a culicivorus, 101

9 erythrocephalus, 283
‘s expectans, 283

9) frontaliger, 283

” laticeps, 283

Index.

Plexippus nimbatus, 283

SS ochropus, 283
99 pupulus, 283
9 ruber, 283

severus, 283
Pollinis nuda, 369
Porzana bailloni, 88
ne maruetta, 88
Pratincola caprata, 80
maura, 80
Priata agelenoides, 101
Psecas, 283
Pterocles alchata, 86
Pteropus amplexicaudatus, 237
3; leucocephalus, 236
- marginatus, 239
3 medius, 236, 238, 257
by pyrivorus, 237, 238, 258
Ptocasius, 283
Puccinia anemones, 361
Pe coronata, 358, 359
e flcsculosorum, 373
Mesh. fragariz, 359, 361
7 fusea, 362
ns graminis, 367, 368
A pimpinelle, 356, 358
viol, 354, 356
Pyrus variolosa, 359, 370
Rallus aquaticus, 87
Ranunculus diffusus, 374
Rhabdosoma, 221
or armatum, 219, 220
* -. investigatoris, 212, 219,
220, 229
_ whitei, 219, 220
Rhamuus dahuricus, 358
Rhinolophus affinis, 242, 257
armiger, 245
Rhinolophus ferrum-equinum, 24:5

a luctus, 240, 241

i macrotis, 241, 242, 258

os minor, 240, 243, 244, 245
» perniger, 240

Pr subbadius, 243, 244

tragatus, 245
Ruticilla erythronota, 82
‘ rufiventris, 82
Sageretia oppositifolia, 359
Salticus collingwoodi, 283
ne forceps, 283
5 sinuatus, 283
» (Attus) forceps, 283
Sanicula, 374
europa, 352
Sarpedon, 286
*Satzicus, 286
Te andamanicus, 287
Saxicola deserti, 82
finschii, 82
isabellina, 82
= morio, 82
PA opistholenca, 82

Tndex. 381

Sceea, 283 Thalictrum javanicum, 362
Scelospizias badius, 78 minus, 363, 375
Scolopax rusticula, 87 *Thelictopis canescens, 103
*Scorpiops anthracinus, 112 ‘f severa, 104
* hardwicki, 113 Thelyphonus assamensis, 111
ms montana, 113 ¥% formosus, 111
a solidus, 113 Tinnunculus alaudarius, 79
Scotophilus fuliginosus, 250, 251, 257 cenchris, 79
Selenocosmia, 110 Tityus varius, 112
Serveea, 283 Totanus ochropus, 87
Sitta syriaca, 83 Tringoides hypoleucus, 87
Spermophilus, 71 Troglodytes nipalensis, 83
* 4 bactrianus, 70 A parvulus, 83
a brevicauda, 71 Turtur auritus, 86
s citellus, 71 Upupa epops, 80
. concolor, 71 Uromyces junci, 373
> dauricus, 71 5s pisi, 366
a erythrogenys, 71 4 scutellatus, 366
‘ eversmanni, 71 35 valerian, 351, 352, 354
2 fulvus, 71 Urtica parviflora, 351, 368
Re euttatus, 71 Valeriana wallichii, 351, 352
k leptodactylus, 71 Vanellus cristatus, 87
< mongolicus, 71 Vespertilio abramus, 250
% mugosaricus, 71 33 adversus, 255
A musicus, 71 %5 caliginosus, 256
% rufescens, 71 darjilingensis, 258
xanthoprymuus, 71 5 ferrum-equinum, 245
*Sphedanus, 284 os formosa, 254, 256
ns marginatus, 284 A formosus, 254
Ne undatus, 284: PP fuliginosa, 254, 256, 2
Stanneoclavis brevispina, 285 9 fuliginosus, 251
canningensis, 285 93 labiata, 250, 256
Sterna anglica, 88 * muricola, 255, 256
minuta, 88 9 mystacinus, 242, 254, 255,
Strobilanthes dalhousianus, 351, 369 256, 258
Sturnus poltaratskyi, 86 9 nipalensis, 253, 258
Sturnus vulgaris, 85 9 noctula, 250, 256
Sylvia affinis, 80 Hp pallidiventer, 253
ae tamuliaris, 81 P pallidiventris, 253
‘ minuscula, 80 on schreibersii, 256
ry mystacea, 81 sh siligorensis, 255, 258
rubescens, 81 subbadia, 243
Synotus darjilingensis, 258 Vesperugo abramus, 250, 251, 257
Tadorna vulpanser, 89 a noctula, 250
Tetragnatha gracilis, 286 Viola serpens, 354

Tetraogallus himalayensis, 86 Vulpes montana, 69, 70

hep

6 «
<=

ee \
oie 1s rd
we ROoAgeie }

ef
nla enekty
Ty Girl eel Ba pak vow
Pay madiiats hag shal as
nab Petey Rin, foe
ae Pebt iil) Me t)a ot Ge
Be 2 Flee 1 37a.
ee ee) si es | ‘sei t E
’ 5 So ee
oe Ay! pitas ‘
Gi. bali git
‘ i h j
SAN perce. Pwet soli
AtS tel ; sera y
Vee ‘ “2. if Fah? ¥
Uh se 5 P70 ey fair at
ae Spe gae .* it F
“a .Ria)"" prt t} ns ee ae
oi)! £98) er iwieltoe ¥.
GOES RAL PRAMS "
£ES) a cA yin ene “4
oi hee neta rei: fh
Tat Sat ¥ oS ok 7 et .
fp dae alee bi x
; teat HES UE *
‘2 / 3 mi ree et j 7 iy ’
rage ake
«
pk a): 7)
at SAT) aigen S7
J P ePeiay SLs us .
Pie etx be a y
ait TH bie “:
han tes We i
‘ : ’ ' z *
( Pan ane

>
: |
‘
ibe
‘
ae .
+ -
.
% .

| Ay a. yee a
; a) F we
Pee RE RP ON nah
j' ey : as
‘
A - '
a. an
ee ie ak) DY ee a ta

yt P AP mtv +s

tae eC >

t x
;
‘
‘ >
\ Uke Sh ge

| “a

‘ ; > #T vane. HOUR

Hoge Fa Piste

ee ae.
é ae oTy Sean bine "

.
P :
a] Met
Vo. ® “w
‘
$
i
-
a
4
~ _— < an: :
r
Ps
‘
;
. ¥ 7
vy tel
-
ay
)

“a+ NEW SERIES. VOL. LVI. CCL RXV, 8

tn OO OOOO eacu33o mr eseee_5uoeG5o“Goeesee ee eee

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

* Vol. LVI, Part II, No. 1.—1887.
EDITED BY

JHE NaTURAL fiisToRY PECRETARY.

Oe a es ee ee
. ~~ - na rw q

;
’

sa AND PUBLISHED BY THE

b B META IE BA By

‘
3

3

E

otf >

3

z “The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

| within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by

» man or produced by nature.”—Sir WILLIAM JONES.

*,* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,
to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-
don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Co., 57 S§ 59, Ludgate Hill,

Bs CALCUTTA:
ee PRINTED BY }. W. JHOMAS, AT THE PAPTisy Mission PRESS,

g j
JOURNAL |
| ASIATIC SOCIETY, 5j, PARK STREET, :

gS pr ee

Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Re. 1.—To Non-Subscribers Bs. 1-8,
Price in England, 2 Shillings and sixpence.

Issued July 23rd, 1887.

—™

CONTENTS.

eed

I.—On the Influence of Indian Forests on the Rainfall.—By
Henny F. Buanrorp, F. R.S8., Meteorological Reporter to
the Government of India..

II.—On the changes observed in tthe Danity of ‘the Suniaee ome
water, coincident with, and due to Aerial Disturbances, and

consequent Alteration of Baric Pressure over adjacent Sea

Areas: and on the Usefulness of a more exact measurement —

of the Specific Gravity of Sea-water : more especially with

Reference tothe Waters near and about the Hooghly River |

Pilot Station.— By SAMUEL R. HLSON........sccecsccceecseevene
III.—Notes on Indian Rhynchota: Heteroptera, No. hee KE. T.
ATKINSON; ‘Bs As; PRESIDENTS oicae oe cece coy ae et
IV.—A second series of N ew Species of Ficus from New Guinea.—
By Gzorce Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. 1. S., = intendent
of the Royal Botanic Gar an Calsuitass ‘ :
V.—On some New Species of Ficus from Gisnatew: 3 y ‘Gudwen
Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.8., Superintendent Botanic
Gardet, OUlewbtacis cig stesidart bivecd dowedat suns ea

eeecse

VI.—On the Mammals and Birds collected by Gustine 0. 3. ani |

C. S. I. of the tine ee Commission. —By J.
SovL.y... se
V1il.—On the Wipastes of Siccaptione be hana 5 ee ik a
Greorce Kinc, M. B., LL. D., F..8., Superintendent
of the Royal Botanic Cariion: Ouleutta ONE TY Pon ma
VIIL—E’tude sur les Arachnides del Asie méridionale faisant partie
des collections de ? Indian Museum (Caleutta). Par M. E.

Srmon, de Paris—Communicated by THE SUPERINTEN- —

DENT OF THE INDIAN Museum ..

municated by THe Hon’BLe MAnENDRALAL Srekar, M. D.,
C. ‘: K. (With a Wood-cut) ACO ROO ROO eek eee nee ete ake nares

IX.—On the Differential Equation a a Siaicotory, ay Agueoan ay ees
Mursopapuyay, M. A., F.R.A.S., F.R.S.E. Oom- |

pecegee |

| Page :

Cbg
6838

BOE S

ay CONTENTS
OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. II.) OF THE

JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1886.

Oe, No. 1, (issued March 29th, 1886). On a Uredine affecting the
ie Himalayan Spruce-fir (Abies smithiana, Forbes).—By Suranon A. Bar-
. ciay, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates I, IL, and ITI.)
- Notes on dian Rhynchota, No. 5.—By H. T. Annet B.A. The
- Hive-Bees indigenous to India and the Introduction of the Italian Bee— —
oe J.C. Doveras. List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected im Tavoy
a and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum Collector under C. H.
_ Prrman, Esq, ©. I. E., Chief Superintendent of Telegraphs. Part I.
Heterocera.—By Waele Moorn, F.Z.8., A. L. S. Communicated by
He Naruran History Secretary. |
Pee No..2, (issued June 26th, 1886). A List of Butterflies taken in
Kwnaon.— By Wititam Dourrry, Cincinnati, U. 8. A. Communicated by
_ Tur Narurat History Taz Szcrnrary. Ona second species of Uredine af-
Bt _— fecting Abies smithiana, Forbes—By Surezon A. Barcray, M. B., Bengal
e ae Medical Service (with Plates IV. and V.). Notes on Indian Hincheta:
| Need and Index.—By H.T. Atkinson, B. A. On a new
pes Seem of Uredine parasitic on Cedrus deodara, Loudon.—By Surcnon A.
- Barotay, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. With Plates VI. and VII.).
On three new Himalayan Primulas.—By G. Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.
§. (With Plates VIII, IX., and X.). On the Life- History of cer-
tain Calcutta Species of ‘ates: with special reference to the Seasonal
| Dimorphiom alleged to occur in them. —By LioneL pe Nice’viuue, F. H.
Peay (With Plate XII.)
Fife As No. 3, (issued October Ist, 1886). Indian Ants of the Indian Muse-
. um, Calcutta. No. 2.—By Prornussor Avcust Foren, Zurich. Com-
municated by Tue Naturat History Secretary. On some New Indian
aloe. - Butterflies. —By Lionen ve Nice’vitte, F. HE. S. (With Plate XI.).
Z oo Additional Notes on new or rare Indian Butterflies.—By Witt1am Dousr-
[ De: “TY, Cincinnati, U. 8. A. Communicated by the Naturat History Srcre-
t MP, gARY. On two new species of Ilex from the Eastern Himalaya.—By
_ GEorGE Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.8., Superintendent of the Royal
Botanic Garden, Oatéutia: (With Plates XIII. and XIV.). Insect
Pests belonging to the Homopterous Family Coccide.—By H. T, ATKINSON, .
zB. on

No. 4, (issued March 7th, 1886). ~The Landshells of Perak.—By
O. F. vy. Mouienporrr, Pu. D, Communicated by Tuz Naturat History
Secretary. On Solar Thermometer Observations at Allahabad. —By Si

A. Huu, B. Sc., Meteorological Reporter to the Government N. W.

Provinces. On probable Changes in the Geography of the Punjab and

its Rivers: an Historico-Geographical Study.— By R. D. Oupuam, A. R. Qt
M., Deputy Superintendent, Geological Survey of India. (With a Map ©

—Plate XIX.). List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Cachar by
Mr. J. Woopn-Mason, Part II, Rhopalocera.—By J. Woop-Mason,

Officiating Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of x
Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College, Calcutta;

and L. ve Nice’vinuz, F. E. S. (With Plates XV., XVI, XVIL.,

and XVIII.). On some new species of Ficus from New Guwinea.—By
Georce Kine, M.B., LL. D., F. L. S., Superintendent Royal Botanic

Garden, Calcutta. Description of a new species of Phytophagous Coleoptera |
alleged to be destructive to the Dhan Crops in the Chittagong District—By

JoserH S. Bary. Communicated by Taz Natura History SECRETARY.

e

a a rn |
NEW SERIES, VOL. EVI. CCELXXVI_

°
2
OF THE |
Mor. owl. Part-ll No. Il aSse7:
EDITED BY
J HE NATURAL ftisTORY PECRETARY.
E
see Re =
eee
Ag ial ““The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and
Rah cas within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by
ea man or produced by nature.”’—S1r WILLIAM JONES.
Ruste *,* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,
PREC ee - to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-
ee. bi don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Oo., 57 Sf 59, Ludgate Hill.
gs CALCUTTA:
‘ : PRINTED BY f, W. JHoMAs, AT THE PaPTiIsy MISSION PRESS,
+: Lanne AND PUBLISHED BY THE
R Bs m a #SIATIC SOCIETY, 57; PARK STREET,
e ,
se Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Re. 1.—To Non-Subscribers Rs. 1-8,

oD ms Price in England, 2 Shillings and sixpence,

Issued November 2nd, 18877.

CONTENTS.

X.— On the Effects produced by Small Quantities of Bismuth on the
Ductility of Silver—By Sureton-Masor J. Scuniy, Assay
Master, Calcutta

XI.—On Monge’s Differential Hitiateon s all Contes. re Manette

Muxnorapuyay, M.A., F.R.A.S., F. B.S. E. Communi- ©

cated by THe Hon’BuE eaten tis Srroar, M. D., C. I. HE.

XII.—Notes on Indian Rhynchota, aha No. 2.—By H. T.
Atkinson, B. A., PResipnnt

XIII.—Natural History Notes from H. Mt? s Indian Marine Baktiey
Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CARPENTER, R. N.,
Commanding. No.4. Description of a new species of Crane
tacea belonging to the Brachyurous Family Raninide.—By J.
Woop-Mason, Esq. Superintendent of the Indian Museum,
and Professor of Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the
Medical College of Bengal, Calcutta. (With Pl. I.) e

XIV .—Natural History Notes from H. M.’s Indian Marine Survey
Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CarPentnr, R.N,,
Commanding. No.5. On some Nodular Stones obtained by
trawling off Colombo in 675 Fathoms of Water.—By EH. J,

Jones, A. R. S. M., Geological a of India. (With

Pl. II.) ae
XV.—Natural History Notes Abn fs & M s dink Mari ime Siti
Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED CARPENTER, R. N.,

Commanding. No.6. On Sia new Amphipods from the Bay 7

of Bengal.— By G. M. Giuzs, M. B., F. R.C.S., Surgeon-
Naturalist to the Marine Survey. (With Pls. III.—VIIL.)...
XVI1.—Natural History Notes from H, M,’s Indian Marine Survey
Steamer ‘Investigator,’ Commander ALyrep Carpunter, R.N.,
Commanding. No.8. The Mean Temperature of the Deep
Waters of the Bay of Bengal. By Ooi nuinder CARPENTER,
R. N., D.S. O., F. R. Met. Soc., F. Z.8,.--Communicated by
Tue SUPERINTENDENT OF THE INDIAN Museum. (With Pi. X.)

Plate X. will be issued with the next Number.

Page |

121

134.

145,

206

200. wale
ale

ae

230 * ah

CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. II.) OF THE

JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1886.

‘ No. 1, (issued March 29th, 1886). On a Uredine affecting the
Himalayan Spruce-fir (Abies smithiana, Forbes).—By Surcron A. Bar-
onary, M.B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates I., II., and III.)
- Notes on Indian Rhynchota, No. 5.—By H.T. Arxinson, B. A. The
_ Hive- Bees indigenous to India and the Introduction of the Italian Bee.—
J J.C. Doveras. List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Tavoy
“and m Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum Collector under C. EH.
_ Proman, Esg., C. I. E., Chief Superintendent of Telegraphs. Part I.
aes scorn. —By Biepenie Moors, F.Z.8., A. L. 8. Communicated by
Tue Narvurat History SECRETARY.
a No. 2, (issued June 26th, 1886). A List of Butterflies taken in
be _Kumaon. —By Witiam Douerty, Cincinnati, U.S. A, Communicated by y
E Tue Naturat History Tue Secretary. Ona second species of Uredine af-
Z
be

+ ati ie =.

-fecting Abies smithiana, Forbes.—By Surgeon A. Barcuay, M. B., Bengal
_ Medical Service (with Plates 1V. and Vv. ). Notes on Indian Bheabheee
No. 6.—Addenda and Index.—By H.T. Arxinson, B. A. On a new
species of Uredine parasitic on Cedrus deodara, Loudon.—By Surczon A.
1 ‘Barctay, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates VI. and VII.).
ie On three new Himalayan Primulas.—By G. Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.
- §. (With Plates VIII, IX., and X.). On the Life etots of cer-
& tain ( Calcutta Species of Cees with special reference to the Seasonal
es Dimorphism alleged to occur in them.—By Lionen DE Nice’viiuz, F. EH.
4 oS. (With Plate XII.)
ae No, 3, (issued October Ist, 1886). Indian Ants of the Indian Muse-
ee um, Oaleutta. No. 2.—By Prorzessor Avucusr Foret, Zurich. Com-
3 municated by Tue Natura, Hisrory Secretary. On some New Indian
a Butterflies. —By Lionsx pz Nice’vitus, F. E. 8S. (With Plate XI.).
“ Additional Notes on new or rare Indian Butterflies—By Witiiam DouEr-
ia TY, Cincinnatr, U. 8. A. Communicated by the Naturat History Secre- |
ie “TARY. On two new species of Ilex from the Eastern Himalaya. —By
P - Grorce Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.8., Superintendent of the Royal
ee: Botanic Garden, Oitidta. (Witle Phas XIII. and XIV.). Insect
re ‘Pests belonging to the Homopterous Family Coccide.—By EH. T. ATKINSoN,
pee A.

No. 4, (issued March 7th, 1887). The Landshells of Perak.—By — '
O. F. v. Méutenvorrr, Pu. D, Communicated by Tun Natura, History
Sucretary. On Solar Thermometer Observations at Allahabad.—By §.
A. Hit, B. Sc., Meteorological Reporter to the Government N. W.
Provinces. On probable Changes in the Geography of the Punjab and
its Rivers : an Historico-Geographical Study.— By R. D. Oupiam, A.R.S.
M., Deputy Superintendent, Geological Survey of India. (With a Map ; =
—Plate XIX.). List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Cachar by
Mr. J. Woop-Mason, Part II, Rhopalocera.—By J. Woop-Mason,
Officiating Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of eae
Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College, Calcutta; ars
and L. ve Nicr’vintx, F. E. S. (With Plates XV., XVI, XVID,
and XVIII.). On some new species of Ficus from News Gwinea.—By -
Grorce Kine, M.B., LL. D., F. L.8., Superintendent Royal Botanic ay
Garden, Calcutta. fay tne of a new species of Phytophagous Coleoptera a
alleged to be destructive to the Dhan Crops in the Chittagong District. —By ;
JosepH §. Baty. Communicated by Tue Naruran History SucreraRy, =

No. 5, (issued Sept. Ist, 1887). List of the Lepidopterous Inse oie F
collected in Tavoy and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum
Collector under C. 8. Prruan, Hsq., C. I. E., Chief Superintendent t 4
Telegraghs. Part II. Rhopalocera.—By H. J. nara, F. Z. S., and L. DE
Nice’vitie, F. E. S. Communicated by Tux cer OF THE
Inpian Muszum. (With Plate XX.). Thtle-page, Index, a to the

Volume.

Correction.

In volume LIV, Part II, 1885, p. 125, in the ; Wasa on ila a
Swatch-of-no-Ground””. 4 lines from the top of the page for “ “ me
fathoms” read “1000 fathoms”; and for “60 miles o read ae

miles.” ia

rl Oe

iit ae

te
¥

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Vol. LVI, Part II, No. III.—1887.

See Pee ee oe

ie
x
44

EDITED BY

JHE NaTuURAL FIIsTORY PECRETARY,

.

~~~

\
. = pate TORT a: a
; i : \ aq = : iy ue 3 f: a HH fe z § te { if le \ { iE Fe
‘ y pa = = une = =e a == — =e Seah
aA cement |) (a aR — { ul ES "ee = Pe
: erp ae i es a ee — eee Ne
vain Le ie _ i fi = Wid A = tae Sky
, ha ee ee aN EN Ca
+. 7. aes ee EES HM 7 cs ANIA %, Pye) TA Hee ae
: “The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

—————————
Ee === ee eS

ere
a = ¥
=
igs i
«Oe
"y ite
ace, 3 v2
— a
> -.
a s
Y
yt a.
7 =)
7 =
-

within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by
‘man or produced by nature.’”’—Sir WILLIAM JONES.

*,* Communications should be sent wnder cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,
to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-
don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Co., 57 ¥ 59, Ludgate Hill.

eV ater Pyaar Ie

4
*
4 : .
f .
*
Ss ) >
Reed 24 : eee
+ ee
? a ae
+ re -
=
- .
% z “

CALCUTTA:

| PRINTED By J, W. JHOMAS, AT THE PAPTIsy MIssION PRESS,

AND PUBLISHED BY THE

Dijana ere

PSIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET,

1888.

- Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Re. 1.—To Non-Subscribers Rg, 1-8
SRE Coe Price in England, 2 Shillings and sixpence.

gee Ser Issued January 30th, 1888.

o>
a
;
y
~ te
* a4 ©
‘ os

. ~ : -
3% / yh: a, ,,
ays * by by
us feels eae
até yi oe
> r 7 =p
‘ an te . . _
yf be BN 5
Ly Cabs. ale
« tat * $ _
f a : = |
a 2a ie ye Aen
[a ‘, f
. q
‘ mh *. * .
’ A vi
Fe f BA ed
P 5 Behn ta,
eo ne = ee
a8 ih FMS NGE
» ne oes >
’
4

XVII. On the Chiroptera a Nepat —y 3 Es Sova
| XVII

Masirist am inacnied oy Sait " SopHiivtENDast OF ot
Inp1an Museum (Witha Map—Pl. XI.) ee Be Ah a

hes

XIX. —E'tude sur les Arachnides del Asie bapeee eae hy

partie des collections de Indian Museum (Calcutta).
MM. E. Stony, de Paris. Communicated es Tue So :
| -TENDENT or THE Ixpran Museu e. vee (SAO Se

ee: by Tux Hon’ BLE Maxexpratan Sinan, M. De "0. I

pena yury ¢ Woodonts) .. reer Manette
mY es
. a ¥
c Ley
Le fo
aks
: is :

CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. II.) OF THE

ve OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1886.

RENO. 1, (issued March 29th, 1886). On a Uredine affecting the
| Bitiayon Spruce-fir (Abies smithiana, Forbes).—By Surcron A. Bar-
- onay, M.B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates I, II., and II1.)
iy Bee on Indian Rhynchota, No. 5.—By EH. T. rea B.A. The
ne Hive- Bees indigenous to India and the Introduction of the Italian Bee.—
Me By J.C. Doveras. List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Tavoy
and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum Collector under C. E.
or Pirman, Esqg., C. I. E., Chief Superintendent of Telegraphs. Part I.
Heterocera. —By aeieticn Moor:, F.Z.8., A. L. 8. Communicated by
es Tas Naturat History Secrerary.

No. 2, (issued June 26th, 1886). A List of Butterflies taken in
‘ mR maon.— By WiuL1amM DoueERTY, Cincinnati, U.S. A. Communicated by
‘Tue Natura History Tur Secrerary. Ona second species of Uredine af-
fecting Abies smithiana, Forbes.—By Surczon A. Barctay, M. B., Bengal
A Medical Service (with Plates TV..anaV.). Notes on Indian Bhyaehats
No. 6.—Addenda and Index.—By E.T. Arxinson, B. A. On a new

> ee
es :

ar heel r. one 7 2 > 7 aa Oe 7 7 c -, ~

ee BONS fs oo te As "Py © ~ PPK a” 4 ya Oe ee ee ‘
are et in bt 4a) Kit Greet, oP ees > We. 2 . Py ves" ‘ < - or _
oo - 1 Sy a vd we ae ee aN si ee M a _. Ae :
> é ~ a b a. A _/ eo om ve” ~~
ey : is eet ae a Pe nae
ie ae ¢ tS ¥
ys cs

. "species of Uredine parasitic on Cedrus deodara, Loudon.—By Surcuon A.
aS e: ao 3ARCLAY, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates VI. and VII.).

5 ne oe:

On three new Himalayan Primulas.—By G. Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.
aoe te (With Plates VIII., IX., and X.). On the Life- Hin of cer-
tain Calcutta Species of Shtprina with special reference to the Seasonal
~ Dimorphism alleged to occur in them.— By LionrL pe Nice’vitxe, F. E.
ae (With Plate XII.)

No. 3, (issued October Ist, 1886). Indian Ants of the Indian Muse-
Se, Calcutta. No. 2.—By Proressor Avueusr Foren, Zurich. Com-
e Dic? -municated by Tue Narurat History Secrerary. On some New Indian
Butterflies—By Lionen ve Nice’vitte, F. HE. S. (With Plate XI.).
pe E Btdional Notes on new or rare Indian Butterflies.—By Witt1aAm Douer-
" me NY, Cincinnati, U.S. A. Communicated by the Natura, History Szcrs-

TARY. On two new species of Ilex from the Eastern Himalaya.—By

- Groce Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.8., Superintendent of the Royal

Botanic Garden, Oalouttd. (With Plates XIII. and XIV.). Insect
a - Pests belonging to the CL ai ae Salad Family Coccide.—By EH. T. Atx1nson,
i 'B. A.

¥

eos ee er ee ae
Se gt ane se Le
, be oS Nee ~%

ete g

Logs se
ot ee
ie 2

No. 4, (issued March 7th, 1887). The Landshells of Perak.—By
O. F. v. Méutenporrr, Pu. D, Communicated by Tun Natura History
Secretary. On Solar Thermometer Observations at Allahabad.—By S.

A. Hit, B. Sc., Meteorological Reporter to the Government N. W.
Provinces. On probable Changes in the Geography of the Punjab and
its Rivers : an Historico-Geographical Study.—By R. D. OLtpuam, A. R. S.-

M., Deputy Superintendent, Geological Survey of India. (With a Map

—Plate XIX.). List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Cachar by

Mr. J. Woop-Mason, Part II, Rhopalocera~—By J. Woop-Mason,

Officiating Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of —

Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College, Calcutta;

and L. pe Nice’viis, F. B. 8. (With Plates XV., XVI, XVID,
and XVIII.). On some new species of Ficus from New Guinea.—By

Grorce Kine, M.B., LL. D., F. L. 8., Superintendent Royal Botanic
Garden, Calcutta. Description of a new species of Phytophagous Coleoptera

alleged to be destructive to the Dhan Crops in the Chittagong District.— By —
Josnrpn S. Baty. Communicated by Tue Natura, History SECRETARY. —

No. 5, (issued Sept. Ist, 1887). List of the Lepidopterous Insects

collected in Tavoy and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum

Collector wnder C. S. Prrman, Hsq., C. I. E., Chief Superintendent of

Telegraghs, Part II, Rhopalocera.—By H. J. Eiwes, F. Z. 8., and L. pz

Nice'vittz, F. E. S. Communicated by Tur SuperintTENDENT OF THE

Inpisan Museum. (With Plate XX.). Tutle-page, Index, &c. to the
Volume. | ay

i ee eS ee

ee a a ee

gcc Th e's es ee Raed

—S wee tS ee ee

NEW SERIES. VOL.LVI. CCLXXXE.

JOURNAL

OF THE

_ ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Volk. yV ijsrart IT, No. 1V:.=18e7.

EDITED BY

JHE NaTuRAL ftisTORY SECRETARY.

ann oe eee

ae ReStELgy7 RAM OE MOTE 1A LS MBE Maher sea mean Be
pete PETTERS ETON TST ETETTS =e

<Sbepartatente

fi 34 9% WReENTLITE
oi : ! Bt
By ea
sage t=

eS
5 Alla
>

r

“The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and

) within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by
‘man or produced by nature.”—Sir Wittiam JonEs.

6 hee He) we QR
x
oe

re
4

ne *,* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,
to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon.
don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Co., 57 Sf 59, Ludgate Hill. j i

—— eee Ol eee ‘

CALCUTTA :

a : PRINTED By GF, iE, ROUSE, AT THE PAPTISF MMussIon PRESS,
AND PUBLISHED BY THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY, 57, PARK STREET,

1888.

ae
raat Wea

Price (exclusive of postage) to Subscribers, Re. 1—To Non-Subseribers Bs 1-8,

Bae aoa Price in England, 2 Shillings and sixpence,
r , Issued March | 19th, 1888.
a

hati oke fe sa Giessen. Bimatoye
_ M.B., Bengal Medical Service (With Plates 2
pe. 65) —WN atural ‘History Notes from H. M.’s Indi
Survey Steamer ‘ Investigator,’ Commander ALFRED:
ornr, RL N., Commanding, No. 8. Deseription of a new sy)
of the Brachyurous Genus Lyreidus from the Deptie
Andaman Sea—By J. ‘Woop-Mason, Esq, Superi
the Indian ne pet Bes “6 o sa

hs : - aid # Pr PT ee
* t i " oa ut ne
‘ ’ " se ee
t:, . = ‘i MPSA > .
Sy . Jo . if Vt
. ged 2 = a
7 re. ee
= = :
\ ‘
t
, >
ce
Ye
¢
‘
= =
€
,
~
é Oy

=> +. —
Peat bash

CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. 11.) OF THE

JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1886.

No. 1, (issued March 29th, 1886). On a Uredine affecting the

3 Himalayan Spruce-fir (Abies smithiana, Forbes).—By Sur@Eon A. Bar-
ouay, M.B., Bengal Medical Service.” (With Plates I., II., and III.)

Notes on Indian Rhynchota, No. 5.—By EH. T. Arxinson, B. A. The
Hive- Bees indigenous to India and the Introduction of the Italian Bee.—

By J.C. Doveras. List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Tavoy
and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum Collector under C. EB.

Pirman, Esq., C. I. E., Chief Superintendent of Telegraphs. Part I.
Heterocera.—By Freprrick Moors, F.Z.S., A. L.S. Communicated by
Tue NaturaL History SECRETARY, |

No. 2, (issued June 26th, 1886). A Inst of Butterflies taken in
Kumaon.— By Wiutam Douerty, Cincinnati, U.S.A. Communicated by

- Tun Natura History Secrmrary. On a second species of Uredine af-

fecting Abies smithiana, Forbes.—By Surczon A. Barcuay, M. B., Bengal
Medical Service (with Plates IV. and V.). Notes on Indian Rhynchota,

No. 6.—Addenda and Index.—By H.T. Atkinson, B. A. On a new
species of Uredine parasitic on Cedrus deodara, Loudon.—By Suraxon A.
_ Barcray, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates VI. and VII.).
On three new Himalayan Primulas—By G. Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.
_ §. (With Plates VIII, IX., and X.). On the Life-History of cer-

ee tain Calcutta Species of Satyrine, with special reference to the Seasonal
-_- Dimorphism alleged to occur in them.—By Lionen pve Nicr‘viwue, F. E.
_§. (With Plate XII.)

No. 3, (issued October Ist, 1886). Indian Ants of the Indian Muse-
um, Calcutta. No. 2.—By Prorsessor Avuaust Foren, Zurich. Com-

-—s municated by Tae Natura History Secretary. On some New Indian

Butterflies —By Lionen ve Nicwr’vitte, F. H. S. (With Plate XI.).
Additional Notes on new or rare Indian Butterflies—By Wiut1am Douer-
ty, Cincinnati, U. 8. A. Communicated by the Natura History SEcre-
TARY. On two new species of Ilex from the Eastern Himalaya.—By
Grorce Kine, M. B., LL.D., F. L.8., Superintendent of the Royal

Botanic Garden, Calcutta. (With Plates XIII. and XIV.). Insect

Pests belonging to the Homopterous Family Coccide.—By E. T. Atkinson,

eB. A. |

No. 4, (issued March 7th, 1887). The Landshells of Perak. —By

O. F. vy. Ménuenporrr, Pu. D, Communicated by Tur Narurat History —
Secretary. On Solar Thermometer Observations at Allahabad. —By
A. Hitt, B. Sc., Meteorological Reporter to the Government N. W.

Provinces. On probable Ohanges in the Geography of the Punjab onde
its Rivers : an Historico-Geographical Study.— By R. D. Oupuaw, A. R.
M., Deputy Superintendent, Geological Survey of India. (With Ben?
—Plate XIX.). List of the Lepidopterous Unsects collected in Uachar by
Mr. J. Woop-Mason, Part II, Rhopalocera—By J. Woopv-Masoy.
Officiating Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Frofessor of
Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College, Calcutt
and L. vu Nicn’vittz, F. HE. 8. (With Plates XV., XVI., XVI
and XVIII.). On some new species of Ficus from New Guinea.—
Grorce Kine, M.B., LL. D., F. L.S., Superintendent Royal Botan
Garden, Calcutta. Description of a new species of Phytophagous Coleoptera
alleged to be destructive to the Dhan Crops in the Chittagong District —By if
Josupn §. Baty. Communicated by Tue Naruran History SucRETARY.

No. 5, (issued Sept. Ist, 1887). List of the Lepidopterous Insee :
collected in Tavoy and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Musewm
Collector under CO. S. Pitman, Ksoq., C. 1. E., Chief Superintendent 0
‘Telegraghs, Part II, Rhopalocera.—By H. J. Euwss, F. Z. 8., and L. pp
Nice'yituz, F. E. S. Communicated by Tue SuPERINTENDENT OF THE ¥
Inp1an Museum. (With Plate XX.). Title-page, Index, Rx to a

Volume.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL.

Vol. LVI, Part II, No. V.—i887.

EDITED BY

JHE NaTuRAL fiisTORY SECRETARY.

~—

Toa Md ee

rereereer Tie oes
ae Te ee 3
= cH ney
Be:

>),
= STE AE aI Ae -
= LF == SSeS ——— = = ae aoe

<a
=== MUSEUM PA BIATIC. SOCIETY CALCU PTA™ aN, =

/ “The bounds of its investigation will be the geographical limits of Asia: and
within these limits its inquiries will be extended to whatever is performed by
man or produced by nature.”’—Sir WILLIAM JONES.

*,.* Communications should be sent under cover to the Secretaries, Asiat. Soc.,
to whom all orders for the work are to be addressed in India; or, in Lon-
don, care of Messrs. Triibner and Co., 57 gs 59, Ludgate Hill.

—_—a—o~-aeersees> eee se le ee_eeeereereeeesS>s rm”

CALCUTTA:

PRINTED By fF, fi. Rouse, AT THE PaPTisy MIssron PREsS,
AND PUBLISHED BY THE

PSIATIC SOCIETY, 5j, FARK STREET.

1888.

pssst Tam pace ees EOC WRT _ SETS
a eee Fe SE ee pote SETS eae
Bir i < \ i Lenn
if a te aia WU HE AL Al {
i ‘an Ge WM nati : i\ ! ie vi
ay ci A u es Heer 0 su
i : (=). Ties (iba nt — oy ae 1 a &
PA irc lt lhe me Wi , Re ise
a ee lESanht ft: BS hi RE Whe th Tite TM fi SH | he ae
PT 4; ;
p10 Ue
1) \) fet
ry ; =
udvenn j (ADA.
. aatet 4!

_ Price (exciusive of postagc) to Subscribers. Re. 1.—To Non-Subscribers Rs. 1-8
x ; Price in England, 2 Shillings and sixpence

Issued Oct. 30th, 1888.

CONTENTS

OF THE NATURAL HISTORY PART (PT. I.) OF THE

JOURNAL OF THE ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL FOR 1886.

No. 1, (issued March 29th, 1886). On a Uredine affecting the
Rucioyan Spruce-fir (Abies smithiana, Forbes). —By Sureron A. Bar-
cLAy, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates I., II., and III.)
Notes on Indian Rhynchota, No. 5.—By HE. T. Arxinsoy, B. A. The
Hive-Bees indigenous to India and the Introduction of the Italian Bee.—
By J. C. Dougras. List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Tavoy
and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indiaw Museum Collector under C. E.
Pirman, Esq, C. I. E., Chief Superintendent of Telegraphs. Part I.
Heterocera.— By Fruprrick Moors, F. Z.8., A. L. 8S. Communicated by
Tae Narurat History SECRETARY.

No. 2, (issued June 26th, 1886). A List of Butterflies taken in
— Kumaon.— By Wititam Donerty, Cincinnati, U. S. A. Communicated by
Tae Nartourat History Secretary. On a second species of Uredine af-
fecting Abies smithiana, Forbes.—By Surcron A. Barcray, M. B., Bengal
Medical. Service (with Plates IV.and V.). Notes on Indian Rhynchota,
No. 6.—Addenda and Index.—By H. T. Arxinson, B. A. On a new
species of Uredine parasitic on Cedrus deodara, London.—By Sureron A.
~Barcuay, M. B., Bengal Medical Service. (With Plates VI. and VII.)
On three new Himalayan Primulas.—By G. Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L.
8S. (With Plates VIII, IX., and X.). On the Life-History of cer-
tain Caleutta Species of Satyrine with special reference to the Seasonal
Dimorphism alleged to occur in them.—By Lione. ve Nicz'viniz, F. EB.

S. (With Plate XII.)
No. 3, (issued October Ist, 1886). Indian Ants of the Indian Muse-
um, Calcutta. No. 2.—By Prorusson Avcust Foret, Zurich. Com-
municated by Tur Naturat History Secretary. On some new Indian
Butterflies —By Lionen ve Nice’vituz, F. E. 8. (With Plate XI.).
Additional Notes on new or rare Indian Butterflies—By Witutam Doner-

ae os ty, Cincinnati, U.S.A. Communicated by the Naturat History Secre-
_—-TaRyY. On two new species of Lex from the Hastern Himalaya.—By

Gzorce Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L. S., Superintendent of the Royal
Botanic Garden, Calcuita. (With Plates XIII. and XIV.). Insect
Pests belonging to the Homopterous Family Coccide.—By EH. T. ATKinson,
B. A.

No. 4, (issuéd March 7th, 1887). The Landshells of Perak.—By 4
O. F. v. Monienporrr, Px. D Oommunicated by Tur Narurat History
Secretary. On Solar Thermometer Observations at Allahabad.—By S.
A. Hitt, B. Sc., Meteorological Reporter to the Government N. W.
Provinces. On probable Chanyes in the Geography of the Punjab and
its Rivers: an Historico-Geographical Study.—By R. D. Oupnam, A. RS.
M, Deputy Superintendent, Geographical Survey of India. (With a Map
—Plate XIX.). List of the Lepidopterous Insects collected in Cachar by
Mr J. Woop-Mason, Part Il, Rhopalocera.—By J. Woop-Mason, —
Officiating Superintendent of the Indian Museum, and Professor of.
Comparative Anatomy and Zoology in the Medical College, Calcut oo
and L. ve Nice'vitts, F. 8. S. (With Plates XV., XVI, XVI,
and XVIII.). On some new species of Ficus from New Guinea.—By :
Georce Kine, M. B., LL. D., F. L. S, Superintendent Royal Botanie
Garden, Calcutta. Description of a new species of Phytophagous Coleoptera
alleged to be destructive to the Dhan Crops in the Chittagong District.— By
Joseen S. Baty. Communicated by Toe Narurat Hisrory Secretary.

No. 5, (issued Sept. Ist, 1837). List of the Lepidopterous Insects
collected in Tavoy and in Siam during 1884-85 by the Indian Museum —
Oollector under C. S. Pirman, Esq., C. I. E., Chief Superintendent of
Telegraphs, Part 11, Rhopalocera.—By H. J. Euwus, F. Z. S., and L. pp |
Nice'vitte, F. EK. S. Communicated by Tue SuperinrenpENT OF THB
Inpian Museum, (With Plate XX.). Title-page, Index, &c. to the

Volume.

* ~ -
See & oS eee oy

FOI POS nd) |

Se

TS cee ee

ae ee a ee ae

: Ais
PR eS P

s

. “~ ~>

‘ » ie
=~ i= 6 -4:0-3 ee
. © s ee es

.
- -*

‘ ~ s . = . * « . ee ee ee

oes 4?

v7?

i»

?
el

ose en aewes €@86 4
“eer eoweeeoee @ ee wm

* . . * © -

4539

|

®
we aeee

eh
~~

3 1853 10006

|

CALIF ACAD OF nT LIBRARY

. 7
fe re-F ee * 6
— £ > >-.-s ?
** & + ee eee s * @
mses b> > &
» . es -;*e2 s &
ee >» Pn a os
y 7 * . B®
se. > & > es
or vee **
o> €ese ok &
eese#te?ew»rs
eee Serr rrevrre: + Fs
es*epresh > & ®-) & fF 2 2
eer eaeerer eer er eer ee > &
“te -ee weer «es 2 PO e
. serfFfetetnovere s &
rr epekRes ee es 2-2- & a
5 Pr? oe hh Fe * @ Ff B
s oo & © 8 AAR A 74
® + *®-? =a °
: oe ep wee ee eek ©
es Lenrerenr pr + eee &
ee -s+erers? «+ ee? ~~
> * e >wye &> eS > & > fe
ee es 3 per? s Oo
ona Me eo te seer ni eS
ye St ee. ® © @ @e ee ef 2. bd
* $ ° + or reercrr er & +S 8
»2.e eee *
st Saor> >

~rerrer ee & ’ . a P
SFr a & O 2 ef ee ee Pe. a
.

se @

e 2 © 8
o-@-8-) 9-6

ea ** oe > »
Se, ° » *

r stove err’ >) 2 @ &
9-8 6 € oe - ss

. ¢ * a a
7 e :* 2 .

e -_* *F > &

. es

ss ses :

b
eerte
os

7
?

, >»
se * te © ee
a a _'"
sc me @& oer Ff

a
AP
eo 0 6.0 .e 2.
. 2 ’
.* © eee 2
ao as
’ a s'e'e* eo"
+e . ©
ref .
2-2 -*
¢ e-e-¢ e-8
* « : s
2 * ;
--~4-e@-6 a ov et wreer ss > &
>) > SP & ? 2-O 2 f
ee ¢ f

”
7
:
7
‘9

‘ * . e&eP s
2 P ‘ +h ee
s-a * — >» -?.,;?-©* 2
a -e-8 . - 2s > 2
es > 2 9) 3
. a+. eo . erste ve
9 . a-) 2 2 2 2? es
6-0-6 =e es © 8s © ee
> ° ees err & er eS
an 4 e 2 eeteerprs t & eo
ae e+e 4 @° 2e 8 © e-? 2 &
e+ 8 @ ee ’ > © ot © £ os fe &
oe? ¢' 6 7 > © 7 * + ve
eo P ->oer ere * +
s Cr . err? +) +S 2 2 2 8
a -Se-g 6-6 ‘sere > 2 @ 2 2?
e-@ 2-2 &°-4-@ * ese? 2 2} 9-2 >
s*aeeeee +e > ess + > oS ff
. ’ ee ee Be AA AAA; 2.) 2 8
oe * >; » +
ewe . Le "> ee ,
o> @ @ . “ef? * = 2 - fF , = Fs
° —— -_*e. ee ee oe a of
e. 2 8 #2 ee > we fe * es ? &
oe @ > «-s > 2 © , -2 fee
ee , . . * +o & 2 & 6-9 fo * ©
aa 2 o—+.-» es ane are eof 8 ? @ ee oo 2
ce Rtas . » + Y r ros > fF
es : ? -
. e 9 ¢
» se?
ee 2 - + fF,
i AR $,*,°
e-* © , ,
‘ ea rs
e .* *
- , Sod
‘. Fons
oo-s #9 . » a 5
as

ee?
Co

-
“ert eerkee & & @& © ¢
oe oP wee eS

:

+i
.

elle

:

(ii

ie

il

GON RULE CO.

TLL UL CELIA LAUD LEAD CEU CAAPCGUAGUUNOVANAVONAy 0nd yNayveuyvavevavovanevayeeusecasecerseasec

OREGON RULE Co.